+] 


AY 
ψ 


τ 
st tarpen ty 


err 


2 


Ἢ ὕ 
SF Th κἠδης 
Naat 

ele 


On 
is 


eo BA 
Δ kOe ea 
ue ASE 
ἊΝ f 

ΝΣ - 


Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2008 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation 


http://www. archive.org/details/grammarofgreekla0Ocurtrich 


ΤΣ 10, rey AS ose »ιὐ iene” 


; SENS Ψ ΤΙΝ 
THE Greg δέει naman 


| ΞΘ raeek 
A GRAMMAR 


OF THE 


GREEK LANGUAGE. 


Br DR. GEORGE CURTIUS, 


PROFESSOR IN THE UNIVERSITY OF LEIPZIG. 


TRANSLATED UNDER THE REVISION OF THE AUTHOR. 


EDITED 


By WILLIAM SMITH, LL.D., 


OLASSICAL EXAMINER IN TIE UNIVERSITY OF LONDON, AND EDITOR OF THE CLASSICAL 
AND LATIN DICTIONARIES. 


For τ Agree LEG Hicu - Scuoots. 
UNIVERGTY 
esscan' 7 


NEW YORK: 
HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 
FRANKLIN SQUARE, 


85 


Ἢ 
4 
: 


es ee 


aie 
ΡΥ eel ΟἹ 


EDITOR’S PREFACE. 


Tue Greek Grammar of Dg. Curtius is acknowledged 
by the most competent scholars, both in this country and 
in Germany, to be the best representative of the present 
advanced state of Greek scholarship. It is, indeed, almost 
the only Grammar which exhibits the inflexions of the lan- 
guage in a really scientific form; while its extensive use 
in the schools of Germany, and the high commendations 
it has received from practical teachers in that country, are 
sufficient proof of its excellence as a school-book. It is 
surprising to find that many of the public and private 
schools in this country continue to use Grammars which 
ignore all the improvements and discoveries of modern 
philology, and still cling to the division of*the substantives 
into ten declensions, the designation of the Second Perfect 
as the Perfect Middle, and similar exploded errors. Dr. 
Curtius has stated so fully in his Preface the principles on 
which this Grammar is constructed, that it is unnecessary 
to say more by way of introduction. It only remains to 
add that the translation has been made from the fifth edi- 
tion of the original work (1862), with the author’s sanction, 
and that the proof-sheets have enjoyed the advantage of 
his final correction and revision. 

An abridgment for the use of the lower forms is pub- 
lished simultaneously with the present work. 


Wack: 
Lonpon, March, 1863. 


FROM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 


Tue fact that within a few years the present Grammar 
has found its way into a large number of schools in various 
countries of Europe seems to me a satisfactory answer to 
the question whether a thorough knowledge of Greek is 
attainable by the method-I have adopted. » Much, there- 
fore, of what I thought it necessary to state on the first 
appearance of the book does not now require to be repeat- 
ed; but I consider it incumbent upon me to make some 
observations upon the objects and the use of the Grammar, 
and I beg to recommend these to the careful consideration 
of teachers. 

Few sciences have within the last half οὐναμννε been so 
completely reformed as the science of language. .. Not only 
has our insight into the natute-and history of human speech 
been greatly advanced, but—and this is justly regarded as 
a matter of still greater importance — quite a different 
method in treating language in. general-has been discoy- 
ered, after a new era had been opened up by the philo- 
sophical inquiries of William von Humboldt, and the his- 
torical investigations of Francis-Bopp and Jacob Grimm. 
No one, ὑέος he desires to exclude schools from the prog- 
ress thus made, and to-confine them to the mechanical 
repetition of imperfect and antiquated rules, will probably 
doubt that the new knowledge, the principles of which 
haye stood the test of nearly half a. century, ought to exer- 
cise its influence on the teaching of language. : 

if the teaching of a habe: in our schools is intended 


vi PREFACE. 


to lead not only to a thorough understanding of the mas- 
ter-works of literature, but at the same time to cultivate 
and stir up the. youthful mind by independent exertion, 
and by occupation with a subject so immensely rich, and so 
harmoniously quickening the most different mental powers 
as language, such teaching can not possibly continue to 
~ keep aloof from the progress of scientific inquiry, which is, 
᾿ς unfortunately, still the case in many places. The teaching 
of Greek, however, seems to be specially called upon to 
make a commencement. ‘The modern science of language 
_ has, indeed, exercised its influence on every part of gram- 
mar, but none has been more affected by it than ied first, 
commonly called the accidence. In Latin, scientific in- 
quiry into the structure of the forms has not yet reached 
the same completeness as in Greek. ‘The structure of the 
Latin language is less transparent, and we miss so many 
aids which we possess for the Greek in the high antiquity 
of its literature and in its dialects. A scientific treatment 
of the structure of the Latin language in schools is, more- 
over, a matter of great practical difficulty, on account of 
the early age at which the elements must necessarily be 
learned. We ought not, however, on this account, to sep- 
arate the teaching of Latin from all contact with scientific 
inquiry, the influence of which can show itself with advan- 
tage, at least, in a more suitable arrangement and distribu- 
tion of the matter. Granting, therefore, that our boys, as 
heretofore, must commit to memory a large portion of Latin 
forms; granting that the most important object in learning 
Latin consists, perhaps, more in the acquisition of fixed 
laws of syntax, which obviously form the principal strength 
of the Latin language, the case of the Greek is different. 
“The Greeks are justly called an artistic people, and the 
Greek language is the most ancient work of art which they 


PREFACE. vil 


have reared upon a very primitive basis. The student, 
who approaches the Greek after° he has already gone 
through a considerable preparation by the study of Latin, 
ought to be impressed with the idea that the structure of 
this language is one of the most marvelous productions of 
the intellectual powers. acting unconsciously. Every thing 
lies here clear before us: the sources of our knowledge are 
more varied, and the necessity of analyzing the given forms. 
is rendered so absolute, even on account of.the Homeric 
dialect, that this analysis has, in. fact, never been entirely 
wanting, and after the first appearance of Buttmann, in 
1782, made considerable progress. The attempt, therefore, 
to connect in a still higher degree the practice of the school 
with the spirit of science, can here point to numerous 
precedents; and it is, no doubt, mainly owing to this cir- 
cumstance that it has met with so favorable a reception. 
My object has been to produce a consistent system, a care- 
ful selection, and a clear and precise RDO AOE rather 
than an entirely new system. 

In selecting and expounding the results of scientific in- 
quiry, I have always kept in view the idea that the book 
was intended for practical use in schools. ὙΠῸ first requi- 
site, therefore, was not to admit any thing which is beyond 
the sphere of the school, to explain only that which is nec- 
essary, and to admit-only that which is ‘absolutely certain ; 
for a school-book must speak categorically, must exclude 
all matters of mere opinion, and has no space for discussion 
and inquiry. It is, however, perfectly indifferent whether 
a result has been obtained by special researches into the 
Greek language or by the more general i apices of com- 
parative philology. 

I was farther obliged to admit only those things which 
find their explanation in the Greek language itself, or at 


Vili PREFACE. 


most in a comparison with the Latin; but even within 
these limits I have confined myself to such innovations as 
really afford an important insight into the structure of the 
forms, whereas all that belongs to philological learning and 
many other things have been passed over because they 
seemed unnecessary. Among such superfluous innovations 
I include especially all changes of terminology, and the 
entire alteration of whole parts of grammar which are often 
still less necessary, but to which formerly too much impor- 
tance used to be attached. 

__ The new technical:terms, I have introduced have gen- 
erally been approved of, and the principle stated in my 
Preface to the first edition, though not followed with pe- 
dantic consistency, “if possible, to put significant names in 
the place of dead numbers,” as, for: 6. g., A. Declension, O 
Declension, instead of First and Second. Declension, will 
scarcely be found fault with, for a name with a meaning at 
once gives a piece of information, and therefore facilitates 
learning: Doubts have been raised only about the expres- 
sions strong and weak, which I have employed to distin- 
guish the two Aorists and Perfects. I am as well aware 
now as I was at the first that, from the point of view of 
scientific inquiry, much may be said against the expressions, 
but I nevertheless feel that I can not give them up. For 
the old designation by numbers is unsatisfactory, unless 
we are prepared for its sake either to sacrifice a more con- 
sistent: arrangement of the verb, or to mislead the pupil by 
calling the Aorist which is treated of first the second, and 
first the one with which he is made acquainted afterward. 
Buta common name to distinguish the two forms of the 
Aorist Active Middle and Passive, and of the Perfect 
Active, is indispensable in a system of Greek Grammar. 
An innovation had here become necessary, for both neg- 


ative and positive reasons. 
weak have this advantage—that, after being introduced by 
Grimm into his German Grammar, they have also been 
adopted by English grammarians; and, though I use them 
not quite in the same sense, they are easily intelligible. 
It will surely not be difficult to make a pupil understand 
that those forms are called strong which spring from the 
root, as it were, by an internal agency, and weak. those 
which are formed by syllables added externally, especially 
as he may easily compare the English take, took, and love, 
loved. I still know of no designation which, with so few. 
disadvantages, offers so many advantages as this, and I shall 
retain it until a better one is suggested; and, after all, in 
necessary innovations, it is often more important ¢iat men 
agree than on what they agree. 

The fact that the most essential changes I have made in 
the arrangements of the subjects—as, for example, the strict 
adherence to the system of Stems in all the inflexions, and 
especially the division of the verb according to temporal 
Stems—have met with the approval of practical teachers, 
has been to me a source of great gratification, it being a 
clear proof that the demands of scientific inquiry are by no 
means so much opposed to a right system of teaching as 
is still imagined by many. The arrangement of temporal 
Stems is made less: upon scientific than upon didactic 
grounds, in such a manner that kindred forms are joined 
together, and due regard is paid to the progress from that 
which is easy to that which is more difficult. 

The chapter on the formation of words, though somewhat 
enlarged, has, for the same reasons, still been kept very brief. 
But, in treating of the verbs, I have directed attention to 
the formation of verbal nouns: in treating of the verbs of 
the different classes, I have always directed attention, by a 

1* 


ee : PREFACE. 


number of characteristic examples, to the application of the 
different Stems in the formation of words. By this means 
the learner has an opportunity, during the study of his 
grammar, of making himself acquainted with a number of 
words, and I have no doubt that teachers will give their 
sanction to this arrangement. 

In regard to Syntax, the positive results of recent lin- 
guistic inquiries are as yet less numerous. In this part of 
the Grammar, therefore, I follow the principle of stating 
the essential idioms of the Greek language with the utmost 
possible precision and in the utmost logical order. Only 
in some chapters, especially in that on the use of the tenses, 
does my system present considerable differences from the 
usual one. All minute disquisitions, conjectures, and more 
or less probable theories—among them especially the ever- 
repeated theory about the original local meaning of the 
cases, with which I can not agree at all—have‘been rigor- 
ously excluded. In this part, also, I have never neglected 
to compare the phenomena of the Greek language with the 
corresponding ones of Latin, and occasionally also of En- 
glish, where this could be done with brevity and advan- 
tage; for as the usage of a language must be mainly com- 
prehended by a feeling of language, I imagine that every 
appeal to a Latin usage already embodied with our feeling 
of language, or to an English usage familiar to us from 
childhood, advances our knowledge much more than philo- 
sophical definitions or technical terms of vague or various 
_ meanings. Jor the same reason,I every where attach 
great importance to an accurate translation of a Greek 
idiom into English or Latin. I need hardly guard myself 
against the opinion that I considered such a translation to 
be a philosophical explanation of a linguistic phenomenon. 
A real explanation is beyond the problem of a Grammar. 


. PREFACE. xi 


I scarcely need repeat here that the present book is not 
intended, like an Elementary Grammar, to be committed 
to memory paragraph by paragraph; but, in teaching, a 
suitable selection, according to the degree of the pupil’s 
advancement, should be made by the teacher. By a dif- 
ference in type I have myself, at least partially, indicated 
this. 

It may be remarked in general that the first business 
every where is that of memory, and only when the actual 
forms, with the aid of the paradigms, have been committed 
to memory, analysis may be added. First knowledge, then 
understanding: this ought to be the leading principle; 
but, as I have said in another place, “‘ Memory can neither 
accurately grasp the great variety of Greek forms nor re- 
tain them, unless it be supported by an analyzing and com- 
bining intelligence, which furnishes, as it were, the hooks 
and cement to strengthen that which has been learned, 
and permanently to impress it upon the mind.” If details 
learned at different times and carefully committed to mem- 
ory, during a subsequent repetition variously combine with 
one another and form various groups; if, then, many things, 
at first sight strange, appear to the pupil in the light of a 
law pervading the language, such insight is certainly not a 
mere support of memory, but animates the desire to learn, 
and incites to exercise the power of thought in a variety 
of ways. The present book offers to teachers abundant 
opportunities for such exercises, and acquires its highest 
efficacy under the guidance of thinking teachers who are 
truly familiar with it, and take a delight in its subjects. 
That the book has actually found such teachers has been 
proved to me in various ways, and caused me sincere grat- 
ification. , α. Ο. 


-Ὁ 


‘TABLE OF CONTENTS 


INTRODUCTION. 


THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 


FIRST PART.—ETYMOLOGY. 


I. Letters and Sounds. 


CHAPTER I. ‘ 
THE GREEK CHARACTERS. 
πο A ote ea ut ἀν σα αὶ το πε ροσο δες § 1-9 
werner Cnatactera. | eo oe eres bo dares 10-16 
meas Oe a ie net IN SC ee a 28 oe 17-22 
Wes Wits ροὃοὸὺ a en a ai a ee 23 


CHAPTER II. 
THE SOUNDS. 


CHAPTER III. 
COMBINATIONS AND CHANGES OF SOUNDS. 


Vowels. ni Commmtien. τον τον ἐὸν et 30-39 

B. Other kinds of Vowel Changes .............--.-.------- 40-43 

C. Consonants in Combination with one another _........--- 44-54 

D. Other Changes in the Middle of a Word.......---------- 55-62 

E. Changes of Sound at the End of a Word ..-.- | a mee 63-69 
CHAPTER IV. 

DIVISION OF SYLLABLES AND THEIR QUANTITY. 

aac aE WiStORD OF Pig linintes’ τ που re ce oaks 70-73 

ΕΣ πεν, eae πο συ τὸ ie Pit /a > Pee alae νονν 74-78 
CHAPTER V. 


xiv: CONTENTS. 


II. Inflexion. — 
A. INFLEXION oF Nouns AND PRONOUNS. 


CHAPTER VI. 
DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES. 
First PRINCIPAL (OR VOWEL) DECLENSION. 


a ihe A Dociongion , - τ ese ye § 112-113 
(commonly called the First Declension.) 

OO RR eee a Ne τς, A, enlace τ νι ον ce le 114-119 

MN se ee Pate ae ON ae 120-123 
ΘΠ Ὁ ΘΟ ΘΜ ΒΊΟΝ. oes deg eee eee ie elit 124-131 © 

(commonly called the Second Declension.) : 
mone Declepsion το ἐν σου ek ees 132-133 
SECOND PRINCIPAL (OR CONSONANT) DECLENSION ......--- 135-143 


(commonly called the Third Declension.) 
1. Consonant Stems: 


a. Guttural.and Labial Stems ... ....2. 02.0. ...022- 144-145 

D: Tien tat Βιρονλαιτιςς ey ek ie sais 146-149 

δ᾽ Taig μηδ δεν οὐ δον ee τ νὸς ey 150-153 
2. Vowel Stems: 

a. Bol Vowel Bbemas 225s ες See Ae 154-158 

b. Diphthong Stems: .: o.oo ae pees ees 159-161 

pt) Stems oo... eee OS ee ae ee eee 162-163 
3. Stems suffering Elision: 

ANS Oe a sss ee eae 164-167 

SD. ERIE ko hide needa e Rs Cis oe caer eee 168-169 

RS geIR. eS ns gh, τα ee Ἐν στ. ὦ τα 170-171 
Irregularities in Declension.........-...-------------- 174-177 
Case-like Terminations .......0.-.--.--------- pe: 178-179 


CHAPTER VII. 
OTHER INFLEXIONS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 


A. Gender .....-- Flee Ce τὰ δ. 180-191 

Pe οματδθη." το το οδοορστ δ τυξι πο τὰν 192-200 

©. paverbe of Adjectives, * ass oe De Se See 201-204 
CHAPTER VIII. 


INFLEXION OF PRONOUNS ....-..--.- 205-219 


CHAPTER IX. 
THE "NUMERALS. ....-.....---c0 220-224 


CONTENTS. XV 


B. INFLEXION OF VERBS. 


General Rematka iad. 95 0 acc τ ΠΣ Seg des § 225-230 
LIST OF PARADIGMS Table 
Bid QM. 6 nus cpapransan ga cnedananse ke dan cs τος > sd 1, 
Synopsis of λύω, Iloose (exhibiting the meanings ofthe Tenses) _ II. 
VERBS IN Q. . 
A. Vowel Stems: 
1, Uncontractéd, hie. 65 νυν ke oie eueon etek es PP RaEe ἘΞ, 
2. Contracted, τιμάω, row, dovldw...-.------------- IV. 
B. Consonant Stems : 
1. Guttural Stems, πλέκω, φεύγω, τάσσω ....---------- V. 
2. Dental Stems, ψεύδομαι, πείθω, κομίζω .....-------- VI. 
3. Labial Stems, πέμπω, λείπω, καλύπτω.. ------οςςςος VIL. 
4, Liquid Stems, déow, ἀγγέλλω, σπείρω ...----------- VI. 
| VERBS IN MI. 
First Class, riOnyu, δίδωμι, tornue ....-------- 2-22 eee ees ΙΧ, 
ϑεθοσνν ϑανοείκ νυ μές τονε. a eee eee ἐξ νιν eee xX. 


CHAPTER X. 
FIRST PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN Q. 


L The Present-Stem : : 
A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem ..........-..:-.. ὃ 231-233 


ae Ce ANOTROOG os. cows cers apo os = eR a eae 234-242 
Contracted. Verbs "τ 2392s: £5 Στ, ον 243-244 

D. Distinction of the Present-Stem from the Verbal 
ho SH awe CORES Coed dma x en cae e eae 245-253 
Pe ene Pirong -Aorist-Stemis 7 5. ot oe. 5. oe nc danas 254-257 
II. The Future-Stem.........--.--.-- RS A δος See 258-266 
me tne Weak Aorat-Btem. oso oe τ τ ee enc a sees - 267-271 
ii} lie: Poriec’ tents yt Coe πο oc nw once ce 272 
᾿ς OPtGOG: Meme ne oe i rely aa hatin 276-282 
2 -Plunerioct Atv Ginn peraiine sep eens πλοῦ 283 
8. Perfect Middle and Passive -.....-...+.-...---- 284-289 
4, Pluperfect Middle and Passive .......-..--.-.-- 290-291 
VI. Forms of the Strong Passive Stem .....------------- 292-295 
VII. Forms of the Weak Passive Stem....-..-..-.--. i“ -- 296-299 
ΒΕ Actiephived το ταν ον ον τος τ νων 300 


Verbs which leave their Stem-Vowel short .......-.---- 301 


XVi CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER ΧΙ. : 

SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN MI. 
παν SDT Ve ot Se ae, oR RR § 302-804 
Th TRY BES il a ai aie aa PSPS a ee Ὁ ὙΠῸ ἀπετν πιάτο ὌΝ Ο 305-317 
RSOIEC EC TRUS os ra eee ae nee Ne oe Te 318-319 

CHAPTER XII. 
IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION . 320-327 | 
Anomalies in Signification- << = 222522252. το οτος τς; 328-330 
Outlines of the Accentuation of Verbal Forms ....._....-- 331-333 


Peculiar Verbal Forms of the Ionic Dialect.........- 334 D—338 Ὁ. 


III. Derivation. 
CHAPTER XIII. 


πο λυ ἐδ πον δον, ον owe 339-340 
1. The most important Suffixes for forming Substan- 

nee a τς a toa POR whic eens 341-349 

2. The most important Suffixes for forming Adjectives. . 350-352 

DOV RIANO WOMENS ona cds ns ccuke dp acneneree 303 

B. Compound Derivatives : BN FL 

1. Form of the Combination ...........25.--2.---.-- 354-358 


2. Meaning of Combination... __- EE EE SNOT 359-360 


SECOND PART.—SYNTAX. 


την OCINATES: 5.1. o cea teat Ee ee ted 361 
CHAPTER XIV. 

NUMBER ‘AND SUNDER ooo 362-367 
CHAPTER XV. 

THE ARTICLE Ὁ... chee te ve 368-391 

᾿ CHAPTER XVI. 

ν USE OF CASES: ' 
δυο ηκηγοι... ς ταν . a ce ς-- 392-893 
MP RG 5 ρος, at earn eee σοι a . 894 
εν τ nists, vip ad vk hate Glow cine vce Si we 395-406 
LU. EEE) EC, epee ei sh Apr teh ee CAS AATEC ERT Bi oe Aa 407-428 


ἘΠ κεῖνο: "τς: τ ἘΠ TY ees Ss ie eee 429-443 


CONTENTS, xvii 


CHAPTER XVII. 


THE PREPOSPTIONS ........-..-.- § 444 
General View of the Prepositions -....-....-.---.- a Sas . 448 
1. Prepositions which take only One Case..........--..-- 449-457 
2. Prepositions which take Two Cases .-.....----.----.-- 458-461 
3. Prepositions which take Three Cases ...-.......-.-..-- 462-468 
CHAPTER XVIII. 
TH: PRONOUNG) οι ρυμν ως κων» 469-475 
CHAPTER XIX. 
THE KINDS OF VERBS...........-. 476-483 
CHAPTER XX. 
USE OF THE TENSES _...........- 484 - 
1. The forms for the Incomplete Action.............-..-- 486-491 
2. The forms for the Indefinite (Aorist) Action............ 492-498 
που σι ρος Ἰοο ἀφοῦ Catena δα ΡῈ 499-501 
4, The forms for the Complete Action. ...............---- 502-506 


CHAPTER XXI. - 
USE OF THE MOODS. 
A. In Simple Sentences : 


1, Indicative... ..:... at EERE: lin ee es 507 
@: Baljunetive 45). lage ver oars tae eae hase 508-513 
By Optatine ΡΥ eae SO Soe eck 514-517 
Re Venera δ, τὰν Mee τος ons dees ραν εις 518 
B. In Compound Sentences : | Ἷ 
Connexion of Sentences with one another...........- 519-524 
1. Dependent, Declarative, aud Interrogative Sentences 525-529 
2. Sentences expressing a purpose..........----.---- 530-533 
3.. Conditional Sentences... 2.2. .222-t 2-2-2222. -e ee 534-550 
4° Relative Sentences sou cn oo) Ὁ escent nce cd 551-555 
5; Temporal απο, τ΄ ἧς τὺ τ ees enact 556-558 


CHAPTER XXII. 
THE INFINITIVE. 


1; Use of the-Infinitive in-general .....222-.22-..-------- 559-566 
2. The Case of the Subject and Predicate with the Infinitive 567-572 
3. The Infinitive with the Article ...........5...-.------ 573-574 
me The Iniitaeine- wittr dar. || be τ τεῖος τ ctec esl... 575-576 


XVili CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER. XXIII. 


ON PARTICIPLES. 


τ πο AGG ro og rsp sp ROG ae eae bo kab teow § 578 
PP MOONIIVO 1188.:-- cwesebe yt oP Se 579-583 
3. The Participle with an Absolute Case............----- 584-586 
4, Suppiements to Participles—.- 2. os Soi es το 587-588 
B. ene Predicative Participle.-2. ον. τ το -o.-- 8-02 589-594 
rere ΗΟ ΘΠ ἢ ἄν. το ες ςτὸ τ τὸν 595 
POMEL PACOIMA CESS ni oe eno ducacduanistenwc tunes 596 


CHAPTER XXIV. 
SOME PECULIARITIES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES... 597-605 


CHAPTER XXV. 
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES .....----- 606-611 


CHAPTER XXVI. 
THE NEGATIVES. 


1; Use-of Simple Nepativess so eee ae νέος 612-618 — 
2. weveral Negatives combined ἘΠ 2.20 ote te 619-621 
pamome Negative: Phrases ρους ἐν τε eek oo cat 622 


CHAPTER XXVII. 


THE PARTICLES. 


πο πη ρήβο τὰ he Oe SA A oe ἐν ea ats ἐνὶ 623 

1: Copulative Conjunctions- _---....2.2.-2.-.-2..-- 624-625 

2. Disjunctive Be he ee als © eee eet fe ee a 626-627 

eee ereat yey StS a Se ae ee a) Oe 628-630 

4. Comparative esse gar ace Se seen ποι Ὁ ae ake 631-632 

~5. Declarative τὸ ΣΡ cia ee ee 633 

6. Temporal bee Va τὶ Rig ean τος δι τ δος ἐν μν γτ 634-635 

7. Causal ee On es Ra oe ae 636 

8. Inferential παν εν τὰ eee egephtpeiyiiy ees Be 637 

9. Final Ce pee iS Sh oe τ 638 

10. Hypothetical ie NMRA ea Te OPT ee eae he ee 639 

11. Concessive BAS A OI a ee σε, το ee τς 640 
ὌΠ ΔΙ Particles 2.2... 25 ci ΞΟ ΚΑ, τς Seubicivinidn' sm 641-643 . 

Page 

ENGLISH INDEX. ..---- 2-2-2222 reese rere cee e entero 353 


GEEEK INDEX: [2c ce Ὁ γον See eee eee ~ 857 


“THE 


STUDENT’S GREEK GRAMMAR. 


INTRODUCTION. 


THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 


Tue Greek language is the language of the Ancient 
Hellenes- (Ἕλληνες), the inhabitants of Greece, with all 
its islands and numerous colonies. It is related to the 
languages of the Indians, Persians, Romans, Slavonians, 
Lithuanians, Germans, and Celts. These are all sister- 
languages, and together form the Indo-European family. 

The Greeks were early divided into races, each of which 
spoke a different dialect. The chief dialects of the Greek 
language are the Aéolic, Doric, and Tonic. At first each 
race employed its own dialect both in poetry and in prose. 

1. The Ionic dialect was spoken by the Ionic race, es- 
pecially 1 in Asia Minor and Attica, in numerous islands, 
and in the Ionic colonies. It was the first of the dialects 
developed by poetry, and produced three different but 
nearly related dialects, viz. 

a) The Old-Lonic or Epie dialect, which is pet ae 
in the poems of Homer and Hesiod as well as of their fol- 
lowers. 

ὁ) The New-Lonic inieat, which we know chiefly from 
the history of Herodotus. 

Obs.—The Old and New Ionic dialects are also designated by the 

common name Jonic, as distingtished from the Attic. 

6) The Atte dialect, in which are written the numerous 
works in poetry and prose produced at Athens in the time 


2 | INTRODUCTION. 


of her glory. The principal writers of the Attic dialect 
are—the tragedians Auschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, the 
comic writer Aristophanes, the historians Thucydides and 
Xenophon, the philosopher Plato, the great orators Lysias, 
Demosthenes, and Auschines. Through the importance 
of Athens in Greece, and the excellence of the Attic lit- 
erature, the Attic became the chief dialect of the Greek 
language. 


Obs.—A less important distinction ig made between the earlier and ἡ 
later Attic writers. |The tragedians and Thucydides belong to 
the earlier Attic, and the remaining authors to the later. The 
language of Plato is intermediate between the two: that of the 
tragedians has also many other peculiarities. 


2. The AZoxic dialect was spoken by the ‘XZolians, par- 
ticularly in Asia Minor, Beotia, and Thessaly. Alczus and 
Sappho wrote in this dialect. 

3. The Doric dialect was spoken by the Dorians, chief- 
ly in Northern Greece, in the Peloponnesus, in Crete, and 
in the numerous Doric colonies, especially Sicily and Lower 
Italy. Doric is essentially the dialect of Pindar’s lyric 
poems and’ Theocritus’s bucolics (herdsman’s poetry). The 
choruses in the tragedies also contain some Doric forms. 

4. After Athens ceased to be the leading city in Greece, 
the Attic dialect still remained the language of educated 
Greeks. But it soon began to degenerate from its primi- 
tive purity and excellence, and thus, from the third century 
before Christ, the common Greek dialect (ἡ κοινὴ διάλεκτος) 
was distinguished from the Attic. 

On the boundary-line between the older Attic and the 
common Greek dialect stands thé great philosopher A7%s- 
totte. Among later authors, the most important are—the 
historians Polybius, Plutarch, Arrian, Dion Cassius ; the 
geographer Strabo ; the rhetoricians Dionysius of Hali- 
carnassus and Lucian. 


EE Ἐς Cena te 


I. LETTERS AND SOUNDS. 


Cuap. L—Tue Greek CHARACTERS. 


A. Letters. 


ΕἾ 1. The Greek letters are.the following: | 
Large Character. Small Character. Name. 


DEMOBRHMYUHONZS> AM ODNEpP πο» 


Μ“ 


SCRKROCSCTQAOIAOMIE KFT OSIN™ BDS 


Ὡ 


Alpha 
Beta 

᾿ Gamma 
Delta 
Epsilon 
Zeta 
Eta 
Theta 
Tota 
Kappa 
Lambda 
Mu 

Nu at 


Omikron — 3 


Pi 

Rho 
Sigma 
Tau 
Upsilon 
Phi 

Chi 

Psi 
Oméga 


Pronunciation. 


ἃ (short or long). 


aus 


ὅ (only short). 
Ζ, 


é one long). 


I rises or long). 


(only enor 


om tog OM Se re Pr 


i (short or long). 


ph. 
ch. 


ps. 
6 (only long). 


1 LETTERS. ὃ 2. 


§ 2. For's there is a double sign in the small character: 
σ at the beginning and in the middle, and ς at the end of 
a word. Hence σύν, σείω, ἦσαν, but πόνος, κέρας. In 
compound words ¢ may also stand at the end of the first ° 
word in the compound: προς-ἔρχομαι, δύς-βατος. 

§ 3. From the names of the first two letters arose the 
expression “ Alphabet.” The characters of the Greek al- 
phabet do not essentially differ from those of the Latin 
and of modern languages. All come from the alphabet of 
the Pheeriicians. 

In regard to pronunciation, the following points are , to 
be observed : 


§ 4. All Greek letters are always pronounced alike. 
But γ is an exception, since, before y, x, x, or &, it is 
pronounced 7g. Hence in ‘Latin it is represented by n; 
téyyw is pronounced tengo; συγκαλῶ, syngkalo ; λόγχη, 
longché; φόρμιγξ, phormina. 

§ 5. Z is pronounced like the English z. It is of very 
different origin in different cases. Compare μείζων (for 
péywyv) from péyac; ζυγόν with Latin yugum, English 
yoke, etc. 

ὃ 6. Φ we pronounce as 7. but probably the Greeks pro- 
nounced the p and ἡ separately ; ; hence ph, not f, is used 
in Latin for φ: φιλοσοφία, philosophia ; Φιλοκτήτης, Pht- 
loctetes. 


§ 7. 0 we pronounce like the English ἐλ. 


§ 8. Of the diphthongs, a and « are both pronounced 
as ev in height; οἱ, as oy in boy; av, as Ow in sour; ov, 
as ow in tour; w,as wi in wing; ev and nv, as ew in few. 
The iota subscriptum (wnderwritten) is not pronounced in 


> 

§ 3. Dialects. —The Greek language had in the most ancient times 

another letter, F, which was called Digamma (siyappa=“ double gam- 

ma”) from its form, and Καὶ (Fai) from its pronunciation. It was 

pronounced like the Latin o: Foivoc, wine=Lat. vinum. At a later 
time it was written only by the Aolians and Dorians. 


᾿ UNIVE iy Sts RSITY) 
§ 14. | OTHER CHAR ἐς τον 
ἝΝἊΠΏ Ἴ . Le 


LIk 


a, 9, It is not written under, bu 
Hu, Qu, but still remains unpronounced. 


§ 9. When two vowels, usually pronounced together, are 
to be pronounced separately, the latter has over it a dizre- 
sis (διαίρεσις =separation): thus πάϊς is pronounced pa-is ; 
avmvoc, d-Upnos. 


B. Other Characters. 


§ 10. Besides the letters, the Greek language has also 
the sign ‘, which is placed over the initial vowel to which 
it belongs, and represents the ὦ, ἕξ is pronounced ez; 
ἅπαξ, hapan. This sign is called spiritus asper, “ rough 
breathing.” 


§ 11. For more exact diskinution, the Greeks also mark 
those initial vowels which have not this breathing with the 
sign ’, 2. 6.. the speritus lenis, “ gentle breathing.” This 
sound indicates only the raising of the voice which is nec- 
essary for the pronunciation of a vowel when no consonant 
precedes: ἐκ is pronounced ek ; ἄγω, ago. 


§ 12. In diphthongs the breathing stands over the second 
vowel : ovrog=houtos ; si8ov=eidon. But when the first 
vowel is in large character, the breathing stands before it: 
“Αιδης = Hades ; ᾽Ωιδή = Ode. 

§ 13. Every initial p has the spiritus asper over it: 
ῥαψῳδός, ῥεῦμα. In Latin the aspirate is written after 
the p: rhapsodus, rheuma. When two p’s come together 
ἴῃ a word,’ is usually placed over the first, and ‘ over the 
_ second: Iléppo0c=Pyrrhus ; Καλλιῤῥόη-ε: Callirrhoe. 
Obs.—Many write the double po he orion any breathing: Πύρρος; 

Καλλιρρόη. 


§ 14. As in Latin, so in Greek, the sign “ over a vowel 
denotes that the vowel is long,” that it is short, and * that 
it is sometimes one, sometimes the other. In Greek they 
are used only with the vowels a, 1, v, since ε, n, 0, w, are 
distinguished by their form. 


6 ACCENTS. 815. 


§ 15. The sign’ at the junction of two words indicates 
the omission of a vowel or diphthong, and is then called 
an apostrophe : παρ᾽ ἐκείνῳ for παρὰ ἐκείνῳ, with that one ; 
μὴ ᾽γώ for μὴ ἐγώ (ne ego). 

§ 16. The same sign has the name coronis (κορωνίς) 
when it stands over the junction of two words contracted 
into one: τοὔνομα for τὸ ὄνομα, the name; κἀγαθός for 
καὶ ἀγαθός, and good. It indicates that a crasis (κρᾶσις, 
mixture) or contraction of two words has taken place, and, 
like the breathing, stands over the second vowel of a diph- 
thong: ταὐτό for τὸ αὐτό, the same. 


C. Accents. - 


§ 17. The Greeks also indicate the tone or ACCENT 
(προςῳδία) of words. The sign’ over a vowel is called 
the acute accent (ὀξεῖα προςῳδία), that is, the sharp -or 
raised tone: λόγος, τούτων, παρά, ἕτερος. The syllable 
thus marked must be raised above the rest. 07 

A word having the acute accent upon theTast syllable is 
called oxytone (ὀξύτονον): παρά, εἰπέ, βασιλεύς. 

A word having the acute accent upon the last but one is 
called paroaytone (παροξύτονον) : λέγω, φαίνω. 

A word having the acute accent upon the last but two 
is called proparoxytone (προπαροξύτονον): λέγεται, εἴπετε. 


§ 18. 0bs.—A. proparoxytone, having a long vowel or diphthong in 
the second syllable of the word, ought to be pronounced so as to 
give the accent on the third syllable, and yet preserve the length 
of the second syllable: βέβηκα should be pronounced bébéka ; 
ἀπόβαινε, apobaine. 


§ 19. The sign ‘ over a vowel is called the grave accent 
(Bapsia προςῳδία). It indicates a low tone, that-is, that 
a syllable is not raised in tone. Thus in ἀπόβαϊνὲ, the 
last two might have the grave accent. The marking of 
them, however, would be superfluous, the absence of the 
acute being a sufficient guide. All words without. an 


ΤΌΝ PUNCTUATION. _ 7 


accent on the final syllable are therefore called barytone 
(βαρύτονα): λέγω, ἕτερος. 

§ 20. The sign ‘, however, also denotes a subdued acute, 
and occupies the place of an acute in every oxytone not 
immediately followed by a pause: ἀπό, from, but ἀπὸ 
τούτου, from this; βασιλεύς, a king, but βασιλεὺς ἐγένετο, 
he became king. Oxytones, therefore, retain their accent 
unchanged only at the end of a sentence. 


§ 21. The sign~ over a vowel is called the cvrcumflex 
accent (περισπωμένη προςῳδία), from its shape. The cir- 
cumflex is a combination of the acute and the grave, ”. 

A word having a circumflex on the last syllable is called 
perispomenon (περισπώμενον) : ἀγαθοῖς, σκιᾶς. 

A word having a circumflex on the last syllable but 
one is called properispomenon (προπερισπώμενον): φεῦγε, 
βῆτε. ; 
§ 22. In diphthongs, the accent, like the breathing (§ 12), 
is put over the second vowel: φεύγει, τοῦτο. 

When the circumflex accent and the breathing meet upon 
the same vowel, the accent is placed over the breathing : 
οὗτος, ἦθος, "Qroc. The acute, in a similar case, stands to 
the right of the breathing: aye, ἔρχομαι, Ἴων. 

0bs.—The acute is placed between the two points of a disresis (9), 

ἀΐδιος, but the circumflex over them, πραῦγαι. 


D. Punctuation. 


§ 23. For the purpose of dividing sentences and periods, 
the Greeks employ the comma and the full-point. For 
the sign of interrogation they use the semicolon: τί εἶπας ; 
what did. you say? For the colon or’ semicolon they 
place a point at the upper part of the line: ἐρωτῶ ὑμᾶς " 
τί ἐποιήσατε; L ask you: what did you (0 ἑσπέρα ἦν", 
τότε ἦλθεν ἄγγελος, 14 was evening; then a messenger 
came. 


8 VOWELS. § 24, 


Cuap. II.—THE SOUNDS. 


A. The Vowels. 


§ 24. The Greek language, like the Latin, has five vow- 
els, of which the first four are like the Latin, a, 6, 0, 7. 
But instead of the Latin uw, the Greeks have v (pronounced 
nearly like the French wu and the German ii). 


§ 25. The vowels, apart from the distinction of long and 
short, are divided into two classes—the hard and the 8077 
vowels: a, ¢, ἢ» 0, w, are hard; v, 1, soft. 


§ 26. From the union of hard and soft vowels together 
arise diphthongs (δίφθογγοι, ὁ. 6... double-sounds). They 


are: 


av, from a and υ. ov, from o and v. 

7 as ee Beg ame i Le. πον ΚΠ ΔΩ͂Σ 

δ, ἈΠ ec, ny, § yn © wv 
ce ςς 


ει, ε bs 


§ 27. The union of long hard vowels with ὁ produces the 


§ 24. Dialects—The Dialects, in many words and forms, admit dif- 
ferent vowels from those usual in the Attic dialect. Thus: 

1. The Jonie (Epic and New-Ionic) dialect prefers. n for Attic 

«a: Att. θώραξ, Ion. θώρηξ, breastplate; Att. ἀγορά, Ion. ἀγορή, market ; 
Att. ναῦς, Ion. νηῦς, ship; but Ion. pecapBpin for Att. μεσημβρία, mid- 
day. 

2. The Doric, on the ees: prefers a: Att. δῆμος, Dor. δᾶμος, 

τ: people ; Att. μήτηρ, mother, Dor. μάτηρ (comp. Latin mater) ; Dor. ᾿Αθάνα 
for ᾿Αθηνᾶ, goddess Athena, even in Attic poets. 

3. The Ionic dialect dha changes ε to a, and o to ov: Att. ξένος, 
Ion. ξεῖνος, foreign ; At. ἕνεκα, Ion. εἵνεκα, ον account of ; Att. μόνος, Ion. 
μοῦνος, alone ; Att. ὄνομα, Ion. οὔνομα, name. Rarely o to οι, or a to αι:. 
Att. ἠγνόησε, Ton: ἠγνοίησε, he knew not. 


§ 26. Dialects—The New-Ionic dialect has moreover the diphthong 
wu, which, however, only comes in place.of av in the other dialects. 
θωῦμα for θαῦμα, wonder ; ἑωυτοῦ for ἑαυτοῦ, of himself: wv must be 

. pronounced as ow. 


§ 33. | CONSONANTS. 9 


spurious diphthongs a, », w, in which the underwritten 
iota is not heard. (Compare ὃ 8.) 

§ 28. The Greek language also combines v with ε, but 
only before vowels: μυῖα, ὦ fly. 

§ 29. We farther distinguish the obscure o-sound (0, w), 
the medium a-sound (a), and the clear enone (ε, n), and 
the more obscure v from the clearer ε- 

7 Lad 
B. The Consonants. 

8 30. The consonants are divided: I. According to 
the position in the mouth where they are produced, 
z. @, according to their organ (ὄργᾶνον, “ instrument”), 
into : 

1. GUTTURALS (throat-sounds), k, y, x. 
2. DENTALS (teeth-sounds), τ, ὃ, 0, v, A, p, σ 
3. ΠΑΒΙΑΙΒ (lip-sounds), 7, 3, ¢, u 

§ 31. II. According to their power, that is, whether they 
can be pronounced with or without a vowel, into: 

§ 32. 1. MuTEs (mutz): 

(a.) hard (tenues), κ, 7, 7. 
(b.) soft (medix), γ, ὃ, β. 
(c.) asprrated (aspirate), x, θ, φ. 


Obs.—The aspirated consonants contain each a hard consonant 
with the rough breathing, χ therefore=«‘ (kh); 9=r (th); ¢= 


π᾿ (ph). 
§ 33. 2. VOCALS (semivocales) : 
(a.) Liquids (liquide), λ, p. 
(b.) Nasals (nasales), y (y before crutbieiate § 4), v, μ. 
(c.) Stbilant (sibilans), o (c). 


§ 32. Dialects——In the Ionic dialect the aspirates often lose the 
breathing : δέκομαι for Attic. δέχομαι, accept; αὖτις for Attic αὖθις, 
again.- The New-Ionic sometimes transposes the breathing: κιθών 
for Attic χιτών, tunic ; ἐνθεῦτεν for Attic ἐντεῦθεν. 


A 2 


10 VOWELS ΙΝ ‘COMBINATION. 8. 84, 


§ 84, The double consonants belong to both kinds: 
ξ, ψ, ζ: for Fes ei W=nre, €=6, with a soft sibilant 
(§ 5). 


Obs.—xo only occurs in compounds with ἐκ : ἐκσώζω, I rescue. 


Crap. TIL—~ComBInaTIons AND CHANGES OF 
SOUNDS. 


A. Vowels in Combination. 


§ 35. In the inner part of a word not all vowels may 


§ 34. Dialects—A peculiarity of the Greek language is the want 
of the breathing v. The Ὁ, however, was not altogether wanting; 
for— 

1. The digamma (§ 3, D.) occurred in the Homeric dialect in 
the beginning of the following words: ἄγνυμι, break ; ἅλις, numer- 
Ous ; ἁλίσκομαι, am caught ; ἄναξ, ruler ; avacow, rule; ἁνδάνω, please ; ; 
ἀραιός, tender ; ἄστυ, city; tap, spring [ver]; ἔθνος, swarm, people ; 
εἴκοσι, twenty [Doric Είκατι, Latin viginti]; εἴκω, yield; εἴλω, press ; 
ἕκητι, willingly ; ἑκυρός, father-in-law ; ἑκών, willing ; ἔλπομαι, hope ; 
the pronominal Stem ἑ (ἕο, sui), ἔοικα, appear; ἔπος, word ; εἶπον, 
spoke ; ἔργον, work ; ἔργω, close in; ἔῤῥω, go on; ἐρύω, draw ; ἐρέω, 
shall say ; ἐσθής, clothing; εἷμα, dress (Stem Fec, Latin vestis); érne, 
relative ; ἡδύς, agreeable ; Ἴλιος, city Ilios; ἴσος, equal; οἴκος, house ; 
οἶνος, wine (vinum). On the operation of the digamma, see ὃ 68, D., 
75, D. 

2. The F in the middle occurred in ὄϊς, sheep, from of ie (Latin ana 

γη-ός, of the ship, from νᾶξος (Latin navis), Gen. of vai-c. 

8. The Dorians and A®olians retained the digamma at the begin- 
ning of many words: Aol. Féroc, year, Dor. Είδιος, own. 

4, In Homer, at the beginning of many words, ε stands for F. ἐξ; 
him, self; ἐείκοσι, twenty ; tion, equal; ἔεδνον, marriage-gift = ἕδνον. 


§ 85. Dialects.—The Dialects vary much in regard to the combi- 
nations of vowels. The Epic and New-lonic leave many syllables 
uncontracted : t% = εὖ, well; ὀΐομαι = οἴομαι, 1 think; πάϊς = παῖς, 
boy ; νόος = νοῦς, sense; φιλέητε = φιλῆτε (ametis); ἀέκων = ἄκων, 
unwilling. Some of the forms usually uncontracted are, on the 


§ 37. VOWELS IN COMBINATION. 11 


combine. The dissimilar vowels pair with one another 
best : 

1. The soft generally remain wnchanged before the hard 
vowels: σοφία, wisdom ; λύω, 7 loosen ; iabw, I slumber ; 
ὕει, ἐξ rains ; εὔνοια, benevolence. 

2. Hard vowels before soft ones become diphthongs: 
ἐύ, εὖ, good ; πάϊς, παῖς, boy; γένεϊ, γένει, to the race. 

0bs.—Diphthongs sometimes lose their second part before vowels: 

βου-ός becomes βο-ός (b0v-48) ; Kai-w, κά-ω, burn. Compare δὲ 160, 
248, Obs. 

§ 36. Similar (§ 25) vowels can not well stand together, 
and hence, when they meet, are often contracted according 
to the following laws: 

1, Two similar vowels melt into one long vowel: λᾶας 
becomes λᾶς, stone; ζηλόω, ζηλῶ, L am zealous ; Xtioe, 
Χῖος, ὦ Chian ; alte, φιλῆτε, ametis, in which cases ε 
and η, o and w, are similar. 

Still it must be observed that << usually become εἰ, and 
oo become ov: ποίεε, ποίει, do; πλόος, πλοῦς, passage by 
sed. Vowels before a similar one beginning a diphthong 
disappear: πλόου, πλοῦ, Of a passage ; οἰκέει, οἰκεῖ, dwells ; 
φιλέῃ, φιλῇ, amet. 


§ 37. 2. Dissimilar vowels form a compound in which 


contrary, contracted in these dialects : ἱρός = ἱερός, holy ; βώσας -Ξ- 
βοήσας, one who has called. ° 

2. The abbreviation in the diphthongs ending in ν is explained by 
this letter first becoming F, and then being quite dropped (compare 
§ 34, D., 2): Bov-de —BoF-d¢ [bov-is] — βο-ός." : 

§ 37. Dialects—1. The Dialects supply many exceptions. Thus, in 
New-lonic especially, co and cov are contracted into ev, not into ov: 
ποιέομεν, ποιεῦμεν, We make ; ποιέουσι, ποιεῦσι, they make. 

2. In the Ionic dialect, do (yo) often changes to ew: ’Arpsidao, ’Arpei- 
dew, of Atrides ; ἵλαος, ἵλεως, merciful. a before w is often changed 
into the thinner sound ¢: Ποσειδέων = Ποσειδάων, Att. Ἰτοσειδῶν, the god 
Poseidon. 

3.-In Doric, ao, aw, are contracted into ἃ : ᾿Ατρείδαο =’Arpeida, Ἰ1ο- 
σειδάων = ΙΠοσειδᾶν, θεάων (dearum) = dear. 


12 : VOWELS IN COMBINATION. § 38. 


a) the obscurer vowel overpowers the clearer (ὃ 29). 
Thus from 


ao comes w ap τιμάομεν, τιμῶμεν, we honor. 

no “ ww “γητ-όδυνος, νώδυνος, painless. 
oa “ w “ aidéa, αἰδῶ, pudorem. 
aie ων “ ζηλόητε, ζηλῶτε, ye may be jealous, 
co “ ov γένεος, γένους, of the race. 

08 0 τ on S: aXe, ζήλου, be jealous. 
aa “ w “ down, on, 80ng. 
aov “  w “ τὶμάου, τιμῶ, be honored. 
you “ w “μὴ οὖν, μῶν, surely not. 
cov “ ov “ χρυσέου, χρυσοῦ, of the golden. 

: cor =“ = ot “ αρύσερϊ;, χρυσοῖ, the golden. 

on “ or “ SndreEte, ζηλοῖς, thou art jealous. 
= yo ou -olvdere, oivouc, abounding in wine. 


Obs.—oe become ov when the εἰ saree the lengthening of « 


(§ 42). 


§ 38. ὁ) When the medium a-sound aha πῶ e-sound | 
- meet, the first in order gains the upper hand: 


ae become ἃ in ἀέκων, ἄκων, unwilling. 

an “  & “ ᾿τιμάητε, τιμᾶτε, honoretis. 

ace “Sg * ἀείδω; gow, I sing. 

Sep os oe “alee, τιμᾷς, honores. 

Ea ἃ ῃ “ἔαρ, 7p, spring. 

ear “oy Ὁ  χύεαϊς, Avy, thou art loosened. 
na “ yg * dinar, Aby, solvaris. 


Obs.—In the contractions of ae and ea, sometimes a takes the 
place of ᾳ, εἰ that of y. So from ἀεικής, unit, comes αἰκής ; from 
ἀείρω, I lift up, comes aipw; from λύεαι Comes Aver (With Ady). 
Exceptions, §§ 130, 183, 948 (τιμᾶν), 244. 

§ 39. Another mode of treating vowels which meet to- 
gether is called Synizesis (συνίζησις, 2. 6., sinking). It con- 
sists in the first vowel being written but not pronounced 
as a.vowel: @zéc—as one syllable. 


§ 39. Dialects—Synizesis is frequent in Homer, especially after ε: 
Πηληϊάδεω, of Pelides ; χρυσέοις, aureis ; via, navem ; also πόλιας, cities ; 
ὄγδοος, the eighth. 


— 


§ 43. - OTHER VOWEL CHANGES. — 13 


B. Other kinds of Vowel sige 


§ 40. Another change of the vowels consists in their 
being lengthened. Two kinds of lengthening are distin- 
guished, VIZ. : 

1. Organic lengthening, ὁ. ¢., that which is required by 
inflexion or derivation. By organie lengthening— 

a generally becomes ἡ, τιμάω, 1 honor, Fut. τιμήσω. 


o always ᾽ς w, ζηλόω, 1 am jealous, “ ζηλώσω. 
Boi Mey ¥ ἢ; ποιέω, 1 make, Ὁ ποιήσω. 
i either “1, rtw, I honor, “ view,’ 
or * et, St. uz, Pres. λείπω, I leave: 
sometimes ‘“ ot, Xen, Adj. λοιπός, remaining. 
ὕ either ἐς 3, rdw, I loose, Fut. λύσω; 
or εν" ev, St. φυγ, Pres. φεύγω, I flee. 


§ 41. Obs.—After ε, 1, and p; a is changed to ἃ instead of η: ἰάω, 
1 leave, allow ; fut. ἐάσω ; St. ἰα, heal ; ἰᾷτρός, physician ; St.-dpa, 
866 ; bp ἅμα, ὦ view. The Attic dialect is altogether averse to the 
combinations en, τη, pn, and frequently puts ed, a, pa in their place. 

§ 42. 2. Compensatory lengthening, ὦ. 6., that which is 
used as a compensation for lost consonants. By it a, even 
when ε, 1, or p does not precede, is often changed to a: 
πᾶς, every, from πᾶ-ντες —e generally becomes εἰ: εἰμί, 
7 am, from ἐσ-μι (ὃ 315)—o generally becomes ov: διδούς 
for διδο-ντ-ς [ Lat. da-n-s|—it always becomes τ, and ὕ 
always uv: deKvi-¢ for deucvu-vr-c, showing. 

Obs. —Exceptions, in which « becomes η; and o becomes w, are Εἶναι 

in ὃ 147, and in which a becomes ἡ in ὃ 270. 

§ 43. The three short hard vowels often interchange in 
one and the same Stem, when, generally, ε is regarded 
as the Stem-vowel: τρέπω, J turn; ἔτραπον, I turned ; 


§ 40. Dialects—The extension of v to ov appears in εἰλήλουθα, am 
come, from Stem ἐλυθ (δ 327, 2). 

§ 41. Dialects—The Old and New-Ionic dialect does not avoid the 
combinations en, τη, and pn: irén = Attic iréa, willow ; ἰητρός = Attic 
ἰατρός, physician ; reyphoopa— Attic πειράσομαι, I will try. 

‘The Dorie dialect, on the contrary, regularly lengthens & into a: 
τιμᾶσω = τιμήσω, I will honor (δ 24, D., 2). 


14 ΠΟ ΟΟΝΒΟΝΑΝΤΒ IN COMBINATION. § 44, 


τρόπος, turning ; Stem yevec, Nom. γένος, race [compare 
Lat. generis, Nom. genus]; φλέγω, 7 burn; φλόξ, flame. 

ἢ also is at times changed to w: ἀρήγω, 7 help ; apwydc, 
helper. 


εν ee iti an combination with one another. 


§ 44. Consonants, in regard to. their combination, are 
subject to still greater limitation and change than the 
vowels. Those which are dissimilar (comp. S$ 32, 33) 
agree best with one another, especially the mutes with the 
liquids. 

That discordant consonants may continue together, they 
are either made more like one another (assimilated) or more 
unlike (dissimilated). The essential laws for the necessary 
changes of consonants are the following: 


ὃ 45. 1. Before mute dentals (§§ 30, 31), ‘ails conso- 
nants of other organs which are of the same. order (that is, 
both hard, both soft, or both aspirated, § 32) can stand; 
consequently, the only allowable combinations of sounds 
are—«r, TT, γὸ, [30, x9, 09. 

When a different mute stands before the dental, through 
inflexion or derivation, it must be assimzlated to the order 
of the latter. Consequently— 


κὃ and xd become yé. _ πὸ and ¢é become βὲ. 
ea ἐγθ ns ae 70 “ Bd m+ So, 
yr eS lyr SO er Bro o¢r ST 


Therefore— | 
ahex-Onvay becomes πλεχθῆναι, from πλέκω, [ weave. 


λεγ-τος Ν λεκτός, Ὁ λέγω, 7 say 
[lectus instead of leg-tus]. 

λεγ-θηναι <p λεχθῆναι, -“ λέγω, 1 say. ᾿ 
δεχ-τος “ δεκτός, “ δέχομαι, I receive 

[tractus instead of trah-tus, from traho}. 
τυπ-θηναι ἣν τυφθῆναι, from τύπτω, I strike. 
γραφ-τος ἐξ γραπτός, “ γράφω, 1] write. 
γραφ-δην CS typaBday, 5. Ὁ ἐ ( 


Obs.—The preposition ἐκ, out of (Lat. ea), remains unchanged i in a 
combinations: ale casting out ; ἔκδρομη, running out. 


Ta 


$48. ' CONSONANTS IN.COMBINATION. 15 


§ 46. 2. Before mute dentals, mute dentals to be audible 
are changed into σ (Dissimilation). Therefore— 


rr, or, and @r become or. 
0, 60, >“ 00.: πρὸ . 6: hence 


. ἀνυτ-τος becomes ἀνυστός, accomplished, from ἀνύτω, I accomplish. 


ἀδ-τεον Ἂς εἰστέον, canendum est, «dow, I sing. 
me0-Onva “ πεισθῆναι, to be persuaded, “πείθω, I persuade. 


§ 47. 3. Before μ a guttural becomes y, a dental o, a 
labial μ. 'Therefore— 


διωκ-μος becomes διωγμός, persecution, from διώκω, I pursue. 


Be-Bpex-pa “  — BéBpeypar, 1 have been wetted, from Bpéxw, I wet. 

id-pev “oper, we know, from οἶδα, I know. [ plish. 

ἦνυτ-μαι “ ἤνυσμαι, I have been perfected, from ἀνύτω, I accom- 

πε-πειθ-μενος “ πεπεισμένος, persuaded, from πείθω, I persuade. 

κοπ- μος Ὁ κομμός, ὦ striking, from κόπ-τω, 1 strike [summus, from 
sup-mus}. 

re-rpiB-pac “ — rérptpcn, 1 have been rubbed, from τρίβω, LT rub. 

γραφ-μα Ὁ γράμμα, letter, from γράφω, I write. 


Obs.—Sometimes in derivation the gutturals and dentals remain 
unchanged: ἀκμή, bloom; ῥυθμός, movement, rhythm; ἀριθμός, num- 
ber. 

The preposition ἐκ leaves its « unchanged: ἐκμάσσω, I wipe out. 


§ 48. 4. Before o, as a hard consonant, y and y become 
x, and 3 becomes π (Assimelation): κα is then written ἕ, 
and ro w. ‘Therefore— 


ἀγ-σω paberses ἀκ-σω, Written ἄξ-ω, I shall lead, from ἄγω, I lead [rexi 
instead of 7eg-si, from repo}. 


dex-copar “ δεκ-σομαι, written δέξομαι, 1 shall receive, from δέχομαι, 
1 receive [traai instead of trah-si, from trah-o}. 
τριβισω “ *rpiz-ow, written τρίψω, I shall rub, from τρίβω, I rub 


[ seripst instead of scrib-si, from scrib-o]. 
ypag-ow “ ypar-ow, written γράψω, I shall write, from γράφ-ω, I 
write, 
Obs.—It is clear from ὃ 34 that every « and π᾿ with o must become 


§ 47. Dialects——The changes of dentals and gutturals before μ is 
frequently omitted in Ionic: ἴκ-μενος, favorable, from St. ἱκ (ἱκάνω, I 
come) ; axdypévoc, pointed, from St. ἀκ (Lat. acwo); dirph, breath ; ὀδμή, 
smell, from St.o0d (ὄζω) [od-or], Att. ὀσ-μή ; ἴδ-μεν, we know = Att. io-pev; 


. κεκορυθμένος, equipped, from St. κορυθ (κορύσσω) = Att. κεκορυσμένος. 


16 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. — 8.49. 


~ and ψ: hence πλεκ-σω becomes πλέξω, from πλέκω, I weave j 
λειπ-σω becomes λείψω, from λείπω, I leave. 


§ 49. 5. The dentals, when standing separately before o, 
are dropped wethout compensation ; in like manner ν dis- 
appears before Z. Therefore— ‘ 
ἀνυτ-σις becomes ἄνῦὕσις, accomplishment, from avirw, I accomplish. 
no-copar “ ἥσομαι, L@hall rejoice, from ἥδομαι, I rejoice (laesi for 

. laed-si, from laed-o}. 
κορυθ-σι ὧν κόὀρῦὕσι, to the helmets, from κόρυς, Gen. κόρυ-θος, helmet. 
δαιμον-σι “ δαίμοσι, to the demons, from δαίμων, demon. [ yoke. 
συν-ζυγος “ σύζυγος, yoked together, from σύν, together, and ζυγόν, 

Hence o before another σ is lost: revyeo-o1 becomes τείχξ-σι, to walls 
(from τεῖχος, wall) ; ἐστ-σομαι, ἔ-σομαι. nF 

Obs. 1.—v ‘is not always cropped before « or in composition. In 

the preposition ἔν, the ν remains for the sake of clearness: ἐν- 
στάζω, I trickle in ; ἐνζεύγνυμι, I harness. The ν in πᾶν, all, every, 
and πάλιν, again, either remains unchanged or is assimilated to _ 
the following o: πάνσοφος, all-wise; παλίσσυτος, from ratw- 
συτος, starting back. The ν in σύν, with, is dropped before Z or σ 
with a consonant following: σύζυγος (see above); σύστημα, sys- 
tem ; it is assimilated before a simple o: συσσίτιον, from συν-σιτιον, 
common meal, 

2. Sometimes ν remains unchanged before o in the 2d Pers. Sing. 

of the Perf. Mid.: zé-dav-cat, thou hast appeared. 

3. In exceptional-cases, compensatory lengthening (§ 42) takes place 

when a single ν is omitted: for instance— 

a) In some Nominatives Sing. : peda-c, black, for μελαν-ο. 

ὃ) In the 3d Pers. Plur. of the chief tenses, where o has taken 
the place of r: λύ-ου-σι, they loosen, instead of λυ-ον-σι (orig- 
inally λυ-ο»-τι) (§ 60). 

ὃ Often in derivation: γερουσία, senate, instead Sg γεροντια, from 
St. γεροντ, Nom. γέρων, old man. 


§ 50. 6. The combinations vr, v0, vd, ar@likewise omit- 
ted before o, but cause a compensatory lengthening (§ 42): 


mavr-o. becomes πᾶσι, to all, from St. παντ-, Nom. πᾶ-ς. 
τιθεντ-ς ἐν τιθείς, putting, Blt Looe, 
γεροντ-σι =“ γέρουσι, to old men, “ “ yepovr, Nom. γέρων. 


§ 49. Dialects.—Homer often assimilates a mute to the fellowing co: 
roooi=Att. ποσί for ποῦδ-σι (pedibus). He often preserves one o before 
another : ἔσ-σομαι, I shall be. 


§ 51. CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 17 


to those 
δεικνυντ-σι becomes δεικνῦσι, ae =a , from St. Sieve Nom. δεικνῦ-ς, 


Iwill pour 
onciow,{ bgt a ἣ “το omevd, ‘Pres. dekallia: 


πενθ-σομαι  “ πείσομαι, 1 shall suffer,“ “ πενθ, Pres. πάσχω. 


σπενῦ-σω ἐν 


Obs. 1.----ντ disappears, without compensation, in the Dat. Plur. of 
Stems of Adjectives in evr, Nom. εἰςς : St. χαριεντ, Nom. χαρίεις, 
Dat. Plur. χαρίε-σι for χαριεντ-σι. 

2.—Of v@ before o, ν remains in ἕλμιν-ς, tape-worm, instead of ἑλ- 
μινθ-ς, Stem ἑλμινθ: Tipuy-c, the city Tiryns, instead of Τιρυνθ-ς, 
Stem Τιρυνθ. 

ὃ 500. In later Attic o is readily assimilated to a preceding p: Old 
Att. χερσόνησος, New Att. χεῤῥόνησος, peninsula ; Old Att. Capos, 
New Att. θαῤῥῶ, I am courageous. 


ὃ 51. 7. ν᾿ remains unchanged before mute dentals; it 
becomes.the nasal y before gutturals (§ 4), μ᾿ before labials, 
and is assimilated before liquid consonants: 


συν-τίθημι, I put together, is unchanged. 
συν-καλεω, I call together, becomes συγκαλέω. 


συν-χρονος, contemporaneous, ‘ σύγχρονος. 
ἐν-πειρος, experienced, 8 ἔμπειρος, from ἐν and πεῖρα, proof [so 
in-peritus becomes im-peritus]. 

ἐν-ψυχος, inspirited, - ἔμψυχος, from ἐν and ψυχή, soul. 

év-perpoc, metrical, i Euperpoc, from ἐν and μέτρον, Measure 
[so in-modicus becomes im-mod- 
icus]. 

συν-ρεω, I flow together, τ συῤῥέω, from σύν and ῥέω, I flow [so 

con-ruo becomes cor-ruo]. 
ovy-eyw, I collect, τ συλλέγω, from σύν and λέγω, I gather 


[so con-ligo becomes col-ligo]. 


‘Obs, 1.—v in the preposition ἐν remains unchanged before p: ἔν- 
ρυθμος, rhythmical. 
2.—yv is combined with-p by means of ὃ in ἀν-δ-ρός, Gen. of ἀνήρ, 
man. So is pw with p by β in peonp-B-pta, midday, instead of 
μεσημίξ)ρια (μέσος and ἡμέρα, compare ὃ 61, ὁ). 


§ 51. Dialects—In the Epic dialect β is often inserted between μ 
and p, and between p and 2X: μέ-μ-β-λωκα, 1 have gone, from Stem por, 
by metathesis (δ 59). before X or p becomes β at the beginning of 
a word: βλώ-σκω, I go, Present of the Stem por; βροτός, “mortal, for 
pporoc, from the Stem ppo or pop [mor-ior, mortuus sum). 


18 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 52.” 


_ § 52. 8. Hard mutes (tenues) unite with a following 
rough breathing (spiritus asper) into aspirates (yx, 0, p): 
hence, 

ix’ (ἐπί) and ἡμέρα, day, become ἐφήμερος, for a day. 


dex’ (δέκα) “ ἡμέρα, ἄγ,  “  dexnpepoc, for ten days. 
ten 
avr’ (ἀντί) ““ ὕπατος, consul, “ ἀγθύπατος, proconsul. 


§ 53. 9. At the end of a word, when the following word 
begins with a spiritus asper, the hard mute is changed into 
an aspirate : 

οὐχ οὗτος, not this, for οὐκ οὗτος. 
ἀφ᾽ ἑστίας, from the hearth, “ἀπ᾽ (ἀπὸ) ἑστίας. 
καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, by day, ‘kar’ (κατὰ) ἡμέραν. 

Obs.—If another hard mute stands before the one to be aspirated, 
the first must also be aspirated (ὃ 45): ἑπτά and ἡμέρα form 
ἑφθήμερος, for seven days ; νύκτα and ὕλην become νύχθ᾽ ὅλην, totam 
noctem. 

§ 53d. 10. Two syilahies immediately following one an- 
other can not both begin with aspirates in the following 
cases : 

a) In reduplication the corresponding hard mute takes 
the place of the aspirate: 

κε-χώῤηκα for χε-χωρηκα, I have proceeded, from χωρέω, I proceed. 

* τί-θημι  -Onju, I put. 
πέτφῦυκα “4 φε-φυκα, 1 have become. 

ὦ) The Aorists Passive of the verbal Stems θε (τίθημι, 
L put), θυ (θύω, I sacrifice), adopt the same modification: 
é-ré-Onv, 7 was put, for ἐ-θε-θην ; ἐ-τύ-θην, 7 was sacrificed, 
for 2-Ov-Onv. (Compare § 298.) 

c) In the Imperative of the First Aorist’ Passive (8. 297), 
on the contrary, the second aspirate is changed to a tenuis: 
σώ-θη-τι, be saved, for σω-θη-θι. 

@) Isolated instances are: ἀμπέχω, embrace, for aupexw 3 
ἐκεχειρία, for ἐχεχειρια, armistice, from ἔχειν, to hold, and 
χείρ, hand. 


ὃ 52 and 53. Dialects.—The asian is omitted in New Ionic: 
ἐπήμερος, for a day ; ἀπίημι, I send away ; οὐκ οὕτως = οὐχ οὕτος, not 80 ; 
ax’ ob, from the time when, Att. ag’ οὗ. 


8..δδ. OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 19 


Obs.—Sometimes the spiritus asper is changed to the lenis, be- 
cause the following syllable begins with am aspirate : ὄ-φρα, till, 
for 6-¢pa, from the relative Stem ὁ (ὃ 213, 217), ἔχω for ἕχω, from ἢ 
St. ἐχ (ὃ 327; 6). 


§ 54. Some Stems beginning with τ change this letter 
to θ when an aspirate at the end can not be retained (δ 45). 
This happens : 


. @) In the Substantive Stem τριχ, whose Nominative is 
θρίξ, hair, Dat. Plur. θριξί, The other cases are regu- 
lar, formed from the Stem τριχ (Gen. τριχός, Nom. Plur. 
τρίχες). 

ὦ) In ταχύς, quick, whose comparative is θάσσων for 
ταχιων (ὃ 57; compare § 198). 
¢) In the following Verbal Stems: 


rao, Pres. θάπτω, I bury, Fut. θάψω, Aor. Pass. ἐτάφην, Subs. 
= Tapoc, grave. 

toed, “ὁ τρέφω, I nourish, « θρέψω, Subs. θρέμμα; cattle. 

rpex, “τρέχω, Trun, ( θρέξομαι 

τρυφ, “θρύπτω, 1 rub to pieces, “ θρύψω ἱ (δ 260). 

tug, “ τύφω, I smoke, « θύψω 


Obs.—In the Passive First Aorist (§ 296), and in the Infinitive of 
the Perf. Mid., the aspirate of the Stem remains unchanged, yet 

* the initial tenuis is aspirated, because the Stem-consonant is 
not felt to be necessarily an original Aspirate, as it might have 
been modified by the influence of the @ after it (§ 45): ἐθρέφθην, 
τεθράφθαι. 


D. Other changes of Consonants and Vowels in the 
middle of a Word. 


§ 55. Important changes of sounds are produced by the 
modifications of the soft vowel ¢ in connection with conso- 
nants (compare §§ 186, 198, 199, 250-253). Frequently, 


for instance, 


1. after y or p is put a syllable farther back, where it 
forms a diphthong with the preceding vowel. Hence, 


20 OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. § 56. 


- τείνω, from rev-w, 1 stretch, St. rev [tendo]. 
μαίνομαι, cf μαν-ιομαι, I rage, ‘pay, 
ἀμείνων, “ ἀμεν-ιων, better, Capen. 
κείρω, “ κερ-ιω, I shear, “ κερ 


κερ. 
δότειρα, ““ δοτερ-ια, the giver, fem. “ δοτερ (δοτήρ, giver). 
χείρων, “ ἄχεῤ-ιων, Worse, χερ. 
§ 56. 2. ε is assimilated to a preceding A: 
μᾶλλον, from μαλ-ιον, more, from μάλα, much. 
ἅλλομαι, “ ἁλειομαι, I spring, St. ad [salio]. 
ἄλλος, ““ἀλεοιος, another [alius]. 
στέλλω, “  oredr-w, 1 send, St. στελ. 


§ 57. 8. Gutturals (τ and @ less frequently) coalesce 
with a following ὁ to oo (New Att. rr): 


ἥσσων, from ἡκ-ιων, less, St. ἡκ, superl. ἥκιστα. 

Θρᾷσσα, “ Opax-ra, Thracian, fem. (masc. Θρᾷξ), St. Opa. 

τάσσω, “ ray-w, 1 arrange, St. ray. 

ἐλάσσων, “ ἐχαχ-ιων, smaller, “ ἔλαχ; superl. ἐλάχιστος. 

Κρῆσσα, “ Kpnr-ta, Cretan,fem. (masc. Κρῆς), St. Konr. 

κορύσσω, “ κορυθειω, I arm,™ St. κορυθ (κόρυς, helmet). 

§ 58. 4. ὃ and sometimes y coalesce with a following t 

to Z. 


᾿ ἕζομαι, from ἐδιοβον I sit, St. ἐδ (τὸ ἕδος, the seat). 
κράζω, “ Kpay-w,l cry, “ «pay (Perf. xé-cpay-a). 


Other changes of Sounds are: > 


§ 59. 1. Transposition (μετάθεσις). which most frequent- 
ly occurs with A, p, also with μ and v: 
θράσος, together with, θάρσος, boldness. 


θρώσκω, from the St. Oop, I spring, Second Aorist ἔθορον. 
βέ-βλη-κα, a Bar, 1 have thrown, “ “Ὁ ἔβαλον. 
τέτθνη-κα, 2 θαν, I am dead, AM “© ἔθαγον. 
τμῆ-σις, ΤῊ rep, @ cut, Pres. τέμνω, I cut. 


Obs.—In the last four examples the vowel is moreover lengthened. 


§ 59. Dialects——Transposition is more frequent in the Homeric dia- 
lect (compare ὃ 295, D.): καρτερός and κρατερός, strong; κάρτιστος = 
- Att. κράτιστος, the strongest, from κράτος, strength ; τραπ-είομεν (compare 
§ 295, D.) for ταρπ-είομεν, we desire to rejoice, St. repr. (τέρπομαι). So 
also in ἔδρᾶκον, I saw, St. δερκ (δέρκομαι) ; ἔπραθον, I destroyed, St. περθ 
(rép0w). Homer: ἀταρπός = Att. ἀτρᾶπός, path. —. 4 


Φ Ὁ . 


§ 62. OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 21 


§ 60. 2. The weakening of single consonants. The most 
important weakenings are: 


a) The very frequent one, λυ ἢ before 1, ‘of 7 to oc: 


ἀναισθησία, want of feeling, for ἀναισθητια, from ἀναίσθητος, without 

feeling. 

φᾶσί for φαντι, they say. 

On the rejection of ν and the compensation for it, which 
frequently occur in this case, see ὃ 49, Obs. 3, c; compare 
§ 187. 

ὁ) The weakening of initial o before vowels to the spir- 
itus asper: 

we, swine, together with cic. Compare Lat. sv-s. 

ἕτστη-μι for σι-στη-μι, 1 place. Compare Lat. si-sto (δὲ 308, 327, 5, 6). 

§ 61. 3. The entire rejection of sounds. The following 
cases are important : 

a) o is rejected where it would have to stand between. 
two consonants in inflexion: 

γεγράφ-θαι for γεγραφ-σθαι, to be written, St. ypad, Pres. γράξω. 
τέτυφ-θε “ τε-τυφ-σθε, be ye struck, “ rum, “τύπτω. 

b) « between two vowels is very often rejected : 


λέγε-αι, λέγῃ (δ 38), for λεγεσαι, thou art said, St. rey, Pres. λέγω. 
ἐδύνα-ο, ἐδύνω, for ἐδύνασο, thou couldst, Pres. δύναμαι. 
yéve-oc for γενεσος, of the race, St. γεν ἐσ (δ 166). 

c) The rejection of a vowel between consonants in the 
middle of a word is called syncope (συγκοπή) : ἐ-πτ-ό-μην 
for ἐσπεττοτμην, J flew, St. rer ὯΝ 326, 34). Compare § 51, 
Obs. 2. . 


§ 62. 4. The doubling of a consonant. ‘This is rare, 


§ 60. Dialects —The Dorians retain τ : ¢avri=@aoi(v), they say. The 
older Att. less frequently : τήμερον = σήμερον, to-day. 

§ 61. Dialects—Syncope is more frequent in Homer: τίπτε for τίποτε, 
why ever? why? ἐκέκλετο = ἐ-κε-κελετο, he called, St. rer. 

ὃ 62. Dialects—In Homer simple consonants are readily doubled ; 
the mutes more rarely: ὅππως = Attic ὅπως; how; ὁπποῖος = Attic 
ὁποῖος, qualis ; ὕττι = Attic ὅτι, that ; the vocal consonants often: 


22 CHANGES AT THE END OF WORDS. § 63: 


when it has not arisen through the assimilations men- 
tioned above (δὲ 47, 506, 51, 56). The liquid p is the 
most. frequently doubled: ἔῤῥιψα for ἔριψα, 7 hurled ; 
ἄῤῥηκτος for ἄ-ρηκτος, not breakable, The aspirates can 
be doubled only by the corresponding tenuis: Βάκχος, 
Σαπφώ, Aric. 


τ. Changes of Sound at the end of a Word. 


§ 63. When a word ending in a vowel is followed by 
another beginning with a vowel, whether accompanied by 
a spiritus lenis or asper, there is a hiatus. The Greeks 
very often suffer the hiatus in prose; but frequently the 
hiatus is avoided, especially if the first word is a shorter 
one and of itself of little importance. This is done in 
thtee ways, that is, either by edésion (rejection of the final 
vowel), or by erasis (contraction of the two vowels), or. by 
synizesis (collapse of two syllables into one). 


ἔλλαβε = Attic ἔλαβε, he took; φιλομμειδής = Attic φιλομειδής, readily 

smiling ; ἐύννητος = Attic εὔ-νητος, well-woven ; ὅσσον = Attic ὅσον, how 
great ; νέκυσσι = Attic véxvor, to the corpses; ὀπίσσω = Attic ὀπίσω, 
back. On the contrary, Homer sometimes has a single p where 
the Attic has double: ὠκύροος Ξ-Ξ-Ξ ὠκύῤῥοος, swift-flowing. Often also 
both forms are usual together: ᾿Αχιλεύς and ᾿Αχιλλεύς, ᾿Οδυσεύς and 
᾿Οδυσσεύο. 


§ 63. Dialects—The Homeric dialect admits the hiatus in many 
cases: the most important are: 

1, The hiatus is only apparent in words with the digamma: κατὰ 

OiKoy for κατὰ Foixov, at home. 

"2. It is allowed after weak vowels in forms with which elision is 
not usual: παιδὶ ὄπασσεν, he gave to the son. 

3. It is softened by a pause or a ceesura after the first short syllable 
of the third foot: κάθησο, ἐμῷ δ᾽ ἐπιπείθεο μύθῳ, sit down, and obey my 
word ; τῶν οἱ ἕξ ἐγένοντο ἐνὶ μεγάροισι, of which six were born to him in 
the chambers. 

4. A long vowel or diphthong before another in the thesis be- 
comes short, and causes only an improper or weak hiatus: ’Arpeidai 
τε καὶ ἄλλοι ἐδκνήμιδες ᾿Αχαιοί, Ye Atride and ye other Marathi 
Arhanes WS FO FE, . Compare-§ 75, D., 2. 


δ᾽66. ELISION.—CRASIS. ee 23 


§ 64. 1. Llision, or the rejection of the final vowel, 
of which the apostrophe (§ 15) is the sign, occurs only 
with short final vowels, but never with v; most frequent- 
ly at.the end of dissyllabic prepositions, conjunctions, and 
adverbs: ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ, with him, for ἐπὶ αὐτῷ ; οὐδ᾽ ἐδύνατο, 
he could not even, ἀλλ᾽ ἦλθεν, but he came, less. fre- 
quently at the end of nouns and verbs: οἱ πάντ᾽ εἰςαγ- 
γέλλοντες, ὁ. 6., of πάντα εἰςαγγέλλοντες, Who reported the 
whole. 

Obs. 1.—The prepositions περί, round, ἄχρι and μέχρι, till, and the 

conjunction ὅτι, that, never suffer elision. 

2. In compounds also the elision occurs, without, however, being 
indicated by the apostrophe: ἐπ-έρχομαι, from ἐπι-έρχομαι, I come 
up; but περιέρχομαι, I go round. 

8. On the change of consonants occurring with elision (ἐφ᾽ ἡμέρᾳ), 
see § 52. 


§ 65. 2. Crasis (κρᾶσις, mixing) is governed, on the 


§ 64. Dialects—Elision is much more frequent with the poets than 
in prose; thus, not only « and « even in nominal and verbal forms 
are elided, but also the diphthongs a and οἱ, in the verbal termina- 
tions μαι, σαι, ται, σθαι, and in the forms μοι and τοι. In Homer, ε in 
ὅτι, that, is also sometimes elided. 

A change of the final vowel, occurring only in poets, is the apocope 
(ἀποκοπή). It is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word 
beginning with a consonant. The apocope is frequent in Homer with 
the prepositions ἀνά, κατά, παρά, and with the conjunction dpa, now, 
seldom with ἀπό and ὑπό: it takes place in compounds as well as 
at the meeting of two separate words. The ν of dvla) then suffers 
the changes described in ὃ 51; the τ of κατ(ά), the π᾿ of ἀπί(ό) and 
ὑπί(ό), are made like the following consonant: ἀνδύεται = ἀναδύεται, 
emerges; Kaw πεδίον --- κατὰ πεδίον, on the plain; κάλλιπεΞΞΞ κατέλιπε, left 
behind ; πάρθετο = παρέθετο, put before; ἀππέμψει Ξ-Ξ- ἀποπέμψει, will send 
away; κατθανεῖν = καταθαγεῖν, die. | 


§ 65. Dialects—Crasis in Homer is very rare, but very frequent in 
the Attic poets: 6. 5.5 ob =6 ἐξ, κὠδύρεται --Ξ- καὶ ὀδύρεται, and laments ; 
ὦναξ = ὦ ἄναξ, O king; χὠπόσοι = καὶ ὁπόσοι, and how many.—Herod. 
ὦὠλλοιξεοὶ ἄλλοι, the rest. The loss of a short initial vowel is sometimes 
indicated by the apostrophe (ὃ 15): μὴ ᾽γώ = μὴ ἐγώ, ne ego; ἤδη 
᾿ξέρχεται = ἤδη ἐξέρχεται, he is already coming out. 


24 SYNIZESIS. ~ 7 § 66. 


whole, by the laws given for contraction (ὃ 36-39). 1 
occurs chiefly after forms of the article, of the relative 
pronoun (especially 6, guod, and a, gu), after the prep-— 
osition πρό, for, before, Latin pro, and the conjunction 
καί, and. The syllable produced by crasis is necessarily 
long. The sign of crasis is the coronis (ὃ 16): τἀγαθά, 
bona, from τὰ ἀγαθά; τἄλλα, from τὰ ἄλλα, the other things ; 
τοὔνομα, the name, from τὸ ὄνομα ; ταὐτό, the same, for τὸ 
αὐτό. 


Obs. 1.—The rough breathing of the article or relative maintains 
its place in spite of crasis: ἄνήρ, the man, irregular for ὁ ἀνήρ, in 
which case the coronis disappears; in θοἰμάτιον, from τὸ ἱμάτιον, 
the dress, the spiritus asper has changed τ into θ (§ 52); so also 
θάτερον, irregular for τὸ ἕτερον, the other. 

"2. The new syllable, formed by crasis, has ¢ subscript only when ε 
is the last of the contracted vowels: καὶ ἐν, and in, becomes Kay, 
but καὶ εἴτα, and then, becomes κατα. ΐ 

On the accent with crasis, § 89. 


§ 66. 3. Synizesis (sinking, compare § 39) occurs at the 
meeting of two words only after a long vowel, especially 
after the conjunc Hams ἐπεί, OS, ἢ, or, ἦ, γι, μή, not, and 
after ἐγώ, 7. ἐπεὶ οὐ, as not; μὴ ἄλλοι, ne ΝΣ: ἐγὼ οὐ, 7 
not. It is perceptible eae in the poets, who reckon the 
two syllables as one. 


§ 67. Vo frreck word ends in any consonant except the 
vocal ones, Ἦ, ps and ¢ (€,~). The only exceptions are: 
the negative οὐκ (before consonants ov) and the preposition 
ἐκ, owt of (before vowels ἐξ), which attach themselves so 
closely to the following word that their « can hardly be 
looked upon as final. 
- When any other consonant, except these three, appears 
at the end of a word, it is usually rejected : 


μέλι, honey (mel), fot werer (Gen. pédir-oc) ἢ). ompare ὃ 1470. 
σῶμα, body, owpat (Gen. owpar-oc) 
ἦσαν, they were, “ noavr (compare Lat. erant). 


§ 68. MOVABLE CONSONANTS. : 25 


But mute Dentals in this case are often changed into 
vocal ¢: 

πρός for zpor, from προτί, to (Hom.). 

dog “ G00, “6061, give. 

τέρας “ repar, Gen. répar-oc, miracle. 


§ 68. Certain words and forms have, after a short vowel 
at the end, a movable v (v ἐφελκυστικόν). This v is used 
before words which begin with a vowel—by which the 
hiatus is avoided —and before longer pauses. Poets em- 
ploy it also before consonants, especially at the end of the 
word, to make it more sonorous. 

The words and forms which have a movable ν are the 
following : 


1. The Dat. Plur. in σι(ν): πᾶσιν ἔδωκα, 7 gave to all; 
but πᾶσι δοκεῖ οὕτως εἶναι, to all ἐξ scems to be so. 

2. The designations of place in σι(ν): ᾿Αθήνησιν ἦν, he 
was at Athens; but ᾿Αθήνησι τόδε ἐγένετο, this happened 
at Athens. 


3. The single words εἴκοσι(ν), twenty; πέρυσι(ν), last 
year; and παντάπασι(ν), entirely; εἴκοσιν ἄνδρες, twenty 
men ; but εἴκοσι γυναῖκες, twenty women. 


4, The third person Sing. in ε(ν): ἔσωσεν αὐτούς, he 
saved them; but ἔσωσε τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, he saved the 
Athenians. 


5. The third person Plur. as well as Sing. in σι(ν): λέ- 
γουσιν εὖ, they speak well, but λέγουσι τοῦτο, they say this ; 
δείκνυσιν ἐκεῖσε, he points there, but δείκνυσι τὸν ἄνδρα, he 
points out the man. 


§ 68. Dialects.—To the words which have a movable » there are 
added in Homer the adverbs of place in θε(ν) : ἄνευθε(ν), from afar ; 
πάροιθε(ν), from before, formerly ; the particles xé(v), Perhaps, and vi(y), 
NOW. 

The New-Ionic dialect, which admits the immediate succession of 
‘vowels, omits the movable ν. On the « in οὐκ before a spiritus asper, 
§ 52, Ὁ. 

B 


26 ον DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. § 69. 


§ 69. Obs. 1.—In like manner; οὐ, not, takes « only before vowels, 
which becomes y before the spiritus asper (ὃ 52): οὔ φησι, he says 
not; οὐκ αὐτός, not he himself; οὐχ οὕτως, not so. The « appears 
also in οὐκέτι and μηκέτι, NO More. . 5 . 

2. ἐκ, out of, is ἐξ before vowels (Lat. ex): ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, out of the 
city ; ἐξ ἀκροπόλεως, out of the acropolis or castle; ἐκλέγω, I speak 
out; ἐξέλεγον, I spoke out. 

3. Without any definite reason, the words οὕτως, thus (adverb of 
οὗτος, this), ἄχρις, μέχρις, till, very frequently lose their final ¢; but 
πολλάκις, many times, loses it only in the poets. 


Cuap. IV.—DIvision oF SYLLABLES AND THEIR 
QUANTITY. 


A. Dwision of Syllables. 


§ 70. The Syllables (συλλαθή, collection) in Greek words 
are divided according to the following rules. Every vowel 
which “stands ‘before another, but does not form a diph- 
thong with it, or collapse with it by synizesis (§ 39), is 
reckoned a separate syllable: i-atpdéc, physician, trisyl- 
labic. : 

§ 71. A consonant which stands between two vowels 
belongs to the second syllable: tye, has ; ov-roc, this ; 
i-xa-voc, capable. 

Two er more consonants usually belong to the fol- 
lowing vowel: ἁ-πλοῦς, simple; a-pi-ore-pdc, on the left 
hand ; ἔ-σχον, 7 had; ἀ-μνός, lamb ; ἐ-χθρός, inimical ; 
likewise double consonants: 6-~o-ya, J shall see; ἕ-ζω, 
L place. | » 

§ 72. Exceptions. 1. Liquids and nasals join the pre- 
ceding vowel: ἅρ-μα, carriage; ἀδελ-φός, brother ; καγ- 
χάζω, 7. laugh; ἔν-δον, within ; ἄμ-φω, both, ambo. μν 
only join the following vowel: κά-μνω, 7 sinffor. 2. When 
a consonant is doubled, the first belongs to the preceding, 
the second to the following syllable: ἵπ-πος, horse; Béd-. 
Aw, L throw ; Πύῤ-ῥος. The same takes place when aspi- 


OTe 5 0.00.7 oe QUANTITY. “ἡ 27 


rates follow the corresponding tenues: ᾿Ατ-θίς, Βάκ-χος, ἡ 
Σαπ-φώ. 

§ 73. Compounds are divided into the elements out of 
which they are formed: συν-έχω, 7 hold together; ἐξ-άγω, 
7 drive out. 


B. Quantity 


§ 74. With regard to the quantity (length or shortness) 
of syllables, the same rules, in general, hold good for the 
Greek as for the Latin. An important exception, how- 
ever, consists in one vowel before the other not needing to 
be short in Greek: θωή, penance ; λαός, people ; βέλτϊον, 
better. Nor do the special Latin rules for final ee 
hold good in Greek. 


ὃ 75. A syllable is long by nature when it contains 
a long vowel or diphthong: ὑμεῖς, you ; κρίνω, L decide ; 
Gow, Σ sing. The recognition of quantity in Greek is ren- 
dered much easier by the characters: δόμος, 700m, house ; 
δῶμα, house; in other cases by tlt accent (88. 83, 84); 
the rest can be learned only by practice and oom the 
lexicon. 


Obs.—Every contracted syllable must, of course, be long: ἄκων, un- 
willing = ἀέκων, ἵρός = ἱερός, holy. 


§ 76. A syllable is long by position when a vowel is fol- 


§ 74. Dialects.—Diphthongs and long vowels are very seldom short- 
ened before vowels in the same word: Hom: οἷος (qualis~ ~), and βέ- 
βληαι, with short 7. 

§ 75. Dialects—1. The quantity of the common yowels is very un- 
certain generally, but especially in Hom. ἴωμεν, let us go; “Ἄρες, "Apec, 
O Ares, Ares. 

2. A final syllable ending 1 in a long vowel or diphthong in Homer 
and the tragic choruses is shortened before a following vowel: οἴκοι 
ἔσαν, they were at home (~~~); ἡμένη ἐν, sitting in (~~~). Compare 
§ 63, Ὁ. 4. But those words which began with digamma (ὃ 34, D.) 
leave a preceding vowel long in Hom.: κάλλεϊ re στίλβων καὶ εἵμασιν 
Gr οτν Ὅ, glittering with beauty and garments. 


28 * QUANTITY. ae $77. 


* lowed by two or more consonants, or a double consonant, 
whether— 


a) both consonants or the double consonant stand in the 
same word: χάρμα, joy( Ὕ; ἕξις, meen("~); Κάστωρ( ); or 

ὁ) the first concludes the first word, and the rest begin 
the second: θεὸς dé, but God (~~); ἐν τούτῳ, meanwhile 
ΓΟ or 

6) both or the double consonant stand at the beginning | 
_of the second word: τὰ κτήματα, the goods (~~~); ὁ ζῶν, 
‘ the living one (-”). 

Obs.—When the vowel thus placed is already long by nature; this 
must be indicated in the pronunciation: the a in πράσσω, I act, 
sounds differently from that of τἄσσω, I arrange, though both 
words make a spondee in verse; that in μᾶλλον different from 
that of κἄλλος, beauty, though both form a trochee. 

§ 77. When a vowel short by nature stands before a 
mute with A, p, v, μ following, the syllable may be long or 
short: τέκνον, child (=~); τυφλός, blind (* “); τί δρᾷς, what 
art thou dowmg (=~)? 

The syllable, however, is necessarily long in the follow- 
ing cases : 


§ 78. a) when the mute stands at the end of the first, 
the liquid or nasal at the beginning of the second word: 
ἐκ νηῶν, out of the ships (~~~); and in compounds in which 
the mute belongs to the first element: ἐκλέγω, L speak out 
ἔτ} 

6) when a soft mute (3, γ, δ) is followed by A, pw, or v: 
βίβλος, book (—~); τάγμα, task (““); ἔχιδνα, snake (~~~). 


§ 77. Dialects—In Homer, a mute with X, p, ν, » following, almost 
regularly makes position: τέκνον τί κλαίεις, child, why weepest thou 
“anata )? ὕπνος πανδαμάτωρ, all-subduing sleep (~~ ~~~ ). Nay, even 
A, p, v, #, at the beginning of words, have often the power of length- 
ening the short final vowel of the preceding word: καλήν τε μεγάλην 
re, @ beautiful and great (“ἡ - Ὕ. 6 in the Stem dea (δεῖσαι), fear, 
and in δήν, long, has the same effect. 


ὃ 88... ACCENTS. 29 


CHap. V.—ACCENTS. e 


§ 79. The general rules for the accentuation of words 
are the following : 


1. Every word must have one, and can never » have more 
than gne principal accent, which is called simply the ac- 
cent: πολυπραγμοσύνη, busy occupation ; ἀπαρασκεύαστος, 
unprepared. On the designation of words according to 
the accent, see §§ 17, 19, 21. 


* § 80. 2. There are two kinds of accents, the sharp ac- 
cent or the acute (ὀξεῖα), and the lengthened or the czr- 
cumplex (περισπωμένη). On the mode of using both, see 
88. 17, 21. 


§ 81. 3. The acute may be upon long or short. syllables, 
the cirewmflex only upon such syllables as are long by 
nature: as, λέγω, 7 say; iyw,L cease; καλός, beautiful ; 
ἀληθής, true ; ἄνθρωπος, man ; κείμενος, lying ; κεῖται, he 
ies ; σῶμα; body ; εὖ, well. 


§ 82. 4. The acute accent can be only on one of the last 
three syllables, and on the last but two only when the Zast 
is short : ἄποικος, colonist, but not ἄποικου (Gen.); ἔλεγον, 
L said, but not ἔλεγην, L was said. 


§ 83.5. The cercwmflex can be only on one of the last 
two syllables, and on the last, but one only when the dasi 
is short by nature: σῦκον, fig, but not σύκου (Gen.); σῶμα, 
body, but not σῶματος (Gen.); πρᾶξις, act, but not πράξεις 
(Nom. Plur.). 


Obs. 1.—When the last syllable is long by position, it does not 
hinder the circumflex from being on the last syllable but one: 
avd aé, furrow, Gen. αὔλἄκος, but it does when it is long by na- 
ture as well as by position: θώραξ, breast-plate, Gen. θώρᾶκος. Com- 
pare § 145. 


2. Exceptions to 4 and 5 will be adduced separately in the chap- 
ters on inflexions. It is specially to be observed that most of 


80 3 ACCENTS: ὃ 84. 


the exceptions occur with the final syllables in a: and οἱ: ἄποικοι, 
although οἱ is long ; γνῶμαι, opinions ; τύπτεται, he is struck. Com- 
pare §§ 108, 122 D. 3, 138, 157, 229, 268. 


§ 84. 6. A last syllable but one, when long by nature, 
can have no other accent but the circumflex if the last is 
short by nature: φεῦγε, fice, not pebye ; ἦρχον, L reigned, 
not ἤρχον ; HALE, of the same age, not ἡλιξ (Gem. ἥλικος); 
Κρατῖνος, not Κρατίνος. It may, however, be: without an 
accent: εἰπέ, speak ; ἄνθρωπος, man. 

Obs, 1. —Apparent exceptions, such as ὥστε, 80 that, ἥδε, this, are ex- 

plained in § 94. . 


2. So fixed is the rule, apart from these cases, that the quantity of 
the final syllable, or of the last but one, may often be inferred 
from the accent: ἴθι (i), go; πρῶτα [ prima, Nom. Plur.] (ἃ) ; yu- 
ναῖκας (a), women, Acc. Plur.; γνώμας (a), opinions, Acc. Plur. 


§ 85. 7. Compound words have the accent on the last 
part but one of the word, as far as is possible according to 
§ 82, etc.: ἄπιθι, go away; ἄφιλος, friendless ; φιλόγυνος, 
Sriendly to women ; ἀπόδος, give back ; παρένθες, put in 
besides. (Compare § 359, Obs. 2.) | 


§ 86. The accent of a word is variously altered by the 
changes which a word undergoes, as well as by the cons 
nexion of a word with others in a sentence. That is: 


1. Every oxytone subdues its sharp tone when followed 
by another word, so that the grave takes the place of the 
acute. (Compare § 20.) 


$°87. -2..1In ἃ contac in the Berra of a word, the 
syllable produced by contraction acquires no accent if 
none of the syllables to be contracted had it: γένεος, yé- 
νους, 97 the race ; τίμαε, τίμα, honor. The accent of a con- 
tracted last syllable but one is manifest of itself from the 
general rules on accent; hence τιμῶντες, honoring (Nom. 
Plur.), from τιμάοντες, τιμώντων (Gen. Plur.), from τιμαόν- 
των (according to δὲ 83 and 84). <A contracted final syl- 
lable has | 


. § 91. ACCENTS. 31 


a) the circumflex, when the γε of the uncontracted 
syllables was accented : τιμάει; τιμᾷ, he honors ; χρυσέου, 
χρυσοῦ, of golden ; ‘ 

b) the acute, when the last was accented : ἑσταώς, ἑστώς, 
standing. 


§ 88. 3. With eliston (ὃ 64), oxytone prepositions and 
conjunctions entirely lose their accent; all other kinds of 
words throw it upon the previous svllable as acutes: ἐπ᾽ 
αὐτῷ, on him=zéni αὐτῷ; ; οὐδ᾽ ἐδυνάμην, L could not even= 
οὐδὲ ἐδυνάμην; εἴμ᾽ ᾿Οδυσεύς, Lam Odysseus -- εἰμὶ Ὀδυσεύς; 
ἕπτ᾽ ἦσαν, there were seven=inra ἧσαν. 


8 89. 4. With crasis (8 65) the accent of the first word 
is lost: τἀγαθά, bona=ra ἀγαθά ; θοϊμάτιον, the dress=rd 
ἱμάτιον. Only when paroxytones change the first sylla- 
ble by crasis into one long by nature, this receives a cir- 
cumflex: ra ἄλλα, alia, gives τἄλλα; τὸ ἔργον, the work, 
τοὔργον. 


On the changes of the accent in declension, see §§ 107-109; on the 
accent of verbs, see §§ 229, and 331-333.. 


§ 90. The dissyllabic prepositions, with the exception 
of ἀμφί, ἀντί, ava, διά, when placed after the nown or verb 
to which they belong, throw their accent on to the first 
syllable: τούτων πέρι, about those (περὶ τούτων); in like 
manner, when used adverbially, they include the substan- 
tive verb, as πάραΞεπάρεστι, it is there, near; ti=E*veortt, 
it 2s therein, is possible. ‘This drawing back of the accent 

. 1s called anastrophe. Compare ὃ 446. 


8. 91. Some words of one and of two syllables unite so 
closely with the preceding word that they throw their ac- 
cent on to it. Such words are called enclitics (ἐγκλιτικαὶ 


§ 90. . Dialects.—Prepositions, whose final syllable is lost by elision, 
have not the accent even when they occupy the position indicated 
in ὃ 90. Homeric τῇσι παρ᾽ εἰνάετες χάλκευον, among them I forged nine 


years long. 


' 


32 ENCLITICS. 8. 95. Ὁ 


Meas i. €., inclining words), and the throwing back of the 
accent +s eallad anclination. 


ὃ 92. The following are enclitics ¢ 


1. The indefinite pronoun τὶς, τὶ, some one, something, 
through all forms (§ 214). 


2. The three personal pronouns, in the forms poi, pol, 
μέ, mei, mihi, me; cov, σοί, σέ, tut, trbt, te; ov, οἵ, ἕ, sud, 
sibi, se; σφωΐν, to them two ; and opfor(1), to them. 

3. The Indicative Present of εἰμί, Z am, and of φημί, 
inquam, with the exception of the second Pers. Sing. εἶ 
and pre. 

4. The indefinite adverbs πού or ποθί, somewhere ; wh, 
somehow ; mot, somewhither ; ποθέν, from somewhere ; 
ποτέ, sometime , πώς, somehow ; πώ, yet. 


5. The particles γέ, quidem ; y τέ, and; τοί, truly , 
or νύ, now ; Hom. κέν or κέ, perhaps,I suppose; pa Pete 
then ; Hom, θήν, truly; πέρ, very; and δέ (meaning fo- 
ward, and as a demonstrative appendage). Compare § 212. 


§ 93. These words throw their accent back on the pre- 
ceding word, in the following manner: 


a) A preceding owytone leaves its sharp tone unsubdued 
(ὃ 20), and this then serves also for the enclitic: ἀγαθόν 
τι, something good αὐτός φησιν, he himself says. 


b) After a perispome the accent of the enclitic is entirely 


lost: ὁρῶ τινας, 7 see some ; εὖ ἐστιν, i is well; τιμῶ σε, 
LI honor thee. 


c) After a paroxytone, enclitics of one syllable entirely 
lose their accent; but those of two syllables retain their 
accent on the last syllable: φίλος μου, my friend ; λόγος 
τις, ὦ speech , but λόγοι τινές, some eens λόγων τινῶν 


(Gen. Plur.). 


§ 92. Dialects.—The Ionic additional form of εἴ τε εἴς; is enclitic, so 
also σφέας (Acc. Plur.), them = Att. σφᾶς, and piv, him, her, ὃ 205, Ὁ. 


8 97. 


ς.).5" 


ENCLIT UNIVER Ey 


ont as acute on the last syllable, which remains unsub- 
dued: ἄνθρωπός τις, ὦ man ; βέβαιοί εἰσιν, they are firm ; 
σῶμά γε, the body at least ; παῖδές τινες, some boys. 


é) Atona (ὃ 97) receive the accent of following enclitics as acutes: 
οὔ φησιν, he says not ; ὥς re, and how. 

§ 94. Obs—Several words of one syllable form one word with en- 
clitics following: thus, ὥςτε, so that ; εἴτε, sive ; οὔτε, Neue ; μήτε, 
neque ; οἵόςτε, capable ; ὅςτις, whoever ; ἤτοι, truly ; ee and yet ; 
to this also belongs the δέ mentioned in ὃ 92, 5: ὅδε, this one ; 


οἴκαδε, homewards, - These words ysis partly apparent exceptions 
to §§ 79 and 84. 


§ 95. a ) When several enclitics follow one another, each 
throws its accent upon the preceding: εἴ τίς μοί φησί ποτε; 
af any one ever says to me. 


§ 96. The enclitics in certain cases retain their accent 
(become orthotoned ), viz. : 


1. when an enclitic forms the first word in the sen- 
tence, and therefore has nothing on which to throw its 
accent: τινὲς λέγουσι, some say. This position, however, 
is rare. 


2. when an enclitic is made emphatic: σὲ λέγω, 7] mean 
you—no one else; εἰ ἔστιν, tf ut is really so. When ἔστι 
denotes exist, be allowed, possible, it retains the accent, 
and that, too, on the last syllable but one: ἔστι θεός, there 
is ὦ God ; οὐκ ἔστιν, ἐξ is not allowed, not possible. Com- 
pare § 315, Obs. 2. 


ee . 5 , 9 4 ~~ - 
3. After elision: ταῦτ᾽ “ἔστι ψευδῆ, this 18 false=ravra 
᾿ ἐστι Ψευδῆ. 
4. Enclitics of two syllables, in the case mentioned 
ἃ 93, 6. 


§ 97. Atona, 2. e., words without accent, also called pro- 


clitics, or inclining forward, are several words of one syl- 
B 2 


84 - ATONA. ἐξ 8.98:. 


lable, which have so little independence that, in regard to 
accent, they combine with the following word. 

They are the following : 

1. of the article, the forms ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, ai; 

2. the prepositions, ἐν (im, with the Dat.), ἐς or εἰς (into, 
with the Acc.), ἐκ or ἐξ, out of; | 

3. the conjunctions, εἰ, ¢f, and we, how, that ; the latter 
also in its use as preposition Zo ; 

4. the negative ov or οὐκ (οὐχ). 


0bs.—od xi, a more emphatic οὐ, is always accented. 


§ 98. Atona receive the accent only in two cases, viz. : 


a) when they are at the end of a sentence, and therefore 
have no following word on which they can rest: φὴς ἢ οὔ ; 
do you say so or not? so always we when placed after the 
word with which a comparison is made: θεὸς ὥς, ike ὦ 
god, Hom. ; : 

6) when followed by an enclitic, which throws back its 
accent: ov φησι, he says not. Compare ὃ 98, 6. : 


§ 99. The following particles are distinguished accord- 
ing to the accent: 7, than, or, and 7, truly, or interroga- 
tive, Lat. nwm ; apa, then, consequently, and dpa as an in- 
terrogative ; νῦν, now, and enclitic vu(v), now, particle of 
transition; we, how, and ὥς, so; οὐκοῦν, therefore, and 
οὔκουν, not therefore. 


§ 100. a“. DECLENSION, 35 


1. INFLEXION. 


A. INFLEXION OF NOUNS AND PRONOUNS. 
- 


Cap. VI.—DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES AND 
ADJECTIVES. 


§ 100. Inflexion is the change which nouns, pronouns, 
and verbs undergo to indicate their relation in a sentence. 

A distinction must be made in inflexion between Stem 
and Termination. Stem is the fixed part, Termination 
the changeable part which is appended to the Stem to in- 
dicate the different relations. 

The inflexion of nouns and pronouns is called Declen- 
sion. As the nominal and pronominal Stems are modified 
according to Cases, the terminations added to them are 
called Case-endings. The form which arises from a case- 
ending being added to a Stem is called the Case-form. 
Thus πράγματτος is a case-form of the Stem πραγματ," 
formed by means of the case-ending -ος. 

Great care must be taken not to ; commend the Stem and 
the Nominative case. The Nominative is itself a case- 
form, often quite different from the Stem. Thus the Nom- 
inative of the Stem πραγματ is πρᾶγμα; thing. λόγος, 
speech, is the Nominative of the Stem Aoyo, which appears, 
for example, in the compound word λογογράφο-ς, ὦ writer 
of speeches.* 

The Greeks distinguish in the Declension: 

1. Three Numbers: the Singular for one, the Dual for 
two, the Plural for several. 

2. Five Cases : Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusa- 
tive, Vocative. The Dual has only two case-forms, one for 
the Nom., Acc., and Voc., the other for the Gen. and Dat. 
In the Pls, the Voc. is ἐἰπχάνα like the Nom. 

3. Three Deters: Masculine, Feminine, Neuter. 


* The Stem will always be left unaccented. 


96 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. | § 101. 


§ 101. The gender is known: 


1. From certain general characteristics of sex, in which 
the Greek language almost entirely coincides with the 
Latin. Besides the rule founded in the nature of things, 
that the designations of male persons are masculine, those 
of females feminine, the following rules are to be observed : 


§ 102. a) The names of rzvers and winds (gods of rivers 
and winds), and months (6 μήν, the month), are masculine : 
ὁ Εὐρώτας, the River Kurotas ; ὁ Ζέφῦρος, the west wind ; 


¢ 


ὁ “Ἑκατομβαιών, the month Hecatombeon. 


§ 103. 6) The names of trees, lands (ἡ γῆ, the land), 
islands (ἡ νῆσος, the island), and most cities, are femi- 
nine: ἡ δρῦς, the oak; ἡ ᾿Αρκαδία, Arcadia; ἡ Λέσβος, 
the island of Lesbos ; ἡ Κολοφών, the city of Colophon. 
Most abstract substantives also, ὦ. 6.. those which denote a 
condition, relation, act, or property, are feminine: ἡ ἐλπίς, 
hope; ἡ νίκη, victory; ἡ δικαιοσύνη, righteousness ; ἡ 
- ταχυτήῆς, quickness. 

§ 104. 6) Many names οἵ fruits are neuter : τὸ σῦκον, the 
Jig ; most diminutives also, both of masculine and feminine 
words: τὸ γερόντιον, dimin. of ὁ γέρων, the old man; τὸ 
γύναιον, dimin. of ἡ γυνή, the woman. Farther, every name 
and word which is adduced merely as a word: τὸ ἄνθρωπος, 
the name “man ;” τὸ δικαιοσύνη, the idea of “righteous- 


ness ;” and the names of the letters, τὸ ἄλφα, τὸ otypa. 


§ 105. 2. From the ending of the Stem the gender is 
known according to §§ 113, 125, 137-140. 

3. In Declension, the Neuter may be distinguished from 
the Masculine and Feminine, for all Neuters have 

ΟἿ no Accusative or Vocative distinct from the Nom. 

b) no ¢ as case-sign of the Nom. Sing. 

6) the ending a in Nom. Acc. and Voce. PI. 


§ 106. The Greek language, like the English, employs 
the definite Article. The forms of the Article are the 
following : 


§ 109. ACCENT IN DECLENSION. 37 
Masc. Fem. Neut. 
Singular. 

Nom. ὃ ἡ τό the. 

Gen. τοῦ τῆς τοῦ of the. 

Dat. τῷ τῇ τῷ to the. 

Ace. τόν τήν τό the. 
Dual. 
NV. A. τώ τά Or τώ τώ the. 

G. D. τοῖν ταῖν Or τοῖν τοῖν of or to the. 
Plural. 

Nom οἱ αἱ τά the. 

Gen, TOV TOV τῶν of the. 

Dat. τοῖς ταῖς τοῖς. to the. 

Ace. τούς τάς ͵ τά the. 


The following general rules on accentuation apply to all 
the declensions of substantives. 


§ 107. a) The accent remains unaltered on the syllable 
on which it stood in the Nominative as long as the gen- 
eral laws of accent allow: ἄνθρωπος, man, ἄνθρωπε (Voc.); 
σῦκον, jig, σῦκα (Nom. Plur.). Exceptions, δδ 121 and 142, 
181, 2. 

6) But when the original accentuation becomes impos- 
sible by the length of the final syllable or by increase at 
the end, the accent is shifted only as near to the end of the 
word, and is changed only as much, as is absolutely neces- 
sary: ἄνθρωπος, man, ἀνθρώπου (Gen. Sing.), ἀνθρώποις 
(Dat. Plur.); σῶμα, body, σώματος (Gen. Sing.), σωμάτων 
(Gen. Plur.); τεῖχος, wall, τείχους (Gen. Sing.). 

§ 108. 6) The terminations οἱ and a are not considered 
long in regard to accent; hence ἄνθρωποι, γνῶμαι (γνώμη, 
opinion). 

109. d@) The Genitives and Datives of all numbers, 


if the last syllable is long, can never have the acute upon 
this syllable, but only the circumflex: ποταμοῦ, Gen. Sing. 


. k 
38 THE A DECLENSION. ᾿ § 110. 


of ποταμός, river ; τιμῇ, Dat. Sing. of τιμή, honor ; ποδῶν, 
Gen. Plur. of πούς, foot ; μηνοῖν, Gen. Dual of μήν, month. 

§ 110. Originally there was only a single declension, for 
which reason much has still remained common, which we 
shall put together below, ὃ 1735. But we distinguish 7100 
Principal Declensions according to the ending of the 
Stems: 

1. the Hirst Principal Declension (vowel declension), 
which comprehends the Stems ending in a-and 0; and 

2. the Second Principal Declension (consonant declen- 
sion), which comprehegds the Stems ending in consonants, 
but also those in the soft W6wels :, v, in diphthongs, and a 
small number of Stems in o. 


First PRINCIPAL DECLENSION.. ὡ 
( Vowel-declension.) 


δ 111. an first principal declension is subdivided into 
two, viz. 
A. The A ΣΝ, 
B. The O Declension. 


What is common to both is put together below, § 134. 


A. THe A DECLENSION 
(commonly called the First Declension). 


§ 112. The A Declension comprehends those words 
whose Stems end in a. In certain cases, however, this a 
becomes n. Henée the A Declension of the Greeks cor- 
responds both to the A, or first, and to the E, or fifth, De- 
clension of the Latin language. 


§ 113. The A Declension contains only Masculines a 
Feminines. The two genders are most easily cin 
in the Nom. Sing., in which the masculines take ς, the 
feminines no case-ending. Hence the terminations of 


8. 115. 


THE A DECLENSION. 


39 


the Nom. Sing. are in the feminine a, ἡ, in the masculine 


ac, ἧς. ; 
ὃ 114. 1. Heminines. 
Examples. | χώρα, land. γλῶσσα, tongue. | τιμή, honor. 
Stems. x pa [terra] γλωσσα τῖμα 
Singular. 
Nom. xwpa [terra] γλῶσσᾶ τιμὴ 
Gen. χώρᾶς γλώσσης τιμῆς 
Dat. χώρᾳ [terre] γλώσσῃ τιμῇ [re-i] 
Ace, xwpa-y [terra-m | γλῶσσᾶ-ν τιμή-ν [re-m] 
Voe. χώρα [terra] γλῶσσἄ τιμή 
Dual. 
We AV. χώρᾶ γλώσσα τιμά 
G. D. χώραιν γλώσσαιν τιμαῖν 
Plural. 
Nom. χῶραι [terre] γλῶσσαι τιμαί 
Gen. χωρῶν γλωσσῶν TIDY 
Dat. χώραις γλώσσαις τιμαῖς 
Ace, χώρᾶς [terras] γλώσσᾶς τιμάς 
Voe. χῶραι [terre] γλῶσσαι. τιμαί 
Examples for Declensicn. 
θεά, goddess. δόξα, opinion. γῆ, earth, 
σκιά, shadow. πύλη, gate. γνώμη, opinion. 
Bia, force. 


§ 115. In certain cases in the Singular, but never in the 
Dual and Plural, a becomes n. Hence the following rules: 

1. In order to form the Nom. Sing. from the Stem, or 
from a given case-form of the Dual or Plural: 


δὲ 110-117. Dialects—1. The Doric dialect never canes a into n: 
τιμᾶ, τιμᾶς ; γλῶσσα, γλώσσᾶς. 

2. The Ionic dialect changes every long a in the Singular into 7: 
σοφίη, πέτρη, βασιλείης, μοίρῃ. Short a is generally unchanged, as βασί- 
λειᾶ, μοῖρᾶν : but in abstract substantives in -ad, -οιἄ, a is likewise 
changed into n: ἀληθείη, truth, Att. ἀλήθεια ; εὐπλοίη, good passage ; and 
also in κνίσση, steam from fat, Σκύλλη. The ἃ remains in θεά and some 
proper names. } 

3. The Voc. of νύμφη, young woman, is in Homer νύὐμφὰ. 


40 THE A DECLENSION. § 116. 


a) a remains in the Nom. Sing. after «, 1, or p (ὃ 41): 
St. copia, Nom. Sing. σοφία, wisdom ; Dat. Plur. πέτραις, 
Nom. Sing. πέτρα, rock. 

b) a remains in the Nom. Sing. after o,.and after the 
double consonants Z, £, ψ, oo (or τ τ), AA, as well as in the 
feminine designations in -arva: δ, ἁμαξἕα, Nom. Sing. 
ἅμαξα, carriage; Gen. Plur. λεαινῶν, Nom. Sing. λέαινα, 
lioness. : 

c) After other vowels and consonants a is generally 
changed into ἡ in the Nom. Sing.: St. Boa, Nom. Sing. 
Bon, cry; Acc. Plur. γνώμας, Nom. Sing. γνώμη (opinion). 

More important exceptions are: to a) κόρη, girl; κόῤῥη, temple ; 

δείρη, neck—to b) ἔρση, dew—to ¢) στοά, hall; χρόα, color; τόλμα, 
boldness ; δίαιτα, mode of life. 3 

§ 116. 2. In order to form the other cases in the Singu- 
lar according to a given Nom. Sing. : 

a) If the Nom. Sing. ends in ἡ, this letter remains 
throughout the Sing. : δίκη, Justice, δίκης, δίκῃ, δίκην, δίκη. 

b) Ifthe Nom. Sing. ends in a, this letter remains always 
in the Ace. and Voc. : ἅμαξα, ἅμαξαν. 

c) Ifthe Nom. Sing. ends in a, this letter remains αἶϑο in 
the Gen. and Dat. when preceded by a vowel or p (§ 41): 
Nom. Sing. σοφία, wisdom, Gen. σοφίας ; Nom. Sing. στοά, 
colonnade, Dat. στοᾷ : also in some proper names with long 
a: Nom. Sing. ΔΛήδα, Gen. Λήδας ; and in μνᾶ (contracted 
from pvaa), Gen. μνᾶς. 

d) Otherwise a of Nom. Sing. becomes ἡ in Gen. and 
Dat.: Nom. Sing. μοῦσα, Gen. μούσης ; Nom. Sing. δίαιτα, 
Dat. διαίτῃ. 


§ 117. For the guantity of ain the Nom. and Ace. Sing., 
the general rule is: a purwim (after vowels) and a after p is 
long, every other a is short: Oca, goddess ; ἅμιλλα, fight. 


The exceptions are generally shown by the accent (ὃ 84, Obs. 2). 
The most important are the fem. designations in -rpra and τεια: 
ψάλτριᾶ, female player ; βασίλειᾶ, queen (but βασιλείᾳ, dominion) ; 
and several words with diphthongs in the last syllable but one, 
as σφαϊρᾶ, ball; εὔνοιἄ, good will ; poipa, fate. 


8. 120. THE A DECLENSION. 41 


§ 118. The Gen. Plur. has the ending ων, which com- 
bines with the Stem a to form dwyv, contr. dv. This is the 
reason that the Gen. Plur. of all words in this. declension 
has the circumflex: χώρα, χωρῶν ; λέαινα, λεαινῶν (Excep- 
tions, ὃ 181. Compare ὃ 123). 

§ 119. The Dat. Plur. originally ended in σι, before 
which « is added to the a of the Stem. The accu thus 
formed is usually shortened into auc, but the original form 
is found even in Attic writers in poetry and prose. (Com- 
pare § 128, D.) 

§ 120. 2. Masculines. 


Examples. | vedvidc, youth. | πολέτης, citizen. | Ἑρμῆς, god Hermes. 
Stems. vedvia | woXtra ‘Ep py (from. ‘Eppea) 
Singular. 
Nom. νεᾶνίἄ-ς πολίτη-ς Ἑρμῆ-ς 
Gen. νεᾶνίου πολίτου * | Ἑρμοῦ 
Dat. vedvig πολίτῃ Ἑρμῇ 
Ace. veavia-v πολίτη-ν Ἑρμῆ-ν 
, Voe. νεᾶνίᾷ πολῖτα. Ἑρμῆ 
Dual. 
NL. A.V. | vedvia πολίτα ‘Eppa, statues of 
Hermes. 
G. D. »νεᾶνίαιν πολίταιν . | Ἑρμαῖν 
Plural. . 
Nom. νεᾶνίαι πολῖται Ἑρμαῖ 
Gen. νεᾶνιῶν πολιτῶν Ἑρμῶν 
Dat. νεᾶνίαις πολίταις Ἑρμαῖς 
“ Ace, veadviac πολίτας Ἑρμᾶς 
Voe. vedviat πολῖται Ἑρμαῖ 
e ; 


ὃ 118. Dialects.—4. The -awy of the Gen. Plur. is preserved in the 
Hom. dialect: κλισιάων (κλισία, tent), ἀγοράων (ἀγορά, speech) ; but -e wv 
also occurs, in which case ε is generally lost by synizesis (ὃ 39): za- 
σέων, of all, fem. 

The Dorians contract -awy into ἂν (ὃ 87, D.3): θεᾶν, dearum. 


8 119.- Dialects.—5. The Dat. Plur. in Ionic ends in σι (v), -’ς (but 
also i in the Attic -aic): κλισιῴσι, πέτρῃς. 


42 THE A+ DECLENSION. § 121. 


Examples for Declension. 


rapiac, treasurer. στρατιώτης, warrior. ἀδολέσχης, babbler. 
Νικίας, Nicias. παιδοτρίβης, wrestling- ᾿Αλκιβιάδης. 
κριτής, judge. master. 


§ 121. In the Masculines, as well as in the Feminines, 
when a vowel or p precedes, the a of the Stem remains 
and is long; after every other letter it becomes ἡ in the 
‘Nom. Dat. and Acc. Sing. 

Those words which in the Nom. Sing. end in rn-e, 
names of peoples, and compound words, have a short in the 
Voc. Sing.: πολῖτα, Ilépoa (Nom. Sing. Πέρση-ς, Persian); 
yewuérpa (Nom. Sing. γεωμέτρη-ς, land-measurer). The 
Voc. δέσποτα (Nom. Sing. δεσπότη-ς, lord) draws back the 
accent, contrary to ὃ 107, ὦ, to the first syllable. All oth- 
ers have ἡ in the Vocative: Κρονίδη (Nom. Sing. Kpo- 
νίδη-ς). 


§ 122. The Declension of the Masculines is distinguished 
from that of the Feminines : 


1. in the Nom. Sing. by ¢ being added to the ΒΗ - 
2. by the Gen. Sing. ending in ov. 


Obs.—The termination of the Gen. Sing. of the masculines is prop- 
erly -o, which, with the a of the Stem, forms -ao (see the Homeric 
dialect); by weakening a to ε (δ 118, 02) and contraction (ὃ 37) 


arises ov: woXirdo (πολιτεο), πολίτου. 


δὲ 121 and 122. Dialects—1. The Epic dialect in some words omits 
the ¢ of the Nom. Sing., in which cases the a remains short: ἱππότᾶ, 
horseman ; νεφεληγερέτἄ, cloud-gatherer. * (Compare Lat. poéta, scriba.) 

2. The Dorians also in the masculines put ἃ for n, and contract @o 
into ἃ. (δὲ 24, D.; 37, D.3.) 

3. Homer has three forms in the Gen. Sing. : 

a) the original -ἄο : ’Arpeidao ; 

b) -ew with the quantity transposed (where ε is lost by synizesis, 
δὲ 37, D., 39, D.): ᾿Ατρείδεω. The accent remains unchanged, in spite 
of the ὦ in the final syllable. The New-Ionic form is the same. 

ce) τω by contraction: Ἑρμείω (Nom. Sing. ‘Eppeia-¢ = Attic iia 

βορέω (Nom. Sing. βορέᾶς). Compare ὃ 37, a. 


8 125. | ‘THE Ο DECLENSION. — 43 


βοῤῥᾶς (contracted from Bopéa-c, north wind), contracts the original 
do in the Gen. Sing., after Doric fashion, into ἃ: βοῤῥᾶς The 
same takes place with some Doric and Roman proper names, 
and a few other words: Σύλλας, Sulla ; ὀρνιθοθήρας, fowler, Gen. 
Sing. a. 

§ 123. In the Dual and Plural the Declension of the 

Masculines is the same as that of the Feminines. 
Exceptions to the accentuation prescribed in § 118 are χρήστη-ς, 


usurer , ἐτησίαι, trade-winds, Gen. Plur. χρήστων (χρηστῶν in the O 
declension, from χρηστός, good) and ἐτησίων. 


B. THe O DECLENSION 
(commonly called the Second Declension). 


§ 124. The O Declension comprehends those words 
whose Stems end in o, together with a few whose Stems 
~ end in ὦ (ὃ 132). It answers to the o- or Second Declen- 
sion in Latin. 


§ 125. The O Declension is the complement of the A 
Declension in regard to gender. It contains J/asculines 
and WVeuters, but only few Leminines. 

The termination of the Masculines and Feminines in the 
Nom. Sing. is o-c, that of Neuters o-v [ Lat. w-s, u-m}. 

The Masculines and Feminines are declined alike; the 
Neuters are distinguished from them (compare § 105) only 
by— 

1. The Nom. and Voce. Sing. taking the Accusative end- 
ing v: δῶρο-ν (gift) [donu-m |. 

2. The Nom. Acc. and Voc. Plur. ending in a: δῶρα 
[dona]. 


44 THE Ο. DECLENSION. § 126. 


§ 126. 
Examples, | ὁ ἄνθρωπο-ς, man ἡ 606-¢, Way.| τὸ δῶρο-ν, Gift. 
Stems. ἀνθρωπο ὁδο δωρο 
Singular. 
Nom. ἄνθρωπο-ς [dominu-s] | ὁδό-ς δῶρο-ν [donu-m] 
Gen. ἀνθρώπου ὁδοῦ δώρου 
Dat. ἀνθρώπῳ [domino] ὁδῷ δώρῳ [dono] 
Ace. ἄνθρωπο-ν [dominu-m] | ὁδό-ν δῶρο-ν [donu-m] 
Voce. ἄνθρωπε [domine] | dé δῶρο-ν [donum-] 
Dual. υ 
Ν. A.V. | ἀνθρώπω ὁδώ δώρω 

σ. D. ἀνθρώποιν ὁδοῖν δώροιν 

Plural. 

Nom. ἄνθρωποι [domini] ὁδοί δῶρα [dona] 
Gen. ἀνθρώπων ὁδῶν δώρων 

Dat. ἀνθρώποις ὁδοῖς δώροις 

Ace. ἀνθρώπους [domino-s] ὁδούς δῶρα [dona] 
Voe. ἄνθρωποι [domini] ὁδοί δῶρα [dona] 

Examples for Declension. 

θεός, God. ποταμός, 7106). σῦκον, 770. 

νόμος, law. πόνος, trouble. μέτρον, Measure. 
κίνδυνος, danger. βίος, life. ἱμάτιον, dress, 
ταῦρος, bull. θάνατος, death. 


§ 197. Obs.—The Feminines are partly known by the general rules 

already given (δὲ 101, 103) : ἡ φηγός, esculent oak ; ἡ ἄμπελος, vine ; 
,. ἡ νῆσος, island ; ἡ ἤπειρος, continent ; Κόρινθος. 

The following also are feminine: ᾿ 

1, The names of different kinds of earth and stones: ψάμμος, sand ; 
κόπρος, dung; γύψος, chalk ; πλίνθος, brick ; σποδός, ashes ,. ψῆφος, 
pebble ; βάσανος, toush-atone. - 

2. Different words for way: ὁδός, κέλευθος, ἀτραπός, path ; ἁμαξιτός, 
carriage-road, In the same manner, i τάφρος, dike, but ὁ στενωπός, 
narrow way. 

3. Words conveying the idea of a tins χήλόι, chest of drawers ; 
γνάθος, jaw ; κιβωτός, chest ; σορός, coffin; ληνός, wine-vat ; κάρδο- 
πος, kneading-trough ; κάμινος, oven. 

4. Several adjectives used as substantives: ἡ διάμετρος (supply 
γραμμή, line), diameter; σύγκλητος (supply βουλή, council), meeting 
of the council. 


§ 130. THE O DECLENSION. 45 


5. Single words: βίβλος, book; ῥάβδος, staff; διάλεκτος, dialect ; 
γνόσος, disease ; δρόσος, dew ; δοκός, beam. Many designations of 
personal beings are common, that is, with the same form they 
are masculine when they denote a male, feminine when they 
denote a female: ὁ θεός, god ; ἡ θεός, goddess ; ὁ ἄνθρωπος and ἡ 
ἄνθρωπος. . 


§ 128. The ending of the Ge. Sighs is -o, which, with 


the o of the Stem, is contracted into ov (compare § 122): 
ἀνθρωπο-ο-- ἀνθρώπου. 


§ 129. The Nominative form is sometimes used instead 
of the Vocative form: the Vocative of θεός is always the 
same as the Nom.: ὦ θεός [ Lat. dews|: ἀδελφός, brother, 
has ἄδελφε in the Vocative with the accent thrown back. 


Contracted Declension. 


§ 130. Several words which have ε or o before the last 
letter of the Stem may contract these vowels with the o. 
The rules of §§ 36 and 37 are here applied: ea, however, 
contrary to § 38, is contracted into a. 


§ 128. Dialects —The Epic dialect in the Gen. Sing. has the older 
form co for the ending; co with o of the St. produces oo: ἀνθρώποιο, 
πεδίοιο (πεδίο-ν), field. We also, however, find the Attic ov. 

Other Epic peculiarities are: -owy ow in the Gen. and Dat. Dual: 
ὦμοιιν (ὦμος, shoulder) :----οισι(ν) = ore in the Dat. Plur.: ἀνθρώποισι(ν), 
which is also New-Ionic, and is found even in Attic writers (compare 
§ 119). 

§ 180, pidllts. —The Ionic dialect leaves the forms uncontracted. 


46 CONTRACTED Ο DECLENSION. § 131. 
Examples. ὁ voi-c, sense : τὸ ὀστοῦν; bone. 
Stems. v00 ὀστεο 
Singular. | | 
Nom. νόο-ς νοῦς ὀστέο-ν ὀστοῦ-ν 
Gen. a νόου vou ὀστέου ὀστοῦ 
Dat. vow νῷ ὀστέῳ ὀστῷ 
Ace. γνόο-ν γνοῦ-ν ὀστέο-ν ὀστοῦ-ν 
Voe. ve νοῦ ὀστέο-ν ὀστοῦ-ν 
Dual. 
N. A. V. vow γνώ ὀστέω ὀστώ 
G. D. voow γνοῖν ὀστέοιν ὀστοῖν 
Plural. 
Nom. voot vot ὀστέα ὀστᾶ ᾿ 
Gen. γόων νῶν ὀστέων ὀστῶν 
Dat. . γόοις voic ὀστέοις ὀστοῖς 
Ace. γόους γοῦς ὀστέα ὀστᾶ 
Voe. voot vot ὀστέα ὀστᾶ 


Examples for Declension. 


πλοῦς, VOYAGE. ῥοῦς, stream. ἀδελφιδοῦς, brother's son. 


§ 131. Some irregularities of accentuation occur in the 
contraction, viz. : 


1. the Nom. Dual is made oxytone, contrary to ὃ 87. * 
2. compound words leave the accent on the last syllable 
but one, also contrary to § 87: περίπλῳ, Dat. of περίπλους, 
circumnavigation, for περιπλῷ, from -6y. | 
3. the word xaveov, basket, is contracted into arovv, con~ 
trary to § 87. . 
On contracted adjectives, see § 183. 


Attic Declension. 


§ 132. A small number of words, instead of the short 
QO-sound (0), have the long (w). This ὦ at the end of the 


§ 131. Dialects—A Gen. ending -o appears in Homer in Πετεῶ-ο, 
Gen. Sing. from the Nominative Merew-¢. 


§ 134. ATTIC Ὁ DECLENSION. ἡ 4} 


Stem goes through all the cases, but at the same time takes 
the case-endings as far as possible. Most of these words 
have ε before w, and for -ew there also occurs the additional 
_ form -ao: νεώ-ς, temple, together with vad-c; Asw-c, people, 
together with Aad-¢ (compare ὃ 37, Ὁ. » This Declension 
is called the Attic. 

On adjectives in w-c¢, see ὃ 184; on some words which 
fluctuate between this and the second principal declension, 
~ see ὃ 174, 


Examples. ὁ νεώ-ς, temple. τὸ ἀνώγεω-ν, Upper room. 
Stems, VEW ἀνωγεω 
Singular. 
Nom. VEW-C _ ἀνώγεω-ν 
"Gen. vEew ἀνώγεω 
Dat. νεῴ ᾿ ἀνώγεῳ 
Ace. νεώ-ν ἀνώγεω-ν 
Dual. 
IN, Ae Vs γνεώ ¢ ἀνώγεω 
G. D. νεῴν ἀνώγεῳν 
Plural. 
Nom. vey ἀνώγεω 
Gen. νεών ἀνώγεων 
Dat. vEws ἀνώγεῳς 
Acc. ᾿ νεώς ἀνώγεω 


Another example: κάλως, rope. 


§ 133. The accentuation in these words has a twofold 
irregularity, viz.: Ὁ 

1. ew passes always for only one syllable in regard to ac- 
cent: Μενέλεως, apparently contrary to § 82; 
- 2. even upon the Genitives and Datives, when they are 
accented, the accent is put, not as a circumflex, but as an 
acute, contrary to § 109. 


§ 134. The A and O Declensions, that is, the Vowel or 
First Principal Declension, have the following points. in 
common : 


48 CONSONANT DECLENSION. δ᾽ 135: 


1. the masculines have in the Nom. Sing. the ending -c. 

2. the mascylines have in the Gen. Sing. ($$ 122, 128) 
the ending -ov. 

3. all three genders have subscriptum with a long vowel | 
in the Dat. Sing. 

4. all three genders have -ν in the Acc. Sing. 

5. all three genders have the Stem vowel lengthened i in 
the Nom. Acc. and Voce. Dual. 

6. all three genders affix -ἰν to the Stem vowel in the ᾿ 
Gen. and Dat. Dual. 

7. all three genders have -wy in the Gen. Plur. 

8. all three genders affix -ow or ¢ with preceding : to the 
Stem vowel in the Dat. Plur. 

9. the masculines and feminines affix -ἰ to the Stem vowel 
in the Nom. Plur. 

10. the masculines and feminines affix -¢ (for ve) in the 
Acc. Plur., lengthening the Stem vowel to compensate for 
the v dropped (ὃ 42). ‘ 

The difference, therefore, is only in the formation of the 
Gen. Sing. of the feminines and in the accentuation of the 


Gen. Plur. 


SECOND PRINCIPAL DECLENSION. 


CONSONANT-DECLENSION 
(commonly called the Third Declension). 


§ 135. The Second Principal Declension comprehends 
all the Stems which end in consonants, the soft vowels « 
and v, or diphthongs, and a small number of Stems in ὁ 
(Nom. ὦ). The Stem is best recognized in the Gen. Sing., 
where what remains after rejecting the termination ὁ ¢ may 
generally be considered as the Stem: Gen. λέοντ-ος, St. 
Acavt (Nom. λέων, ion); Gen. φύλακτος, St. fuher (Nom. 
φύλαξ, guard ) 


§ 139. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 49 


Hence, for the exact recognition of a word of this declension, not 
only the Nominative, but also the Stem or the Genitive is neces- 
sary: as, Nom. δαίς, St. dar, or Gen. δαιτός, meal [Lat. rea, St. reg, 
or Gen. regis]. 

To the second principal declension correspond in Latin the third 
and fourth declensions. In it the case-endings usually appear 
pure, ὦ. ¢., not mixed up with the end of the Stem. 

The Stems ending in the soft vowels follow the third declension, 
because the soft vowels (§ 35, 1) can be used together with the 
vowels of the terminations: Gen. zirv-o¢ (Stem πιτυ, Nom. zirv-c, 
pine-tree). In the Stems ending in diphthongs, the v is some- 
times resolved into F: for example, the Stem βου (Nom. βοῦ-ς, 
oa) was originally in some forms BoF (Latin bov), as Gen. BoF-6¢ 
(=bov-is). See § 35, Obs. The O Stems have probably lost a 
final consonant. 

§ 136. The Second Principal Declension comprehends 

all three genders. 

The Weuters may be recognized by the inflexion, accord- 
ing to ὃ 105, from their having the Nom. and Acc. alike, 
and these cases in the Plur. always with the ending -a: 
σώματ-α (St. σωματ, Nom. Sing. σῶμα, body). 

§ 137. For determining the gender from the Stem, the 
following are the most important rules: 


a) Masculine are the Stems in εὖ (Nom. eb-c), rnp 
(Nom. rnp), top (Nom. twp), vz (with Nom. ¢ or ν pre- 
ceded by a long vowel), as well as most Stems in ν (of 
various Nominatives) with a preceding long vowel: St. 
γραῴφευ, Nom. γραφεύς, writer; St. and Nom. σωτήρ, sa- 
vior; St.pnrop, Nom. ῥήτωρ, orator; δ, λεον τ, Nom. 
λέων, lion, leo; St. and Nom. ἀγών, contest. 

§ 138. b) Feminine are all Stems in ὃ (Nom. -te, -ac), 
most in « (Nom. -:-¢), those in o (Nom. τῷ or -w-¢), and the 
names of qualities in rn7 (Nom. -7y-¢): St. ἐλπιδ, Nom. ἐλ- 
mic, hope; δί.πολι, Nom. πόλις, city; δῖ. πειθο, Nom. 
πειθώ, persuasion ; St.icornr, Nom. ἰσότης, equality. 

§ 139. ὁ) Neuter are the Stems in war (Nom. μα), the 
substantive Stems in c with Nom. oe or ac, those in : or v 
which append no ¢ in the Nominative, and those in p pre- 


ὃ 


50 CONSONANT DECLENSION. Φ ἃ 140. 


ceded by a short vowel in the Nom.: St.cwpuar, Nom. 
σῶμα, body; St. yevec, Nom. γένος, genus ; St. and Nom. 
γῆρας, age ; St. and Nom. σίναπι, mustard ; St. and Nom. 
ἄστυ, city; St. and Nom. ἧτορ, heart. 
§ 140. The following words must be noticed separately : 
ἡ γαστήρ (St. yaortep), belly; ὃ wove (St. πο δ), foot; ἡ 
χείρ (St. χειρ), hand ; τὸ οὖς (St. ὦ τὴ), ear; 6 πῆχυς (St. 
πηχυ); forearm ; ἡ φρήν (St. op gv), diaphragm, mind ; 
6 πέλεκυς (St. πελεκυ), ave; ὃ βότρυς (St. βοτρυ), 
bunch of grapes; ὃ στάχυς (St. σταχιυ), car of corn; ὃ 
σφήξ (δ. σφη κ). wasp; ὃ μῦς (St. μῦ ς), mouse [mus]; - 
ὁ ἰχθύς (ὃ. ἰχθυ), fish ; ὃ ἀήρ (St. ἃ ερ), ar; τὸ πῦρ (St. 
πῦρ). fires τὸ ὕδωρ (St. ὑδατ), water. 
Of two genders (common) are several names of animals, as: ὁ and 
ἡ ἀλεκτρυών (St. dXexrpvor), cock and hen; ὁ and ἡ d¢ or σῦς 
(St. ὑ or ov), swine [sus]; ὁ and ἡ αἴξ (St. α ἐγ), goat; ὁ and ἡ βοῦς" 
(St. βου), ov; and many names of persons: ὁ and ἡ παῖς (St. 
wav), boy and girl; 6 and ἡ δαίμων (St. datpor), god and god- 
dess ; ὁ and ἡ μάντις, prophet and prophetess. 
§ 141. The endings of the consonant declension are the . 
following : 


Masculines and Feminines. . Neuters. 
Singular. 
Nom c, or compensation by lengthening no ending. 
Gen oe . 
Dat. ἵ : 
Ace. a ory no ending. 
Voe. no ending, or as in the Wom. ae 
Dual. 
NV. A. V. ε » 
G. D. ow 
Plural. 
Nom. ες a 
Gen. wy 
Dat. σι(ν) 
Ace. ἄς ᾿ ἄ 
Voe.—=Nom. ες ἄ 


§ 141. Dialects—The Hom. dialect has ocr for οὐν in Gen. and 
Dat. Dual (compare ὃ 129, D.), ποδ-οῖιν, and in Dat. Plur. frequently 
εσσι(ν) for o1(v): πόδ-εσσι(ν), seldom ear(y): aty-eor(v). 


§ 143. CONSONANT DECLENSION. ‘ol 
. 


8 142. The accent in the Second Principal Declension 
deviates from +the rules laid down in ὃ 107 in the following 
point : | 

Words of one syllable accentuate the Gen. and Dat. of 
all numbers on the case-ending (circumflex if the vowel 
be long, ὃ 109): ποδ-ός, ποδ-ί (but πόδ-α), ποδοῖν, ποδῶν, 
ποσί. 

Exceptions.—1. Participles, as: ὦν, being, ὄντος ; Bac, going, βάντος 
—accentuate the Genitive and Dative of all numbers on the last 
syllable but one. 

2. πᾶς, omnis, has παντός, παντί, but πάντων, πᾶσι(ν). 

3. The words παῖς, boy; ὃμώς, slave; θώς, jackal ; Τρώς, Trojan ; τὸ 
φῶς, light ; ἡ φῷς, blister ; ἡ δᾷς, torch ; τὸ οὖς, ear; ὁ onc, moth, 
are paroxytones in Gen. Plur. and Dual: παίδ-ων, δμώτων, θώ-ων, 

. Τρώτ-ων, φώτ-ων, gyd-wv, δάδ-ων, ὦτ-οιν, σέτων (compare farther 

§ 177, 9). 

4, The words which have become monosyllables by contraction: 
ἣρ tap, spring (ver), ἦρος, ἦρι. 

§ 142 ὁ. In regard to the quantity, it must be observed that several 
monosyllables, in spite of the short Stem-vowel, are lengthened : 
St. πὸ δ, Nom. Sing. πού-ς, foot ; St. 7 avr, Nom. Sing. Neut. πᾶν, 


every thing; St. πῦρ, Nom. Sing. πῦρ, fire; St. ot, Nom. Sing. σῦς, 
boar. 


8 143. The Stems of the Second Principal Declension 
are divided into three Classes with different subdivisions : 


I. ConSONANT STEMS. 
1. Guttural and Labial Stems. 
2. Dental Stems. 
3. Liquid Stems. 


II. VowrEL STEMS. 
1. Soft-vowel Stems. 
2. Diphthong Stems. 
3. o Stems. 


1Π. Er1ipED STEMS. 
1. ¢ Stems. 
2. τ Stems. 
3. v Stems. 


52 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 144. 


I. CoNSONANT STEMS. - 


§ 144. 1. Guttural and Labial Stems, 
4. é, Stems in k, x, γ; π᾿ >, β. 


Examples. ὁ φύλαξ, guard, ἡ φλέψ, VEN. 
Stems. φυλᾶκ φλεβ 
Singular. 
Nom. V. φύλαξ = [ux] φλέψ _ [pleb-s] 
Gen. pvdax-oc [duc-is] φλεβ-ός [pléb-is] 
o Dat. pvrak-i [duc-i] preB-t [pléb-i] 
Ace, _ φύλακ-ἅ [duc-e-m] φλέβ-ἅ [pléb-e-m] 
Dual. 
Ν᾿ A.V. φύλἄκ-ε φλέβ-ε 
Ὁ 9, φυλᾶκ-οιν φλεβ-οῖν 
Plural. 
Nom. V. φύλἄκ-ες [duc-es] φλέβ-ες 
Gen. φυλάκ-ων [duc-um] φλεβ-ῶν 
Dat. φύλαξι(ν) φλεψί(ν) 
Ace. φύλᾶκ-ἄς [duc-es] φλεβ-ἄς 


Examples for Declension. 
Ὁ μύρμηξ, ant, St. μυρμη κ. ἡ poppryé, lyre, St. φορμιγγ. 
ἡ μάστιξ, whip, St. paoriy. ὁ Αἰθίοψ, Aithiopian, St. Aidto zx. 
ἡ βήξ, cough, St. Bn x. 


§ 145. All these Stems are Masc. or Fem. The Nom. 
Sing. is formed by affixing ¢ to the Stem: the ¢ with the 
final consonant of the Stem forms &, ψ, as in the Dat. Plur. 
(§ 48). The Voc. is always the same as the Nom. 


Ἴ Obs.—The Stem ἀλωπεκ has the vowel irregularly lengthened in 
the Nom. Sing.: ἀλώπηξ, fox; while, on the contrary, the long 
vowel in the Stems κηρῦκ, φοινῖκ, is shortened in the Nom.: 
κῆρυξ, herald ; φοῖνιξ, palm-tree, where the accent shows that the 

ς υ and care short by nature (compare § 83, 0bs.1). τριχ has Nom. 
ad | Sing. θρίξ, hair, Dat. Plur. 6p. i(v) (compare ὃ 54, a). 


r 
$147. 


53 


: CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
- § 146. 2. Dental Stems, ἡ. ¢., Stems in τ, 0, ὃ, v. 
Examples. | ἡ λαμπάς τὸ σῶμα ὁ γέρων ὁ ἡγεμών 
Stems, λαμπὰδ σωμᾶτ γεροντ ἡγεμον 
lamp. body. old man. leader. 
Singular. 
Nom. λαμπᾶ-ς σῶμα γέρων ἡγεμών 
Gen. λαμπᾶδ-ος σώμᾶἄτ-ος γέροντ-ος ἡγεμόν-ος 
Dat. Aaprad-i σώμᾶτ-ἴ γεροντ-ῖ ἡγεμόν-ἴ 
Ace, λαμπᾶδ-ἄ σῶμα γέροντ-α ἡγεμόν-ἄ 
Voe. λαμπᾶ-ς σῶμα γέρον ἡγεμών 
Dual. 
NV. A.V. | χαμπάδ-ε σώὠώμᾶτ-ἕ γέροντ-ε ἡγεμόν-ε 
GD. λαμπάδ-οιν | cwpar-ow γερόντ-οιν ἡγεμόν-οιν 
Plural. 
BBs λαμπάδ-ες σώὠμᾶτ-ἄ γέροντ-ες ἡγεμόν-ες 
Gen λαμπάδ-ων | σωμάτ-ων γερόντ-ων ἡγεμόντ-ων 
Dat. Naprad-o(y) | cwpd-o(v) | yépov-or(v) | ἡγεμό-σι(ν) 
Ace. λαμπάδ-ἄς σώὠμᾶτ-ἄ γέροντ-ἄς ἡγεμόν-ἄς 


ἡ κακότη-ς, badness, δῖ, κακοτη τ. 
τὸ μέλι, honey [mel], St. weer. 


Examples for Declension. 
ἡ πατρί-ς, native country, St. rarpco. 
τὸ ὄνομα, name, St. dvopar. 
ἡ νύξ, night (now for nocts], St. νυ καὶ [noct]. 


ὁ ὀδούς, tooth [den-s for dent-s], St. ὁ δον τ [dent]. 
ὁ δελφίς, dolphin, St. ded giv. 


ὁ ποιμήν, shepherd, St. ποιμεν. 


ὁ Ἕλλην, Hellen, δι. Ἕλλη ν. 

ὁ ἀγών, contest, δύ, ἀ γω ν. 
Adjectives : 

πένη-ς, poor, St. revnr. 


ἄκων, neut. ἄκον, unwilling, St. ano vr. 
ἀπράγμων, neut. ἄπραγμον, inactive, St.a a payuor. 


§ 147. In the dental Stems, as in the Stems to be no- 
ticed below, the Nom. Sing. Mase. and Fem. may be formed 
in two ways, Viz. : 


1. With Sigma affixed to the Stem. 


Before this sigma 


ν᾿ 
δ4 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 147. 


the consonants τ, ὃ, θ, when they stand alone, disappear 
altogether (ὃ 49): λαμπαδ-ς, λαμπᾶ-ς ; κορυθ-ς, Kdpv-c, 
helmet ; but v and vr have the short vowels of the Stem 
lengthened by way of compensation (ὃ 42), so that a, ἵ, ὕ 
become a, ¢, v; but « becomes εἰ, and 0, ov: παντ-ς, πᾶ-ς, 
every ; ἕν-ς, εἶτ-ς, ONC; ὀδοντ-ς, ὀδού-ς, tooth. 


Excreptions.—The monosyllabic Stem πο ὃ [ ped] (δ 142 ὃ) has the 
vowel lengthened exceptionally: πού-ς [Lat. pé-s, ἃ. 6.: ped-s]; 
dapapr has Nom. Sing. ἡ δάμαρ, spouse, for δαμαρς, because of its 
harshness. 


2. Without Sigma being affixed to the Stem; but in its 
stead the Stem-vowel, in case it is short, 2s lengthened, so 
that by ¢his lengthening (ὃ 42, Obs.) « becomes n, and: 
o becomes w: St. ποιίμεν, Nom. ποιμήν, shepherd ; St. 
ἡγεέμον, Nom. ἡγεμών. If the Stem-vowel is long of 
itself, the Nom. Sing. is like the Stem: 6 ἀγών, contest. 

The τ of the Stems in v7 in this formation is rejected, 
according to ὃ 67: yepovr, Nom. γέρων (for γερωντ). 
The simple τ of the Participial-Stems in o7 is changed 
into ¢: St. λελυκοτ, Nom. Sing. λελυκώς (for λελυκωτ), 
having loosened. 


Obs. 1. The vowel w shows that ¢ is not a mere affix in λελυκώς, one 
who has loosened. Compare χάρϊ-ς, favor, St. χαριτ. 


Obs. 2. The Stems in 6, 6, as well.as those in αντ, evr, always 
form the Nom. Sing. with sigma; but Stems of substantives in 
ovr and the Stems in ν generally without c. 


ὃ 147 ὁ. The Neuter has the pure Stem in the Nom. 
Ace. and Voc. Sing. (δ 136), as far as the laws of sound in 
regard to final consonants (§ 67) admit it: λυθέν(τ), loosened 
(see ὃ 187), λελυκός (for AeA uKOT); γάλα; milk, from the 
Stem yaXakr (Gen. yaAaxr-o¢ = Lat. lact-is). On πᾶν 
(Stem avr), see ὃ 142 ὁ. 


Obs.—On the Acc, Sing. in v, belonging to some Stems in τ, 8, ιδ, 
vO, vd, see § 156. 


8 149. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 55 


§ 148. The Vocative of masculines and feminines some- 
times has the pure ®tem, as far as is possible: ἤάρτεμι (St. 
"A premco), Aiav (St. Aiavr), γέρον (St. yepovr); some- 
times it is like the Nom. (necessarily so when the accent 
is on the last syllable): ἡγεμών ; and in a// participles even 
when the accent is not on the last syllable: λέγων (St. 
λεγον τ); speaking. 

The Voce. παῖ, boy, from the Sti mae 6, is specially to be 
observed. . 


Obs.—The Stems ᾿Απόλλων, ἸΤοσειδῶν, which are like the Nom., 
shorten the vowel and draw back the accent in the Vocative: 
“ArrodXov, Πόσειδον. The accent is also drawn back in many 
compound words: ᾿Αγάμεμνον, ᾿Αριστόγειτον (ὃ 85). 


§ 149. The formation of the Dat. Plur. results from the 
laws of sound (§§ 49, 50). τ, δ, 0, and simple ν, are 
dropped before σε(ν) without leaving any trace; but vr 
is dropped with the previous vowel lengthened by way of 
compensation. 


Exception.— The adjectives (not participles) in evr admit no 
lengthening of the vowel by way of compensation: St. χαριεντ 
(Nom. Sing. χαρίεις, graceful, Dat. Plur. yapieou(v). See Inflexion, 
§ 187). 


ὃ 148. Dialects—The Vocative of the Stem ἀνακτ (Nom. Sing. 
aval, ruler) is in Homer ἄνα (shortened from avakr: compare the 
neuter γάλα, § 147 Ὁ) ; some Stems in vr lose the ν in the Voc. : "Ατλᾶ 
for ᾿Ατλαν(τ). 


ἢ 149. Dialects—Homer forms the Dat. Plur. ποσσί(ν) instead of 
ποδ-σι(ν), Att. ποσίν (πούς, foot); the ὃ being assimilated instead of 
being rejected. 


56 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 150. 


§ 150. 3. Liquid Stems, ὦ. 6., Stems in Δ and p. 


Examples. ὁ diX¢ ὁ ῥήτωρ ἡ μήτηρ ὁ θήρ 
Stems. ‘aX ῥητορ μῆτερ θηρ 
salt. orator. mother. game. 
Singular. 
Nom. .- ἅλ-ς [sal] ῥήτωρ μήτηρ [τῃϑί61] θήρ 
Gen. ἁλ-ός [sal-is] | pArop-o¢ | μητρ-ός [matr-is] | @no-de 
Dat. ἁλ-ί [sal-i] ῥήτορε-ι μητρ-ί [matr-i] θηρ-ί 
Ace, ἅλ-α [sal-e-m]] ῥήτορ-α μητέρ-α [matr-e-m] | θῆρ-α 
Voc. ἅλ-ς ῥῆτορ μῆτερ θήρ 
Dual. 
Ν. A.V. | ἅλ-ε δήτορ-ε μητέρ-ε θῆρ-ε 
6. D. ἁλ-οῖν ῥητόρτοιν μητέρ-οιν θηρ-οἵν 
Plural 
ey ἅλ-ες [sal-es] ῥήταρτες | μητέρ-ες [matr-es] | θῆρ-ες 
Gen. ἁλ-ῶν [sal-um]| ῥητόρτων | pnrép-wy[matr-um | | θήρ-ῶν 
Dat. ἁλ-σί(ν) ῥήτορ-σι(ν) μητρά-σι(ν) θηρ-σί(ν) 
Ace, ἅλ-ας ῥήτορ-ας | μητέρ-ας θῆρ-ας 


Examples for Declension. 

τὸ νέκταρ, nectar. ᾿ ὁ κρατήρ, mizing-jug, St. κρα τη ρ. 

ὁ αἰθήρ, ether, St. ai dep. ὁ pup, thief (fur), St. ¢ ὦ p. 

§ 151. The only Stem in ἃ which forms the Nom. Sing. with sigma 
is dd; all Masc. and Fem. Stems in p form the Nom. Sing. with- 
out sigma (§ 147, 2); hence with long Stem-vowels the Nom. 
Sing. is like the Stem; short Stem-vowels, however, are length- 
ened, ὦ. 6.; ε into n, o into w. 

The neuter has the pure Stem in the Nom. Sing.: τὸ jrop, heart. 
Only the monosyllabic Stem zip << the uv: τὸ πῦρ, fire 
(δ 142, ὁ). 


§ 152. The Voce. Sing. has the pure Stem: Sabo: The 
Stem σωτηρ (Nom. σωτήρ, savior) shortens ἡ into ε, and 
draws back the accent (compare ὃ 148): Voc. σῶτερ. 


ὃ 153. The Stems warep, μητερ, θυγατερ: γαστερ, 


§ 150. Dialects. —1) dc, poet., the sea. : 

ὃ 153. Dialects——The ε is often retained in the Gen. and Dat. by 
poets: μητέρος: while it is rejected in other cases: θύγατρα. Instead 
of acc(y) in the Dat. Plur., there may be the eoo.(v) mentioned, 
§ 141, D.: Ovyarépecor(y). 


CONSONANT DECLENSION. 57 
νυ ΤΊ Ϊ ATR 
Δημητερ (Noms. πατήρ; father ; μήτηρ, mother; θυγάτηρ, ὁ 
daughter ; 3 γαστήρ, belly ; ᾽ Δημήτηρ): reject ε in the Gen. 
and Dat. Sing. (δ 61,¢). The first four throw the accent 
on the case-ending ; ; the last draws it back (πατρός, Δήμη- 
τρος). The ε is accented where it appears: μητέρα, in spite 
of μήρηρ, except in the Voc., where the accent is drawn 
back : πάτερ; in spite of πατήρ, but Δοο. Sing. Δήμητρα. 
In the Dat. Plur. the syllable mre Here neta 
(δ 59) rpa: μητρά-σι(ν). i 

Obs.—The Stem dorep (Nom. Sing. ἀῶ, Var) belongs to these 


words only in the formation of the Dat. Plur.: ἀστράσι(ν). For 
ἀνήρ (St. ἀν ep), see, under the irregular words, ὃ 177, 1. 


8 154 


Il. VowEL STEMs. 
§ 154. 1. Soft-vowel Stems, 2. e., Stems in ε and v. 


Examples. ἡ πόλις, city. ἡ σῦς, 800. | τὸ ἄστυ (ἀστῦ), city. 
Stems. πολὶ ov 
Singular. 
Nom. πόλι-ς ov-¢ ἄστυ 
Gen. πόλε-ως ov-6¢ ἄστε-ος OF ἄστε-ως 
Dat. (ar6NE-i) πόλει σὔ-ἰ (dore-i) ἄστει 
Ace. πόλι-ν σῦ-ν ἄστυ 
Voe. πόλι ᾿ σῦ-ς ἄστυ 
Dual. 
N. A.V. πόλε-ε σὕὔ-ε (ἄστε-ε) ἄστη 
G. D. πολέ-οιν σὔ-οἵν ἀστέ-οιν 
Plural. 
ἮΝ. Υ. (πόλε-ες) πόλεις | σὕ-ες (ἄστε-α) ἄστη 
Gen. πόλε-ων σὔτ-ῶν ἄστε-ων 
Dat. πόλε-σι(ν) ov-oi(v) ἄστε-σι(ν) 
Ace. (πόλε-ας) πόλεις | σὕ-ας OF oie | (dorE-a) ἄστη 
Examples for Declension. 
ὁ βότρυ-ς, bunch of grapes, 
; ἡ πίτυ-ς, pine-tree, according to ὃ 157. 
ὁ πῆχυ-ς, fore-arm, 


ἡ δύναμες; ier alli t both according to § 157. 
ἡ στάσι-ς, party, faction, 
Adjectives, § 185. 


C2 


58 CONSONANT DECLENSION. ὃ 155. 


§ 155. The Nom. Sing. Mase. and Fem. is always formed 
by Sigma. The Neuter Sing. as well as the Vocative 
Sing. of all genders has the pure Stem. Yet sometimes 
the Nom. : form is used for the Vocative, and this is the case 

_in all monosyllables. “In the Ace. Sing. Masc. and ae v 
is affixed to the Stem. 

On the lengthening of monosyllabic Stems, § τῇ b. 
But this lengthening takes place also in the Nom. and Ace. 
Sing. of some polysyllabic words. 


§ 156. Barytones in tr, 6, 8, vd, υθ (Nom. ες, v¢), form 

y the Acc. Sing. generally by affixing v after rejecting the 

Stem-consonant: St. ἐρι ὃ (Nom. ἔρι-ς, strife), Ace. ἔ ἔριν ; 

δέν κορυθ (Nom. κόρυ-ς, helmet), Ace. κόρυ-ν ; δὲ. ὀρντθ 

(Nom. dpvi-c, bird), Acc. ὄρνι-ν. - The _Oxytones, on the 

* contrary, always have a: ἐλπί-ς, hope, yh oes κλείς, 

key, stands alone; δ. κλ ed, Ace. κλεῖν (seldom κλεῖδ-α), 
Ace. Plur. κλεῖς ‘or κλεῖδας. 


Examples. ἡ ἔρι-ς, strife. ἡ ἐλπί-ς, hope. 
Stems. ἐριδ. ἐλπιδ. 
Singular. ἔρι-ς. ἐλπί-ς. 

ἔριδ-ος. ἐλπίδ-ος. 

ἔριδ-ι. ἐλπίδει. 

ἔρι-ν. ἐλπίδ-α. 


~ § 157. Most Stems in ε, as well as adjective and some 
substantive Stems in v, change their final vowel to ¢-in 
Gen. and Dat. Sing., and in all the cases of the Dual and 


§ 156. Dialects—The Acc. Sing. in a of dental Stems is more fre- 
quent in Homer: γλαυκώπιδ-α (kareena, ὑπ ΝΠ ΝΗ, ἔριδ-α ; κλείς is 
κληΐς, Acc. κληϊδ-α. 


§ 157. Dialects—The Ionic dialect leaves 1 unchanged: Gen. πόλι-ος, 
Dat. πόλι (from πόλι-ι), Nom. Plur. πόλι-ες, Gen. πολίεων, Dat. in Herod. 
πόλι-σι(ν), Homer πολί-εσσι(ν), Acc. πόλι-ας (Herod. also πόλις). Other 
additional forms of the Homeric dialect are: Gen. Sing. πόλη-ος, Dat. 
Sing. wéAe-i and πόλη-ϊ, Nom. Plur. πόλη-ες, Acc. Plur. πόλη-ας. 

The Stems in v have always oc in the Gen. Sing. The Dat. Sing. 
only is contracted: πήχει. εὐρύ-ς, broad, has the additional form εὐρέα 
in the Acc. Sing. | 


§ 158. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 59 


Plur. Before the ending of the Gen. Sing. this ε remains 
unchanged ; in the Stems, however, in «, and in some sub- 
stantive Stems in v, ε is followed by we (instead of oc), 
called the Attic termination, which does not prevent the 
accent from being on the antepenult: πόλετ-ως, πελέκετως 
(πέλεκυ-ς, Wx). 

In the Dat. Sing. εἰ is contracted into εἰ, in the Nom. 
Plur. e¢¢ and Acc. εας into εἰς, and <a of neuter suwbstan- 
tives into n. Adjectives maintain the uncontracted form 
ea: ἄστη, but γλυκέα. 


ἃ 158. The contraction of << to ἡ in the Nom. Acc. and 
Voc. Dual is rare. The Gen. Plur. of Stems in « follows 
the accent of the Gen. Sing.: πόλετων like πόλετ-ως. 

Most substantive Stems in v leave this vowel unchanged ; 
but others, like ἄστυ, follow the analogy of Stems in ε, and 
change v into ε. vue are sometimes contracted into v in the 


Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual; in the Acc. Plur. also we find | 


ἰχθῦς, with ἰχθύ-ας (ἰχθύ-ς, fish), and ὀφρῦς, Acc. Plur. of pv). 


ὀφρύ-ς, eyebrow. 

ἔγχελυ-ς, eel, retains v in the Sing.: Gen. éyyéAv-oc ; 
but changes it in the Dual and Plur. into «: Nom. Plur. 
ἐγχίλεις. 

The adjective ἴδρι-ς, acquainted with, St. ἰδρι, keeps 
its ε unchanged ha all the cases. 


§ 158. Dialects—The Dat. ἰχθύϊ is in Homer contracted into ‘youth 
In the-Dat. Plur. σ is sometimes doubled : νέκυ-σσι(ν) with νεκύ-εσσι(ν) 


᾿ (γέκυ-ς, Corpse). 


60 


CONSONANT DECLENSION. 


§ 159. 


§ 159. 2. Diphthong Stems, i. ¢., Stems in ev, av, ov. 


Examples. ὁ βασιλεύς ἡ γραῦς ὁ and ἡ βοῦς 
Stems. Baotrev γραυ βου 
king. old woman. 0% ΟΥ̓ Cow. 
Singular. 
Nom. βασιλεύ-ς γραῦ-ς βοῦ-ς [bo-s] 
Gen. βασιλέ-ως γρᾶ-ός βο-ός [boy-is] 
Dat. (βασιλέ-ὃ βασιλεῖ ypa-i βο-ὶ [bov-i] 
Ace. βασιλέ-ἃ γραῦ-ν βοῦ-ν [boy-e-m] 
Voe. βασιλεῦ γρῦ βοῦ 
Dual. 
NV. A. . βασιλέ-ε γρᾶ-ε βό-ε 
G. D. βασιλέ-οιν γρᾶ-οῖν βο-οῖν 
Plural. , 
τ τς (βασιλέ-ες) βασιλῆς | γρᾶ-ες βό-ες [bov-es] 
or βασιλεῖς 
Gen. βασιλέ-ων γρα-ὥν βο-ῶν [bo-um] | 
Dat. βασιλεῦ-σι(ν) γραυ-σί(ν) βου-σί(ν) 
 Α6ο. βασιλέ-ας γραῦ-- βοῦ-ς 


Examples for Declension. 


6 yoved-c, parent. ὁ ἱερεύ-ς, priest. ᾿Οδυσσεύ-ς, ᾿Αχιλλεύ-ς. 


8. 160. 4} diphthong Stems affix ¢ in the Nom. Sing. 
and σι(ν) in the Dat. Plur.; those in av and ov affix ν in 
the Acc. Sing. to the full Stem. In the Voc. Sing. the 
Stem appears pure. 

> Before vowel case-endings, 7. é., in all other forms, the v 
of the Stem was changed into F (§ 84, D.): BoF-d¢ [δου- 8], 
and then was entirely lost: βο-ός | S0-ev=bo-win] (ὃ 35, 
1) Ὁ). 


Obs.—An isolated diphthong Stem is oi, Nom. οἷ-ς, sheep [ovi-s] : 
οἷός, oti, οἷν ; Plur. oiec, οἰῶν, οἰσί(ν), οἷς. Compare ὃ 34, Ὁ. 


§ 159. Dialects.—Homer has γρηῦς for γραῦ-ς, Dat. ypni, Voc. γρηῦ or 
yon; from Bod-c, Acc, Plur. βό-ἄς, Dat. βό-εσσι(ν). The forms βῶς, 
Nom., βῶν, Acc. Sing., are Doric. 

§ 160. Dialects.—lIonic ὄϊς (ovis) for οἷς, Gen. dioc, Dat. Plur. ὀΐ-εσσι or 
decor, Acc, dic. 


§ 162. CONSONANT DECLENSION. , 61 


Some compounds of πού-ς, foot, form the Acc. Sing. 
like Stems in ov: τρίπους, three-footed, Acc. τρίπουν. For 
“ναῦ-ς, see among the irregular words, ὃ 177, 11. 


§ 161. The Stems in εὖ, moreover, have in the 


a) Gen. Sing., ὡς for o¢. Compare ὃ 157. 

6) Dat. Sing., εἰ always contracted for <i. 

ce) Acc. Sing. and Plur., a is long and not contracted. 

d) Nom. and Voce. Plur., ee¢ contracted by older Attic 
writers into n¢, by the later into εἰς. 

é) Words which have a vowel before εὖ may be con- 
tracted also in the Gen. and Acc. Sing., and in the Ace. 
Plur.: St. Πειραιευ, Nom. Πειραιεύ-ς, port of Athens, 
Gen. Πειραιῶς, Acc. Πειραιᾶ ; χοεύ-ς, measure, Acc. Plur. 
χοᾶς. 

0bs—The Gen. in -εως has arisen by transmutation of quantity 

(δ 37, D. 2) out of the Hom. noc.. Hence the length of the final 
syllable. In the same manner, the Acc. Sing. «@ has arisen out 


of na: still εἄ is also found, like ede in the Acc. Plural; εας is 
contracted by later writers into εἰς. 


§ 162. 3. O Stems, ἡ. ¢., Fons in o and w. 


Examples. | ἡ πειθώ, persuasion. ὁ ἥρως, hero. 

Stems. πειθο i pw 
# Singular. | 

Nom. πειθώ ἥρω-ς Plur. ἥρω-ες 
Gen. (πειθό-ος) πειθοῦς ἥρω-ος ἡρώτ-ων 
Dat. (πειθό-) πειθοῖ ἥρω-ι ἥρω-σι(ν) 
Ace, (πειθό-α) πειθώ ἥρω-α ἥρω ἥρω-ας Or 
Voe. πειθοῖ ἥρω-ς ἥρως 
Dual and Plural of πειθώ are Dual ἥρω-ε 
formed as in the o declension. ἡρώ-οιν 


§ 161. Dialects—The Epic dialect lengthens the ε of Stems in ev 
into ἡ before vowels: βασιλῆ-ος, βασιλῆ-ι, βασιλῆ-α, βασιλῆ-ες, βασιλήτ-ων, 


62 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 8168. 


Examples for Declension. 
ἡ ἠχώ (St. x 0), echo. 
Καλυψώ, Λητώ, ὃμώ-ς (St. ὃ ww); slave. 
μήτρω-ς (St. μη τρ ὦ), wunculus. ; 

§ 163. The Stems in ο, all feminine, form the Nom. Sing. 
without sigma, except the Stem aiédo, Nom. Sing. aidw-c, 
shame, Acc. aidé. The Acc., which is like the Nom., is 
oxytone (contrary to § 87): πειθώ, not rade. 

The Vocative ends in 01; all other cases are contracted. 
The Acc. of Stems in w usually remains uncontracted. 
The Stem éw, Nom. ἡ ἕω-ς, dawn, has Gen. Sing. ἕω, Dat. 
ἕῳ (according to ὃ 132), Acc. ἕω (from éwa). 

Obs.—Several Stems in ον follow the above declension in some of 

their forms: ἀηδών, nightingale, Gen. ἀηδοῦς, with ἀηδόνος ; εἰκών, 
image, Gen, εἰκοῦς (compare S71). 


ἀριστή-εσσι(ν) (ἀριστεύ-ς, prince) ; still there are Genitives also in εος 
and εὖς (Ὀδυσεῦς), Datives in εἴ, εἰ, and Accusatives in ea, ἡ: Τυδῆ. 
The New-Ionic dialect leaves ε frequently uncontracted : βασιλέ-ες. 


§ 163. Dialects—Homer cgntracts ἥρωϊ into ἥρῳ, Μίνωα into Μίνω. 
The old and poetic form ‘oul is ἠώ-ς (St. ἡ 0), declined like αἰδώ-ς. 
Some proper names in ὦ in the Nom. Sing. have in the New-Ionic 
dialect an Acc. in ody: Λητοῦν, ᾿ἸΙοῦν. - 


ὃ 165. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 63 


III. ELIpED STEMS, ὁ. e., Stems which reject the final 
consonant in certain A a 


§ 164. 1. Σ Stems, ὃ. 6., Stems οὔ ἢ elide sigma. 


Examples. | τὸ γένος, race. | M. εὐγενής, N. εὐγενές, of good family. 
Stems. YEVEC εὐγενες 
Singular. see ° 
Nom. γένος [genus] M. εὐγενής N. εὐγενές 
Gen. (yéve-og) γένους (εὐγενέ-ος) εὐγενοῦς 
Dat. (yéve-i) γένει (ebyevé-i) εὐγενεῖ 
Ace. yévoc (chyevé-a) εὐγενῆ Ν. εὐγενές 
Voe. γένος εὐγενές > Ν, εὐγενές 
Dual. : 
NA. V. | (yéve-e) . γένη (ebyevé-e) εὐγενῆ 
G. D. || (yevé-ow) γενοῖν | (εὐγενέ-οιν) εὐγενοῖν 
Plural. 
Nw YV. (yéve-&) γένη ~ | (ebyevé-ec) εὐγενεῖς N. (εὐγενέα) εὐγενῆ 
Gen. (yevé-wv) γενῶν | (ebyevé-wy) εὐγενῶν 
Dat. γένε-σι(ν) εὐγενέ-σι(ν) 
Ace, (γένε-ἃ) γένη ες (εὐγενέ-ἄς) εὐγενεῖς N. (εὐγενέα) εὐγενῆ 


Examples fox Declension. : 
τὸ εἶδος, form. κάλλος, beauty, μέλος, song. ἄχθος, διω θη... 
Adjectives : 
σαφής, Neut. σαφές, clear. ἀκριβής, Neut. ἀκριβές, exact. 
εὐήθης, Neut. εὔηθες, simple. 


§ 165. The sigma Stems retain their final consonant only 
when it stands at the end, z.¢.,in the Nom. Acc. and Voce. 
Sing. Neuter, and in the N ois: and Voc. Sing. Mase. and 
Fem. 

The Neuter substantives change the Stem-vowel ε into 
o in the Nom. Acc. and Voce. Sing.: St. yevec, γένος. 


§ 165. Dialects—The Epic dialect frequently, the New-Ionic always, 
leaves the vowels of the sigma Stems uncontracted : sie γένεϊ. 
Hom. sometimes has the Gen. Sing. eve (from εος, ὃ 87, D. 1): θάρ- 
σευς (θάρσος, courage). ἡ 

In the Dative Plur. Homer has three endings: ἐτεσσι οὐ);: εσ-σι(ν), 
and the usual e-o1(v): βελέ-εσσι(ν), βέλεσ-σι(ν), βέλε-σι(ν), (βέλος, dart). 


64 CONSONANT DECLENSION. ~ § 166. 


Neuter adjectives leave ε unchanged: εὐγενές. Masculines 


and Feminines form the Nom. Sing. by lengthening ες. 


into ἧς (δ 147, 2), as®¢ can not be affixed: εὐγενής from 
evyevec, like ποιμήν from ποιμεν. 

Masculines and Feminines have the pure Stem in the 
Voc. Sing., and in compound words which are not oxytone 
in Nom. Sing. the accent is on the last syllable but two 
(compare §§ 148, 85): Nom. Σωκράτης, Voce. Σώκρατες ; ¢ 
Nom. Δημοσθένης, Voc. Δημόσθενες. 

Obs.—The Neuter ἀληθές (Mase. ἀληθής, true) draws back the accent 

in interrogations: ἄληθες ; really ὃ 

§ 166. In all other forms ¢ is rejected (δὲ 61 and 49): 
yéve-i for γένεσ-ι [gener-i]. Wherever two vowels meet 
they are contracted: ec in the Nom. Acc. and Voc. Dual 
become ἡ; <a generally ἡ; but when another vowel stands 
before ε they sometimes become a, according to ὃ 41: St. 
ἐνδεες, Nom. ἐνδεής, defective, Acc. ἐνδεα ; St. byrec, Nom. 
ὑγιής, healthy, Acc. ὑγιᾶ, but also ὑγιῆ; St. XPEECS Nom. 
τὸ χρέος, debt, Neut. Plur. χρέα. @The adjectives in “pun 
(St. φυες) have gun and gua: μύρον well-disposed, εὐφυῆ 
and εὐφυᾶ. 

Obs.—Barytone adjectives have the accent in the Gen. Plur. on the 

last syllable but one, contrary to ὃ 87: αὐτάρκων (Nom. αὐτάρκης, 


self-sufficient). So also τριήρης, trireme, used as a substantive, 
Gen. Plur. τριήρων. 

§ 167. Proper names in -κλεης, compounded with κλέος, glory (St. 
kXeec), have a double contraction in the Dat. Sing., and a single 
one in all the other cases : Nom. (Περικλεηςὴ Περικλῆς, Gen. (Περι- 
κλεεος) Περικλέους, Dat. (Περικλεεὶ, ἸΤερικλέει) Περικλεῖ, Acc. (Περικλεεα) 
Περικλέᾷ, Voc. (Περικλεες) Περίκλεις. 


§ 166. Dialects——A. vowel before ε is often contracted with it in 
Homer : σπέος or σπεῖος, cave, Gen. σπείους, Dat. σπῆτι (from σπέεϊ), Dat. 
Plur. σπήεσσι(ν) and σπέσσι(ν) ; εὐκλεής, glorious, Acc. εὐκλεῖας (from 
εὐκλέεας), but ἀκληεῖς (from ἀκλεής, inglorious). Herodotus ἐνδεέες (ἐνδεής, 
defective), ἀνθρωποφυέας (ἀνθρωποφυής, human). 

§ 167. Dialects.—The Epic dialect forms Ἡρακλῆς, Ἡρακλῆ-ος, 
Ἡρακλῆ-ι, Ἡρακλῆτα ; the Rewtome, Ἡρακλέης, Ἡρακλέ-ος, Ἡρακλέ-ϊ, 
Ἡρακλέ-α. 


— 


§ 169. CONSONANT DECLENSION. ” 65 


§ 168. 2. T Stems, ὃ. e., Stems which elide τ. 


Examples, _ τὸ κέρας, horn. τὸ κρέας, meat. 
Stems. κερᾶτ κρεατ ' 
Singular. 
NV. A, V. κέρᾶς κρέας 
Gen. κέρᾶττος (κέραος) κέρως (κρέαος) κρέως 
Dat. κέρᾶτ-ι (xépai) κέρᾳ (κρέα κρέᾳ 
Dual. | 
NV. A. V. κέρᾶτ-ε (κέραε) κέρᾶ 
6. Ὁ κερἄᾶτ-οιν (κεράοι»ν) κερῷν 
Plural. 
N. A. V. képadr-a (κέραα) κέρᾶ (κρέαα) κρέᾶ 
Gen. Kepar-wy (κεράων) κερῶν (κρεάων) κρεῶν 
Dat. κέρᾶ-σι(ν) Kpéd-ou(v) 


§ 169. τ becomes ¢ in Nom. Acc. and Voce. Sing., accord- 
ing to § 67. In the other cases some words always reject 
it: 6. 5.5 κρέας, σέλας, splendor ; γῆρας, age; κνέφας, gloom. 
Others, like κέρας, retain both forms together, with and 
without τ. The vowels which meet are regularly contract- 
ed. The quantity of a is very fluctuating. The Dat. Sing. 
is written also av: σέλαι. 

In prose, only a few Neuters (Nom. ac) have a mova- 


ble τ. 


§ 169. Dialects—Homer has δέπα-εσσι(ν) or δέπασ-σι(ν), Dat. Plur. 
of δέπας, goblet. In Ionic a often becomes ¢: Homer οὖδας, ground, 
Gen. οὔδε-ος, κῶας, fleece, Nom. Plur. κώε-α ; κέρας, New-Ionic Gen. 
κέρεος. 

A moyable r appears also in the Stems idpwr, γελωτ, χρωτ (Nom. 
ἱδρώς, sweat ; γέλως, laughter ; χρώς, skin), Dat. ἱδρῷ, Acc. ἱδρῶ, together 
with Gen. ἱδρῶτος ;. γέλω ; and regularly in Homer χρο-ός, xpo-t (poet. 
χρῷ), xpd-a. Compare αἰδώς, ἠώς, ὃ 163. 


66° CONSONANT DECLENSION. δ 170. 


δ 170. 3. N Stems, ὃ. e., Stems which elide v. 


Examples. ἡ M. F. μείζων, greater. Ν, μεῖζον 
Stems. Ἐ μειζον 
Singular. “ 
NV. V. μείζων Ν, μεῖζον 
Gen. μείζον-ος 
Dat. μείζον-ι 
Ace. peiZov-a [peZoa] μείζω N. μεῖζον 
Dual. 
NL A.V. | μείζον-ε 
G. D. μειζόν-οιν 
Plural 
N.V. μείζον-ες [μειζοες μείζους N. μείζονα [μειζοα] μείζω 
Gen. μειζόντ-ων 
Dat. μείζο-σι(ν) 
Ace. peiZov-ac [μειζοας] μείζους N. μείζονα [μεεζοα] μείζω 


Examples for Declensicn. 
βελτίων, better. αἰσχίων, more hateful. ἀλγίων, more painful. 


δ 171. The full and the contracted forms are equally in 
use. But the open ones (ueZoa) never occur. Compara- 


tives of more than two syllables throw back the accent in . 


the Nom. Ace. and Voce. Sing. Neuter upon the last syllable 
but two: βέλτιον, αἴσχιον. | 

Besides the comparatives (Nom. ὦ v,-o v), there are only 
the two proper names, ᾿Απόλλων (Stem. and Nom.) and Πο- 
σειδῶν (Stem and Nom.), Acc. ᾿Απόλλω (also ᾿Απόλλων-α), 
Ποσειδῶ (also Ποσειδῶν-α). On the Vocative, see ὃ 148, 


Obs. We may compare several Stems which fluctuate be- - 


tween ov and o (§ 163). 


§ 171. Dialects—Homer forms the Acc. κυκεῶ or κυκειῶ from κυκεών, 
mixture 


Ane 


$172. 


§ 172. Synopsis οὗ ier “ 


- CONSONANT 950 δ 


“OF THE — 


γῳ 
(τι  Ξαριτ 


ary 


Declension. 
“Nom. | Stem. Gen. 
in -a -ar τὸ σῶμα, body. σώματος 
-αιὃ ὁ παῖς, boy. παιδός 
Page -αιτ ἡ δαίς, meal, δαιτός 
-av M.| -αν Πάν, Pan. Πανός 
-av N.| -αντ Adj. τὸ πᾶν, the whole. παντός 
᾿ “ap τὸ ἔαρ, spring. ἔαρος 
-ap ταρτ ἡ δάμαρ, wife. δάμαρτος 
-a(p)r τὸ φρέαρ, fountain. φρέατος 
-ἄς F. | -ad ἡ λαμπάς, lamp. λαμπάδος 
-ἄς N.! -a(r) τὸ κρέας, meat. κρέως 
u | ὁ γίγᾶς, giant. γίγαντος 
ΩΝ ay Adj. μέλᾶς, black. μέλἄνος 
-ave F. | -α(υ) ἡ γραῦς, old woman. γρᾶός 
-ειρ᾽ -ειρ 4 χείρ, hand. χειρός 
" ὅτ Part. λυθείς, loosed. λυθέντος 
id ie re Ue, Adj. εἷς, one. ἑνός 
F. | -ed ἡ κλείς, key. κλειδός 
N -EVT Part. λυθέν, loosed. λυθέντος 
eA Eee Adj. ἄῤῥεν, male. ᾿ ἄῤῥενος 
-ς N.| -e(c) Adj. σαφές, clear. σαφοῦς 
-ευς M. | -e(v) ὁ φονεύς, murderer. φονέως 
mu | ὁ λιμήν, harbor. λιμένος 
| ony ὁ Ἕλλην, Greek. Ἕλληνος 
τε -ερ ὁ αἰθήρ, ether. αἰϑέρος 
af -np ὁ θήρ, game. θηρός 


68 


* 


§ 172. 


CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
‘Nom. | Stem. Gen. 
“nT ἡ βαρύτης, weight. βαρύτητος 
- 7€(c) 6, ἡ τριήρης, trireme., τριήρους 
n|* Adj. ἔδρι, acquainted with. ἴδριος 
τ "| τ-ἰτ τὸ μέλι, honey. μέλιτος 
ἘΠ -ἰν ὁ δελφίν, dolphin. δελφῖνος 
τι ἡ πόλις, city. πόλεως 
-ἰὸ ἡ ἐλπίς, hope. ἐλπίδος 
-ἰς -ἰτ ἡ χάρις, favor, χάριτος 
-10 ὁ, ἡ ὄρνις, bird, ὄρνιθος 
-ἰν ἡ Σαλαμίς, Salamis, Σαλαμῖνος 
n.| Ὃν Adj. εὔδαιμον, fortunate. εὐδαίμονος 
Oe | ovr Part. λῦον, loosing. λύοντος 
N -e(c) TO γένος, 7606. γένους 
ἀκ νιον ΚΡ Part. πεφῦκός, having become. πεφυκότος 
-OvT ὁ ὀδούς, tooth. ὀδόντος 
τους -οὗ ὁ πούς, foot πόδος “ ἃ 
-ο(υ) ὁ, ἡ βοῦς, 0x, cor. βοός 
υ N.j wv τὸ ἄστυ, city. ἄστεος 
-uy M.| οὖν ὁ μόσῦν, wooden tower. μόσῦνος 
Ν. | -vyr Part. δεικνύν, showing. 'δεικνύντος 
τυντ Part. δεικνύς, showing. δεικνύντος 
τὺς M.| -v ὁ ἰχθύς, fish. ἰχθύος 
ὁ πῆχυς, ell. πήχεως 
F. | -υὃ ἡ χλαμύς, cloak, χλαμύδος 
-w F.| -o ἡ πειθώ, persuasion. πειϑοῦς 
ΤῊ -ον ἡ ἀηδών, nightingale. ἀηδόνος 
των ὁ ἀγών, contest ἀγῶνος 
M. | -οντ ὁ λέων, Lion. λέοντος ἡ 
τωρ “0p ὁ ῥήτωρ, orator ῥήτορος 


§ 173. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 69 
Nom. Stem. Gen. 
τω ὁ ἥρως, hero. : ἥρωος. 
ΣΝ -0 ἡ αἰδώς, shame. αἰδοῦς 
τέρεν -oT Part. πεφύκώς, having become. TEPUKOTOC 
τωτ ὁ ἔρως, love. ἔρωτος 
-π 6 γύψ, vulture. γῦπός 
Ψ -β ὁ χάλυψ, steel. χάλυβος 
τῷ ἡ κατῆλιψ, upper story. κατήλϊφος 
-κ ὁ φύλαξ, guard, φύλακος 
r y | Ὁ ἡ ρὰρ flame. φλογός 
-X ὁ ὄνυξ, nail. ᾿ ὄνὕχος 
-κτ ἡ νύξ, night. νυκτός 


§ 173. The Second Principal Declension agrees with the 
First in the following particulars : 


1. Masculines have ¢ for the Nom. Sing. (or compensa- 
on for it); feminines are less consistent in this. 

2. The Dat. Sing. affixes ἐ (subscribed in the First Prin- 
cipal Declension). 

3. Vowel, and in part diplithoncal Stems take ν in the 
Ace. Sing. 


0bs.—The original ending of the Acc. Sing. was also in the Second 
Principal Declension every where v. This consonant was, how- 
ever, connected with consonant-Stems by the connecting vowel 
a: ddovr-a-v=Lat. dent-e-m. Subsequently ν was dropped, and a 
left, generally as the only sign : ὀδόντ-α. 


4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual have tv (atv, ow). 
5. The Gen. Plur. ὦ v. 

6. The Dat. Plur. o:(v) originally every where. 
7. The Acc. Plur. ¢ every where. 


Obs. —The original ending of all Acc. Plur. was vc, but » was 
dropped after vowels of the First Principal Declension, and was 

- compensated for by the lengthened ac,ouvc. After consonants 
there was the same process as in‘the Acc. Sing. : ὀδόντ-α(ν)-ς, 
Lat. dent-é-s for dent-em-s. 


8. Neuters all have ἅ in Nom. Acc. and Voce. Plur. 


. 


70 | IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. § 174. 


The principal differences in the endings are: 

1. In the Gen. Sing., where the Second Principal De- 
clension always has ος (we). 

2. In the Nom. Plur., where Masc. and Fem. of the Sec- 
ond Principal Declension always have ες. 


Irregularities in Declension. | 


§ 174. The mixing of two Stems which may have one 
Nom. is called Heteroclizing (irepoxA\ctaWifferent inflex- 
ion): Nom. σκότος, darkness, Gen. σκότου (O-Declension), 
and σκότους (Second Principal Declension); λαγώς, hare, 
according to the Attic declension, but Acc. λαγῶ. 

An important irregularity of this kind occurs with proper 
names in n¢: Σωκράτης (St. Swkparec), but Acc. Lwxpa- 
τὴν (as if from Stem Ywxpara of the A-Declension) with 
Σωκράτη. But those in -κλῆς (ὃ 167) follow the Second 
Principal Declension exclusively. 


§ 175. The formation of some cases from a Stem whit 
can not be that of the Nom. is called Metaplasm (usra- 
πλασμός, change of formation): Nom. Sing. τό δένδρον, 
tree, Dat. Plur. dévépecr(v), as if from Stem devdpec; Nom. 
Sing. τὸ δάκρυον, tear, Dat. Plur. daxpvar(v), from St. δακρυ 
(poet. Nom. δάκρυ) ; τὸ πῦρ, fire, Plur. τὰ wvpa, Dat. τοῖς 
wupoic (O-Declension); Noni. Sing. ὄνειρο-ς, dream, Gen. 
ὀνείρατος, Nom. Plur. ὀνείρατα. 


§ 176. A peculiar irregularity appears in several Neuter 


ὃ 174. Dialects—Several Masc. Stems in a, Nom. 7¢ in Herodotus, 
have ea for nv in the Acc. Sing. : δεσπότη-ς, master, δεσπότεα. ὁ bx0-C, 
carriage, in Homer has Plur. ra ὄχεα, ὄχεσφι(ν), from the St. ὀχες. 
Οἰδίπους has poet. forms from a St. Οὐδιπο δα, Gen: Sing. Οἰδιπόδαο, 
trag. Οἰδιπόδαᾶ. Homeric Σαρπηδών, Stems Σαρπηδον and Σαρπη- 
δοντ. Μίνως, Acc. Sing. Μίνωα (δ 163) and Μίνων. 


ὃ 175. Dialects—Hom. metaplasms are: Dat. Plur. ἀνδραπόδεσσι(ν), 
Nom. Sing. ἀνδράποδον, slave ; Nom. Acc. Plur. προσώπατα, Nom. Sing. 
πρόσωπον, countenance ; δέσματα, bonds, Sing. ὁ δεσμός ; épinpo-c, trusty, 
Nom. Plur. ἐρίηρες ; ἀλκή, strength, Dat. Sing. ἀλκ-ί ; dopivn, battle, ὑσμῖνι ; 
ἰχώρ, divine blood, Acc. Sing. ἰχῶ. ; 


§ 177. IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. 71 


-Stems in apt, as φρεαρτ. They reject τ in the Nom. Acc. 
and Voc. Sing. and p in the other cases: τὸ φρέαρ, well, 
Gen. φρέατος (also ppnrdc); τὸ ἧπαρ, Liver, Gen. ἥπᾶτος ; 
τὸ ἄλειφαρ and ἀἄλειφᾶ, salve, Gen. ἀλείφᾶτος. 

To these correspond the Stems σκα(ρ)τ and ὑδα(ρ)τ: 
Nom. σκώρ, dirt, Gen. σκᾶτός 3 ὕδωρ, Gen. ὕδατος. 


§ 177. Special irregularities in alphabetical order: 


1. ἀνήρ, man (compare ὃ 153), rejects ε of the Stem 
avep, and inserts ὃ in its place (δ 51, Obs. 2): av-8-p-de, 
ἀνδρί, ἄνδρα; Voc. ἄνερ; Dual, ἄνδρε, ἀνδροῖν ; Plur. ἄνδρες, 
ἀνδρῶν, ἀνδρᾶσι(ν), ἄνδρᾶς. 

2. Ἄρης (the god Ares): δι. ᾽Αρες, Gen.”Apewe and 
"Apeoc, Acc. ἤΑρην, together with” Apn; Voce. regul. ”Apec. 

3. apv, without Nom.: Gen. τοῦ and τῆς ἀρν-ός, of the 
lamb, ἀρνί, ἄρνα ; Dat. Plur. apvior(v). 

4.70 γόνυ, knee (gen), Nom. Ace. NO: All the rest 
from St. yovart, Gen. γόνατος. 

5. ἡ γυν ἡ, woman. All the rest from St. yuvack-, 
Gen. γυναικός, Dat. γυναικί, Acc. γυναῖκα, Voc. γύναι ; Dual 
γυναῖκε, γυναικοῖν ; Plur. γυναῖκ-ες, -WV, -Ev(v), -ac. 

6.70 δόρυ, wood, spear: δ. ὃ ὅρ ατ (comp. 4.). Gen. 
δόρατος, poet. Sop 6c, Dat. δορί and δόρει. 

7. Ζεύς (the god Zeus), Gen. Arde, Dat. Ari, Acc. Δία, 
Voe. Zev. 

8. ὁ and ἡ κύων, dog, with Voce. κύον, from St. κυον. 
All the rest from civ: Gen. κῦνός, Dat. κῦνί, Acc. κύνα ; 
Plur. κύνες, κυνῶν, xval(v), κύνας. 

9. ὁ λά-ς, stone, from Hom. λᾶα-ς, Gen. λᾶ-ος, Dat. Aa-i, 


§ 177. Dialects—The following forms are peculiar to dialects: 

1. ἀνήρ, poet. ’avép-oc, ’avép-t, ἄνέρ-α; Dat. Plur. ἄνδρεσσι(ν). 

2.”Apnc, Homer “Apnoc, “Apni, “Apna. 

4, γόνυ, Ion. and poet. yovvar-oc, γούνατ-ἄ, γοὐνἄᾶσι(ν) ; Ep. Gen. Sing. 
youvec, Plur. γοῦνἄ, γούνων, γούν-εσσι(ν). 

6. δόρυ, δούρατος, Ep. δουρός, δουρί, δοῦρε, δοῦρα, δούρων, δούρεσσι(.): 

7. φεύς, poet. St. Ζην : Ζην-ός, Znv-i, Ζῆν-α (also Ζῆν, from Zn). 


12 IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. ἃ) 177. 


Acc. Aaa-v, Aav ; Plur. Aa-ec, λά-ων, λδκῤναζεν or λά-εσι(ν),. 
 λᾶ-ας. 

10. ὁ μάρτῦὕ-ς, witness, with Dat. Plur. μάρτυσι(υ), fda 
St.uaprv. The rest from the St.uaprup: μάρτυρος, 
μάρτυρι, etc. 

11. ἡ ναῦ-ς, ship, ve-We, vn-t, vav-v ; Plur. νῆ-ες, VE-WY, 
ναυ-σί(ν); ναῦς. Compare ὃ 159. 

Obs.—The Nom. Acc. Sing. and Dat. Acc, Plur. rest on the 8t. vav, 

Before vowels vav becomes (according to ὃ 35, D. 2) νη, νη; νετώς 
is for νη-ός (δ 37, Ὁ. 2). 

12. 6 and ἡ dpvi-e, bird, St. ὀρνιθ and ὀρνι: ὄρνιθ-ος, 
ὄρνιθι, ὄρνιθα, and ὄρνιν ; Plur. ὄρνιθες and ὄρνεις, ὄρνεων. 

13. τὸ οὗ ς, car. All the rest from St. wr: ὠτός, wrt; 
Plur. ὦτα, ὥτων, w-ot(v). (On the accent, ὃ 142, 3.) 

14, ἡ Πνύξ (the Pnyz), St. πυκν, Πυκντός, Πυκν-ί, 
Πύκν-ἃ. 

15. 6 πρέσβυ-ς, the aged, has in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., 
and throughout the Plur., its forms from πρεσβυτα (Nom. 
Sing. πρεσ[θύτης) : πρέσβεις, πρέσβεων, πρέσβεσι(ν), signifies 
embassadors, to which the Sing. is ; πρεσβευτής. 

16.τάν. Only Voc, ὦ Tav OY ὦ τᾶν, Jriend or friends, 
a’ defective Stem. 

17. ὃ vide, son, St. vio, vi, viev, Gen. υἱέος, Dat. υἱεῖ, 
Ace. viéa (rare), Plur. υἱεῖς, υἱέων, se υἱεῖς. But also 
regularly υἱοῦ, etc. 

18. ἡ χεῖρ, hand, St. XE» Dual χεροῖν, Dat. Pl. χερσίᾳ(ν). 


Dialects.—11. vai-c, from St. νη v, Ion. νηῦ-ς, Hom. Acc. Sing. νῆτ-α, 
Dat. Plur. νήεσσι(ν), νηυσί(ν), Acc. νῆας. 
from St. vev, Ion. ve-de, ve-t, vé-a, vé-ec, ve-Gy, νέ-εσσι, vé-ac. 
from St. v av, Dor. va-de, va-i (navi), γνάτεσσι(ν). 
18. οὖς, Ion. οὗας, obar-o¢ ; Plur. eters, Dor. we, ὠτ-ός. 
17. vid-c, Ep. Gen. υἷ-ος, vi-t, vi-a, υἷ-ες, υἱ-ἀσι(ν), vi-ac. 
18. χείρ, poet. and New-Ion. χερ-ός, yep-i, Ep. Dat. Plur. χείρ-εσι or 
χείρ-εσσι(ν). 
To these add the words which are anomalous only in dialects: 
19. Homer ’Aidn-¢ (Att."Acdne), St. ’"AtO, Gen. "Αἱδ-ος, "Aid-t, also ᾿Αἵ- 
δωνεύ-ς, With regular inflexion, according to ὃ 159. _ 


§ 178. . CASE-LIKE. TERMINATIONS. | 73 


Case-like Terminations. 

§ 178. Besides the case-endings, there occur certain suf- 
Jjixes or appendages, which in meaning very nearly resem- 
ble case-endings. To these belong: 

1. -θι, answering to the question where : : ἄλλο-θι, elsé- 
where ; 

2. -θεν, answering to the question whence: οἴκο-θεν, 

Srom home ; 
3. -d«, answering to the question whither : οἴκα-δε, home- 
wards. 


Dialects—20. ὁ ἔρως, love, Stems ép wr and épo, poet. Acc. ἔρο-ν. 
21. θέμις, justice, St. 0 eur and θεμιστ, Plur. θέμιστ-ες, θέμιστ-ας. 
22. τὸ κάρα, head, Hom. St. eapnr, kapnar, κρᾶατ, κρᾶτ, καρ. 
Hom. Vom. Sing. κάρη. 

Gen. “ κάρητ-ος, kaphar-oc, Kpdar-oc, κρᾶτ-ός. 


Dai. “ κάρητ-ι, καρήατ-ι, Kpdar-t, kpar-i (trag. κάρᾳ). 
‘aon? κάρη; τὸν κρᾶτ-α, τὸ κάρ. 

Nom. Plur. rapa, καρήατ-α, Kpdar-a, secondary form κάρηνα. 
Gen.“ κρἄάτων, καρήνων. 

Da. “* κρᾶσί(ν). 

Ace. “ =WNom. (also τοὺς kpar-ac). 


23. ἡ μάστιξ, whip, Hom. Dat. paar, Acc, μάστι-ν. * 

24. ὁ peic, month, Ion, = Att. μήν. - 

25. ὄσσε, eyes. Nom. Acc. Dual, Neut.in Homer. The trag. have 
Gen. Plur. ὄσσων, Dat. ὄσσοις or ὄσσοισι(ν). ᾿ - 

§ 178. Dialects.—The three local suffixes are very frequent in Hom. : 
οἴκοθι, at home ; ᾿Ιλιόθι πρό, in front of Ilios ; οὐρανόθεν, from heaven ; 
ἀγορῆθεν, from the assembly. θεν also supplies the place of the Gen.- 
ending: κατὰ κρῆθεν, down from the head, entirely ; ἐξ ἁλόθεν, out of the 
sea. -δὲ is generally affixed to the Acc. : οἴκόνδε, homewards ; κλισίηνδε, 
into the tent ; πόλινδε, into the city; φόβονδε, into. flight. φύγαδε, into 
flight, and ἔραζε, to the earth, are peculiar. 

A suffix peculiar to the Hom. language is $1(v); it is added to the 
Stem of nouns, and supplies the place of the Gen. or Dat. termination 
in both Sing. and Plur., as: 

1. A- decl.: βίη-φι, with force ; κλισίη-φι, in the tent ἡ ἀπὸ νευρῆτφιν, 
Srom the bow-string. 

2. O- decl.: θεότ-φιν, from the gods ; ᾿Ιλιότφιν, from Ilios. 

3. Oons.-decl.: κοτυληδον-ότφιν, with the suckers (on the feelers of the 
polypus) ; az’ ὄχεσ-φι(ν), from the carriage; παρὰ vai-gu(v), alongside 
the ships ; ἀπὸ κράτεσ-φιν, from the head. (ὃ 177, D. 22.) - 

D : 


74 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. § 179. 


These suffixes are joined to the Stem of the noun: 
᾿Αθήνηθεν, From Athens (with Ton. n)3 icvicN OOO; From the 
circle (κυκλό-ς). Sometimes o comes in place of the A- 
sound: ῥιζόθεν (radicitus), from ῥίζα (radix) ; it also serves 
as a connecting vowel with consonant-stems: πάντ-οτθεν, 
Jrom all sides. The o is sometimes accented, contrary to 
ὃ 107, a: κυκλ-ό-θεν, Μαραθων-ό-θεν, from Marathon. 
The enclitic suffix ὃ ε (ἢ 92, 5) is often also combined with 
the Acc. form: Μέγαρά-δε, to Megara ; ’EXevoiv-a-6e, to 
Eleusis. οἴκ-α-δε, home, from Stem oixo, is irregular. 

For é¢ we find σε, ζ ε, with the same meaning: ἄλλοσε, 
elsewhither ; ᾿Αθήναζε, to Athens; Θήβαζε, to Thebes ; 
θύραζε (,foras). 5 


ὃ 179. Moreover, a few words have an old Locatwe in 
ι for the Sing., and σιε(ν) (without a preceding ὁ) for the 
Plur., answering the question where : οἴκοι, at home ; Πυ- 
Ooi, at Pytho ; ᾿Ισθμοῖ, on the Isthmus ; ᾿Αθήνησι(ν), m 
Athens ; Πλαταιᾶσι(ν), in Platwa ; θύρασι(ν), at the door 
(fords); pac v), at the right time. 


Cuap. VII.—OTHER INFLEXIONS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
A. Inflexion according to Genders. 
ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 


§ 180. The most numerous class of adjectives is that 
which in the Mase. and Neut. follows the O-Declension, 
and in the Fem. the A-Declension; which, consequently, 
has in the Nom. Sing. oc, ἡ (or a), ov | Lat. ws, ὥς wir). 


§ 180. Dialects—The Ionians haye frequently here also η for Att. 
ἃ : αἰσχρή. ὔ 


"ὦ 


§ 182. INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 75 

Singular. | Masc. Fem. WNeut. | Masc. Fem. WNeut. 
Nom. ayabog ἀγαθή ἀγαθόν | φίλος φιλίᾷ φίλιον 
Gen ἀγαθοῦ ἀγαθῆς ἀγαθοῦ =| φιλίου φιλίᾶς φιλίου 
Dat. ἀγαθῷ ἀγαθῇ ἀγαθῷ φιλίῳ φιλίᾳ, φιλίῳ 
Ace, ἀγαθόν ἀγαθήν ἀγαθόν | φίλιον φιλίᾶν φίλιον 
Voce ἀγαθέ ἀγαθή ἀγαθόν ᾿ φίλιε φιλίαᾷξ:Ἡ φίλιον 
Dual. 

NV. A.V. | ἀγαθώ ἀγαθά ἀγαθώ φιίω grid φιλίω 
σ. }. ἀγαθοῖν ἀγαθαῖν ἀγαθοῖν | φιλίοιν φιλίαιν φιλίοιν 
Plural, 
Nom. ἀγαθοί ἀγαθαί ἀγαθά φίλιι φίλιαι φίλιᾶ 
Gen. ἀγαθῶν ἀγαθῶν ἀγαθῶν | φιλίων φιλίων φιλίων 
Dat. ἀγαθοῖς ἀγαθαῖς ἀγαθοῖς | φιλίοις φιλίαις φιλίοις 
Ace. ἀγαθούς ἀγαθάς ἀγαθά | φιλίους φιλίᾶς φίλιᾶ 


In the Nom. Sing. Fem. a stands after a vowel or Ps else- 
where ἡ: δίκαιος, δικαία, δίκαιον, Just ; αἰσχρός, αἰσχρά, 
αἰσχρόν, hateful ; σοφός, σοφή, σοφόν, wise. 

Exception: 7 stands after ο, except when p precedes ο: 

ἁπλόος, ἁπλόη, ἁπλόον, simple. 
ἀθρόος, ἀθρόᾶ, ἀθρόον, assembled. 

§ 181. Though the declension of these adMbtives con- 
forms to $$ 114, 126, the following points must be ss 
served : 

1. a in the Nom. Sing. is always long. 

2. In the accent of the Nom. and Gen. Plur. the Fem. 
follows the Mase.: βέβαιος, firm, Nom. Plur. Mase. Bé- 
Bator, Fem. βέβαιαι (§ 108 would require βεβαῖαι, from 
Nom. Sing. βεβαία) ; Gen. of all genders, βεβαίων (not even 
in the Fem. βεβαιῶν, as would be required by ὃ 118). . 


ὃ 182. Many adjectives of this class have only two end- 


§ 181. Dialects.—dia, Fem. of δῖος, heavenly, has in Hom. &: dia θεάων, 
the heawenly one among the goddesses. 


§ 182. Dialects.—The poets form a peculiar Fem. from many com- 


pound adjectives: ἀβρότη (Masc. ἄμβροτος, immortal), ἀντιθέη (Mase. 
ἀντίθεος, godlike). 


aad 


76 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. § 183. 


ings, the Mase. being used for the Fem.: Mase. and Fem. 
ἥσυχος, Neut. ἥσυχον, quiet. Compound adjectives espe- 
cially are all of only two endings: ἄτεκνος, childless ; ; 
καρποφόρος, Sruitful. jee 

§ 183. Adjectives ending in εος and οος in the Nom. 
Mase. are generally contracted (δ 130): χρύσεος, golden, 
and ἁπλόος, simple, are thus contracted : 


Singular. | Masc. Fem. Neut. | Mase. Fem. WNeut. 
Nom. χρυσοῦς χρυσῆ χρυσοῦν ἁπλοῦς ἁπλῆ ἁπλοῦν 
Gen. χρυσοῦ χρυσῆς χρυσοῦ | ἁπλοῦ ἁπλῆς ᾿ ἁπλοῦ 
Dat. xpvop χρυσζ χρυσῷ |amp ἁπλῇ ἁπλῷ 
Ace. χρυσοῦν. χρυσῆν χρυσοῦν ἁπλοῦν ἁπλῆν ἁπλοῦν 
Voe. χρυσοῦς χρυσῆ χρυσοῦν ἁπλοῦς ἁπλῆ ἁπλοῦν 
Dual. peg 
NN. A.V. | xpvo χρυσᾶ χρυσώ | ath ἁπλᾶ Cae A 
a ἢ.- χρυσοῖν χρυσαῖν χρυσοῖν  ἁπλοῖν ἁπλαῖν : ἁπλοῖν 
Plural. 
Nom. . |xpvoot χρυσαῖ χρυσᾶ amot ἁπλαῖ amda- 
Gen. χρυσῶν χρυσῶν χρυσῶν ἁπλῶν ἁπλῶν ἁπλῶν 
Dat. χρυσοῖς χρυσαῖς. χρυσοῖς ἁπλοῖς ἁπλαῖς ἁπλοῖς 
Ace. Ἢ χρυσοῦς χρυσᾶς χρυσᾶ ἁπλοῦς ἁπλᾶς ἁπλᾶ | 


The Fem. ἐὰ is contracted to ἡ, except when preceded 


by a vowel or p3; it is then contracted to a: ἀργυρέα, 
ἀργυρᾶ (argentea). The Nom. Plur. oa, oa:, produce ἃ: 
αι: ἅπλα, ἁπλαῖ." ᾿ 

The contracted final syllable also receives the circumflex, 
contrary to ὃ 87: χρύσεος, χρυσοῦς. But compound adjec- 
tives retain the accent on the last syllable but one: εὔνους, 
well-disposed, Gen. εὔνου, Dat. εὔνῳ, Nom. Plur. εὖνοι. 


§ 184. A few adjectives in we in the Nom. follow the 


§ 183. Dialects—The adjectives in eoc, ooc, often remain uncon- 
tracted: Hom. χρυσέῳ (where ε disappears by αὐ νήδωνιν καλλίῤῥοος, 
beautifully-flowing. 

§ 184. Dialects—Hom. ἵλᾶος, πλεῖος, πλείη, πλεῖον ; New-Ion..eo¢ = 
Att. ewc; for Att. σῶς (salvus), Hom. σόος, ἡ, ov, comparative cawrepoc. 


ν᾿ 


§ 185. 


Attic O-Declension ($ 132): 


INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 


ae 


ἵλεως, Neut. ἵχεων, gracious ; 


ἀξιόχρεως; Neut. -wv, considerable; πλέως, πλέα, πλέων, 
full. σῶς (from σάος, salvus) has in the Nom. Sing. Fem. 
and Neut. Plur.oca; but also the forms σῶος, σώα, Plur. 


®owol, σῶαι." 


ADJECTIVES OF THE CoNnsONANT DECLENSION, 


§ 185. Other. adjectives in the Mase. and Neut. follow 
the Consonant Declension, and form from the Stem a pe- 
culiar Fem. with the ending ca, which, however, undergoes 
various changes in combination with the Stem. Such ad- 


jective-stems of three denominations are: 
1. Stems im v (Mase: and Neut., § 154). 


The Fem. is 


formed from the Stem as it appears in the Gen. (828); ε 
and ca are contracted, and the accent remains on the last 
syllable of the Stem: hence— 


Mase. Fem. Neut. 
Nom. ὕ-ς etd v 
Singular. 
Nom. ἡδύ-ς, sweet. ἡδεῖα ἡδύ 
Gen. ἡδέος ἡδείας ἡδέος 
Dat. ἡδεῖ ᾿ ἡδείᾳ ἡδεῖ 
Ace. ἡδύν ἡδεῖαν ἡδύ 
Dual. 
‘Nom. Ace. Hoge ᾿ ἡδείᾷ ᾿ἡδέε 
Gen. Dat. ἡδέοιν ᾿ἡδείαιν ἡδέοιν 
Plural. Ὁ 
Nom. * ἡδεῖς ἡδεῖαι ἡδέα 
Gen. ἡδέων ἡδειῶν ᾿ ἡδέων. 
_ Dat. . ἡδέσι(») ἡδείαις . ἡδέσι(ν) 
Ace, ἡδεῖς ᾿ ἡδείᾷς «ἡδέα. 


§ 185. Ῥιαϊθοίθ.--- Ἰότα, sometimes has en for Att. ε oa’ βαθέη (βαθεῖα, 


deep) ; the Ion. ea for eva: Hom. ὠκέα Ἴρις; swift Iris. 


Besides θῆλυς, 


feminine, we find also ἡδύς; πουλύς (πολύς, much), as Fem. - Sometimes 


ea is used for vy in the Acc. Sing. Mase. : 


εὐρέα πόντον, the wide sea, ᾿ 


78 


γλυκύς, sweet. 
βραδύς, slow, 


Οὐδ.----θῆλυς, female, differing also in accent, occurs as a Feminine. 


δ᾽ 186. 2. Stems im v. 


Examples for Declension. 
βραχύς, short. 
ταχύς, swift. 


INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 


§ 186. 


εὑρύς, broad, 


The ¢ in ca is transferred to th 


= 
Θ 


preceding syllable (§ 55): St. μελαν, Nom. Mase. μέλας, 
Fem. μέλαινα (from μελαν-ια), Neut. μέλᾶν, black. 


Singular. Mase. Fem. Neut. 
Nom. μέλᾶς μέλαινα pédav 
Gen. pédavoc μελαίνης μέλᾶνος 
Dat. μέλανι μελαίνῃ μέλανι 
Ace. μέλανα μέλαιναν μέλαν 
Voe. μέλαν μέλαινα μέλαν 
Dual. 

NA, V. μέλανε μελαίνα μέλανε 
C.D. μελάνοιν μελαίναιν μελάνουν 

~ Plural. 

Nom. μέλανες μέλαιναι μέλανα 
Gen. μελάνων μελαινῶν μελάνων 
Dat. μέλασι μελαίναις μέλασι 
Ace. μέλανας μελαίνας μέλανα 


lengthened by compensation (§ 50): 


λέγουσα. 


Examples for Declension. 
St. ταλαν, τἀλᾶς; τάλαινα, τἀλᾶν, unfortunate. 
St. reper, réony, τέρεινα, τέρεν, tender. 
§ 187. 3. Stems in vr. 
numerous participial forms, 


To these belong especially the 


In the Fem. the vz combines 
with the ending ca to form oa, the previous vowel being 


λεγοντ-ιαῖ becoming 


The adjectives ἷ in evr have eooa in the Fem.: χαρίεις, 


χαρίεσσα, χαρίεν, pleasing, St. χαριεντ. 


Plur., see §.149. 


For the Dat. 


δ. 187. Dialects—Adjectives in evr (Nom. Mase. ec) are sometimes 
contracted : Hom. τιμῇςετιμήεις, honorable ; λωτεῦνταελωτύεντα; abound. 


ing in lotuses ; 


poet. πτεροῦσσα-Ξ-πτερόεσσα, winged, 


INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 


79 


Masc. 


Masc. Fem. Neut. Fem. Neut. 

Sing. | loosing. loosing. 

Nom. | λύσᾶς λύσᾶσα hoody λύων λύουσα λῦον 
Gen. ᾿ λύσαντος λυσάσης λύσαντος | λύοντος λυούσης λύοντος 
Dat. ᾿λύσαντε λυσάσρ λύσαντι ᾿|Ιλύοντι λυούσῃ λύοντι 
Ace. λύσαντα λύσασαν λῦσαν λύοντα λύουσαν λῦον 
Voe. | λύσας λύσασα λῦσαν λύων λύουσα λῦον 
Dual. 

N. A. ΥΕῬἘΡλύσαντε λυσάσα λύσαντε | AdovTE λυούσα λύοντε 
G. D. | \vodvrow λυσάσαιν λυσάντοιν] λυόντοιν λυούσαιν λυόντοιν 
Plural. 
Nom. ᾿λύσαντες λύσασαι λύσαντα λύοντες λύουσαι λύοντα 
‘Gen. |λυσάντων λυσασῶν λυσάντων λυόντων Χυουσῶν λυόντων 
Dat. Ἰλύσᾶσι λυσάσαις λύσᾶσι [λύουσι λυούσαις λύουσι 
Ace. λύσαντας λυσάσας λύσαντα ᾿λύοντας λυούσας λύοντα 
Sing. | loosed. giving. 
Nom. | λῦύθείς λυθεῖσα λυθέν διδούς διδοῦσα διδόν 
Gen. λυθέντος λυθείσης λυθέντος | διδόντος διδούσης διδόντος 
Dat. |\dvOivre λυθείῃ λυθέντι ᾿ διδόντι διδούσῃ διδόντι 
Ace. λυθέντα λυθεῖσαν λυθέν διδόντα διδοῦσαν διδόν 
Voce. Ἰἰλυθείς λυθεῖσα λυθέν διδούς διδοῦσα διδόν 
Dual. | 

N. A. ΚΟ λυθέντε λυθείσχα λυθέντε =| διδόντε διδούσα διδόντε — 
G. D. | dv0éevrow λυθείσαιν λυθέντοιν | διδόντοινν διδούσαιν διδόντοιν 
Plural 
Nom. ᾿ λυθέντες λυθεῖσαι λυθέντα | διδόντες διδοῦσαι διδόντα 
Gen. Ἰλυθέντων λυθεισῶν λυθέντων | διδόντων διδουσῶν διδόντων 
Dat. Ἰλυθεῖσι λυθείσαις λυθεῖσι διδοῦσι διδούσαις διδοῦσι 
Ace. Ἰλυθέντας λυθείσας λυθέντα | διδόντας διδούσας διδόντα 
Sing. | pleasing. showing. 
Nom. | χαρίεις χαρίεσσα χαρίεν δεικνύς δεικνῦσα δεικνύν 
Gen. | χαρίεντος χαριέσσης χαρίεντος | δεικνύντος δεικνύσης δεικνύντος 
Dat. 1 χαρίεντι χαριέσσῃ χαρίεντι | δεικνύντι δεικνύσῃ δεικνύντι 
Ace. | χαρίεντα χαρίεσσαν χαρίεν δεικνύντα δεικνῦσαν δεικνύν 
Voce. | χαρίεν χαρίεσσα χαρίεν δεικνύς δεικνῦσα δεικνύν 
Dual. 

N. A.V.) xapievre χαριέσσα χαρίεντε | δεικνύντε δεικνύσα δεικνύντε 
Ο. D. | χαριέντοιν χαριέσσαιν χαριέντοιν͵ δεικνύντοιν δεικνύσαιν δεικνύντοιν 
Plural. 
Nom. | χαρίεντες χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα | δεικνύντες δεικνῦσαι δεικνύντα 
Gen. | χαριέύτων χαριεσσῶν χαριέντων δεικνύντων δεικνυσῶν δεικνύντων 
Dat. | χαρίεσι χαριέσσαις χαρίεσι | δεικνῦσι δεικνύσαις δεικνῦσι 
Ace. Ἰχαρίεντας χαριέσσας χαρίεντα | δεικνύντας δεικνύσας δεικνύντα 


80 _ INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. ὃ 188. 


Obs.—The form of the Fem. is explained from τ before « becoming Ὁ 


o, according to ὃ 60, being dropped after o, and ν before o being 
thrown out and compensated for by a lengthening of the vowel: 
παντια, πανσια, πανσα, πᾶσα ; λυοντια, λυονσια, λυονσα, λύουσα.. 

ὃ 188. 4. Stems in or. The participles of the Perfect 
Active in or (Nom. Sing. Mase. ὡς, Neut. og) have via 
in the Fem.: λελυκώς, λελυκυΐα, λελυκός, one who has 
Sreed. . See §§ 146, 147. 


oe 


Singular. Masc. Fem. Neut. 
Nom. NEAT EWC λελυκυῖα λελυκός 
. Gen. λελυκότος λελυκυίας λελυκότος 
Dat. λελυκότι λελυκυίᾳ λελυκότι 
Ace, λελυκότα λελυκυῖαν λελυκός 
Voe. λελυκώς λελυκυῖα λελυκός 
Dual. 
NV. A. V. λελυκότε λελυκυία λελυκότε 
G. ἢ. λελυκότοιν λελυκυίαιν λελυκότοιν 
Plural. 
Nom. λελυκότες λελυκυῖαι λελυκότα 
Gen. λελυκύτων λελυκυιῶν λελυκότων 
Dat. λελυκόσι λελυκυίαις λελυκόσι 
Ace. λελυκότας λελυκυίας “ λελυκότα 


Obs.—The strange difference of the Fem. from the Stem of the 
Mase. and Neut. is explained by the F which was originally before 
the o. From For-ta came first Foo-ra (δ 60), then by a peculiar 


contraction (Fo becoming v) ve-ta, finally (« being dropped, ὃ 61, 


δ) v-ia and via. 
§ 189. The most important adjectives of two endings with 
Stems according to the Second Principal Declension are: 
1. Stems in ¢ (Inflexion given under §§ 164, 165), as: 
σαφής σαφές, clear. Gen. σαφοῦς. 
ἀληθής ἀληθές, true. “ ἀληθοῦς. 

Other Examples for Declension. 
᾿ πλήρης, full. ψευδής, false. ἀσφαλής, safe. 
2. Stems in v (Inflexion given under §§ 146, 147), as: 
Gen. πέπον-ος. | 

“ εὐδαίμον-ος. 
σώφρον-ος. 


δυσμενής, hostile. 


πέπων _ πέπον, Tipe. 
εὐδαίμων εὔδαιμον, happy. 
σώφρων . σῶφρον, reasonable. 


-§ 189. Dialects. —Herod. ἔρσην for ἄρσην. 


“ 


§ 191. INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 81 


Other Examples for Declension. 


μνήμων, mindful of. - ἐπιλήσμων, forgetful of. 
πολυπράγμων, much occupied. ᾿ 


3: Isolated forms, as: 


ἴδρις ἴδρι, acquainted with. * Gen. ἴδρι-ος. 
; (Inflexion according to § 157, aa 
ἄῤῥην (ἄρσην), ἄῤῥεν, male. τ 6861. ἄῤῥεν-ος. 


Compounds of substantives, such as ἀπάτωρ, Neut. ἄπατορ, St. πατερ 
(Nom. πατήρ), fatherless ; δυσμήτωρ, μήτηρ, unmotherly , φιλόπολις, -ἰ, 
Gen. -ιδ-ος, loving the city; εὔελπις (Gen. εὐέλπιδ-ος), hopeful. 

§ 190. 4. Besides these, there is a large number of ad- 
jectives which have only one ending, because either their 
meaning or form excludes a Neuter: ἅρπαξ, rapacious, St. 
ἁρπαγ; φυγάς, fugitive, St. puyad; ἀγνώς, unaequaint- 
ed, St. ayvwr; ἄπαις, childless, St. ἀπαιὸ; μακρόχειρ, 
long handed ; πένης, poor, St. wevnr; γυμνής, leght- 
armed, St.yuuvnr. Some adjectives of one ending fol- 
low the A-Declension, and are almost substantives, as: 
ἐθελοντής, Gen. ἐθελοντοῦ, voluntary ; ; they occur only in 
the Mase. © 

§ 191. The following adjectives are irregular: μέγας, 
great ; πολύς, much; and πρᾷος, gentle, the forms of eagh 
being derived from different Stems, viz., in péyac, from 


§ 190. Dialects——Hom. has also many adjectives in the Fem. only: 
καλλιγύναικα, Acc. Sing. 6. g., Σπάρτην, abounding in ραν δῷ women ; 
βωτιάνειρα, 6. J. Φθίη, men nourishing. - 

§ 191.. Dialects—In Hom. both Stems, zo i and zoXXo, in Mase. 
and Neut., are almost completely declined; the, Fem. is regularly 


πολλή. ὶ 
Sing. WV. πολύς πουλύς OF πολλός NN. πολύ πουλύ πολλόν 
G. πολλοῦ ΟΙΣ πολέος ; 
D. πολλῷ : 
‘A. πολύν πουλύν πολλόν ἊΝ. πολύ πουλύ πολλόν 
Plur. NV. πολέες (πολεῖς) πολλοί πολλά 
. . πολλῶν OY πολέων 
D. πολέεσσι(ν) πολέσσι(ν) πολέσι(ν) OF πολλοῖς 
A, πολέας πολλούς NV. πολλά 


Herod. has scarcely any forms omer from the Stem πολλο: ποὰ- 
Adv, πολλοί. 
D 2 


82 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 192. 


the Stems μεγα and μεγαλο; in πολύς, from rod v and 


πολλο; in πρᾷος, from 7 pao and zpai. 
Sing. | Masc. Fem. Neut. | Mase. Fem. Neut. 
Nom. |\péiyag μεγάλη μέγα πολύς πολλή πολύ 
Gen. | μεγάλου μεγάλης μεγάλου | πολλοῦ πολλῆς. πολλοῦ 
Dat. μεγάλῳ μεγάλῃ μεγάλῳ | πολλῷ πολλῇ πολλῷ 
Ace, μέγαν μεγάλην μέγα πολύν πολλήν πολύ 
Voc. | μέγα μεγάλη μέγα πολύ πολλή πολύ 
Dual. 
NV. A. Κ᾿ μεγάλω μεγάλα μεγάλω 
G. D. 1μεγάλοιν μεγάλαιν μεγάλοιν 
Plural. 
Nom, | μεγάλοι μεγάλαι μεγάλα | πολλοί πολλαί πολλά 
Gen. | μεγάλων μεγάλων μεγάλων | πολλῶν πολλῶν πολλῶν 
Dat. | μεγάλοις μεγάλαις μεγάλοις | πολλοῖς πολλαῖς πολλοῖς 
Ace. μεγάλους μεγάλας μεγάλα | πολλούς πολλάς πολλά 
Sing. ‘| Plural. 
Nom. |xpgog πραεῖα πραῦ πρᾷοι, OF πραεῖαι πραξα 
πραεῖς 
Gen. ᾿πρᾷου πραείας mpdov | mpatwy πραειῶν πραέων 
Dat. ᾿πρᾷῳ πραείᾳ πρᾷῳ πρᾷοις, OF πραείαις πρᾷοις, ΟΥ̓ 
πραέσι(ν) πραξσι(ν) 
Acc. πρᾷον πραεῖαν πρᾷον πρᾷους πραείας πρᾶξα 


- 


B. Comparison. 


§ 192. The first and most frequent ending of the Com- 
parative is rep o-(Nom. τερος, repa, τερον): of the Super- 
lative taro (Nom. τατος, τατη, τατον), with the usual in- 
flexion of adjectives (§ 180). These endings are affixed to 
the pure Stem of the Masc., as: | 


Positive. Stem. Comparative. Superlative. 
κοῦφος, light. κουφο κουφότερος, a, ον κουφότατος, n ον 
γλυκύς, sweet. γλυκυ γλυκύτερος γλυκύτατος 
μέλας, black. μελαν μελάντερος μελάντατος 
χαρίεις, graceful. χαριεντ χαριέστερος χαριέστατος 

(from χαριεντ-τερος, according to §§ 46 and 49). 
σαφής, clear. σαφες σαφέστερος σαφέστατο 
μάκαρ, happy. μακαρ μακάρτερος μακάρτατος 
πένης, poor. πενήτ πενέστερος πενέστατος 


(for πενητ-τερος, τατος, according to § 46, η being shortened). 


8.197. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 83 


-§ 193. The following points are to be observed : 


1 The Stems in o leave o unchanged only when the 
preceding syllable is long (§ 74, etc.), but lengthen it to 
w when that is short: πονηρό-τερος, worse , πικρό-τατον, 
most bitter ; σοφώ-τερος, wiser y ἀξιω-τάτη, most worthy. 
Every syllable with a vowel followed by two consonants 
or a double consonant is here considered long (§§ 76, 
77). 


§ 194. 2. The o is always rejected after a. in the adjective γεραιός, 
senex, sometimes in παλαιός, antiquus, and σχολαῖος, at leisure: γε- 
ραίτερος, παλαίτατος. 


§ 195. 3. The o or w is changed to ax in μέσος, medius ; ἴσος, like ; 
εὔδιος, clear; mpwioc, early; ὄψιος, late: μεσαίτατος, πρωϊαίτερον. 
ἥσυχος, peaceful, has ἡσυχαίτερος, and yovywrepoc; φίλος, dear, be- 
sides φιλώτερος, -raroc, also φίλτερος, -raroc, ANA φιλαίτερος, -τατος ; 
πλησιαίτερος, πλησιαίτατος, belong to πλησίον, near, and παραπλη- 
σιαίτερος, more like, to the same; προὐργιαίτερος to προὔργου, from 

᾿ πρὸ ἔργου, advantageously. 

§ 196. 4. The endings ἐστερο-ς,ἐστατο-ς, are inorganically ap- 
plied : 

- @) to Stems in or: σωφρονέστερος (St. cw φρον, Nom. σώφρων, reason- 
able), εὐδαιμονέστερος (St. εὐδαιμον, Nom. εὐδαίμων, Sortunate). 
πιότερος, -raroc, from πίων, fat, and πεπαίτερος, πτατος, from πέπων, 
ripe, are exceptional. 

b) to the Stems of ἄκρᾶτος, unmixed ; ἐῤῥωμένος, strong ; ἄσμενος, will- 
ing : axparéorépoc, ἐῤῥωμενέστερος. More seldom to others. 

c) to some Stems in oo contracted: εὐνούστερος for εὐνοέστερος, from 
εὔνους, well-disposed. 


δ 197. 5.corepoc, caorarog, occur with λάλος, talkative; πτωχός, 
beggarly ; ὀψοφάγος, epicure ; μονοφάγος, eating alone; and some 
adjectives of one ending, as κλέπτη-ς, thievish: λαλίστερος, πτω- 
xioraroc, κλεπτίστερος. 

Others of one gender in y-¢ follow the rule of those in o: ὑβριστό- 
τερος, from ὑβριστής, haughty. 


§ 193. Dialects—The quantity of the O-sownd in poets is rather 
doubtful: Hom. ὀϊζυρώτατος, the most wretched, 

Hom. has ἰθύντατα; from ἰθύς, straight ; φαάντατος, from φαεινός, glit- 
tering ; ἀχαρίστερος (for axapir-repoc, according to ὃ 46), from ἄχαρις, 


graceless, P 


- 


84 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 198. 


r : . 
The compounds οἵ χάρις; grace, Savor, form their Comparative and 
Superlative as if they ended in χαριτο-ς : ἐπιχαριτώτερος, more 


obliging. 

ὃ 198. The second and rarer termination of the Com- 
parative is cov (Nom., Masc., and Fem. cw v, Neut. c0,v); 
of the Superlative, στὸ (Nom. ἰστος, torn, LOTOV). The 
Stem-vowel is rejected before ... The accent is placed as 
far as possible from the end in the Comp. and Superl. In- 
flexion of the Comp., ὃ 170. So is formed from: 


Positive. Stem. Comparative. Superlative. 
ἡδύς, agreeable. 9 Ov ἡδίων, -ov ἥδιστος, τη, -ον 
ταχύς, swift. ταχυ θάσσων, -ον τάχιστος; -N, τον 

(from ταχιων, according to §§ 54, 57). 
μέγας, large. peya μείζων, -ov μέγιστος 


(from μεγιων, according to § 58). 


Obs.—The length of a in θᾶσσον (compare μᾶλλον, ὃ 202), and the 
diphthong of μείζων, is explained from the « passing into the pre- 
ceding syllable, as in ἀμείνων (compare ὃ 55): 


Farther with suppression of p: 
ἐχθρό, -c, hostile. ἐχθίων, -ov Superl. ἔχθιστος. « 


αἰσχρό, -c, shameful. αἰσχίων, -ov “ αἴσχιστοο. 
οἰκτρό, -c, pitiable, “ - ροἴκτιστος. 
ἐχθρ-ός and οἰκτρ-ός also have the forms in repo-¢ and raro-c. 


§ 199. This comparison occurs also in connection with » 


§ 198. Dialects—The endings ἐὼν, ἐσ το ς, are more frequent in the 
poets: Hom. φιλίων (φίλος, dear); γλυκίων (γλυκύς, sweet); ὥκιστος (ὠκύς, 
swift) ; βάθιστος (βαθύς, deep); βράσσων = βραχίων (βραχύς, short), Sup. 
poet. βράχιστος, Hom. Superl. βάρδιστος (βραδύς, slow, § ὅ9, D.); πάσσων 
=raxiwy (παχύς, thick); μάσσων =pakiwy (μᾶκρός, long)’ Sup. μήκιστος 
(Dor. μάκιστος) ; κυδίων (κυδρός, famous); μέζων, New-Ion. for μείζων. 

§ 199. Dialects—1. Hom. Comp. ἀρείων, Positive κρατύ-ς, Superl. 
κάρτιστος ; Comp. λωΐτερος ; New-lon. κρέσσων = κρείσσων ; poet, βέλ- 
τερος, βέλτατος, φέρτερος, φέρτατος, OF aor: more excellent, most excel- 
lent. 

2. Hom. κακώτερος ; xépne, χερείων, χερειότερος, χειρότερος ; New.-Ion. 
ἕσσων --- ἥσσων. (Compare κρέσσων, μέζων, ὃ 198, Obs.) 

4, Hom. ὑπ-ολίζων. 


§ 199. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 85 


other peculiarities in the following adjectives, where the 
changes of sound of δὲ 55-58 are often applied: 


1. For the idea of good : 


Positive Comparative. Superlative. 
ἀγαθός ᾿ 
[St. dper] ἀμείνων, ἄμεινον ‘ 

ἘΝ [St. ἀρες] [ἀρείων, Hom. } ἄριστος, ἡ, ov 
[St. βελτο] βελτίων, βέλτιον βέλτιστος, ἡ, ον 
[St. κρατυ] κρείσσων (κρείττων) κράτιστος, ἡ, ον 
LV. κρεῖσσον (κρεῖττον) | 

[St. Aw v] Awiwy OF λῴων λῷστος, ἡ; ον 


NV. λώϊον or λῷον 
Οὐδ8.---ἀμείνων and ἄριστος rather express excellence, capacity ; κρείσ-" 
σων, κράτιστος, strength, preponderance (Lat. superior) ; ἥσσων is op- 
posed to κρείσσων. 


2. For the idea of bad: 


Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
κακός κακίων NV. κάκιον κάκιστος 
[St. xep] χείρων (deterior), Ν. χεῖρον χείριστος 
[St. ἡ κυ] ἥσσων (inferior), N. ἧσσον Ν. Pl. ἥκιστα, least of all. 
3. μικρὸς, small, besides μικρότερος ᾿ * μικρότατος 
μείων, smaller, _ NV, μεῖον 
4, ὀλίγος, Little, ὀλίγιστος 
[St. 2raxv], ἐλάσσων N. ἔλασσον ἰἰλάχιστος 
5. πολύς, much, πλείων (πλέων) πλεῖστος 


NV. πλέον (also πλεῖν) 
6. κἄλός, beautiful, as if from - 


κάλλος, beauty καλλίων NV. κάλλιον κάλλιστος 
7. ῥᾷδιος, easy, « 
[St. pal, pdwy NV. ῥᾷον ῥᾷστος 
8. ἀλγεινός, painful, as if from 
ἄλγος, pain, ἀλγίων _ WV. ἄλγιον ἄλγιστος͵ 


Dialects.—5. Homer contracts πλέον to πλεῦν, πλέονες. to bei ek : 
Plur, also πλέες, πλέας, πλέα. ; 

7. Ion. ῥηΐδιος ; Hom. ῥηΐτερος, ῥήϊστος, pniraroc. Hom. forms single 
degrees from substantives: κύντερος, more doggish (κύων, dog); ῥίγιον, 
worse ; ῥῖγος, cold, shudder. 

Defectives ; ἐνέρτεροι; also tragic νέρτεροι (infert, for which Positive 
ἔνεροι) ; Hom: πύματος and λοῖσθος, λοίσθιος, last ; ὑστάτιος = ὕστατος, 
“δεύτατος, in a like sense, πρώτιστος = πρῶτος, the first. 


86 ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES. § 200. — 


§ 200. Finally observe farther the Defectives : 


ὕστερος; later, ὕστατος, ultimus. 
ἔσχατος, extremus, 
(νέος, new), ψέατος, Novissimus. 
(ὑπέρ, over), ὕπατος, summus. 
(πρό, before), πρότερος, prior, πρῶτος, primus, 


(πέραν, on the other side), περαίτερος. 


C. Adverbs of ‘Abisibiien 


§ 201. Adverbs are derived from the Adjective Stem by 
affixing to it the syllable we. The o of the Stem is en- 
tirely dropped: φίλος, oi Ree The Stems of the Sec- 
ond Principal Declension Have the same form as in the 
Genitive: ταχύς, swift, ταχέως ; σαφής, clear, σαφέως, 
contr. σαφῶς ; σώφρων, reasonable, σωφρόνως. Contrac- 
tion occurs only where the Genitive also has it. The ac- 
cent of the adverb is always the same as that of the Geni- 
tive Plural of the corresponding adjective: ψυχρός, cold, 
ψυχρῶς ; δίκαιος, just, δικαίως ; πᾶς (St. παν τ), πάντως, 
every Way. 

The Neuter Accusdtive, both of the Singular and the 
Plural, is moreover very often used as an adverb. 


§ 202. An older adverbial form is that in a, as: τάχα, 
from ταχύς, guick (meaning, in Att. prose, perhaps) ; ἅμα, 
at the same time; μάχα;" very. The Comp. of μάλα is 
μᾶλλον (potius)=pariov (ὃ 56); Superl. μάλιστα ( potissi- 
mum). εὖ, well, as an adverb to ἀγαθός, good, stands alone. 

§ 203. Adverbs in we are also formed from Comparatives 
and Superlatives: βεβαιοτέρως, more firmly; καλλιόνως, 
more beautifully. But, as a rule, the comparative has the 


§ 202. Dialects—The adverbs in a are more numerous in Homer: 
ὦκα (quickly, oxic); λίγα, aloud, λιγύς ; κάρτα; strongly, very, to κρατύς, 
compare ὃ 59, D.; σάφα (clearly, σαφής). 

Homer has for εὖ or 2% the adjective éic¢ or jie, good. 

. §§ 203, 204. Dialects—Homeric ἑκαστέρω, ἑκαστάτω (from ἑκάς, far) ; 
ἄσσον (ΞΞ ἀγχιον), ἀσσοτέρω (ἄγχι, neu), ἄγχιστα; New-lon. ἀγχοτάτω, 
ἀγχότατα. In addition to this, there is the Hom. sraaeinres crowded, 
with v instead of o. 


§ 205. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 87. 


Neut: Ace. Sing., the superlatwe the’ Neut. Acc. Plur., as 
an adverb: βεβαιότερον, κάλλιον ; βεβαιότατα, κάλλιστα. 

§ 204. Adverbs in w, like ἄνω, above; κάτω, below ; tow, inside ; ἔξω, 
outside, have no ¢ in Compar. and Superl.: ἀνωτέρω, κατωτέρω, 
likewise ἀπωτέρω, farther (from ἀπό) ; ἐγγυτέρω (or ἐγγύτερον), 
ἐγγυτάτω (or ἐγγύτατα), from ἐγγύς, near, and some others. 


Cuap. VIII.—InFiexion oF PRONOUNS. 
§ 205. The Personal Pronouns are: 


Singular.. | 
Nom. ἐγώ, 1 [ego] σύ, thou [tu] 
Gen. ἐμοῦ, μοῦ σοῦ οὗ, of him. 
Dat. ἐμοί, pot σοί οἵἷ 
Ace. ἐμέ, μέ [Me] σέ [te] ἕ [se] 
Dual. 
NV. A. (vin) νώ, we. (σφῶι) σφώ, Ye. | (σφωξ), they. 
G. D. (veiw) νῷν (σφῶιν) σφῷν | (σφωΐν) 
. Plural ; 
Nom ἡμεῖς, WE. ὑμεῖς, YOu. σφεῖς, they. WN. σφέα 
Gen. pov ὑμῶν σφῶν 
Dat. ἡμῖν ὑμῖν σφί-σι(ν) 
Ace. ἡμᾶς ὑμᾶς σφᾶς NV. σφέα 
¥ 


ὃ 205. Dialects—The following are special additional forms of the Ὁ 


Ion. Dialect. (Those in brackets are merely New-Ion.) 
Sing. Wom. ἐγών τύνη [tu] 
Gg ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μεῦ πὶ σεῦ ἕο, εὖ 
ug sare ἐμέ-θεν (δ 178, D.) ἰσεῖο, σέ-θεν ΤῊ ἕ-θεν 
Dat. "roi, τεῖν er compare § 34, 
Ace. éé D. 4. 
Plur. Nom. (ἡμέες) ἄμμες (ipéec) ὕμμες 
Gen. ἡμέων, ἡμείων ὑμέων, ὑμείων σφέων, σφείων 
Dat. ἄμμι(ν) ὕμμι(ν) σφί() 
Acc. ἡμέας, ἄμμε ὑμέας, ὕμμε σφάς, σφέας, 


σφεῖας, σφέ 


An isolated Ionic form for the Accusative Sing. of the third person is 
piv, trag. viv, both enclitic; in a like sense σφέ occurs in the poets. 
viv seldom stands for the Plural. 


88 PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. § 206. 


§ 206. The Stems of the Sing. are: ze, for the first 
person; σε, for the second; é, for the third. The Nom- 
inative, however, is formed differently from them: ἐγώ, σύ, 
and that of the third person is entirely wanting, 

Obs. _The σ of the Stem ce has arisen from τ ᾧ 60 a) [te], which 

remains in many dialect-forms. The Stem’é goes back to Fe, 


and this to a still older form, σε [Lat. se for sve]. (δ 60,0.) In 
the form σφε, the F is hardened into ¢. 


The Stems of the Dual are: vw [no-s], σφω, pw. The 
Dual of the third person does not occur in prose, 

The Stems of the Plural are: jue, tue, σφε (ε 15 gen- 
erally contracted with the ending, hence the circumflex : 
see Dialects). 


§ 207. When there is no emphasis on the Personal Pro- 


nouns, it becomes enclitic in the forms mentioned in § 92, 
2; in that case the first person has the forms beginning 
with ». But when emphatic, as well as generally after 
prepositions, it retains its accent, and the first ‘person has 
the fuller forms: δοκεῖ μοι, dt seems to me; ἐμοὶ οὐ σοὶ 
τοῦτο ἀρέσκει, this pleases me, not you. 


The Gen., Dat., and Acc. Plur. of the first and second persons, when 
not emphatic, sometimes have the accent on the first: syllable : 
ἥμων, uv, and in this case the final syllable of the Dat. and 
Ate. is usually shortened : ἥμιν, jac (Hom.). When emphatic, 
with the final syllable shortened, they are written ἡμίν, ὑμίν. 


§ 208. The Possessive Pronouns are formed from: the 
Stems of the Personal Pronouns: — 


St. Ewe, ἐμός, my. . St. ἡ με, ἡμέτερος, our. 
“oe, - σός, thy. “ ὁ με, ὑμέτερος, Your. 
+ é, ~ ὅς, his, her, “σφε, σφέτερος, their. 


Obs.—The ending repoc is that of the comparative. (§ 192). 


§ 208. Dialects. —Hom. additional forms of the Pommaadiea: τεός 
[tuus], ἑός [suns], ἅμός (properly Dor.), ὑμός, σφός. From the Dual 
Stems Vw, σφω: νωΐτερος, nos-ter ; 7 σφωΐτερος, belonging to you two ; ἢ ἅμός 
(also ἀμός) often means my, ὅς sometimes means own, without any? ref- 
erence to a particular person. 


2 - 
$211. REFLEXIVE AND OTHER PRONOUNS. 89 


§ 209. αὐτό-ς, αὐτή, αὐτό, self, is declined like a com- 
mon adjective, except that the Neuter in the Nom. Acc. 
Voc. Sing. has no v (compare the article τό). 

ὁ αὖτός (αὑτός), ἡ αὐτή (αὑτή), τὸ αὐτό (ταὐτό or ταὐτόν), 
the same, Lat.idem. Ὁ 

§ 210. The Stems of the Personal Pronouns, combined 
with αὐτός, produce the Reflexive Pronouns. 


Singular. Gen. M.N., F. Dat. M.N. F. Acc.M. F. Ν. 
1st person, ἐμαυτοῦ -ῆς ἐμαυτῷ -y ἐμαυτόν τήν, myself. 
2d person, σεαυτοῦ -ῆς σεαυτῷ τῇ σεαυτόν -ἦν, thyself. 

Or σαυτοῦ -ῆς σαυτῷ τῇ σαυτόν -ὴν 
3d person, ἑαυτοῦ -ῆς ἑαυτῷ τῇ ἑαυτόν -ήν -ό, himself, her- 
“ΟΥ̓ αὑτοῦ -οῆς arp τῇ αὑτόν -ἦν -ό, self, itself. 

In the plural, both Stems are declined together : 

Plural. .Gen.M.F.N. Dat. M.N. F. Acc. M. F. 
1st person, ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς -aic ἡμᾶς αὐτούς -άς, ourselves, 
2d person, ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς -aic ὑμᾶς αὐτούς -dc, yourselves, 
3d person, σφῶν αὐτῶν ᾿ σφίσιν αὐτοῖς -αῖς σφᾶς αὐτούς -άς, themselves. 
ὔ Neut. σφέα αὐτά 


Yet the 3d person plural has also the compound form : 


ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτοῖς -αἷς ἑαυτούς -ἄς -ἁ 
or αὑτῶν αὑτοῖς -αἷς © αὑτούς -ἀς -ἄ 


§ 211. ἄλλο-ς, ἄλλη, ἄλλο, another (alius), is declined 
like αὐτός. 

The Stem ἀλλο combined with itself produces the Le- 
ciprocal Pronoun ar-nXo (for aA A-aXAX oo), occurring 
only in the Dual and Plural. 


§ 209. Dialects—New-fonic wirdc, with, τωὐτό; Homeric ωὐτός = ὁ 
αὐτός. 

§ 210. Dialects—The Epic dialect declines both Stems together 
even in the sing. : ἐμὲ αὐτόν = ἐμαυτόν, οἵ αὐτῷ = ἑαυτῷ, etc. 

New-lonic ἐμεωυτοῦ, σεωυτοῦ, ἑωυτοῦ, stand for the forms with av. 


90 DEMONSTRATIVE. PRONOUNS. τ᾿ 212, 

Dual. Mase. Fem. Neut. 

G. D. ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλαιν ἀλλήλοιν 

Ace. ἀλλήλω ἀλλήλα ἀλλήλω 
Plural. 

Gen. ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων 

Dat. ἀλλήλοις ἀλλήλαις ἀλλήλοις 

Ace. ἀλλήλους ἀλλήλας ἄλληλα 


§ 212. The two most important Demonstratwe Pro- 
NOUNS are: 


ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, that. οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτ, this. 


Se consists οὗ the article 6 and the demonstrative enclitic 
δέ, and is therefore declined entirely like the article with 
δὲ affixed. οὗτος corresponds to the article with regard to 
the rough breathing and the τ at the beginning; it also has 
the diphthong av in the last syllable but one where the 
article has a or ἡ (A-sound), and ov where the article has 
0, w, or ov (O-sound). 


Singular. Plural. 
ὁ ἡ τό οἱ αἱ τά 
Nom. ὅδε ἥδε τόδε οἵδε aide τάδε 
οὗτοου αὕτη τοῦτο οὗτοι αὗται ταῦτα 
τοῦ τῆς τοῦ τῶν 
Gen τοῦδε τῆςδε τοῦδε τῶνδε 
τούτου ταύτης τούτου τούτων 
τῷ “ τῇ τῷ τοῖς ταῖς τοῖς 
Dat. τῷδε τῇδε τῷδε TOICOE raicde τοῖσδε 
τούτῳ ταύτῃ τούτῳ τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις 
: τόν τήν τό τούς τάς τά 
Ace. τόνδε τήνδε τόδε τούςδε TaccE τάδε 
τοῦτον ταύτην τοῦτο τούτους ταύτας ταῦτα 


§ 212. Dialects—In Homer, the article itself is a demonstrative pro- 
noun, with these special forms: Nom. 6; Gen. τοῖο; Gen. Dat. Dual 
τοῖιν ; Nom. Plur. roi, rai; Gen. Plur. Fem. τάων ; Dat. Plur. roio(y), 
τῇσι(ν), OF τῇς. 

From ὅδε we have Dat. Plur. τοΐσδεσι or τοϊσδεσσι(ν), and κεῖνος, poet. 

for ἐκεῖνος. 


8.214. RELATIVE AND INTERROG. PRONOUNS. 91 


- Dual. 
τώ. τά τώ . (τοῖν ταῖν "τοῖν 
N. A. V.<rwde rade τώδε G. D.< roivde raivde τοῖνδε 
τούτω ταὐτᾷ τούτω τούτοιν ταύταιν τούτοιν 
The adverb οἵ ὅδε is ὧδε ; that of οὗτος, οὕτως or οὕτω, in this way. 


Like οὗτος are declined : 

τοσοῦτος τοσαύτη τοσοῦτο ΟΥ̓ τοσοῦτον, 80 great (tantus) ; 
τοιοῦτος τοιαύτη τοιοῦτο ΟΥ̓ τοιοῦτον, such (talis) ; 
τηλικοῦτος τηλικαύτη τηλικοῦτο OF τηλικοῦτον, 80 Old ; 


in which, however, the r of the forms beginning with r is 
dropped ; ταῦτα, but τοσ-αὔτα ; by affixing the enclitic δέ, we have 
the forms τοσόςδε, 80 large; τοϊόςδε, of such quality ; τηλικός-δε, of 
such an age, with a regular adjective declension before the syl- 
lable δε. 

éxeivo-c, ἐκείνη, ἐκεῖνο, that, is declined like adréc. 

A long accented ε is often affixed to the Demonstrative Pronouns 
to strengthen the meaning without affecting the declension, but 
the ε of δὲ is lost: odroct, ὁδέ, ἐκεινωνέ, αὑτηΐ, τοιςδί, Compare the 
Lat. ce in his-ce, has-ce. 


§ 213. The Lelatwe Pronoun has the rough. breathing 
in all cases, as: 


Singular. Plural. Dual. *# 
Masc. Fem. Neut. | Masc. «Fem. WNeut. Masc. Fem. Neut. 
Nom. ὅς, w ἥ δ ποῦν. - ἀῶ NA. ὅν -& 
Gen. οὗ ἧς οὗ ὧν G.D. οἷν αἷν οἷν 
Dat. ᾧ Q @ | oi¢ αἷς, οἷξ 
Ace. ὅν ἥν ὅ οὕς ἅς ii 


Obs.—In the phrases καὶ ὃς ἔφη, and he said, and ἢ δ᾽ ὅς, but he said, 
dc is used as a Demonstrative (compare the Dialects). 

§ 214. The Lnterrogatwe Pronoun has the same Stem 

as the Indefinite Pronoun, from which it is distinguished 


§ 213. Dialects—Hom. 6 = ὅς, tov = οὗ, ἕης = ἧς; and signifies he. 
Ion. oio = οὗ, and the forms of the Article which begin with r, are used 
instead of those of the Relative: τοῦ = οὗ, cujus; τῷ = ᾧ, cui ; τοῖς -ΞΞ 
οἷς, quibus. 

§ 214. Dialects—Hom., partly also New-Ion: forms are: Gen. τέο, 
rev; Dat. τέῳ, τῷ ; Gen. Plur. τέων ; Dat. Plur. τέοισι(ν) ; Neut. Plur. 
dooa. The 


.92 . INTERROG. AND INDEF. PRONOUNS. § 215. 


only by the accent. The Interrogative Pronoun has the 


accent always on the Stem syllable; the Indefinite is en- 


clitic: hence ric, who ? τὶς, enelitic, some one. 


Interrogative. Indefinite. - 
Singular. Singular. 
- Nom. “τίς ΤΙ τὶς τὶ 
Gen. τίνος τινός 
Dat. τίνι τινί 
Ace. τίνα ὭΣ ἢ τινά τὶ 
Dual. Dual. 
Nom. Ace. TiVE rive 
Gen. Dat. Tivo. τινοῖν 
Plural. Plural. 
Nom. τίνες τίνα τινές τινά (ἄττα) 
Gen. τίνων ᾿ τινῶν 
Dat. τίσι(ν) τισί(ν) 
Ace. τίνας τίνα τινάς τινά (ἄττα) 


Qbs.—1. τοῦ, τῷ, which as indefinites are enclitic, are often used for 
τίνος, rim, and for τινός, τινί. ‘ 

Obs.—2. The Relative and Indefinite combine to form ὕστις, ἥτις, 
ὅ τι, who. Both Stems are declined together: οὗτινος, ἥετινος, 
“ori, οἵντινοιν (δ 93,0). A space is left between o and τι in 6 τι, 
which, to distinguish it from the conjunction. ὅτι, that. 

The shorter forms of τὶς are also used with dc; but the Stem ὁ is 
not declined: Gen. ὅτου; Dat. ὅτῳ ; more rarely Gen. Plur.- drwy, 
Dat. ὅτοισι(ν). ἅττα is an additional form for ἅτινα; not to be 
confounded with ἄττα for τινά. 


§ 215. Another Indefinite Pronoun is δεῖνα, of three gen- 
ders, guidam, sometimes undeclined, sometimes declines as 
follows: 

Step: ὁ, ἡ, τὸ δεῖνα, δεῖνος, δεῖνι, δεῖνα. 
Plur. οἱ, αἱ, δεῖνες, δείνων, δεῖνας. 


The following are special forms of the compound Relative in Hom. 
and also in New-Ion.: 

Sing. dric, N. ὅττι;  brev, Srreo, Urrev; brew; ὅὕτινα, N. ὅττι 

Plur. Ν, ἅσσα; ὕτεων ὁτέοισι ὕτινας, Ν. ἅσσα 


(for ἁτια, according to ὃ΄ ὅ7). 


The Stem of the Relative thus often remains unchanged, aves 


ΨΥ re ee 


ce ee ee eee Oe lee, el le 


8.217. 


- 


CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 93 
§ 216. The following are called Correlative Pronouns : 
Interrogative. Indefinite. | Demonstrative. | Relative. 
ric, who ? τὶς; Some One. ὅδε, οὗτος, this. | bc, ὅςτις, who. 


πότερος, uter ὃ 


πότερος, one of 


ἕτερος, the one of 


ὁπότερος, which 


which of two? two (alteruter). two (alter). of two. 
πόσος, how great? ποσός, of some) τό ὅσοςδε, ro-| ὅσος, ὁπόσος, 
how much ? size or number.| σοῦτος, so great,| how great, how 
(quantus, quot). so much (tantus,| much (quan- 
‘ tot). tus, quot). 


ποῖος, Of what 


quality ὃ (qualis). 


ποιός, Of some 
quality. 


τοῖος, τοιόςδε, τοι- 
οὗτος, of such a 
quality (talis). 


οἷος, ὁποῖος, Of 
what quality 
(qualis). 


πηλίκος, how old ? | πηλίκος, of some| τηλίκος, τηλίκοςδε, ἡλίκος, ὁπηλίκος, 
ao age. τηλικοῦτος, of | of what age. 
such age. 


Obs, —On the ending repoc, see §§ 192, 208, Obs. 


In Attic prose of the Pokipdahnanires generally wake 
those in -δὲ and -ovro-¢ are used. 


§ 217. Correlative Adwerbs are pea from the same 
Pronominal Stems. 


§ 216. Dialects. —decoc (add. form ὁσσάτιος), τόσσος, are Epic for 
ὅσος, τόσος. _ For every Interrogative x the New-Ion. dialect Has x: 
κόσος, κοῖος, KOTE, κοῦ. 

§ 217. Dialects.—760 is Epic = ποῦ ; ποθί = πού ; dem. τόθι, there, 
rel. ὅθι, where. In poetry, ré0ev is dem. to πόθεν, New-Ion. ἐνθαῦτα for 
ἐνταῦθα, ἐνθεῦτεν. for ἐντεῦθεν. ᾿ 

ὥς in the Poets, like οὕτως, means 80. to be distinguished from ὡς 
(without accent), how ; it is written also ὡς, with the meaning yet: 
καὶ ὧς, and yet. With the meaning 80, τώς also occurs. gy is an ad- 
ditional form of ἡ. The π is doubled: ὅππως, ὅπποτε (ὃ 62, D.). 


ΡῈ 


πόθεν, whence ?) (ali- 


ποῖ, whither? | (ali- 


ae CORRELATIVE ADVERBS. § 218. 
Interrogative.| Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative. - 
πού ἔνθα * 
ποῦ, where? | (ali- mee ἐνθάδε oe at ἱ ΡΝ 
(ubi ?) cubi) ONENE | ἐνταῦθα ἶ 
Srom 


some- |tvdévde $ there |” Sporoont 


ποθέν Srom ἔνθεν ἰ 
(unde ?) cunde) ‘_ ἐντεῦθεν (inde). ὁπόθεν (unde). 
ἜΣ ἰ $44) thither | ot whither 


€0). 0 
(quo?) | quo) | ἐνταῦθα (00). ᾿ [ὅποι (quo). 
more, when? ποτέ, sometime. _|rére, then. Ore, ὁπότε, when. 
: = : aoe ne αὐ that ἡνίκα ἐν what 
es ah Tae time. ᾿ὁπηνίκα δ time. 
time? τηνικαῦτα. 
ὥς 
πῶς, how? πώς, somehow. ὧδε ἰ thus. |we, ὅπως, as. 
οὕτως 
67 one 9 : ont Lat 
Ἡ ae ,( some whither,\rpde 6. niet ΡΣ — 
πῃ < Ὁ pes πῃ in way. ταύτῃ WM UNS 1), OTD mM 
way § way. way. 


Obs.—év0a and ἔνθεν, in their original demonstrative sense, occur 
only in a few combinations in Attic prose (ἔνθα δή, just then ; 
ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα, here and there); but they are regularly used in a 
relative sense: where, whence. : 

To the Correlative Adverbs there belong also ἕως, guamdiu (Rela- 
tive, as long); τέως, tamdiu (Demonstrative, so long), as well as 
the poetic ὄφρα (for ὕφρα, § 53, 6, Obs.) used in the same meaning 
as ἕως, and τόφρα 88 τέως. 

To the simple ἐκεῖνος (that, § 212) correspond among the Adverbs 
of place ἐκεῖ, there ; ἐκεῖθεν, from there ; ἐκεῖσε, thither. The De- 
monstrative ὥς occurs in Attic prose only in καὶ ὥς, even thus, and 
οὐδ᾽ ὥς, not even thus. Itis also written ὡς in these combinations. 

- § 218. The conjunctions δή, δήποτε, and οὖν (meaning ever, Latin 
cunque), and the enclitic περ, may be*joined to any relative pro- 
noun or adverb to give prominence: ὕστις δή ποτε, whosoever ; 
ὕπως οὖν (utcungue), ὥσπερ, just as. 

Sometimes ἡ is affixed to the interrog. ri in the sense of why? and 
to the corresponding indirect interrogative 6 τι : rin, ὁτίη, why ? 

§ 219. There are also negative pronouns and adverbs to be noticed: 
οὔτις, μήτις, NO One; oddérEpog, βηδέτερος, neither, neuter; οὐδαμοῦ, 
μηδαμοῦ, nowhere ; οὐδαμῶς, μηδαμῶς, in no way. . 


8220. ‘THE NUMERALS. . 95 


Cuap. IX.—THE NUMERALS. 


§ 220. The Cardinal, Ordinal, and Adverbial Numer- 
als, with their value and signs, are: 


i δω,. Fy 


1| 4 εἷς, pia, ἕν, one. | 6 πρῶτος, the first. | ἅπαξ, once. 
2) 6 δύο δεύτερος δίς 
31 7 τρεῖς, τρία, τρίτος τρίς 
τέσσἄρες, τέσ- 
4 δ΄ σᾶρα, OF τέττἄ- » | τέταρτος τετράκις ᾿ 
pec, τέττᾶρα 
5 | ἐ πέντε πέμπτος πεντάκις 
6 = ἕ ἕκτος "| ἑξάκις 
GAS ἑπτά ἕβδομος᾽ ἑπτάκις 
8 ἡ ὀκτώ ὄγδοος ὀκτάκις 
9 θ΄ ἐννέα ἔνατος (ἔννατος) ἐνάκις (ἐννάκις) 
10 ¢ δέκα δέκατος δεκάκις 
11 ιά ἕνδεκα ἑνδέκατος ἑνδεκάκις 
12} | δώδεκα δωδέκατος δωδεκάκις 
13 | ty | τριςκαίδεκα τριρκαιδέκατος 
14 ιδ΄ ᾿ ree spree τεσσαρακαιδέκατος 
τεσσαρακαίδεκα 
15 | ιέ πεντεκαίδεκα πεντεκαιδέκατος 
16 | ts’ ἑκκαίδεκα : ἑκκαιδέκατος 
17 | uz ἑπτακαίδεκα ἑπτακαιδέκατος 
18 | uf ὀκτωκαίδεκα ὀκτωκαιδέκατος 
19 ιθ΄ ἐννεακαίδεκα ἐννεακαιδέκατος 
20 κ΄ εἴκοσι(ν) . εἰκοστός εἰκοσάκις 
80 λ΄ τριάκοντα TPLAKOOTOC τριᾶκοντάκις 
40 μ' | τεσσαρᾶκοντα τεσσαρᾶκοστός τεσσαρᾶκοντάκις 
δ0 ν΄ πεντήκοντα. πεντηκοστός πεντηκοντάκις 
00 ξ΄ ἑξήκοντα ἑξηκοστός ἑξηκοντάκις 
70] 6 ἑβδομήκοντα ἑβδομηκοστός ἑβδομηκοντάκις 
80 |- π΄ ὀγδοήκοντα ὀγδοηκοστός ὀγδοηκοντάκις 
90 4 ἐνενήκοντα ἐνενηκοστός ἐνενηκοντάκις 
100 | ρ΄ ἑκατόν ἑκατοστός. ἑκατοντάκις 
200 | σ διάκόσιοι, at, a διακοσιοστός διακοσιάκις 
300 | 7 τριᾶκόσιοι, al, a | τριακοσιοστός 
400 | v TETPAKOOLOL, AL, a | TETPAKOOLOOTOE 
500 | ¢’ πεντἄκόσιοι, αι, a | πεντακοσιοστός 
600 | x’ ἑξᾶκόσιοι, at, a ἑξακοσιοστός 
700 Ψ' ἑπτᾶἄκόσιοι, at,a | ἑπτακοσιοστός 
800 | w’ ὀκτακύσιοι, αι, α | ὀκτακοσιοστός 
900. 2 ᾿ ἐνᾶἄκόσιοι, αι, a ἐνακοσιοστός or 
ἐννᾶκόσιοι, aa | ἐννακοσιοστός 
1000 | a χίλιοι, at, a χιλιοστός χιλιάκις 
2000} β διοχίλιοι, at, a διοχιλιοστός 
9000) γ τρισχίλιοι, αι, a τριοχιλιοστός 
10000 | ᾿ε μύριοι, αι, a | μυριοστός μυριάκις 


96 : THE NUMERALS. §.221.. 
Obs.—The letters of the alphabet are used in numbers also in un- 
interrupted succession. In the most frequent designation, given 
- above, stigma (<s’) is inserted after é for the number 6: 4 to 0 
are therefore units ; ¢ is 10, x’ 20; after z’ (ΞΞ 80), α' (koppa= 90) 
is inserted; and after ὦ (=800) 3 (sampi=900). The alphabet 
begins again at 1000, but here each letter has the accent under 

it; hence Brad = 2344, αωξβ'ΞΞ 1862. 


§ 221. The Cardinal Numbers 1 to4 are declined: 


1. Nom. “gic pid ἕν 2. WN. A. δύο 
Gen. ἑνός μιᾶς ἑνός G. D. δυοῖν 
Dat. ἑνί yd: ἕνί ᾿ 
Ace. ἕνα μίαν ἕν 
3. Nom. τρεῖς N. τρία | 4. τέσσαρες N. τέσσαρα 
Gen. τριῶν τεσσάρων 
Dat. τρισί(ν) τέσσαρσι(ν) 
Ace, τρεῖς ἮΝ. τρία τέσσαρας ΚΝ. τέσσαρα 


οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν, and μηδείς, no one, are declined 
like εἷς. δύο is also used without inflexion. δυεῖν is an- 
other form for δυοῖν. rr occurs for oo in all forms and 
derivations of τέσσαρες. ἄμφω (ambo, both), Gen. Dat. ἀμ- 
φοῖν, is sometimes represented by the Plur. ἀμφότεροι, αι, a, 
of which the Singular ἀμφότερον, both, is also in use. 


δὲ 220-223. Dialects—1, Homer has the fem. id, ἰῆς, ἰῇ : also Neut. 
Dat. iw. 

2, δύω for all cases: dow, doi, Sorat, δοιά ; Dat. δοιοῖς ; Acc. δοιούς, 
άς, a. 

3, τρίτατος = τρίτος. 

4, Hom. ol. πίσυρες, New-Ion. τέσσερες, Hom. τέτρατος (ὃ 59, D.). 

7, ἑβδόματος. 8, dyddaroc. 9, sivaroc. 

12, Hom. δυώδεκα, and δύο καὶ δέκα, δυοδέκατος. 

20, Hom. ἐείκοσι, ἐεικοστός. 80, Hom. τριήκοντα. 80, ὀγδώκοντα. 90, 
ἐννήκοντα. 200, etc., also διηκόσιοι; Herod. πεντηκόσιοι, εἰνακόσιοι.΄ 

9000, Hom. ἐνεάχιλοι. 10,000, δεκάχτλοι. 

δίχα, Hom. διχθά ; likewise τριχθά, τετραχθά, threefold, fourfold ; also 
τριπλῇ, TETPATAY. 


τ 8. 224. NUMERALS. 97 


§ 222. The numerals 5 to 199 are indeclinable. 


We also find τρεῖς, τρία καὶ δέκα, τέσσαρες, τέσσαρα Kai δέκα, for 13 
and 14. The units and tens are united by καὶ, in any order: 
εἴκοσι καὶ πέντε and πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι; or without καὶ when the 
tens are first: εἴκοσι πέντε, 25; so also ἑκατὸν δέκα. For toenty- 
Jirst we have εἷς καὶ saab biee o πρῶτος Kai εἰκοστός, and εἰκοστὸς 
πρῶτος, etc. 


The Cardinal numerals from 200᾽ are, like the Ordinal; 
regular adjectives of three’ terminations: διακόσιοι, at, a. 
The Ordinal numerals have the endings of the superlative, 


except δεύτερος, which has that of the comparative (compare 
_§ 192). 


§ 223. By combination with σύν, the numeral Stems form Distribu- 
tives: σύνδυο, two and two; σύντρεις, three and three ; Multipli- 
catives, by the syllable πλοῦς (from πλόος, Lat. plex): ἁπλοῦς, 
simple ; διπλοῦς, τριπλοῦς, πενταπλοῦς, etc. Observe also δισσός, 
twofold ; τρισσός, threefold ; διπλάσιος, twice as much ; τριπλάσιος, 
etc., πολλαπλάσιος, many times as much. Adverbs: povayy, sim- 
ply (μόνος, alone); διχῇ or δίχα, doubly. Substantives: μονάς (St. 
μονα δ), unity ; δυάς, τριάς, τετράς, πεμπάς, ἑξάς, ἑβδομάς, ὀγδοάς, 
ἐννεάς, δεκάς, εἰκάς, ἑκατοντάς, χιλιάς, μυριάς; hence τρεῖς μυριάδες 
= 30,000. 


§ 224. The most important general Adjectives of quan- 
tity are: ἕκαστος, cach; ἑκάτερος, either; πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν 
(St. παντὶ), all; ποστός, ὁπόστος [quotus|; and the ad- 
verbs: πολλάκις, many times, often; ἑκαστάκις, every 
time; ὁσάκις, as often as; τοσαυτάκις, 80 often; πλει- 
στάκις, very often; ὀλιγάκις, seldom. 


10) 


98 THE VERB. 


B. INFLEXION OF VERBS. 


General Leemarks. 
§ 225. The Greeks distinguish in the Verb— 


1. Three Numbers: Singular, Dual, and Plural. 
2. Three Vovces: : 
Active: ἔλυσα, I loosed ; 
Middle: ἐλυσάμην, L loosed for myself ; 
Passive : ἐλύθην, 7 was loosed. 
Verbs which occur only in the Middle or Passive are called 
Deponents : δέχομαι, I receive. 


Obs.—Only the Aorist and the Future have special torms for the 
Passive; and only the Aorist special forms for the Middle: in 
all other tenses the Middle forms have also a Passive eS 


3. Two classes of Tenses : 
A. Principal, viz. 
1. Present : en I loose ; 
2. Perfect: λέλυκα, 7 have loosed ; 
3. Future: λύσω, L shall loose. 


B. Historical, viz. : 
1. Imperfect: ἔλυον, [ was loosing ; 
2. Pluperfect : ἐλελύκειν, 7 had loosed ; 
3. Aorist : ἔλυσα, L loosed. 


4. Hour Moods, viz. : : 
1. Indicatwe: Htbw, 7, loose ; 
Finite | 2. Subjunctive: λύω, 7 may loose ; 
Verb. | 3. Optatwe: λλύοιμι, 7 would loose ; 
4, Imperative: dis, loose. 
5. Three Verbal Nouns, viz. : 


1. Infinitive + λύειν, loose ; 

2. Participle : λύων, loosing ; 

3. Verbal Adjective: λυτέος, to be loosed, 80l= ~ 
: vendus. 


a 


ὃ 227. THE PERSONAL ENDINGS.—TENSE-STEMS, 


§ 226. The Personal Oy, had originally the follow- 


ing” forms : 
Active. Middle. 
Principal Tenses. Hist. Tenses. | Principal Tenses. Hist. Tenses. 
Sing. 1. -μι -ν -μαι -μην 
2. -ot -ς -σαι -σο 
8. -τι -- -ται -TO 
Dual 1. -μὲν -μεθον 
2. -τον -σθον 
8. -τὸν -τὴν -σθον -σθην ἢ" 
Plur, 1. -μὲν -μεθα 
2. -TE -σθε 
8. -»τι -ν -νται -ντὸ 


99 


The Active personal endings of the principal tenses are 
most easily observed in the verb: 


ei-pi, I am. ἐσ-μέν ἐσ-μέν. 
ἐσ-σί (contr. εἴ) ἐσ-τόν ἐσ-τέ. 
éo-ri(v) ἐσ-τόν εἰ-σί(ν) (σιτξεντι, § 60). 


The endings of the three persons in the Sing. are really the per- 
sonal pronouns affixed, J, thou, he, and to be compared with the 
Stems of the Personal Pronouns: pe (St. we), σι (ve), re (the Stem 
of the article, 70). The 1 Dual in the Active is always iden- 
tical with the 1 Plur. The ending ofthe 1 Sing. of the Historical 
Tenses was originally μ (Lat. era-m), which at the end -of the 
word was changed into ν, according to ὃ 67, Obs. The ending of 
the 3 Sing. was originally τὶ which, however, could not continue 
at the end according to ὃ 67 (compare ὃ 233, 2); and that of the 
3 Plur. vr (Lat. era-nt); but the r was dropped (ὃ 67). 


§ 227. The tenses, moods, and verbal nouns are classified 
according to the Stems (Tense-Stems) from which they are 
formed. The Tense-Stems are the following : 

1. The Present Stem, from which the Present and Im- 
perfect are formed. 


§ 226. Dialects.—Instead of νται, vro, the Ion. (especially New-Ion.) 
often has ara, aro, in 3 Plur. Mid. . The vowel a is here properly a 
connecting vowel, as in the Acc, Sing. of the Second Principal Declens. 
(δ 173, 3, Obs.); and ν is dropped in both alike; hence a-ra, a-ro, for 
a-yra., a-vro (compare §§ 287, 302, 3). 


100 * TENSE-STEMS. ὃ 298. 


2. The Strong Aorist Stem, from which the Second or 
Strong Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed. 

’ 3. The Future Stem, from which the Future Act. ik 
Mid. are formed. 

4. The Weak Aorist Stem, from which the τὰ or Weak 
Aorist Act. and Mid. are forme: 

5. The Perfect Stem, from which the Perfect, Pluper- 
fect, and Future-Perfect are formed. 

These five Stems belong to the Active and Middle. There 
are added to them, for the special forms of the Passive : 

6. The Strong Passive Stem, from which the Second or 
Strong Aorist Passive and Second Future Passive are 
formed. 

7. The Weak Passive Stem, from which the First or Weak 
Aorist Passive and First Future Passive are formed. _ 

The form from which all the Tense-Stems of a verb may 
be derived is called the Verbal Stem. 


§ 228. The Subjunctive is indicated between the Stem. 
and the ending. Long vowels are peculiar to it: λύτω-μεν, 
solv-a-mus ; λύ-ηττε, solv-a-tis. 

The vowel « is characteristic of the Optative, which gen- 
erally becomes a diphthong with other yowels :, λύτοιτ-μεν, 
we would loose. The Subjunctive has the,endings, 
principal.tenses ; the Optative (except 1 Boe. Act.) those 
of the historical tenses. 

The Jmperative has the following peculiar endings : 


Active. Middle. 
Sing. 2. -O -00 
3. -τω -σθω 
Dual 2. -τὸν -σθον 
3. -των -σθων 
Plur. 2. -re -σθε 
3. -ντων OF -τωσαν -σθων or -σθωσαν 


§ 229. The general law for the accentwation of the verb 
is that the accent is placed as far back. as possible from 


§ 228. Dialects.—The Hom. dialect often shortens the long vowel 
of the Subjunctive in the Dual and Plural. 


§ 230. CONJUGATIONS. 101 


the end, final ax not being considered long except in the 
optative: λύω, λύετε, λύομαι. 

Obs.—An exception is formed by the Participles, which in declen- 
sion (chap. vii.), if possible (δὲ 79~87), always keep the accent 
on the same syllable as in the Nom. Sing. Masc.: Part. Pres. Act. 
βασιλεύων, regnans, Neut. βασιλεῦον (not Bacirevoy, according to 
§ 84), Part. Fut. Act. βασιλεύσων, regnaturus, Neut. βασιλεῦσον. 
(The special exceptions, see §§ 331-333.) 

§ 230. We distinguish Zwo Principal Conjugations : 

1. The /%rst—the far more frequent—connects the per- 
sonal endings with the first two Tense-Stems by a connect- 
ing vowel: Av-o-uev. The verbs belonging to it are called 
- verbs in ὦ because the first Person Bing, Pres. Act. ends 
-Inw: Abo. 

2. The Second—the less frequent, but older—affixes the 
personal endings to the first two Tense-Stems without a 
connecting vowel : ἐστμέν. They are called verbs in μὲ 
because the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. preserves the original end- 
ing we: εἰ-μί. 

The forms of the other five Tense-Stems are common to 
both Conjugations. 


The Paradigms of the verbs are given first: the forma- 
tion of each Tense-Stem is then explained in order. 


List OF THE PARADIGMS. 


; Εἰμί, ἜΣ τυ ἐν ες PE Reape Pie igh Table I. 
Synopsis of λύω, I loose (exhibiting the meanings of the 
ROY tse ea Le is ει τς cages > 
VERBS IN Q. 
A. Vowel Stems. 
Te Veena ade oo ss eek cee . Te 
2. Contracted, τιμάω, row, doviow...------------ +o mee 
B. Consonant Stems. 
1. Guttural Stems, πλέκω, φεύγω, τάσσω ......----- an Me 
2. Dental Stems, ψεύδομαι, πείθω, wopifw.......---- ae ἃ & ἐν 
3. Labial Stems, πέμπω, λείπω, καλύπτω....-------- “ VII. 
4, Liquid Stems, δέρω, ἀγγέλλω; oreipw....-.------ “ ‘VII. 
VERBS IN MI. 
First Class, riOnpe, δίδωμι, torn... ..-------.--------- δὶ 


ρόαι Cinpesceiunt. reo oe ci cee eee ἀξ ae 


» 


102 ᾿ς PARADIGMS OF VERBS. Table I. 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


Εἰμί, Iam. Stem ἐς. 


eo viet : 
ῳ 
Moods. q 8 Present. Imperfect. Future: 
Ξ jos πε, 
Indicative. | 5. 1 εἰμί _ | av ΟΥἡ « | ἔσομαι 
2 | εἴ | ἦσθα ἔσῃ OF ἔσει 
3 | ἐστί(ν) ἣν ἔσται 
ὯΝ] ἐσόμεθον 
Ὁ) ἐστόν ἧστον OY ἦτον  ἔσεσθον 
3 ἐστόν ἤστην OY ἤτην  ἔσεσθον 
P. 1 | ἐσμὲν ἦμεν ἐσόμεθα 
2 ἐστέ Hore OF ἦτε ἔσεσθε 
3 | εἰσί ἦσαν ἔσονται 
Subjunctive.| S. 1.) ὦ 
21 ἧς 
8} 
: Ὁ. 2 | ἦτον 
- 8 | ἦτον 
P. 1 | ὦμεν 
2 | are 
3 | wot 
Optative. 8. 1 | εἴην ἐσοίμην 
2 ] εἴης ἔσοιο 
3 | εἴη ; ἔσοιτο 
τ). } : ἐσοίμεθον 
2 | εἴητον or εἶτον ἔσοισθον 
3 | eihrny or εἴτην ἐσοΐϊσθη 
P. 1 εἴημεν or εἶμεν ἐσοίμεθα 
2 | εἴητε or εἶτε ἔσοισθε 
3 | εἴησαν or εἶεν ἔσοιντο 
Imperative. 5, 2 | ἴσθι 
8 ἔστω 
D. 2: ἔστον 
3 | ἔστων 
P. . 2 | -éore - 
3. | ἔστωσαν ΟΥ̓ ἔστων 
Infinitive. εἶναι ; ἔσεσθαι 
Participle. j ὧν ἐσόμενος 
ovoa ἐσομένη 
ὄν (Stem ον τὴ ἐσόμενον 


Notr.—The formation of the tenses of this verb is explained in 
§ 315, but they are inserted in this place because some of them are re- 
quired in conjugating the Middle and Passive Voices of ordinary verbs, 


108 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


(P0800) τιϑθῷ BUDY 7, 


“pasoo) θῳ 07 (Suttmbat) ‘Soz2ey “ aquaso0) 10 pasoo) 
‘Soasnooayay 18] ‘mg0300V3\ ΤᾺ] ‘ali 


‘994ey “joalpy [Bqia A 
o0ay3x 4ἋὉ 


joys J “sseq ‘fjaslius sof posoo) aavy 1yoys T “punt ‘Mroogay “pul Fog “ny 
"pasoo) u9aq poy J | APPTAt oy} OFT] alurlayan3 ‘ 9800) poy [| C3xay3y? | “put ‘dud 
“paso0) Uaag Gupany =a Soagnayay “posoo) Burany| smayay | 1 
"P9800) Ua9Q BUDY 01 ag MQOQN3X “pasoo) aany 01) mazwaysy| -yuT 
ἽῬΟΘΟΟΊ seq θῶ Noy, op =: ΣΥΝ “p9s00] oany noyp op| —_ aayay "ἀπ 
“pasoo) uaag aany “aya ‘gybru 7 @ alii Soagrlayay “pasoo) aany “040 “gybru 7 | moxayay | 4do 
“pasoo) uaag aany “019 ‘hvu Υ Ε͵ @ δοαϑηήγου 8001 aany “oy ‘how 7) συ | fang (180) 
(pao) wa0q θαυ T ris TUHANAN "p28oo) θῶρῃ T\« PINAY | “puy ἽΜΟΩΤ 
"pasoo) uaag Hurany 10 pasoo} ὅϑθαχ , . . Soaaripoay “pasoo) burany 10 bursooy Swoay | ἍΤ 
; "P2800) 29 02 maligay IMHODOAN 2800) 04 mony | Ἢ 
"P9800) NOY} θῳ τ ιραχ MoRY |"98007 | "NOY 9800) aooay | -duay 
“paso? aq “Ὅ9 “gybru T aluzgay alinlmoay \pynoys 10 “pynon‘pynoo yybru | whwoay | “40 
"P2800) aq “O49 ‘hous 1 MAN mr monn ὁ800) UDI IO hou 7 MONX ‘(qng (3,80 Δλ) 
9800) SOM T aligan?3 alirlpoay3 *“pe8s0o) T poay2| “put τοῦ] 
"paso0) a9 02 ynogn . Soasnooligay Soaarlooay 2800) 02 9nogn amonn | “ae 
*(1ayyRaloy) 9800) 99 07 mgozo0ligay 1Q0392Y *(laqyearoy) 9800) 07 an300x | “UT 
“Θ101}) pasoo] aq ‘040 “aybuue ΥΩ alirhooligay aurhooay |*(xayzwaray]) 9800) “ojo “yb | mhooay 40. 
9218] “pasoo) δῷ 170Y8 7 mrnooligay wmnooay 9800) 1)0Y8 T moay| ‘pur "ng 
‘(panuTW0d) paseo) sym T | o[PPLU 90} OAT alirl gay? ᾿διΏ800) soa T a0ay} | “puy yzodwy 
” : pasoo) Burag τ Soasnoay “funsoo) amay | “418 
” 22800] 99 0} ag Mm9O30X “Burson aq 09 a3ox | “JUy 
᾿ pasoo) ΠΟΥ θ ἜΣ aony |"διη806) 29] “6uysoo) 99 aay | ‘duiy 
99 P9800) 29 “Ὁγ9 δηλ 1 alirhoay \pynoys 10 “pynom ‘pynoa‘gybru T mhoay | 40 
» pasoo) 29 “030 “nus T Ξ, rorlengx “‘buysoo) 09 woo τὸ how Υ max ΠΩ 
{‘(panuyjuos) paseo) wn J ia morloay "(0800) Υ 10) Buysooy wo 7 OX | “PUL "So 
ἢ ΘΟΙΟΛ OAISSUT ὍΙΟΛ OTPPIA ὍΟΙΟΛ “OW | ῬΟΟΙΤ  ‘esuay | 


‘(sosua, oy fo shuruwou oy burrquyxs) 9800) 02 ‘may quad oy fo sisdoulig 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. ‘Table III. 


104 
A. VOWEL STEMS. 
ACTIVE 
δ 3 
Tenses. Ε Ξ Indicative. Subjunctive. 
Ἴπ ἃ 
᾿ Present. Imperfect. 
Present. 8. 1] λύω ἔλυον λύω 
2 | λύεις ἔλυες #| λύῃς 
3 λύει ἔλυε(ν) λύῃ 
D. 2 λύετον ἐλύετον λύητον 
3 | λύετον ἐλυέτην λύητον 
. 1 λύομεν ἐλύομεν λύωμεν 
2 | λύετε ἐλύετε λύητε 
3 | λύουσι(ν) ἔλυον λύωσι(ν) 
Future, 8. 1 λύσω 
Ὁ. λύσεις 
3 | λύσει 
D. 2 | λύσετον 
3 | Adoerov 
P. 1 λύσομεν 
2. λύσετε 
3 | λύσουσι(ν) 
1 Aorist 8. 1 ἔλυσα λύσω 
(Weak) 2 | ἔλυσας λύσῃς 
A 3 | ἔλυσε(ν) λύσῃ 
D. 2 | ἐλύσατον λύσητον 
3 | ἐλυσάτην λύσητον 
P. 1 ἐλύσαμεν λύσωμεν 
2 ἐλύσατε λύσητε 
: 3 ἔλυσαν λύσωσι(ν) 
Perfect. Plupertfect. 
1 Perfect S. 1 | λέλυκα ἐλελύκειν λελύκω 
(Weak) 2 | λέλυκας ἐλελύκεις λελύκῳς 
3 | λέλυκε(Ψ) ἐλελύκει λελύκῃ 
D. 2 | λελύκατον ἐλελύκειτον λελύκητον 
3 | λελύκατον ἐλελυκείτην λελύκητον 
P. 1 λελύκαμεν ἐλελύκειμεν λελύκωμεν 
2 | λελύκατε ἐλελύκειτε λελύκητε 
9 λελύκᾶσι(ν) | ἐλελύκεσαν λελύκωσι(ν) 
or ἐλελύκεισαν 
2 Aorist Wanting. 
(Strong). 
2 Perfect and. Wanting. 
Pluperf.(Strong). 
Examples for 


θύω, I sacrifice ; θεραπεύω, I serve ; βουλεύω, I advise ; χορεύω, I dance ; 


ἐπαύσθην ; 


Table III. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS INQ. 105 
Με : 
1. UNCONTRACTED. 
VoIcr. 
Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. | Participle. 
λύοιμι λύειν λύων 
λύοις λῦε λύουσα 
λύοι λυέτω λῦον 
λύοιτον λύετον 
λυοίτην λυέτων Gen. λύοντος 
λύοιμεν λυούσης 
λύοιτε λύετε λύοντος 
λύοιεν λυόντων ΟΥ̓ λυέτωσαν St. λυοντ 
λύσοιμι λύσειν λύσων 
λύσοις 
λύσοι ‘| λύσουσα 
λύσοιτον λῦσον 
λυσοίτην Gen. λύσοντος 
λύσοιμεν λυσούσης 
λύσοιτε λύσοντος 
λύσοιεν St. λυσοντ 
λύσαιμι λῦσαι λύσας 
λύσαις OF λύσειας | λῦσον λύσασα 
λῦσαν 
λύσαι OF λύσειε(ν) | λυσάτω Gen. λύσαντος 
λύσαιτον λύσατον ᾿ λυσάσης 
λυσαίτην λυσάτων λύσαντος 
λύσαιμεν St. λυσαντ 
λύσαιξε λύσατε ἴσαν 
λύσαιεν ΟΥ̓ λύσειαν | λυσάντων OY λυσάτω- 
λελύκοιμι λελυκέναι | λελυκώς 
λελύκοις λέλυκε λελυκυῖα 
: λελυκός 
λελύκοι λελυκέτω Gen. λελυκότος 
λελύκοιτον λελυκυίας 
λελυκοίτην λελύκετον λελυκότος 
λελύκοιμεν λελυκέτων St. λελυκοτ 
λελύκοιτε λελύκετε 
λελύκοιεν λελυκόντων OF 
λελυκέτωσαν 
Conjugation. 


δακρύω, I weep; παύω, I make to cease (Mid., I cease). 


Verbal, παυστέος.] 


E 2 


[1 Aor. Pass. 


106 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. Table Π].--- 
_ A. VOWEL STEMS. 

MIDDLE AND 

Tenses. common to 


Tenses. 


Per- 
sons. 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


Present. 


ζΏ] Nos. 


COO RCO WF CO woe 


λύομαι 
Ady OF λύει 


λύεται 
λυόμεθον 
λύεσθον 
λύεσθον 
λυόμεθα 
λύεσθε 
λύονται 


λύωμαι 
λύῃ 


λύηται 


᾿'λυώμεθον 


λύησθον 
λύησθον 
λυώμεθα 
λύησθε 

λύωνται 


Imperfect. 


ἐλυόμην 
ἐλύου 
ἐλύετο 
ἐλυόμεθον 


| ἐλύεσθον 


ἐλυέσθην 
ἐλυόμεθα 
ἐλύεσθε 
ἐλύοντο 


Future. 


TR 


Rl ὡο μὰ δ μὲ ὦ ἢ μα 


λύσομαι [ομαι 
etc., as in the Pres. λύ- 


Perfect. 


WWF ὦ ὃ καὶ CO wore 


λέλυμαι 
λέλυσαι 


λέλυται 
λελύμεθον 
λέλυσθον 
λέλυσθον 
λελύμεθα 
λέλυσθε 
λέλυνται 


λελυμένος ὦ 


Pluperfect. 


ἐλελύμην 
ἐλέλυσο 
ἐλέλυτο 
ἐλελύμεθον 
ἐλέλυσθον 
ἐλελύσθην 
ἐλελύμεθα 
ἐλέλυσθε 


ἐλέλυντο 


Future Per- 
fect. 


μι] Wor οὐ δ μὶ ὦ ὃ μὰ 


λελύσομαι [ομαι 
etc., as in the Pres, λύ- 


Continued. PARADIGMS OF V 


I. UNCONTRACTED. 
PAssIvE VOICES. 


(§ 225, Obs. 2.) 


one cae Te 


- ayy 


4 n IFO) 


πᾷ, t's 


owe 


both Voices. 

Optative. Imperative. | Infinitive. Participle. 
Avoipny λύεσθαι λυόμενος 
λύοιο λύου λυομένη 
- λυόμενον 
λύοιτο λυέσθω 
'λυοίμεθον 
λύοισθον λύεσθον 
λυοίσθην λυέσθων 

| λυοίμεθα 
λύοισθε λύεσθε 
λύοιντο λυέσθων ΟΥ̓ 
λυέσθωσαν 
“ 
Ψ 
λυσοίμην [οίμην λύσεσθαι λυσόμενος 
etc., as in the Pres. λυ- . λυσομένη 
‘ ' . | Avobpevoy 
λελυμένος εἴην λελύσθαι _ λελυμένος 
λέλυσο λελυμένη 
λελυμένον 
λελύσθω 
λέλυσθον 
λελύσθων 
λέλυσθε 
λελύσθων ΟΥ̓ 
λελύσθωσαν 
λελυσοίμην [οἱμην} λελύσεσθαι | λελυσόμενος 
etc., as in the Pres. λυ- λελυσομένη 
λελυσόμενον 


108 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. Table iis 


A. VOWEL STEMS. 


MIDDLE AND 
Tenses peculiar to 
ps 
Tenses. Έ ῷ Indicative. Subjunctive. 
. ἃ 
1 Aorist S. 1 | ἐλυσάμην λύσωμαι 
(Weak). 2 | ἐλύσω λύσῃ 
3 ἐλύσατο λύσηται 
D. 1 | ἐλυσάδεθον λυσώμεθον 
2 ἐλύσασθον λύσησθον 
9 ἐλυσάσθην λύσησθον 
P. 1  ἐλυσάμεθα λυσώμεθα 
2 ἐλύσασθε λύσησθε 
8. | ἐλύσαντο λύσωνται 
2 Aorist Wanting. 
(Strong). 
Tenses peculiar to 
1 Aorist S. 1 | ἐλύθην λυῶ 
(Weak). 2 | ἐλύθης λυθῇς 
3 | ἐλύθη λυθῇ 
D. 2 ἐλύθητον λυθῆτον 
3 ἐλυθήτην λυθῆτον 
P. 1  ἐλύθημεν λυθῶμεν 
2 | ἐλύθητε λυθῆτε 
3 | ἐλύθησαν λυθῶσι(ν) 
1 Future . S. 1  λυθήσομαι 
(Weak). 2 | λυθήσῃ or λυθήσει 
3 | λυθήσεται 
D. 1 | λυθησόμεθον 
2 | λυθήσεσθον 
“3 | λυθήσεσθον 
P. 1  λυθησόμεθα 
2 λυθήσεσθε 
3 λυθήσονται 
2 Aorist Wanting. 
(Strong). 
-2 Future Wanting. 
(Strong). 
Verbal Adjectives: λυτός, 7, dv. 2. λυτέος, a, ον. 


Continued. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. 109 
I. UNCONTRACTED. 
PAssiIvE VOICE. 
the Middle Voice. ἢ 
Optative.. Imperative. | Infinitive. Participle. 
5 5 
λυσαίμην λύσασθαι λυσάμενος 
λύσαιο λῦσαι λυσαμένη 
λυσάμενον 
λύσαιτο λυσάσθω 
_Avoaipebov 
λύσαισθον λύσασθον 
λυσαίσθην λυσάσθων 
λυσαίμεθα 
λύσαισθε λύσασθε 
λύσαιντο λυσάσθων Or 
λυσάσθωσαν 
the Passive Voice. 
λυθείην λυθῆναι λυθείς 
λυθείης λύθητι λυθεῖσα 
λυθέν 
λυθείη λυθήτω Gen. λυθέντος 
λυθείητον OF λυθεῖτον λυθείσης 
λυθειήτην ΟΥ̓ λυθείτην | λύθητον λυθέντος 
λυθείημεν ΟΥ λυθεῖμεν | λυθήτων St. λυθεντ 
λυθείητε OF λυθεῖτε λύθητε 
λυθείησαν Or λυθεῖεν λυθήτωσαν ΟΥ̓ 
. λυθέντων 
λυθησοίμην λυθήσεσθαι | λυθησόμενος 
λυθήσοιο 
λυθήσοιτο λυθησομένη 
λυθησοίμεθον λυθησόμενον 
λυθήσοισθον 
λυθησοίσθην 
λυθησοίμεθα 
λυθήσοισθε 
λυθήσοιντο 


110 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Ὡ. Table 1Υ. 


A. VOWEL STEMS. 


(-εοίησαν -οίησαν) 


Present and 
ripaw, I honor ποιέω,͵ 1 make δουλόω, I subjugate. 
{compare Lat. am(a)o]. | [comp. Lat. moneo]. 
Stems: ripa TOE Sovro 
. Active. 
5. 1} τιμάω τιμῶ Tow ποιῶ δουλύω δουλῶ 
2 τιμάεις τιμᾷς ποιέεις ποιεῖς δουλόεις δουλοῖς 
15] ϑ8᾽τιμάει. τιμᾷ ποιέει ποιεῖ δουλόι δουλοῖ 
ΓΞ. 2).1 
Ἔ 2| τιμάετον τιμᾶτον; ποιέετον ποιεῖτον δουλόετον δουλοῦτον 
al 3| τιμάετον τιμᾶτον] ποιέετον ποιεῖτον δουλόετον δουλοῦτον 
ὦ Ῥ, 1 τιμάομεν τιμῶμεν ποιέομεν ποιοῦμεν δουλόομεν δουλοῦμεν 
ἦι) .2\rydere τιμᾶτε [ποιέετε ποιεῖτε |δουλόετε δουλοῦτε 
8 τιμά-ου- τιμῶ- ποιέου- ποιοῦ- δουλόου- δουλοῦ- 
σι(ν) ᾿ σι(ν) σι(ν) σι(ν) σι(ν) σι(ν) 
S. 1τιμάω τιμῶ Tow ποιῶ dovldw δουλῶ 
Ὁ τιμάς τιμᾷς ἰ[ποιξῆςε ποιῇς δουλός δουλοῖς 
ἐν. θ᾽) τιμά τιμᾷ ποιῃ ποιῇ δουλύῃ δουλοῖ 
ΙΒ 
om 
> ° 
Ξ 2| τιμάητον τιμᾶτον ποιέητον ποιῆτον ᾿δουλόητον δουλῶτον 
‘>| ϑθ᾽τιμάητον τιμᾶτον ποιέητον ποιῆτον ᾿δουλόητον δουλῶτον 
5 Ῥ, 1τιμάωμεν τιμῶμεν] ποιξωμεν ποιῶμεν  δουλόωμεν δουλῶμεν 
Q\rysdnre τιμᾶτε ἰποιέητε ποιῆτε | dovrddnre δουλῶτε 
θ᾽)τιμάω- τιμῶ- ποιέω- ποιῶ- δουλόω- δουλῶ- 
σι(ν) σι(ν) σι(ν) σι(ν) σι(ν) σι() 
S. 1 τιμάοιμι ripper ποιέοιμι ποιοῖμι δουλόοιμι δουλοῖμι 
(-αοίην -ῴη ν) |(εοίην  -oinyv) (-ooinv ~— -oinv) 
2: τιμάοις τιμῷς ποιέοις ποιοῖς δουλόοις δουλοῖς 
(-aoing -ῴης) |(-eoin¢ -οίηςφ) (Θὐοίης -οἰίηςφ) 
S| τιμάοι τιμῷ Woot ποιοῖ δουλόοι δουλοῖ 
(-aoin -ῴη) (-eoin -οίη) (-ooin τοίη) 
Di}: >? 
Σ 
ΞΘ 2 |τιμάοιτον τιμῷτον] ποϊξοιτον ποιοῖτον  δουλόοιτον δουλοῖτον 
= (-aoinroy -ῴητον) | (-€oinrov -oinror) (-ooinroy. -oinrov) 
ἴω 3 | τιμαοίτην τιμῴτη ν] ποιεοίτην ποιοίτην᾽ δουλοοίτην δουλοίτην 
(-αοιήτην -φήτην) | (-εοιήτην -οιήτην) (-οοιήτην -οιήτην) 
P. 1 | τιμάοιμεν τιμῷ μεν] ποιέοιμεν ποιοῖμεν δουλόοιμεν δουλοῖμεν 
(-αοίημεν -ῴημεν)  (-εοίημεν -oinuev) [(-οοίημεν -οίημεν) 
2|rysdowre τιμῷτε |ποιέοιτε ποιοῖτε | dovddorre δουλοῖτε 
(-αοίητε -ᾧητε) (-εοίητε -οίητε) (-ooinre -οίητε) 
θ᾽) τιμάοιεν τιμῷεν ᾿ποιέοιεν ποιοῖεν δουλόοιεν δουλοῖεν 


* Obs,—The more usual forms are those printed in spaced type. 


Table IV. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. 111 


II. CONTRACTED. 
Imperfect Tenses. 


Middle and Passive. 


δουλόομαι δουλοῦμαι 


τιμάομαι τιμῶμαι ᾿Ἰποιέομαι ποιοῦμαι 
τιμάῃ,εἰ τιμᾷ ποιέῃ, εἰ ποιῇ, εἴ δουλόῃ, εἰ δουλοῖ 
τιμάεται. τιμᾶται ποιέεται ποιεῖται ,Ιδουλόετται δουλοῦται 
τιμαόμεθον τιμώμε- | ποιεόμεθον ποιούμε- | δουλοόμε- δουλούμε- 
θον θον θον θον 
τιμάεσθον τιμᾶσθον᾽ ποιέεσθον ποιεῖσθον δουλόεσθον δουλοῦσθον 
τιμάεσθον τιμᾶσθον  ποιέεσθον ποιεῖσθον᾽ δουλόεσθον δουλοῦσθον 
τιμαόμεθα τιμώμεθα ποιεόμεθα. ποιούμεθα, δουλοόμεθα δουλούμεθα 
τιμάεσθε τιμᾶσθε |ποιέεσθε ᾿ ποιεῖσθε | δουλόεσθε δουλοῦσθε 
τιμάονται τιμῶνται ποιξανται ποιοῦνται δουλόονται δουλοῦνται 
τιμάωμαι τιμῶμαι ποιέωμαι ποιῶμαι ᾿δουλόωμαι δουλῶμαι 
τιμάῃ τιμᾷ Toy ποιῇ δουλό. δουλοῖ 
τιμάηται τιμᾶται ,ποιξέηται ποιῆται δουλόηται δουλῶται 
τιμαώμε- τιμώμε-  ποιεώμεθον ποιώμε- | δουλοώμε- δουλώμε- 
θον | Gov θον θον᾽ θον 
τιμάησθον τἱμᾶσθον; ποιξησθον ποιῆσθον | δουλόησθον δουλῶσθον 
τιμάησθον τιμᾶσθον᾽ ποιέξησθον ποιῆσθον  δουλόησθον δουλῶσθον 
τιμαώμεθα τιμώμεθα͵ ποιεώμεθα ποιώμεθα  δουλοώμεθα δουχώμεθα 
τιμάησθε τιμᾶσθε |ποιέησθε ποιῆσθε δουλόησθε δουλῶσθε 
τιμάωνται τιμῶνται ποιέωνται ποιῶνται  δουλόωνται δουλῶνται 
τιμαοίμην τιμῴμην ᾿ποιεοίμην ποιοίμην | δουλοοίμην δουλοίμην 
τιμάοιο τιμῷο ποΐξδιο ποιοῖο δουλόοιο δουλοῖο 
τιμάοιτο τιμῷτο [ποιξοιτο ποιοῖτο δουλόοιτο δουλοῖτο 
τιμαοίμε- τιμῴμε-  ποιεοίμεθον ποιοίμε- | δουλοοίμε- δουλοίμε- 
θον θον : ᾿ς θοὸν Bor | θον 
τιμάοισθον τιμῴσθον᾽ ποιέοισθον ποιοῖσθον δουλόοι- δουλοῖσθον 
σθον 
τιμαοίσθον τιμῷσθον ποιεοίσθην ποιοίσθην͵ δουλοοί- δουλοίσθην 
: σθην 
τιμαοίμεθα τιμῴμεθα, ποιεοίμεθα ποιοίμεθα) δουλοοίμε-. δουλοίμεθα 
θα 
τιμάοισθε τιμῷσθε “ποιέοιθθε ποιοῖσθε | δουλόοισθε δουλοῖσθε 
τιμάοιντο τιμῷντο ᾿ποιέοιντο ποιοῖντο |δουλόοιντο δουλοῖντο 


112 PARADIGMS OF eo e: ΙΝ Q. Table 1V.— 


A. VOWEL STEMS. 
Present. and Imperfect Tenses, 


ripaw, I honor mow, I make δουλόω, I subjugate. 
[compare Lat. am(a)o]. | [comp. Lat. moneo}. 
Stems: repa ποιε ᾿ δουλο 
Active. 
S. 2\riuae τίμα ποίεε ποίει δούλοε δούλου 
θ᾽ ,τιμαέτω τιμάτω | ποιετω ποιείτω ᾿δουλοέτω δουλούτω 
© Ὁ. 2| τιμάετον rep aror| ποιέετον ποιεῖτον δουλόετον δουλοῦτον 
= 3 τιμαέτων τιμάτων] ποιεέτων ποιείτων δουλοέτων δουλούτων 
B|P.2|rydere τιμᾶτε ποιέετε ποιξῖτε | δουλόετε δουλοῦτε 
a τιμαόν- τιμών- |ποιεόν- ποιούν- | dovrdodyv- δουλούν- 
Ξ 9) των των των των των των 
τιμαέτω- τιμάτω-]) ποιεέτω- ποιείτω-  δουλοέτω- δουλούτω- 
σαν σαν σαν σαν σαν σαν Ὁ 
| + ne 2 - ; » 
ἘΞ τιμάειν «τιμᾶν ποιέειν ποιεῖν δουλόεν δουλοῦν 
= 
κ: τιμάων τιμῶν [ποιέων ποιῶν δουλόων δουλῶν 
iy 
Ἔ τιμάουσα τιμῶσα ᾿ποιέουσα ποιοῦσα | δουλόουσα δουλοῦσα 
‘; τιμάον τιμῶν |ποιξονν ποιοῦν Ιδουλόον δουλοῦν 
S. 1 ἐτίμαον ἐτίμων ἐποίεον ἐπόΐουν |ἐδούλοον ἐδούλουν 
2 ἐτίμαις ἐτίμᾶς ἐποίεις ἐποίεις |ἐδούλοες ἐδούλους 
8. ἐτίμαε(ν) ἐτίμᾶ  ἐποίεε(ν) ἐποίει ἐδούλοε(ν) ἐδούλου 
D.1 
8 " 
Gi] | ἐτιμάε. ἐτιμᾶ- ἐποιέετον ἐποιεῖ- ἰἐδουλοέ- ἐδουλοῦ- 
ῷ τον τον τον τον τον 
= 2 , ? , ᾽ , 2 , > , ? , 
g θ᾽ ἐτιμαέ- ἐτιμά- | ἐποιεέ- ἐποιεί- |ἐδουλοέ- ἐδουλού- 
= τὴν την τὴν την τὴν THY 
P. 1 érysdo- ἐτιμῶ- |ἐποιέομεν ἐποιοῦ- |ἐδουλόο- ἐδουλοῦ- 
μεν μεν μεν μὲν μεν 
Ὁ ἐτιμάετε ἐτιμᾶτε  ἐποιέετε ἐποιεῖτε ᾿ἐδουλόετε ἐδουλοῦτε 
8 ἐτίμαον ἐτίμων ἐποίεον ἐποίουν ᾿ἐδούλοον ἐδούλουν 


The other Tenses are conjugated like the same Tenses in λύω. 


τολμάω, I dare. 
σιγάω, I am silent. 
Bodw, I call out. 


Examples for 
éaw, I let (δ 236). 
ἀσκέω, I practise. 


κοσμέω, I adorn. 


~ 


Continued. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Ὡ. 113 


Il. CONTRACTED. 
Indicative Mood. 


Middle and Passive. 


τιμάου τιμῶ ποιυ ποιοῦ δουλόου δουλοῦ 
τιμάέσθω τιμάσθω | ποιξέσθω ποιείσθω δουλοέσθω δουλούσθω 
τιμάεσθον τιμᾶσθον | ποιέεσθον ποιεῖσθον  δουλόεσθον δουλοῦσθον 
τιμαέσθων τιμάσθων᾽͵ ποιεέσθων ποιείσθων; δουλοέσθων δουλούσθων 
τιμάεσθε. τιμᾶσθε Ἰποιέξεσθε ποιεῖσθε |δουλόεθθε δουλοῦσθε 
τιμαέσθων τιμάσθων; ποιεέσθων ποιείσθων  δουλοέσθων δουλούσθων 


τιμαέσθω- τιμάσθω- | ποιεέσθω- ποιείσθω-  δουλοέσθω- δουλούσθω- 
σαν σαν σαν σαν σαν σαν 


Ἰτιμάεσθαι τιμᾶσθαι ποιέεσθαι ποιεῖσθαι δουλόεσθαι δουλοῦσθαι 


τιμαόμε- τιμώμε- Ἰποιεόμε- ποιούμε- δουλοόμε- δουλούμε- 
γος νος γος νος γος νος 

τιμαομένη τιμωμένη  ποιεομένὴ ποιουμένη δουλοομένη δουλουμένη 

τιμαόμε- τιμώμε- ἰ[ποιεόμε- ποιούμε- | Oovrodpe- δουλούμε- 
vov νον γον νον vov vov 


ἐτιμαόμην ἐτιμώμην  ἐποιεόμην ἐποιούμην ἐδουλοόμην ἐδουλούμην 
ἐτιμάου ἐτιμῶ ἐποιου ἐποιοῦ ἐδουλόου ἐδουλοῦ 
ἐτιμάστο ἐτιμᾶτο ἐποιέετο ἐποιεῖτο ἐδουλόετο ἐδουλοῦτο 
ἐτιμαόμε- ἐτιμώμε- | ἐποιεόμε- ἐποιούμε- | ἐδουλοόμε- ἐδουλούμε- 


θον θον “θοὸν θον θον θον 
ἐτιμάεσ-Ἤ ἐτιμᾶ- ἐποιέεσθον ἐποιεῖ- ἐδουλόε- ἐδουλοῦ- 
σθον σθον σθον σθον σθον 
ἐτιμαξ- ἐτιμά- ἐποιεέσθην ἐποιεί- ἐδουλο- ἐδουλού- 
σθην σθην σθην oOnvy σθην 
ἐτιμαόμε- ἐτιμώμε- ἰἐποιεόμε- ἐποιούμε- | ἐδουλοόμε- ἐδουλούμε- 
θα θα θα θα θα θα 


ἐτιμάεσθε ἐτιμᾶσθε |ἐποιέεσθε ἐποιεῖσθε ᾿ἐδουλόεσθε ἐδουλοῦσθε 
ἐτιμάοντο ἐτιμῶντο | ἐποιέοντο ἐποιοῦντο, ἐδουλόοντο ἐδουλοῦντο 
Σ 


A Synopsis of these Tenses is given in the following Table: 


Conjugation. 
ἀριθμέω, I count. ζημιόω, I punish, 
δηλόω, I make clear. xpvodw, I gild. 


στεφανόω, I crown. 


114 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. Table iv 


a δὰ 
> A. VOWEL STEMS. 


( Uncontracted 
Tensese Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. 


Active Voice. 


Future. τιμήσω τιμήσοιμι 
ποιήσω «Soy ποιήσοιμι 
δουλώσω δουλώσοιμι 

1 Aorist ἐτίμησα τιμήσω τιμήσαιμι 

(Weak). ἐποίησα ποιήσω ποιήσαιμι 
ἐδούλωσα δουλώσω δουλώσαιμι 

1 Perfect τετίμηκα. τετιμήκω τετιμήκοιμι 

(Weak). πεποίηκα πεποιἠκῶ πεποιήκοιμι 
δεδούλωκα δεδουλώκω δεδουλώκοιμι 

1 Pluperfect ἐτετιμήκειν 

(Weak). ἐπεποιήκειν 
ἐδεδουλώκειν ᾿ 


Middle and Passive Voices. 


‘Future, τιμήσομαι τιμησοίμην 
ποιήσομαι ποιησοίμην 
δουλώσομαι δουλωσοίμην 

Perfect. Τετίμημαι τετιμημένος ὦ τετιμημένος εἴην 
πεποίημαι πεποιημένος ὦ πεποιημένος εἴην 
δεδούλωμαι δεδουλωμένος ὦ | δεδουλωμένος εἴην 

Pluperfect. ἐτετιμήμην Ξ 
ἐπεποιήμην 
ἐδεδουλώμην 

Future Perfect. |. τετιμήσομαι. ᾿ τετιμησοίμην. 
πεποιήσομαι πεποιησοίμην 
δεδουλώσομαι δεδουλωσοίμην 

1 Aorist Pas- | ἐτιμήθην τιμηθῶ τιμηθείην 
sive (Weak). | ἐποιήθην ποιηθῶ ᾿ς} ποιηθείην © 
ἐδουλώθην δουλωθῶ ᾿δουλωθείην 
2 Future Pas- | τιμηθήσομαι τιμηθησοίμην. 
sive Weak). | ποιηθήσομαι ποιηθησοίμην 
δουλωθήσομαι δουλωθησοίμην 
Verbal Adjectives :- 1. τιμητός 2. τιμητέος ᾿ 
ποιητός ποιητέος 


δουλωτός δουλωτέος 


“a 
ἢ 
᾿ 


' Continued. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. 115 


» 


1. UNCONTRACTED. « 
Tenses.) : 
‘Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
Active Voice. 
τιμήσειν τιμήσων 
ποιήσειν ποιήσων 
δουλώσειν δουλώσων 
_ | τίμησον τιμῆσαι τιμήσας 
ποίησον ποιῆσαι ποιήσας 
δούλωσον δουλῶσαι δουλώσας 
τετίμηκε τετιμηκέγναι τετιμηκώς 
πεποίηκε πεποιηκέναι πεποιηκώς 
δεδούλωκε δεδουλωκέναι δεδουλωκώς 
Middle and Passive Voices. 
τιμήσεσθαι τιμησόμενος 
ποιήσεσθαι ποιησόμενος, 
δουλώσεσθαι δουλωσόμενος 
τετίμησο τετιμῆσθαι τετιμημένος 
πεποίησο πεποιῆσθαι πεποιημένος 
δεδούλωσο δεδουλῶσθαι δεδουλωμένος 
τετιμήσεσθαι τετιμησόμενος 
πεποιήσεσθαι πεποιησόμενος 
δεδουλώσεσθαι δεδουλωσόμενος 
τιμήθητι τιμηθῆναι τιμηθείς 
ποιήθητι ποιηθῆναι ποιηθείς 
δουλώθητι δουλωθῆναι δουλωθείς 
τιμηθήσεσθαι τιμηθησόμενος 
ποιηθήσεσθαι ποιηθησόμενοξ 
δουλωθήσεσθαι δουλωθησόμενος 


116. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q.. Table V. 
B. CONSONANT: STEMS. 
: ω πλέκω, I plait (Class 1); φεύγω, I flee (Class 2); 
Tenses. Indicative. Subjunctive. 
Active. 
Present, Imperfect. 
Present. πλέκω ἔπλεκον πλέκω 
φεύγω ἔφευγον φεύγω 
τάσσω ἔτασσον τάσσω 
Future. πλέξω 
. φεύξομαι 
τάξω > 
1 Aorist (Weak). ἔπλεξα πλέξω 
2 Aorist (Strong). ἔφυγον φύγω 
1 Aorist (Weak). ἔταξα τάξω 
ι Perfect. Plupertect. 
1 Perfect (Weak). πέπλεχα ἐπεπλέχειν πεπλέχω 
2 Perfect (Strong). . | πέφευγα ἐπεφεύγειν πεφεύγω 
1 Perfect. (Weak). τέταχα ἐτετάχειν τετάχω 
Middle and Passive. 
Present. kmperfect. 
Present. πλέκομαι ἐπλεκόμην πλέκωμαι 
τάσσομαι ἐτασσόμην τάσσωμαι 
Future. πλέξομαι 
τάξομαι 
1 Aorist Middle (Weak).| ἐπλεξάμην ; πλέξωμαι 
ἐταξάμην τάξωμαι 
Perfect. Pluperfect. 
Perfect. πέπλεγμαι | ἐπεπλέγμην  ἠεπλεγμένος ὦ 
τέταγμαι ἐτετάγμην τεταγμένος ὦ 
Future Perfect. πεπλέξομαι 
τετάξομαι 
2 Aorist Pass, (Strong).| ἐπλάκην TAKS 
1 Aorist Pass. (Weak). | ἐσάχθην ταχθῶ 
2 Future Pass. (Strong).| πλακήσομαι 
1 Future Pass. (Weak). | ταχθήσομαι j 
Verbal Adjectives: 1. πλεκτός, φευκτός, τακτός. | 


Examples for. 

ἄγω, L drive (Aor. ἤγαγον, Perf. Act. xa); ἄρχω, I rule, both of Class 

(Pres, τσσω, rarely -ξἕω), see ὃ 250. Nouns are formed from the Pure 
ἡ apx-h, the government. 


Table V. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS INQ. 117 


I, GUTTURAL STEMS. 
τάσσω, I arrange (Class 4). Verbal Stems: aed, δ θη. ταγ. 


Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
Active. 
πλέκοιμι πλέκε πλέκειν πλέκων 
φεύγοιμι φεῦγε φεύγειν φεύγων 
τάσσοιμι τάσσε τάσσειν τάσσων 
πλέξοιμι πλέξειν πλέξων 
φευξοίμην ᾿ φεύξεσθαι φευξόμενος 
τάξοιμι ων τάξειν τάξων 
πλέξαιμι πλέξον πλέξαι πλέξας 
φύγοιμι φύγε φυγεῖν φυγών 
τάξαιμι τάξον τάξαι τάξας 
πεπλέχοιμι πέπλεχε πεπλεχέναι πεπλεχώς 
πεφεύγοιμι πέφευγε πεφευγέναι πεφευγώς 
τετάχοιμι τέταχε τεταχέναι τεταχώς 
Middle and Passive.” 

πλεκοίμην πλέκου πλέκεσθαι πλεκόμενος 
τασσοίμην τάσσου τάσσεσθαι τασσόμενος 
πλεξοίμην πλέξεσθαι πλεξόμενος 
ταξοίμην τάξεσθαι ταξόμενος 
πλεξαίμην πλέξαι πλέξασθαι πλεξάμενος 
ταξαίμην τάξαι τάξασθαι ταξάμενος 
πεπλεγμένος εἴην | πέπλεξο πεπλέχθαι πεπλεγμένος 
τεταγμένος εἴην | τέταξο τετάχθαι τεταγμένος 
πεπλεξοίμην πεπλέξεσθαι πεπλεξόμενος 
τεταξοίμην τετάξεσθαι τεταξόμενος 
πλακείην πλάκηθι πλακῆναι πλακείς 
ταχθείην τάχθητι ταχθῆναι ταχθείς 
πλακησοΐμην πλακήσεσθαι πλακησόμενος 
ταχθησοίμην ταχθήσεσθαι 


2. πλεκτέος, φευκτέος, τακτέος. 


ταχθησόμενος 


Conjugation. 


1; ὀρύσσω,͵ I dig, Stem ὀρυχ, Class 4,a,; for other guttural Stems 
sverbal Stems, as τὸ πλέγ-μα, the wreath (δ 47); ἡ 


τάξι-ς, CRTC 


118 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. ΤΆ] VI. 


B. CONSONANT STEMS. 
ψεύδομαι, I lie (Class 1); πείθω, I persuade (Class 2) ; 


Tenses. Indicative. Subjunctive. 
Active. 
Present. Imperfect. 

Present. πείθω ἔπειθον πείθω 
κομίζω ἐκόμιζον κομίζω 

Future. πείσω 
κομιῶ 

1 Aorist (Weak). | ἔπεισα = πείσω ἡ 

᾿ ἐκόμισα κομίσω 
Perfect. Pluperfect. 
2 Perfect (Strong).| πέποιθα ἐπεποίθειν πεποίθω 
1 Perfect (Weak). | κεκόμικα ἐκεκομίκειν κεκομίκω 
Middle and Passive. 
Present. Imperfect. 

Present. ψεύδομαι ἐψευδόμην ψεύδωμαι 
πείθομαι ἐπειθόμην πείθωμαι 
κομίζομαι ἐκομιζόμην κομίζωμαι 

Future. ψεύσομαι 
πείσομαι 

- [ κομιοῦμαι 
1 Aorist Middle) | ἐψευσάμην ψεύσωμαι 
(Weak). ἐπεισάμην πείσωμαι 
ἐκομισάμην κομίσωμαι 
Perfect. Pluperfect. 

Perfect. ἔψευσμαι ἐψεύσμην ἐψευσμένος ὦ 
πέπεισμαι ἐπεπείσμην πεπεισμένος ὦ 
κεκόμισμαι ἐκεκομίσμην κεκομισμένος ὦ 

1 Aorist Passive | ἐψεύσθην ψευσθῶ 

(Weak). ἐπείσθην πεισθῶ 
ἐκομίσθην κομισθῶ 

1 Future Passive | ψευσθήσομαι ' 

(Weak). πεισθήσομαι - 
κομισθήσομαι 


Verbal Adjectives: 1. ψευστός, πειστός, κομιστός. 


Examples for 


σπένδω, libo, Fut. σπείσω, Perf. ἔσπεικα, Perf. Mid. ἔσπεισμαι, Aor. Pass. 
For verbs of a Dental Stem, with the Present ending in -σσω, see ὃ 250, 
the lie; ἡ πίσ-τι-ς, the faith ; ἡ oxovd-n, the libation ; ὁ κλύδ-ων, Gen, 


Table VI. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. 


Il. DENTAL STEMS. 
κομίζω, I carry (Class 1,6). Verbal Stems: aevd, 718, κομι δ. 


119 


Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
Active. 
πείθοιμι πεῖθε πείθειν πείθων 
κομίζοιμι κόμιζε κομίζειν κομίζων 
πείσοιμι πείσειν πείσων 
κομιοῖμι κομιεῖν κομιῶν 
πείσαιμι πεῖσον _ | πεῖσαι ζΧείσας 
κομίσαιμι κόμισον κομίσαι κομίσας 
πεποίθοιμι πέποιθε πεποιθέναι πεποιθώς 
κεκομίκοιμι κεκόμικε κεκομικέναι κεκομικώς 
Middle and Passive. 

ψευδοίμην ψεύδου ψεύδεσθαι «ψευδόμενος 
πειθοίμην πείθου πείθεσθαι πειθόμενος 
κομιζοίμην κομίζου κομίζεσθαι κομιζόμενος 
ψευσοίμην ψεύσεσθαι ψευσόμενος 
πεισοίμην πείσεσθαι πεισόμενος 
κομιοίμην κομιεῖσθαι κομιούμενος 
ψευσαίμην ψεῦσαι ψεύσασθαι ψευσάμενος 
πεισαίμην πεῖσαι πείσασθαι πεισάμενος 
κομισαίμην κόμισαι κομίσασθαι κομισάμενος 
ἐψευσμένος εἴην | ἔψευσο ἐψεῦσθαι ἐψευσμένος 
πεπεισμένος εἴην | πέπεισο πεπεῖσθαι πεπεισμένος 
κεκομισμένος εἴην | κεκόμισο κεκομίσθαι κεκομισμένος 
ψευσθείην ψεύσθητι ψευσθῆναι ψευσθείς 
πεισθείην πείσθητι πεισθῆναι πεισθείς 
κομισθείην κομίσθητι κομισθῆναι κομισθείς 
ψευσθησοίμην ψευσθήσεσθαι ψευσθησόμενος 
πεισθησοΐμην πεισθήσεσθαι πεισθησόμενος 
κομισθησοίμην κομισθήσεσθαι κομισθησόμενος 


2. ψευστέος, πειστέος, κομιστέος. 


Conjugation. 


ἐσπείσθην ; κλύζω, I wash dgivina ; 


ἁρπάζω, I snatch ; 


ἐλπίζω, 1 hope. 


Obs. Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stem, as: τὸ ψεῦδος, 


κλύδων-ος, the wave ; 


ἡ ἁρπαγ-ή, plunder. 


ΣΟῚ 
εἰ 
ap 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — Table VIL. 


B. CONSONANT STEMS. 
πέμστω, I send (Class 1); λείπω, I leave (Class 2); 


Tenses. Indicative. Subjunctive. 
Active. 
Present. Imperfect. 

Present. πέμπω ἔπεμπον πέμπω 
λείπω ἔλειπον "λείπω 
καλύπτω ἐκάλυπτον καλύπτω 

Future. πέμψω 
λείψω 
καλύψω : 

Aorist 1 (Weak): | ἔπεμψα πέμψω ' 

2 (Strong). ἔλιπον λίπω 
1 (Weak). | ἐκάλυψα καλύψω 
Perfect. Pluperfect. 
2 Perfect (Strong).| πέπομφα ἐπεπόμφειν πεπόμφω 
2 Perfect (Strong).| λέλοιπα ἐλελοίπειν λελοίπω 
Middle and Passive. 
Present. Imperfect. 

Present, πέμπομαϊι ἐπεμπόμην πέμπωμαι 
λείπομαι ἐλειπόμην Ἰ λείπωμαι 
καλύπτομαι ἐκαλυπτόμην καλύπτωμαι 

‘Future. πέμψομαι . 
λείψομαι 
καλύψομαι 

. 1 (Weak).) ἐπεμψάμην πέμψωμαι 
Aorist cS Se ; 
Middle 2 (Str’ng).| ἐλιπόμην λίπωμαι 
: 1 (Weak).| ἐκαλυψάμην καλύψωμαι 2 
Perfect. Pluperfect. 

Perfect. πέπεμμαι ἐπεπέμμην πεπεμμένος ὦ 

λέλειμμαι ἐλελείμμην λελειμμένος ὦ 
' κεκάλυμμαι ἐκεκαλύμμην κεκαλυμμένος ὦ 

Future Perfect. | λελείψομαι 
κεκαλύψομαι 

1 Aorist Passive | ἐπέμφθην πεμφθῶ 

(Weak). ἐλείφθην λειφθῶ. 
ἐκαλύφθην καλυφθῶ 

1 Future Passive | πεμφθήσομαι 

(Weak). λειφθήσομαι 
καλυφθήσομαι 
Verbal Adjectives: 1. πεμπτός, λειπτός, καλυπτός. 


Examples for 


τρέπω, 1 turn (Class 1); ἀλείφω, I anoint (Class 2); τρίβω, I rub 
(δ 249). Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stems, as ὁ πομπ-ό-ς, 
ing, manner ; τὸ ἄλειφ-αρ, the ointment ; ὁ rap-o-c, the tomb. 


 "Pable VIL 


TIT. LABIAL STEMS. | 
᾿καλύπτω, I cover (Class 8). Verbal Stems: repr, λιπ, καλυβ. 


4 > - 


_ PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 121 


Optative. | Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
Active. 

πέμποιμι πέμπε πέμπειν πέμπων 
λείποιμι λεῖπε λείπειν λείπων 
καλύπτοιμι κάλυπτε καλύπτειν καλύπτων 
πέμψοιμι πέμψειν πέμψων 
λείψοιμι λείψειν λείψων 
καλύψοιμι καλύψειν καλύψων 
πέμψαιμι πέμψον πέμψαι ᾿ πέμψας 

ἢ λίποιμι λίπε λιπεῖν λιπών 
καλύψαιμι κάλυψον καλύψαι καλύψας 
πεπόμφοιμι πέπομφε πεπομφέναι πεπομφώς 
λελοίποιμι λέλοιπε λελοιπέναι λελοιπώς 

Middle and Passive. 

πεμποίμην πέμπου πέμπεσθαι πεμπόμενος 
λειποίμην "| λείπου λείπεσθαι λειπόμενος 
καλυπτοίμην καλύπτου καλύπτεσθαι καλυπτόμενος 
πεμψοίμην πέμψεσθαι πεμψόμενος 
λειψοίμην λείψεσθαι λειψόμενος 
καλυψοίμην καλύψεσθαι καλυψόμενος 
πεμψαίμην πέμψαι πέμψασθαι πεμψάμενος 
λιποίμην λιποῦ λιπέσθαι λιπόμενος 
καλυψαίμην κάλυψαι καλύψασθαι καλυψάμενος. 
πεπεμμένος εἴην | πέπεμψο πεπέμφθαι πεπεμμένος 
λελειμμένος εἴην | λέλειψο λελεῖφθαι λελειμμένος 
κεκαλυμμένος εἴην κεκάλυψο κεκαλύφθαι κεκαλυμμένος 
λελειψοίμην λελείψεσθαι λελειψόμενος 
κεκαλυψοίμην κεκαλύψεσθαι κεκαλυψόμενος 
πεμφθείην πέμφθητι πεμφθῆναι πεμφθείς 
λειφθείην λείφθητι λειφθῆναι λειφθείς 
καλυφθείην καλύφθητι καλυφθῆναι καλυφθείς 
πεμφθησοίμην πεμφθήσεσθαι πεμφθησόμενος 
λειφθησοίμην λειφθήσεσθαι λειφθησόμενος 
καλυφθησοίμην καλυφθήσεσθαι καλυφθησόμενος 
2. πεμπτέος, λειπτέος, καλυπτέος. : 


Conjugation. 
(Class 2), as to its Perf., see ὃ 279; θάπτω, I bury (Class 3), Stem rag 
the escort ; λοιπ-ό-ς, remaining ; ἡ καλύβεη, the hut ; ὁ τρόπ-ο-ς, the turn- 


KF 


122 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


Table VIII. 


_ B, CONSONANT STEMS. 
δέρω, I shin (Class 1); ἀγγέλλω, Tannounce (Class 4, δ) ; σπείρω, [sow (Class 


Tenses. Indicative. Subjunctive. 
Active. Present. Imperfect. 

Present. δέρω ἔδερον δέρω 
ἀγγέλλω ἤγγελλον ἀγγέλλω 
σπείρω ἔσπειρον σπείρω 
μιαίνω ἐμίαινον μιαίνω 

Future. δερῶ 
ἀγγελῶ 
σπερῶ 
μιανῶ 

1 Aorist (Weak). | ἔδειρα δείρω 
ἤγγειλα ἀγγείλω 
ἔσπειρα σπείρω 
émiava μιάνω 

Perfect. Pluperfect. 

1 Perfect (Weak). | ἤγγελκα ἠγγέλκειν ἠγγέλκω 
ἔσπαρκα ἐσπάρκειν ἐσπάρκω 
μεμίαγκα ἐμεμιάγκειν μεμιάγκω 

Mid. and Passive. Present. Imperfect. 

Present. δέρομαι ἐδερόμην δέρωμαι 

e ἀγγέλλομαι ἠγγελλόμην ἀγγέλλωμαι 
σπείρομαι ἐσπειρόμην σπείρωμαι 
μιαίνομαι ἐμιαινόμην μιαίνωμαι 

Future. δεροῦμαι 
ἀγγελοῦμαι 
σπεροῦμαι 
μιανοῦμαι 

1 Aorist Middle | ἐδειράμην δείρωμαι 

(Weak). ἠγγειλάμην ἀγγείλωμαι 
ἐσπειράμην σπείρωμαι 
ἐμιανάμην μιάνωμαι 

Perfect. Pluperfect. 

Perfect, δέδαρμαι ἐδεδάρμην δεδαρμένος ὦ 
ἤγγελμαι ἠγγέλμην ἠγγελμένος ὦ 
ἔσπαρμαι ἐσπάρμην ἐσπαρμένος ὦ 
μεμίασμαι ἐμεμιάσμην μεμιασμένος ὦ 

2 Strong.| ἐδάρην δαρῶ 
| Aorist }1 Weak. ἠγγέλθην ἀγγελθῶ 

Passive ἡ 2 Strong. ἐσπᾶρην σπαρῶ 
1 Weak. | ἐμιάνθην μιανθῶ 
2 Strong. δαρήσομαι 

Future }1 Weak. | ἀγγελθήσομαι 

Passive ) 2 Strong.| σπαρήσομαι 
1 Weak. | μιανθήσομαι 


Verbal Adjectives: 1. dapréc, ἀγγελτός, σπαρτός, μιαντός. 


ni 


4 
‘Table VIIL. 


IV. LIQUID STEMS (, p, », p). | 
4,d); μιαίνω, I'soil (Class 4, 4). Verbal Stems: dep, ἀγγελ, orep, μιαν. 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 123 


Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
δέροιμι δέρε δέρειν δέρων 
ἀγγέλλοιμι ἄγγελλε ἀγγέλλειν ἀγγέλλων 
σπείροιμι σπεῖρε σπείρειν σπείρων 
μιαίνομει « μίαινε μιαίνειν μιαίνων 
δεροῖμι δερεῖν δερῶν 
ἀγγελοῖμι ἀγγελεῖν ἀγγελῶν 
σπεροῖμι σπερεῖν σπερῶν 
μιανοῖμι μιανεῖν μιανῶν 
δείραιμι δεῖρον δεῖραι δείρας 
ἀγγείλαιμι ἄγγειλον ἀγγεῖλαι ἀγγείλας 
σπείραιμι σπεῖρον σπεῖραι σπείρας 
μιάναιμι μίανον μιᾶναι μιάνας 
ἠγγέλκοιμι ἤγγελκε ἠγγελκέναι ἠγγελκώς 
ἐσπάρκοιμι ἔσπαρκε ἐσπαρκέναι ἐσπαρκώς 
μεμιάγκοιμι μεμίαγκε μεμιαγκέναι μεμιαγκώς 
δεροίμην δέρου δέρεσθαι δερόμενος 
ἀγγελλοίμην ἀγγέλλου ἀγγέλλεσθαι ἀγγελλόμενος 
σπειροίμην σπείρου σπείρεσθαι σπειρόμενος 
μιαινοίμην μιαίνου μιαίνεσθαι μιαινόμενος 
δεροίμην δερεῖσθαι δερούμενος 
ἀγγελοίμην ἀγγελεῖσθαι ἀγγελούμενος 
σπεροίμην σπερεῖσθαι σπερούμενος 
μιανοίμην μιανεῖσθαι μιανούμενος 
δειραίμην δεῖραι δείρασθαι δειράμενος 
ἀγγειλαίμην ἄγγειλαι ἀγγείλασθαι ἀγγεϊλάμενος 
σπειραίμην σπεῖραι σπείρασθαι σπειράμενος 
μιαναίμην μίαναι μιάνασθαι μιανάμενος 
δεδαρμένος εἴην | δέδαρσο δεδάρθαι δεδαρμένος 
ἠγγελμένος εἴην | ἤγγελσο ἠγγέλθαι ἠγγελμένος 
ἐσπαρμένος εἴην | ἔσπαρσο ἐσπάρθαι ἐσπαρμένος 
μεμιασμένος εἴην | μεμίασο μεμιάνθαι μεμιασμένος 
δαρείην δάρηθι δαρῆναι dapeic 
ἀγγελθείην ἀγγέλθητι ἀγγελθῆναι ἀγγελθείς 
σπαρείην σπάρηθι σπαρῆναι. σπαρείς 
μιανθείην μιάνθητι μιανθῆναι μιανθείς 
δαρησοίμην δαρήσεσθαι. δαρησόμενος 
ἀγγελθησοίμην ἀγγελθήσεσθαι ἀγγελθησόμενος 
σπαρησοίμην σπαρήσεσθαι σπαρησόμενος 
μιανθησοίμην μιανθήσεσθαι μιανθησόμενος 
2. δαρτέος, ἀγγελτέος, σπαρτέος, μιαντέος. 


1244 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN pu. Table IX, τ, 


VERBS IN μι. 
τί-θη-μι; 1 put. δί-δω-μι, 1 give. | ἵ-στη-μι, 1 place, 
Pure Stems θε do - στα 
Present Stems τι - θὲ δι-δὸ ἵ-στα 
Present. Active. 
5. 1 | τί-θη-μι δί-δω-μι ἵ-στη-μι 
2 τί-θη-ς δί-δω-ς t-oTn-c 
3 3 | τί-θη-σι(ν) Oi-dw-ou(v) t-orn-o1(y) 
= 1 D.41 : 
πὶ 
Ἔ 2 | τί-θε-τον δί-δο-τον (-oTa-Tov 
= 3 | τί-θε-τον δί-δο-τον ἹἙ-στᾶ-τον 
4 P. 1 | τί-θε-μεν δί-δο-μεν Ἱ-στἄ-μεν 
2 | ri-Oe-re δί-δο-τε Ἱ-στᾶ-τε 
3 | rt-0é-a-ou(v) δι-δό-ἃ-σι(ν) ἱ-στᾶ-σι(ν) 
8. 1 τι-θῶ 6-06 ἱ-στῶ 
3 2 | tt-O9-¢ δι-δῷ-ς ἱ-στῇ-ς 
Ss 3 | τι-θῇ δι-δῷ ἱ-στῇ 
Ἔ 1), 
Η͂ 2 | τι-θῆ-τον δι-δῶ-τον ἱ-στῆ-τον 
‘=> 3 | τι-θῆ-τον δι-δῶ-τον ἱ-στῆ-τον 
BS P. 1 τι-θῶ-μεν δι-δῶ-μεν ἱ-στῶ-μεν 
2 τι-θῆ-τε δι-δῶ-τε ἱ-στῆ-τε " 
3 | τι-θῶ-σι(ν) δι-δῶ-σι(ν) ἱ-στῶ-σι(ν) 
8S. 1 τι-θείη-ν δι-δοίη-ν ἱ-σταίη-ν 
2 τι-θείη-ς δι-δοίη-ς ἱ-σταίη-ς 
3 | τι-θείη δι-δοίη ἱ-σταίη 
D. 1 
2 |. τι-θείη-τον or δι-δοίη-τον Or ἱ-σταίη-τον OY 
gS τιθεῖτον διδοῖτον ἱσταῖτον 
Ξ 9. τι-θειή-την ΟΥ̓ δι-δοιή-την ΟΥ ἱ-σταιή-τὴν ΟΥ̓ 
oe τιθείτην διδοίτην ἱσταίτην 
δ' P. 1 τι-θείη-μεν ΟΥ̓ δι-δοίη-μεν OF ἱ-σταίη-μεν ΟΥ̓ 
τιθεῖμεν διδοῖμεν ἱσταῖμεν 
Ὁ  τι-θείη-τε ΟΥ̓ δι-δοίη-τε ΟΥ ἱ-σταίη-τε ΟΥ 
τιθεῖτε διδοῖτε | ἱσταῖτε 
3 | τι-θείη-σαν Or δι-δοίη-σαν ΟΥ̓ ἱ-σταίη-σαν ΟΥ̓ 
τιθεῖεν διδοῖεν ἱσταῖεν 
5. 2..] τί-θει δί-δου Ἑστη 
ῷ 3 | τι-θέ-τω δι-δό-τω ἱ-στἄ-τω 
5 D. 2 | τί-θε-τον δί-δο-τον Ἱ-στἄ-τον 
Ξ 3 | τι-θέ-των δι-δό-των ἱ-στά-των 
& | P. 2 | ri-Oe-re δί-δο-τε ἵ-στα-τε 
Ξ 3 | τι-θέ-ντων OF δι-δό-ντων ΟΥ̓ ἱ-στά-ντων ΟΥ̓ 
τι-θέ-τωσαν δι-δό-τωσαν ἱ-στά-τωσαν 
Infin. * τιεθέεναι δι-δό-ναι ἱ-στά-ναι 
Part. τι-θεί-ς, τι-θεῖ-σα, | δι-δού-ς, δι-δοῦ-σα, | i-ord-c, ἱ-στᾶ-σα, 
τιθέν G. τιθέντ-ος | διδόν G. δι-δόντ-ος | tordy G. ἱ-στάντ-ος 


Ps ΄ 


Table IX. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN μι. 125 


__ FIRST CLASS. 


This First Class consists of Verbs which affix their terminations 


directly to the Stem. 


τι-θεί-μεθον 
τι-θεῖ-σθον 


τι-θεί-σθὴν 


τι-θεί-μεθα 


δι-δοί-μεθον 
δι-δοῖ-σθον 


δι-δοί-σθην 


δι-δοί- μεθα 


Present. Middle and Passive. 
τί-θε-μαι δί-δο-μαι Ἱ-στᾶἄ-μαι 
τί-θε-σαι δί-δο-σαι t-ord-oat 
τί-θε-ται δί-δο-ται . -στἄ-ται 
τι-θέ-μεθον δι-δό-μεθον. ἱ-στά-μεθον 
τί-θε-σθον δί-δο-σθον ἵ-στα-σθον 
| τί-θε-σθον δί-δο-σθον Ἑ-στα-σθον 
τιτθέςμεθα ς δι-δό-μεθα * ἱ-στά-μεθα 
τί-θε-σθε δί-δο-σθε ἵ-στα-σθε 
τί-θε-νται δί-δο-νται Ὅστα-νται 
τι-θῶ-μαι δι-δῶ-μαι ἱ-στῶ-μαι 
τι-θῇ δι-δῷ ἱ-στῇ 
τι-θῆ-ται δι-δῶ-ται ἱ-στῆ-ται 
τι-θώ-μεθον δι-δώ-μεθον ἱ-σστώ-μεθον 
τι-θῆ-σθον δι-δῶ-σθον ἱ-στῆ-σθον 
τι-θῆ-σθον δι-δῶ-σθον ἱ-στῆ-σθον 
τι-θώ-μεθα δι-δώ-μεθα ἱ-στώ-μεθα 
τι-θῆ-σθε δι-δῶ-σθε ἱ-στῆ-σθε 
τι-θῶ-νται δι-δῶ-νται ἱ-στῶ-νται 
τι-θεί- μην δι-δοί-μην ἱ-σταί-μην 
τι-θεῖ-ο δι-δοῖ-ο ἱ-σταῖ-ο 
τι-θεῖ-το δι-δοῖ-το ἱ-σταῖ-το 


« , 
ἱ-σταί-μεθον 
ἱ-σταῖ-σθον 


ἱ-σταί-σθην 


« , 
ἱ-σταί-μεθα 


τι-θεῖ-σθε δι-δοῖ-σθε ἱ-σταῖ-σθε 
τι-θεῖ-ντο δι-δοῖ-ντο ἱ-σταῖ-ντο 
τί-θε-σο δί-δο-σο ἹἙ-στἄ-σο 
τι-θέ-σθω δι-δό-σθω ἱ-στά-σθω 
τί-θε-σθον δί-δο-σθον ὩἙ-στα-σθον 
τι-θέ-σθων δι-δό-σθων ἱ-στά-σθων 
τί-θε-σθε δί-δο-σθε Ἑ-στα-σθε 


τι-θέ-σθων ΟΥ̓ 
τι-θέ-σθωσαν 


δι-δό-σθων ΟΥ̓ 
δι-δό-σθωσαν 


ἱ-στά-σθων Οἱ 
ἱ-στά-σθωσαν 


τί-θε-σθαι 


δί-δο-σθαὶ 


Ἑ-στα-σθαι 


τι-θέ-μενο-ς, ἡ, ο-ν 


δι-δό-μενο-ς, ἡ, ο-ν 


ἱσστά-μενο-ς, ἡ, O-V 


᾿ 


ΕΣ 


126 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN μι. Table 1Χ-.---᾿ 
VERBS IN μι. 
᾿ς rt-On-pur, 1 put. δί-δω-μι,.1 give. | ἵ-στη-μι, 1 place. 
Pure Stems θε do στα | 
Present Stems τι -θὲε δι-δὸ ἱ- στη 
5. 1 | ἐ-τί-θη-ν ἐ-δί-δω-ν Ἑ-στη-ν 
2  ἐ-τί-θη-ς ἐ-δί-δω-ς t-orn-c 
3 3 | ἐ-τί-θη ἐ-δί-δω ἵ-στη 
= [Ρ.1 
= 2 | ἐ-τί-θε-τον ἐ-δί-δο-τον Ἱ-στᾶ-τον 
= 3 | ἐ-τι-θέ-την 1 ἐ-δι-δό-την ἱ-στά-την 
ἘΞ | iP. 1| ἐ-τί-θε-μεν é-di-do-pev t-ord-pev 
2 | é-ri-Oe-re ἐ-δί-δο-τε Ἱ-στἄ-τε 
3 | ἐ-τί-θε-σαν ἐ-δί-δο-σαν ἱ-στἄρςσαν 
Second or Strong Aorist. Active. 
8. 1 [{ἔ-θη-ν]} [é-dw-v| ἔ-στη-ν 
2 [ἔ-θη-ς] [ἔ-δω-ς] ἔ-στη-ς 
od 3 | [ἔ-θη] [é-dw | ἔ-στη 
 [}.1 
δ: 2 | ἔ-θε-τον ἔ-δο-τον ἔ-στη-τον 
= 3 | ἐ-θέ-την ἐ-δό-την ἐ-στή-την 
4 P. 1 | ἔ-θε-μεν ἔ-δο-μεν ἔ-στη-μεν 
2 | ἔ-θε-τε ἔ-δο-τε ἔ-στη-τε 
3 | ἔ-θε-σαν ἔ-δο-σαν ἔ-στη-σαν 
Subj. θῶ δῶ στῶ 
θῇ-ς δῷ-ς στῇ--ς : 
etc., as in the 
Opt. | | θείη-ν δοίη-ν "] σταίη-ν 
etc., as.in the 
S. 2 | 0é-c ἣ δό-ς στῆ-θι 
© 3. | θέ-τω δό-τω στήττω “5 
Ἑ D. 2 | 0é-rov δό-τον στῆ-τον 
Ξ 3 | θέ-των δό-των στήτ-των 
o , , ~ 
a | P. 2 | θέ-τε δό-τε στῆ-τε 
5 3 | 0é-vyrwy or δό-ντων OF στά-ντων ΟΥ̓ 
θέ-τωσαν δό-τωσαν στή-τωσαν 
Infin. θεῖ-ναι δοῦ-ναι στῆ-ναι 
Part. θεί-ς, θεῖ-σα, θέ-ν | dov-¢, δοῦ-σα, στἄ-ς, στᾶ-σα, 
6. θέντ-ος δό-ν G. δόντ-ος | στάν G. στάντ-ος 
The following Tenses are formed 
Active. 
Future. θήσω δώσω στήσω 
First or Weak} ἔθηκα ἔδωκα ἔστησα 
Aorist. 
Perfect. τέθεικα δέδωκα ἕστηκα 
Pluperfect. | ἐτεθείκειν ἐδεδώκειν ἑστήκειν ΟΥ̓ 
εἱστήκειν 
Verbals. 
δες ] ie 


FIRST CLASS. 


} Continued. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN μι. 127. 
| 


This First Class consists of Verbs which affix their terminations 
directly to the Stem. 
ἐ-τι-θέ-μην ἐ-δι-δό-μην ἱ-στᾶ-μην 
ἐ-τί-θε-σο. ἐ-δί-δο-σο ἵ-στα-σο 
ἐ-τί-θε-το é-di-d0-To t-OTa-TO 
ἐ-τι-θέ-μεθον ἐ-δι-δό-μεθον ἱ-στά-μεθον 
ἐ-τί-θε-σθον ἐ-δί- δο-σθον t-ora-cOov 
ἐ-τι-θέ-σθην ἐ-δι-δό-σθην ἱ-στά-σθην 
ἐ-τι-θέ-μεθα : ἐ-δι-δό-μεθα ἱ-στά-μεθα 
ἐ-τί-θε-σθε * ἐ-δί-δο-σθε ἵ-στα-σθε 
ἐ-τί-θε-ντο ἐ-δί-δο-ντο (-OTa-vTO 
Second or Strong Aorist. Middle and Passive. 
ἐ-θέ-μην ἐ-δό-μην Wanting. 
ἔ-θου ἔ- δου 
ἔ-θε-το ἔ-δο-το 
ἐ-θέ-μεθον ἐ-δό-μεθον 
ἔ-θε-σθον ἔ-δο-σθον 
ἐ-θέ-σθην ἐ-δό-σθην 
ἐ-θέ-μεθα .1 ἐ-δό-μεθα 
ἔ-θε-σθε ἔ-δο-σθε 
ἔ-θε-ντο ἔ-δο-ντο 
θῶ-μαι δῶ-μαι Wanting. 
g a bay op 

Pres. Subjunctive. ; 

| θεί-μην δοί-μην | Wanting. 
Pres. Optative. 
θοῦ δοῦ Wanting. 
θέςσθω . δό-σθω 
θέ-σθον δό-σθον 
θέ-σθων δό-σθων 
θέ-σθε δό-σθε : 
θέ-σθων ΟΥ θέ-σθωσαν δό-σθων ΟΥ̓ δό-σθωσαν 
θέ-σθαι : δό-σθαι Wanting. . 
θέ-μενο-ς, ἡ, ο-ν δό-μενο-ς, ἡ, ο-ν Wanting. 
on the analogy of Verbs in Q. 

Middle and Passive. 

θήσομαι δώσομαι στήσομαι 
PASSIVE. τεθήσομαι δοθήσομαι σταθήσομαι 
Mippiz. Wanting Wanting ἐστήσαμην 
PASSIVE. ἐτέθην .1 ἐδόθην ἐστάθην 
τέθειμαι δέδομαι ἕσταμαι 
ἐτεθείμην ἐδεδόμην ἑστάμην ᾿ 
θετός δοτός στατός 
θετέος δοτέος στατέος 


128 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN μι. Table X. 


VERBS IN μι. 


SECOND CLASS. 


This Second Class consists of Verbs which form the Present-Stem by 


adding vv to the Pure Stem. 


δείκνυμι, 1 show. Pure Stem ὃ ει κ. 


Present Stem δεικ-νυ. 


Present Active. 


Middle and Passive. 


Indicative. δείκ-νῦ-μι δείκ-νῦ-μαι 
2 | deix-vd-¢ O&ix-vd-oat 
3 | δείκ-νῦ-σι(ν) δείκ-νῦ-ται 
D. 1 δεικ-νύ-μεθον 
2 | deix-vi-rov δείκ-νυ-σθον 
3 | δείκ-νῦὕ-τον δείκ-νυεσθον 
Pl. 1 δείκ-νῦ-μεν δεικ-νύ-μεθα 
᾿ς Ὁ δείκ-νὔ-τε δείκ-νυ-σθε 
3 | δεικ-νύ-ἄσι(ν) δείκ-νυ-νται 
Subjunctive. δεικνύω, ye, y, ete. δεικνύωμαι, y, yrat, etc. 
Optative. δεικνύοιμι, ove, ot, etc. δεικνυοίμην, ovo, oro, etc. 
Imperative. |S. 2 | δείκ-νῦ δείκ-νῦ-σο 
3 | δεικ-νύ-τω δεικ-νύ-σθω 
D. 2 | δείκ-νγῦὔ-τον δείκ-νυ-σθον 
3 | δεικ-νύ-των δεικ-νύ-σθων 
Pl. 2 | deix-vi-re δείκ-νυ-σθε 
3 | δεικ-νύ-ντων Or δεικ-νύ-σθων ΟΥ̓ 
δεικ-νὕτ-τωσαν ᾿ δεικ-νύ-σθωσαν 
Infinitive. δεικ-νύ-ναι δείκ-νυ-σθαι 
Participle. δεικ-νύς, δεικ-νῦσα, Seuk-viv) δεικ-νύ-μενος, ἡ, ον 
Stem δεικ-νυ-ντ . 
Imperfect S. 1 | &-deix-vd-y ἐ-δεικ-νύ-μην 
Indicative. 2 | ἐ-δείκ-νῦ-ς ἐ-δείκ-νῦ-σο 
8 | ἐ-δείκ-νυ ἡ ἐ-δείκ-νῦ-το 
D4 ἐ-δεικ-νύ-μεθον δ 
ὃ 2 ἐ-δείκ-νυ-τον ἐ-δείκ-νυ-σθον 
3 | ἐ-δεικ-νύτ-την ἐ-δεικ-νύ-σθην 
Pl. 1 ἐ-δείκ-νῦ-μεν ἐ-δεικ-νύ-μεθα 
2 | ἐ-δείκ-νυ-τε ἐ-δείκ-νυ-σθε 
8 | ἐ-δείκ-νυ-σαν ἐ-δείκ-νυ-ντο 
Future. δείξω δείξομαι 
PASSIVE. δειχθήσομαι 
First or ἔδειξα MIDDLE. ἐδειξάμην 
Weak Aorist. PASSIVE. ἐδείχθην 
Perfect. δέδειχα δέδειγμαι 
Pluperfect. ἐδεδείχειν ἐδεδείγμην 


I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 129 


§ 232. : 


Cyap. X.—First PrIncIPAL CONJUGATION, 


or Verbs in w. 


J. THe PRESENT-STEM. 
A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem. 


§ 231. The Present-Stem is the form which remains 
after rejecting ὦ in the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. - 

On the distinction of the Present-Stem from the Verbal- 
Stem, see ὃ 245, etc. 

The following Table exhibits the way in which the Per- 
sonal Endings are affixed to the Present-Stem by means 
of the connecting vowels. 


§ 232. Active. ρον, 
Present 1 Sing. | λύ-ω [soly-o | λύ-ο-μαι 
Indicative. |2 “ |λύε-ει-ς [solv-i-s] λύ-ῃ OF -Av-et 
8. ( χύ-ει [soly-i-t] λύ-ε-ται 
1 Dual λυ-ό-μεθον 
: a= % λύ-ε-τον λύ-ε-σθον 
regs λύ-ε-τον λύ-ε-σθον 
. 1 Plur, | \d-o-vev _[solv-i-mus] λυ-ό-μεθα 
2 “ | db-e-re [solv-i-tis] λύ-ε-σθε 
9. “τ λύ-ου-σι(ν) [solv-u-nt] λύ-ο-νται 
Present 1 Sing. | λύ-ω [solv-a-m ] λύ-ω-μαι 
Subjunctive. [92 “ |λύ-ῃ-ς [501γ-ἃ-5] λύ-ῃ 
8. “[λύ-ῳῃ [soly-a-t] λύ-η-ται 
1 Dual λυ-ώ-μεθον 
ἀπ Fl λύ-η-τον λύ-η-σθον 
ξπὴς λύ-η-τον λύ-η-σθον 
1 Plur. | λύτω-μεν [solvy-a-mus] | λυ-ώ-μεθα 
a λύ-η-τε [solv-a-tis] λύ-η-σθε 
a « λύ-ω-σι(ν) [soly-a-nt] λύ-ω-νται 


F 2 


8.282; 


130 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 
Active. ann seek 
asslve. 
Present 1 Sing. | λύ-οι-μι λυ-οί-μην 

Optative. [9 “ [λύ-οι-ς λύ-οι-ο 
8 Ὁ λύ-οι λύ-οι-το 
1 Dual λυ-οί-μεθον 
aes λύ-οι-τον ᾿λύ-οι-σθον 
Sina λυ-οί-την λυ-οί-σθην 

HS 1 Plur. | λύ-οι-μεν λυ-οί-μεθα 

Ξ 2 “ λύ-οι-τε λύ-οι-σθε 

Bos λύ-οι-εν λύ-οι-ντο 

Present 2 Sin λῦ-ε [50]γ-6] λύ-ου 

Imperative. |3 “ | dv-é-7rw [80]γ-1-[0] λυ-ἐ-σθω 

2 Dual | λύ-ε-τον λύ-ε-σθον 

Be λυ-ἐ-των λυ-ἐ-σθων.. 

2 Plur. | λύ-ε-τε [50]γ-1-[6] λύ-ε-σθε 

8. “ [|[λυ-ό-ντων [soly-u-nto] or | Av-é-cOwy or 

hu-é-Twoay λυ-ἔ-σθωσαν 
.. λύ-ειν λύ-ε-σθαι 
Present Stem λυ-ο-ν τ [soly-e-nt] 

Participle. λύ-ων λυ-ό-μενο-ς 
λύ-ουσα λυ-ο-μένη 
λῦ-ον λυ-ό-μενοῖν 
Gen. λύ-ο-ντ-ος 

[soly-e-nt-is] 

Imperfect. 1 Sing. | éAv-0-v ἐ-λυ-ό-μην 
Ὁ ὩΣ ἔ-λυ-ε-ς ἐ-λύ-ου 
os é-dv-e(v) ἐ-λύ-ε-το 
1 Dual ἐ-λυ-ό-μεθον 
> Ἐ: ἐ-λύ-ε-τον ἐ-λύ-ε-σθον 
Ὁ γε δος ἐ-λυ-ἐ-την ἐ-λυ-ἐ-σθην 
1 Plur. | ἐ-λύ-ο-μεν ἐ-λυ-ό-μεθα 
Ὅν ἐ-λύ-ε-τε ἐ-λύ-ε-σθε 
a ἔ-λυ-ο-ν 


ἐ-λύ-ο-ντο 


Ἄ - : - 
a . 


“ἃ 
ςς. 


a 
4 


— § 233. ‘PERSONAL ENDINGS. 131 


§ 233. Obs.—1. The E-sound (ε, η, ει) is used as a connecting vowel | 
except before nasals, where the O-sound (0, , ov) is used. 


2. In 1 Sing. Ind. Act. w is the connecting vowel lengthened, the 
- ending ju being dropped. In the 2 Sing. εἰς is for eo. In the 
8 Sing. ec for ere: λύ-ει-ς for Av-e-o1, λύ-ει for Av-e-7e [Compare 
solv-i-t]. The ov of the 3 Plur. has arisen out of ο by compensa- 
tive lengthening (§ 42): λύ-ου-σι, from Av-o-vor, for the original 
and Doric λύ-ο-ντι [compare solv-u-nt]. In the 3 Sing. Imperf. 
e(v) stands for original e--—compare solveba-t—as τ at the end 
could not maintain its ground (§ 67). 


8. In the 2 Sing. Indic. Pres. Mid. y or ec arose from (a) ae (δὲ 61, 
38): Ady, from Ave(o)ar; the ending εἰ is the Old Attic one ex- 
clusively used in οἴει, thou thinkest ; βούλει, thou wishest ; y is the 
one later in general use. Compare the Fut, ὄψει (δ 259). 

~—w4. The Subjunctive has always @; ἡ, 9, for o (ov), ε, εἰ; the y of the 
2 Sing. Mid. is contracted from ἡ (c) a+ (compare ὃ 228). 
5. In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Act. the termination after the connecting 
' -voweLis quite lost. ov in the 2 Sing. Imperat. and Imperf. Mid. 
has arisen from.e(c) 0, εο : Advov—=dve(o)o, vou = ἐλυε(σ)ο (δ 61, 
37); ovo in the 2 Sing. Opt. Mid. arose from o1(c) o. 


§ 233. Dialects—1. The Epic dialect sometimes has the original - 
ending wc of the 1 Sing. in the subjunctive : ἐθέλω-μι, velim ; the 2 Sing. 
Subj. and Opt. often has the fuller ending o@a (for ¢): ἐθέλη-σθα -Ξ 
ἐθέλῃς, κλαίοι-σθα ΞΞΞ κλαίοις (κλαίω, I weep); the 3 Sing. Subj. has the 
old ending o1(v), from re: ἐθέλη-σι(ν) = ἐθέλῃ. 

- 2. The long vowels of the subjunctive are often shortened in Homer: 
ἰθύνετε for ἰθύνητε (ἰθύνω, I put straight) (compare ὃ 228, D.). 

3. The Epic dialect often has μεναι or μεν in the Inf. Act. con- 
nected with the Stem by an accented €: ἀμῦν-ἔ-μεναι OF ἀμῦν-ἔ-μεν = 
ἀμύνειν, to defend. : 

4. The 2 Sing. Mid. often remains uncontracted in the Ion. dialect: 
λιλαίεαι, thou wishest ; Subj. ἔχηαι (habearis), also shortened, μίσγεαι 
(miscearis) ; Imperat. ἕπεο, follow ; Imperf. ἐδεύεο, thou wast in want of. 
£0 is also contracted to εὖ (ὃ 37, D.): ἕπευ. 


5. The 1 Dual and 1 Pfr. Mid. in poetry often has σθ for @: Bov- 
λόμεσθον, -μεσθα, we wish. 

6. aro (ὃ 226, D.) occurs in the Ion. dialect regularly for vro in 
3 Plur. Opt.: payoiaro (ΞΞ μάχοιντο), they may fight. In New-Ion..ara, 
aro, are also sometimes found in other forms where ε is the connect- 
ing vowel instead of 0: «nd-é-arar= κἠδ-ο-νται, they care: iBovd-é-aro 
= ἐβούλοντο. . 


132 1. THE PRESENT-STEM. δ Ὁ 


B. The Augment. 


§ 234. The Augment (Augmentum, increase) is ‘the 
sign of the past in the Indicative of all the historical 
tenses (ὃ 225,3.B.). It has two forms; that is, it appears 
either— 


a) As a Syllabic Augment, in the syllable < prefixed, or 
b) As a Temporal Augment, in the lengthening of the 


initial vowel. 

All verbs beginning with a consonant have the Sylla- 
bic Augment: ἔ-λυτο-ν, ἐττυπτ-ό-μην, 7 was struck. op is 
doubled after ε: ἔῤῥιπτον, from ῥίπτω, 7) hurl. 


Obs.—The Syllabic Augment appears in the stronger form of ἡ 
instead of ε in ἤ-μελλ-ο-ν, Twas about to, from μέλλω ; ἠ-βουλ-ό-μην, 
I wished, from βούλομαι ; ἠ-δυνά-μην, I could, from δύναμαι. 
§ 235. The Temporal Augment is used in all verbs which 
begin with a vowel, whether aspirated or not. The Tem- 
poral Augment changes | 


to 


a n: ἄγω, I lead. eres ἦγ-ο-ν 

e “ n: ἐλαύνω, 1 drive. ἤλαυν-ο-ν 
o “ w: ὀνειδίζω, I reproach. ‘2 ὠνείδιζ-ο-ν. 
Ὁ 2 ΑΞ 

ἵ t 


‘ixerevw, I beseech. 3 Ἱκέτευ-ο-ν 


ἡ. Homer, quite peculiarly, has in the 8 Dual Imperf. τον, σθον, 
for την, σθην : ἐτεύχετον, the two.made ; and Attic writers have τὴν 
for the 2 Dual of an historic sense: εἰχέτην, ye two had ; εὑρέτην, Ye 
two found. 


§ 234. Dialects—In Homer, and also in other poets, the Awgment 
may be entirely omitted: τεῦχε, he made; ἔχεν, he had. 2, p, v, σ are 
also sometimes doubled after the Syllabic"Augment: ἐλλίσσετο (from 
λίσσομαι, I beseech) ; 5 only in the Stem du: ἔδδεισα (1 feared, ὃ 317, 5). 
On the contrary, p is sometimes left single: ἐράπτομεν (ῥάπτω, I sew, 


spin). 
§ 235. Dialects. —By the Temporal Augment & becomes ἃ in Doric: 


ἄγον. The Temporal Augment is very often wanting in Herodotus, 
especially in the case of diphthongs. 


ΠΝ... 


§ 238. - THE AUGMENT. 133 
6 to ¥: ‘HBpifw, 1 insult. sien adi ὀβριζίο- -ν 
a“ y: αἰσθάνομαι, I perceme. ἠσθαν-ό-μην 
αὖ “ nu: αὐξάνω, I increase. ἐξ ηὔξαν-ο-ν 


({ 


ᾧκτειρῆθεν 
Before vowels, a becomes a, ποῦ n: *atw, I hear, 'ἄϊον. 
The long vowels n, w, i, v, and usually the diphthongs 
εἰ, εὖ, OV, remain without Augment. 


οἱ “ w: οἰκτείρω, I pity. 


εἰκάζω, I conjecture, εἴκαζ-ο-ν (also ῥκαζον) ; 

εὑρίσκω, 1 find, εὕρισκ-ο-ν (seldom Aorist ηὗρον) ; 
also av and ot immediately before a vowel: avaivw, J dry, 
avawov ; οἰακίζω, J steer, οἰάκιζον ; and other diphthongs 
in isolated instances. 


Obs.— The rough breathing precedes the augmented 
Jorm when the verb in its unaugmented. form had tt. 


§ 236. « becomes εἰ (instead of n) in some verbs, viz., in 
ἐάω, 7 leave; ἐθίζω, 7 accustom; Xtoow, 1 roll; ἕλκω or 
ἑλκύω, 7 draw ; ἕπομαι, 7 follow; ἐργάζομαι, [work ; ἕρπω 
or ἑρπύζω, 7 creep; ἑστιάω, 7 entertain hospitably , ἔχω, 7 
have. Compare below the Aorists: εἵμην (δ 313), εἷλον (al-- 
ρέω, L take, ὃ 327,1), cioa, 7 placed (ὃ 269, D.,.and ὃ 275). 

Obs.—These verbs originally began with a consonant, and therefore 
had the Syllabic Augment: FepyaZ-o-par (δ 34, D.), é-Fepyat-o-pny ; 
oex-w (ὃ 327, 6), é- “σεχ-ο-ν. Then the consonant was dropped: 
i-epyal-o-pny, é-ex-o-y ; finally ee was regularly contracted to εἰ 
(δ 36): εἰργαζ-ό-μην, εἶχ-ο-ν. 

§ 237. ἑορτάζω, I celebrate, has the Augment in the second vowel: 
éwprazov for ἡόρταζον (compare ὃ 37, Ὁ. 2). Verbs which origin- 
ally began with a digamma (§ 34, D.), consequently with a con- 
sonant, have the Syllabic Augment in spite of their initial vowel : 
ἁνδάνω, I please, ἑ-άνδανον ; οὐρέω, I make water; ὠθέω, I push ; 
ὠνέομαι, I buy (§ 275). Both Augments, Byllabic and Temporal, 
are combined in ὁράω, I see, ἑώραον (ἑώρων); ἀν-οίγ-ω, I open, 
av-iwy-o-v. 


Rg 238. Verbs compounded with a preposition have the 


§ 237. Dialects—Homer forms éwvoyde from οἰνοχοέω, I pour out 
wine ; ἑήνδανον (Herod. ἑάνδανον) and ἥνδανον from ἁνδάνω, 1 please. 
Compare § 34, D., 1 and 4. 


134. - I. THE PRESENT-STEM. - ᾿ς § 239; 


Augment immediately after the preposition: sic-pip-w, 7 
carry in, sic-é-pep-o-v ; προς-άγ-ω, 7 lead to, προς-ἤγ-ο-ν ; 
ἐκ, out of, becomes ἐξ before the Augment: é-iy-o-v, 7 
led out. @The true forms of ἐν, 7%, and σύν, with, altered 
by assimilation (ὃ 51) in the Present, appear again before 
e: ovA-Aéy-w, L collect, cvv-é-hey-o-v ; ἐμ-βάλλεω, 7 invade, 
ἐν-έ-βαλλ-ο-ν. 

The final vowel of a preposition is elided: ἀπ-έ-φερ-ο-ν, 
IT carried away, from ἀπο-φέρ-τω ; only περί and πρό never 
lose their final vowel; but πρό is often contracted with «: 
πρού-βαινον, from προ-ἔ-βαιν-ο-ν, 7 marched on. 


§ 239. Excertions.—Some verbs, which are not merely compound- 
ed with prepositions, but derived from already compound nouns 
(Decomposita), have the Augment at the beginning: ἐναντιόομαι 
(from ἐναντίος, against), ἠναντιούμην (from οομην), I was against ; 
poet. ἤναρον, from ἐναίρω, I slay; παῤῥησιάζομαι (from παῤῥησία, 
Freedom of speech), ἐπαῤῥησιαζόμην, I spoke freely ; but the majority. 
nevertheless have it in the middle: ἐκκλησιάζω, I assemble, from 
ἐκκλησία, assembly, ἐξεκλησίαζον ; ὑποπτεύω, I suspect, from ὕποπτος, 
suspicious, ὑπώπτευον ; κατηγορέω, I accuse, κατηγόρουν (from cov). 
παρανομέω, I act contrary to law (from παρά-νομος, contrary to law), 
has irregularly παρηνόμουν (cor). 


§ 240. Many prepositions have in some compotnds so far lost their 
distinctive meanings that the verbs are treated as simple: καθεύδω, 
T sleep, ἐκάθευδον, yet καθηῦδον also; καθίζω, I sit, ἐκάθιζον.. Com- 
pare the verbs ἵημι (ἀφίημι, ὃ 818), ἕννυμι (ἀμφιέννυμι, ὃ 819, 5), 
ἥμαι (κάθημαι, ὃ 315, 2). Some verbs also have a double Aug- 
ment: ἀνέχομαι, I endure, ἠνειχόμην ; ἀνορθόω, I raise up, ἠνώρθουν 
(oov); ἐνοχλέω, IT encumber, ἠνώχλουν (cov); παροινέω, I act as ὦ 
drunkard, ἐπαρῴνουν. So also διαιτάω, I live (from δίαιτα, mode of 
life), ἐδιήτων (aor); διᾶκονέω, I serve, ἐδιηκόνουν (cor). 

§ 241. δύς, bad, ill, in composition is preceded by the Augment 
when the second word begins with a consonant or long vowel: 
δυοτυχέω, I am unfortunate, ἐδυςτύχουν (cov); ducwxiw, I make ὦ 
sour face, ἐδυςώπουν (cov); but short vowels receive the Temporal 
Augment after dic: δυςᾶρεστέω, I displease, δυςηρέστουν (cor). 

Compounds with εὖ generally have no Augment: εὐτύχουν (cor), 
I was fortunate ; but short vowels occasionally receive the Tem- 
poral Augment after εὖ : εὐηργέτουν (cov), together with εὐεργέτουν, 
from ebepyeréw, I do good. 


8. 243, 


CONTRACTED VERBS. 


135. 


§ 242. All other compounds have the Augment at the beginning : 
ἠθύμουν, from ἀθυμέω, I am without courage. 


tracted Verbs. 


C. Contracted Verbs 


§ 243. Verbs whose Present-Stem ends in a, ε, or Ο, reg- 
ularly contract these vowels in all forms of the Present- 
Stem with the connecting vowel, and hence are called Con- 


The laws of contraction given in §§ 36-38 


§ 243. Dialects——The Ion. dialect very often does not contract; but 
the three kinds of contracted verbs are treated differently. 

A. Homer inflects the a-Stems in three ways: 

1. The syllables regularly contracted by the Attic writers remain 
open and unchanged : ἀοιδιά-ει, he sings ; ναιετά-ουσι, they dwell; and 
the Fem. Part. ναιετάωσα for ναιετάουσα, with a remarkable change of 


ov to ὦ. 


΄ 


2. Contraction takes place: ἀρετῷᾷ = ἀρετά-ει, he thrives, from ἀρετάω ; 


προς-ηύδα = rpoc-nvda-e; from προς-αυδάω, I address, 


Sometimes ae 


Wecomes ἡ (not a): προς-αυδήτην (8 Dual Imperf.), sonac—also with 
regular accent—(from ὁρά-εαι) = Att. ὁρᾷ (2 Sing. Pres. Ind. Mid.). 

3. Extension instead of contraction takes place when a vowel of the 
same kind is inserted before the long one which results from con- 
traction : ὁράω, I see, contracted ὁρῶ, extended ὁρόω. 

a) This inserted vowel is usually short. Hence ὁράω is thus in- 


flected : 


Act, Pr. Ind, 


Subj. 
Opt. 
Inf. 
Part. 


Gen. 


Mid. 2. Sing. Ind. 


3. Plur. 

Opt. 3. Plur. 
Inf. 

8. Plur. Impf. 


ὁρά-ω 
ὁρά-εις 
ὁρά-ει 
ὁρά-ουσι 
ὁρά-ω 
ὁρά-ῃς 
ὁρά-οιμι 
ὁρά-ειν 
ὁρά-ων 
ὁρά-ουσα 
ὁρά-οντος 
ὁρά-ῃ 
ὁρά-ονται 
ὁρά-οιντο 
ὁρά-εσθαι 
ἑωρά-οντο 


. ὁρῶ 


ὁρᾷς 
ὁρᾷ 
ὁρῶσι 
ὁρῶ 
ὁρᾷς 
ὁρῷμι 
ὁρᾶν 
ὁρῶν 
ὁρῶσα 
ὁρῶντος 
ὁρᾷ 
ὁρῶνται 
ὁρῷντο 


ὁρᾶσθαι. 


ἑωρῶντο 


Hom. 


(( 
{{ 
( 


On Or ὁ. 
itp} 


Cr 
7 Ὁ 9S ὦ ὦ Ὁ Ὁ δ, 


On On Se On Om 
ἀπε ~ Sa Ἣν Q 
- - 


136 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 248. 


are observed. Paradigms of the three verbs τιμάω, ποιέω, 
δουλόω, are given on p. 110-113. 


Obs.—As the εἰ in the Infinitive εἰν is not original, aecy, oer v do 
not become @yv, ory, but ἄν, ουν (ὃ 37, Obs.). 


Dialects. 
Ὁ) sometimes long, 6. 9., 
ἡβά-ουσα Att. ἡβῶσα Hom. ἡβώωσα 
from Baw, Iam youthful ; so also from δράω, I do ; 
dpa-ovo. Att. δῶσι Hom. δρώωσι 
and from μνάομαι, I remember ; 
μνά-εσθαι Att. μνᾶσθαι Hom. μνάασθαι. 


After long vowels, the one following is sometimes shortened : 
μνα-όμενος Att. μνώμενος Hom. μνωόμενος 


ἡβά-οντες “ ἡβῶντες “ ἡβώοντες 


The metre chiefly determines which of the vowels should be long 
or short. Such forms, for instance, as ἀρετάᾳ (“~~”), ἡβόωντες (~~~), 


are inadmissible. : * 


In Herod., the Stems in a often pass over into the conjugation o 
the Stems in ε: dpéw (but ὁρᾷς, ὁρᾷ), dpéoper, ὁρέουσι, ὁρέοντες. Instead 
of eo we also find ew: ὁρέωντες. Homer also has ἤντεον = Att. ἤντων 
(from ἀντά-ω, I meet); χρεώμενος = Att. χρώμενος, making use of. 


- B. Stems in « fluctuate between the open and contracted forms. 
eo is often monosyllabic by synizesis (δ 39): ἐθρήνεον, I complained ; 
often also in Ionic contracted to ev: Hom. νεῦμαι = Att. viona, I 
return home. eov rarely becomes ev: ψεικεῦσι = νεικοῦσι, they quarrel. 
ee becomes ἡ irregularly in Hom.: ὁμαρτήτην (ὁμαρτέω, I meet with), 
ἀπειλήτην (ἀπειλέω, I threaten), δορπήτην (δὸρπέω, I sup), Inf. φορήμεναι --Ξ 
Att. φορεῖν, to carry. An utterly anomalous Infinitive is φορῆναι. 

The second ε in the 2 Sing. Mid. is sometimes dropped: μυθέαι for 
μυθέεαι (Att. μυθῇ, μυθεῖ, thou sayest); πωλέο = Att. ἐπωλοῦ, thou hadst 
intercourse ; sometimes ee are contracted to ev: μυθεῖαι. The first 
way is usual in Herod. Homer also prolongs « to εἰ without con- 
traction: ψεικείω = Att. νεικῶ ; ἐτελείετο = Att. ἐτελεῖτο (τελῶ, I complete). 


C, Stems in o are mostly contracted: γουνοῦμαι, I supplicate. Some 
have an extension like those in a: dpdwor(v) = Att. dpotor(r), they 
plow ; δηϊόφεν = Att. δηϊοῖεν, they would destroy ; ὑπγώσντας το ih ὑπ- 
vouvrac, the sleepers. 


icy Herod. o sometimes changes to ε, and with o is contracted to 
υ : ἐδικαίευν = Att. ἐδικαίουν, deemed right. 


8 246. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 137 


§ 244. Obs.—1. Monosyllabie Stems in ¢ admit only the contraction 
et. All syllables which, contracted, would. produce another 
sound, remain uncontracted. 


Stem πλε (Pres. πλέω, I sail, Inf. πλεῖν) * 


πλέεις πλεῖ, but πλέω 
πλέει πλεῖ, τ πλέουσι 
ἔπλεες ἔπλεις, i ἔπλεον 


δέω, I bind, forms an exception, having τὸ δοῦν (δέον), δοῦμαι, etc., 
to distinguish them from forms of δέω, I am in want of; δεῖ, it is 
necessary ; τὸ δέον, duty. 


2. Some Stems in a have a preference for y, which Sia admit in 
the place of ἃ : ζά-ω, I live, ζῇς, ζῇ, ζῆτε, ζῆν ; πεινά-ω, [ am hun- 
gry, πεινῆν ; διψά-ω, I thirst, διψῆν ; so also κνά-ω, I scratch 3 σμά-ω, 
I stroke ; ψά-ω, I scrape; and χρά-ομαι, I make use of. 

3. pryé-w, I freeze, has w and w for ov and ou: Inf. ῥιγῶν, Opt. ῥι- 
γῴην. 

4. λούω, I wash, lav-o, has a peculiar contraction; that is, the con- 
necting vowel after ov disappears: ἔςλου for é-Aov-e; λοῦ-μαι for 
λού-ο-μαι, etc. In like manner, οἴ-ο-μαι is often contracted to 
οἷ- μαι, I think, and the Imperf. ὠ-ό-μην to @-pny. © 


D. Distinction of the Present-Stem from the Verbal- 
Stem. 


§ 245. We call that part of a verb the Verbal Stem 
from the combination of which with the terminations of 
persons, tenses, moods, infinitives, and participles, consist- 
ently with the laws of euphony, all the forms of the verb 
may be explained: λυ, Pres. λύω, Perf. λέλυκα, Fut. λύσω ; 
τιμα, Pres. τιμάω, Perf: τετίμηκα, Fut. τιμήσω. 

Obs.—From the Verbal-Stem also nouns are formed by means of 
the nominal suffixes : λύ-σι-ς, loosing ; λυ-τήρ, looser ; λύ-τρο-ν, Te- 
demption fee ; τί-μη-σι-ς, valuation ; τιμη-τή-ς, censor. 

When -the Verbal-Stem can not be traced farther back, 

it is called a Root : Xv, and a verb formed from it, a /oot- 
Verb: Xéw. But when the Verbal-Stem is itself a Nom- 


§ 244. Dialects—2. For χρῆται Herod. has χρᾶται. 
4, Hom. 3 Sing. Imperf. λόε (for AoFe, ὃ 85, Obs.) --- λοῦε, ἔλουε.᾽ 


138 _ I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 246. 


inal-Stem formed by means of a nominal suffix, it is said 
to be derived ; ria is at once the Nominal-Stem of τιμή, 
_ honor, formed by the nominal suffix wa from the root τι, 
and the verb formed from it is a derwative one: τιμάω. 


Obs.— Roots are almost all of one syllable; derived Stems are of 
two or more syllables. 


§ 246. The Verbal-Stem is not always like the Present- 
Stem, but the Present-Stem is frequently an extension 
of the Verbal-Stem: Pres. λείπτω, 7 leave, Present-Stem 
λειπ, Verbal-Stem Ata (Aorist ἔλιπον). 

Such additions are called enlargements of the Present ; 
the Verbal-Stem divested of them is the pure Verbal- 
Stem. 

Obs.—Where the Verbal-Stem differs from the Present-Stem, nouns 


are usually formed from the former, not from the latter : Verbal- 
Stem guy, Present-Stem geuvy, substantive wes ( fug-a), adj. 


puy-a(d)-c, fugitive. 


§ 247. The relation of the Preaeni-Stem to the Verbal- 
Stem produces four classes of verbs with some subdi- 
visions. 

1. First Cuass (unenlarged). 

The Present-Stem zs like the Verbal-Stem. 

This comprises, first of all, the pure verbs, ὃ. ¢., verbs 
whose stem ends in a vowel (with the exception of a small 
number in ew, § 248, and many others besides: τιμά-ω, 
δουλότ-ω, παιδεύ-ω, ] educate ; b-w, I loose ; ri-w,L honor ; 
ἄρχ-ω, 7 rule ; , ἄγ-ω, va lead ; λέγ-ω, ay SAY. 


§ 248. 2. Seconp Crass (lengthened class). 

The Stem vowel is lengthened in the Present-Stem. 

This comprises several verbs whose Stem ends in a 
mute, and which in the Present have a diphthong or a long 
vowel, as: 


§ 248. Dialects—To these belongs the Hom. σεύω, I hurry, from the 
Stem ov. . 


8 249. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 139° 


φεύγ-ω, I flee, Pee ne guy (φῦὕγ-η, flight, Lat. fuga). 
λείπ-ω, I leave, dew 
πείθ-ω, I persuade, «cK 08 (πιθ-ανό-ς, persuasive). 
τήκ-ω, I melt, Mp =i σῶα 
rptB-w, I rub, CS ae 
But, besides these, there are also six verbs in εὐ, viz.: 
πλέω, 1 sail, Pure Stem πλὺυ 
aviw, I blow, (εἰ ἀν agg 
véw, I sail, ic sah SESE 
fiw, I flow, we by 
θέω, I run, eh eee 
xéw, I pour, o> Sees 


Obs—The v of these Stems was lengthened to εὖ, but resolved to 
eF before vowels (compare ὃ 35, D. 2); finally the F was dropped : 
πλυ-πλευω-πλεξω-πλέω. The diphthong appears in the substan- 
tives unresolved: πνεῦ-μα, breath; ῥεῦ-μα, stream. Compare 
§ 260, 2. 


§ 249. 3. ΤΉΙΕΡ Cass (T-class). 
The Present-Stem affixes τ to the Verbal-Stem. 
«his comprises only verbs whose ‘Pure Stems end in 


Labials, as: 


rinr-w, I strike, Pure Stem rv π (τύπος, stroké). 
βλάπτ-ω, 1 injure, «BX aB (βλᾶβη, ἡη)ι"}).. 
βάπτ-ω, I dip, “Bag (Bagn, a dip). 


and, besides— 
τίκτ-ω, I bring forth, “ “ rex (τέκος, child). 


The final consonant of the Pure Stem is called here, as 
in the verbs of the following class, the character. On the 
changes of sound, see § 45. 


" 


Other Examples. 


κόπτω, I cut, Stem κοπ 

κλέπτω͵ I steal, «rider 

κρύπτω, I hide, * “ κρυφοῦκρυβ 
θάπτω, I bury, “ rag (ὃ 54,0). 


§ 249. Dialects—The Stem βλαβ in Hom. has a Pres, Bd Berar, like 
class 1. 


140 1, THE PRESENT-STEM. § 250. 


§ 250. 4. Fourtn Cuass (I-class). 

The Present-Stem adds αι to the Verbal-Stem [{Uatin 
_Jug-i-0, Pure Stem jug]. The « is here subject to the 
various changes and transpositions discussed in §$ 55- 
58, viz. : : ; 

a) The Gutturals x, y, x form, with ., the group oo 
(New-Att. τ τὴ (δ 57): 


φυλάσσω, I guard, instead “of φυλακιω, Pure Stem φυλακ (φυλακή, ὦ 


guard). 

τάσσω, Larrange, ( ταγιω, « “Say (rayée, ὡς 
ranger). 

rapacow, I confuse, ( ταραχιω, “ pepe οὐδρῶχαι 
confusion). 


Other Examples. 
ἑλίσσω(κ), (1 roll. mpacow(y), I do. ὀρύσσω(χ), I dig. 
κηρύσσω(κ), I proclaim. σφάττω(γ), I slay. 


Obs.—The character of the Presents ἁρμόττω, 1 fit ; πάσσω, I scatter ; 
πλάσσω, I shape ; βράσσω, I seethe ; ἐρέσσω, I row ; πτίσσω, I stamp; 


βλίττω, I abstract honey, is a dental; πέσσω, I boil, has Stem πεῖ a 


irregularly. 


§ 251. ὁ) δ, and more rarely y, with ε, form Z (§ 58): 
ἕζομαι, J sit, instead of ἑδίομαι, Pure Stem ἑ ὃ (ἕδ-ος, seat, 
Latin sedles) ; κράζω, 7 cry, instead of kpayw, Pure Stem 
Kpay. 

Other Examples. 
φράζω(δ), 1 say. 62w(6), .1 smell. σχίζω(δ), I split. 
Obs.—Present-Stems in which express a sound have the Verbal- 
Stem in y: στενάζω, I sigh; οἰμώζω, I wail; οἰμωγ-ή, a wailing ; 
moreover, στάζω, I trickle ; στίζω, I prick, Lat. in-stig-o ; μαστίζω, 


§ 250. Dialects—The Stems of the Presénts ipacow, I whip; Xio- 
copa, I beseech ; κορύσσω, I arm; Herod. ἀφάσσω, I touch, end in Den- 
tals (Avr, κορυθ); Hom. évicow, I blame, has irregularly the Stem 


ἐνιπ. 


§ 251. Dialects—In all dialects, Presents in -~w# much more fre- 
quently have a Guttural for their character, in Hom. especially in 


ἀλαπάζω, I conquer; daifw, I divide ; ΒΟΡΉΜΕΕΙῈ ponder ; πολεμίζω, 1 


war; στυφελίζω, I strike, etc. 


. 


Bs: 
3 
ὃ 253.: PRESENT AND VERBAL STEMS. 141 


I whp,and some others. κλάζω, I call, Stem cay y, κλαγγ-ή, ὦ 
call; πλάζω, I mislead ; σαλπίζω, I blow a trumpet, have a Pure 
Stem in yy; νίζω, I wash, has irregularly the Stem v8. 


§ 252. 6) X with. forms AA (δ 56): 


βάλλω, I throw, for Baw, Pure Stem Badr (βέλ-ος, ὦ shot). 
ἅλλομαι, I leap, “ adropa, “ “ ἁλ [sal-i-o]. 
Τίλλω, 1 pluck, “ rdw, “ “ rer 


Other Examples. 
θάλλω, bloom. σφάλλω, I cause to stagger. στέλλω, I send. 
πάλλω, wield. ἀγγέλλω, I announce. ψάλλω, I play on the lyre. 


§ 253. d@) vand p throw the ¢ into the preceding syllable 
of the Stem (§ 55): 


reivw, 1 stretch, for revw, Pure Stem rev (τόν-ο-ς, a stretching, Latin 


tendo). 
φθείρω, I corrupt, ““ φθεριω, “ “ φθερ (φθορ-ά, corruption). 
φαίνω, I show, “ gavw, “ “ gar (ἀ-φᾶν-ής, moisible). 
. 
Other Examples. 
μαίνομαι, I rage. σπείρω, I sow. ἐγείρω, I awaken. 
αἴρω, I raise. ἀγείρω, I collect. ὑφαίνω, I weave. 


Obs.—If the Stem syllable has « or v for its vowel, this is length- 
ened by the retreating ἐ : κρίνω, I sever, gudge, from xpiv-w ; σύρω, 
I drag, from. ciip-w. 

A single Stem in ἃ also follows this formation, viz.: ὁ φελ, Pres. , 
ὀφείλω, I owe, for ὀφελιω, to ene it from ὀφέλλω, 1 increase, 
with the same Stem. 

The « unites immediately with the final vowels of the Stems καὺ 
and «dav, which then sacrifice their v (F): κα-ίω, 1 burn; κλα-ίω, 
Iweep. Additional forms in Attic are raw, κλάω (ὃ 35, Obs.). 


N.B.—The other less usual classes of verbs are given below. 


§ 253. Dialects—Homer joins « immediately with Vowel Stems: 
da-iw, I burn, Stem δα: μα- -ίομαι, I seek, Stem pa; va-iw, I dwell, Stem 
ya; and he uses ὀφέλλω in the sense of {Π} Att. ὀφείλω ; but, on the 
other hand, he has εἴλω, 1 press, from the Stem ἐλ for which one 
might expect ἔλλω (Class 4, ὦ). 


142 II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. ὃ 254. 


II. THe Strone or Second Aortst-STEeM. 


ὃ 254. The Strong or Second Aorist Active and Middle — 
is formed from the Strong Aorist-Stem, which is like the 


Pure Verbal-Stem, except the few cases named in § 257. 


Pres.  λείπ-ω, I leave. τύπτ-ω, I strike. βάλλ-ω, I throw. 
Stem λίπ τῦπ βὰἂλ 
Active. 
Aorist | ἔ-λίπ-ο-ν, 1 left. ἔ-τύπ-ο-ν, I struck, | ἔ-βᾶλ-ο-ν, I threw. 
Ind. ἔ-λιπ-ε-ς : ἔ-τυπ-ε-ς ἔ-βαλ-ε-- 
etc., like the Imperfects ἔλειπον, ἔτυπτον, ἔβαλλον 
: λίπ-ω τύπ-ω βάλ-ω 
Bukj. oe TUR-Y-C βάλ-ῳ-ς 
etc., like the Pres. Subjunctive λείπω, τύπτω, βάλλω 
Opt λίπ-οι-μι τύπ-οι-μι βάλ-οι-μι 
: λίπ-οι-ς τύπ-οι-ο ἢ βάλ-οι-ς 
etc., like the Pres. Optative λείποιμι, τύπτοιμι, βάλλοιμι 
λίπ-ε τύπ-ε βάλ-ε 
Imper. ° 
P eee TUT-E-TW » | Bad-é-rw 
etc., like the Pres. Imper. λεῖπε, τύπτε, βάλλε 
Infin. | λιπ-εῖν τυπ-εῖν βαλ-εῖν 
Part. λιπ-ών, λιπ-οῦσα, | τυπ-ών, τυπ-οῦσα, | βαλ-ών, βαλ-οῦσα, 
λιπ-όν, Gen. λιπ- | τυπ-όν,͵ Gen. τυπ- | βαλ-όν, Gen. βαλ- 
ὄντος ὄντος ὄντος 
Middle. 
[παῖς abet ae μην Sieh as ἐβᾳλτόνμην 
ἐ-τλίπ-ου ἐ-τύπ-ου ἐ-βάλ-ου 
etc., like the Imperf. ἐλειπόμην, ἐτυπτόμην, ἐβαλλόμην 
Subj. ise τύπ-ω-μαι ᾿ βάλτ-ω-μαι 
λίπτ-ρ. τύπ-ῃ βάλ-ῃ 
etc., like the Pres. Subj. λείπωμαι, τύπτωμαι, βάλλωμαι 
Ovt λιπ-οί-μην τυπ-οί-μην βαλ-οί-μην 
PY λίπ-οι-ο τύπ-οι-ο | Bad-ot-0 ; 
etc., like the Pres. Opt. λειποίμην, τυπτοίμην, βαλλοίμην 
λιπτοῦ - τυπ-οῦ βαλ-οῦ 
Imper. , 
ΡῈ ΩΝ ἢ τυπ-ἔ-σθω Bad-é-c8w 
etc., like the Bres. Imper. λείπου, τύπτου, βάλλου 
Infin. =| λιπ-ἔ-σθαι τυπ-έ-σθαι βαλ-ἔ-σθαι 
Part. λιπ-ό-μενο-ς, ἡ, O-v | τυπ-ό-μενο-ς, ἡ, ὁ-» | Bad-d-pEvO-C, ἡ, ο-ν 


: 
: 
4 


ον... 


τ. 257. II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. 143 


§ 255. 1. The J/nflexion of the Strong Aorist-Stem dif- 
fers from that of the Present-Stem (Imperfect and Present 


tenses) ofily in the accent of the following forms: the In- 


fin. Act. is perispome (λιπεῖν), the Infin. Mid. paroxytone 
(λιπέσθαι), the Part. Act. accents the O-sound (λιπών, λι- 
ποῦσα), the 2 Sing. Imper. Mid. is perispome (λιποῦ). 

2. The Aorist Middle has not, like the Present Middle, 
the meaning also of the Passive: thus ἐβαλόμην means only 
L threw for myself, but not I was thrown. 

On the Augment of the Indicative, §§ 234-242. 


§ 256. The Strong Aorist can be formed only from such 
verbs as have a Present-Stem different from the Pure 
Verbal-Stem, therefore not from the verbs of the First 
(unenlarged) Class (§ 247). Also it is not usually formed 


᾿ from many verbs of other classes, and scarcely occurs at all 


from any but Loot-Verbs (§ 245). 


Obs.—On the Aorists of the verbs δύ-ω and φύ-ω (class 1), see §§ 316, 
16, 17. 


§ 257. In a few verbs the Strong Aorist Stem is distinguished from 
the Pure Verbal Stem; viz., instead of ε of the latter, the Strong 
Aor. sometimes has &, by which rpéz-w, J turn, though belonging 
to the first class, has a Strong Aor.: ἔ-τρᾶπ-ο-ν (Impf. é-rpez-o-v), 
ἐ-τραπ-ό-μην. An isolated formation is Pres. rpwy-w, 1 gnaw, Aor. 
é-rpdy-o-v. day-w, I drive, likewise belonging to the first class, by 
doubling the Verbal-Stem forms the Aorist-Stem dy-ay, whence 
Ind. : ἤγ-ἄγ-ο-ν, Subj. ἀγ-άγ-ω, Inf. ἀγ-αγ-εῖν. 


ὃ 255. Dialects.—1. All the peculiarities enumerated-§ 233, D., ex- 
tend likewise to the Strong Aorist: 2 Sing. Subj. βάλησθα, 3 Sing. 
βάλησι, etc. The Inf. Aor. Act. ends in Hom. also in ἕειν instead of 
εἴν (βαλέειν). 

2. The Middle Aorist forms of the Stems «cra (δ 316, 4), βλη (§ 816, 
19), od ra (ὃ 316, 20), exceptionally have a Passive meaning. 


144 


ΤΠ, THE FUTURE-STEM. 


8.268. 


11. Tae Furure-Stem. 
§ 258. From the Future-Stem are formed the*F ut. Act- 


ive and Middle. 
First Future Second Future 
(The o Future). (Contracted Future). 

‘Pres. | λύω, Stem rH Pres. gaivw, I show, Stem φᾶν 

Fut. Stem (do Fut. Stem gave 

| Active. 

Indic. | λύσ-ω, I shall loose. | φἄνέω, &, I shall show. 

λύσ-εις, etc. φᾶνέ-εις, εἴς, etc. 

like the Pres. λύω like the Present ποιῶ 
Opt. | λύσ-οι-μι pave-oiny, oinv 
Tnfin. | λύσ-ειν φανέ-ειν, εἴν 
Part. | Masc. λύσ-ων pavé-wy, ὧν 

Fem. λύσ-ουσα φανέ-ουσα, οὖσα 

Neut. λῦσ-ον φανέ-ον, οὖν 

Gen. λύσ-οντος φανέ-οντος, οὔντος 

Middle. 
Indic.  λύσ-ο-μαι, I shall loose for φανέ-ο-μαι, οὔμαι, IL shall ap- 
myself. pear. 
_ | like the Present λύομαι like the Present ποιοῦμαι 

Opt. | λυσ-οί-μην φανε-οί-μην, οἰμην 
Infin. | λύσ-ε-σθαι φανέ-ε-σθαι, εἴσθαι 
Part. | λυσ-ό-μενος, ἡ, ον φανε-ο-μδνος, οὕμενος, ἡ, OV 


ὃ 257. Dialects—Hom., in the case of several Stems with p, forms 
the Strong Aorist by metathesis (§ 59), and by changing « into a: 
dépx-o-pat, I see, ἔ-δρακ-ον ; πέρθ-ω, I destroy, ἔ-πρᾶθ-ο-ν; in others by 
the syncope of ε (§ 61, ¢): ἐ-πτ-ό-μην (πέτ-ομαι, I fly), é-yp-e-ro (Stem 
éyep, Pres. class 4, d, ἐγείρω, I awake); Part. ἀγρ-ό-μενοι, assembled ; 
Inf. ἀγερ-ἔσθαι (Pres. class 4, d, ἀγείρω). 

Reduplication occurs in Homer in a great many Aorists: ἐ-πέ-φρᾶδ- 
o-y (Stem φρα ὃ, Pres. class 4, b, φράζω, I indicate); πέ-πῖθ-ο-ν (Stem 
tO, Pres. class 2, πείθω, I persuade) ; πε-πᾶλ-ὠν (Pres. class 4, ¢, πάλλω, 
I brandish); Aor. Mid. 3 Sing.: re-rdpz-e-ro (τέρπ-ο-μαι, I rejoice) ; 


8 260. Ill, THE FUTURE-STEM. 145 


§ 259. 1. The Inflexion of the Future-Stem is the same 
as that of the Present-Stem, ἡ. ¢., that of the o Future is 
the ordinary Inflexion, that of the contracted future is the 
Inflexion οἵ the contracted Present of ε Stems (§§ 231, 
232, and 243). 


§ 260. The o Future forms the Future-Stem by adding 
o to the Verbal-Stem: Av, Avo. All Stems ending in a 
vowel or a mute have the o Future. The σ, according to 
§ 48, with gutturals makes &, with labials ψ, and admits 
of no dentals before it (§ 49): ay-w, 7 drive, Fut. ἄξ-ω ; 
γράφ-ω, I write, Fut. γράψ-ω ; δ-ω, L sing, Fut. ᾷστω ; 
σπένδ-ω, libo, Fut. σπείστω for omevd-cw (ὃ 50). About 
θρέψω, Stem 7 peo, θύψω, Stem rv φ, and others, see § 54. 


2. Verbs of the second or extended class (ὃ 248) retain 
the extended Stem also in the Future: λείπτω, λείψτω ; the 
six verbs in ew mentioned in § 248 show their strefigthened 
form in the Fut., though it is not seen in the Present: πλέω, 
πλεύσομαι ; in like manner, κλαίω brings out its Pure Stem 
kXav in κλαύσω, and καίω in καύσω (ὃ 253). About xéw, 
see § 265. 

3. Of verbs of the third or T class, and of those of the 
fourth or I class (§ 249, etc.), the Pure Stem must be 
found in order to form the Future: τύπτω (class 4), Pure 
Stem τύ π, Fut. τύψω ; φυλάσσω, Pure Stem φυλακ, Fut. 


Stem φ ὃ (class 2), φείδομαι, Inf. Aor. πε-φιδ-ἐ-σθαι, also Fut. πε-φιδ-ή- 
σομαι. Isolated Aorists are: ἐ-κέ-κ(ε)λ-ε-το, he called, from κέλομαι; πέ- 
φν-ο-ν, I killed (Stem ev); τέ-τμ-ο-ν (I hit, Stem rep); τε-ταγ-ών 
(seizing, Stem ray, Lat. tango). ἠν-[π-ἅπ-ο-ν (I scolded, Pres. ivizrw), 
along with ἐν-ἔντπ-ο-ν, and ἠρύκ-ἄκ-ο-ν (I kept back, Pres. ἐρύκω), have 
the reduplication in the middle of the word. The reduplication in 
this case every where belongs to the Tense-Stem, and, as in the Per- 
fect-Stem (ὃ 273), is preserved in all the moods, in the Infin., and the 
Participle. The Indic. may add the Augment or omit it before the 
reduplication. (ὃ 234, D.) 


§ 259. Dialects.—About the contraction, see ὃ 243, Ὁ. 
G 


Ἵ46 Ill THE FUTURE-STEM. -  .8 261. 


φυλάξω: φράζω, Pure Stem pp α ὃ, Fut. φρἄσω. _ Accord- 
ingly, verbs ending in the Present in -cow or -rrw gener- 
ally make the Fut. in -Ew, and those having the Present 
in Zw generally have their Future in -ow. 

According to this rule, let the Future be formed of 
ἑλίσσω, 7 roll; κηρύσσω, L proclaim; πράσσω, 1 do ; 
σχίζω, 7 split; δικάζω, [ judge; ὁπλίζω, 7 arm; and 
let the Presents be found to the Futures ὀρύξω, σφάξω, 
βιἄσομαι, λογΐσομαι. 

Verbs with a dental character ending in the Present 
ἴῃ -σσω or -ττω, naturally (ὃ 250, Obs.) make the Future 
in -ow: πλάσω (Pres. πλάσσω, L shape), ἁρμόσω (Pres. 
ἁρμόττω, J fit); and, on the other hand, those with the 
character y, which have the Present in -Zw (ὃ 251, Obs.), 
make their Future in -Ew: στενάξω (Pres. στενάζω, 7 sigh); 
oriEw (Pres. στίζω, 7 prick). , 

§ 261. Vowel-Stems have their vowels long before o; 
a becomes a if preceded by «, ι, or. p (ὃ 41), in all other 
cases it becomes ἡ. Every other short vowel is changed 
into the corresponding long one: ἐάτω, [ leave, tdo-w ; 
ἰά-ομαι, J heal, ἰάστομαι ; Spa-w, 7 do, dpac-w ; but τιμά-ω, 
τιμήσ-τω ; βοά-ω, 7 cry out, βοήσ-ομαι ; ἐγγυά-ω, 7 hand 
OVEr, ἐγγυήσ-ω ; ποιέ-ω, ποιήστ-ω, δουλόω, δουλώσ-ω. 

The Stem χρα(χράω, J give an oracle ; χράομαι, 7) use) 
exceptionally has ἡ in the Future: χρήσω, χρήσομαι ; 
whereas ἀκροάομαι, L listen, has ἀκροάσομαι. 

_ Respecting the Future with a short vowel, see ὃ 301. 


§ 262. The contracted Future forms the Future-Stem 


§ 261. Dialects—The Ion. dialect has ἡ even after ε, 1, : πειρήσομαι, 
I shall endeavor. The Ep. dialect sometimes doubles the σ when the 
vowel is short: αἰδέσσομαι (αἰδέομαι, I feel shame). The Hom. Futures 
ἀλαπάξω, πολεμίξω, στυφελίξω, and others, with their Presents in -Zw, 
are explained in § 251, D. 

§ 262. Dialects.— Stem @¢p has in Hom. the Fut. θέρσομαι, Pres. 
θέρομαι, I grow warm ; Stem cep (Pres. class 4, d, κείρω, 1 shave), Fut. 
cépow; Stem φυρ, Pres. φύρω, [ mia, Fut. φύρσω. 


§ 264. Ill. THE FUTURE-STEM. 147 


by adding ε to the Verbal-Stem: gav, 9 ave. This form 

of the Future occurs in Stems ending in A, u,v, p; and 
the Stem vowel is short: νέμω, 2 distribute, Fut. νεμῶ ; 
ἀμύνω, L defend, ἀμῦύνῶῷ. Verbs of the seventh class here 
show their Pure Stem ($§ 252, 253): βάλλω, L throw, 
βαλῶ; φαίνω, pave ; κτείνω, 1 kill, KTEVW : φθείρω, φθερῶ ; 3 
ἀγγέλλω, ἀγγελῶ. 

According to this rule, let the Future be formed of 
σφάλλω, 7 cause to fall; στέλλω, 7 send; μαίνομαι, 7 rave ; 
αἴρω, 1 lift; and the Present (class 4) of σπερῶ, ποικιλῶ, 
σημανῶ, ἡδυνῶ. 


Exceptions.—The Stems «eX (κέλλω, class 4, ¢, J knock against) and 
κυρ (κυρέω, 1 meet) have the o form of the Future: κέλσω, κύρσω. 


Obs.—The contracted Future is properly a peculiar form of the σ 
Future, for gavé-w has arisen from gav-é-c-w (§ 61, δ), in which « 
is the connécting vowel. 


§ 263. Several Stems in ε (Pres. ew), ad (Pres. afw), and 
6 (Pres. Zw), throw out the o in.the Future. Those in ¢ 
and aé then contract the vowels ε and a with the connect- 
ing vowel: τελέ-ω, 7 complete, τελέσ-ω, τελέω, τελῶ; 1 Plur. 
τελέομεν,τελοῦ μεν (as in the Present); βιβάζω, L bring, 
βιβἄσ-ω, βιβάω, 336; 1 Plur. βιβάομεν, βιβῶμεν. To 
these also belongs éAdw, ἐλῶ, 2 Sing. ἐλᾷς, 3 Sing. ἐλᾷ, from 
the irregular Present ἐλαύνω, 7) drive ; compare § 321, 2. 

Stems in ἐδ after dropping the o insert ¢, which is con- 
tracted with the connecting vowel: κομίζω, 7 carry, Fut. 
Act. κομΐσ-ω, κομι-έσω, κομιῶ, 1 Plur. κομιέομεν, κομιοῦμεν 5 - 
Fut. Mid. κομιοῦμαι. 

This form of the Future is called the AZtéze. 


§ 264. Some verbs take an « after the o of the Future, 
which is contracted with the connecting vowel: πνέω, I 
breathe, Stem πνυ, πνευσοῦμαι ; πλέω, 7 sail, Stem πλυ, 


§ 263. Dialects.—The Futures in aw in the Hom. dialect are treated 
exactly like the Presents (ὃ 243, D. A.), hence ἐλόω, ἐλάᾳς, ἐλάᾳ. 


148 I, THE. FUTURE-STEM, § 265. 


πλευσοῦμαι along with πλεύσομαι ; φεύγω, 1] flee, Stem ovy, 


φευξοῦμαι and φεύξομαι. “This kind of Future, which oc- 
curs only in the Middle voice with an Active meaning, is 
called the Dorve. 


§ 265. Few verbs form their Future without any tense 
sion: χέω, J pour, Fut. Act. yéw, Mid. χέομαι, and so also 
among the irregular verbs ἔδομαι, L shall eat (ὃ 327, 4), 
and πίομαι, Z shall drink (ὃ 321, 4). 


§ 266. The Future Middle generally has a Middle sense, 
but in many verbs it has a Passive, and in not a few an 
Active meaning; the last is the case especially in verbs 
denoting a bodily activity: ddw, J sing; ἀκούω, 7 hear ; 
ἀπαντάω, IT meet; ἀπολαύω, I enjoy; βαδίζω, L walk 
(βαδιοῦμαι) ; βοάω, L call out; γελάω, [ laugh; οἰμώζω, 
1] bewail ; σιγάω and σιωπάω, 7 am silent; σπουδάζω, 7 
am zealous. Irregular verbs (δ 320, etc.) very frequently 
have a Middle Future with Active meaning. 


§ 265. Dialects—The Hom. βείομαι or βέομαι, I shall live, akin to 
βιόω, I live, is likewise formed without a tense sign. 


8 267. 


§ 267. From the Stem of the vane : 


Aorist are 


formed the Weak (or First) Aorist Active and Middle. 


Pres, λύ-ω φαίν-ω 
Stem λυ Pure Stem φᾶν 
, 1. o Form. 2. Supplementary Form. 
Stem of Weak Aorist λῦσᾶ |φην ἃ 
Active. Middle. — Active. Middle. 
Indic. é-hvoa, I loosed.| ἐ-λυσά-μην, I | ἔτφηνα, I ἐ-φηνά-μην 
loosed for myself.| showed. 
ἔ-λυσα-ς ᾿ἐ-τλύσω ἔ-φηνα-ς ἐ-φήνω 
ἔ-λυσε(ν) ἐ-λύσα-το ἔ-φηνε(ν) &-onva-To 
ἐ-λυσά-με-θον ἐ-φηνά-με-θον 
ἐ-λύσα-τον ἐ-λύσα-σθον ἐ-τφήνα-τον [ἐ-φήνα-σθον 
ἐ-λυσά-την ἐ-λυσά-σθην ἐ-φηνά-την ἐ-φηνά-σθην 
ἐ-λύσα-μεν ἐ-λυσά-μεθα ἐ-φήνα-μεν ἐ-φηνά-με-θα 
ἐ-λύσα-τε ἐ-λύσα-σθε ἐ-φήνα-τε ἐφήνα-σθε 
ἔ-λυσα-ν ἐ-λύσα-ντο ἔ-φηνα-ν ἐ-φήνα-ντο 

Subjunct. λύσω᾽ λύσω-μαι φήνω φήνω-μαι 

λύσῃς λύσῃ φήνῃς φήνῃ 
etc., like the Pres. Act. and Mid. 

Optative. λύσαι-μι λυσαί-μην φήναις:μι φηναί-μην 
λύσαι-ς OF λύσαι-ο φήναι-ς ΟΥ̓ φήναι-ο 
λύσειας : φήνειας 
λύσαι OF χύσαι-το φήναι ΟΥ̓ φήναι-το 
λύσειε(ν) λυσαί-μεθον φήνειε(ν) φηναί-μεθον 
λύσαι-τον λύσαι-σθον φήναι-τον φήναι-σθον.. 
λυσαί-την λυσαί-σθην φηναί-την φηναί-σθην 
λύσαι-μεν λυσαί-μεθα - φήναι-μεν φηναί-μεθα 
λύσαι-τε λύσαι-σθε φήναι-τε φήναι-σθε 
λύσαι-εν OF Δλύσαι-ντο φήναι-εν OF φήναι-ντο 
λύσει-αν φήνει-αν 

Imperat. | λῦσο-ν λῦσαι φῆνο-ν φῆναι 
λυσά-τω λυσά-σθω φηνά-τω φηνά-σθω 
λύσα-τον λύσα-σθον φήνα-τον φήνα-σθον 
λυσά-των λυσά-σθων φηνά-των φηνά-σθων 
λύσα-:τε λύσα-σθε φήνα-τε φήνα-σθε 
λυσά-ντων OY | λυσά-σθων ΟΥ̓ φηνά-ντων OY | φηνά-σθων ΟΥ̓ 
λυσά-τωσαν λυσά-σθωσαν φηνά-τωσαν φηνά-σθωσαν 

Infinitive. λῦσαι λύσα-σθαι φῆναι φήνα-σθαι 

Particip. | λύσᾶ-ς, doa, αν | λυσά-μενο-ς, ἡ, | φήνᾶ-ς, doa, ay | φηνά-μενο-ς, 
Gen. λύσαντ-ος ο-ν φήναντ-ος η, ο-»ν 


150 IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. ὃ 268. 


§-268. The characteristic vowel in the inflexion of the 
Weak Aorist is a, which in the 3 Sing. Ind. Act. becomes 
ε, but every where else remains unchanged before the per- 
sonal and modal signs. In the Subj. a is lengthened to 
w and η, whereby the endings become the same as those 
of the Present. In the Optat. Act., the forms with εἰ in 
the 2 and 3 Sing. and 3 Plur. are more common than those 
with a: λύσειας, λύσειε(ν), λύσειαν. In the 2 Sing. Im- 
perat. Act. ν is added, by which the a is rendered so ob- 
scure as to become o: λῦσο-ν ; and in 2 Imp. Mid. ε is 
added, which, with the a, makes a. In the 2 Sing. Ind. 
Mid. o ig thrown out, as in the Pres. and Fut., so that 
ἐ-λύσα(σ)ο becomes ἐλύσω, according to § 37. 

Obs. 1.—Three forms of the Weak Aorist are the same, the 3 Sing. 
Opt. Act., the Infin. Active, and the 2 Imperat. Mid.; but in ac- 
cent they differ; for, as the a of the Optat. is regarded as long 
(ὃ 229), the first of these three forms is always paroxytone: 
λύσαι, γράψαι (γράφω, I write), παιδεύσαι (παιδεύω, I educate); the 
Infin. always has the accent on the penultima: λῦσαι, παιδεῦσαι, 
γράψαι; the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid., where possible, has the accent 
on the antepenultima: παίδευσαι, ean γράψαι. 


Obs. 2.—The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Weak Aor. Act. is the same in ~ 


form as the Neut. Partic. Fut. λῦσον, but in Verbal-Stems of more 
‘than one syllable it differs from it by the accent: παίδευσον, but 
the Neut. Part. Fut. is παιδεῦσον (ὃ 229). 


8. 269. The o form of the Aorist differs from the Stem 


§ 268. Dialects.—In the Ion. dialect, the 2 Sing. Indic. Mid. fre- 
quently leaves the vowels uncontracted : ἐλύσαο. 

Some Aorists in Hom. take the vowels o and « instead of a: ἷξον, 
1 came, ἵξες ; ἐβήσετο (Baivw, I walk) ; δύσετο (he set or went down, δύω) ; 
so also the Imperatives ὄρσεο, arise ; ἄξετε, bring; οἷσε, bring; λέξεο, lie 
down ; πελάσσετον = πελάσατον, from πελάζω, I approach. 

§ 269. Dialects.—dagicow, I draw water, has in Hom. the Fut. ἀφύξω, 
but the Aor. ἄφυσσα. Irregular Hom. forms without o are: ἔχευα for 
ἔχευσα, from Pres. χέω, I pour; ἔκηα, 1 Plur. Subj. κήομεν or xeioper, 
Imperat. κῆον or κεῖον, Infin. κῆαι or κεῖαι, from Pres. καίω, [ burn ; Stem 
kav (Att. ἔκαυσα) ; ἔσσευα, Pres. σεύω, I drive away; the Infinitives 
ἀλεύασθαι or ἀλέασθαι, to avoid ; δατέασθαι, from daréopa, I distribute. 


" 


8 270. Iv. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. 151 


of the Future only by the addition of the a: Avo, λῦσα 
γραψ, γραψα ; φυλαξ, φυλαξα. Respecting the change of 
vowels and consonants before o, compare δὲ 260, 261. 
The irregular yéw (ὃ 265) has the Aorist tyea for ἔχευσα. 
Compare the irregularity in εἶπα, } spoke ; ἤνεγκα, L bore, 
§ 327,12 and 13. OF ΑΝ 


§ 270. The Stents in X, μ, v, p, forming their Future 
without o, reject this consonant also in the Weak Aorist, 
which gives rise to the supplementary form, for the vowel 
of the Stem is lengthened by compensation for the loss of 
the o. 


a after « and p becomes ἃ: Pres. περαίνω (class 4, d), I penetrate, Stem 
repay, Fut. περᾶνῶ, Aor. ἐ-πέρᾶνα (δ 41); 


otherwise n: Pres. φαίνω (class 4, d), Stem gav, Fut. 
pave, Aor. ἔ-φηνα. 
ε becomes ec: Pres. ἀγγέλλω (class 4, ¢), J announce, Stem 
ἀγγελ, Fut. ἀγγελῶ, Aor. ἤγγειλα. 
‘ ~ © Pres. νέμω (class 1), I distribute, Fut. νεμῶ, 
Aor, ἔ-νειμα. 


ος 
σι 


: Pres. κρίνω (class 4, d), I judge, Stem κριν, 
Fut. κρινῶ, Aor. ἔ-κρινα. 
ὔ ἐκ ἢ Ὁ: Pres. ἀμύνω (class 4, d), I defend, Stem 
ἀμυν, Fut. ἀμῦνῶ, Aor. ἤμυνα. 
Obs.—The Stems ἀρ (αἴρω, I lift) and aX (ἅλλομαι, I leap) have in 
the Indic. n because of the Augment: ἤρα, ἡλάμην, but in the 
other forms a: ἄρας, ἁλάμενος. ἃ instead of ἡ occurs in some 


eioa, I placed, is a defective poet. Aorist; the Hom. Infin. is ἕσσαι, 
Part. εἵσας and ἕσσας (avicac), ὃ Sing. Mid. ééscaro. On the doubling 
of theo, see ὃ 261, D.: λόεσσα (A0F-€-oca) = ἔλουσα (λούω, [ wash), with 
e'inserted. (Compare § 35, Obs.) 


§ 270. Dialects——1. Homer makes the Aorist of several Stems in 
A, μιν, ρ With o: ἔλσα, from εἴλω, I press ; the defective ἀπόερσα, I 
tore away. 

2. In the Mol. dialect, σ is assimilated to preceding X, μι ν, p; an 
example of it in Hom. is Gaskie for ὥφελ-σα = Att. ὠφείλα, Pres, ὀφέλλω, 
I increase. 

3. The Augment of the Hom. Aor. ἤειρα, Pres. εἴρω, 1 join, is quite 
irregular. Compare § 275, D. 2. 


152 IV. THE WEAK OR’ FIRST AORIST-STEM. § 271. 
few verbs: κερδαίνω, I gain; dpyaivw, I cause anger ; onpaivw, I 
indicate —ionpava along with ἐσήμηνα. .On the other hand, ἡ 
instead of a4, in spite of the p, occurs in rerpaivw, I bore, ἐτέ- 
τρηνα. 


§ 271. The Weak Aorist is the usual form in all verbs 
which, according to § 256, can not form the Strong Aorist, 
that is, in all derivative verbs and in verbs of the first 
class; but radical verbs of other classes, especially those 
with Stems in A, μ, v, p, also have the Weak Aorist. 

The Weak Aorist Middle, like the Strong one, has only 
a Middle sense, and is never Passive (§ 477, etc.). 


V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 


§ 272. From the Perfect-Stem are formed the Perfect 
and Pluperfect Active and Middle, and the third Future 
(Luturum exactum), which occurs only in the Middle. 


§ 273. The essential characteristic of the Perfect-Stem 
is the reduplication (compare wé-7ny-a with Lat. pe-pig-2), 
which generally takes the first place; but in verbs com- 
pounded with prepositions is put, like the Augment, after 
the preposition (§ 238): Aé-Av-Ka, but ék-Aé-Au-Ka. 

The reduplication belongs to the Perfect-Stem, and is 
therefore, unlike the Augment, preserved in all the moods, 
infinitives, and participles (compare 258, D.). 

In verbs beginning with a consonant, it consists in the 
initial consonant with « being placed before the Stem: 
Stem Av, Perfect-Stem AeAv, 1 Sing. Perf. Ind. Act. 
λέ-λυ-κα. ' 


§ 278. Dialects—The reduplication can not, like the Augment, be 
omitted in the Epic dialect; déy-~a forms an exception (8 Plur. 
déx-ara), though we also find δέ-δεγ-μαι, 1 expect or receive, Part. 
de-dey-pévoc, from Pres. δέχτο-μαι (compare ὃ 316, 34). Some verbs 
beginning with a vowel do not lengthen it in the Perfect in the New- 
Tonic dialect. 


§ 279. V. THE PERFECT-STEM. - 153 
* T. Active. 
Present λύ-ω paiv-w 
Stem Av Pure Stem φᾶν 
Perfect Stem λελυ πεφην 


Perfect: 1. Weak form 


2. Strong form 


Indic. 


Τλέ-λῦ-κ-α, 1 have loosed. 


λέ-λυ-κ-α-ς 
-λέ-λυ-κ-ε-(ν) 
λε-λύ-κ-α-τον 
λε-λύ-κ-α-τον 
λε-λύ-κ-α-μεν 
λε-λύ-κ-α-τε 
λε-λύ-κ-ἄ-σι(ν) 


πέ-φην-α, I have appeared. 
πέ-φην-α-ς 

πέ-φην-ε(ν) 

πε-φήν-α-τον 

πε-φήν-α-τον 

πε-φήν-α-μεν 

πε-φήν-α-τε 

πε-φήν-ἄ-σι(ν) 


Subj. 


λε-λύ-κ-ω 


λε-λύ-κ-ῃ-ς 


etc., like the Subj. Predetit ὃ 282. 


πε-φήν-ω 
πε-φήν-ῃ-ς 


Optat. | λε-λύ-κ-οι-μι OF λελυκοίην | 
etc., like the Optat. Present, § 232. 


πε-φήν-οι-μι OY πεφηνοίην 


Tape | λέ-λυ-κ-ε | 
etc., like the iets bi Present, § 232. 


πέ-φην-ε 


Infin. λε-λυ-κ-ἔέναι πε-φην-ἔναι 
Partic. | M. λε-λυ-κ-ώς πε-φην-ώς 

F. λε-λυ-κουῖα | πε-φην-υῖα 

Ν. λε-λυ-κ-ός πε-φην-ός 

en. λε-λυ-κ-ότ-ος πε-φην-ότ-ος 
(Inflexion, ὃ 147, 2.) 
Pluperfect. 

Indic. | &-de-Ab-n-e-v, Thad loosed, ἐ-πε-φήν-ει-ν, Thad appeared. | 


é-e-AU-K-Et-¢ 

ἐ-λε-λύ-κ-ει 

ἐ-λε-λύ-κ-ει-τον 
ἐ-λε-λυ-κ-εί-τὴην 
ἐ-λε-λύ-κ-ει-μεν 

ἐ-λε-λύ-κ-ει-τε 

ἐ-λε-λύ-κ-ε-σαν OF ἐλελύκεισαν 


ἐ-πε-φήν-ει-ς 

ἐ-πε-φήν-ει : 

ἐ-πε-φήν-ει-τον 
ἐ-πε-φην-εί-την 
ἐ-πε-φήν-ει-μεν 

ἐ-πε-φήν-ει-τε 

ἐ-πε-φήν-ε-σαν ΟΥ̓ ἐπεφήνεισαν 


ψ. ἐς 


G 2 


154 τ y. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 274, 


II. Middle and Passive. 


Perfect. " 
| Indic. Aé-b-prar, 1 have loosed λε-λύ-μεθον λε-λύ-μεθα 
Sor myself, or have 
‘~ been loosed. 
λέ-λυ-σαι λέ-λυ-σθον λέ-λυ-σθε 
λέ-λυ-ται λέ-λυ-σθον λέ-λυ-νται 
Subj. λε-λυ-μένος, ὦ, He, ἢ, etc., § 315. 
Optat. | Ae-Av-pévoc, εἴην, εἴης, εἴη, etc., ὃ 315. 
Imperf. | λέ-λυ-σο : λέ-λυ-σθον λέ-λυ-σθε 


λε-λύ-σθω λε-λύ-σθων - ||. λε-λύ-σθων ΟΥ̓ 
| λε-λύ-σθωσαν 


Infin. λε-λύ-σθαι 


Partic. | λε-λυ-μένο-ς, ἡ, ο-ν 


Pluperfect. 


Indic. ἐ-λετλύ-μην, 1 had | ἐ-λε-λύ-μερον  ἐ-λε-λύ-μεθα 
loosed for myself, 

or had been loosed. 
ἐ-λέ-λυ-σο ἐ-λέ-λυ-σθον ἐ-λέ-λυ-σθε " 


ἐ-λέ-λυ-το ἐ-λε-λύ-σθην ἐ-λέ-λυ-ντο 


Future Perfect. 


Indic. λε-λύ-σ-ο-μαι, 1 shall have been loosed. 
λε-λύ-σ-ῃ, etc., like the usual Fut. Mid. (δ 258). 


—* 
Opt. λε-λυ-σ-οί-μην | Inf, λε-λύ-σ-ε-σθαι | Part. λε-λυ-σ-ό-μενο-ς 


§ 274. The following points, however, are to be ob- 
served : 


1. An aspirate, according to ὃ 53, ὦ, is represented by the 


§ 274. Dialects—The full reduplication, in spite of the initial ρ, 
occurs in the Hom. ῥε-ρυπω-μένο-ς, soiled ; on the other hand, the Per- 
fects ἔμ-μορ-α (Pres. μείρομαι, class 4, d, I obtain) and ἔσ-σὔ-μαι (Pres. 
σεύω, Class 2, I hasten), instead of μέμορα, σέσυμαι, are treated like Stems 
with p. 


7 


§ 275. V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 155 


corresponding tenuis: Stem ywpe, χωρῶ, L retreat, κε- 
χώρητκα ; Stem θυ, θύω, 7 sacrifice, τέτθυτκα ; Stem φαν, 
πέ-φην-α. 

2. When a verb begins with two consonants, only the 
first appears in the reduplication, and even this only when 
it is a mute followed by X, μ, v, or p: Stem γ ρα φ, γράφω, 
I write, yé-ypag-a; Stem wrAay, πλήσσω, L strike, πέ- 
πληγ-α; Stem πινυ, πνέω, 7 breathe, πέ-πνευ-κα. 

3. In every other case a Stem beginning with two con- 
sonants takes only « for its reduplication: Stem κτεν, 
κτείνω, L kill, t-xrov-a; Stem Z ητ ε, ζητῶ, 7 seck, ἐ-ζήτητκα. 


4, Stems beginning with p likewise have only ε, after 
cat the p is doubled: Stem pi 9, ῥίπτω, 7 throw, ἔῤ-ῥιφ-α 
(compare δὲ 62, 234). 


_ Exceptions.—Verbs beginning with yy, yA, and sometimes those 
beginning with AX, have a simple « for their reduplication. Stem 
γνω, ἔ-γνω-κα, 1 have come to know; Stem BNMacre (βλαστῶ, I 
germinate), ἐ-βλάστη-κα. The Stems cra (κτῶμαι, I acquire) and 

, fva,on the other hand, have κέ-κτη-μαι and μέ-μνη-μαι, 1 remem- 
ber, me-min-t. Compare πέ-πτω-κα, I have fallen, and πέ-πτα-μαι, 
Lam spread out, §§ 319, 3, 3827, 15. 

Instead of the reduplication εἰ appears in εἴ-ληφ-α, 1 have taken (δ 
322, 25); et-Any-a, 1 have obtained (δ 322, 27); εἴ-λοχα (from λέγω, 1 
gather)  δι-εἰ-λεγ-μαι (from διαλέγομαι, I converse) ; εἴ-ρη-κα, I have 
said (§ 327,18); and in the aspirated εἵ-μαρ-ται, it is fated, Stem 
prep. 


§ 275. Initial vowels are lengthened as in the case of the 


§ 275. Dialects.—1. The Attic reduplication is more frequent in Ho- 
mer, as: ἀρ-ήρο-ται, from ἀρόω, I plough ; ἀλ-άλη-μαι, from ἀλά-ο-μαι, I 
wander ; ἄρ-ηρ-α, I am joined, Stem ap; ὄδ-ωδ-α, I smell, 6fw, compare 
od-or ; ὄὕπ-ωπ-α, I have seen, from the Stem 67; and with a ν inserted : 
ἐμν-ήμυ-κα, from the Pres. ἠμύ-ω, 1 droop the head. Terod. has ἀρ-αίρη- 
κα, from αἱρέω, I take. 

2. Instead of εἴ-ωθα, Hom. also has é-w@a, which is the only form 
used by Herod. From the Stem ἐλπ (originally Fed) ἔ-ολπ-α, 1 
hope ; from Stem ἐργ (Fepy), ἔ-οργ-α, 1 have done. From the Stem 
ép (Lat. sero), Pres. ciow, ὃ Sing. Pluperf. Mid. ἔερτο, Part. Perf. Mid. 


156 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. | § 276. 


Temporal Augment (§ 235): Stem ὀρθο, ὀρθῶ, I raise 
up, ὥρθω-κα. The verbs mentioned in § 236 have εἰ here 
also: εἵλιγμαι, Pres. ἑλίσσω, L roll. 


1. Some Stems beginning with a, ε, or o exceptionally take what is 
called the Attic reduplication instead of the mere lengthening of 
the vowel. This reduplication consists in the initial vowel with 
its following consonant being repeated, and the vowel of the sec- 
ond syllable being lengthened: Stem ἀλιεῴφ (ἀλείφω, class 2, I 
anoint), ἀλ-ήηλιφ-α ; Stem ax o, ἀκούω, I hear, ἀκ-ἠκο-α (for ἀκήκοξα, 
§ 35, Obs.), but Mid. ἤκουσμαι; Stem ὀρυχ (ὀρύσσω, class 4, 1 dig) 
6p-wpvx-a; Stem ayep (ἀγείρω, class 4, d, I collect), ἀγ-ήγερ-κα; 
Stem ἐλα (Pres. ἐλαύνω, I drive, § 321, 2), ἐλ-ἠλᾶ-κα, Mid. ἐλ-ήλα- 
μαι; Stem ἐλεγχ, Pres. ἰλέγχω, L refute (class 1), Perf. “Mid. ἐλ-ήλεγ- 
μαι (compare ὃ 286, Obs.) ; ἐγρ-ήγορ-α, I am awake, from the Stem 
éyep, Pres. ἐγείρω, I awaken (class 4, d), is irregular. 

2. The Stems ἁλω (ἁλίσκομαι, ὃ 324, 17,1 am made prisoner), ay 
(ἄγνυμι, ὃ 319, 13, T break), εἰ κ (not used in the Pres., ὃ 317, 7), 
and ®ve (ὠνέομαι, I buy) are likewise irregular; but originally 
they had an initial consonant (ὃ 34, D.): ἑ-άλω-κα, ἔ-ἄγ-α, ἔ-οικ-α, 
ἐ-ώνη-μαι; the Stem dvocy. (ἀνοίγω, I open) has av-iwy-a. To 
these may be added εἴ-ωθ-α, I am accustomed, from the Stem 26, 
originally Fe @ (compare δὲ 236, 237). . 


- 


1. The Perfect Active. 


§ 276. The terminations of the principal tenses are ap- 
pended to the Perfect-Stem in the Indicative by means of 
the connecting vowel a. The first person has no personal 
ending at all; in the third, a is changed into «. ‘The Sub- 
junctive, Optative, and the Imperative (which rarely oc- 
curs) have the vowels of the Present; the Infinitive ends 
in. -éva (always paroxytone), and the Participle in. -ώς, 
-via, -ός, Gen. -ότος (Stem o7, ὃ 188). 


ἐερμένος (compare ὃ 270, D., 8). The following two are defective 
Perfects in Hom. : ane: (a): it gushes forth ; ἐν-ἠνοθ-ε(), i as upon. 
Both also occur as Pluperfects. 


§ 276. Dialects—In the Hom. dialect, the Part. Perf. Act. sometimes 
has w instead of 0: τεθνηῶτος = Att. τεθνηκότος (from θνήσκω, 1 dite) ; ᾿ 
κεκληγῶτες for κεκληγότες, calling, from Pres. κλάζω. . 


§ 278. THE PERFECT ACTIVE. | 167 - 


Obs.—The Subjunctive and Optative are ποῦ unfrequently formed 
periphrastically by the Participle with the corresponding forms 
of εἰμί, 1 am. 

§ 277. The Perfect Active is formed in two different 


ways: 
1. THE Strone PERFEcT (SECOND PERFECT) 


is formed, like the Strong Aorist, directly from the Stem: 
Stem πραγ, Pres. (Class 4, a) πράσσω, L do, Perf. πέ- 
apay-a. The Strong Perfect, like the Strong Aorist, oc- 
curs almost exclusively in the case of radical verbs (δ 245), 
and is generally the older and rarer form. 


κ᾿ 278. The following changes of vowels are to be ob- 
served in its formation: 7 
a after p becomes ἃ: Stem cp ἄγ, Pres. κράζω, I ) 
scream, Perf. κέ-κρᾶγ-α. 
& otherwise becomes ἡ : Stem + a y, Pres. πλήσσω, 
1 strike, Perf. πέ-πληγ-α. 
Stem 9 av, Pres. φαίνω, I 


show, Perf. πέ-φην-α. , Compare 
ε becomes o: Stem στρεφ, Pres. στρέφω, | ὃ 40 to § 49. 
ae Ἢ I turn, Perf. ἔ-στροφ-α. 
ι ἐν οἱ: Stem Ata, Pres. λείπω, I 
leave, Perf. λέ-λοιπ-α. 
ee" 3 ev: Stem guy, Pres. φεύγω, I 


Slee, Perf. wé-gevy-a. ΔΝ 


The change of a into w is quite isolated: Stem pay, 
Perf. ἔῤ-ῥωγα, 7 am torn, Pres. ῥήγνυ-μι (§ 319, 24), and 


§ 277-280. Dialects.—The Hom. dialect is partial to the Strong Per- 
fect ; the aspiration does ‘not occur in it: Stem com (κόπτω), κεκοπώς. 
The Part. πε-φυζ-ότ-ες, from Stem guy (φεύγω), is quite an isolated 
Hom. form. Hom. forms the Weak Perfect only from Vowel-Stems, 
and even here he has sometimes strong secondary forms: Stem ¢v, 
3 Plur. Perf. Act. πεφύᾶσι = Att. πεφύκασι, from φύω, 1 beget ; Stem core 
(xoréw, I am angry), Part. Perf. κεκοτηώς, ὃ 317, Ὁ. In the Fem. Part. 
Perf. shortenings of vowels often occur: Stem ἀρ, Masc. Part. Perf. 
ἀρ-ηρ-ώς, joined, Fem. ap-ap-via; Stem Oar (θάλλω, 1 bloom), Mase. 
Part. Perf. τε-θηλ-ώς, Fem. τε-θᾶλ-υἵα. The Perf. ré-rpny-a, 1 am restless, 
Pres. ζαράσσω, I disturb, Stem r[a]pay, is irrégular. 


158 V. THE. PERFECT-STEM. _ § 279. 


so also that of ε into w: Stem 26, Perf. &-w6-a, 7 am ac- 
customed (§ 275). With the Attic reduplication, and in 
some other cases also, there is no lengthening of the vowel: 
Stem dpvy, op-wpvy-a, Pres. ὀρύσσω, 7 dig; γέ-γρᾶφ-α, 
from γράφω, L write. 

§ 279. Some Stems ending in the consonants x, y, 7, β, 


change these into the corresponding aspirates, generally ὁ 


without any lengthening of the vowels: 


Stem κηρυκ, Pres. κηρύσσω, I proclaim, Perf. κε-κήρυχ-α. 


ma ay, Ὁ ἄγω, I lead, “Ὁ ἧἦχα (aynox-a). 
PG: ἐκ σῶς, “Ὁ κόπτω,͵ I hew, “ κέ-κοφ-α. 
"Ἢ “ βλᾶβ,: “ βλάπτω, I hurt, “Ὁ βέ-βλᾶφ-α. 


In spite of the aspiration, the vowels are changed in 
ké-kAog-a, Stem κλεπ, Pres. κλέπτω, 7 steal ; πέ-πομφ-α, 
Stem πεμπ, Pres. πέμπω, 7 send ; ré-rpop-a, Stem τρεπ, 
τρέπω, J twrn, which is in form the same as the Perf. of 
the Stem τρεφ (Pres. τρέφω, 7 nourish); ci-hoy-a (com- 
pare ὃ 274), Stem λ εγ, Pres. λέγω, 7 gather. 

- Obs. 1.—Few verbs have both forms with and without the aspirate: 
the Stem πραγ (Pres. πράσσω, I do) has both, πέ-πρᾶγ-α (intran- 
sitive, J have fared) and πέ-πρᾶχ-α (transitive, I have done); Stem 
avocy, Pres. ἀνοίγω, I open, Perf. av-éwy-a (intrans., 1 stand open) 
and ἀν-έῳχ-α (transit., J have opened). 

2. The aspirated form of the Perfect, contrary to § 277, occurs also 

in a number of derivative verbs: Stem ἀλλαγ, ἀλλάσσω, I 
change, from ἄλλος, Perf. ἤλλαχ-α. 


§ 280. 2. Toe Weak Perrect (First PERFECT) 
is formed from the Stem by the insertion of ck: Stem λυ, 
Aé-Au-x-a. The Weak Perfect is the more recent form, 
and with all Vowel-Stems it is the only one in use, while 
it is the more common with Stems ending in τ, ὃ, 0, and 
those in X, p, v, p. 

Obs.—The only complete Strong Perfect of a Vowel-Stem in Attic 

_ prose is ἀκήκοα (ὃ 275, 1); but compare § 317. 

§ 281. In regard to the vowel, the Weak Perfect follows 

the o Future (§§ 260, 261): Stem dpa, δράσω, dé-dpg-xa ; 


§ 283. THE PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 159 


Stem ripa, τιμήσω, τετίμηκα ; Stem πλυ, πλεύσω, πέ- 
πλευκα ; Stem πιθ (πείθω, 7 persuade), πείσω, πέπεικα. 
χέω, 7 pour, Perf. κέχῦὕκα, is an exception (ὃ 265). For 
other exceptions, see § 301. 

Stems in +, ὃ, 8 throw out these consonants before a, 
without any other change: Stem coped, κομίζω, 7 carry, 
κεκόμικα. 

§ 282. The monosyllabic Stems in ἃ, ν, ρ, having ε in the Stem 
syllable, change this « in the Weak Perf. into a: Stem orev, 
στέλλω, I send, Perf. -crad-ca; Stem φθερ, φθείρω, I destroy, Perf. 
é-@0ap-ca. Several in ν᾿ throw out the v: Stem κρῖν, κρίνω, 1 
judge, Perf. κέ-κρί-κα; Stem eri v, κλίνω, I incline, Perf. κέ-κλγεκα:; 
Stem πλῦ ν, πλύνω, I wash, Perf. πέ-πλύ-κα ; Stem rev, reivw, 1 
stretch, Perf. ré-rd-ca. Wherever v is not thrown out before x, it 
becomes, according to ὃ 51, a nasal y: Stem gay, φαίνω, I show, 
Perf. πέ-φαγ-κα. 

Other Stems of this kind, and some in p, admit of metathesis § 59): 
Stem Bad, βάλλω, 1 throw, Perf. βέ-βλη-κ-α; Stem κα μ᾽ κάμνω, 1 
grow tired, Perf κέ-κμη-κ-α 6 321, 9). 


2. The Pluperfect Active. 

§ 283. The Pluperfect takes. the Augment before the 
Perfect-Stem ; its terminations are those of the historical 
tenses. Between the Stem and the termination the diph- 
thong εἰ steps in, which in the 3 Plur. is reduced to «. 

Obs.—The 8 Plur. in εἰσαν is rare and more modern. 

The Temporal Augment of verbs beginning with a vowel 
is not recognizable, because their Perfect-Stem has already 


§ 282. Dialects—The Hom. μέ-μβλω-κα for μέ-μλω-κα, from the Stem 
pox (Aor. ἔμολον, I went), is explained by metathesis. Compare δὲ 51, 
D., 324, 12. 

§ 283. Dialects.—The Ionic dialect has the antiquated endings of 
the Pluperf.: 1 Sing. ea, 2 Sing. eac, 3 Sing. ee(v), contracted εἰ, εἰν, 
or 7; the 2 Plur. New-Ion. ea-re. Hom. ἐτε-θήπ-εα, I was astonished ; 
3 Sing. δεδειπνήκ-ειν, from δειπνέω, I dine, 

ἐ-μέμηκ-ον (Perf. μέμηκα, I bleat) and ἤνωγον, along with ἠνώγεα (Perf. 
. ἄνωγα, I compel), are formed quite irregularly, according to the man- 
ner of Imperfects. 


100 ' V. THE PERFECT-STEM.- - § 284. 


ὦ long vowel:. Verbal-Stem ay, ἄγω, 7 drive, Perfect- 
Stem 7x, #y-e-v. The Syllabic Augment is often omit- 
ted. The 1 and 3 Sing. in the older Attic dialect have ἡ 
instead of εἰ and εἰν, as ἐ-τλελύκ-η. 

The formation ofthe Pluperfect is exactly the same as 
that of the Perfect, and, like it, it is either strong or weak, 
and has the vowel long or short, or ἀθομαρρυ, 


§ 284. 8. Lhe Perfect Middle and Passive 


can be formed only in one way, that is, by appending the 
personal endings of the principal tenses of the Middle, with- 
out any connecting vowel, to the Perfect-Stem, ὁ. ¢., to the 
reduplicated Verbal-Stem: Stem Av, Perf. Mid. dé-Av-nar. 

The Infinitive and the Participle always have the accent 
on the penultima: λελύσθαι, λελυμένος ; Stem wade, 
πεπαιδεῦσθαι, from παιδεύω, L educate. 


§ 285. The vowels are treated in the same way as in the 
Weak Perfect: Stem ripa, τετίμηκα, τετίμημαι ; ; Stem 718, 
πέπεικα, πέπεισμαι ; Stem φθερ, ἔφθαρκα, ἔφθαρμαι ; ; Stem 
Bax, βέβληκα, BEBAnua. The verbs τρέφω, L nourish, 
τρέπω, L turn, and στρέφω, 77 turn, also take a instead of ἐς 
τέτθραμ-μαι, τέττραμ-μαι, ἔ-τστραμ-μαι. 

§ 286. The final Consonants of Consonantal-Stems change 
according to the general laws of sound (§§ 45-49) : 


§ 284. Dialects.—In the Hom. dialect, the o of the 2 Sing. Perf. and 
Pluperf. Mid. is sometimes thrown out between two vowels: μέμγηαι 
Ξ- μέμνησαι (meministi), contracted μέμνῳ; so also in the New-Ionic 
the Imperat. μέμνεο for μέμνησο. : 

§ 285. Dialects—The Hom. πέ-πρω-ται, Stem zop (Strong Aorist 
ἔπορον, I gave), is explained by metathesis.. The following have a 
short vowel: rérvypa, from τεύχω, I prepare, ὃ Plur. τετεύχαται ; πε- 
φυγμένος, from φεύγω, I flee; ἔσσὕὔμαι, from σεύω, 1 hasten ; ὃ instead of 
εὖ : πε-πνῦ-μαι, from πνέω, ὃ 248. 

§ 286. Dialects—The 0 of the Stem κορυ θ (κορύσσω, J arm) remains 
unchanged in Homer: κε-κορυθ-μένος. αἰσχύνω, 1 put to shame, has. 
ἤσχυμμαι. 


§ 287. . THE PERFECT MIDDLE.  — 161 


1. Before all terminations beginning with μ 


every guttural becomes y: Stem πλεκ, πλέκω, I twist, πέ-πλεγ-μαι; 

“dental " o: Stem 710, πείθω, I persuade, πε-πείσ-μεθα ; 

“labial (τ μὲ: Stem ypag, γράφω, I write, ye-~ypap-pévoc. 

Obs.—When a guttural or labial is preceded by a nasal, the latter 
is thrown out before μ: Stem καμπ, κάμπτω, I bend, κέκαμμαι ; 
Stem éreyx, ἐλέγχω, 1 refute, ἐλέλεγμαι (δ 275, 1). Some Stems 
in v, by way of exception, do not change the ν before yp into o, 
but into μ: ὥξυμμαι, from ὀξύνω, I sharpen ; those which throw 
out the ν in the Perf. Active do the same here (§ 282): κέκριμαι 
(compare πέ-φασ-μαι, from the Stem φ av): σπένδω, I offer a liba- 
tion, Fut. σπείσω, has ἔσπεισμαι. 


ον Before o 

every guttural becomes x, and this with « becomes é: πέ-πλεξαι;᾿ 
“ labial et 4% eo hs yé-ypapat ; 
“ dental is thrown out: πέ-πεισαι. 
3. Before τ 

every guttural becomes x: πέ-πλεκται; Stem λ εγ, λέ- “λεκ-ται; 
“ labial ΒΕ 5 πρὶ ς γέ- γραπται; 


“dental (exe. ν) “ σ: πέ-πεισ-ται (Stem ᾧ av, πέ-φαν-ται). 
4, The σ of σθ after consonants (§ 61) is dropped, and 


then 
every guttural becomes y: πέ-πλεχ-θον for πε-πλεκ-σθον ; 

(Ὁ labial “ φ: γέ-γραφ-θε for γε-γραφ-σθε:; 

“  dental(exc.v) “ σ: πε-πεῖσ-θαι for πε-πειθ-σθαι. 

ν, A, and ρ. remain unchanged before the @ which has 
arisen from of: Stem gav, πεφάνθαι; Stem ayyed, 
ἠγγέλθαι. 


§ 287. The ending vrat-of the 3:Plur. is-irreconcilable 
with Consonantal-Stems. Sometimes the Ionic ara: takes 


§ 287. Dialects.—In the Ion. dialect, the forms ara and aro for the 
8 Plur. are common: Hom. has βε-βλή-αται (βάλλω, I throw), πεποτήατο 
(ποτάομαι, I flutter), dedaiara (δαίω, I divide), ἔρχαται, ἐέρχατο (εἴργω, I 
shut in, § 319, 15); ἴῃ. New-Ionic, παρεσκευάδατο. (παρασκευάζω, I pre- 
pare), κεκοσμξαται (κοσμξω, 1 adorn). Three Homeric forms insert ὃ : 
ἐῤῥά-δ-αται (paivw, I besprinkle), ἀκηχέ-δ-ατο (ἄχνυμαι, I am grieved), 
ἐληλά-δ-ἅτο (Stem ἐλα, ἐλαύνω, I drive); ἐρηρέδαται, from meres I με 
port, is irregular. 


10" V. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 288. 


its place (§ 226, D.), before which y, x, (3, and 7 are aspi- 
rated: γε-γράφ-αται, τε-τάχ-αται (Stem TAY, τάσσω, ἡ: ar- 
range), te-rpip- αται (Stem τριβ, τρίβω, 7 rub). ‘But the — 
common practice is to use the periphrasis by means of the _ 
Participle with <i-ci(v):. “γεγραμμένοι εἰσίν. Compare Lat. 
scripty sunt and ὃ 276, Obs. ' 

The following paradigms supply examples of the above- 
mentioned changes. 


Perfect Middle and Passive. 

Guttural Stems. Dental Stems. Labial Stems. 
πέ-πλεγ-μαι πέ-πεισ-μαι γέ-γραμ-:μαι 
πέ-πλεξαι “| πέ-πεισαι yé-ypavat 
πέ-πλεκ-ται πέ-πεισ-ται γέ-γραπ-ται 
πε-πλέγ-μεθα πε-πείσ-μεθα γε-γράμ-μεθα 
πέ-πλεχ-θε πέ-πεισ-θε γέ-γραφ-θε 
πε-πλεγ-μένοι εἰσί πε-πεισ-μένοι εἰσί γε-γραμ-μένοι εἰσί 


_ § 288. After Vowel-Stems, σ is frequently inserted before the ter- 
minations beginning with μ and τ, but more especially when the 
Stems have the vowel short: Stem τελε, τελῶ, I complete, Perf. 
τε-τέλε-σ-μαι ; Stem ond, σπάω, I draw, ὃ Sing. é-ora-o-ra ; but 
it also occurs in not a few Stems with long vowels and diph- 
thongs: ἀκούω, I hear, ἤκουσμαι ; κελεύω, I order ; κυλίω, [roll ; λεύω, 

_I stone to death ; %iw, I polish ; παίω, I strike; πλέω (πέπλευσται), 
I sail; xpiw, I saw; σείω, I shake; χρίω, I anoint ; ψαύω, I touch. 
Others fluctuate: κλείω or κλῴω, I close ; κρούω, I push. , 


§ 289. The Subjunctive and Optative are generally formed by peri- 
phrasis with the Participle and the corresponding forms of εἰμί. 
(Compare Lat. solutus sim, essem.) These moods are but rarely 
evolved out of Vowel-Stems themselves: κτάομαι, I acquire, κέ- 
κτη-μαι, Subj. κε-κτῶ-μαι, κε-κτῇ, κέ-κτη-ται, Opt. κε-κτῴ- “μὴν (from 
κε-κταοί- μην), κε-κτῷ-το; besides these, we also have xexrypny, Zo, 
το. 


§ 289. Dialects.—The Hom. Subj. from Stem pv α (μέμνημαι, memini), 
1 Plur. μεμνώμεθα (New-Ion. μεμνεώμεθα), Opt. μεμνῴμην ; 3 Sing. λελῦτο, 
3 Plur. λελῦντο, instead of λελυ-ι-το, λελυ-ιτντο, ὃ 28. 


§ 291. THE FUTURE PERFECT. ~ 163 


§ 290. 4. The Pluperfect Middle and Passive 


differs in every verb from the corresponding Perfect. only 
by the addition of the Augment and the personal endings, 
which are those of the historical tenses. Respecting the 
3 Plur. in ντὸ and aro, and their places being supplied by 
periphrasis, see ὃ 287, which is here applicable also. 


8.291. 5. The Future Perfect or Futurum Exactum 


adds σ to the Perfect-Stem with the Inflexion of the Fu- 
ture-Middle; the o produces the same changes in the pre- 
ceding consonants as in the ordinary Future Middle: πε- 
πράξεται (Stem pay, πράσσω, 1 do), zt will have been 
done ; γεγράψεται (Stem ypad, γράφω, L write), ἐέ will 
have been written. 

There are two isolated Future Perfects with Active 
endings: ἑστήξω (8 311), J shall stand, and τεθνήξω (§ 324, 
4), 7 shall be dead, from the Perf. ἕστηκα, τέθνηκα. 

Otherwise its place in the Active is supplied by the Part. 
of the Perf. with the Fut. of εἰμί, Z am (ἔσομαι) : λελυκὼς 
ἔσομαι, L shall have loosed (solvero). | 


᾿ 


VI. Tue Srrone Passive STEM: 


| § 292. From the Strong Passive Stem are formed the 
Strong or Second Aorist, and the Strong or Second Future 


Passive. 


Present: gaivw, Pure Stem ¢ ay, Strong Passive Stem φ ave. 
1. Strong or Second Aorist Passive. 
ἐ-φάνη-ν, I ap- pave pavein-v 
peared, 
3 ἐ-φάνη-ς 3  φανῇ-ς 3 φανείη-ς 
Ξ ἐ-φάνη Ἔ | φανῇ ᾿ φανείη 
5 é-pavn-rov 5 φανῆ-τον S φανείη-τον or φανεῖτον 
> ἐ-φανή-την Ξ φανῆ-τον δ' φανειή-την OF φανείτην 
μι papery μεν ὥς ᾿φὰανῶ-μεν φανείη-μεν OY φανεῖμεν 
ἐ-φάνη-τε φανῆ-τε φανείη-τε OF φανεῖτε 
ἐ-φἄνη-σαν φανῶ-σι(ν) φανείη-σαν ΟΥ̓ φανεῖεν 
φάνη-θι , Π1πῇ φανῆ-ναι | Part.| daveic, φανεῖσα, φανέν. 
3 | φανή-ττω ᾿ Gen. φανέ-ντ-ος 
5 φάνη-τον 
ξ φανή-των 
Ε' φάνη-τε 
1] φανή-τωσαν ΟΥ̓ 
φανέ-ντων 
2. Strong or Second Future Passive. 
Ind. | φανή-σομαι 
Opt. PRU σομὴν “etc., the same'as the Future Middle. 
Inf. | φανή-σεσθαι 
Part. | φανη-σόμενος, ἡ, ov 


§ 293. The personal endings of the Aorist Passive are 
of an Active nature, those of the Future Passive of the 
nature of the Middle. They are appended, as in the Sec- 


§ 293. Dialects—The Hom. dialect has the shorter ending εν in the 
3 Plur. Ind. Aor. Pass. : ἐ-φάνε-»ν or φάνε-ν ; τράφε-ν = ἐτράφησαν, from 
τρέφω. The Ion. dialect leaves the ε in the Subj. uncontracted : piyé-w 
(μίσγω, 1 mix). Homer often lengthens the ε in the Subj., sometimes 
to. a: ddpei-w = δαμῶ; Stem dap, Pres. δάμνημι, I tame; and some- 


i 
4 
7 
᾿ 


164 VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE. STEM. —& 292, - 


‘ 
: 
δ 


§ 295. VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. 165 


ond Principal Conjugation (§ 302), to the Stem without a 
connecting vowel, and the ε of the Stem is lengthened in 
the Indicative and Imperative to ἡ. In the Spbjunctive, 
the < is contracted with the vowels of the Subjunctive: 
pavé-w, φανῶ ; in the Optative, the ε, combined with the 
modal sign i, becomes «en: gave-in-v. The Infinitive al- 
_ ways has the circumflex on the penultima, and the Par- 
ticiple in the Nom. Sing. Mase. the acute on the last, 


§ 294. The Strong Passive Stem, just like the Strong 
Aorist Active and Middle (ὃ 256), is formed very rarely 
from derivative Stems; but it occurs in verbs of all class- 
es, even the first (ὃ 247), ε being added to the pure Verbal- 
Stem: Pres. ῥάπττω (class 3,7 sew), Pure Stem pag, 
Strong Passive Stem page, Aor. Pass. ἐῤῥάφη-ν ; σφάττω 
(class 4, Z slaughter), Pure Stem ogay, Strong Passive 
Stem o gaye, Aor. Pass. ἐσφάγη-ν, Fut. Pass. σφάγη-σομαι; 
Pres. ypag-w (class 1), Strong Pass. Stem ypae, Aor. 
Pass. ἐγράφητν. The Strong Passive Aor. occurs only in 
such verbs as have no Strong Active Aorist. The only 
exception is "τρέπω, 7 turn, Aor. Act. &rpam-o-v, Pass. 
. ἐττράπη-ν. 

Obs.—By way of exception, ἠλλάγην is formed from the derivative 
Stem ddrAX ay, Pres. ἀλλάσσω, I change. 


§ 295. As in the Strong Aorist Active (§ 267), the ε is 
sometimes changed into a: κλέπ-τ-ω, 7 steal, ἐ-κκλάπητν ; 
στέλλω, 7) send, ἐ-στάλη-ν ; τρέφ-ω, 7 τ μαι: ἐστράφη-ν ; 
πλέκ-ω, 1] twist, ἐ-πλέκη-ν and ἐ-πλάἄκη-ν ; πλήσσω, L strike, 


times to η : φἄνήτ-ῃ = φἄνῇ. In the Dual and Plur., the modal vowel 
is shortened where this lengthening of these occurs: dapei-ere (for 
 dapénre, Att. δαμῆτε). In the Infinitive we find the Hom. μεναι or μεν : 
μιγήμεναι, δαμῆμεν. 

§ 295. Dialects——Homer here also employs metathesis (§ 59), as in 
the Strong Aor. Act. and Mid. (ὃ 357, D.): Pres. τέρπ-ω, I delight, Aor. 
Pass: é-raprn-v, Subj. τρᾶἄπέ-ω, 1 Plur. aia ati (gaudeamus), Inf. 
τρᾶπήη-μεναι. 


ν 
4 - 


166 VII. THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM. § 296. 


has ἐ-πλήγη-ν, πληγή-τσομαι, but in composition &-<-7Aayn-v, 
ἐκ-πλᾶγήτ-σομαι; the Pure Stem of verbs of the second 
class here reappears: ofm-w (Stem oan, 7 corrupt), 
ἐσάπη-ν ; τήκ-ω (Stem τὰκ, 7 melt), ἐττάκη-ν ; péw (Stem 
pv, 7 flow), ἐ-ῤῥύη-ν, ῥυή-σομαι. 


VII. Toe Weak Passive 5ΤΕΜ. 


§ 296. From the Weak Passive Stem.are formed the 
Weak or First Aorist and the Weak or First iutire 
Passive. 


Pres. λύω, Stem Av, Weak Passive Stem Awe. 


1; Weak or First Aorist Passive. 


Ind. ἐ-λύθη-ν, 1 | Subj. λυθῶ Opt. λυθείη-ν 
was loosed. . 
ἐ-λύθη-ς λυθῇ-ς λυθείη-ς 
etc., like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive. 
Imp. λύθη-τι Inf. λυθῆ-ναι Part. λυθεί-ς, λυθεῖσα, λυθέν 
λυθή-τω Gen. λυθέντ-ος : 


etc., like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive. 


2. Weak or First Future Passive. 


Ind. λυθή-σομαι Opt. λυθη-σοίμην | Inf. λυθή-σεσθαι 
Part. λυθη-σόμενο-ς, ἡ, ο-ν 


§ 297. The inflexion of the Weak Passive Stem is en- 
tirely like that of the Strong. ‘ Respecting the τ of sehr: 
instead of λυθη-θι, see ὃ 53, ὁ. 


§ 296. Dialects. —The Weak Fut. Pass. is wanting in the Homeric 
dialect. 


§ 297. Dialects—Respecting the inflexion, see ὃ 293, Ὁ. 


§ 298. Dialects—The Hom. dialect after some Vowel-Stems inserts 
ν before 0: ἀμπνύ-ν-θη (Stem vv, πνέω, I breathe), ἱδρύ-ν-θη (idpiw, 
1 set firm), and changes the ε of the Stem φαεν (φαείνω, paivw, I make 
appear) into a, φαάνθην. : 


8.299. VII. THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM. 167 


§ 298. The Weak Passive Stem is formed from the 
Verbal-Stem by appending the syllable 6. Before this 
syllable the vowels of Vowel-Stems are lengthened as in 
the Future, the Weak Aorist Active, and the Perfect: 
τιμα, ἐτιμήθην ; πεῖρα, ἐπειράθην, 7 tried. As to the ex- 
ceptions, see ὃ 801. As in the Perfect Middle, σ is inserted 
before @, especially after short vowels, but often also after 
long ones: é-rsAé-o-9nv, from τελέω, 7 complete ; ἐ-κελεύ-σ- 
θην, from κελεύω, 7 order ; and this is the case in the verbs 
mentioned in ὃ 288, and especially in γελάω, J laugh, ἐγε- 
λάσθην ; Spaw, 7 do, ἐδράσθην ; παύω, [ cause to cease, 
ἐπαύσθην, but also ἐπαύθην. The Aor. Passive of σώζω, 
7 save, on the other hand, is formed from the shorter Stem 
ow without the o: ἐσώθην. | 

As in the Weak Perfect Active. and the Perfect Middle, 
the ε before X, v, p is sometimes changed into a: Stem rev 
(reivw, L stretch), ¢-ra0n-v (compare ὃ 282). 

The changes of the consonants before θ are explained 
by the laws of sound (§ 45): Stem a pay, πράσσω, I do, 
é-rpay-On-v ; Stem Wevd, ψεύδω, J deceive, ἐ-ψεύσ-θητν ; 
Stem πεμπ, πέμπω, 7 send, i-riugd-On-v. Respecting 
ἐθρέφθην (Pres. τρέφω), ἐθάφθην (Pres. θάπτω), see ὃ 54, 
Obs., and respecting ἐτέθην, ἐτύθην (Stems θε, θυ), see 


§ 53, ὁ. 
§ 299. The Weak Aorist Passive and the Weak Future 


Passive are, on the whole, more common than the Strong, 
and in the case of derivative verbs, as of nearly. all Vowel- 
Stems, they are the only customary forms of the Aorist 
and Future Passive. | 

There are some primitive verbs of which both Passive 
Stems are in use: Stem βλαβ, Pres. βλάπτω, L hurt, Aor. 
Pass. ἐβλάβην and ἐβλάφθην. 


. 


168 ' VERBAL ADJECTIVES. § 300. 


VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 


§ 300. The Verbal Adjectives are a kind of Passive Par- 
ticiples. 

Pres. λύω, Stem Av, 1. λῦ-τός, ἡ, bv, loosed, capable of 

being loosed. : 
2. Av-réo-c, a, ov, to be loosened, 
solvendu-s, a, um. 

The First Verbal Adjective is formed by means of the 
syllable ro (Nom. το-ς, τη, ro-v) from the Verbal-Stem, and 
has the meaning either of a Participle Perfect Passive, 
λυ-τό-ς =solu-tu-s, or of possibility, capable of being loos- 
ened. 

The Second Verbal Adjective is formed by means of 
the syllable τέο (Nom. τέο-ς, réa, téo-v), which is never con- 
tracted, from the Verbal-Stem, and has the meaning of 
necessity, like the Latin gerundive: λυ-τέο-ς, one who zs 
to be loosened ; λυτέον ἐστί, loosening nvust take place, 
solvendum est. 

The vowels preceding the τ are in general treated ex- 
actly in the same manner as in the Weak Passive Aorist; 
σ is inserted in the same cases as in the Aor. Pass.: τελε- 
σ-τός, κελευ-σ-τέον. The consonants before r are treated in 
accordance with the laws of sound: πρακ-τό-ς (Stem 7 pay, 
Pres. πράσσω); γραπ-τό-ς(γράφω); κομισ-τέο-ν( Stem κο ἐμεῦ, 
κομίζω, 7 carry). 


Verbs which leave their Stem Vowel short in the forma- 
tion of ther Tenses. 


§ 301. The Vowel remains short throughout in: 


§ 300. Dialects.—doa-ré-¢ is derived by metathesis (δ 59) from the 
Stem dep (dépw, I flay). 

§ 301. Dialects —The Hm. dialect ἐράω, I love, Aor. Mid. ἠρᾶσάμην; 
ἀρκέω, I ward off, ἤρκεσα ; κορέω, I satisfy, ἐκόρεσα ; κοτέω, I grudge, 
κοτέσσατο ; ἐρύω, I draw, εἴρῦσα. On the usual doubling-of the o after 
short vowels —” , ἐρύσσατο), see ὃ 261, D. 


§ 301. VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL. 169 
yeraw, LI laugh, Fut. γελάσομαι, Aor. Act. ἐγέλᾶσα, 
Aor. Pass. ἐγελάσθην, 
Fut. Pass, γελασθήσομαι. 
Ordw,  Tsqueeze, Fut. Odrdow, Aor. Act. ἔθλἄσα, 
Verb. Adj. θλαστός. 
craw, TL break, Fut. κλάσω, Aor. Pass. ἐκλάσθην, 
Perf. Mid. κέκλασμαι. 
oraw, I draw, Fut. σπᾶσω, Aor. Act. ἔσπᾶσα, 
Aor. Pass, ἐσπάσθην, Perf. Act. ἔσπᾶκα, 
Perf. Mid. ἔσπασμαι, Verb. Adj. σπαστός. 
χαλάω, Islacken, Fut. χαλἄᾶσω, Aor. Pass. ἐχαλάσθην. 
αἰδέομαι, I dread, Fut. aidécopat, Aor. Pass. ydécOnv (828), 
Perf. ἤδεσμαι. 
ἀκέομαι, I heal, Fut. ἀκέσομαι, Aor. ἠκεσάμην. 
adéw, TI grind, Fut. ἀλέσω (6), Perf. Act. ἀλήλεκα, 
Perf. Mid. ἀλήλεσμαι. 
ἀρκέω, I satisfy, Fut. ἀρκέσω, Mor. Act. ἤρκεσα. 
tuéw, LI vomit, Aor. Act. ἤμεσα. 
ζέω, 1 seethe, Fut. ζέσω, Aor. Act. ἔζεσα, 
Verb. Adj. ζεστός. 
ξέω, I scrape, Fut. ξέσω, Verb. Adj. ξεστός. 
τελέω, I finish, Fut. redéow (6), Aor. Act. ἐγέλεσα, 
Aor. Pass. ἐτελέσθην, 
Verb. Adj. τελεστός, 
Perf. Act. τετέλεκα, 
Perf. Mid τετέλεσμαι, 
dpow, I plow, Fut. ἀρόσω, Aor. Act. jjpoca, 
Aor. Pass. ἠρόθην. 
ἀρύω, I draw, Fut. dpicw, Aor. Act. ἤρῦσα. 
addit. form dpirw. 
eiw, I draw, Aor. Act. εἵλκῦσα. 
Fut. Pass. κυ μδανες Act. εἵλκῦκα, 
Perf. Mid. εἵλκυσμαι. 
πτύω, I spit, Aor. Act. ἔπτῦσα. 


Verb. Adj. πτυστός. 


2. The vowel is long in the Weak Aor. Act., and short 
in the Perf., the Aor. Pass., and the Verbal Adjective in 


1 bind, Fut. δήσω, Aor. Act. ἔδησα, 
Perf. Act. δέδεκα, 
Aor. Pass. ἐδέθην, 
Verb, Adj. δετός, 
Perf. Mid. δέδεμαι, 
3 Fut. δεδήσομαι. 


, 
δέω, 


_170 VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL. § 302. 


θύω, TL sacrifice, Fut. θύσω, _ Aor. Act. ἔθῦσα, 
Perf. Act. τέθῦὔκα, Aor. Pass. ἐτυθην, 
Perf. Mid. τέθῦὕμαι. 

iw, I loose, Fut. λύσω, - Aor. Act. ἔλῦσα, 
Perf. Act. λέλύκα, Aor. Pass. ἰλύθην, 
Verb. Adj. λῦτός, Perf. Mid. λέλῦμαι. 


3. The Vowel zs short in the Future and Weak Aorist 
Active and Middle, but dong in the Perfect, Aorist Pas- 
sive, and Verbal Adjective of καλέω, 7 call, καλέσω, κέκληκαν 
ἐκλήθην, κλητός ; αἰνέω, [ praise, has αἰνέσω, ἤνεκα, ἠνέθην, 
αἰνετός, but Perf. Mid. ἤνημαι. 

4. ποθέω, 7 long for; πονέω, 7 toil; and δύω, 77 sink, 
fluctuate between the short and long vowels: ποθέσομαι 
and ποθήσω ; πονέσω, ἐπονησάμην ; δύσω, Aor. Pass. ἐδύθην. 


Cuap. XI.—Srconp ῬΒΙΝΟΙΡΑΙ, CONJUGATION, 
or Verbs in μι. 


PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS. 


§ 302. The Second Principal Conjugation differs from 
the First only in the inflexion of the Present and Strong 
Aorist-Stems, and in the case of a few verbs also in the 
Perfect and Pluperfect Active.. 

The special terminations of this conjugation are: 

1. The 1 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient μι: φη-μί, 1 say 


(§ 226). 
2. The 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient σι(ν) (for rt): 


φησί(ν) (δ 226). 
8. The 8 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. inserts the vowel a before the termi- 


§ 302. Dialects—The Hom. dialect often has the ending ofa in the 
2 Sing. Ind. Act.: τίθη-σθα, thou puttest ; ἔ-φη-σθα ; and μεναι or μεν 
instead of ναι in the Inf.: φά-μεναι, φά-μεν; and a short v instead of 
the car of the 3 Plur. of the Preterite: ἔ-φᾶἂ-ν. 

The Hom. dialect sometimes lengthens the Steen ssa in the Subj. 


and shortens the Modal-vowel as in the Aor. Pass. (§ 298): ἴομεν Ξε 


ἴωμεν (cams). 


§ 304. SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION. 171 


nation σι (for ντι) (ὃ 226, compare Dialects), and this a is lengthened 
by compensation (é- aeitey: they go, from the Stem i), and unites with 
the a of the Stem: φᾶσί(ν). 

4. In the Optative, m (ιε, ἡ), the Modal-sign attaches itself directly 
to the Stem: φα-ίη-ν ; compare ὃ 293. 

5. The 2 Sing. Imperat. has the ending @:: φά-θι. 

6. The Infinit, has the ending va: φά-ναι. ᾿ ἰ ees 8. 565. 

7. The 8 Plur. of the Preterite has σαν : ἔ-φἄ-σαν (8 Plur. Imperf.). 


All terminations of these two tenses are appended to 
the Stem without a connecting vowel : pa-pév (compare 
τιμά-ο-μεν), Pa-Tw (compare τιμα-ἔ-τω); in the Participle, 
also, vr attaches itself directly to the Stem: ga-vr, of 
which the Nom. is formed by the addition of o: φάς: 
Stem So, δούς (compare ὃ 147, 1). In the Subjunctive 
alone the final vowels of the Stems are contracted with 
the long connecting vowels, as in the ordinary contracted 
verbs (§ 243): φά-ω, φῶ ; τι-θέ-ω, τι-θῶ ; δότ-ω-μαι, δῶμαι. 


§ 808. In the vowel-Stems of this conjugation a change 
of quantity takes place in such a manner that vowels in 
themselves short are lengthened in the Singular Indicative — 
Active, a and ε becoming ἡ, 0 w, and v vu: φη-μί, 1 say, 
Plur. φα-μέν, ἔτφη-ν, Dial E-pa-TOV ; [z-On-v, I placed |, 
Plur. ἔ-θε-μεν ; δείκνῦ-μι, 7 show, Plur. deixvi-pev. 

0bs.—Those forms which always have the vowel long are specially 
noticed below. 

§ 304. All verbs in μὲ are divided into 2 classes: 


1. Those which in the Present join their terminations 
directly to the Stem: φη-μί; 
2. Those which form the Present-Stem by adding vv to 
the Pure Stem: δείκ-νῦ-μι, 7 mee Pure Stem deck, Pres- 
ent-Stem deck vu. 


172 


 IRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 


ὃ 806. 


I. First Cuass or VERBS IN μι. 


$$ 305 and 306. The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs 
are inserted on p. 124, fol. sqq. 


§ 307. Some few forms of the Verbs in μὲ are formed 


δὲ 305, 306. Dialects. —The following are Ionic secondary forms, 
those inclosed in brackets being the New-Ionic. 


2 Sing. Pres. Ind. τί-θη-σθα 


9 {ς “ 6c 


S Plaur, * “ ‘ 


τι-θεῖ 


τι-θεῖσι(ν) 


Active. 


δι-δοῖ-σθα, also δι-δοῖ-ς 


δι-δοῖ 
δι-δοῦσι(ν) 


also (προ)θέουσι(ν) 


2 Sing. Pres. Imperat. δί-δω-θι 
Inf. Pres. τι-θή-μεναι δι-δό-μεν 
. δι-δοῦ-ναι 
Imperf. 1 Sing. [ἐ-τί-θε-α] [ é-di-dov-v] 
3% [ἐ-τί-θε-ε] 
Middle. 
8 Plur. Pres, Ind. [τι-θέ-αται δι-δό-αται 
3 “ ‘Imperf. “ 
Pres. Part. τι-θή-μενος - 
Active. 
2 Aor. Ind. 3 Plur. 
“ Subj. 1 Sing. θείω [θέω] 
«2 “Being or Onys δῷς 
Se SSB Mey δῶσι(ν) or 
δώῃσι(ν) 
{ “ 9 D. 
«1 Plur. Géwperv or δώομεν 
θείομεν 
τ δώωσι(ν) 
? Inf θέμεναι, θέμεν δόμεναι, δόμεν 
Middle. 
“-Ind. ἔθεο, ἔθευ (δ 37, D.,1) ’ 
[Herod. προςθήκαντο] 
Subj. [θέωμαι] θείομαι 
“* Imper. θέο, θεῦ. 


[i-org] 
[i-oré-aou(v) | 


(καθ)-ί-στα 


[t-ora] 


i-oré-arat| 
[t-oré-aro| 


» v 
éorav 
ἔστᾶσαν 


στήῃς 


στήετον (§ 302, D.) 
στέωμεν OF 
στείομεν 

[στέωσι 

στήμεναι 


ΣῪ Ai ar a init in 


§ 808. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS ΙΝ μι. 173 
after ‘the First Principal Conjugation, as, 6. g., the 2 Sing. 
Imperf. ἐτίθεις, the 3 Sing. ἐτίθει, as if from the Stem 7.6 «. 
In the Imperf., the forms ἐδίδουν, ἐδίδους, ἐδίδου are the 
only ones in use from the Stem 6.603. they are formed 
in the same manner as those of contracted verbs (ὃ 243). 
Other similar forms will be noticed in treating of the sep- 
arate verbs. 

In the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. contraction is sometimes em- 
ployed: τιθεῖσι, διδοῦσι. 

- In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Pres. Act. the real ending θὲ is 
dropped, and the Stem-vowel is lengthened to compensate 
for it: δίδου for δίδοθι. : 

In the same person of the Aorist after a short vowel « 
only is dropped, and the remaining 6, according to ὃ 67, is 
changed to ¢: do-i, δός, but στῆ-θι, which only in com. 
pounds sometimes appears as στᾶ, 6. g., κατάστα. 

In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Present and Imperfect the 
o between the two vowels is preserved: τίθε-σαι, τίθε-σο, 
ἐτίθε-σο ; only the 2 Sing. of the Subj. is treated entirely 
like the contracted verbs of the First Principal Conjuga- 
tion. In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Strong Aorist, on the 
other hand, the σ is thrown out, which gives rise to a con- 
traction: ἔ-θε-σο, ἔ-θε-ο, ἔτθου ; Imper. 6é-co, θέο, θοῦ. 

Obs.—The forms of the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. compounded with 

monosyllabic prepositions, after contraction, throw the accent as 


a circumflex upon the last syllable: προ-θοῦ; but Homer has 
σύν-θεο and περί-θου. 


§ 308. The three verbs conjugated above (p. 124) distin- 
guish the Present-Stem from the Pure Stem by redupli- 
cation, that is, the initial consonant with ὁ is prefixed be- 
fore the Stem: do, δεδο; Oe, re Oe (ὃ 530); ἵ-στα for 
σι-στα, according to ὃ 60, ὁ (compare Latin sz-sto). In 
like manner, the Stem xpa in the Pres. becomes ki-x pa 
(«i-ypn-m, I lend); wa and wpa, with the insertion of . 
a nasal, become πί-μ-πλα, πι-μ-πρα (πίμπλημι, 7 fill; 
πίμπρημι, L burn); but συμ-πί-πλη-μι, ἐμ-πί-πλη-μι; the 


ds 


* 


174 FIRST CLASS OF: VERBS IN μι. ᾿ ὃ 909. 


Stem £ becomes ἵ- ἡ-μι, 7 ate and, with the reduplication 
within the Stem itself, ὁ va becomes ὀ-νί-νη-μι, 7 benefit. 


§ 309. The Deponents δύναμαι, I can ; ἐπίσταμαι, I understand ; fe 
papa, I hang; together with the Aorists ἐπριάμην, I bought ; ὠνή- 
pny, 1 benefited, withdraw the accent, even in the Subjunctive 
and Optative, as far as possible from the end: δύνωμαι, ἐπίδταιντο 
(compare ἱστῶμαι, ioraivro). 


Other peculiarities of verbs of this class are : 


§ 310. The three Stems θε (τίθημι), So (δίδωμι), and ἑ 
(int) form an irregular Weak Aorist in ca: ἔθηκα, ἔδωκα, 
ἧκα, but in the Middle we find only ἡκάμην. In the Sing. 
of the Indicative the Active forms are customary instead 
of those of the Strong Aorist, but in the Dual and Plural 
of the Indicative they are rare. The other moods and the 
Participles have the strong forms exclusively. 

The really customary forms of the Aorist, therefore, are 
these : 


Ind. Subj. θῶ _ Mid, ἐθέμην 
ἔθηκα Opt. θείην Subj. θῶμαι 
ἔθηκας Imp. θές etc, 
EOnxe(v). Inf. θεῖναι 

ἔθετον Part. θείς 

ἐθέτην : 

ἔθεμεν (seldom ἐθήκαμεν) 

ἔθετε ( ““ ἐθήκατε; 

ἔθεσανί “ ἔθηκαν). 


§ 311. 2. The rough breathing instead of the o of the 
Stem στα is also used in the Perf. (§ 60,6): &orn-xa for 
os-oty-ka. On the shorfer forms, ἕστᾶμεν, etc., see ὃ 317, 4 
ἑστήξω, I shall stand, is a Third Future Active. The Per- 
fects of θε and é are τέθεικα, εἶκα ; the same vowel also re- 
mains in the Perf. Mid. τέθειμαι, εἶμαι. The Stems ὃ ο and 
στα leave their vowel short in the Perf. Mid. and Aor. 


§ 310. Dialects—From the Stem do Hom. has sometimes Fut. δὲ- 
dw-ow instead of δώσω. 


a a. Or ie 


. 4 
§ 312. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 175 


Pass., and @< in the Aor. Pass. : 8é-do-pat, ἐδόθην, ἐστάθην, 
ἐέδαν; τεθήσομαι. On the meaning of the different forms 
of ἵστημι, see ὃ 329, 1. 


§ 312. To the First Class of the Verbs in μὲ there also 
belong 

A) Verbs whose Stem ends in a (compare torn): 

1. ἠ-μί (compare Lat. a-2o), 1 say, only in the Imperf. ἦν, 
3 Sing. # (compare ὃ 213, Ods.). 

2. ὀ-νί-νη-μι (Stem ova, ὃ 308), LZ benefit, Mid. dvivaya 
(8 309), J have advantage, Strong Aor. Mid. ὠνήμην, ὥνησο, 
ὦὥνητο ; Opt. ὀναίμην, Imperat. ὄνησο, Inf. ὄνασθαι, Fut. 
ὀνήσω, ὀνήσομαι; Aor. Pass. ὠνήθην. 

3. πί-μ-πλη-μι (Stem πλα, ὃ 308). Additional form, 
πλήθῶ, I fill (Lat. ple-o|, Fut. πλήσω, Perf. Mid. πέπλη- 
σμαι, Aor. Pass. ἐπλήσθην. 

4. πί-μ-πρη-μι (Stem wpa). Additional form, πρήθω 
(quite like 3). 

5. φη-μί (Stem ¢ a), L say, 2 Sing. Imperf. ἔφησθα (enclitic 

in Pres, Ind. except 2 Sing., compare ὃ 92,3). Imperat. 
pai or φάθι; ; compare φάσκω, 324, 8. 
6. χρή (Stem xpa, xpe), one must, Subj. χρῷ, Opt. 
x petn, Inf. χρῆναι, Part. χρεών (only Neut. from Xpaov 
according to ὃ 37, D.). Imperf. ἐχρῆν or χρῆν, But. χρή- 
σει; ἀπ ὅ x p n, Ut suffices, also 8 Plur. ἀπο χρ ὦ στ(ν); ete., 
as above ἀποχράω. 

7. κί-χρη-μι (Stem y pa, ὃ 308), Z lend, Inf. cry pavas, 
Fut. xp how, Aor.typnoa. Farther the deponents : 

8. ἄγα-μαι (Stem ’aya),l admire, Fut. ἀγάσομαι, Aor. 
Pass. ἠγάσθην, Verb. Adj. ἀγαστός. 

9. déva-ua (Stem δὺυ ν ἃ), L can, 2 Sing. Ind. δύνῃ is rare 
(δ 309), Imperf. ἐδυνάμην, 2 Sing. ἐδύνω, Fut. δυνήσομαι, 


§ 312. Dialects—3. Hom. has the Aor. πλῆτο, it was filled, 3 Plur. 
πλῆντο, Opt. πλύμην Or πλείμην, ἜΑΡΟΣ. [ἔμ] πλησο. 

6. Herod. ἀπέχρα. 

8. Hom. ἀγάομαι, ἀγαίομαι. 


" 
176 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. § 312. 


Aor. ἐδυνήθην, seldom ἐδυνάσθην. The Augment is fre- 
quently ἡ (ὃ 234, O0bs.), Perf. δεδύνημαι, Verb. Adj. δυνᾶτός, 
capable, possible. 


10. ἐπίστα-μαι (Stem éxrora),l understand, 2 Sing. 
ἐπίστασαι, Imperf. ἠπιστάμην, ἠπίστω, Fut. ἐπιστήσομαι, 
Aor. ἠπιστήθην, Verb. Adj. ἐπιστητός. 

11. ἔρα-μαι (Stem ἐρ a), poetic, J love (commonly zpaw), 
Aor. Pass. ἠράσθην. 

12. κρέμα-μαι (Stem x pepa), Ll hang (§ 309). Fut. κρε- 
μήσομαι, Aor. ἐκρεμάσθην. Additional forms, ὃ 319, 2. 


Obs.—The following may serve as examples of the formation of 
words: τὸ θέ-μα, the position ; ὁ do-rnp, the giver; ἡ στά-σι-ς, the 
rise ; ἡ ὄὔνη-σι-ς, the bengjit, from the Pure Verbal-Stem, differing 
from the Present-Stem ; ἡ φή-μη, fa-ma, talk ; ἡ δύναμι-ς, power ; 
ἡ ἐπιστή-μη, knowledge, an the Verbal-Stem, which is the same 
as that of the Present. 


Dialects—13. Hom. dpeva:, satiate, Stem a, Subj. ἔωμεν. 

14, Stem Ba, Part. βιβάς, stepping. 

14, ὁ. Stem dea, 3 Sing. Imperf. déaro, seemed, Aor. δοά-σσατο. 

15. Stem ira, ἱλάσκομαι, ἱλάομαι, I am gracious, Hom. Imperat. ἵληθι. 

16. Stem cepa (compare κεράννυμι, I mix), Hom. 3 Plur. Subj. Mid. 
κέρωνται. MTo these belong also, in regard to the inflexion of the 
Present-Stem, those Hom. verbs which either are used only in the 
Present-Stem, or form the Present-Stem from the Verbal Stem by 
affixing the syllable -να: 

a) δάμ-νη-μι (also δαμ-νά-ω), ΤῊ Mid. δάμ-νἄ-μαι, Fut. δαμόω, 
δαμάᾳς, Weak Aor. Inf. δαμάσαι, δαμάσασθαι, Perf. δέδμημαι, Aor. Pass. 
ἐδμήθην, δαμάσθην, and Strong Aor. Pass. ἐδάμην (Subj. dapeiw). 

δὴ) κίρνημι (also κεράννυμι, ὃ 319, 1),L mia, Part. κιρνάς, 3 Sing. 
Imperf. ixiova. Compare ὃ 319, 1. 

ὃ κρήμνᾶμαι, poetic additional form of κρέμα-μαι (12). Compare 
also ὃ 919, 2. 

d) μάρνᾶμαι, TI contend, 2 Sing. Imperf. ἐμάρνᾶο. 

δ) πέρνημι, ἴ sell, Part. περνάς, περνἄμενος. 

SJ) Λπίλναμαι, 1 approach, Stem wer, Aor. 3 Sing. ἔ-πλη-το. 

Gg) πίτνημι, I spread, Part. πιτνάς, Imperf. πίτναντο. Compare 
319, 3. 

h) σκίδνημι, 1 scatter, oxidvara. Compare ὃ 510: 4, 


§ 313. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 177 


§ 313. B) Verbs whose Stem ends in « (compare τίθημὺ : 
1. ἵτη-μι (Stem é, Present-Stem i-e, 7. ¢., i-é, according to 
§ 308), Z send. 
Aet. Pres. 3 Plur. Ind. iaou(v), Opt. ἱείην (secondary forms 
toy, 3 Plur. ἴοιεν). 
Imperf. in-v (secondary forms [tour], tae, te), Plur. 
ἵεμεν, 3 Plur. te-cav, ἀφίει and ἠφίει (ἀφίημι, 
I send away). Compare § 240. 
Aor. ἥτκτα, ἧκας, ἧκε(ν), cirov, εἵτην, ciuev, εἶτε, εἷ- 
σαν. : 
Subj. ὦ, Opt. εἴην, Imperat. ἕς, Inf. εἶναι, Part. cic 
(Stem ἕν τ). On this Aor., compare ὃ 310. 
Fut. tow, Perf. εἵἴτκτα. 
Mid. Pres. i-e-ua, I hasten, strive, Subj. idpar, in, ete. 
Opt. ἱείμην (additional form tofunv), Imperat. ἵεσο 
or tov, Imperf. ἱ-έμην. 
Aor. εἵμην, εἶσο, εἶτο, Subj. dua, Opt. εἵμην (addi- 
tional form οἵμην). 


Obs.—The εἰ of the Ind. εἵ-μην is caused by the Augment (ὃ 236), 
that of the Opt. by the Mood-sign (§ 302, 4). 


Fut. ἥτσομαι, Perf. ci-uar, Plup. εἵ-μην. 


§ 313. Dialects.—1. Hom. 2 and 8 Sing. Pres. ‘eee, ἵει ; 8 Plur. tcior(v) ; 
1 Sing. Imperf. tev, tec, ἵει; 3 Plur. tev, 8 Sing. Subj. ἵησι(ν) ; Inf. 
iguevac; Aor, Act. ἕηκα ; 3 Plur. ἕσαν ; Subj. ctw; Aor. Mid. 3 Plur. ἕντο. 

2. Fut. ἥσω and (ἀν)έσω | Herod. μεμετιμένος, as a Part. Perf. of pe- 
τίημι = μεθίημι, ὃ 52, D., as if from periw, with irregular reduplica- 
tion]. 

Moreover : 

3. Stem -a(F)e, Pres. ἄημι, I blow, 2 Dual ἄητον, 3 Sing. Imperf. ay and 
ae, Inf. ἀῆναι and ἀήμεναι, Part. Aor. Nom. Plur. ἀέντες, Mid. ἀήμενος. 

4. Stem dct, (ἐν) δίεσαν, they frightened ; δίενται, they flee; Opt. di- 
ΟΙΤΟ. 

5. Stem ὃ εζ ε, δίζημαι, additional form, δίζω, I seek ; 2 Sing. δίζηαι, 
Inf. δίζησθαι, Fut. διζήσομαι. 

6. Pres. κίχημι (compare ὃ 322, 18), 7 obtain ; Subj. κιχείω, Opt. κι- 
xeiny, Inf. κιχῆναι, Part. κιχείς, Mid. κιχήμενος. 

Imperf. 2 Sing. ἐκίχεις, 3 Dual κιχήτην. 

H 2 


178 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. § 314. 


Aor. Pass. εἴθην, Subj. £06. Fut. ἑθήσομαι. 
Verb. Adj. ἑτός, éréoc. 
2. δί-δη-μι (Stem ὃ ε),.7 bind, a rare additional form of 
δέ-ω (ὃ 244, 1). ‘ 
§ 314. C) Verbs whose Sie ends inv: 
1. εἴ-μι (Stem i, Lat. é-re), I go. 


Pres. Ind. εἴ-μι ἴ-μεν 5.0]. ἴτω i-ye, ete. 
εἶ . τον ἴἔ-τε Opt. i-oiny ἴστοις, etc. 
el-oifv) ἴττον ἴ-ἄσι(ν) Imperat. ἴ-θι i-rw, etc. 
3 Plur. ἐπόντων or i-rwoav 
Inf. i-é-var Part. ἰ-ών, i-ovea, ἰ-όν (Gen. ἐ-όντ-ος, compare Lat. 
e-unt-is) 
Imperf. yew or ya ἤειμεν OF ypev 


” “oo θ » » 
ῃξεις Vee a, HELTOV, QTov, QELTE 


ge “ὕειν, yeirny, yTny, yecay 
Verbal Adj. ἰτός, ἰτέος additional form irnréov, ἐξ 2s 
J , 
necessary to god. 


“ gre 


Obs.—The Present, especially in the Indicative, has a Future mean- 
ing; the Imperfect has the endings of a Pluperfect; εὐ is pro- 
duced by the Augment preceding εἰ. "Ὁ 


2. κεῖτ-μαι (Stem Kev), / le, has the Inflexion of a Per- 
fect. 2 Sing. κεῖτσαι, 3 Plur. κεῖνται, Subj. 3 Sing. κέηται, 
Opt. κέοιτο, Imperat. κεῖσο, Inf. κεῖσθαι, Part. κείμενος ; the 
compound παράκειμαι, Inf. παρακεῖσθαι. (Compare ja, 
§ 315, 2). 


§ 314. Dialects —1. Stem i, 2 Sing. Pres. Ind. εἶσθα, Subj. tno0a, ἴησιν, 
1 Plur. ἴομεν, ἴομεν, and ἴωμεν, Opt. ἴοι, icin or εἴη, Inf. i ἴμεναι, ἴμεν. 

Imperf. ἤϊα and ἤϊον, 3 Sing. jie(v) or ἴε(ν), 1 Plur. ἤομεν, 3 Plur. 
ἤϊον, ἤϊσαν, With irny, ἴμεν, ἴσαν. 

εἰν εἴσομαι, Aor. εἰσάμην and ἐ ἐεισάμην. 

. Stem κει, 3 Plur. welarat, κέαται, κέονται, Imperf κείατο, κέατο 

[iran == era, τ Fut. κέων, cubiturus, Inf. κειέμεν. 

é6vo is an Hom. Stem in 0, Pres. ὄνομαι, I vituperate, ὄνοσαι, 3 Sing. 
Opt. ὄνοιτο (ὃ 309), Fut. ὀνόσσομαι, Aor. ὠνοσάμην, and, from the Stem 
6 v, ὠνάμην. 

6v or épv is an Hom. Stem in υ, 8 Plur. εἰρύαται, they rescue, protect, 
Inf. ῥῦσθαι, ἔρυσθαι, εἰρύμενος, Imperf. 2 Sing. ἔρῦσο, 3 Plur. piaro, ἐρύατο, 
εἴρυντο ; moreover, Inf. Act. εἰρύμεναι, to draw; Aor. Mid. picaro, he 
yescued ; ἐρύσσατο, he drew. 


- 


§ 315. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 179 


Obs.—When compounded with prepositions, κεῖμαι is almost iden- 
tical in meaning with the Perf. Pass. of the corresponding com- 
pounds of τίθημι : ὑποτίθημι, 1 lay as a foundation ; ὑπόκειται, it 18 
laid as a foundation. 

§ 315. D) Verbs whose Stem ends in a consonant (σ): 
1. εἰμί (Stem ἐς, Lat. es-se), I am. 


Pres. Ind. εἰ-μί (for ἐσμὺ ἐσ-μέν 

εἶ (for éo-or) ἐσ-τόν ἐσ-τέ (€8-tis) 
ἐσ-τί(ν) (Lat. es-t) ἐσ-τόν εἰ-σί(ν) 

Subj. ὦ ὦμεν Opt. εἴην εἴημεν OF εἶμεν 
ἧς ἧτον ἦτε εἴης εἴητον ΟΥ̓ εἶτον εἴητε OF εἶτε 
ἢ ἦτον ὦσι(ν) εἴη εἰήτην OF εἴτην εἴησαν OF εἶεν 

Imperat. ἴσθι ἔστον ἔστε ᾿ Inf. εἶναι 
ἔστω ἔστων ἔστωσαν Part. ὧν οὖσα ὄν (Stem ovr) 
(Lat. esto) ἔστων, ὄντων 
Imperf. ἦν or ἦ ᾿ς ἦμεν 
ἦσθα ἧστον OF ἦτον are OF ἦστε 
ἣν ἤστην OY ἤτην ἦσαν © ‘9 
Tapert Mid. ἤμην (rare) 
Fut. ἔσομαι; 3 Sing. ἔσται ° 


Verb, Adj. éoréov. 


Obs.—1. The loss of the o of the Stem is compensated for by the 
vowel being lengthened in the 1 Sing. (δ 42): εἰμί for ἐσμι, in the 
2 Sing. εἶ for éo., which has arisen from the ἐσσί preserved in 
Homer (compare §§ 49, 61, 5). In the 3 Sing. the original end- 
ing τι is retained: éori(y), the 3 Plur. has εἰσί(ν), from ἐσ-ντι. 
The Subj. ὦ stands for ἔω (Hom.), from éow; the Opt. εἴην for 


§ 315. Dialects—Jonic additional forms: 2 Sing. ἐσ-σί or εἷς, 1 Plur. 
εἰμέν, 3 Plur. ἔασι(ν) ; ἐσσί is also enclitic, but not ἔασι(υ). 
Subj. 1 Sing. éw, ciw, 2 Sing. tye, 3 Sing. ἔησι(ν), jor(v), ἔφ, ὃ Plur. 
Ewor(v). 
Opt. also ἔοις, ἔοι, 9 Sing. Imperat. Mid. ἔδσο, 3 Act. ἔστω, 3 Plur. 
ἔστων. 
Inf. ἔμμεναι (for io-pevar), ἔμμεν, ἔμεναι, ἔμεν. 
Part. ἐών, ἐοῦσα, ἐόν (Stem torr). 
Imperf. 1 Sing. ja, ἔα, ἔον ; 2 Sing. ἔησθα [Zac], ὃ Sing. jer, ἔην, inv 
[2 . ἔατε], 3Plur. ἔσαν ; 3 Plur. Mid. εἴατο (ἦντο). 
Fut. ἔσδομαι, 3 Sing. ἔσεται, ἔσσεται, ἐσσεῖται (§ 264). 
2. From ἦμαι, 8 Plur. garat, ciara, Imperf. ἕατο, εἵατο. 
8. Inf. ἔδμεναι, to eat, Pres. ἔσθω, ἰσθίω, ἔδω [Τ, αὖ, es-tis = editis]. Com- 
pare § 327, 4. 
4, 2 Plur. Imperf. φέρτε = φέρετε, ὍΝ: [Lat. ferte]. 


. 


180 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι: § 316. 


ἐσ-ιην, as the Inf. εἶναι for eet ; wy for ἐων (Hom.), from ἐσ-ων. 
In the Imperf. the Dual has most fully preserved the σ. 

Obs. 2.—eipi is enclitic in the Pres. Ind. except the 2 Sing. εἶ (com- 
pare § 92, 3); ἔστι is paroxytone when it denotes existence, or 
means the same, as ἔξεστι, “ it is possible,” as well as at the begin- 
ning of a sentence and after the particles οὐ, μή, εἰ, ὡς, καί : ἔστι 
θεός, there is a God ; οὐκ ἔστι, it is not possible. When merely ex- 
ternal causes prevent it from being enclitic (ὃ 93, ¢), éori(v) is 
oxytone: φίλος ἐστὶν ἐμοῦ, he is my friend. 

Obs. 3.—In the compounds of εἰμί the accent remains on the Stem- 
syllable; 6. g.,in the Imperf. παρῆν, in the Subj. and Opt. ἀπῶ, 
ἀπεῖεν, in the Inf. and Part. ἀπεῖναι, παρών, in the 3 Sing. Fut. 
παρέσται. 


2. jar (Stem ἡ ¢), Z sit, has, like κεῖμαι, the Inflexion of 
a Perfect. | 
Pres. ἦμαι ἥμεθον ἥμεθα “ Imperat. ἧσο. 


ἦσαι ἧσθον ἦσθε , now, etc. 
ἧσται ἧσθον ἦνται Inf. ἧσθαι. 
Sate Part. ἥμενος. 


Impf. juny 700, etc. 


In Attic prose we find almost exclusively the compound: 


κάθημαι, of which 3 Sing. κάθηται, Subj. καθῶμαι, Opt. κα- 
θοίμην, 3 Plur. καθοῖντο, Imperat. κάθησο or κάθου (from 
kabeco), Inf. καθῆσθαι, Part. καθήμενος, Imperf. ἐκαθήμην 
(δ 240) or καθήμην, 3 Sing. ἐκάθητο or καθῆστο, 3 Plur. 
ἐκάθηντο or καθῆντο. 


§ 316. The following Strong Aorists, formed without a 
connecting vowel from verbs whose Present-Stem mostly 
follows the First Principal Conjugation, likewise belong to 
the First Class of Verbs in pe: 


Stems in a, 
1. ἔ-τβη-ν (Stem Ba), Pres. βαίνω, J go, Impéfat. βῆθι 5 
in compounds also Ba (κατάβα), Inf. βῆναι, Part. Bac. 


ὃ 316. Dialects.—1. 3 Plur. ἔβᾶν, Subj. Beiw, Bny or Beiy, βείομεν [Her. 
Béwper], Inf. βήμεναι. 


| 
| 
d 
4 


ee ee ee ee 


i dG εὐὐμώοσι “Δ᾽ ὗ »ῃ; 


§ 316. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN pu. 181. 


2. ynpa-var (Stem ynpa), Inf. to the Pres. γηρά-σκω, 7 
grow old, ὃ 324,1. 

3. Bina (Stem δ ρα), Pres. διτδρά-σκω, ὃ 324, 2, L run, 
Inf. δρᾶ-ναι, Part. δράς. 

4. -Kra-v (Stem «7 a), Pres. κτείνω, 1 kill, Part. κτά-ς, 
Part. Mid. κτά-μενος (Killed). 

5. t-nrn-v (Stem πτα, wre), Pres. πέτομαι, J fly, Part. 
nrac, Mid. πτάμενος, Inf. πτέσθαι. 

6. t-rAn-v (Stem τὰ a), LJ endured, Subj. rho, Opt. τλαίην, 
Imperat. τλῆθι, Inf. τλῆναι, Fut. τλήσομαι, Perf. τέτληκα 
(§ 317, D., 10). 

7. ἔτφθη-ν (Stem φ 0a), Pres. φθάνω, 7 anticipate, Inf. 
φθῆναι. 

- 8. ἐ-πριά-μην (Stem πρι α);.1 bought, Imperat. πρίῶ. 


Stems ™ ε. 


9. ἔ-σβη-ν (Stem of ε), Pres. σβέννυμι, I quench, § 319, 
7, Inf. σβῆναι. 
10. ἔ-σκλητν (Stem σκλ ε), Pres. σκέλλω, L dry, Inf. 
σκλῆναι. ᾿ 
11. Imperat. σχέ-ς, from σχέ-θι (Stem ox), Pres. ἔχω, 
§ 327, 6, 1 Sing. Ind. ἔ-σχτ-ο-ν. 


Stems im w. 


12. ἑεκάλω-ν (Stem arw),Z was caught, Pres. ἁλίσκομαι 
(8 324,17), Opt. ἁλοίην, Inf. ἁλῶναι, Part. ἁλούς. 
᾿ 13, ἐ-βίω-ν (Stem Bw), Pres. Beane live, Opt. βιῴην, 
Inf. βιῶναι, Part. βιούς. 


Dialects.—2. Part. γηράς. 

3. (Her. ἔδρην.] 

4, ὃ Sing. tera, 3 Plur. ἔκτᾶν, Subj. κτέωμεν, Inf. κτάμεναι, Mid. ἔκτἄτο 
(he was killed, § 225, D., 2), Pass. Aor., 3 Plur. ἔκτἄθεν. 

5. Mid. ἔπτἄτο, Subj. πτῆται, Dor. 1 Sing. Act. ἔπτᾶν. 

6. 3 Plur. ἔτλᾶν. 

7. Subj. 3 Sing. φθήῃ or φθῆσι(ν), (rapa) pOainor(y), 1 Plur. φθέωμεν. 
12. ἥλων, Subj. ἁλώω, Opt. 3 Sing, ἁλοίη, Inf. ἁλώμεναι. 


182.  ΕἾΒΒΤ CLASS OF VERBS IN. 8 816. 


14. ἔτγνω-ν (Stem γ vw), Pres. yi-yvé-oxw, [come to 
know (§ 324, 14), Opt. γνοίην, Imperat. γνῶθι, Inf. γνῶναι, 
Part. “γνούς. . 

Stems wm ι. 


15. Imperat. πῖ-θι (Stem 7), Pres. shee ail drink, 1 Sing. 
Aor. Ind. ἔπιον (§ 321, 4). 


Stems in v. 
16. ἔ-δυ-ν (Stem dv), Pres. δύω, J. dive, Imperat. δῦθι, 
Inf. δῦναι, Part. δύς. As to its meaning, see ὃ 329, 4. ᾿ 
17. ἔ-φυ-ν (Stem pu) L became, Pres. pow, 7 produce, 
Inf. φῦναι. 


Dialects.—14. Subj. γνώω, Inf. γνώμεναι. 

15. Tmperat. πίε. 

16. 3 Plur. ἔδὕ-ν, Subj. δύω, δύῳς, 3 wt Opt. δύη (from δυ-ίη), Inf. 
δῦμεν. 

17. 3 Plur. ἔφῦν. 

Besides these, the following are peculiar to the Ep. Dialect: 

18. Part. ἀπούρᾶς, Pres. ἀπαυράω, I take away. 

19. Stem 6A, Pres. βάλλω, 1 throw, 3 Dual Evi Brine (met Meare 
Fut. ξυμβλήσομαι, Mid. ἔβλητο (was hit, § 255, D. 2), Subj. βλή-ε-ται, 2 
Sing. Opt. βλεῖο, Inf. βλῆσθαι, Part. ἀλώμενος (hit). 

20. Stem otra, Pres. οὐτάω, 1 wound, 8 Sing. obra, Inf. οὐτάμεναι, 
Part. Mid. οὐτάμενος (wounded), Verb. Adj. οὔτἄτος. 

21. Stem ave; Pres. πτήσσω, I stoop, 2 Dual ἐ-πτή-την, Part. Perf. 
πεπτηώς. 

22. Stem πλα, Pres. πελάζω, I approach, Aor. Mid. πλῆτο. 

23. Stem Bp w, Pres. βι-βρώ-σκω, I eat (δ 324, 18), Aor. ἔβρων. 

24. Stem wrAw, Pres. πλώω, I sail, 2 Sing. Aor. Emus, Part. πλώ-ς. 

25. Stem «rz, Pres, κτίζω͵ T ‘found, Part. Aor. Mid. ἐῦ-κτί-μενος ont 
Sounded). 

26. Stem ¢ 61, Pres. φθίνω; T waste away, Subj. Aor. Mid. φθίεται, Opt. 
φθίμην, φθῖτο, Inf. φθίσθαι, Part. φθίμενος. 

27. Stem «dv, Pres. κλύω, 1 hear, Imperat. Aor. κλῦθι Or κέκλῦθι; κλῦτε 
OF κέκλυτε. 

28. Stem Av, Pres. λύω, I loose, Aor. Mid. λύμην, λύτο OF λῦτο. 

29. Stem wv v, Pres. πνέω, I breathe, Aor. Mid. ἄμπνῦτο (he recovered 
breath). 

30. Stem συ, Pres. σεύω, 1 scare, Aor. Mid. ciro, Part. σύμενος. 

31. Stem xv, Pres. yéw, J pour (ὃ 248), Aor. Mid. ἔχυτο, χυτο, Part. 
χύμενος. 


ὌὌ 


§ 317. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 183 


§ 317. Several Perfects also have some forms without a 
connecting vowel: 

A) Vowel Stems. 

A number of Vowel-Stems form the Sing, Perf. Ind. 
Act. regularly, but in the Dual and Plural of the Perfect 
and Pluperf. Ind., in the other moods, and in the Infinitive 
and Participle, may connect the endings immegiately with 
the Perfect-Stem. 

1. Stem Ba, Pres. Baivw, L go ὃ 521, 1). 

Perf. Ind. βέβηκ-α βέβα-μεν 
βέβηκ-ας βέβἄ-τον βέβα-τε 
βέβηκ-ε βέβα-τον βεβα-σι(υ). 

8 Plur. Subj. βεβῶσι(ν), Part. βεβώς, βεβῶσα, Gen. 
βεβῶτος. 

2. Stem ya (for γεν} Pres. γίγνομαι, «7 become, Perf. — 
yé-you-a, Plur. also yé-ya-pev (ὃ 327, 14), Part. γεγώς, 
Gen. yeyoroe. 


Dialects.—32. Stem aX (ἄλλομαι, I spring), Aor. Mid. ἄλσο ἃ ἄλτο, Subj. 
ἅλεται, Part. ἄλμενος. 

33. Stem γεν, only in γέντο, he took. 

84, Stem dey (Pres. δέχομαι, I accept), Aor. ἐδέγμην, 3 Sing. δέκτο, Im- 
perat. δέξο, Inf. δέχθαι (compare ὃ 273, D.). 

35. Stem rAey (λέγω, 1 collect), Aor. Mid. λέκτο, he counted. 

36. Stem Aex (no Pres.), Aor. Mid. λέκτο (he laid himself’), Imperat. 
λέξο, Inf. λέχθαι, Part. (κατα)λέγμενος, Aor. Act. ἔλεξα, Mid. ἐλέξατο, Fut. 
λέξομαι. 

87. Stem ΜΙγ, Pres. μίσγω, I mix, Aor. Mid. ἔμϊκτο, μῖκτο. 

38. Stem ὀρ, ὄρνυμι, I excite, Aor. Mid. ὦρτο, Imperat. ὄρσο or ὄρσεο 
(dpcev), Inf. ὄρθαι, Part. dppevoc. 

39. Stem ray (πήγνυμι, I fix), Aor. Mid. ἔπηκτο, it was fixed. 

40. Stem zaX (πάλλω, I wield), Aor. Mid. πάλτο. 

41. Stem wep (πέρθω, I destroy), Inf. Aor. Mid. πέρθαι (to be ie 
stroyed). 

To these are to be added the Participles which have become Ad- 
jectives, ἄσμενος, glad (Stem ἁ δ᾽ ἁνδάνω, I plane); ixpevoc, favorable 
(Stem ix, ἱκνέομαι, I come). 

§ 317. Dialects—1. Hom. 3 Plur. BeBaaor(v), Part. βεβαώς, Dual Be- 
βαῶτε. 

2. Hom. 3 Plur. γεγαᾶσι(ν), Part. γεγαώς, yeyavia, Gen. γεγαῶτος, 3 
Dual Plup. (é&)yeyarnv. 


184 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. § 317. 


3. Stem Ova, Pres. θνήτσκω, 7 die, Perf. ré-Ovn-xca, Plur. 
τέ-θνἅ-ςμεν, etc., Τηἶ τεθνάναι, Part. τεθνεώς, τεθνεῶσα, 
τεθνεός, Pluperf. 8 Plur. ἐτέθναᾶ σαν (§ 324, 4). 

4. Stem ora, Pres. ἵτστη-μι, Perf. ἕσστη-κα, 7 stand, Plur. 
ἕ-στα-μεν, Subj. ἑστῶμεν, ἑστῶσι(ν), Opt. ἑσταίην, Imperat. 
ἕσταθι, ἑστάτω, ἕστατον, ἕστᾶτε, Inf. ἑστἄναι, Part. ἑστώς, 
ἑστῶσα, ἑὅτός, ἀεη. ἑστῶτος, ὃ Plur. Pluperf. ἕστάᾶσαν 
(δ 306, etc.). 


5. Stem δὲ, Perf. dé-ci-a or dé-Sor-xa, L fear, Plur. δέδι- 
μεν, δεδίασι(ν), Subj. dediw, Opt. δεδιείην, Imperat. δέδιθι, 
Inf. δεδιέναι, Part. δεδιώς, Pluperf. ἐδεδίειν, 3 Dual ἐδεδίνα 
8 Plur. ἐδέδισαν, also Aor. ἔδεισα, Fut. δείσομαι. 


Obs.—The regular and irregular forms are mostly both in use. 


B) Consonant Stems. 


In these the peculiar changes of the vowels (§ 303) and 
consonaamts (δὲ 45-49) must be observed. 


6. Stem id (Aor. εἶδον, 1 saw, ὃ 327, 8). 


Perf. Ind. oié-a,I[ know, ἴσ-μεν; Subj. εἰδῶ εἰδῶμεν 
οἷ-σθα ἴσ-τον ἴσ-τε εἰδῆς εἰδῆτον εἰδῆτε 
οἷδ-ε(ν) ἴσ-τον ἴσ-ἄσι(ν) εἰδῇ εἰδῆτον εἰδῶσι(ν) 

Opt. εἰδείην, Imp. to-01 ἴσ-τον ἴσ-τε Inf. εἰδέναι 


ἴσττω ἴσ-των io-rwoayv Part. εἰδώς, εἰδυῖα, 
εἰδός, Gen. εἰδότ-ος 


Plup. ydecv or ἤδη (I knew) ἤδειμεν ΟΥ̓́ἦσμεν 
ἤδεισθα “ἤδησθα ἤδειτον OF yoror ἤδειτε “ gore 
yoer(v) “ gon ἠδείτην “ἤστην ἤδεσαν “ἧσαν 


Ἐπί, εἴσομαι, Verb. Adj. ἰστέον. 


Dialects.—3. Imperat. τέθνᾶθι, Inf. τεθνάμεν(αι), Gen. Part. τεθνεῶτος, 
τεθνηῶτος, τεθνειῶτος, τεθνηότος, τεθνειότος, Fem. τεθνηυῖα. 

4, 2 Plur. Ind. also ἕστητε, Part. ἑσταώς, Gen. ἑσταότος [Her. ἑστεώς, 
ἑστεῶσα]. ᾿ 


ὅ. δείδια, δείδιμεν, Imperat. δείδιθι, 1 Sing. Perf. also δείδοικα, Aor. ἔδ- 


δεισα (compare ὃ 77, D.). 
6. 1 Plur. id-per [Herod. and sometimes also in Att. writers οὐδὲ δεν, 
3 Plur. οἴδασι], Subj. εἰδέω or idéw, Plur. εἴδομεν, εἴδετε, Inf. ἴδμεν(αι), 
Fem. Part. ἰδυῖα, Plup. [gdea] ἠείδης, goee(v) or ἠείδη. [2 Plur. goéare], 3 
~ Plur.icay, Fut. εἰδήσω. 


ee A 


κι 
§ 318. SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 185 


Obs.—Besides οἶσθα, we rarely have οἶδας, more fréquently ὕδεις, 
gone, together with ὕδεισθα, and gdeuer, ἤδετε, instead οἵ ἤδειμεν; 
ὕδειτε, 


7. Stem ix, only in the Perf. ἔοικα, 7 resemble, appear, 
1 Plur. poet. Zocyuev, 3 Plur. quite irregularly εἴξ ἃ στ(ν) 
(compare ἴσασι), Inf. εἰκέναι (poet. with Zouévar), Part. εἰκ ὦς 
(with ἐοικώς); eixvia, εἰκός, Plur. ἐῴκειν. 

8. Stem κραγΎ, Pres. κράζω, 7 cry, Perf. κέκραγα, Im- 
perat. κέσκκραχ-θι. 


IJ. Szeconp CLAss OF VERBS IN μι. 


8. 318. 1. The Second Class of the Verbs in μὲ belongs” 
to this conjugation only in regard to the inflexion of the 


Dialects.—’7. Imperf. εἶκε, Perf. [Her. οἴκα, οἰκώς], Dual ἔϊκτον, ὃ Dual 
Plup. ἐΐκτην, 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. ἤϊκτο or éixro. 

Besides : 

9. Stem pa, 2 Dual Perf. μέμᾶτον, strive, péipdper, μέμᾶτε, μεμάᾶσι, Ἰτα- 
perat. μεμἄᾶτω, Part. μεμαώς, via, 6c; Gen. ὥτος, 3 Plur. Plup. μέμᾶσαν. 

10. Stem rr<a, Perf. τέτληκα, I am patient, 1 Plur. τέτλᾶμεν, Opt. re- 
τλαίην, Imperat. τέτλᾶθι, Inf. rerAaper(ar), Part. τετληώς, nvia, Gen. τε- 
τληότος. 

11. Stem ἀνωγ, Perf. ἄνωγα, I command, 1 Plur. ἄνωγμεν, Imperat. 
ἄνωχθι, 3 Sing. avoxOw, 2 Plur. ἄνωχθε, Plup. ἠνώγεα. 

12. Stem éyep, Perf. ἐγρ-ήγορ-α, I am awake, 2 Plur. Imperat. ἐγρή- 
γορθε, ὃ Plur. Ind. ἐγρηγόρθᾶσι(ν). 

13. Stem ἐλυθ, Perf. εἰλήλουθα, I have come, 1 Plur. εἰλήλουθμεν. 

14. Stem πενθ, Perf. πέπονθα (Pres. πάσχω, I suffer, ὃ 327, 9), 2 Plur. 
πέποσθε (for πεπονθ-τε), Fem. Part. πεπᾶθυϊα. | 

15. Stem 7:0, Perf. πέποιθα (Pres. πείθω, I persuade), 1 Plur. Plup. 
ἐπέπιθμεν, Imperat. πέπεισθι. 

Farther the Participles: 

16. Stem Bow (βιβρώσκω, I eat, ὃ 824, 18), Part. Perf. BeBpwe, Gen. 
βεβρῶτος. 

17. Stem πτε, πτω (πίπτω, I fall, § 327, 15), Perf. πέπτωκα, Part. 
Gen. πεπτεῶτος, Nom. πεπτώς. 


§ 318. Dialects.—Ion. 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. -ῦ σε (ν), together with 
-baor(v). Hom. 2 Sing. Imperat. - and -ὅθι (daivd, ὄμνῦθιὼ), Inf. 
Hom. -ὕμεναι, dbpev (ζευγνυμεν) Hom. forms from δαίνῦμαι, I feast, 
the Opt. dawiro, for δαινυ-ι-το. Similar cases see below, ὃ 319, 32. In 


/. 


186 SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. § 319. Ὁ 


Present-St@m. The Present-Stem of this Second Class is 
formed by adding the syllable » v to the Pure Stem. 

2. The quantity of the v is determined by the rules in 
§ 303, hence δείκνυμι, but ἐδείκνῦμεν. 

8. Vowel-Stems double ν in the Present-Stem : Stem 
κερα, κερά-ννυμι, LT mix. 

4. Here also numerous additional forms are in use ac- 
cording to the First Principal Conjugation (δεικνύω), espe- 
cially in the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind.: δεικνύουσι(ν) ; and these 
forms are exclusively used in the Pres. Subj. and Opt. 

5. Most of the Verbs of this class have the Weak Aor- 
ast; only σβέννυμι, 7 quench (Stem σ 2 «), forms the 2 Aor- 
“ast ἔσβην, Inf. σβῆναι. Compare §§ 316,9; 319, 7. 

The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs are inserted on 
p. 128. 


§ 319. The following verbs belong to the Second Class 
of Verbs in μι: 


Stems in a. 
1. κεράννυμι (Stem κερᾶ, κρ ἃ), I mix. 
Aor. ἐκερᾶσα Perf. Act. κἐκρᾶκα Ane Dass ἐκράθην 
“Mid. κέκρᾶμαι Ε  ( ἐκεράσθην 


2% κρεμάννυμι (Stem κρεμα), 1 hang, trans. Mid. κρέμαμαι, I hang, 
intrans. (§ 312, 12) 
Fut. κρεμῶ (ὃ 268) ἐκρεμάσθην 
Aor. ἐκρέμᾶσα 
3. πετάννυμι (Stem wera), I spread. 
πετῶ (δ 263) ἐπετάσθην 
ἐπέτἄᾶσα πέπ(ε)τᾶμαι [ pate-o| 
4. σκεδάννυμι (Stem σκεδα), 1 scatter; additional form σκίδνημι 
(δ 312, Ὁ. 16, }) 
σκεδῶ (§ 263) ἐσκεδάσθην 


ἐσκέδᾶσα ἐσκέδασμαι. 


the New-Ion. Dialect the « of the Stem dere is lost in δέξω, ἔδεξα, δέ- 
δεγμαι, ἐδέχθην ; Hom. Pf. (δείδεγμαι, 1 salute) 3 Plur. δειδέχαται. 


§ 319. Dialects.—1. Compare § 819, D. 16, and § 812, Ὁ. 10,2. Other 


forms : κεράω, κεραίω, Aor. ἔκρησα. 
. 2. Fut. κρεμόω, κρεμάᾳς (δ 2438, D.). 


" 8.519. SECOND CLASS OF VERBS ΙΝ μι. 187 


Stems in ε. . 

Obs.—Several of these Stems originally ended in ς. 

5. ἕννυμι (Stem originally Fec, compare Lat. ves-tis), I clothe (only 
ἀμφι-ἔννυμι is in use). 

ἀμφι-ῶ (§ 268) 
Fut. Mid. ἀμφι-ἔσομαι ἠμφίεσμαι 
Aor. ἠμφί-εσα (§ 240) 
Inf. Aor. Mid. ἐπιέσασθαι 
6. κορέννυμι (Stem cope), I satisfy. 


ἐκόρεσα ἐκορέσθην 
κεκόρεσμαι 
7. σβέννυμι (Stem σβε), I quench, “ 
σβέσω ἱ tities ἔσβεσμαι ἐσβέσθην 
ἔσβεσα 
ἔσβην ἔσβηκα 
(δ 810, 9) intransitive (§ 329, 5) 
Fut. σβήσομαι 


8. στορέννυμι (Stem crops) (compare 11 and 25), J spread 
(compare Lat. ster-n-o) 


στορῶ (ὃ 263). ἐστόρεσμαι 
ἐστόρεσα. 
Stems im w. 
9. ζώννυμι (Stem Zw), J gird. 
ζώσω ἔζωσμαι 
ἔζωσα (Mid.) ἐζωσάμην 
10. ῥώννυμι (Stem pw), I strengthen. 
ῥώσω ἔῤῥωμαι (I am strong) ἐῤῥώσθην 
11, στρώννυμι (Stem orpw). Compare No. 8.. : 
στρώσω ἔστρωμαι ᾿ ἐστρώθην 
ἔστρωσα 
12. χρώννυμι (Stem ypw), I color. 
Expwoa κέχρωσμαι ἐχρώσθην. 
~ Consonant-Stems. 
13. ἄγνυμι (Stem ay, originally Fay, ὃ 34, D.), I break. 
᾿ ἄξω taya (I am broken) ᾿ ἐξάγην 
ἔαξα (§ 237) (§ 275, 2) 


Dialects.—5. Imperf. εἴνυον for ἐσ-νυον [Inf. Pres. εἴνυσθαι], Fut. ἀμ- 
φιέσω, ἕσσω, Aor. ἕσσα, Mid. ἑέσσατο, Perf. Mid. εἷμαι, ἕσσαι, Part. εἱμένος, 
2 Sing. Plup. ἕσσο, 3 Sing. ἕστο, ἕεστο, 3 Plur. εἵατο. 

6. Aor. Mid. κορέσσατο, Part. Perf. Act. κεκορηώς, satiated, Mid. κεκό- 


pnpat. 
13. 7a with ἔαξα (Her. Perf. ἔηγα]. 


188 SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN mw. § 319) 


14. δείκνυμι, see ὃ 318. | 
15. cipyvupe (Stem eipy), 1 shut in (addit. form cipyw) 
εἵρξω : εἵρχθην 
εἷρξα Part. ἕρξας, εἵργμαι 
16. ζεύγνυμι (Stem ζυγ), I bind. 
ζεύξω ἐζύγην 
ἔζευξα ἔζευγμαι [ἐζεύχθην] 
17. κτίννυμι (Stem κτεν), I kill, with κτείνω (§ 968) , 
18. μίγνυμι (Stem pry), I mix, with μίσγω (ὃ 827...) 


μίξω μέμιχα ᾿ ἐμίχθην 
ἔμιξα μέμιγμαι ἐμίγην 
19. οἴγνυμι (Stem οἰγ), J open (with οἴγω) 
οἴξω ἔῳχα and ἔῳγα (§ 279) τ ἐῴχθην 
ἔῳξα (§ 237) ἔῳγμαι 
20. ὄλλυμι (Stem ὁλ and ὀλ ε), for ὀλνυμι, I destroy. 
ὀλῶ (ὃ 262) ὀλώλεκα (ὃ 275, 1) , 
ὥλεσα 
Fut. Mid. ὀλοῦμαι ὄλωλα ἱ intrans., I perish. 
ὠλόμην 
21. ὄμνυμι (Stem 6p, 6pmo0), I swear. 
ὀμοῦμαι (Act.) ὀμώμοκα (ὃ 275, 1) -ὠμόσθην 
ὥμοσα org σ. Perf. Mid. ὀμώμοται Verb, Adj. (ἀνγ)ώμοτος 
ὀμώμοσται 
22. ὀμόργνυμι (Stem dpopy), I wipe out. 
wpopéa (Mid.) ὠμόρχθην 
23. πήγνυμι (Stem ray), I fiw [compare Lat. pango] — 
.«ἔπηξα πέπηγα (I am fixed) ἐπήχθην 
ἐπάγην 
94, ῥήγνυμι (Stem pay), 1 tear. 
ἔῤῥηξα (Mid.) ἔῤῥωγα (I am torn) ᾿ ἐῤῥάγην 
(§ 978) ῥαγήσομαι 


20. στόρνυμι (Stem crop), with στορέννυμι (8) and στρώννυμι (11) 
26. φράγνυμι (Stem φραγ), also φάργνυμι, and, according to 
Class 4, a, ¢pdoow, I shut in, lock in. 


Dialects.—15. Imperf. ἐέργνῦ, with ἐέργω [ἔργω], 8 Plur. Perf. Mid. 
ἔρχαται, Plup. épxaro (ὃ 287), Part. Perf. ἐεργμένος, Aor. Pass. ἐρχθείς,᾿ 
with Imperf. ἔργαθον. 

18. Aor. Mid., § 316, 37. 

19. wiga, pEa [ἄνοιξα], Imperf. ὠΐγνυντο. 

20. ὀλέσσω [ὀλέω], Part. Aor. οὐλόμενος (destructive), with ὀλέκω. 

21. wpooca OY ὄμοσσα. 

To these also belong : nie 

27. αἴνυμαι, ἀποαίνυμαι, I take away, used only in the Pres. 


* § 320. IRREGULAR VERBS.” 189 


Obs.—Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal-Stems, as: ἡ δεῖξι-ς, 
the announcement ; 6 κρᾶ-τήρ, the mixing bowl ; τὸ εἴ-μα, the clothing 
—for Feo-pa; ἡ ζώ-νη, the girdle ; ἡ ῥώ-μη, the strength ; τὸ στρῶ-μα, 
the carpet; τὸ ζυγ-ό-ν, the yoke; ὁ ὄλε-θρο-ς, the ruin ; ὁ συν-ωμό- 
τη-ς, the conspirator ; ὁ πάγ-ο-ς, the frost, hoar-frost: 


Cuap. XIL.—IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST 
PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION. 


§ 320. The irregularities of the Greek Verb chiefly con- 
sist in the Present-Stem differing from the Verbal-Stem in 
a way different from that which has been’pointed out above, 
§ 245, etc. To the four classes there enumerated the fol- 
lowing four classes are to be added. : 

Obs.—In these as well as in the following lists, the principal forms 


only are given, from which the rest are easily formed. (Mid.), 
added to a tense, denotes that,in addition to the Active, the 


Dialects.—28. ἄνυμι (and aviw), I complete, only Imperf. Mid. jviro. 

29. ἄρνυμαι, I acquire, Aor. ἠρόμην, Inf. ἀρέσθαι, 1 Aor. 2 Sing. ἤραο, 
3 Sing. ἤρατο. 

30. ἄχνυμαι, I grieve, Aor. ἀκάχοντο (§ 257, D.), Perf. ἀκάχημαι (δ 275, 
1), 3 Plur. ἀκηχέδαται (δ 287, D.), 3 Plur. Plup. ἀκαχείατο, Part. ἀκαχή- 
μενος and ἀκηχέμενος. Moreover, the Active ἀκαχίζω (I grieve), Aor. 
ἤκαχον and ἀκάχησα (compare ὃ 326). 

31. γάνυμαι, I rejoice, Fut. yaviooera. 

32. δαίνυμι, I entertain, Opt. Pres. Mid. 3 Sing. dawiro (δ 318, D.), 3 
Plur. dawiar’, Fut. daiow (Mid.), Aor. ἔδαισα (Mid.). 

33. καίνυμαι (Stem κα δ), I surpass, Perf. κέκασμαι (I am distin- 
guished). 

34. κίνυμαι, I move, additional form of κινέω, Preterite é-«-o-v, I went, 
Subj. «i-w, Opt. κί-οι-μι, Part. κι-ών. 

35. τίνῦμι, τίνύμαι, additional form of rivw, ὃ 821, D.5. 

86. ὀρέγνυμι, additional form of dpéyw, I stretch ont, 3 Plur. Perf. Mid. 
ὀρωρέχαται (§ 287). 

87, ὄρνυμι (Stem ὀρ), I eacite, Fut. spew, Aor. ὥρορον (δ 257, D.), 
Perf. dpwpa (ὃ 275, 1), I have arisen (Lat. or-ior], Aor. Mid. 3 Sing. ὦρτο, 
arose (§ 316, 38), Perf. Mid. 3 Sing. Ind. ὀρώρ-ε-ται, Subj. ὀρώρηται, with 
Imperf. Mid. dpéovro. 

38. τάνυμαι, With raviw, reivw, 1 extend, stretch. 


190 FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. » § 321. 3 3 


| corresponding. Middle form is also in use; 6, g.,in addition to 
ἔτισα (No. 5) ἐτισάμην also i is used. 


Lifth, or Nasal Class. 
ς 321. The Verbal-Stem is strengthened by the addition 
of v, or of a syllable containing v, to form the Present- 
Stem. 
a) v alone, often united with lengthening of the vowel, 
is added to the following Stems: 


1. Stem B a, Pres. Baivw, I go. - 
Aor. Act. Fut. Perf. Pass. 


ἔ-βη-ν (δ 816,1) βήσομαι βέβηκα (ὃ 817, 1) 

ἔβη-σα ἐ βήσω (§ 829, 2) Verb. Adj. βᾶτός 
2. Stem ra, Pres. ἐλαύν ὦ, 1 drive. 

ἤἠλᾶ-σα ἐλῶ (ὃ 263) ἐλήλακα (§ 275, 1) ἠλάθην 


ἐλήλαμαι Verb. Adj. ἐλατέος 

8. Stem φθα, Pres. φθἄν ὠ, I anticipate. 
᾽ ἔ-φθη-ν (δ 816,7) φθήσομαι ἔφθἄκα 

ἔ-φθᾶ-σα 

4, Stem wi, Pres. rivw, I drink (additional Stem zo). Compare 
§ 827, 10. 
ἔ-πι-ο-ν (δ 316,15) πίομαι (§ 265) 

5. Stem ri, Pres. rivw, I pay penalty. 


é-ri-oa (Mid.) τίσω τέτικα ἐτίσθην 
τέτισμαι 
6. Stem φθι, Pres. φθἕν ὦ, I perish, waste away. 
ἔ-φθι-σα φθίσομαι ἔφθιμαι ἐφθίθην 
7. Stem dv, Pres. δύν ὦ (with δύω, Class 1), .1 immerge. 


é-dv-y (§ 316, 16) δύσω δέδυκα ἐδύθην 
édvoa, I dipped. . © ez 

~ 8, Stem ὃ ἄ κ, Pres. ὃ ἀ κν ὦ, I bite. [ 
ἔ-δᾶκ-ο-ν δήξομαι δέδηχα ἐδήχθην 


§ 321. Dialects—1. Aor. Mid. ἐβήσετο, ὃ 268, Ὁ. 

2. Pres. ἐλάω, Fut. dw, ἐλάᾳς, ὃ 248, D., Aor. ἔλασσα, Mid. ἠλᾶσάμην. 
3 Plup. Mid. ἐληλάδατο (δ 287, D.) [ἠλάσθην]. 

3. Ep. φθάνω, Part. Aor. Mid. φθάμενος. 

5. Ep. rivw, with ri-w and τίνυμι, ὃ 319, D..35. 

6. Ep. gdtve, 2, Aor. ἐφθίμην, ἔφθὶ a 316, D. 26; with Pres, φθι- 
νύθω. 

7. Aor. Mid. ἐδύσετο, ὃ 268, D. [Pres. ἘΡΕΟΝ I put on. Compare | 
§ 323]. : ett 


«8.322. ‘FIFTH, OR NASAL 
ν᾿ 


9. Stem κἄμ, Pres. κάμνω, 1 weary. 
ἔ-καμ-ο-ν "καμοῦμαι κέκμηκα (ὃ 
10. Stem rep, Pres. τέμν ὦ, I cut. 
ἔ-τεμ-ο-ν (ἔτᾶμον) τεμῶ τέτμηκα (§ 282) ἐτμήθην 
§ 322, 6) The syllable av is added to the following 
Stems : 


11. Stem aic@, Pres. αἰσθ-άν-ο-μαι, I perceive. 


ησθ-ό-μην αἰσθ-ή-σομαι ἤσθ-η-μαι 
12. Stem ἁμαρτ, Pres. dpapr-av-w,T err, sin. 
ἥμαρτ-ο-ν | ἁμαρτ-ήτσομαι ἡμάρτ-η-κα ἡμαρτή-θην 
13. Stem avé, Pres. avé-adv-w and αὔξω, I increase | aug-eo| 
nvé-n-ca αὐξήσω ηὔξηκα . ηὐξήθην 


αὐξήδομαι (Passive) 
14, Stem βλαστ, Pres. βλαστάνω, I bud. 


ἔ-βλαστ-ο-ν βλαστ-ή-σω ἐβλάστηκα (§ 274 exc.) 
15. Stem dap0, Pres. δαρθάνω, I sleep. 
ἔ-δαρθ-ο-ν δαρθ-ή-σομαι δεδάρθηκα 
16. Stem ἐχθ, Pres. (ἀπγλεχθάνομαι, I am hated. 
(ἀπ)ηχθ-ό-μην (ἀπ)εχθ-ή-σομαι (ἀπ)ήχθημαι 
17, Stem iZ, Pres. iZavw and ‘Zw, 1 seat myself. 
18. Stem «vx, Pres. κι χᾶν ὦ, I meet (compare ὃ 313, D. 6) 
ἔ-κιχ-ο-ν κῖχ-ή-σομαι : 
19. Stem οὐ ὃ, Pres. οἰδάνω and oidéw, I swell. 
οἰδή-σω ᾧδηκα 
20. Stem ὀλεσθ, Pres. ὀχλεσθάνω, L slip. 
ὦλισθο-ν ὀλισθ-ή-σω 
21. Stem ὀσφρ, Pres. ὀσφραίνομαι, ἴ smell. 
ὠσφρ-ό-μην ὀσφρ-ἤ:σομαι 
22. Stem ὀφλ, ~—- Pres. ὀφλ- σκ-άν-ω (compare ὃ 824) and 
5 ὀφείλω, I owe. 
ὦφλ-ο-ν ὀφλ-ήτ-σω ὥφληκα 


Dialects.—9. Part. Perf. κεκμηώς, Gen. κεκμηῶτος. 

10. With τμήγω, Aor. Pass, 3 Plur. éryayev, with Pres. τέμει. 

Peculiar to the Hom. dialect are: Aor. ¢d-e(v), iluait, Fut. πε-φή- 
cova, from Stem ga, Pres. φαίνω (φαείνω), I shine, show, Aor. Pass. 
φαάνθην. 

§ 829, Dialects.—12. Aor. ἤμβροτον for ἡμρᾶτον (§ 957, Ὁ. Com- 
pare § 51, D.). 

13. ἀ(θέξω. 

15. Aor. ἐὐρᾶθον (§ 257, Ὁ... 

18, Ep. κίχάνω. . 
91, [Herod. ὀσφράνμνβν 1 hos] 


192 


23. Stem ad, Pres. 
24. Stem Oiy, Pres. 
ἔ-θῖγ-ο-ν 


25. Stem AaB, Pres. 


ἔ-λᾶβ-ο-ν 


26. Stem (a0, Pres. 


ἔ-λᾶθ-ο-ν 
Mid. ἐλαθόμην 


27. Stem A ax, Pres. 


ἔ-λᾶχ-ο-ν 


28. Stem μᾶθ, Pres. 


ἔ-μᾶθ-ο-ν 


29. Stem πῦθ, Pres. 


ἐ-πῦθ-ό-μην 


30. Stem rvy, Pres. 


ἔ-τυχ-ο-ν 


31. Stem guy, Pres. 


FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. 


avdavw, TI please. 
θιγγάνω, 1 touch. 


θίξομαι 
λαμβάνω, I take. | 
λήψομαι εἴληφα (δ 374) ἐλήφθην 


εἴλημμαι (seldom. λέλημμαι) 

λανθάνω, 1 am hidden, with ἮΝ (Class 3), 
Mid., 1, forget. 
λήσω λέληθα 
λήσομαι λέλησμαι 
λαγχάνω, I attain. 
λήξομαι εἴληχα (§ 974) 
εἴληγμαι 

μανθάνω, ἤρθαγΉ. 
μαθ-ή-σομαι μεμάθηκα 
πυνθάνομαι, 1 learn, with πεύθομαι, Class 2. 


πεύσομαι πέπυσμαι 
τυγχάνω, I meet, with τεύχω, I prepare, Cl. 2. 
τεύξομαι τε-τύχ-η-κα 


seldom τέτευχα 
φυγγάνω, I flee, with φεύγω (Class 2). 


Obs. 1.—The verbs in 23-31, whose Stem forms a short syllable, 


insert another nasal in addition to the affix a». 


In βαίνω (1) 


and ὀσφραίνομαι (21) « has crept in (§ 253), as well as in κερδαίνω, 
I gain, which forms only the Perf. κεκέρδηκα, from the Stem κερδαὶ 
all the other forms are regular, according to Class 4. A large 
part of the verbs (No. 11-16, 18-22, 28, and 30) form either some 

. or all the tenses, except those of the Present-Stem, from a Stem 
in ε (compare below, § 326). 

Obs, 2.—The following may serve as examples of the formation of 
nouns: τὸ βῆ-μα, the step ; ἡ o0i-o1-c, the consumption ; ὁ κάμ-ατο-ς, 


Dialects.—23. Imperf., ὃ 237, D., Aor. [ἕαδον] εὔαδον (ὃ 287), [adjow] 


ἕαδα. 


25. [Her. Fut. λάμψομαι, Perf. λελάβηκα, Aor. Pass. ἐλάμφθην. 


λέλαμμαι, Verb. Adj. λαμπτός.] 


Hom. Inf. Aor. Mid. λελαβέσθαι (δ 257, D.). 
26. Pres., with ἐκληθάνω, cause to forget, Aor. ἔλησα and λέλἄθον 
(§ 257, D.), χεχαθέμὴν (I forgot), Perf. Mid. λέλασμαι. 


27, ‘Aor. λέλαχον, I shared with (Fut. λάξομαι], Perf. λέλογχα. 


29. Aor. Opt. πεπύθοιτο (ὃ 257, D.). 


80. Also τεύχω, Aor. 


TETUKELY, ‘Mid. τετύκοντο, Perf. τέτυγμαι, 3 Plur. 


τετεύχαται, Aor. érixOny, with the Pres. τιτύσκομαι (§ 894, Ὁ. 37), I aim 
at, Aor. érixnoa, I met (δ 326). 


” 


§ 324. SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 193 


the exhanistion ; τὸ λῆμ-μα, the assimption ; ἡ λήθ-η, the forgetting ; 
ἡ τύχτη, the chanee, accident ; and from Stems which are length- 
ened by ε: ἡ αἴσθ-η-σι-ς, the sensation ; τὸ ee the error ; 
ὁ μαθ-η- τή- ς, the scholar. 
§ 323. c) The syllable ve is added to the following 
Stems : 
- 32. Stem Bv, Pres. Bur, I stop up. 


ἔ-βῦ-σα βύσω Mid. βέβυσμαι 
88. Stemix, ΡΊθβ. ἱκνοῦμαι, TI come, with ἱκάνω, according to 
§ 322 
ἱκ-ό- μην ἵξομαι ἵγμαι > 
34, Stem cv, Pres. evvéw, I kiss, 
ἔ-κυ-σα 


35. Stem wer, Pres. πετν ἕω, I fall (compare πίπτω, ὃ 327, 15) 
ἔ-πεσ-ο-ν (for ἔ-πετ-ο-»), together with ἔ-πιτν-ο-»ν 
36. Stem iwey, Pres. ὑπισχνοῦμαι, I promise (compare ἔχω, 
§ 327, 6) 
ὑπεσχόμην ὑποσχήσομαι ὑπέσχημαι 
so likewise ἀμπισχνοῦμαι, I wear (also ἀμπέχομαι), Aor. ἤμπισχον, Inf. 
ἀμπισχεῖν. 


§ 324. Siath Class, or Inchoative Verbs. 


The Verbal-Stem is enlarged by affixing ox to form the 
Present-Stem. This ox is added to Vowel-Stems (exe. 21) 
at once, but to Consonant-Stems after the insertion of the 
connecting vowel x. Several of the verbs belonging to this 
class (Nos. 2, 6, 7, 13, 14, 16, 20) farther strengthen the 
Present-Stem by means ‘of a reduplication with the vowel 

> γιτ-γνώ-σκ-ω [ Lat. (g)-n0-sc-o |. 


§ 323. Dialects.—32. [Herod. Bivw.] 

33. ἵκω, Aor. ἵξον (δ 268, D,), Part. ἴκμενος, favorable (δ 316, D.). 

34. κύσσα. 

Moreover (to a—c), the Verbs: 

37. Stem ἀλετ, Pres. ἀλιταίνω, I sin, Aor. ἤλιτον, Mid. seg ie Part. 
Perf. ἀλιτήμενος, sinful, 

38. Stem ad ¢, Pres. ἀλφάνω, I acquire, Aor. ἦλφον. 

39. ἀγινέω, only in Pres., I lead, with ἄγω. 

40. ἐρυγγάνω, 1 roar, Aor. ἤρυγον, Pres. also ἐρεύγόμαι. 

41. Stem yao, Pres, χανδάνω, E embrace, Aor. ἔχἄδον, Fut. χείσομαι, 
Perf. κέχανδα. I 


194 SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. § 324, 


As many of these verbs denote a beginning or coming 
into being, all of them are usually called Inchoatives. 


: Stems ἦγ a. , 
1. Stem yn pa, Pres. yn p 4-ox-w,I grow old (seldom ynpa-w). Com- 
pare sene-sc-o 
é-ynpd-oa ynpa-copat γε-γήρα-κα 
Inf. γηρᾶ-ναι (ὃ 816, 2) ἶ 
2. Stem dpa, Pres. δι-δρά-σκ-ω, I run (used only in com- 


pounds) 
ἔ-δρᾶ-ν δρά-σομαι δέ-δρᾶ-κα (δ 316, 8) 
8. Stem ἦβα, Pres. ἡ βά-σκ-ω, I become marriageable (compare 
pube-sc-0) 
ἥβη-σα 
4, Stem Ova (from θ av), Pres. θν ἡ -σκ-ω, 1 α͵ό (usually ἀποθνήσκω) 
ἔ-θἄν-ον θᾶν-οῦμαι τέ-θνη-κα (§ 317, 8) 
: Fut: 3, τεθνήξω, ὃ 2391 θνη-τό-ς 
(mortal) 
5. Stem ira, Pres. ἱλά-σκ-ομαι, I coneiliate. 
Mid. ἱλᾶ-σά-μην ἱλά-σ-ο-μαι ἱλά-σθη-ν 
6. Stem pva,~ Pres. μι-μνήτσκ-ω, I remember. 
ἔ-μνη-σα ᾿ μνή-σω ἐ-μνή-σθη-ν 
μέ-μγνη-μαι μνη-σθήσομαι 
[memini] 
7%. Stem wpa, Pres. πι-πρά-σκ-ω, I sell. 
for the Aor. and Fut. ἀπεδόμην πέ-πρᾶ-κα ἐ-πρά-θην 
ἀποδώσομαι) πέ-πρᾶ-μαι πρα-θήσομαι 


πε-πρά-σομαι 
8. Stem ga, Pres. φά- TK-W, I say.” Compare φη-μί, ὃ 312, 5. 
9. Stem ya and yd», Pres. χά-σκ-ω, 1 open the mouth. 


ἔ-χἄν-ον χἂἄν-οῦμαι κέ-χην-α. 
Stem im ε. 
10. Stem dpe, Pres. ἀρέ-σκ-ω,͵ I please. 


ἤρε-σα ἀρέ-σω ἠρέ-σθην. 


Stems in w. 
11. Stem βιω, Pres. (ἀν α)βιώ-σκ-ομαι, I revive. 
(ἀν)ε-βίω-ν (δ 316, 13) 
(ἀν)γεβιωσάμην, I revived. Compare ὃ 329. 


8 824, SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 195 


12. Stem BA w (from por, ὃ 51, D.), Pres. BA «- anes νὰ 
ἔ-μολ-ον μολ-οῦμαι 
13. Stem βρω, Pres. βι-βρώ-σκ-ω, I consume. 
βέ-βρω-κα (Part. BeBpwe, ὃ 317, 


D. 16) 
βέ-βρω-μαι 
14. Stem γνω, Pres. γε-γνώ-σκ-ω, 1 recognize [Lat. (7) no-sc-o] 
é-yvw-v (δ 316,14) γνώ-σομαι ἔ-γνω-κα ͵ ἐ-γνώ-σθην 


ἔ-γνω-σ-μαι 
15. Stem θρω (from θ.ρ), Pres. θρὦ-σκ-ω, I leap. 
ἔ-θορ-ον 
16. Stem rpw, Pres. τι-τρώ-σκ-ω, I wound. 


ἔ-τρω-σα τρώ-σω : τέ-τρω-μαι ἐ-τρώ-θην 
17. Stem ad and ἅλω, Pres. ἁλ--σκτ-ομαι, 1 am taken. Ξ 
ἑ-ἄάλω-ν ἁλώ-σομαι ἑ-ἄλω-κα OY ἥλω-κα 

ἶ ἥλων (§ 316, 12) (compare § 237) 
18. Stem ἀμβλ and ἀμβλω, Pres. ἀμβλ-ί-σκ-ω, [ miscarry. 

᾿ ἤμβλω-σα ἤμβλω-κα 

19. Stem ἀναλ and ἀναλω, Pres. ἀνᾶλ-ί-σκ-ω, I expend. 

ἀνάλω-σα OY ἀνήλωσα ἀνᾶλώ-σω ἶ ἀνάλω-κα ᾿ ἀναλώ-θην 

also ἠνάλω-σα ἀνήλω-κα ἀνηλώ-θην. 

Stem ἔθ Ὁ 
. 20. Stem πι, Pres. πι-πίςσκ-ω, I give to drink. Compare zi-v-w, 
~ § 821, 4 


» - ᾿ 
ἐ-πι- σα πῖ-σω ; . 


Stems in υ. 


at. Stem κυ, Pres. κυτί-σκ-ω, I fructify. 
22. Stem pe Ou, Pres. μεθύ-σκ-ω, I make drunk, Mia. , L become. drunk. 
é-é00-oa : ἐ-μεθύ-σθην. 
— Consonant-Stems. 
23. Stem ἀμπλᾷᾶκ, Pres. ἀμπλᾶκ-ί-σκ-ω, 1 fail. 
ἠμπλᾶκ-ον : ἀμπλᾶκ-ἠ-σω 
24, Stem (ἐπ)α ὑ ρ, Pres. (ἐπ)α ὑρ-ί-σκ-ομαι, I enjoy. 
ἐπηυρ-όμην 
Inf. ἐπαυρ-έσθαι ‘ 
§ 324. Dialects. —12. Perf. pé-p- Phone (compare § 51, D., and . 
§ 282, D.). 
13. Aor. ἔ-βρω-ν (δ 316, D. 28), with the Pros βεβρώθω. 


15. 3 Plur. Fut. ΣΉΒΕΩ͂Σ oe θόρ-νυ-μαι, according to ὃ 319]. 
16. With τρώ-ω. 


24. Aor. ἐπηῦρον, Inf. ἐπαυρεῖν. 


1906 ΒΙΧΤῊ CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. ὃ 324. 


25. Stem εὗρ, Pres. εὑρ-ί-σκ-ω, Lfind. 
εὗρ-ον (Mid) εὑρ-ή-σω εὕρ-η-κ-α εὑρ-ἐ-θην 
εὕρ-η-μαι . εὑρ-ἐ-θή-σομαι 
96. Stem στερ, Pres. στερ- ί-σκ-ω, I deprive (with στερῶ, ΜΙα. 
στέρομαι, I am deprived) , 
ἐ-στέρ-η-σα στερ-ἤ-σω ἐ-στέρ- η-κα᾿ ἐ-στερ-ή-θην 
: ᾿ ο΄ ἐ-στέρτ-η-μαι 
27. Stem ἀλυκ, Pres. ἀλύ-σκ-ω, I shun. 


ἤλυξα ἀλύξω Ν 
28. Stem dud ay, Pres. δι ὃ ἀ -σκ-ω, I teach. 
ἐ-δίδαξα διδάξω δε-δίδαχ-α ἐ-δι-δάχθην 
δε-δίδαγμαι 
29. Stem Aan, Pres. λ ά-σκ-ω,͵ I utter, speak. 
ἔςλᾶκ-ον. λακ-ή-σομαι ᾿ λέ-ληκ-α 
ἐ-λάκ-η-σα : λέ-λᾶκ-α. 


Obs. 1.—The last three Stems suppress ἃ Guttural before oc. Sev- 
eral of the Stems quoted form a part of the tenses by affixing « 
to the Stem (compare ὃ 322, Obs., and ὃ 326), especially Nos. 23, 
25, 26, 29. 
Οὗ. 2.—The following may serve as examples of the formation of 
nouns: ὁ θάν-α-το-ς, death ; τὸ μνη-μεῖο-ν, the memorial ; ὁ αὐτό- 
por-o-¢, the deserter ; ἡ γνώ-μη, the opinion ; ἡ ἅλω-σι-ς, the capture ; 
ὁ διδάσκ-αλο-ς (from the Present-Stem), the teacher; ἡ dWay-h 
(from the Verbal-Stem), the instruction ; and from Stems which’ 
are enlarged by ε: τὸ εὕρ-η-μα, the discovery; ἡ στέρ-η-σι-ς, the 
deprivation. 


Dialects.—26. Aor. orepécat, Part. Pass. Aor. orepeic. 

28. [διδασκῆσαι] a secondary Stem is da, Aor. δέδαον, I taught 4: 326, 

D. 40).. 

29. Ion, form ληκέω (§ 325), Fem. Part. Perf. λελᾶκυῖϊῖα. 

And the Special Verbs : 

30. Stem ἀλ δα, Pres. ἀλδήσκω, I become great, Aor. ἤλδανον, I made 
great. 

31. Stem «de, Pres. a cel with καλέω, 1] call. 

32. Stem par, Pres. [gav-ox-w] πι-φαύ-σκ-ω, I call, 

33. Stem a πα φ (from ἀφ), Pres. ἀπ-αφ-ί-σκ-ω, I deceive, Aor. eaten: 
Sabj. ἀπάφω. 

34, Stem 4p, Pres. ἀρ-αρ-ί-σκ-ω, I fit, Aor. ἤραρον, I fitted, Perf. ἄρηρα, 
I suit, Fem. Part. ἀρᾶρυϊα, Part. Mid. ἄρμενος, suitable, Weak Aor. ἦρσα, 
Ν᾽ fitted, Aor. Pass. ἄρθην. 

35. Stem ἐκ, Pres, 2-t i-ox-w, I make equal (compare § 317, B. 7). 

36. Imperf. toxe(v), he spoke. 

37. Stem rv x (compare ὃ 322, 30), Pres, τιτύσκομαι, I aim at. 


8.398. SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS: 197 


§ 325. Seventh, or E-class. 


A short Stem alternates with one enlarged by «. 
A) The enlarged Stem in «is the Present-Stem; the 
shorter serves to form the other tenses. 


1. Stem yap, Pres. yapé-w, 1 marry (Act. uxorem duco, Mid. nubo) ἡ 
ἔνγημ-α yap- (Mid.) γε-γάμτ-η-κα 
γε-γάμ-η-μαι 
2. Stem γηθ, Pres. yn 0é-w, I rejoice. 
yé-yn0-a, I am rejoiced. 
3. Stem dox, Pres. doné-w, I seem. 


ἔ-δοξα δόξω Mid. δέδογ-μαι 
4, Stem κυρ, Pres. κυρέ-ω and κύρω, I meet. 
é-Kup-oa κύρσω 


5. Stem μαρτυρ, Pres. papripé-w, [ am witness. 
Mid. μαρτύρομαι, I call to witness. 
6. Stem Eup, Pres. Evpéiw,L shave. Mid. ξἕύόρομαι: 


ἐ-ξυρ-ἄμην ἐξύρ-η-μαι 
7. Stem πᾶτ, Pres. πατέ-ομαι, TI eat. 
ἐ-πᾶσάμην πέπασμαι 
8. Stem pcg, Pres. ῥιπτ-έ-ω and ῥίπτ-ω (according to ὃ 249), I 
throw. 
ἔῤῥιψα ῥίψω ἔῤῥιφα {iow 
ἔῤῥιμμαι ἐῤῥίφθην 
9. Stem ὦθ, Pres. ὠθέ-ω, 1 push. 
ἔτωσα (§ 237) wow (ὠθήσω Mid.) é-wo-pat ἐ-ὠσθην 


§ 325. Dialects—1 Fut. γαμ-έω, 8 Sing. Fut. Mid. γαμέσσεται, she will 
Marry. 

3. [δοκήσω, ἐδόκησα. | 

8. 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. ἐρέριπτο. 

Besides : 

a) Stem γεγων, Pres. yeywri-w, I call, Perf. γέγωνα, Fut. γεγωνήσω. 

Ὁ) Stem dar, Pres, δατέ-ομαι, I distribute, Fut. δάσομαι, Aor. δάσσατο, 
Perf. δέδασται. Ἢ 

c) Stem δου x, Pres. δουπέ-ω, I make a sound, Aor. ἐ(γγδούπη-σα, Perf. 
δέ-δουπ-α. 

d) Stem εἰλ, ἐλ, Pres. εἰ-λέ-ω, I press, Imperf. ἐείλεον (δ. 387), Aor. 8 
Plur. ἔλσαν, Perf. Mid. ἔελμαι, Aor. Pass, ἐάλην (§ 295), 3 Plur. ἄλεν, Inf. 
ἀλήμεναι. 

é) Stem κελα ὃ, Pres. κελαδέ-ω, I resound, Part. κελάδ-ων. 

SJ) Stem κεν τ, Pres, κεντέ-ω, 1 sting, Aor. Inf. κέν-σαι. 


198 SEVENTH, OR ἘτΞΟΙΑΒ55.. ὃ 326. 


Obs.—In some verbs the Stem with ε extends even farther than the 
Present-Stem.- Examples of the formation of nouns: ὁ γάμ-ο-ς, 
the wedding ; ἡ δόξα, the appearance ; τὸ paprip-to-y, the testimony ; 
ἡ ὦ-σι-ς OF ὥθη-σις, pushing. 


§ 326. B) The shorter Stem is the Present-Stem; the 
enlarged one in « serves to form the other tenses. 


10. Stem aid(e), Pres. αἴδ-ομαι and aidé-opar, 1 am ashamed. 
11. Stem areé(e), Pres. aX éE-w, [ ward off. 


ἠλεξ-άμην ἀλεξ-ή-σομαι 
12. Stem ax O(c), Pres. ἄχθ-ομαι, Lam vexed. 
ἀχθέ-σομαι ἠχθέ-σθην 


Sas σθοσάμαν 
18, Stem βοσκί(ε), Pres. β όσκ-ω, I pasture. : 
βοσκή-σω ; from the Stem Bo the Verb. Adj. βο-τός 
14, Stem βου λίε), Pres. Bobx- -opat, 1 will. 


(Augment, § 234) βουλή-σομαι βε-βουλή-μαι ἐ-βουλή-θην 

15. Stem ὃ ε(ε), Pres. d&-w, I need (δεῖ, it is necessary), Mid. δέομαι, 
I require. 

ἐ-δέη-σα δεή-σω δε-δέηςκα ἐ-δεή-θην (δ 898, 2) 
16. Stem ἐρ(ε), Pres. not usual (§ 327, 13) 

ἠρ-όμην, I asked. ἐρή-σομαι, Inf. ἐρέσθαι 

' 17. Stem ἐῤῥ(ε), Pres. ἔῤ ῥ - , I go away. 

ἤῤῥη-σα ἐῤῥή-σω ἤῤῥη-κα 


Dialects.—g) Stem κτὺ π, Pres. κτυπέ-ω, I ring, Aor. ἔκτῦπ-ον. 

h) Pres. πιέζω and πιεζέ-ω; I press, Aor. ἐπίεσα. 

4) Stem pry, Pres. pryé-w, r shudder, Perf. ἔῤῥιγα. 

k) Stem orvy, Pres. στυγέ-ω, I hate, shun, Aor, ἔστυγον and στυγῆσαι, 
ἔστυξα, I made dreadful. 

ἢ Stem @ cA, Pres. φιλέω, I love, Aor. ἐ-φιλ-ά-μην. 

m) Pres, ἰολλέκ ες: 1 help, Aor. ἔχραισμον. 

Three Verbs in aw with a movable a are here to be noticed : 

n) Stem yo, Pres. yoa-w, I wail, Imperf. é-yo-ov. 

0) Stem p ax, Pres. μηκά-ο-μαι, I low, Perf. μέ-μηκ-α, Aor. ἔ-μἄᾶκ-ον. 

p) Stem pic, Pres. μῦκά-ο-μαι, I roar, Perf. μέμῦκ-α, Aor. ἔμὔκ-ον. 


§ 326. Dialects.—10. ydécaro, Roperat αἴδεσσαι, Fut. aidé-copar, Aor. 
Pass. 3 Plur. αἴδεσθεν. 

11. ἄλαλκον (ὃ 257). 

14, Pres. βόλεται, Imperf. ἐβόλοντο, Perf. βέβουλα. 

15. Aor. ἐδεύησα, once δῆσα, I was in want of, also Pres, δεύομαι. 

16. Pres. εἴρομαι, Fut. εἰρήσομαι. 


§ 326. SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. | 199. 


18. Stem εὑ ὃ (ε), Pres. εὕ dw, I ie (generally καθεύδω) 

Augment, ὃ 240 (καθ)εὺδή-σω 
19. Stem ἑ ψ (ε), Pres. ἕψ -, I cook. 

ἥψη-σα ἑψή-σομαι ἥψη-μαι ἡψή-θην 
; Verb. Adj. ἑφθός 

20. Stem θελί(ε) or ἐθελᾷε), Pres. OEA-w OF ἐθέλ-ω, L will. 

ἠθέλη-σα (ὃθελητσωοὉὁ 6Θσᾳ͵ ἠθέλη-κα : 
21. Stem ἱ ζ(ε), Pure Stem ἡ ὃ, Pres. ἵζομαι, I seat myself; also 

iZavw, Class 5. . Compare ἕζομαι. 

ἐκαθισάμην (δ 240) καθιζήσομαι and καθεδοῦμαι (§ 263) 

22. Stem cArXav and κλαιε, Pres. κλαίω (κλάωλ), I weep. Com- 


pare § 253. 
ἔκλαυ-σα κλαιήσω ὙΠ - κλαύσομαι 
23. Stem pay(e), Prey μάχομαι, 1 fight. 
ἐ-μαχε-σάμην μαχοῦμαι (§ 263) με-μάχη-μαι 


24. Stem μελίε), Pres. μέλει por, it is ὦ care to me; Mid, μέλο- 
pa, I care for, take care of. 


χης μελή-σει με-μέλη-κε ἐμ δῶ 
(ἐπι)μελήσομαι 
25. Stem μελλᾷίε), Pres. μέλλ-ω, I am on the point, hesitate. 
ἠ-μέλλη-σα μελλή-σω 
(§ 234, Obs.) 


26. Stem pev(c), Pres. μέν-ω, I remain [mane-o, man-si|, Verbal 
Adj. μεν-ε-τός 


ἔ-μεινα μεν-ὥ ᾿ με-μένη-κα 
27. Stem pvZ(e), Pres. μύ ζ w, I suck. 

ἐ-μύζη-σα μυζή-σω ᾿ 
28. Stem νὲ μίε), Pres. vép-w, I assign. 

ἔ-νειμα γνεμ-ὥ νε-νέμη-κα (Mid.) ἐ-νεμή-θην 
29. Stem ὁ ζ(ε), Pure Stem ὁ ὃ, Pres. 62-w, I smell. 

ὥζη-σα ὀζή-σω ὄδ-ω δὰ (§ 275, D.) [Lat. od-or| 
30. Stem oi(e), Pres. ot-opac, I think (compare ὃ 244) 

οἰή-σομαι φή-θην 
31. Stem οἐχ(ε), Pres. οἴχ-ομαι, I am off. 

οἰχή-σομαι οἴχ-ωκ-α 


Dialects.—19. [Imperf. ἕψεε. 

23. μαχέ-ομαι, Part. μαχειόμενος OF μαχεούμενος, Fut, i and 
μαχέσομαι. 

24. Perf. μέμηλε, Plup. Heider Perf. Mid. μέ-μ-β-λε-ται (Plup. -ro), 
§ 51, D. 

26. Perf. pipone, I am disposed, strive. 

30. Pres. ὀΐ-ομαι, ὀΐ-ω, Aor. Mid. dicaro, Aor. Pass. ὠΐσθην. 

31. Perf. οἴχηκα (οἴχημαι), with the Pres. oiy-vé-w, according to ὃ 323. 


200 SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS, __ § 326, 


(οἴχ-ωκ-α, With irreg. Reduplication [ὃ 275] for οἰχτωχ-α. Com- 


pare § 35, a) 
32. Stem δε αἴ, Pure Stem ὀφελ, Pres. dgeitw, I owe G2 258, 
Obs.) ’ 
ὥφελ-ον [utinam] ὀφειλή-σω ὠφείλη-κα 
ὠφείλη-σα 
98. Stem περ δ(ε), Pres. πέρδω 
ἔ-παρδ-ον παρδή-σομαι πέ-πορδ-α 
34. Stem π (ε) τ (ε), Pres. πέττ-ομαι, I fly. 
ἐ-π(ε)τ-ό-μην π(ε)τή-σομαι 
(§ 61, ¢) 
35. Stem pu(e), Pres. péw, I flow (δ 248). 
ἔῤῥευ-σα (rare, § 260, 2) . ῥυή-σομαι ἐῤῥύη-κα ἐῤῥύην 


(with ῥεύσομαι) 
36. Stem στι βίε), Pres. στείβ-ω, I tread. 
ἐ-στίβη-μαι 

87. Stem τυπτε, Pure Stem rv x (δ. 249), Pres. τύπτω, I strike. 

ἔ-τυπ-ον τυπτή-σω Mid. τέ-τυμ-μαι ος ἐ-τύπ-ην 

38. Stem yacpe, Pure Stem yap, Pres. χαίρω, I rejoice (§ 258) 

χαιρή-σω κε-χάρη-κα ᾿ἐ-χάρ-ην 

κε-χάρη-μαι 

Obs.—The ε sometimes appears in all-the tenses except the Present, 
sometimes only in some of them; sometimes it is added to the 
pure, sometimes to the strengthened Stem: pev-e, ori B-e, iZe, 
6fe,ruxre. ‘The formation of nouns‘shows the same varieties : 3 
αἰδή- -pwr, shame-fSaced ; ἡ βούλη-σι-ς, voluntas ; ἐθελή-μων, voluntary ; 


Dialects.—38. Part. Perf. κεχαρηώς, Fut. κεχαρήσω, Aor. ἐχήρατο, and 
3 Plur. κεχάροντο, ὃ 257, D 

Besides : 

39. Stem ad O(c), Pres. ἄλθ-ομαι, I become well, Fut. ἀλθή-σομαι. 

40. Stem da, Aor. δέδαον (ὃ 257, D.), I taught, Aor. Mid. Inf. δεδάα- 
σθαι (to get to know), Aor. Pass. ἐδάην (I learned), besides Fut. δαήσομαι, 
Perf. δεδάηκα, Part. Perf. δεδαώς. 

41. Stem «7 d(e), Pres. κήδ-ω, I grieve, Fut. κηδή-σω, Perf. κέκηδ-α (I 
am concerned), Fut. κεκᾶδήσομαι. 

42. Stem με d(e), Pres. μέδ-ω, 1 rule, Mid., I reflect, Fut. μεδή-σομαι. 

43, Stem 710, Pres. πείθω, I persuade, Fut. also πιθήσω, Part. Aor. 
πιθήσας. 

44, Stem τ ορ(ε), Aor. ἔ-τορ-ον and ἐ-τόρη-σα, I bored through, Fut 
τετορή-σω. 

45. Stem φι ὃ, Pres. φείδομαι, I spare, Aor. Mid. nepuitots (§ 257, D.), 
Fut. πεφιδή-σομαι. 


δ. 827. EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. 201 


ὁ μαχηττή-ς, the warrior ; ἡ μέλλη-σι-ς, the delay ; iy μόντιμο-ς. remain- 
ing ; ὁ vop-o-c, the law; ἡ ὀδ-μή, the smell ; ἡ χαρ-ά, the joy. 


§ 327. Highth, or Mixed Class. 


Several essentially different Stems unite to form one 
* verb: 
1. Present aipé-w, J take; Mid., I choose; Stems aipe and éX. 


εἷλ-ον (δ 236) αἱρή-σω ἡρη-κα ypé-Onv 
Inf. ἑλεῖν 
εἱλόμην αἱρή-σομαι ἥρη-μαι 

2. Pres. épx-opat, I go, come; Stems ἐρχ and ἐλᾷ(υ)θ 
ἤλ[υ]θ-ον ἐλεύ-σομαι ἐλ-ηλῦθ-α (§ 275) 


Imperat. ἐλθέ (§ 333, 12) 
Inf. ἐλθεῖν. The place of the Fut. is generally supplied by εἶμι, 
3. Pres, ἔρ d-w and ῥέζ-ω, I do; Stems ἐρ δ, ἐργ; pey 
ἔ-ρεξα ἔρξω 5 ἐρέχθην 


Obs.—The original Verbal-Stem is Fepy, hence τὸ Fépy-o-v (ὃ 84, 
D.), Att. ἔργ-ο-ν, work ; from (F)ipy, by the addition of the en- 
largement of the Present « (Class 4), arose (F)épy-r-w, and from 
this ἔρδτω. But by metathesis Fepy became Fpey, and, with 
loss of the F, ῥ ἐγ, whence the regular Present, a to Class 
4, is ῥέζ-ω, ἡ. 6.. pey-t-w (δ 251). 


4, Pres. ἐσθέ-ω, I eat ; Stem ἐσθι, ἐ ὃ (ε) [ed-o], and gay 


ἔ-φἄγ-ον Fut. ἔδ-ομαι 13-hdoKa (δ 275) ἠδέ-σθην 
(ὃ 265) ἐδ-ήδεσμαι 
5. Pres. ἕπ-τομαι, 1 follow (Imperf. εἱπόμην, § 236); Stems éx and 
o (©) 7 
ἑ-σπ-όμην ἕψομαι * Subj. σπῶ-μαι Inf. σπέσθαι 


0bs.—The original Stem is σεπ' from which é7z has arisen by weak- 
ening o to the rough breathing (ὃ 60, δ). In the Aor. Ind. the 
rough breathing is not organic, « being properly only the Aug- 
ment. Besides this there is a syncope (ὃ 61, ὁ). 


§ 327. Dialects.—1. [ἀραίρηκα, ἀραίρημαι, ὃ 275.) 
Σ Aor. ἤλῦθον, Perf. εἰλήλουθα (δ 817, D. 13), Part. ἐληλουθώς. 
3. [Pres. ἕρδ-ω] Fert: é éopya (δ 275, D. 2), Plup. ἐώργειν, Aor. ἔρξα and 
tocka. 
_ 4, Pres, ἔσθω and ἔδω, Inf. ἔδ- μεναι, Perf. ἔδ-ηδ-α, Mid. ἐδήδοται. 
5. Pres. Act. ἕπω, I am oceupied, Aor. ἔ-σπ-ον, Inf. σπεῖν, Part. σπών, 
Fut. ἕψω, Subj. Aor. Mid. ἕσπωμαι, ἑσποίμην, ἑσπέσθαι, ἑσπόμενος. 


202 EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. § 327. 


6. Pres. ?y-w, Ihave, hold (Imperf. εἶχον, ὃ 236); Stems ἐχ and oy(c) 


ἔ-σχ-ον, I seized. 1. ἕξω (Mid.) 
Subj. σχῶ, Opt. σχοίην 
Inf. σχεῖν, Part. σχών 2. σχήτσω ἔ-σχη-κα ἐ-σχέ-θην 
Imperat. σχέ-ς (§ 316, 11) ἔ-σχη-μαι ἑκτός σχετός 


Mid. ἐ-σχ-όμην, σχῶμαι, etc. 
Ind, σχ-έσθαι 

Obs.—The original Stem is σε x, from which éy has arisen by weak- 
ening o to the rough breathing (δ 60,0). From ce x by syncope 
came ἔ-σχ-ο-ν, by metathesis oye, from which σχέ-ς, ἔ-σχη-κα. 
From éy came the Future ἕξω and the Verbal Adj. ἐκ-τό-ς, while 
in the Present-Stem the rough breathing was changed into the 
soft breathing, because of tlre aspirate in the following syllable 
(ὃ 58, ὁ, Obs.): %y-w for éx-w. Compare also ὑπισχνέομαι and ἀμ- 
πισχνέομαι, ὃ 323, 36. All the Stem forms ‘also appear in the 
formation of nouns: τὸ σχῆ-μα, the form ; ἡ ἕξι-ς, the bearing ; ἐχ- 
upd-c, firm, tenable. ᾿ : 

7. Pres. μίσγ-ω, I miz, mise-eo; Stems proy and pry, additional 

form μίγνυμι (§ 319, 18). 
8. Pres. 6p d-w, I see; Stems dpa, id, ὁπ 


εἶδ-ον (Mid.) ὄψομαι ἑ-ὠρᾶ-κα ὥφθην 
᾿ς ὄπ-ωπ-α (ὃ 275) 
Imperat. ἰδέ Mid. ἰδοῦ (333, 12) 
Inf, id-ety ἑώρᾶ-μαι ὁρᾶτός 
ὦμ-μαι . ὀπτός 


0bs.—On the irreguiar Augment of the Stem ὁρα (Imperf. ἑώρων), 
§ 237. The Stem id was originally Εἰ ὃ (δ 34, D.). Compare 
vid-e-o; the Aor. Ind. therefore, -F.d-ov, with Syllabic Augment, 
contracted to εἶδ-ο-ν, but Subj. id-w, Opt. ἴδ-οι-μι. The Perf. of 
this Stem is οἶδα, I know (δ 317, 6). ΑἹ] three Stems appear also 
in the formation of nouns: τὸ ὕρᾶ-μα, the spectacle ; τὸ εἴδ-ος, the 
JSorm, appearance ; ἡ ὕψι-ς, the sight ; τὸ ὄμ-μα, the eye, look. 

0. Pres. πάσχ-ω, 1 suffer; Stem racy, παθ(ε), rev 
ἔ-πᾶθ-ον πεί-σομαι πέ-πονθ-α΄ παθη-τός 

(for πενθ-σομαι, ὃ 50) 


Dialects.—6. Perf. dy-we-a (§ 326, 31), Perf. Mid. ὦγμαι, 3 Plur. Plup. 
ὠχατο. : 

8. Aor. ἴδον, Weak Aor. Mid. ἐείσατο and εἴσατο, Part. ἐεισάμενος to 
the Pres. εἴδομαι, I appear, resemble (compare ὃ 34, D.4). As a shorter 
additional form of the Stem 6a, we find in Homer the Stem 6p (Fop), 
thence 3 Plur. Pres. ἐπὶ ὄρ-ο-νται, they overlook. 

9. 2 Plur. πέποσθε (ὃ 317, D. 14), Part. πεπαθυῖα.. 


» § 327. EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLAS§. 203 


0bs.—From the shorter’ Stems we have the nouns: τὸ πάθεος, the 
suffering ; τὸ πένθ-ος, the mourning. 
10. ziv-w, I drink ; Stems πεν, wt, wo [Latin po-tus]. Compare 


§ 321, 4. 
ἔ-πι-ον Fut. πί-ομαι (§ 265) πέ-πω-κα ἐ-πό-θην 
Imperat. πῖ-θι (δ 316, 15) πέ-πο-μαι πο-τός 


0bs.—From the Stem πὸ we have the nouns: ὁ πό-τη-ς, po-tor ; ἡ 
πό-σι-ς, po-tio ; τὸ πο-τήριο-ν, po-culu-m. 
11. Pres. rpéx-w,I run; Stems rpex and dpep 
ἔ-δρᾶμ-ον δρᾶμοῦμ-αι δε-δράμη-κα θρεκτέον 
᾿θρέξομαι (ὃ 54, ὁ) 
Obs.—Nouns from both Stems: ὁ τροχ-ό-ς, the wheel; ὁ δρομ-εύ-ς, 


the runner. 
12. Pres. ¢ép-w, I carry [ fero|; Stems gep, ἐν ε(γ)κ, of 
ἤνεγκ-ον οἴ-σω ἐν-ήνοχ-α (§ 275) οἰ-σ-θήσομαι 
οἰ-σ-τός 
ἤνεγκ-α (§ 269) ἠνέχ-θην 
ἠνεγκ-ἄ-μην οἴσομαι ἐν-ήνεγ-μαι ἐνεχ-θήσομαι 


Obs.—From the Stem φερ we have the nouns: τὸ φέρ-ε-τρο-ν, the, 
bier; ὁ φόρ-ο-ς, the contribution, tax; ὁ φόρ-το-ς, the burden. 


13. Aorist εἵἴπον, I spoke ; Stems eiz, ἐρ, and pe 


εἶπ-ον 
εἶπ-α (δ 269) ἐρ-ῶ εἴ-ρη-κα (δ 274, Obs.) ἐῤῥήθην 
- Imperat. eiz-é Inf. εἰπ-εῖν εἴ-ρη-μαι ῥη-θήσομαι 
! (§ 333, 12) : 
εἰ-ρή-στ-ομαι ῥη-τό-ς 


Obs.—The Stem εἰπ has arisen by contraction from ἐ-επ, and é-er 
from Fe-Fer, the reduplicated Aorist-Stem of the Verbal-Stem Fer 
(ἔπος, word, ὃ 34, D. 1).. This is the reason why the diphthong 
εἰ belongs not to the Indicative alone (ὃ 257, D.). The Stem ép 
(Fut. ἐρῶ), to which the Mid. ipic@a,to ask (δ 326, 16) belongs, 
has likewise lost F, it being originally Feo (compare Lat. ve7-bu-m). 
From Feo, by metathesis (ὃ 59), arose Fpe, after the loss of the F, ge, 


Dialects.—11. ἔθρεξα [dpapéopar], dédpopa. 

12. 2 Plur. Imperat. Pres. gép-re [Lat. ferte], Aor. ἤνεικα, 3 Sing. 
Opt. ἐνείκαι (ἐνείκοι) ee ἐνήνειγμαι], Imperat. Aor, oice, Inf. οἰσέμεναι 
(§ 268, D.). 

13. Pres, εἴρω (Class 4, d), Aor. tox-ov (Stem cezx, compare 5), I 
spoke, Imperat. ἔσπ-ετε, Pres. iv-éx-w, Imperat. ἔννεπε (δ. 62, D.), Aor. 
ἔνισπον, Subj. ἐνίσπω, Opt. 2 Sing. ἐνίσποις, Imperat. ἔνισπε and ἔνισπες, 
Fut. ἐνίψω and ἐνισπήσω. 


204 IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. § 328. 


hence εἴ-ρη-κα for Fe-Fon-ca, ἐῤῥή-θη-} for e-Fon-On-v, ῥη-τό-ς for 
Fpn-ro-c. As Present forms, φημί, λέγω, and, especially in com- 
pounds, ἀγορεύω may be used, 6. g., ἀπαγορεύω, I forbid ; Aor. 
ἀπεῖπον, Fut. ἀπερῶ, Perf. ἀπείρηκα. Nouns from the Stems ἐπ' 
and pe: ἡ dw, the voice; rd ῥῆ-μα, the word ; ὁ ῥή-τωρ, the orator. 
In addition to these, there are three verbs.which redu- 
plicate the Stem in the Present: 
14, Present yi-yv-opar (also yiv-opar), I become. 
Stem γι-γίε)ν and γεν (ε) (Lat. gi-g(e)n-o, Perf. gen-ui) 
ἐ-γεν-ό-μην γενή-σομαι γέ-γον-α 
γε-γένη-μαι 
Obs.—From the Stem γεν we have τὸ yév-oc, the race, genus; οἱ 
you-eic, the parents, from y eve, ἡ γένε-σι-ς, the origin. 
15. Pres. πί- πτ-ὼ (from ri-mwer-w), I fall; Stem πῖπτ, wer, πτω 


ἔ-πεσ-ον, from é-zer-ov (§ 60, a), πεσ-οὔμαι (δ 264), πέ-πτω-κα (com- 
pare ὃ 323, 35). 

Obs.—From the Stem zrw: ἡ πτῶ-σι-ς, τὸ πτῶ-μα, the fall. 

16. Pres. ri-rp a-w, 1 bore; Stems rirpa and rpa 


ἔ-τρη-σα τρή-σω 


(§ 270, Obs.). 


IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 


§ 328. The most importantjrregularities of meaning cor 
sist in the fluctuation between the Active, Middle, ana 
Passive, as well as, on the other hand, between the transi- 
tive and intransitive meaning. 


A) Active, Middle, and Passive Meaning. 


1. Very many Actwe verbs have a Middle Future with 
Active meaning (ἢ 266). This is the case with most verbs 
of Classes 5 to 8. « 

2. The Deponent verbs are to be regarded as Middle, 


Dialects.—14. Perf. 1 Plur. γέ-γἄ-μεν, ὃ 817, Ὁ). 2. Compare § 829, 8. 

15. Perf. Part. πε-πτε-ώς, ὃ 317, D. 17, 

Besides : | 

17. ἰ-αὐω, Stem ad, ἀξ, 1 sleep (i as Reduplication, compare ὃ 308), 
Aor. deca. 


ei ὦ 


eas ee Re es Σ μι 


\ 


§ 329. IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 205 


and also make most of their tenses in the J/ddle form. 
Those are called Passive Deponents whose Aorist has a 
Passive form: ὁ. g., βούλομαι, L wish, ἐβουλήθην, L wished. 
The most important Passive Deponents are the following, 
of which those marked * have a Passive Future, which is 
used along with the Middle: 


ἄγαμαι, I admire (δ 312, 8). εὐλαβέομαι, I am on my guard. 
*aidéopa, I dread (δ 801, 1). ἥδομαι, 1 rejoice. ' 
ἀλάομαι, I ramble. *iy ΣΝ 7” take to heart. 
ἁμιλλάομαι, I rival. προ eer. I am inclined. 
*apvéopa, I deny. Ἐἐπι : I am anxious. 
ἔάχθομαι, I am indignant (§ 826, — μέλομαι 
12). μετα 1 repent. 
βούλομαι, I wish (§ 326, 14). ἀπο 1 despair. 
δέομαι, I need (§ 820, 15). ess Cet aren 1 reflect. 
δέρκομαι, I look. ἐν Ρ I ponder. 
Ἐδιαλέγομαι, I converse. - προ I anticipate. 
δύναμαι, 1 can (δ 312, 9). οἴομαι, I am of opinion (δ 826, 80). 
ἐναντιόομαι, I am opposed. σέβομαι, 1 reverence. : 
ἐπίσταμαι, I know (§ 812, 10). φιλοτιμέομαι; I am ambitious. 
Obs.—Several of these verbs have the Middle Aorist as well as the 
Passive. 


3. The Passive Aorists of several Active verbs have a 
Middle meaning: εὐφραίνω, 7 rejoice, εὐφράνθην, L re- 
joiced ; στρέφω, I cause to turn, ἐστράφην, 1 turned— 
myself; patvw, 7 show, ἐφάνην, 7 appeared, ete. 

4. The Passive’ forms of several Deponents have also a 
Passive meaning: ἰάομαι, J heal, ἰάθην, 7 was healed ; 
δέχομαι, 7 receive, ἐδέχθην, [ was received ; in some even 
the Middle forms have both Active and Passive meaning : 
μιμέομαι, LT imitate, μεμίμημαι, 1 have imitated or have been 
emitated. : 

§ 329. B) Transitive and Intransitive” Meaning. 

When the meaning of a verb fluctuates between Trans- 


§ 329. Dialects.—The Strong Aor. érpagoy (τρέφω, I nourish) in Hom. 
has an intransitive meaning, 1 grew up. In Herod., ἀνέγνων (ἀναγι- 
γνώσκω) means 7 read, ἀνέγνωσα, I persuaded ; Hom. ἤριπον, I fell, Aor. 
to ἐρείπω (Class 2), I throw down; ἔνασσα, I caused to dwell, Aor. to 
ναίω, I dwell. 


206. IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. ἃ 329. 


sitive and ‘Intransitive, the Strong Aorist has the intran- 
sitive, and the Weak Aorist and Future Active the tran- 
sitive meaning ; when there are two Perfects, the Strong 
likewise has the intransitive and the Weak the transitive 
meaning ; if there is only one Perfect, it is éntransitive. 
The most important cases of this kind are: 


1. Stem ora, Pres. ἵστημι, J place, Weak Aor. ἔστησα, 
L placed, Fut. στήσω, I shall place, Pres. Mid. ἵσταμαι, 1 
place myself, Strong Aor. ἔστην, I placed myself—stood, 
Perf. ἕστηκα, 7 have placed myself, or stand (δ 503), Plup. 
ἑστήκειν, 7 stood, Fut. ἑστήξω (δ 291), Z shall stand. 


Obs.—This same important distinction appears in the numerous 
hia. daagpaege ἀφίστημι, I cause to revolt, to separate, ἀπέστην; I re- 
I have revolted 3; ἐφίστημι, I put over, 
ἐπέστην, I put myself over, ἐφέστηκα, I am put over ; καθίστημι, I put 
down, κατέστην, I put myself forward, καθέστηκα, I stand there or 
Jorward, 'The Aor. Mid. has a specially Middle meaning, 6. ¢., 
κατεστήσατο, he determined for himself (compare § 479). 


2. Stem a, Pres. Baivw, J go, is commonly intransitive 
with the Fut. βήσομαι; but in the poets, Z cause to. go, 
also in the Weak Aor. ἔβησα, Fut. Siow; but intransitive 
in the Strong Aor. ἔβην, J went, βέβηκα, L have advanced, 
stand firm ((AkBa-r0-¢, jim). 

3. Stem φυ, Pres. φύω, 7 beget, Weak Aor. ἔφῦσα, φύδω ; 
but the Strong Aor. ἔφῦν, Z was begotten, πέφυκα, I am by 
nature, to which the Pres. is φύομαι. 

4. Stem dv, Pres. δύω, J sink, hide, often transitive ; 
καταδύω, 7 cause to sink, also ἔδυσα, Stow; but ἔδυν, 7 
sunk myself, I dived ; ἐνέδυν, I put on; ἐξέδυν, 7 put 
a : | 

5. Stem oBe(c), Pres. σβέννῦμι, J quench, Weak Aor. 
ἔ-σβε-σα, 1 quenched, Strong Aor. ἔσβην, J was quenched, 
ἔσβηκα, “ am quenched. The Pres. to it is σβέννυμαι. 


6. Stem σκελ, Pres. σκέλλω, J dry, but Aor. ἔσκλην, 7 


grew dry, with the Pres. σκέλλομαι. 


ς 
ee ee a eee eae ee) 


r ν᾽ es, 
ee SE TE 


§ 331. | ACCENTUATION OF VERBAL FORMS. 207 


7. Stem wi, Aor. ἔπιον, 7 drank, txica (πιπίσκωλ, I 
caused to drink. 
8. Stem γεν, Pres. γείνομαι (compare ὃ 327, 14), [ am 
born, Aor. ἐγεινάμην, 1 begat. 
9. Stem 6X, Pres. ὄλλῦμι, 7 ruin, strong Perf. ὄλωλα, 
I am ruined, pervi, Weak Perf. ee 7 ih ruined, 
perdidr. 


§ 330. In a number of verbs the Strong Perfect alone 
has only an intransitive meaning, as: 


1. ἄγνυμι, 7 break, Perf. taya, 1 am broken (ἢ 275, 2). 

2. ἐγείρω, 7 awake, “ ἐγρήγορα, Lam awake (§ 275,1). 

3. πείθω, 7 persuade, “5 πέποιθα, L trust (πείθομαι, L fol- 
low, obey). 

4. πήγνυμι, 7 fasten, “5 πέπηγα, 1 stick fast. 

5. ῥήγνυμι, 7 tear, “ ἔῤῥωγα, 7 am torn (ὃ 218). 

6. σήτω, 1 causetorot,~ σέσηπα, 7 am rotten. 

7. τήκω, .7 melt, “ς χτέτηκα, 7 am melted. 

8. φαίνω, 1 show (rarely shine), Perf. πέφηνα, 7 have ap- 
peared (φαίνομαι, 1 appear). 


On the di8tinction between ἀνέῳγα and avéwya, and be- 
tween πέπραγα and πέπραχα, see ὃ 279. 


§ 331. GENERAL VIEW OF THE ACCENTUATION 
OF VERBAL Forms. — 


The general rule given in § 229, that in the verb the 
accent is removed as far back as possible from the end, is 
subject to the following exceptions : 

For all contracted syllables the accentuation is seen 
from ὃ 87. Hence δοκῶ, ἐλῶμεν (ὃ 263), πεσοῦμαι (πίπτω, 
§ 327,15), τιθῶμαι (ὃ 302), λυθῶ, λυθῆς (§ 296). Compare, 
however, ὃ 307, Obs. 


§ 330. Dialects.—9. Hom. daiw, I set t fire to, Perf. δέδηα, I have caught 
Jive. 

10. Hom. ἔλπω, 1 give hope, Perf. ἔολπα, I hope. 

11. Hom. φθείρω, I destroy, Perf. (διλέφθορα, I am destroyed. 


208 ACCENTUATION OF VERBAL FORMS. δ᾽ 332. 


§ 332. Compound Verbal forms follow the general rule 
laid down in § 85, with the following limitations : 


1. The accent never goes back beyond the syllable on 
which the first word had it before the composition: ἀπό- 
doc, give back (ἀπό), not ἄποδος ; ἐπίσχες, hold in (ἐπί), 
not ἔπισχες. 

2. In double compounds the accent never goes back be- 
yond the first: συνέκδος, give out with ; παρένθες, put in 
besides. Τα ΩΝ 

3. The accent never passes beyond the Augment or Le- 
duplication : ἀπῆλθε, he went away; ἀφῖκται, he has ar- 
rived. This is the case even when the Augment or Re- 
duplication is not expressed: ὑπεῖκον, 7 gave way; ἀνεῦρε, 
he found again; σύνοιδα, 7 know along with, from οἶδα, 
I know, forms an exception. 


§ 333. The other exceptions are: 


1. All Infinitives in vac have the accent on the penult- 
ima: τιθέναι, θεῖναι, λελυκέναι, AVOFvat. ' 

2. the Infinitive of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs in 
w is perispome: λαβεῖν. 

8. the same form in the Middle is paroxytone: λαβέ- 
σθαι. 

4. the Infinitive. of the Weak Aorist Active has the 


accent on the penultima: παιδεῦσαι, ἐπαινέσαι (ὃ 268, Οὐδ. 


1). ; 

5. so likewise the Infinitive of the Perfect Middle: πε- 
παιδεῦσθαι, κεκομίσθαι. 

6. the Participle of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs 
in ὦ is oxytone: λαβών. ° 

7. the Participle of the Present and of the Strong Aor- 
ist Active of verbs in μι is oxytone: τιθείς, ἀποδούς. 

8. so likewise the Participle of the Perfect Active: λε- 
λυκώς (via, de, Gen. ὅτος) ; and, 

9. that of both Aorists Passive: λυθείς, ypagete. 


§ 337. FORMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. 209 


10. the Participle of the Perfect Middle is paroxytone : 
AcAupévoc.  ~ , 

11. the contracted 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aor- 
ist Middle is perispome: λαβοῦ. Only the compounds of 
monosyllabic forms with dissyllabic prepositions form an 
exception: περίθου (περιτίθημι). “Compare ὃ 307, Obs. 

12. The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aorist Active 
in the following verbs is oxytone: εἰπέ, speak; ἐλθέ, 
come ; εὑρέ, find ; ἰδέ, see; λαβέ, take. But ἄπειπε, ete., 
according to § 85. + 

On the accentuation of the three equal forms of the 
Weak Aorist, see § 268, Obs. 1. 


PECULIAR FoRMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. 


§ 334. Dialects—The Iterative form, denoting the repetition of an 
act, is frequent in Homer and Herodotus, though foreign to-Attic 
prose. Its characteristic sign is the letters o« affixed to the histor- 
ical person-endings, in the Active as well as in the Middle, by means 
of the connecting vowels o and «; hence 1 Sing. Act. σκον, Mid. 
σκομην. The Augment is generally wanting, in Herod. always. 
The inflexion is quite the same as that of the Imperfect. 


ὃ 335. Dialects—The Iterative ox may be affixed to the Present as 
well as to both the Strong and Weak Aorist-Stems; hence we distin- 
guish Iterative Imperfects, as: ἔχ-ε-σκο-ν, I used to have, and Iterative 
Aorists, as: ἴδ-ε-σκ-ο-ν, I used to see; ἐλάσα-σκ-ε-ν, he used to drive ; the 
_ former denote the repetition of continuance, the latter the repetition 
of the occurrence of an action (§ 492). 


§ 336. Dialects—In verbs of the First Principal Conjugation, ε is 
‘the constant connecting vowel for the Iterative Imperfects and the 
Iteratives of the Strong Aorist: μέν-ε-σκον (μένω, I remain), Book-é- 
oxovro (βόσκω, I pasture), φύγ-ε-σκε (φεύγω, 1 flee); a occurs rarely in its 
stead : ῥίπτ-α-σκον (pixrw, I hurl), κρύπτ-α-σκον (κρύπτω, I hide). Con- 
tracted verbs in the Iteratives either leave the two vowels uncon- 
tracted : καλέεσκον (καλέω, I call), or reject one of them: ὥθεσκον (ὠθέω, 
I push), εἴασκον (éaw, I leave); the Stems in a sometimes change ae 
to aa: ναιετάασκον (ναιετάω, I inhabit). Compare ναιετάᾳ, ὃ 243, Ὁ. 


§ 337. Dialects.—In verbs of the Second Principal Conjugation ox 
is affixed immediately to the Stem: ἔ-φα-σκον (Stem ¢a, φημί, I say), 


> 


210 FORMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. ὃ 338. 


στά-σκον (ἔστην, I placed myself), ἔσκον instead of ἐσ-σκον (Stem ἐς, 
εἰμί͵, 1 am), κέ-σκετο (Stem κει, κεῖμαι, I lie), τί-θε-σκον (τίθημι, I put), 
ῥήγνυ-σκον (ῥήγνυμι, I tear). For the Stem 6X, as in other formations 
(ὥλεσα; 6déow), ε is the connecting vowel : 6\-é-oxero. 

ox is farther appended directly to the Weak Aorist-Stem : ἐρητύσα- 
oxe (ἐρητύω, I pacify), μνησά-σκετο (μνάομαι, I remember). - 


§ 338. Dialects—Many Stems of the Present and Strong Aorist in 
poetry (seldom in Attic prose) have @ added without any particular 
modification of meaning. The Preterite is the most frequent of the 
Stems thus strengthened. The @ is connected with the Stems some- 
times by a, sometimes by «. The most important forms of this kind 
are : 


διώκω, additional form διωκάθω, I pursue. 


εἴκω, rf C εἰκάθω, I yield. 

ἀμύνω, 4 Ἐς ἠμύναθον, I warded off. 

εἴργω, ὧ “ ἔργἄᾶθον (ἐέργαθονὶ, I separated, shut off. 
κίω, δε ¢ ἐκίαθον, I went. 

ἀείρομαι, “ ες ἠερέθονται, they hover. 

ἀγείρω, 4 ( ἠγερέθοντο, they were assembled. 

φθίνω, ght “Ὁ φθινύθω. ; 


ἔχω, ἕξ ες σχεθέειν, Aor. Inf, to hold. 


8840... SIMPLE ῬΕΒΙΥΑΤΙΟΝ. Se) tbe 


III. DERIVATION. 


. i Crap. XIII. 

 § 339. A word is either simple, 2. e., sprung from a single 
4 Stem : λόγ-ος, speech (Stem λεγ). γράφ-ω, L write (Stem 
pa), or compound, 7. ¢., formed from two or more Stems: 

| pevo-ypago-c, speech- nwriter, 


A) SIMPLE DERIVATION. 


_ Simple words are either primitive (Verbalia), ὁ. 6., are 
_ formed directly from a Verbal-Stem (ἢ 245): apy-h, begin- 
ning, from the Verbal-Stem apy (ἄρχω, L begin), or de- 
_ rived (Denominativa), ὁ. 6., formed from: a Mominal-Stem 
(δ 100): ἀρχα-ῖο-ς, incipient, ancient, from the Nominal- 
Stem dpya, Nom. ἀρχή, beginning. 

᾿ς ἃ 340. Vouns are usually formed—whether from a Ver- 
bal or from a Nominal-Stem—by means of a termination. 
_ This termination, added to the Stem, is called a derivative- 
ending or suffix. Thus λόγο-ς is formed by means of the 
. suffix ὁ from the Verbal-Stem Δ εγ, apxa-io-c by means 
_ of the suffix co from the Nominal-Stem apya. The suf- 
_ fixes serve more clearly to define the idea of the noun, or 
to mark the different relations in which the general idea 
of the Stem is to be conceived: Verbal-Stem z ove (ποιῶ, 
L produce, compose), wom-rij-¢, compos-e” ; ποίη-σι-ς, com- 
posi-tion ; ποίη-μα(τ), composition, poem ; Verbal-Stem 
y pao (γράφω, 7 write), γραφ-εύ-ς, writer ; γραφ-ί-ς, writ- 
ing wmstrument.; γράμ-μα, writing; γραμ-μή, a line; 
Nom.-Stem 8cxa (δίκη, right), δίκατιο-ς, right, just ; δὲ- 
᾿ καιο-σύνη, righteousness ; Nom.-Stem BactA&v (βασιλεύ-ς, 
_ king), βασίλε-ια, queen ; βασιλε-ία, kingdom ; βασιλικό-ς, 
kingly. 


ae oa Oe ee 


Obs. 1.—Only few primitive nouns are formed without a suffix: 
φύλαξ, guard, Nominal and Verbal-Stem φυλακ (φυλάσσω, Class 4, 
a, I guard); ow, voice, Stem 67, Verb.-Stem ἐπ (εἰπεῖν). 


212. ΒΟΕΕΙΧΕΒ FOR FORMING. SUBSTANTIVES. ὃ 341... 


Obs. 2.—The Consonant-Stems undergo the necessary changes be- 

_fore suffixes beginning with a consonant (ὃ 44, etc.): ypaq, 
γράμ-μα, ey, λέξις, word ; δικα ὃ (δικάζω), δικασ-τής, judge. Vow- 
el-Stems readily lengthen the vowel and sometimes insert o be- 
fore several suffixes, as in the Perf. Mid. (§ 288), and in the Weak 
Passive-Stem (ὃ 298): ποίη-μα (compare πε-ποίη-μαι), σει-σ-μό-ς, 
shaking (compare σέ-σει-σ-μαι). 

Obs. 3.—In many primitive words the Stem undergoes a change 


in its vowel, which generally is like that of the Strong Perfect — 
(ὃ 278): Stem AGO, λήθ-η, forgetfulness, compare λέ-ληθ-α ; Stem 


πεμπ, πομπ-ή, escort, compare πέ-πομφ-α; Stem Az, λοιπό-ς, 76- 
maining, compare λέ-λοιπτα. ‘The most frequent vowel-change is 
that of ¢ to o: Stem πὲμπ' (πέμπω, I escort), πομπ-ή, escort ; Stem 


φλεγ (φλέγω, 1 burn), φλόξ, flame; Stem τρὲπ (τρέπω, I turn), ΄ 


τρόπ-ος, turning, manner. 

Obs. 4.—A general rule for the accent of nouns is that the’ Neuters 
are almost all barytone (δ 19): τὸ yév-oc, the race ; iene v, gift; 
λείψανο-ν, remains ; πνεῦ-μα, breath. 


§ 341. I. Zhe most important Suffixes for forming 
Substantives. 


A) Substantives denoting an agent are called nomina 
agentis. The person acting or occupied in and belonging 
to something is indicated by the following suffixes : 


1. ev, Nom. ev-¢ (always oxytone), Mase. (ὃ 187). 


Examples of Primitive words are: 


γραφ-εύ-ς, writ-ER, Verb.-Stem ypa¢, Pres. γράφω (Class 1). 
γον-εύ-ς, begett-ER, vs γεν, “γίγνομαι (Class 8). 
κουρ-εύ-ς, barb-ER, 6 KEP, ‘« κείρω (Class 4, d). 


An example of the not very numerous Denominatives 
is : BGs ι 
πορθμ-εύ-ς, ferry-MAN, Nom.-Stem πορθμο, Nom. πορθμός, passage. 


Obs.—Several Masculines in ev-¢ haye Feminines in eva (proparox- 
ytones) : βασιλεύς, king; βασίλεια, queen. 


2. 7np, Nom. rnp τειρα, Nom. τειρα 
rop, “τωρ »+Masc τρια, “ρας ῥεῖν 

66 (ἰ 4 Fem. 
Τα, τη-ς τριδ, τρί-ς 


710, “ Tt-¢ 


8 343. SUPYIXES FOR shige PURSE AN TTVER 213 


τα οι οἵ Primitive nouns are: 
- Stem and Nomin. ow-r7p, deliver-ER, Mase. aaa Stem ow (σώζω) 


ἐς εἶ “ σώ-τειρα, “ Fem. (§ 298). 
S “ py-rop, “ ῥή-τωρ, ora-TOR, Verb.-Stem pe, Fut. ἐρῶ (§ 327, 13). 
-  κρι-τα, “κρι-τή-ς, judge, e cpt, Pres. κρίνω (ὃ 253, 
Obs.). 
“ gown-ra,“ ποιη-τή-ς, poet ἢ : 
_ Stem and Nomin. ποιή-τρια, poetess οὐ τίς, eerey are 


_ “ αὐλη-τα, “ addnrn-c, flute-play-ER, Masc. Verbal-Stem αὐλε, 
“ abdn-rped, abdnrpi-c, ¥ Fem. Pres, αὐλέω (Cl. 1). 


Examples of Derived words are : 


Stem πολῖ-τα, Nom. πολίτη-ς, citizen, Nom.-Stem πολι, Nom. πόλι-ς. 
“ οἰκε-τα, “ — oixérn-c, domestic, Masc. Stem oixo, Nom. 
πεν οἰκες τ δι “6 Ὁ olgkte-cy 0“ Fem. οἶκο-ς. 


§ 342. B) Substantives expressing an action are called 
nomina actionis ; the following suffixes are the most com- 
mon for them: 


1. τι, Nom, τι-ς 
ot, “ ou-c, from ri-c, according to ὃ 60, ὦ [com- | Feminine, 
pare Lat. tio] Barytones. 


sia, “ — ova 


All nouns of this kind are Primitives, as: 


᾿ πίσ-τι-ς, faith, Verb.-Stem πεθ, Pres, Mid. πείθομαι (Class 9). 
μίμη-σι-ς, imitation, +: pepe, Pres. (Dep.) μιμέομαι (Class 1). 
 σκέψι-ς, contemplation, “ σκεπ, “ za σκέπτομαι (Class 8). 
᾿ πρᾶξι-ς, action, : ἊΝ πρᾶγ, Pres. Act. πράσσω (Class 4, a). 
᾿ γένε-σι-ς, origin, ἐν: γεν (ε), Pres. Mid. γίγνομαι (ὃ 327, 14). 
_ δοκιμα-σί-α, examination, “ δοκιμα δ, Pres. δοκιμάζω (Class 4, b). 


2. wo, Nom. μό-ς (always oxytone), Masc. 
σπα-σ-μό-ς, cramp; Verb.-Stem oa, Pres. σπάω (Class 1), I draw. 
 6e-0-p6-¢, bond, “ de 5 © Se, “TL bind. 
ὀδυρ-μό- -¢, wailing, 4 53 vp, “ Shacues (Class 4, ἃ, Obs.). 


Obs.—F rom verbs in evw substantives in ea@ are derived, which de- 
note the action, and are all paroxytone: παιδεύω; I educate, παι- 
deia, education; βασιλεύω, I am king, βασιλεία, king’s rule. Com- 
pare § 341, 1, Obs. 


8. 343. C) The result of an action is indicated by: 


214 ΒΟΡΕΊΧΕΒ FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. ὃ 344, 


1. par, Nom. pa, Neuter (accent, ὃ 340, Obs. 4). 
πρᾶγ-μαϊ[τΊ], the thing done, Verb.-Stem pay, Pres. πράσσω (Class 4, a) 
(almost the same as τὸ πεπραγμένον, Lat. factum). 
ῥῆ-μα[τΊ, word, Verb.-Stem pe, Fut. ἐρῶ (ἢ 327,18) (compare τὸ εἰρημέ- 
γον, Lat, dictum). 
τμῆ-μα[τΊἹ, cut, Verb.-Stem rep, Pres. τέμνω (ὃ 321, 10) (compare τὸ 
τετμημένον, the piece cut off). 


2. ec, Nom. oc, Neuter (accent, ὃ 340, Obs. 4). [27). 
Stem λαχ-ες, Nom. λάχος, lot, Verb.-Stem Aax, Pres. λαγχάνω (ὃ 322, 
ee BAP ee, “© ἔθου; custom,  “ 20, Perf. εἴωθα (ὃ 275). 

“© rex-ec, “ réxoc, child, “ rex, Pres. τίκτω (Class 3). 


Obs.—The same suffix in derived words denotes a quality : 


βάρος, weight, Adjective-Stem Bapv, Nom. βαρύ-ς. 
βάθος, depth, a βαθυ, “ Babd-c. 


{ 


μῆκος, length, of μακρο, μακρό-ς. 


§ 344. D) The cnstrwment or means for an action is 
expressed by : 


rp o, Nom. rpo-y [Lat. tru-m] (accent, § 340, Obs. 4). 
ἄρο-τρο-ν, plow, Verb.-Stem apo, Pres. dpdw (Cl. 1) au 
λύ-τρο-ν, redemption money, “ λυ, “bw (Class 1). 
δίδακ-τρο - ν, ὦ teacher's fee, “ Noax. ¢ διδάσκω (§ 324, 28). 


Obs.—The meaning of the kindred feminine suffix rp a is less fixed: 
ξύ-σ-τρα (ξύω, I scrape), scraper, instrument for rubbing ; ὀρχή-σ-τρα 
(ὀρχέομαι, I dance), dancing place ; παλαί-σ-τρα (radaiw, I wrestle), 
wrestling school. 


ὃ 345. ἘΔ) Place is indicated by: 


ek τηριο, Nom. τηριο-ν, Neuter proparoxytone. 
ἀκροα-τήριο-ν, audi-toriu-m, Verb.-Stem ἀκροα, Pres. ἀκροάομαι (Cl. 1). 
δικασ-τήριο-ν, gudgment hall, . ducad, “δικάζω (Cl. 4, b). 


2. evo, Nom. eo-y, Neuter properispome. 
λογ-εῖο - ν, speaking place, ων ἫΝ Nom.-Stem Aoyo, Noa, λόγο-ς. 
κουρ-εἴο -ν, barber's shop, ἐνῇ κουρεῦυ, “κουρεύ-ς. 
Μουσ-εῖο - ν, seat of the Muses, “ . Movea, “ Moivea. 


3. wv, Nom. wy, Masc. oxytone, 
denotes a place where any thing is in abundance: ἀμπελών, vineyard ; 
᾿ἀνδρών, MEN'S TOM ; οἰνών, wine αι ι 


8 348. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 215 


§ 346. ΕἾ Substantives of quality are derived from Ad- 
jective-Stems by means of the following suffixes : 


1. rnr, Nom. rn-c, Fem. [Lat. tat, tut, Nom. tds, tis}. 
Stem παχυ-τητ, Nom. παχύτης, thickness, Adj.-Stem va XY Nom. 


TAXU-C. 
Ὁ  veO-TNT, ‘¢ ψεῤτης, youth, se veo, Nom. vio-c. 
‘“ ἐσο-τητ, “«  isdrne, equality, ¥: iso, “ ἴσο-ς. 


2. cvva, Nom. σύνη, Fem. paroxytone. 
δικαιο-σύνη, justice, Adj.-Stem δέκαιο, Nom. δίκαιο-ς. 
σωφρο-σύνη, soberness, “ σωῴφρον, “σώφρων. 
3. ca, Nom. ca, Fem. paroxytone. 
σοφ-ία, wisdom, Adj.-Stem cogo, Nom. σοφό-ς. 


εὐδαιμον-ί a, bliss, ᾿Ξ εὐδαιμον,“ εὐδαίμων. 


The suffix ca, with the vowel ε of the Adjective-Stems 
in -ec, Nom. τ-ης, becomes axa ; and when the final o of an 
Adjective- Stem is preceded by another o, it becomes oa, 


ova (proparoxytone): ” 
ἀλήθε-ια, truth, Adj.Stem ary Oe[c], Nom. ἀληθής (ὃ 165). 
εὔνο-ια, benevolence, $ evvoo, . “εὔνου-ς. 


4, ec, Nom. oc, Neuter, ὃ 343, 2. 


§ 347. G) Diminutives are formed from Nominal-Stems 
by the suffixes : 


1. co, Nom. ιο-ν, Neuter. 
παιδ-ίο-ν, little boy, Nom.-Stem παι δ, Nom. παῖ-ς. 


cc 


κηπ-ίο-ν, little garden, “ κῆπο, κῆπο-ς. 

Obs.—Other forms of co are ἐδιεο (Nom. ἐδιο-»ν), αριο (Nom. ἀριο-»), 
υδριο (Nom. υδριο-ν), υλλιο CNom. υλλιο-») : οἰκί διεο-ν, a little 
house (oixo-c); παιδάριο-ν, ὦ little boy (παῖ-ς) ; μελύ δριο-ν, ὦ little 
song (μέλος) ; εἰδύλλ εο-ν, ὦ little picture (εἶδος) Ὁ 

2. Mase. toxo, Fem. coxa, Nom. ἰσκο-ς, conn, paroxytone. 

veav-iaKo-c, adolescentulus, Nom.-Stem veavca, Nom. veavia-c. 
παιδ-ίσκη, girl, x “ 


Tad, παῖ-ς. 
στεφαν-ίσκο-ς, ὦ little garland, “ στεφανο, “ orépavo-c. 


§ 848: H) Patronymics or substantives which denote 
descent from a father (or ancestor)—more rarely the de- 
scent from a mother—are most frequently formed by the 
suffix da (Nom. δη-ς) for the Masculine, and only ὃ (Nom. 


216. ΒΟΡΕΙΧΕΒ FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 349, 
. 


-c) for the Feminine. The Masculines are paroxytone, 
the Feminines oxytone. This suffix is added to Stems in 
a without any connecting vowel : 


Mase. Boped-dn-c, Fem. Bopea-c, som. Ka Bopea, Nom. Bopéa-c. 
“ Αἰνειἄᾶ-δη-ς, Aiveca, “ Aiveid-c. 


The same is affixed to Consonant Stéms by means of 
the vowel c: 


Masc. Kexpoz-t-dn-c, Fem. Kexpor-i-c, Nom.-Stem Kexpoz, Nom. Ké- 
κροψ. 


Stems in εὖ and o of the Second Principal Declension 
also adopt the connecting vowel 1, before which the v of εὖ 
is dropped : 

Πηλε-ί-δη-ς, from the Nom.-Stem Πηλευ, Nom. Πηλεύ-ς. Homeric ad- 
ditional form InAniadn-¢ (compare ὃ 161, D.). 
Anro-i-6n-c, from the Nom.-Stem Anro, Nom. Λητώ, son of Leto. 


The Stems of the O-Declension substitute z for o: 


Masc. Τανταλ-ἴ-δη-ς, Fem. Tavrad-i-c, Nom.-Stem Tavraro, Nom. Τάν- 
ταλο-ς. 
Κρον-ί-δη-ς, 


({{ te 


K povo, Nom. Kpévo-c. 


Only those in co (Nom. to-c) change these letters to va: 


Masc. Θεστιά-δη-ς, Fem. Θεστιά-ς, Nom.-Stem Θεστιο, Nom. Θέστιο-ο. 
Ὁ Μεργοιτιά-δη-ς, ἮΝ Μενοιτιο, Nom. Mevoi- 
TLO-C. 


Obs.—A._ more rare suffix for Patronymics is toy or ἴων, Nom. wy: 
Κρονίων, son of Kpévo-c. ‘The Poets take many liberties with re- 
gard to the metre. 


§ 349. I) Gentile names, or substantives describing” per- 
sons as natives of certain towns or countries, have the suf-. 
fixes : 

1, ev, Nom. eve (compare § 341), oxytone. 

Μεγαρ-εύ-ς, Nom.-Stem Me yapo, Nom. τὰ Μέγαρα. . 
᾿Ερετρι-εύ-ς, χὰ Ἔρετριο, “Ἐρέτρια. 

2. ra, Nom. τη-ς, paroxytone. 

Τεγεά-τη-ς (Teyéa), Αἰγινή-τη-ς (Αἰγίνη), ἐν grees οὐ Ηπειρο- Ὁ Σικε. 
λιώ-τη-ς (Σικελία). 


8 351. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING ADJECTIVES. 217 


Obs.—The feminine gentile names end in ὃ (Nom. -c): Μεγαριδ, 
Nom. Meyapic; Teyearcd, Nom. Τεγεᾶτις ; Σεκελεωτι δι Nom, Σι- 
κελιῶτις. 


§ 350. Il. The most important Suffixes for forming — 
Adjectwes. 


1. το, Nom. co-¢ (proparoxytone), 

expresses the most general relation to the idea Jot the sub- 
stantive from which the adjective is formed: ovpdv-vo-c, 
heaven-ly (οὐρανός) ; ἑσπέρ-ι o-c, belonging to evening (ἑσ- 
πέρα). The « sometimes combines with the final vowels of 
Vowel-Stems to diphthongs, which then frequently receive 
the circumflex: ἀγορα-ῖ ο-ς, forensis (ἀγορά) ; aido-t o-c, 
modest, from the Stem αἱ ὃ ο (Nom. αἰδώς) ; but δίκατιο-ς, 
just, from the Stem δὲκα (Nom. δίκη, justice); so also, 
after rejecting the ¢, we have from the Stem θερες (τὸ 
θέρος, summer), θέρε-ι ο-ς, summer-like. By the suffix vo, 
adjectives are also formed from Adjective-Stems: ἐλευθέρ-- 
ιο-ς, liber-alis (ἐλεύθερο-ς, Leber), and gentile adjectives 
(δ 349) from names of places, which, however, are also used 
substantively: Μιλήσ-ι o-¢ (for Μιλητ-ι ο-ς, from Μίλητο-ς, 
according to ὃ 60), ᾿Αθηνα-ῖ ο-ς (Αθῆναι). - 


§ 351. 2. ko, Nom. κό-ς (always oxytone), 

is mostly affixed to the Stem by the connecting vowel ε, 
and, in words derived from Verbal-Stems, denotes fitness + 
ἀρχει-κό-ς, suited for governing ; γραφικός, sited for writ- 
ing or painting (picturesque). “Many Verbal-Stems insert 
the syllable τι before the suffix xo (ὃ 342): αἰσθη-τι-κό-ς, 
capable of perceiving ; πρα-κτι-κό-ς, suited for acting. 
From Nominal-Stems the suffix co, Nom. xo-c, forms ad- 
jectives denoting what is peculiar, belonging or referable 
to the thing expressed by the noun: βασιλικός, kingly ; 
φυσικός, natural ; πολεμικός, warlike. 


Obs.—By means of this. suffix are formed the names of many arts 
and sciences, the Feminine being used substantively, originally 
with the addition of τέχνη, art, science ; ἡ μουσ-ι-κή, music ; ἡ 


218 ᾿ SUFFIXES FOR FORMING ADJECTIVES. § 862, 


TPR POEC ΜΗ, from τὰ γράμματα, littere, grammar, the art of writ- 
ing; ἡ τακτ-ι-κή, tactics. The corresponding Masculine denotes 
one who is experienced in such art or science: ὁ μουσικό-ς, mu- 
sician ; ὁ γραμματικό-ς, grammarian § ὁ τακτικό-ς, tactician. 


§ 352. 3. ἐν ο, Nom. wo-c, proparoxytone, and 
4. <0, Nom. co-¢ [| Lat. ew-s], proparoxytone (ove peri- 
spome, ὃ 183), denote the materzal of which any thing 
consists: λίθ-ιν o-c, of stone (AiBo-c) ; ξύλ-ιν ο-ς, Wood-en 
(ξύλο-ν) ; χρύσ-ε ο-ς, χρυσοῦς, gold-en | aur-eu-s | (ypuvad-c). 
Obs.—tv 0, Nom. wv6-c, oxytone, forms adjectives of time: χθεσ-ιν 6-c, 
yesterday's, from χθές, yesterday ; ἐαρ-ιν ό-ς, vernus ; with enlarged 
suffix: γνυκτ-ερ-ιν ό-ς, noct-ur-nu-s. 


5.ἐντ, Nom. Mase. « ει-ς, Fem. eooa, Neut. εν, 
denotes abundance : χαρί-ει-ς, grace-ful (xapt-c); ὑλήτει-ς, 
wood-y (ὕλη) ; ἠμαθό-ε ι-ς, sand-y (ἄμαθο-ς). Compare Lat. 
osu-s ; gratiosus, silvosus, arenosus. 

6. μον, Nom. Mase. μων, Neut. μον, 
denotes the dent or inclination to something: μνήτμω v, 
mindful ; τλήτμω v, patient , ἐπιλήσ-μω v, forgetful. 


Obs.—Adjective suffixes of less defined meanings are : 
vo, Nom. vo-c, oxytone, mostly passive: de-v 6-c, terrible; σεμ-ν 6-¢ (σέβ- 
o-pat), venerable, 
ho, “  o-¢, mostly oxytone and active: δει-λ ό-ς, fearful ; ἀπατη- 


ἢ λό-ς, deceitful. 
μο, “. μο-, proparoxytone, partly active: pdy-t-po-c, warlike; and 
partly passive : ἀοίδ-ι-μ ο-ς, capable of being sung ; akin 
fo it is 
omo, “ omo-c, proparoxytone: χρήσιμο-ς, useful ; φύξιμο-ς, capable of 
being fled from, avoidable. 
ec, “ ne, Neut. ec: ψευδ-ής, false, almost exclusively in compound 


words (§ 355). 


§ 353. ILI. Derived Verbs 
are formed in various ways from Mominal-Stems. The 
most important endings of derived verbs, differing little 
from one another in meaning, are the following, arranged 
according to their forms of the Present: 


ae 
ι ll 


᾿ 8.368, ὁ. DERIVED VERBS.—ADVERBS. | 219 
| 


1. 0o-w: μισθό-ω, I hire (μισθό-ς, hire). 
χρυσό-ω, I gild (χρυσό-ς, gold). 
ζημιό-ω, I punish (ζημία, punishment). 

2. a-w: τιμά-ω, I honor (τιμή, honor). 
αἰτιάτ-ομαι, I blame (airia; blame). 
yoa-w, I wail (γόο-ς, wailing). 

8. ew: ἀριθμέ-ω, I number (ἀριθμό-ς, number). 
εὐτυχέ-ω, I am fortunate (εὐτυχής, fortunate). 
ἱστορέ-ω, 1 search (iorwp, searcher). 

4. ev-w: βασιλεύ-ω, I am king (βασιλεύ-ς, king). 

τοὺς βουλεύτ-ω, I advise (βουλή, advice). 
5. f-w: ἐλπίζ-ω, I hope (ἐλπί-ς, hope). 


ἑλληνίζ-ω, I speak Greek ("EXAn?). 
φιλιππίζ-ω, I am inelined ( ἡ αιενο τ, 


to Philip 

6. af-w: δικάζ-ω, 1 judge (δίκη, justice). 

ἐργάζ-ομαι, 1 work (ἔργο-ν, work). 

βιάζο:ομαι, I use violence (Bia, violence). 
7. av-w: σημαίν-ω,͵ 1 sign (σῆμα, sign). 

λευκαίντ-ω, I whiten (λευκό-ς, white). 

yareraiv-w, I am indignant (χαλεπό-ς, severe, indignant). 
8. vv-w: ἡδύντ-ω, I sweeten (ἡδύ-ς, sweet). 

λαμπρύν-ω, I brighten “(Aaprpé-c, bright). 


Obs. 1.—From a few Nominal-Stems verbs are derived with differ-. 
ent endings and with different meanings; thus from dovXo, 
Nom. δοῦλο-ς, slave: δουλό-ω, I enslave, δουλεύ-ω, I am ὦ slave ; from 
πόλεμο, Nom. πόλεμο-ς, War, πολεμέτω ANA πολεμίζ-ω, 1 make war, 
πολεμό-ω, 1 make hostile. 


Obs. 2.—A. desiderative meaning belongs to verbs in cw, as well as 
to several in aw and taw: γελασείω, I am inclined to laugh ; dpa- 
σείω, I desire to do; φονάω, I want to murder; κλαυσιάω, I want to 
weep. The verbs of the last two terminations frequently indicate 
a bodily weakness or illness: ὠχριάω, 1 am pale; ὀφθαλμιάω, I 
suffer in the eyes. 


| 
Σ 
| 
| 
| 
| 


IV. Adverbs. 


§ 353, ὁ. On the Adverbs formed from Adjectives, com- 
pare δὲ 201-204. 

From. Verbal and Substantive-Stems adverbs are formed 
by: the suffixes : 


π᾿ FORM OF COMPOSITION. - 8 354. 


* 
δόν, oxytone: ἀνα-φαν-ὃ dv, openly ; ἀγελη-δόν, gregatim. ᾿ 
δην (αδην), paroxytone: κρύβ-δην, clam ; συλλήβ-δην, collate 
briefly (Stem λα β) ; σπορ-άδην, scatteredly (Stem oz ep), σπείρω, 
1 sow, 
ri, oxytone: dvopac-r i, by name (ὀνομάζω) ; ἑλληνισ-τί, greece (ἑλληνίζω). 


B) Composition. 
§ 354. 1. Form of Composition. 


A noun, standing* first in a compound, appears in the 
form of its Stem: ἀστυ-γείτων, neighbor to the city; χορο- 
διδάσκαλο-ς, teacher of the chorus; caxégeradoc, shaker 
of the shield (τὸ σάκος). 

Consonant-Stems are usually united to the second part 
by the connecting-vowel 0: ἀνδριαντ-ο-ποιό-ς (ὁ ἀνδριά-ς), 
maker of statues, statuar, ys πατρ-ο-κτόνο-ς, murderer of 
a father. This o, farther, is frequently inserted after weak 
vowels: φυσι-ο-λόγο-ς, acquainted with nature ; ἰχθυ-ο- 
φάγο-ς, fish-eating ; and regularly stands in place of a in 
the Stem: ἡμερο-δρόμο-ς, ὦ runner by day ; χωρο-γράφο-ς, 
describer of a country. The o is dropped before vowels: 
χορ-ηγό-ς, leader of the chorus ; πατρ-άδελφο-ς, ὦ father’s 
brother ; it remains, however, where the word originally 
began with digamma (§ 34, D.): Hom. δημιοερηγίξο: Att. 
δημιουργός, artisan. 


Obs. —Exceptions to these rules are frequent, Thus Stems in σ 
often appear in an abbreviated form in compounds: ξιφο-κτόνος, 
killing with the sword (Stem E.gec); τειχο-μαχία, a contest at the 
wall (Stem recxec); the final vowel of A-Stems is sometimes 
preserved as ἃ or ἡ : ἀρετᾶ-λόγος, a speaker about virtie ; χοη-φόρος, - 
bearer of funeral offerings. A case-form seldom occurs instead of — 
the Stem-form : νεώς-οικος, shed Sor ships ; ὀρεσσι-βάτης, wandering 
on the hills, 


§ 355. The ending of a word is often somewhat altered 
in composition, especially when the compound word is an 
adjective : τιμή,. φιλό-τιμο-ς, ambitious ; πρᾶγμα, πολυ- 
πράγμων, much occupied. The ending ἡ ς Masculine and 


§ 358. ‘FORM OF COMPOSITION. 221 


Feminine, ες Neuter, deserves special notice; this ending 
occurs : | 

@)-in many adjectives formed directly from Verbal- 
Stems: ἀ-βλαβ-ής, uninjured (βλαβ, Pres. βλάπτω) ; αὐ-" 
τάρκ-ης, self-sufficient (αὐτό-ς and ἀρκέω). 

ὁ) in adjectives, whose second part comes from a sub- 
stantive in ἐς (Nom. oc): δεκα-ετής, ten years old (ἔτος): 
κακοτ-ήθης, of a bad nature (ἦθος). 

Obs.—Observe also the compound adverbs in εἰ or 1, oxytone: 


αὐτο-χειρ-(, with one’s own hand ; ᾿ ἀπμισθ:ί, without pay ; παν-δημ-εί, 
with the whole people. 


ὃ 356. A: verb—without changing its nature—can only 
be compounded with a preposition. The looseness of the 
connection in such compounds is the reason for the posi- 
tion of the Augment mentioned in ὃ 238: ἀποβάλλω, 7 
throw away; ἀπέβαλον, 7 threw away. For the same 
reason, prepositions are frequently separated from their 
verbs in the poets and in Herodotus, and in some cases 
even in Attic prose (compare ὃ 446). This separation is 
called tmesis. 

When any other word is to be compounded with a Ver- 
bal-Stem, a noun is first formed of the two, 6. g., from 
λίθο-ς and Stem Bad, λιθο-βόλο-ς, throwing stones, and 
thence λιθοβολέ-ω, 7 throw stones ; so likewise from vav-¢ 
and μάχομαι comes first ναυ-μάχο-ς, fighting at sea, and 
thence ναυμαχέω ; from εὖ and Stem ip y, εὐεργέτης, bene- 
Suctor, εὐεργετέω, I do good. 


§ 357. A substantive of an abstract meaning can only 
be compounded with a preposition without changing its 
termination: πρό and βουλή make προβουλή, previous 
consultation. In every other compound the abstract sub- 
stantive must take a derivative ending: λίθος and βολή 
make λιθοβολία, throwing stones; ναῦς and μάχη, vav- 

7 ᾿ τ - > , . 
paxla, sea-fight ; εὖ and πρᾶξις, εὐπραξία, well-being. 


§ 358. Compounds haying the first part formed directly 


222 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. § 359. 


from a Verbal-Stem are rarely met ee except in the 
poets. They are formed in two ways, viz. 


1. the Verbal or the Present-Stem is sided directly to 
Stems beginning with a vowel, and to those beginning 
with a consonant by means of the connecting-vowels ε, 1, 
or 0: δακ-έτθυμο-ς (Pres. daxv-w, Class 5), heart-gnawing ; 
πείθ-αρχο-ς, obedient to order (πείθομαι and ‘apyh); apy-t- 
τέκτων, master-builder ; μισ-ό-γυνο-ς, hater of women (μι- 
ot ). 

2. A form strengthened by o, and resembling the Weak 
Aorist-Stem, is joined in the same way to the second part 


of the word: λῦσ-ί-πονο-ς, freeing from trouble; πλήξ- — 


irtro-¢ (πλήσσω, Class 4, a), whipping horses ; στρεψί-δικο-ς 
(στρέφω, Class 1), perverter of right. 


§ 359. IL. Meaning of Compounds. 


In regard to their meaning, compound Adjectives and 
Substantives are divided into ¢hree principal classes : 


1. Determinative compounds. In them the second word 
is the principal, which, without in any way altering its 
meaning, is merely defined by the first. These compounds 
may be paraphrased by changing the first part either into 
an Adjective or an Adverb: ἀκρό-πολι-ς, high town, castle, 
ὃ. 6.. ἄκρα πόλις (Hom. πόλις ἄκρη): μεσ-ημβρία, midday, 
Ὁ. 6.5 μέση ἡμέρα ; ψευδο-κῆρυξ, 2. ὁ., ψευδὴς κῆρυξ, false her- 
ald ; ὁμό-δουλο-ς, fellow-slave, 2. 6., ὁμοῦ δουλεύων ; μεγα- 
λοπρεπής, grand, properly, appearing as great ; ὀψί-γονος, 
late born, ὦ. €., ὀψὲ γενόμενος. This class is the least nu- 
merous. 

2. Attributive compounds. In them the second word is 
indeed also defined by the first, yet so that the latter alters 
its meaning, and, together with the first, forms a new idea, 
which is attributed as a quality to another word. These 
compounds can generally be paraphrased by employing 
the Participle of ἔχω, or a verb akin to it in meaning, and 
adding to this the second word as an object, the first be- 


—s 


§ 359. - MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 223 


coming an attribute to the object: μακρό-χειρ, longi-manus, 
long-handed, 2. é., μακρὰς χείρας ἔχων (not the long hand 
itself) ; apyupd-roto-c, provided with a silver bow, 7. e., 
ἀργυροῦν τόξον φέρων 3 ὁμό-τροπο-ς, of the same kind, ἡ. ¢., 
ὅμοιον τρόπον ἔχων ; γλαυκ-ῶπι-ς, bright-eyed, 4. 6., yav- 
κοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχουσα ; πικρό-γαμο-ς, having a bitter 
wedding ; κουφό-νου-ς, frivolous, trifling ; σώ-φρων, of 
sound sense, sober; Sexa-erijc, ten years old, ἡ. ¢., having or 
lasting ten years; avtdé-xap, making use of ones own 


hands. 


Obs.—To these belong the numerous adjectives in -wdn¢ and οειδης : 
γυναικώδης = γυναικο-είδης (εἶδος), womanlike, womanish, 


3. Objective compounds, or those of dependency. In 
them, either the first word is grammatically governed by 
the second or the second by the first, so that in the para- 
phrase one of the two must be put in an oblique case: 
nvi-oyo-c=Ta ἡνία ἔχων, guiding the reins, driver , oyo- 
ypago-c, speech-writer, ὁ. 6., λόγους γράφων ; ἀξιό-λογο-ς, 
worth speaking, t. €., λόγου ἄξιος ; φιλό-μουσο-ς, loving the 
Muses, ὁ. 6., φιλῶν τὰς Μούσας ; δεισι-δαίμων, fearing the 
gods, ὁ. €., δεδιὼς τοὺς δαίμονας ; χειροποίητος, made by 
hand, ἡ. 6., χερσὶ ποιητός ; θεοβλαβής, wyured by God, 2. é., 
ὑπὸ θεοῦ βεβλαμμένος ; οἰκογενής, born in the house, 2. 6. 
ἐν οἴκῳ γενόμενος. 

Obs. 1.—Prepositions may be joined with substantives in any of the 
three principal classes—(1) Determinative : ἀμφι-θέατρον, a round 
theatre, i. 6., a theatre extending itself round in a circle; ἀπ- 
ἐλεύθερος, one who has been freed by another, not by himself, 7. ¢., 
a freedman (ὁ ἀπό τινος ἐλεύθερος wy); (2) Attributive: ἔν-θεος, 
i. €., ἐν ἑαυτῷ θεὸν ἔχων, carrying a. godin himself, god-inspired ; 
ἀμφικίων, ViZ., νεώς, ὁ. €., κίονας ἀμφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν ἔχων, a temple encom- 
passed around with pillars ; (3) Objective: ἐγχώριος, 4. 6., ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ 
wy, at home ; ἐφίππιος, 1. €., ἐφ᾽ ἵππῳ ὦν, being on a horse, belonging 
to a horse. 

Obs. 2.—Against the general rule (δ 85), according to which com- 
pound words draw back the accent as far as possible from the 
end, those compounds in -o-¢ in the Nominative, whose second 
part comes directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 356), usually accent 


224 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. <= 360. 


this Stem if it has an active meaning. They are paroxytone 
when the last syllable but one is short, oxytone when it is long: 
λογο-γράφο-ς, speech-writer ; μητρ-ο-κτόγος, mother-murderer ; maw-— 
αγωγό-ς, boy-leader ; μελο-ποιός, composer of songs. When the mean- 
ing is passive, the second word remains wnaccented: αὐτό-γραφο-ς, 
written by one’s self; μητρ-ό-κτονο-ς, murdered by the mother ; dve- 
άγωγος, hard to guide. . 


§ 360. The prefix av [compare ἄνευ, without, Lat. in-, 
Iingl. wn-], before consonants a [compare Lat. ὁ- in ¢-gna- 
ru-s|, called alpha privative on account of its meaning, is 
found in a very large number of compounds, which belong 
to the determinative class if the second part has arisen from 
a verb or an adjective, but chiefly to the atiributive if from 
a substantive : ἄτ-γραφος, unwritten, ὁ. 6., οὐ γεγραμμένος ; 
ἀν-ελεύθερος, unfree, ὖ. €., οὐκ ἐλενϑεῥὸς: : ἀν-αιδής, shame- 
less, ὃ. €., αἰδῶ οὐκ ἔχων ; ἄπαι-ς, childless, ὦ. €., παῖδας οὐκ 
aa. Ditarmbastie es with ay (a) from substantives are 
rare and poetic : μήτηρ ἀμήτωρ, an unmotherly mother, 

+) μήτηρ ov μήτηρ οὖσα. 

Obs.—W ords originally beginning with digamma (δ 34, D.) have a, 
not ἀν: ἀ-έκων, contracted ἄκων, unwilling ; ἀ-εικ-ἧς, contracted 
aix-he, reproachful (Stem eix, ἔοικα) ; ἀ-εργό-ς, contracted ἀργό-ς, 
inactive (ἔργο-ν, work). 

The prefix du ς corresponds to the English ms, and, as 
the opposite to εὖ, denotes something ‘unfortunate, awk- 
ward, difficult : δυςάρεστος (ὃ 824, 10)»: displeased ; δύς- 
βουλος, all advised, ὁ 2. 6.. κακὰς βουλὰς ἔ ἔχων (attributive) ; : 
δυςάλωτος, hard to capture (ἢ 324,17). Here, too, de- 
terminative compounds from substantives are rare: Hom. 
Δύςπαρις, unfortunate Paris. 


PART SECOND. 
S ¥ N PAX. 


Preliminary Remarks. 


§ 361. 1. Syntax (σύνταξις, arrangement) teaches the 
use of the forms discussed in the first part of the grammar, 
_ and the way in which words are arranged into sentences, 
and sentences are combined together. 

2. A sentence is either simple or compound. Every 
sentence is simple in which the necessary parts of a sen- 
tence occur only once. 7 

3. The necessary parts of a sentence are : 

a) the Sulject, ?. 6.. the person or thing about which 
something is stated ; 

δ) the Predicate, ὁ. e., that which is stated. 


Obs, 1.—Every form of the finite verb (§ 225, 4) contains a com- 
plete sentence in itself,in which the personal ending contains 
the Subject and the Verbal-Stem the Predicate: φημί, I say; 
ἔφαμεν, we said. 

Obs. 2.—In many cases the Subject remains undefined: φασί, they 
say, people say ; or it is not defined, because readily understood 
by the Greeks: ὕει, he rains, ἡ. 6., Zeus, for he alone can cause 
rain; ἐσάλπιγξε, he blew the trumpet, i. e., the trumpeter, for it is 
his business. The Subject of the impersonal verbs δεῖ, χρή, zt is 
necessary, is also undefined. 


4. The Predicate is either Verbal or Nominal ; it is 
Verbal when expressed in the form of a jinzte verb"? Κῦρος 
ἐβασίλευσε, Cyrus ruled ; it as Nominal when expressed 
in the form of a nown (substantive or adjective: Κῦρος 
βασιλεὺς ἦν, Cyrus was king. 

5. The Predicate must agree with the Subject, viz., the 
Verbal Predicate in number, the Nominal in number and 


case, and, when it is an adjective, in gender also: οἱ πολέ- 
K 2 


226 PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 8.861. 


μίοι ἐνίκησαν, the enemies conquered ; ἡ μάχη μεγάλη ἦν, 
the battle was great. 


Exceptions, §§ 362-366. 


6. In many cases this agreement alone is sufficient to ex- 
press the velation of a Nominal Predicate to the Subject : 
ὁ μέγας ὄλβος οὐ μόνιμος, great prosperity is not lasting ; 
Λέριοι- κακοί, the Lerzans (inhabitants of the island of Le- 
ros) are bad. But mostly the Nominal Predicate is more 
clearly connected with its Subject by the verb to de (sub- 
stantive verb): ὁ μέγας ὄλβος οὐ μόνιμός ἐστιν, Λέριοι κακοί 
εἰσιν. This verb, thus used, is called the Copula. 

7. The intransitive and passive verbs, which denote zo 
become, be made, appear, be named, designated, chosen, and 
the like, in order to produce a complete sentence, often re- 
quire a Nominal Predicate along with the Verbal one. In 
this case also the Nominal Predicate must agree with the 
Subject : Κῦρος ἐγένετο βασιλεύς, Cyrus became king, Cy- 
rus rex factus est. Compare ὃ 392. 

8. The Greek language expresses many definitions of 
time, order, and kind, less frequently of place, by adjec- 
twves, which are expressed in English by adverbs or prepo- 
sitions with substantives. These adjectives, which must 
agree with the Subject, are to be considered as supple- 
mentary Predicates : τριταῖοι ἀπῆλθον, they went away on 
the third day; Λακεδαιμόνιοι ὕστεροι ἀφίκοντο, the Lace- 
demonians arrived later, posteriores advenerunt ; ὅρκιός 
σοι λέγω, 7 tell you on oath. 


On the similar use of the participle as a supplementary Predicate, 
see § 589, etc. 


9. A simple sentence is emlarged by an Object being add- 
ed to tlfe verb. The Object is that to which the action of 
the verb extends: of ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀπέκτειναν τὸν Σωκράτην, 
the Athenians killed Socrates. 


On the different kinds of Objects and the manner in which they 
are indicated, see §§ 395-402. 


8.861. PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 227 


10. The Active verbs, which correspond in meaning to 
the Intransitive and Passive ones mentioned in 7, 2. ¢., the 
verbs which denote to make, name, designate, choose, and 
the like, frequently also require a Wominal Predicate. 
But, as this belongs to the Object, it must agree with it: 
οἱ Πέρσαι τὸν Κῦρον εἵλοντο βασιλέα, the Persians chose 
Cyrus king | Perse Cyrum regem elegerunt|. Compare 
δ 404. This kind of Predicate is called a Dependent Pred- 
icate. As the Dependent Predicate here appears in the 
Accusative, so it may in other cases appear in the Genitive 
or Dative. Compare ὃ 438; Obs. ὃ 589, etc. 

11. Another enlargement of the sentence is the A¢trz- 
bute, ὃ. e., any nominal definition added to a substantive as 
‘essentially belonging to it and forming with it one idea: 
᾿καλὸς ἵππος, ὦ fine horse; ὃ παρὼν καιρός, the present time 
(the present). . 


Obs.—The Greek language in many cases adds an Attribute to the 
designation of a person, expressive of a generic idea: Hom. ἥρωες 
Δαναοί, ye heroes Danai (ye warring Danai); ἄνδρες δικασταί, ye 


judges, judices, 

12. Different from the Attribute is the Apposition. 
Apposition is such a subordinate definition added to a sub- 
stantive as does not exactly form one idea with it, but is 
superadded .rather for describing or illustrating it, and 
hence might generally be expressed in the form of a de- 
scriptive clause: Παρύσατις, ἡ τοῦ Κύρου μήτηρ, τοῦτον 
μᾶλλον ἐφίλει ἢ τὸν ᾿Αρταξέρξην, Parysatis, the mother of 
Cyrys—who was Cyrus’s mother—loved him more than 
Artaxerxes ; ἐντεῦθεν Κῦρος ἐξελαύνει διὰ Φρυγίας εἰς Ko- 
λοσσούς, πόλιν οἰκουμένην, εὐδαίμονα καὶ μεγάλην, from 
there Cyrus marches through Phrygia to Colossi, a popu- 
lous, prosperous, and large city (which was a... city). 

The Attribute and Apposition must agree with the sub- 
stantive to which they belong, in the same way as the 
Predicate (5,7). 


* 


"228 : NUMBER AND GENDER. § 362. 


Cuap. XIV.—NUMBER AND GENDER. 


§ 362. The singular sometimes has a codlective sense, de- 
noting a plurality: 200% ¢, clothing, clothes; πλίνθος, 
bricks ; ἡ ἵππος, cavalry; ἡ ἀσπίς, the heavy-armed. 

Sometimes a Predicate or Apposition in the Plural re- 
fers to collective substantives in the Singular: ᾿Αθηναίων 
τὸ πλῆθος οἴονται Ἵππαρχον τύραννον ὄντα ἀποθανεῖν, 
the mass of the Athenians believe Hipparchus died as 
ruler ; τὸ στράτευμα ἐπορίζετο σῖτον κόπτοντες τοὺς 
βοῦς καὶ ὄνους, the army obtained Sood by killing the oxen 
and asses. | 

A Plural is formed in Greek from many words, especial- 
ly abstracts, which have no plural in English, especially 
when the repetition of angdea is to be expressed: αἱ ἐπι- 
φάνειαι kal λαμπρότητες ἐκ τῶν ἀγώνων γίγνεσθαι 
φιλοῦσιν, celebrity and glory usually arise from the con- 
tests ; ἐμοὶ ai σαὶ μεγάλαι εὐτυχίαι οὐκ ἀρέσκουσιν, YOU 
(repeated) great success does not please me ; Hom. πάντες 
θάνατοι στυγεροί, all kinds of death are hateful. 


Obs. 1.—Poets frequently use the Plural in a generic sense where 
we employ the Singular with the indefinite article: οὐκ ἂν yuva- 
κῶν ἥσσονες καλοίμεθ᾽ ἄν, I should not like to be called inferior to a 
woman ; φίλοι, ὦ friend. 

“Obs, 2. —The: speaker often uses the first person Plural of himself 
[compare Lat. nos]. In this case the Masculine is used even 
when a woman is the speaker. Thus Electra says: πεσούμεθ᾽, 
εἰ χρή, πατρὶ τιμωρούμενοι, L will fall, if it must be,as my father’s 
avenger. 

Obs. 3.—In Homer there are many Plurals of abstract ideas, which 
we express in the Singular; the Plural, however, properly de- 
notes the various manifestations of such ideas: imroctrye 
ἐκέκαστο, by horsemanship he was distinguished ; ἀφρα δίῃσι νόοιο, 
in the foolishness (the foolish thoughts) of his mind. 


§ 363. The Neuter Plural comes very near in its mean- 
ing to the Singular. This explains the peculiar Greek 
custom, that the Neuter Plural has the verb in the Sin- 


j 


| 


§ 366. | NUMBER AND GENDER. 229 


gular: πῶς ταῦτα παύσεται; how ἐδ this to end? τὰ 
πράγματα ταῦτα δεινά ἐστιν, these things are terrible. 


Obs. 1.—Some Plural Neuters, which denote a plurality of persons, 
sometimes have the verb in the Plural, as: τὰ τέλη, in the sense 
of the authorities ; ra ἔθνη, the peoples. 

Obs. 2.—The Homeric and the Common Greek Dialects (Introduc- 
tion, 4) generally allow the Plural Verb with the Neuter Plural : 
Hom. σπάρτα λέλυνται, the ropes are loosed. 


§ 364. With an indefinite Neuter Subject (in English, 


at) the Adjective Predicate is frequently,in the Plural: 


adtvarta ἐστιν ἀποφυγεῖν, it is vmpossible to escape ; this 
is the case especially with the Verbal Adjective in reo-c : 
ἐπιχειρητέα jv, was to be attempted. 


§ 365. When ¢wo persons or things are spoken of, the 
Plural is always admissible as well as the Dual, and both 
numbers may be used in referring to the same thing: 
ἐγελασάτην ἄμφω, βλέψαντες εἰς ἀλλήλους, they 
both laughed after looking at one another; δότε παρά- 
δειγμα, ὦ Λάχης τε καὶ Νικία, give an example, Laches and 
Nicwas ; ὦ Λάχης τε καὶ Νικία, εἴπατον, O Laches and 
Nicias say. 


§ 366. The Neuter of an adjective in the Singular as 
well as in the Plural easily becomes a substantive: ἐν 
μέσῳ, m medio, in the midst; ἐν τῷ παρόντι, at the 
present moment, for the present; ἐκ πολλοῦ, for ὦ 
long time; Serva, terrible things. 

Hence a Weuter Adjective often stands as Predicate to 
one or more Masculine or Feminine substantives*to ex- 
press a class or genus in general: Hom. οὐκ ἀγαθὸν 
πολυκοιρανίη, the government of many is not a good thing; 
ὀρθὸν ἁλήθει᾽ ἀεί, truth is always the right thing ; δεινὸν 
οἱ πολλοί, κακούργους ὅταν ἔχωσι προστάτας, ὦ bad thing 
is the many when they have base leaders; ταραχαὶ καὶ 
στάσεις ὀλέθρια ταῖς πόλεσιν, disturbance and discord 
are rumous to states. 


280 THE ARTICLE. § 367. 


§ 367. The demonstrative pronoun, instead of being in 
the Neuter as in German, frequently, agrees in gender and 
number with the Predicate to which it refers, just as in 
Latin: οὗτοί εἰσιν ἄνδρες, those are men; οὗτος ὅρος 
ἐστὶ δικαιοσύνης ἀληθῆ τε λέγειν καὶ ἃ. ἂν λάβῃ τις ἀποδιδό- 
ναι, this is the idea of justice, ἐο speak the truth, and to 
gwe back what we have received [hac notio justitie 686]. 

The relative pronoun also often agrees in Gender and 
Number, not with the preceding substantive to which it 
refers, but with the substantive following, which is added 
as a Predicat@: φίλου, ὃ μέγιστον ἀγαθόν ἐστιν, ov ppov- 
τίζουσιν, they do not care for a friend, which rs the great- 
est good. 


Cuap. XV.—THE ARTICLE. 


§ 368. The Article ὃ, ἡ, τό is originally a demonstrative 
pronoun, and still employed as such in Homer, both in a 
substantive and adjective sense, and frequently also in the 
language of the other poets: Hom. τὴν ἐγὼ οὐ λύσω, 
HER J will not give up ; poet. τὸν, ὦ Ζεῦ πάτερ, φθίσον, 
HIM, father Zeus, destroy; Hom. φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος, 
this thy courage will be thy ruin. 


§ 369. The Article in this demonstrative sense is also 
employed in the following cases in Attic prose : 

1. In connection with pév and dé: 6 pév, the one; 6 &, 
the other. 


Obs.—Used adverbially, τὸ (ra) μέν --- τὸ (τὰ) δέ, mean partly — 
ἀπο γ. 


3. Sometimes also with καί and δέ: καὶ τὸν κελεῦσαι; 
and that he ordered ; τὸν καὶ τόν, the one and the other. 
3. In πρὸ τοῦ, before that, formerly. 


§ 370. The real Article generally: corresponds to the 
English definite article. It serves to set forth an object, 


ye ee ee ὧν. ὦ 


8.574. “THE ARTICLE. 281 


either as a single one (the individualizing article) or as a 
class (the generic article). 


Obs.—6, ἡ, τό in Homer almost always has a demonstrative power. 
Yet in many cases—compare especially § 379—the use of these 
forms approaches very near to that of the Attic Article. The 
Article, however, in Homer is scarcely ever necessary, and is fre- 
quently omitted also in the Tragic writers. 


§ 371. 1. The Lndividualizing Article sets forth a sin- 
gle object above others of the same kind, and that: 


a) as known or having been pointed out before: Herod. 
Χαλκιδέες τὰς ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αρτεμισίῳ εἴκοσι νῆας παρείχοντο, the 
Chalcideans furmshed the (before mentioned) twenty ships 
at Artemision ; Ξέρξης ἀγείρας τὴν ἀναρίθμητον στρατιὰν 
ἦλθεν ἐπὶ τὴν “Ἑλλάδα, after having collected the (well- 
known) wnumerable army, Xerxes marched against 
Greece. 


Obs.—In this sense proper names also, which in general do not 
need it, may take the Article: ὁ Σοκράτης, Socrates, whom you 
know, or who was mentioned before. 


§ 372. 6) A thing as distinguished from others by the 
addition of distinguishing circumstances: 6 τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων 
δῆμος, the Athenian people (no other); ἡ πόλις ἣν πολιορ- 
κοῦμεν, the city which we are besieging (just this). 


§ 373. The distinguishing circumstance expressed by 
the Article is often indicated in English by the possessive 
pronoun: ἕκαστος τῶν δημιουργῶν τὴν τέχνην καλῶς ἐξ- 
εἰργάζετο, cach of the artisans practised his art well. 


§ 374. In connexion with numerals, the Article some- 
times denotes that the number to which it is added stands 
in a defined relation to another number: τὰ δύο μέρη, two . 
thirds ; τῶν τριήρων τριακοσίων οὐσῶν τῶν πασῶν τὰς 
διακοσίας ἡ πόλις παρέσχετο, Of the triremes, of which there 
were three hundred in all, the city furnished two hun- 
dred. The Article has a similar. effect with quantitative 
adjectives of a more general kind: πολλοί, many—oi πολ- 


ν 


282 “THE ARTICLE. | 8 375. 


Aol, most ; πλέονες, More—oi πλέονξς, the greater part ; 
ἄλλοι, ol ἄλλοι, cetert ; ὀλίγοι, ὡς Meare ὀλίγοι, the 
oligarchs. 


§ 375. 2. The Generic Article indicates a whole class of 
homogeneous objects: of πολῖται, all the citizens ; ὃ ῥήτωρ, 
the orator (by profession) ; δεῖ τὸν στρατιώτην τὸν ἄρχοντα 
μᾶλλον ἢ τοὺς πολεμίους φοβεῖσθαι, the soldier must fear 
his superior rather than the enemy. 

Obs.—Hence the Article may also be used with proper names in 


the plural when a whole class 15 to be described: οἱ Δημοσθένεις, 
orators like Demosthenes (a Demosthenes, compare § 362, Obs. 1). 


§ 376. The Article is not used when a substantive only 
expresses an idea in general: ἀνθρώπου ψυχὴ τοῦ θείου 
μετέχει, man’s soul partakes of the divine; so θεός de- 
notes the deity; 6 θεός, ὦ particular god ; so likewise, in 
many other current expressions, the more ancient method 
of not using the Article has been preserved: νυκτός, by 
night ; ἡμέρας, by day; ἐπὶ θαλάσσῃ, at sea; πρὸς ἄστυ, 
to town ; κατ᾽ aypdv, in the country; κατὰ γῆς, under the 
earth ; ἐν δεξιᾷ, on the right ; ape λόγου, 7 exempt. 

§ 377. The Article is omitted with a number of sub- 
stantives, which by custom have almost acquired the force 
of proper names: βασιλεύς, the king (of ‘the Persians); 
πρυτάνεις, the presidents (as officials); ἐν ἀκροπόλει, in the 
Acropolis ( Athens). 


§ 378. The Predicate (§ 361, 3,10) generally has no 
Article: Kipog ἐγένετο βασιλεὺς τῶν Περσῶν, Cyrus 
became king of the Persians; πόνος εὐκλείας πατήρ, 
labor is father of fame ; oi ᾿Αθηναῖοι Περικλέα εἵλοντο 
στρατηγόν, the Athenians chose Pericles general (com- 
pare 88 387, 392, 403, and 438, Obs. 


§ 379. By means of the Article, any adjective, partici- 2 


ple, or adverb, as well as the infinitive, may be made ὦ 
substantive: Hom. ὃ γέρων, the old man ; οἱ πλούσιοι, 
the rich; ὃ λέγων, the speaker ; ὃ πέλας, the neighbor ; οἱ 


2 


Se Te ὙΨο᾿ = — 


τα a ee 


5.585: °° THE ARTICLE. | , 233, 


παρόντες, those piesent ; {Ta κάτω, the under (part); of πά- 
Aat, the ancients ; τὸ μισεῖν, hating or hatred. ᾿ 
Obs.—With the Neuter Article, any word, or even a whole sentence, 
may be represented as one object: τὸ ἀνήρ, the word ἀνήρ or the 
idea “man;” τὸ Γνῶθι σεαυτόν, the saying or rule “ Know thy- 
self.” 

§ 380. The Generic Article (§ 375) generalizes the idea 
of a participle, which then is to be translated by a relative 
phrase: ποιείτω τοῦτο 6 βουλόμενος, do that, who will ; μὴ 
ζητεῖτε τὸν ταῦτα λέξοντα, seek not (one) who will say this 
(compare ὃ 500). . 

§ 381. By the Article, many adverbs, placed between it and a sub- 
stantive, become attributive adjectives: οἱ τότε ἄνθρωποι, the people of 
that time ; ἡ παραυτίκα ἡδονή, the momentary pleasure; ai ἐνθάδε 
γυναῖκες, the women of this place; ἡ ἄγαν ἐλευθερία, the excessive free- 
dom. 

§ 382. In the same way, a genitive, or a preposition with a substan- 
tive, placed between the Article and another substantive, becomes 
an attributive clause: ra τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων πράγματα, the affairs of the 
Athenians ; οἱ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἄνθρωποι, the people in the city ; ἡ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν 
τροφή, the daily nourishment; ai ἄνευ λυπῶν ἡδοναί, the painless pleas- 
ures. ᾿ 

§ 383. The Article often stands alone, sometimes with 
the Genitive of a substantive (compare $§ 409, 410), some- 
times with a preposition followed by ἃ substantive; in 
such a construction the Article has the force of a substan- 
te (ὃ 379): τὰ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, the affairs (possessions, 
interests) of the Athenians ; οἱ ἐν τῇ πόλει, the (people) im 
the city; τὰ μετὰ ταῦτα, what ‘follows, the later (events). 


§ 384. When a substantive with an attribute (ὃ 361, 
11) adjective has the Article, the adjective stands between 
the substantive and the article: ὃ ἀγαθὸς a ἀνήρ, ἐδ good 
man. 


§ 385. If the substantive alone is to be prominent, and 
the adjective to be added as apposition (§ 361, 12), the 
substantive stands first, and the adjective with the wrt: 
Jollows, thus: 


234 THE ARTICLE. § 386. 


a) The substantive without Article, when the case is 
such that the .substantive, if put alone, would have no arti- 
‘cle: ri διαφέρει ἄνθρωπος ἀκρατὴς θηρίου τοῦ ἀκρατε- 
στάτου; in what does an ungovernable man differ from 
the most ungovernable beast ? for if θηρίον stood alone it 
would be without Article, θηρίου, from ὦ beast. 

b) The substantive has the Article when by itself, even 
without an adjective, it must have the Article: οἱ Χῖοι τὸ 
τεῖχος περιεῖλον τὸ καινόν, the Chians pulled down (their) 
wall—the new one (which they themselves had built); for, 
even without the adjective, it would have to be τὸ τεῖχος 
περιεῖλον (ἢ 373). 


§ 386. The same rule holds good with regard to the po- 
sition of the attributive additions mentioned in δὲ 381 and 
382: 6 ᾿Αθηναίων δῆμος, the Athenian people; ὃ δῆμος, 
ὁ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, the people, that is, the Athenian ; 6 μετὰ 
ταῦτα χρόνος, the after time; ὃ χρόνος ὃ μετὰ ταῦτα, the 


time which followed this. 


§ 387. An adjective which, without the Article, either 
precedes or follows a substantive having the Article, is pre- 
dicative, ὦ. €., the character is assigned to the substantive 
only by this word (ὃ 361, 4, 8, and 10): ἀγαθὸς ὃ ἀνὴρ or ὃ 
avi ἀγαθός (viz., ἐστίν), the man is good ; ἅπαντες ἔχομεν 
τὸ σῶμα θνητόν, we all have a body (which is) mortal. 
The translation may often be effected by a relative clause: 
οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἡγοῦντο αὐτονόμων τὸ πρῶτον συμμάχων, the 
Athenians had the lead of allies (who) at first (were) inde- 
pendent ; φαίνομαι μεγάλας τὰς ὑποσχέσεις ποιούμενος, 7 
seem to make promises which are great. Compare § 378. 

Obs.—With proper names, the use of the Article is very uncertain 

when the class is added to which they belong: ὁ Εὐφράτης ποτα- 
μός OF ὁ ποταμὸς ὁ Evpparne, the river Huphrates ; ἡ Αἴτνη τὸ ὄρος, 
Mount Etna ; Σικελία ἡ νῆσος, the island of Sicily ; ἡ πόλις οἱ Ταρ- 
σοί͵ the city of Tarsi. 


§ 388. The possessive pronoun is preceded:by the Arti- 


ς 


cle when a single definite object is referred to: 6 ἐμὸς 


§ 391. _.THE ARTICLE, | 235 


ἑταῖρος, my (particular) friend ; ἐμὸς ἑταῖρος, a friend of 
nine. 

§ 389. αὐτός, as a predicate, put before or after a sub- 
stantive with the Article, means self; αὐτὸς ὃ marhp or ὁ 
πατὴρ αὐτός, the father himself, ipse pater ; but as an at- 
tribute it is put between the Article and the substantive, 
and means same: 6 αὐτὸς ἀνήρ, the same man, idem vir. 

With the demonstrative pronouns οὗτος, ὅδε, ἐκεῖνος, a 
substantive, not being a predicate, has regularly the Article: 
οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ OY ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος, this man; ἐκεῖνο τὸ δῶρον, 
that gift. But when the substantive is a predicate the 
Article is wanting: ἐν Πέρσαις νόμος ἐστὶν οὗτος, among 
the Persians this is law. Compare § 367. 


§ 390. πᾶς without the Article before a substantive with- 
out the Article means in the Singular every: πᾶσα πόλις, 
every city. The Article before πᾶς gives it the meaning 
of whole: ἢ πᾶσα πόλις, the whole city; τοὺς πάντας ὃπλί- 
τας, the whole of the heavy-armed. Most generally πᾶς 
as well as ὅλος without the Article precedes or follows a 
substantive provided with the Article: πᾶσαν ὑμῖν τὴν 
ἀλήθειαν ἐρῶ, L will tell you the whole truth ; τὸν ἀριθμὸν 
πάντα δίχα διελάβομεν, we divided the whole number into 
two parts; τῆς ἡμέρας ὅλης διῆλθον οὐ πλέον πέντε καὶ 
εἴκοσι σταδίων, during the whole day they proceeded no 
more than twenty-five stadia. 

Obs.—7ac, with the Article added to a numeral, may often be 


translated by “altogether” or “in all :)". Δαρεῖος ἐβασίλευσε τὰ 
πάντα ἕξ καὶ τριάκοντα ἔτη, Darius ruled altogether thirty-six years. 


§ 391. Expressions for measures are to be understood differently, 


_ according to the position of the Article: ἔσχατον τὸ ὄρος, the extreme 


end of the mountain ; τὸ ἔσχατον ὄρος, the farthest mountain (in contrast 
to other mountains); ἡ ἀγορὰ μέση, the middle (of the) market-place ; 
ἡ μέση ἀγορά, the middle market, that placed in the middle of several 
others. In Latin, forwm medium means both. 


9388. THE NOMINATIVE. ὃ 392. 


Cap. X VI.—USsE oF THE CASES. 
A) The Nominative. . 


§ 392. The Vominatzve is the case of the subject a of 
the predicate belonging to the subject (§ 361, 3, 4). 

Hence, as in Latin with fio, dicor, wideor, creéor, etc., 80 
in Greek with verbs of the same meaning, the predicativé 
noun referring to the subject is in the Nominative: καθί- 
σταται βασιλεύς, he is appointed king ; ᾿Αλέξανδρος θεὸς 
ὠνομάζετο, Alexander deus appellabatur. Compare ὃ 361, 
7; ὃὃ 378, 403. 


0bs.—axoiw, I hear, in the sense of I am called (Lat. audio], also be- 


longs to these verbs: οἱ ἐν ᾿Αθήναις φιλιππίζοντες κόλακες Kal 


᾿ θεοῖς ἐχθροὶ ἤκουον, the Philippizers in Athens were called flat- 
terers and objects of the gods’ hatred. 


§ 393. The Nominative is frequently used instead of the Vocative 
in addressing a person, especially in connection with οὗγος : ὁ ᾿Απολ- 
λόδωρος οὗτος, οὐ περιμενεῖς ; You! ry aks wort you op ? and 
also in exclamations: νήπιος, the fool ! 


. B) The Vocative. 


§ 394. The person or thing addressed is in the Vocative. 
In Attic prose ὦ is generally put before it, except some- 
times in animated discourse: μὴ θορυβεῖτε, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾽Αθη- 
ναῖοι, dowt make a disturbance, Athenians ; ἀκούεις Ai- 
oxivn; do you hear, Aischines ? 

Obs. — The Vocative, like interjections, does not belong to the 

structure of a sentence, whence a word in the Vocative is in- 
closed by commas. 


C) The Accusative. 


ὃ 395. The Accusative, Genitiye, and Dative mark an "Ὁ 


object as dependent, whence they are called cases of de- 
pendence (casus obliqui, oblique cases). 

The Accusative is the case of the Odject, and theréfore 
denotes generally the person or thing to which an action 
is directed. 


bie 
Ne εν δ". 


Cy ee 


§ 398. THE EXTERNAL OBJECT. 237 


- The Object is either external to the action by which it 
is affected: τύπτω τὸν δοῦλον, L strike the slave, or inter- 


nal, ὁ. ¢., already contained in the action itself: τὐπτώ πεν- 


τήκοντα tee’ L strike fifty blows. 


Obs.—The Accusative, therefore, in the great majority of cases, is. 
dependent on a verb. Only in a very few cases does it happen . 
that a substantive after the manner of a verb is followed.by an ~ 


Accusative: οἱ σύμμαχοι τεθνᾶσι τῷ δέει τοὺς τοιούτους ἀποστόλους, 
the allies are dead (beside themselves) from Loe of such embassa- 
dors. 


§ 396. 1. The Lxternal Object 


is expressed by the Accusative with transitive verbs as in 
other languages. Several verbs, however, are treated in 
Greek as transitive which in other languages are intransi- 
tive. Such verbs are: 


_@) Those which signify to benefit or injure, whether it 
be by act or speech: εὖ or ἀγαθὸν ποιέω, εὐεργετέω, L ben- 
efit (τοὺς εὐεργετήσαντας, my benefactors); ὀνίνημι, ὠφελέω, 
L am useful; κακῶς or κακὸν ποιέω, κακόω, I do il; 
ἀδικέω, 7 do wrong; ὑβρίζω, 7 msult; βλάπτω, 7 hurt, 
etc.; also κολακεύω, 7) flatier, and τιμωρέομαι, 1 avenge my- 
self (τὸν ἐχθρόν, on my enemy); ὃ Σωκράτης οὐδένα τῶν 
πολιτῶν ἠδίκησεν, Socrates acted unjustly to none of his 
fellow-citizens. 

§ 397. Not unfrequently the verb of a principal clause takes as its 
object what should properly be the subject of a subordinate clause : 
καί μοι τὸν υἱὸν εἰπέ, εἰ μεμάθηκε THY τέχνην, More animated than καί μοι 


εἰπέ, εἰ ὁ υἱὸς μεμάθηκε τὴν τέχνην, and tell me about my son, whether he 
has learned his trade.. Compare ὃ 519, 5, Obs, 2. 


§ 398. 6) The Accusative of the external Object is used 
with the verbs: φεύγω (compare fugio), ἀποδιδράσκω, 7 
run away from; φθάνω, 1 get before; θηράω, θηρεύω, ἢ 
hunt after; μιμίομαι (compare imitor), ζηλόω, 7 rival ; 
ἀμείβομαι, L repay, I respond to ; λανθάνω (compare lateo), 
ἐκλείπω (compare defucio) ; zich stick μὲ ἡ ἐλπίς, spes me 


deficit. 


i: 


sities 
ΒΓ] 


238 _ THE INTERNAL OBJECT. 3 § 399: 


§ 399. c) This Accusative is farther used with verbs of 


emotion : αἰδέομαι, αἰσχύνομαι, Lam ashamed (τὸν rarépa, 


before my father); φυλάττομαι, evAaBéoua, 7 am on my 
guard against ; θαῤῥέω, 1 have confidence (τὴν ἰσχύν, mm 
my strength) ; ἐκπλήττομαι, καταπλήττομαι, Lam amazed 
at ; similarly with ὄμνυμι, 7 swear ἐς (τοὺς θεούς, the 
gods). 


Obs.—As with ὄμνυμι, 50 in exclamations, the Accusative is used 
even without a governing verb: ναὶ μὰ τὸν Δία; Yes, by Zeus ! 

(ὃ 643, 16). 
§ 399d. The Space and Time over which an action ex- 
tends are often expressed by the Accusative: κοινὴν ὁδὸν 


ἤλθομεν, we came by a common road; Hom. κλίμακα 


ὑψηλὴν κατε[βήσετο, she came down the high ladder ; 

πλεῖν θάλασσαν, to navigate the sea; ἐνταῦθα Κῦρος ἔμεινε 

ἡμέρας “πέντε, there Cyrus remained five days. Compare 

8 405. , 
On the Accusative of the aim, see § 406. 


§ 400. 2. The Lnternal Object 


is expressed by the Accusative not only with transitive, 
but also with intransitive and passive verbs. 
The internal Object is: 


a) a word of cognate orzgin with the verb: Hom. ἄλλοι 


δ᾽ ἀμφ᾽ ἄλλῃσι μάχην ἐμάχοντο πύλῃσιν, ali circa alias 


portas pugnam pugnabant ; τεῖχος τειχίζονται, they 
wall (build) ὦ wall ; πομπὴν πέμπειν, to send an escort, 
make a solemn procession ; κακίστην δουλείαν ἐδούλευσεν, 
he served the worst service (endured the worst slavery) ; 


Hom. τῷ πείσεαι ὅς Kev ἀρίστην βουλὴν βουλεύσῃ, you will 


obey him who advises (gives) the best advice; τὴν ἐναντίαν 
νόσον νοσοῦμεν, WE suffer (sicken) Srom the opposite sick- 
7.688 , μεγάλην τινὰ κρίσιν κρίνεται, he is judged cried) m 
a great trial ; 

ὦ) or a word akin to the verb in meaning ; πληγὴν τύπ- 
tera. Paputarny, he ἐδ struck a very severe blow; πάσας 


ee a a 5 νς 


§ 402. DOUBLE OBJECT. " 939 


νόσους κάμνει, he suffers from all diseases ; poet. ὀδύρματα 
γοᾶσθαι, to moan lamentations ; πόλεμον ἐστράτευσαν τὸν 
ἱερὸν καλούμενον, they marched out to the so-called holy ἢ 
war; γραφὴν διώκειν, to pursue with a writ (compare 
γραφὴν γράφεσθαι): 

ce) or a substantive defining the verb: Ὀλύμπια νικᾶν, 
to conquer in the Olympic games ; γάμους ἑστιᾶν, to give 
a marriage-feast ; Hom. νόστον ὀδυρόμενοι, weeping for 
the return ; μένεα πνείοντες ᾿Αχαιοί, the cowrage-breathing 
Achwans ; ἀγγελίην ἐλθεῖν, to go a message ; πῦρ ὀφθαλ- 
μοῖσι δεδορκώς, looking jire with the eyes (flashing fiery 
looks) ; 

d) or the result of the action expressed by the verb: 
ἕλκος οὐτάσαι, to strike a wound (produce by blows); ὅρ- 
kia τάμνειν, foedus ferire, ὁ. 6., fedus hostiam feriendo ef- 
Jicere; poet. ἧδε (ἡ ἀναρχία) τροπὰς καταῤῥήγνυσι, τέ (an- 
archy) breaks flight, ἡ. e., produces flight by breaking through 
the ranks. 


§ 401. Often, especially in the poets, a neuter adjective 
or pronoun in the Accusative is added to a verb as a 
special qualification, almost like an adverb (ὃ 400, ¢): 
ὀλίγον ἀπεῖναι, to be a little way off; μέγα ψεύδεται, 
he tells a great lie (compare μέγα Ψεῦ δος ψεύδεται); τοῦ - 
το χαίρω, at this 7 rejoice; τί χρήσομαι τούτῳ; what 
use shall I make of this? πάντα πείσομαι, L will obey in 
all things. | | 


’ § 402. 3. Double Object. 


Many verbs have a double object, consequently a double 
Accusative ; the following, which most frequently occur 
with this construction, may serve as examples: διδάσκω 
(ἐδίδαξαν τὸν παῖδα τὴν μουσικήν, docuerunt puerum mu- 
sicam) #* κρύπτω, ἢ hide ; ἐρωτάω, 7 ask ; αἰτέω, 7 demand ; 
πράττομαι, L acquire (ἀργύριον τοὺς παρόντας, money ‘from 
those who are present); κακὸν λέγω τοὺς ἐχθρούς, L speak 


240 DOUBLE OBJECT. | § 403. 


all of my enemies ; ἀφαιρέομαι, ἀποστερέω, I deprive of ; 
ἀναμιμνήσκω, LI remind of; ἐνδύω, ἀμφιέννυμι, 7 put on 
(τινὰ χιτῶνα, ὦ Coat on some One); περιβάλλομαι, 7 encircle 
(τείχη τὴν πόλιν, the city with walls). Ἤριῃ. : ἡ δὲ μέγαν 
ἱστὸν ὕφαινεν δίπλακα, she wove a double parent at the 
loom (ὃ 399, ὁ). 


Obs. 1.—In the passive construction the thing remains in the Accu- 
sative: διδάσκομαι τὴν μουσικήν; ἀφῴρημαι τὸν ἵ ππον͵ Lam 


robbed of the horse. 


Obs. 2.—Many other verbs besides these have a double Accusative, 
by an external object being added to the internal one: Hom. 
ὃν Ζεὺς φίλει παντοίην φιλότητα, whom Zeus loved with multiform 
love, i. 6., to whom Zeus manifested love in various ways (ὃ 400, 
a); Αἰσχίνης Κτησιφῶντα γραφὴν παρανόμων ἐδίωκεν, Alschines pros- 
ecuted Ktesiphon with a charge of violating the law (δ 400, δ) ; poet. 
πολλά oe ὀδύρματα κατεῖδον τὴν Ἡράκλειον ἔξοδον γοωμένην, many 
wailings I saw you give vent to about the departure of Heracles 
(§ 400, ce); Hom. ἕλκος ὅ με βροτὸς οὔτασεν ἀνήρ, the wound which 
a mortal man struck me (δ 400, @). 


§ 404. 4. The Accusative as a Predicate. 

A dependent Predicate relating to an Object is in the 
Accusative. Hence the verbs mentioned in §§ 361, 10, 
and 392, which signify naming, deeming, making, appowint- 
ing, choosing, representing, and the like, have a double 
Accusative in the Active—one of the external Object, and 
one of the Predicate : οἱ κόλακες ᾿Αλέξανδρον θεὸν wvd- 
μαζον, the flatterers used to call Alexander a god ; αἱρεῖ- 
σθαί τινα στρατηγόν, eligere aliquem ducem; οὐ rove 
πλεῖστα ἔχοντας εὐδαιμονεστάτους νομίζω, I do not 
deem those possessing most the happiest ; παρέχω ἐμαυτὸν 
εὐπειθῆ, 1] show myself obedient ; ἔλαβε τοῦτο δῶρον, 
he received this (as) a gift. 


0bs.—The want of the Article often of itself distinguishes the pre- 
dicative accusative from the objective (ὃ 878). In the passive 


construction both Accusatives must become Nominativeg, accord- 
ing to § 392. 


§ 404.5. In a freer way the Accusative is joined to 


§ 405. _ DOUBLE OB 


verbs and adjectives, to point ou 
these words refers, 7 reference to wi 
understood: κάμνω τὴν κεφαλήν, 7 suffer in the head 
(compare ὃ 400, ὁ); ἄδικος πᾶσαν ἀδικίαν, unjust Mm 
every (kind of) injustice (in every way, compare ὃ 400, 
a); Ἕλληνές εἰσι τὸ γένος, they are Greeks in race; 
εὖ ἔχομεν τὰ σώματα, we are well in body; Hom. 6 μ- 
ματα καὶ κεφαλὴν ἴκελος Adi τερπικεραύνῳ, an eyes and 
head like thunder-loving Zeus ; παρθένος καλὴ τὸ εἶδος, 
a maiden beautiful in form, or of beautiful. form (facie 
pulchra); οὐδεὶς ἄνθρωπος αὐτὸς πάντα σοφός, NO Man 
as himself wise ir every thing ; ὃ Μαρσύας ποταμὸς εἴκοσι 
kal πέντε πόδας εἶχε τὸ ev poe, the Liver Marsyas was 
twenty-five feet in breadth. This Accusative is called the 
. Accusative of reference. 


Obs.—Hence a great number of independent, almost adverbial, Ac- 
cusatives ; τὸ ὄνομα, in name, by name ; τὸ πλῆθος, in number ; τὸν 
τρόπον, in character τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, in this way; τὴν φύσιν, by 
nature; πρόφᾶἄσιν, on the pretext, ostensibly ; δίκην, like ; χάριν, for 
the ἀχὸ of (gratia); τὸ πᾶν, altogether, on the whole ; πολύ, by far ; 
τέ; quid, what? why? τί κλαίεις ; why weepest thou ? αὐτὰ ταῦτα 
ἥκω, for this very reason I have come. 


§ 405. In regard to the ideas of space and time, the 
Accusative expresses extension (compare ὃ 399, Ὁ): Hom. 
πᾶν ἦμαρ φερόμην, ὦ whole day I was borne along, to- 
tum diem ferebar; βασιλεὺς καὶ “Ἕλληνες ἀπεῖχον ἀλ- 
λήλων τριάκοντα στάδια, the king and the Hellenes 
were thirty stadia distant from each other ; Hom. λείπετο 
δουρὸς ἐρω ἦν, he remained a spear’s throw behind ; τὸν 
μὲν εὖ παθόντα δεῖ μεμνῆσθαι τὸν πάντα χρόνον, τὸν 
δὲ ποιήσαντα. εὐθὺς ἐπιλελῆσθαι, he who has received kind- 
nesses ought to remember them throughout all time, but he 
who has done them immediately to forget them. 


Obs. 1.—An Accusative used with ordinal numerals, in regard to 
time, is to be translated by since before or ago: ἑβδόμην ἡμέραν 
ἡ ὀυλδδλῇ αὐτῷ ἐτετελευτήκει, his daughter had died seven days be- 
Sore. 2 3 
L 


242 | ‘THE GENITIVE. § 406. 


Obs, 2.—Freer Accusatives, referable chiefly to time, are: τοῦτον 
τὸν χρόνον, at this time ; τὸ λοιπόν, Sor the future, henceforth ; τέλος, 
at last ; πρότερον, formerly ; ἀρχήν, up to the beginning, hence en- 
tirely ; τὴν ταχίστην, supply ὁδόν; the quickest (way); μακράν, far, 
distant. 

§ 406. In the poets, the Accusative joined to verbs of 
motion also denotes the place toward which an action is 
directed: Hom. τοῦ δὲ κλέος οὐρανὸν ἵκει, his fame 
reaches up to heaven; πῶς ἦλθες ΓἼΑργος; guomodo Ar- 
gos venisti? On the absolute Accusative of participles, 
see § 586. 


D) The Genitive. 


ὃ 407. The Genitive generally denotes a thing belong- 
ang to another. 
Obs.—Hence the Genitive is most commonly dependent on a nown, 


and, eyen where it is governed by a verb, its use resembles that 
with a noun. 


§ 408. 1. The Genitive with Substantives. 


One Substantive may be joined to another in various 
ways; the most common are: 


1. Σωκράτης 6 Σωφρονίσκου: υἱός, Socrates son of 
Sophroniscus : Origin. 
2. ἡ οἰκία τοῦ πατρός, the father s house: Possession. 
3. νόμισμα apyv Pp tov, ὦ silver coin: Material. 
Hom. δέπας οἴνου, a cup. of wine: Contents. 
4. οἵ πλεῖστοι TOV Ἑλλήνων, most of the Hellenes: 
Partitive Genitive. 
5.6 φόβος τῶν πολεμίων, metus hostiwn, 2. é., either 
a) the fear of the enemy, ὁ. 6.. the fear which the 
enemy feels (Subjective Genitive), or, : 
δ) the fear about the enemy, ὦ. 6.. the fear of which 
the enemy is the object (Objective Genitive). 
6. δοῦλος πέντε μνῶν, a slave worth five mine : Value. 
7. γραφὴ κλοπῆς, an accusation of theft: Cause. 
8. πολίτου ἀρετή, ὦ citizen’s virtue : Quality. 


§ 412. 3 THE GENITIVE. 243 


9. Hom. Τροίης πτολίεθρον, the city of (called) Troy: 
Designation. 

Which of the two substantives in any particular case 
has to be expressed by the Genitive is generally quite as 
clear from their meaning as in English. 


But the following special peculiarities in the use of the 
different kinds of Genitives deserve to be noticed: 


§ 409. a) The Genitive denotes descent from a father, 
even without the addition of a Substantive: Σωκράτης 6 
Σωφρονίσκου, Socrates, the son of Sophroniscus ; Midré- 
δης Κίμωνος, Miltiades, son of Kimon; poet.; Διὸς ”Ap- 
τεμις, Artemis, daughter of Zeus. 


§ 410. 6) The Neuter of the Article with a Genitive has 
very different meanings (compare ὃ 383): τὰ τῶν Ἑλλή- 
νων, the affairs, interests, possessions of the Hellenes (com- 
pare τὰ Ἑλληνικά) ; τὸ τῆς ὀλιγαρχίας, the nature of the 
oligarthy ; on the other hand, τὸ τοῦ Δημοσθένους, the 
word of Demosthenes ; τὰ τῶν φίλων κοινά, the property 
of friends is common. 


§ 411. c) The idea of abode is to be supplied i in the ex- 
pressions: εἰς διδασκάλου φοιτᾶν, to go to the master’s 
(house), ὁ. 6., to go to school; ἐν or εἰς “Αιδον (Homer, εἰν 
᾿Αἴδαο ϑ οι κα in Hades’ dwelling, dominion), in or into 
the lower world. 


§ 412. d) The Partitive Genitive (4), denoting a whole 
to be divided, is most common with numerals and superla- 
tives: πολλοὶ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, multi Atheniensium ; x ό- 
τερος τῶν ἀδελφῶν ; which of the two brothers? πάντων 
ἄριστος, omnium optimus ; but also with various adjec- 
tives: οἱ σπουδαῖοι τῶν πολιτῶν, the assiduous among 
the citizens. So, more freely in the Homeric poems: Sia 
θεάων, the diwine one among goddesses ; i δήμου ἀνήρ, ὦ 
man of the people; and similarly, ἀνὴρ τῶν ῥητόρων, ὦ 
man from the number of the orators. | 


244 THE GENITIVE. | § 413, 


The Partitive Genitive with names of places denotes the 
whole territory: Θῆβαι τῆς Βοιωτίας, Thebes in Beotia ; 
with Neuter pronouns it sometimes denotes a whole which 
is attained by degrees: εἰς τοῦτο ἀνοίας ἦλθον, co usque 
insane progresst sunt. 


Obs.—Adjectives which have a Partitive Genitive sometimes follow 
the gender of the Genitive dependent upon them: 6 ἥμισυς τοῦ 


χρόνου, the half of the time (instead of τὸ ἥμισυ τοῦ χρόνου); ἡ ᾿ 


πλείστη τῆς χώρας, most of the land. 


§ 413. δ) The Objective Genitive (5, 6) may be translated 
by various prepositions: εὔνοια τῶν φίλων, benevolence 
toward friends ; ἀπορία σίτου, want of food ; Hom., ἔρος 
ἐδητύος ἠδὲ ποτῆτο c, eagerness for food and drink , ἡσυχία 
ἐχθρῶν, peace from enemies; ἀγῶνες λόγω v, contests Mm 
speeches ; ἀφορμὴ Epyw v, stimulus to deeds ; ἀπόστασις τῶν 
᾿Αθηναίων, defection from the Athenians ; λύσις θανάτου, 


deliverance from death ; βίᾳ πολιτῶν, with violence against — 


the citizens, in spite of the citizens. . 


2. Genitive with Adjectives and Adverbs. 


§ 414. The Genitive is joined to many relative adjec- 
tives and their adverbs, ἡ. ¢., to such adjectives and adverbs 
as are conceivable only in reference to something, and 
points out the person or thing they refer to. The most 
important adjectives of this kind are: 


1. κοινός, COMMON; ἴδιος, οἰκεῖος, OWN, peculiar, and oth- 
ers which imply property or belonging to, as: ναὸς ἱερὸς 
τοῦ ᾿Απόλλωνος, a temple sacred to Apollo (possession, 
compare § 408, 2). 

2. Adjectives denoting. plenty and want (contents, § 408, 
3), as: μεστός, ἔμπλεως, πλήρης, full ; πλούσιος, Tich ; ἐν- 
δεής, πένης, necessitous ; farther, the adverb ἅλις, enough: 
πάντα εὐφροσύνης πλέα ἦν, all was full of joy. 

3. Those signifying acquainted or unacquainted with: 
ἔμπειρος, peritus ; ἄπειρος, imperitus ; ἐπιστήμων, skilled 


ee ee 


§ 416. . THE GENITIVE. 245 


(τέχνης, in an art); μνήμων, ἀμνήμων, mindful and wn- 
mindful. 


4. ἄξιος, worthy; ἀνάξιος, unworthy ; πλείστου ἄξιον, 
worth most, the worthiest thing (ὃ 408, 6): 

5. Adjectives implying participation (§ 408, 4), whether 
it be positive or negative: μέτοχος τοῦ πόνου, particeps 
laboris ; ἄμοιρος, without a shares ys αἴτιος, author, guilty, 
TCUS. 

Obs.—To these belong many adjectives compounded with dy (4, 

§ 360) privative, which, especially in poets, are joined with the 
genitive: poet. αἰὼν κακῶν ἄγευστος, a life which has not tasted of 
misfortunes ; φίλὼν ἄκλαυτος, unwept by friends. 


6. Adjectives in -ἰκός (ὃ 351) denoting capability or fit- 
ness for (compare 3) something : διδασκαλικὸς γραμματικῆς, 
capable of teaching grammar ; παρασκευαστικὸς τῶν εἰς τὸν 
πόλεμον, skilled in obtaining the necessaries for war. 


§ 415. Many Adverbs of Place are joined with a Geni- 
tive, which is mostly of a Partitive nature (compare § 412): 
ποῦ γῆς; where on earth? so with ἐντός, within; εἴσω, 
inside ; ἐκτός, without; ἔξω, outside; ἄγχι, ἐγγύς, πλη- 
σίον, near; πρόσω or πόῤῥω, forward ; πέρα, beyond ; 
εὐθύ, straight towards ; πρόσθεν, ἔμπροσθεν, in front ; ὄπι- 
σθεν, behind; ἀμφοτέρωθεν, on both sides; ἄνω, upward 
(ποταμῶν, up-stream); and corresponding with these also 
some adverbs of time and manner: πηνίκα τῆς ἡμέρας ; 
at what time of the day? πώς ἔχεις τῆς γνώμης ; what do 
you think ? λάθρα τῶν γονέων, secretly from the parents. 


ὃ 416. The Comparative may have the object with which, 
any thing is compared in the Genitive (as in the Abla- 
tive in Latin): μείζων τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ, major Sratre, ὦ. 6.5 ἢ 
ὁ ἀδελφός, than the brother ; 3 ov προφήκει τὸν ἄρχοντα 
τῶν ἀρχομένων πονηρότερον εἶναι, 2. 6. ἢ τοὺς ἀρχομένους, 
it is not becoming that the governor should be worse than 
the governed. 


Obs. 1.—This Genitive is used most frequently where it represents 


246 THE GENITIVE. ee. cS ve 


ἤ with the Nominative or Accusative; yet it may also more 
freely represent % With the Dative: poet. πλείων χρόνος, ὃν δεῖ μ᾽ 
ἀρέσκειν τοῖς κάτω τῶν ἐνθάδε (ἢ τοῖς ἐνθάδε), longer is the time that 
I must please those below than that I must please those here. 

Obs. 2.—Like thé Comparative, the Superlative is sometimes joined 
with the Genitive of the things with which any thing is com- 
pared: poet. φάος κάλλιστον τῶν προτέρων, a light most beautiful 

- in comparison with the former ones, where we might have expected 


φάος κάλλιον τῶν προτέρων, lux prioribus pulchrior, or φάος κάλλι- ἡ 


στον πάντων, Omnium pulcherrima. 

Obs. 3.—All adjectives expressive of a comparison follow the rule 
of Comparatives: διπλάσιος, doubly (as great.as); δεύτερος (οὐδενός), 
second (to none); ὕστερος, later than ; ἕτερος, another than. ὁ 


3. The Genitive with Verbs. 


Very many verbs are joined with the Genitive on the 
general principles mentioned in § 408. 


§ 417. 1. The Genitive represents a Predicate (ὃ 361, 7 
and 10) with verbs which denote being, becoming, making, 
deeming, in order to predicate something of a substantive, 
as originating from, possessing, consisting of, or in any 
other way qualifying it, $408: Σωκράτης Σωφρονίσκου ἣ ἦν, 
Socrates was Sophroniscus’s son (§ 408, 1); ἡ οἰκία τοῦ 
πατρὸς ἐγένετο, the house became the father’s. property 
(ὃ 408, 2); τὸ τεΐχος λίθου πεποίηται, the wall has been 
made of stone (ὃ 408, 3); οἱ Θεσσαλοὶ τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἧσαν, 
the Thessalians belonged to the Hellenes (§ 408, 4); πολί- 
του ἀγαθοῦ νομίζεται θαῤῥεῖν, to be courageous is deemed a 
good citizen’s quality (§ 408, 8). 

Obs.—The Genitive often occurs with verbs of perception and ob- 

servation in such a way that it is properly dependent on a noun 


or pronoun: τοῦτο ὑμῶν μάλιστα θαυμάζομεν, this we most admire in 


you (properly : this of you we most admire). 


§ 418. 2. The Genitive of Material (§ 408, 3) is also 
used with verbs of plenty and want (compare § 414, 2): 
πίμπλημι, πληρόω, L fill; πλήθω, yéuw, 7 am full , δεόμαι 
(δεῖ por), 1 needy τὰ ὦτα ἐνέπλησαν δαιμονίας σοφίας, they 
jiled the ears with wondrous wisdom ; ὃ "παρὼν καιρὸς 


a eS 


§ 419. THE GENITIVE. 247 


πολλῆς φροντίδος καὶ βουλῆς δεῖται, the present time is in 
need of much reflection and advice. | 


§ 419. 3. The Partitive Genitive (§ 408, 4) is used with 
many verbs which only partially aftect the object of the 

action : 

a) With all verbs which contain the idea of sharing: 
μετέχὼ (μέτεστί μοι), 1 have ὦ share in; μεταχαμβάνω, 7 
take a share in; μεταδίδωμι, 7 give a share (τῆς λείας, of 
the booty); κοινωνέω, 1 share (compare § 414, 5); Hom. 
σῖτον . δ᾽ αἰδοίη ταμίη παρέθηκε χαριζομένη παρεόντων, the 
modest stewardess brought bread supplying from the store. 


* 0bs.—o¢w, I smell, also belongs to these: μύρων ὄζει, he smells of 
myrrh, 


δ) With verbs which denote touching, laying hold of, 
seizing: ἅπτομαι, ψαύω, 7 touch ; ἔχομαι, 7 hold by, border 
(τινός) on something; ἀντέχομαι, ἐπιλαμβάνομαι, 7 lay 
hold of; λαμβάνω τινὰ τῆς χειρός, 7 seize one by the 
hand; ἄρχομαι, 1 begin (τῆς παιδείας, with the educa- 
tion); poet. θανόντων οὐδὲν ἄλγος ἅπτεται, NO pain 
touches the dead. ? 

c) With verbs which denote striving, aiming at: στο- 
χάζομαι τοῦ σκοποῦ, 7 aim at the goal ; ὀρέγομαι, 1 strive ; 
. διψάω, 7 thirst ; τυγχάνω, L hit, attain (ἔτυχε τῶν ἄθλων, 
he won. the prizes); ἐφικνοῦμαι, 7 reach, attain ; ἥκω, L 
have attained (Herod. δυνάμιος, power). 


d) With verbs which denote enjoying: ἐσθίω, I eat ; 
πίνω, 1 drink; γεύω, I give a taste; ἑστιάω, 7 entertain; 
ἀπολαύω, 7 enjoy (μεγίστων ἀγαθῶν, the. greatest blessings) ; 
ἑνὸς ἀνδρὸς εὖ φρονήσαντος πολλοὶ ἂν ἀπολαύσειαν, 
many would enjoy ὦ man who has thought sensibly. 

é) With verbs denoting the opposites of the ideas enu- 
merated under a—d, that is, the exclusion from a share in 
something: ἀπέχομαι, 7 refrain (σίτου, abstineo cibo); χω- 
ρίζω, 1 separate ; εἴργω, 1 keep φ; 3 στερίσκω, 1 deprive; 
παύομαι, 1 cease; εἴκω, παραχωρέω, 1 yield; vw, 1 loose ; 


248 THE GENITIVE. § 420. 


ἐλευθερόω, 7 free; φείδομαι, 1 spare; ἁμαρτάνω, ἀποτυγ- 
χάνω, 1 miss; ψεύδομαι, sitet 7 am decewed (τῆς 
ἐλπίδος, in my hope). 

Obs.—Many of these verbs are also joined with an Accusative 
when an object is to be expressed as wholly encompassed by the 
action: πλεῖστον μέρος τινὸς μετέχειν, to have the greatest part in 
any thing; πίνω oivoyv, I drink wine ; οἴνου, some wine; hayxavw 
τι, I attain something ; τινός, a share in something. 

§ 420. 4. The Genitive is joined with many verbs de- 
“noting a sensuous or moral perception or emotion (com- 
pare ὃ 414, 3), as: ἀκούω, axpodoua, 7 hear; αἰσθάνομαι, 
L perceive ; μιμνήσκομαι, 7 remember (τοῦ φίλου, memime 
amici); ἐπιλανθάνομαι, 7 forget ; μέλει μοί τινος, ἐπιμεχέ- 
oua, Lam concerned about something, I care; ἐντρέπομαι, 
Hom. ἀλέγω, ἀλεγίζω, 7 concern myself; ἀμελέω, L neg- 
lect; ὀλιγωρέω, [care little about ; ἐράω, 1 love (ὃ 419, ὁ): 
ἐπιθυμέω, [ desire; πυνθάνομαί τί τινος, 7) learn something 
about one. 


Obs.—The Accusative also is admissible with several of these 
verbs: with ἀκούω, if the object is directly audible: φθόγγον, a 
sound, but τοῦ διδασκάλου, the teacher. 


§ 421. 5. With verbs of estemating, buying, selling, ete., 
the Genitive denotes the valwe or price (compare § 408, 6 
_ and § 417): 6 δοῦλος πέντε μνῶν τιμᾶται, the slave is valued 
at five mine; πολλοῦ ὠνεῖσθαι, magni emere; ταλάντου 
ἀποδόσθαι, to sell for a talent. 


§ 422. 6. With verbs of judicial proceedings the Geni- 
tive denotes the cawse (8 408, 7, ὃ 414, 5): κλοπῆς ypape- 
σθαι αἰσχρόν, furti accusari turpe est; φόνου διώκειν, to 
prosecute for murder; φεύγει παρανόμων, he is charged 
with violating the law; ἀπέφυγε κακηγορίας, he was ac- ὁ 
quitted of libel ; ἑάλωδαν προδοσίας, τατον condem- 
nate sunt. 


Obs.—With verbs of emotion the Genitive likewise expresses the 
Cause, aS: θαυμάζω σε τῆς σωφροσύνης, I admire thee for thy mod- 
eration ; Hom. χωόμενος γυναικός, angry about the woman. 


ὃ 425. : THE GENITIVE. 249 


§ 423. 7. The =< is also joined with verbs which 
imply the meaning’ of a Comparative (ὃ 416), as: κρατέω 
(κρείττων εἰμί), ἄρχω (Κροῖσος Λυδῶν ἦρχεν, Croesus ruled 
over the Lydians) ; βασιλεύω, L rule ; περίειμι, περιγίγνο- 
pa, Lam superior ; $ ἡττάομαι (ἥττων εἰμί), L am mferoor ; 
λείπομαι, ὑστερέω, 7 am behind ; διαφέρω τινός, differa ab 
aliquo; βαρβάρων “Ἕλληνας ἄρχειν εἰκός, ἐξ ἐ8 reasonable 
that Hellenes should rule over barbarians. 


§ 424. 8. The Genitive is joined with verbs compounded 
with prepositions, which either always, or in the sense 
which they have in the compound verb, require the Gen- 
itive (compare Chapter XVII.): ἐκβάλλω τινὰ τιμῆς, L 
eject some one from office ; προστατεύει τῆς πόλεως, he pre- 
sides over the state; ἰσχὺν τοῦ δικαίου προτίθησιν, he pre- 
Jers might before right ; καταφρονεῖν τινος, to despise any 
One; κατηγορεῖν τί τινος, to accuse one of ὦ thing ; πάτριον 
ἣν τῇ ᾿Αθηναίων πόλει προεστάναι τῶν “Ἑλλήνων, it was a 
hereditary custom for the city of the Athenians to be at 
the head of the Hellenes. 


4. Hreer use of the Genitive. 
§ 425. The Genitive, without immediate connection with 
‘a noun or verb, expresses : 


1. Place (local Genitive), almost exclusively in the lan- 
guage of poetry, and that either the place from which 
something is removed: ἵστασθε βάθρων, get up from the 
steps; ὑπάγειν τῆς ὁδοῦ, to go out ofthe way (compare 
§ 419, e);—or the space within which something takes 
place (compare δὲ 412, 415): τῆς ᾿Ιωνίας τοῦτο αἰσχρὸν 
νενόμισται, within Lonia that is considered disgraceful ; 
Hom. νέφος οὐ φαίνετο πάσης γαίης, 20 cloud appeared 
within the compass of the whole earth ; ἔρχονται πεδίοιο, 
they go through or within the plain (compare the German 
ich gehe des Weges). 

On another local Genitive, see § 412. 

E2 


250 © : THE DATIVE. ° § 426. 


§ 426. 2. Time (temporal Genitivg),in which case it is 
a Partitive Genitive expressing the whole of a space of 
time (ὃ 412) within which something takes place:. τρὶς 
τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ, thrice in the year; ἡμέρας, by day; νυκτός, 
by night; τοῦ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος, in the same winter; τοῦ 
λοιποῦ, for the future; χρόνου συχνοῦ, for some time; 
ἑκάστου ἔτους, cach year. 


§ 427. 3. Cause (causal Genitive, compare § 408, 7, 
§ 422), in exclamations: οἴμοι τῆς τύχης, alas! for my 
JSortune (compare the German O des Leides); and in In- 
finitives with the Genitive of the Article (in order ee . 
§ 574, 3, Obs. 


§ 428. 4. Occasion, time, circumstances, etc., as an qbio- 
lute Genitive, in connection with participles, just like the 
absolute Ablative in Latin: Κύρου βασιλεύοντος, Cyro reg- 
nante, ὃ 584 (compare the German: stehenden Fusses). 


Obs.—The absolute Genitive very rarely occurs, like the absolute 
Ablative of the Latins, without a participle; when the verb to be 
occurs in the clause the participle wy is to be used: te puero, σοῦ 
παιδὸς bvToc. 


EK) The Datwe. 
§ 429. The Dative denotes, in general, the person or 
thing more remotely connected with an action. 


Obs.—The Dative, therefore, depends just as often on verbs as on 
adjectives (adverbs), but very rarely on a substantive. 
§ 430. 1. Dative of the person concerned. 
As in Latin and English, so in Greek, the person 1 more 
remotely affected by something is in the Dative, and: 


@) with transitive verbs it is the so-called δόμον ob- 
ject : Hom. ἑπτὰ “δέ οἱ δώσω εὐναιόμενα πτολίεθρα, and I 
will give him seven Jlourrshing cities. 43 


6) with intransitive verbs it expresses the person or a 
thing conceived as a person to which the action refers : 


§ 435. “THE DATIVE. 251 


πρέπει μοί τι, ὦ thing becomes me; δεῖ μοί τινος, 7 need 
something ; ἐμοὶ οὕτω δοκεῖ ἔχειν, ἐξ seems to me to be so; 
βοηθῶ τοῖς συμμάχοις, succurro soctis; πείθου τοῖς νόμοις, 
obey the laws; εὔχεσθε τοῖς θεοῖς, pray to the gods; μέμ- 
φομαι τοῖς μαθηταῖς, 72 reproach the scholars. - 
Obs.—Substantives derived from such verbs are sometimes followed 
by the Dative: ἡ ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ τοῖς συμμάχοις βοήθεια, the help to 
the allies in the war. 


6) with Adjectives: 6 ἀγαθὸς τῷ ἀγαθῷ μόνος φίλος, the 
. good alone is dear to the good. 

431. 2. Dative of interest. 

The Dative denotes the person for whom—for whose 
interest—something is or takes place; hence 

a) the person benefited or injured (dat. commodi, incom- 
modi): πᾶς ἀνὴρ αὑτῷ πονεῖ, every man toils for himself ; 
φθόνος μέγιστον κακὸν τοῖς exouen’s αὐτόν, envy 8 the great 
est evil to them that have τί. 


432. b) the possessor with εἰμί, γίγνομαι, and similar 
verbs: πολλοί μοι φίλοι εἰσίν, 1 have many friends. 


Obs.—The possessive Dative is sometimes, like the Genitive, joined 
with a Substantive: Herod., ot σφι βόες, their oxen. 


§ 433. c) the sympathizing person (ethical Dative): poet. 
ὦ τέκνον, ἦ βέβηκεν ἥμιν. ὃ ξένος ; O child, has the stranger 
left us? riyap πατήρ μοι πρέσβυς ἐ ἐν Sani δρᾷ; for what 
is my aged father doing in the house ? 


§ 434. εἴ) the acting person with passive verbs (common- 
ly ὑπό with the Genitive), which is then to be viewed as 
one interested in the action: Hom. πολέες δάμεν ἡ Ἕκτορι 
δίῳ, many were overcome by godlike Hector ; τί πέπρακται 
τοῖς ἄλλοις ; what has been done by the rest? This Da- 
tive is regularly joined with the Verbal Adj. in -τέος : ἐμοὶ 
πολεμητέον ἐστίν, mihi pugnandum est. 


§ 435. e) the person remotely connected with an action: 
τέθνηχ᾽ ὑμῖν πάλαι, he died to you long ago; Hom. πᾶσίν 


252 THE DATIVE. ; g 436.. 


kev Τρώεσσι κῦδος ἄροιο, thow mightest get thee fume with 
all Trojans ; Hom. τοῖσιν ἀνέστη, among then arose; ὑπο- 
λαμβάνειν δεῖ τῷ τοιούτῳ ὅτι εὐήθης ἐστίν, in regard to such 
ὦ one we must suppose him simple. 


Obs.—In this manner participles are most frequently used, partly 
with, partly without, an accompanying noun: Hom. ἡμῖν εἴνατός 
ἐστι περιτροπέων ἐνιαυτὸς ἐνθάδε μιμνόντεσσιν, it is the ninth year 
Sor us lingering here; ἡ διαβάντι τὸν ποταμὸν πρὸς ἑσπέραν ὁδός, 
the road westward when you have crossed the river ; γίγνεταί τι ἐμοὶ 
βουλομένῳ, something happens to me as I wish; συνελόντι or ὡς 
συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, to speak briefly. 


§ 436. 3. Dative of community. 


With verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, which denote com- 
munity, agreement, friendly or hostile meeting, the person 
or thing wth which such a community, agreement, or such 
a meeting takes place, is in the Dative. 


a) Verbs of this kind are: κοινωνέω, J share (τινί τινος, 
something with one); συμφωνέω, ὁμολογέω, συνάδω, ὃμο- 
νοέω, 7] agree; ὁμοιόομαι, 1 resemble; ὁμιλέω, 7 associate 
with; διαλέγομαι, I converse; διαφέρομαι, 1) differ; μάχο- 
μαι, 1 fight; ἐρίζω, L dispute; τὰ ἔργα οὐ συμφωνεῖ τοῖς 
λόγοις, the deeds do not harmonize with the words ; poet. 
κακοῖσιν μὴ προςομίλει ἀνδράσιν, ἀλλ᾽ αἰεὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἔχεο,, 
with bad men. do not associate, but always hold to the 
good. | : 

ὦ) Adjectwes: ἴσος, like; ὅμοιος, παραπλήσιος, svmi- 
lar; ὃ αὐτός, the same; οἰκεῖος, ἴδιος, peculiar; κοινός, 
common (compare 414, 1); ὁμώνυμος, of like name; συν- 
ώνυμος, Of like meaning; διάφορος, different; ἐναντίος, 
opposite: ὡπλισμένοι ἦσαν τοῖς αὐτοῖς Κύρῳ ὅπλοις, they 
were armed with the same weapons as Cyrus. 


6) Adverbs : besides those derived from the adjectives 
just mentioned, especially ἅμα, at the same time; ὁμοῦ, 
together : ἅμα τῷ ἑταίρῳ, at the same time with his frrend. 


§ 437. The Dative is used with many verbs which, com- 


ὃ 440. THE DATIVE. 253 | 


pounded with prepositions, denote a contact*or union, es- 
pecially with such as are compounded with ἐν, σύν, ἐπί, 
yet also with those compounded with πρός, παρά, περί," 
ὑπό, aS: ἐπιστήμην ἐμποιεῖν τῇ ψυχῇ, to bring knowledge 
into the soul; ἐπικεῖσθαί τινι, to press upon, to wrge, one ; 
ἐπιτιμᾶν τινί τι, to reproach one with something ; προςιέναι 
τῷ δήμῳ, to come before the people; παρίστασθαι, παρεῖναί 
τινι, to support one; περιπίπτειν τινί, to meet one. 


§ 438. 4. The Lnstrumental Dative, answering to the 
Latin Ablative, denotes that dy or by means of which an 
action is brought about: hence 


a) the means or instrument (compare διά, ὃ 458): Hom. 
τὸν μὲν κατὰ στῆθος βάλε δουρί, the one he struck on the 
breast with the spear; ὁρῶμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, we see with 
the eyes; οὐδεὶς ἔπαινον ἡδοναῖς ἐκτήσατο, no one gained 
praise by pleasures ; ζημιοῦν twa θανάτῳ, to punish one 
with death; Hom. τίσειαν Δαναοὶ ἐμὰ δάκρυα σοῖσι βέλεσ- 
ow, may the Dana pay for my tears by thy darts. “" 


Obs.—Hence the Dative is used with χρῆσθαι, to make use of ; as the 
Ablative with wti in Latin. A second predicative Dative is often 
added (ὃ 361, 10): τούτων τισὶ φύλαξιν ἐχρῆτο, some of them he used 
as guards. 


. § 439. δ) the operating power or cause from which an 
action proceeds: ἄνθρωπος φύσει πολιτικόν, man (28) by 
nature jitted for the state; πολλάκις ἀγνοίᾳ ἁμαρτάνομεν, 
we often err from ignorance; φόβῳ, from fear. 


‘0bs.—With verbs of emotion, the Dative expresses the ground or 
occasion of the emotion: ἥδομαι, χαίρω τῇ μουσικῇ, I delight in 
music; λυποῦμαι, I am grieved ; χαλεπαίνω, 1 am angry; στέργω, 
ἀγαπῶ, I am satisfied (with something); αἰσχύνομαι, I am ashamed 
(about something). 


§ 440. 6) the measure, by which a thing is measured, 
by which one thing surpasses another, by which it is dis- 
tinguished : τὰ μέλλοντα κρίνομεν τοῖς γεγενημένοις, the fu- 


254 THE DATIVE. ~ | § 441. 


ture we judge of by the past ; δέκα ἔτεσι πρὸ τῆς ἐν Σαλα- 
μῖνι μάχης οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐν Μαραθῶνι ἐνίκησαν, ten years 
: before the battle.of Salamis the Athenians conquered at 
Marathon ; πολλῷ μείζων, multo major (also πολύ, § 404, 
Obs.) ; διαφέρειν τινὸς φρονήσει, to differ from any one in 
_ insight. 

§ 441. 5. The freer use of the Dative expresses: 


a) the way and manner, or an accompanying circum-— 
stance: τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ, in this way; Bia, by force ; 
σπουδῇ, with zeal; σιγῇ, in silence; ἔργῳ, in fact; τῷ 
ὄντι, in truth; ἰδίᾳ, privatim ; δημοσίᾳ, publice ; Hom. 
νηπιέῃσι, in his folly (ὃ 362, Obs.). 


Obs.—The Dative with αὐτός should be particularly noticed: ὁ 
Φίλιππος πεντακοσίους ἱππέας ἔλαβεν αὐτοῖς τοῖς ὕπλοις, Philip took 
Jive hundred horse together with their armor. (Compare the Dative 
of community, § 436.) 


§ 442. b) The place where something happens is «€x- 
pressed by the Dative more rarely in prose than in poetry's 
Μαραθῶνι, at Marathon ;. Hom. “Ἑλλάδι οἰκία ναίων, ἦγ-- 
habiting his house in lng: Hom. τόξ᾽ ὦμοισιν ἔχων, 
having the bow on his shoulders ; poet. ὁδοῖς, on the way: 


§ 443. ¢) Time is expressed by the Dative as definitely 
limited in answer to the question whens τῇδε τῇ νυκτί, hac 
nocte ; τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, on the following day; τετάρτῳ ἔτει, in - 
the fourth year ; ᾿Ολυμπίοις, at the Olympic-games ; poet. 
χειμερίῳ νότῳ, in a stormy south wind. 

Obs.—Notice the difference between the Accusative (§ 405) and the 

Genitive (§ 426), in their application to relations of time. 


g 447,..- | THE PREPOSITIONS. 255 


(παρ. X VII.—TuHE PREPOSITIONS. 


§ 444. Prepositions have a double use. Either they are 
combined with a verb, to define the direction which the 
action of the verb takes, or they are used independently, 
and serve, in connection with different cases, to point out 
the relation of single words in a sentence to one another 
more distinctly than could be done by the cases alone. 


§ 445. Obs. 1.—As the name prepositio (πρόθεσις) points to the first 
of these uses, those prepositions which are not combined with verbs, 
such as: ἄνευ, without (poet.-dixa, χωρίς) ; ἄχρι, μέχρι, till ; μεταξύ, be- 
tween ; ἕνεκα; on account of ; πλήν, besides, are called spurious. They 
are all used with the Genitive (compare § 415), except we, to, which 
has the Accusative. 


§ 446. Obs. 2.—All Prepositions were originally adverbs ; many of 
them are still used as such in poetry, and a few even in prose: zepi, 
beyond, very; pera, later; πρός, in addition. On account of this ori- 
gin, their position in Homer is very free; they may be separated 
from their verb as well as from their substantive: Hom. ἐν δ᾽ αὐτὸς 
ἐδύσετο νώροπα χαλκόν, and he himself put on the glittering brass ; ἀμφὶ 
δὲ χαῖται ὦμοις ἀΐσσονται, and the manes wave around the shoulders. On 
‘the anastrophe i in placing the Prepositions behind, see § 90. In prose 
‘only περί is sometimes thus used. 


§ 447. With regard to the cases joined with Prepositions, 
the following general rules are to be noticed: 


“1. The Accusative with Prepositions expresses the object 
upon which, over which, toward which an action extends 
($§ 395,405), and with many Prepositions the goal of an 
action itself ($406). ὁ 


2. The Genitive frequently denotes the place from which 
an action proceeds (§ 425), often also a moral relation 
(8. 408, etc.), while it depends on other Prepositions in the 
same way as on the adverbs mentioned in § 415. 


3. The Dative denotes a more external connection ($$ 435, 
442), 


256 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. § 448.- 


GENERAL VIEW OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
§ 448. I. Prepositions which can have only one case: 


A) the Accusative : εἰς, ὡς. 

B) the Genitive : ἀντί, ἀπό, ἐκ (ἐξ), πρό---ἄνευ, ἄχρι, 
μέχρι, μεταξύ, ἕνεκα, πλήν. 

C) the Dative: ἐν, σύν (ξύν). 


II. Prepositions which can have two cases: 
A) the Genitwe and Accusative: διά, κατά, ὑπέρ. 
B) the Dative and Accusative: ava. 


III. Prepositions which can have all-the three oblique 
cases: ἀμφί, ἐπί, μετά, Tapa, περί, πρός, ὑπό. 


I. PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE ONLY ONE CASE. 
§ 449. A) Prepositions with the Accusative. 


1. εἰς or ἐς (Lat. am, c. Accus., and énter), to, into, points 
out the goal toward which the action is directed. The 
opposite is ἐξ, owt. εἰς is used: 

a) of place: οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι εἰςέβαλον εἰς τὴν ᾿Αττικήν, 
the Lacedemonians invaded Attica; εἰς δικαστήριον εἰς- 
ιέναι, to come into court; λέγειν εἰς τὸ πλῆθος, to speak to 
the multitude; εἰς ἄνδρας ἐγγράφειν, to enroll among men. 
Compare ἐν, ὃ 456, a. 

Ὁ) of time: εἰς τὴν ὑστεραίαν, ἦγ, diem proximum, Sor 
the next day; εἰς ἑσπέραν, toward evening ; poet. ἔτος εἰς 
ἔτος, year by year ; εἰς καιρόν, jor the right time. : 

6) of measure and number : εἰς διακοσίους, wp to two 
hundred ; sic δύναμιν, up to one’s DOL as much as is in 
one’s power. 

εἶ) of purpose: χρήσιμον εἰς τὸν πόλεμον, useful for the 
war; εἰς τόδε ἥκομεν, for that we have come. 

In compounds it is to be translated by nto, an, to. 


§ 450. 2. we (compare § 631), to, only of persons: Hom. 


ὃ 453. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 257. 


αἰεὶ τὸν ὁμοῖον aye θεὸς ὡς τὸν ὀμοῖον, God always brings 


like to like. 


§ 451. B) Prepositions with the Gentwe. 


1. ἀντί (compare Hom. ἄντα, ἄντην, ἀντικρύ), originally 
opposite to (compare iv-avri-o¢), then istead of, for: 
Hom. ἀντὶ κασιγνήτου ξεῖνός θ᾽ ἱκέτης τε τέτυκται, ὦ stranger 
and a suppliant is instead of a brother (like a brother) ; 
ἀντὶ θνητοῦ σώματος ἀθάνατον δόξαν ἀλλάξασθαι, to cx- 
change a mortal body for immortal glory. 

In compounds it signifies against. 


§ 452. 2. ἀπό (Lat. ab, a, Engl. off ), from, in the sense 
of separation, severance, and origin : 


a) of place: Hom. ἀφ᾽ ἵππων ἄλτο χαμᾶζε, he sprang 
off the chariot to the ground. 7 

ὦ) of time: from, since: am ἐκείνης τῆς ἡμέρας, from 
that day. 

c) of cause: by, from, through : αὐτόνομος ἀπὸ τῆς siph- 
νης, independent through the peace. 

Phrases: ἀπὸ σκοποῦ, far*from the goal; ἀπὸ γνώμης, 
contrary to expectation; ἀπὸ στόματος λέγειν, to speak 
Srom memory ; οἱ ἀπὸ σκηνῆς, those of the stage, the act- 
Ors. 

In compounds it signifies from, off, away. 


8 453. 3. ἐκ, before vowels ἐξ (Lat. ex, 6), out of (op- 
posed to εἰς), denotes removal from within or from among: 


a) of place: ἐκ Σπάρτης φεύγει, he is banished out of 
Sparta. 

b) of time: ἐκ παίδων, from boyhood (a pueris). 

6) of origin: ἐκ πατρὸς χρηστοῦ ἐγένετο, he sprang from 
a brave father; seldom with a Passive verb: τιμᾶσθαι ἔκ 
τινος, to be honored by any one. 

d) close connection and conformity with: after, secun- 
dum : λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν, to deliver speech after speech ; 


258 -PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. ὃ 454. 


ἐκ TOV éudNoyountvwv; according to the agreement (Lat. 
secundum). 

Phrases: ἐκ δεξιᾶς, on the right ; ἐξ ἴσου, eqvally ; ys δῆσαι, 
κρεμάσαι τι ἔκ τινος, to fasten, to hang one thing to another 
(Lat. pendére ex, ab aliqua re). 

In compounds: out, away. 

ὃ 454. 4. rpd-(Lat. pro), for, before, stead. 

a) of place, before: πρὸ θυρῶν, before the door. 

δ) of time: πρὸ τῆς μάχης, before the battle. 

c) of preference: πρὸ τούτων τεθνάναι μᾶλλον ἂν ἕλοιτο, 
he would choose death before this, ἐ. e., rather than this. 

d) for,a rare use: mpd παίδων μάχεσθαι, to fight for the 
children. 


Phrase: πρὸ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαι (0), to prefer greatly. 
In compounds: before, forth, beforehand, ἀκ ον 


8 455. The spurious Prepositions : 
. ἄνευ, without (poet. χωρίς, δίχα, ἄτερ). 
. ἄχρι, μέχρι, Until. 
. μετειξύ, between. 
. ἕνεκα, also ἕνεκεν; εἵνεκα (poet. οὕνεκα), for the sake of 
an object to be attained (Lat. cast) : τῆς ὑγιείας ἕνεκα 
χρώμεθα τῷ ἰατρῷ, we employ a physician for the sake ow 
health. (Compare διά with Acc., ὃ 458, B.) 

9. πλήν, besides ( preter). 


oO 


on o 


΄ 


Obs.—jv is often used quite adverbially without governing a 
case: poet. οὐκ dp’ ᾿Αχαιοῖς ἄνδρες εἰσὶ πλὴν ὅδε: have then the 
Acheans no men but this? It might be πλὴν τοῦδε, besides this? 


ὃ 456. ΟἹ Prepositions with the Dative. 
1. ἐν (Hom. ἐνί, ἐν, Lat. in, c. Ablat., and énéer), in, an- 
swers to the question where ? 
a) of place: ἐν ᾿Αθήναις, in Athens ; also among (inter): 
ἐν τούτοις, among them ; ἐν δήμῳ λέγειν, to speak before the 
‘people (compare ὃ 449, @). oe, ak 


ie ie | 


§ 458. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. 259 


ον δ) of times ἐν τούτῳ τῷ ἔτει, tn that year. 

c) ὦ moral relation: with: ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τῆς μάχης τέλος, 
the result ὁ "“ the battle rests with God. 

Phrases: ἡ ἐν Μαραθῶνι μάχη, the battle at Marathon ; 2 
ἐν τοῖς πρῶτος, Jirst by far; ἐν καιρῷ, at the right time; 
ἐν προςθήκης μέρει, in addition; ἐν χερσὶ τιθέναι, to put 
into the hands (compare Lat. ὧν mensa ponere). 

In compounds: in, ἐμέο, on. The accented ἔνι-ε ἔνεστι 
signifies zt zs in, it acists, ἐξ is possible. 


§ 457. 2. σύν or ξύν (Lat. cum), with, denotes compan- 
ionship (opposed to ἄνευ, compare μετά with Gen., ὃ 464, 
B); σὺν ᾿Αθήνῃ ἐνίκησεν, he conquered (with the help of) 
Athene ; ἦ σὺν νόμῳ, in accordance with the law (opposed 
to παρά with Acc., ὃ 465, C, 6). . 

In compounds: with, together. 


II. PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE TWO CaSEs. 
The Genitive and Accusative. 


Obs.—Here, as every where in what follows, that use of a Preposi- 
tion is placed first in which its original meaning is most mani- 
fest. 


§ 458. 1. διά (akin to δύο, as between is to two Cran 
originally beteween, then through. 


A) avith the Genitive: 


a) of space: most frequently through (Lat. per): Hom. 
διὰ μὲν ἀσπίδος ἦλθε φαεινῆς ὄβριμον ἔγχος, through the 
glittering shield pierced the mighty lance. 

b) instrumental : by or with: dia τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν δρῶμεν, 
by (by means of ) the eyes we see (compare ὃ 438). 

¢) of space and δηλ. among (enter), during, in: διὰ 
χειρῶν ἔχειν, to have in hand; διὰ νυκτός, during wight’ 
διὰ φιλίας ἰέναι, to be on friendly y terms. 

- Phrases: διὰ στόματος ἔχειν, to have in the mouth, to 


260  ##PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. § 459. 


be talking about; dv οὐδενὸς ποιεῖσθαι, to deem as nothing ; 
διὰ μακροῦ, after a long interval, interruption. 

B) with the Accusative : 

a) of space and time, almost exclusively in the poets: 
through, during: Hom. διὰ δώματα, through the rooms ; 
διὰ νύκτα, during night. 


ὁ) usually causal: on account of (the operating cause) © 


(compare ἕνεκα, ὃ 455, 8): διὰ τὴν νόσον χρώμεθα τῷ ἰατρῷ, 
we employ the physician on account of the ἐἰγι688. 
Phrases: αὐτὸς δι᾿ ἑαυτόν, by himself; διὰ ri; why? 
In compounds, διά is through, or denotes separation, like 
Lat. dis-: Suapépw=adifferre, διαιρέω, 7 sever. 


§ 459. 2. kara (compare Ady. κάτω, down), originally 
downward, down (the opposite to ava). 


A) with the Genitive : 

a) of space: down from: Hom. βῆ δὲ Kar’ Οὐλύμποιο 
καρήνων, he came down from the heights of Olympus ; 
below (sub): τὰ κατὰ γῆς, things below the earth. 

ὦ) tropically : about, against : λέγειν κατά τινος, to speak 
about, against one. 

Phracée πόλιν Kat ἄκρας ἑλεῖν, to capture a city com- 
pletely ; κατὰ νώτου, behind. 


B) with the Accusative it denotes in its most general 
sense extension over, relation fo, direction toward some- 
thing : 

a) of place: κατὰ ῥόον, down a stream; κατὰ γῆν καὶ 
θάλασσαν, by land and sea; Hom. Ζεὺς ἔβη κατὰ δαῖτα, 
Zeus went to the feast. 

ὁ) of time: κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον, at that time ; -οἱ 
καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς, our contemporaries. 

6) of other relations : κατὰ τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, in this 
way ; κατὰ πάντα, in every respect ; κατὰ δύναμιν, accord- 
ing to ability, as much as possible ; y κατὰ τοὺς νόμους, in 
accordance with the laws; κατ᾽ ἐμέ, as regards me; κατὰ 

Πίνδαρον ἄριστον ὕδωρ, according to Pindar, water is best. 


§ 461. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DAT. ΑΝῸ Acc. 261 


d) distributive in divisions: Hom. κατὰ φῦλα, by tribes ; 
κατὰ τρεῖς, by threes; καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily. 

In compounds: down, downward, against, toward, very 
often untranslatable. 


8 460. 3. ὑπέρ; Hom. also ὑπείρ (Lat. super), radical mean- 
ing over. 

“A) with the Genitive : 

a) of space: ὃ ἥλιος ὑ ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πορεύεται, the sun passes 
over US. 

b) tropically, for: μάχεσθαι ὑπέρ τινος, to fight for any 
one (originally over, 6. g., over a corpse): ὁ ὑπὲρ τῆς πα- 
τρίδος κίνδυνος, the danger for ones country; instead of: 
ἐγὼ ὑπὲρ σοῦ ἀποκρινοῦμαι, 7) will answer instead of you. 

B) with the Accusative : 
over, beyond —of space and measure: Hom. ὑπὲρ οὐδὸν 
ἐβήσετο, he went over or beyond the threshold ; ὑπὲρ δύνα- 
μιν, beyond (his) power. 

In compounds: over, away over, excessively, for. 


With the Dative and Accusative. | 

§ 461. 4. ava (compare adv. ἄνω, above), originally wpon, 
up (opposed to κατά). 

A) with the Dative only poet., on the top of, upon: 
Hom. χρυσέῳ ava σκήπτρῳ, on the top of a golden staff. 

B) with the Accusatwe ava denotes the direction wp- 
ward, up toward something, then spreading out over some- 
thing (compare κατά). 

a) of space: ava ῥόον, up the stream; ava πᾶσαν τὴν 
γῆν, over the whole earth, over the whole country. 

b) of time: ava πᾶσαν τὴν ἡμέραν, per totum diem. 

6) tropically : ava λόγον, in accordance with. 

ΟἽ distributive: ava τέτταρας, by fours (four men deep, 
compare κατά, § 459, d). 

Phrase: ἀνὰ στόμα ἔχειν, to have in the mouth, to be talk- 
ing about (compare διά). | 

In compounds: up, upward, again, back. 

. 


202 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. ὃ 462. 


III. PREPosITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 


Obs.—The original meaning is usually most manifest in connection 
with the Dative. 


§ 462. 1. ἀμφί (Lat. amb-, German wm, akin to ἄμφω, 
both), radical meaning around (ὦ. e.,on both sides, compare 
περῖ). 

A) with the Dative : 
only poet.: Hom. ἱδρώσει τελαμὼν ἀμφὶ στήθεσσι, the belt 
around the breast will sweat; ἀμφὶ φόβῳ, from fear. 

B) with the Genitwe : 

Hom. ἀμφὶ φιλότητος ἀείδειν, to sing about love. 

"ΟἹ with the Accusative : 
of place, time, measure, occupation : ἀμφὶ τὰ ὅρια, about 
the houndaries ; ἀμφὶ τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον, about this tume ; 
ἀμφὶ τὰ ἑξήκοντα, circiter sexaginta ; ἀμφὶ δεῖπνον πονεῖν, 
to be occupied about a meal. 

Phrase: of ἀμφί τινα, any one with his attendants ; 
hence even: of ἀμφὶ Πλάτωνα, Plato and his followers. 

In compounds: about, around, on two sides, doubly. 


§ 463. 2. ἐπί, radical meaning wpon, on, on the surface, 


A) with the Dative : 

a) of space : Hom. ἐπὶ χθονὶ σῖτον ἔδοντες, cating bread 
on earth; ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάσσῃ οἰκεῖν, to dwell by 2 the sea. 

b) of time: ἐπὶ τούτοις, thereupon. 

c) of an ethical relation : ἐπὶ τοῖς πράγμασιν εἶναι, to 
preside over the business ; ἐπὶ τοῖς πολεμίοις εἶναι, to be im 
the power of the enemy; ἐπί τινι χαίρειν, to rejoice at a 
thing; especially also of purpose: ἐπὶ παιδείᾳ τοῦτο ἔμαθες, 
you learned this for education ; and of condition: ἐπὶ 
τόκοις" δανείζειν, to lend on ivikorett ; ἐπὶ "τούτῳ, on this 
condition. 

B) with the Genitive : | 

a) of space, in answer to the question where: Κῦρος 

* 


§ 465. PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 263 


προὐφαίνετο ἐφ᾽ ἅρματος, Cyrus appeared on a chariot ; 
and to the question whither: ἐπὶ Σάμου πλεῖν, to sail to 
Samos. (Compare ὃ 419, 6.) 

ὁ) of time : ἐπὶ Κροίσου ἄρχοντος, in the reign of Cresus ; 
also in many connections: nea, by. 

C) with the Accusative : 
on, on-to: ἀναβαίνειν ἐφ᾽ ἵππον, to mount (on-to) a horse ; 
ἐπὶ δεξιά, on the right. 

Phrases: we ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ, for the most part; τὸ ἐπ᾽ ἐμέ, 
Jor my part. 

In compounds: on, at, by, in addition, be-, very often 
untranslatable. 


§ 464. 3. μετά (German mz), radical meaning 77 the 
midst. 


A) with the Dative: 
in poet. only: amid, among (inter): Hom." [ens ὃς θεὸς 
ἔσκε μετ᾽ ἀνδράσι, lector, who was a god among men. 


B) with the Genztive : ? 
with, in the sense of participation with (compare σύν, 
§ 457): pera τῶν ξυμμάχων κινδυνεύειν, to fight with (in 
alliance with) the allies; μετὰ δακρύων, with tears. 

C) wit the Accusative : 

a) into the midst, among : poet.: Hom. ἰὼν μετὰ ἔθνος 
ἑταίρων, going among the*crowd of companions. 

b) usually after: Hom. οἴχονται pera δεῖπνον, they go 
after (for) a meal; pera τὸν Πελοποννησιακὸν πόλεμον, 
after the Peloponnesian War. 

c) seldom ὧν (as with the Dative): μετὰ χεῖρας ἔχειν, to 
have in hand (compare διά): μεθ᾽ ἡμέραν, enterdiu. 

In compounds: with, after, trans- (μετατιθέναι, trans- 
pose). ae . 

§ 465. 4. παρά (Hom. wap, παραί), radical meaning be- 
side, Near. 

A) with the Datiwe: 
at or near: Hom. παρὰ νηυσὶ κορωνίσι πο ζω: to linger 


264 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. ὃ 466. 


near the curved ships; καὶ παρ᾽ ἐμοί τις ἐμπειρία ἐστίν, 7 
also have some experience (with me also is, etc. ). 


B) with the Genitive : 


a) from, with verbs of motion, and such as denote re- 
ceiving either bodily or mentally: Hom. ἀπονοστεῖν παρὰ 
νηῶν, to return from the ships; λαμβάνειν, μανθάνειν παρά 
τινος, to receive, learn from some one. 

b) by, very rare, and only poet.: ναιετῶν παρ᾽ ᾿Ισμήνου 
ῥείθρων, dwelling by the waters of the [smenus. ’ 

C) with the Accusative : 

d) to: Hom. τὼ δ᾽ αὖτις ἴτην παρὰ νῆας, they went again 
to the ships. 

b) along, near by: 

of place : Hom. παρὰ θῖνα θαλάσσης, along the sea beach. 

of time: during: παρ᾽ ὅλον τὸν βίον, per totam vitam, 
during the whole of life ; 

compared with: δεῖ τὰς πράξεις παρ᾽ ἀλλήλας τιθέναι, 
you must put the acts by the side of (or compare with) 
one another ; with the comparative : μεῖζόν τι Tapa τοῦτο, 
something greater than this ; ὺ : 

on account of (compare propter, near, and on account 
of): mapa τὴν ἡμετέραν ἀμέλειαν Φίλιππος αὔξει, On ac- 
count of our neglect Philip becomes great. 

Taken negatively ; besides: ἔχομέν τι παρὰ ταῦτα ἄλλο 
λέγειν, we have something else to say besides this ; 

contrary to (opposed to κατά with the Acc.: παρὰ τὸν 
νόμον, contrary to the law, properly past the law, by evad- 
ing the law. 

Phrases: παρὰ μικρόν, nearly; παρ᾽ οὐδὲν ποιεῖσθαι, to 
deem as nothing. 


In compounds: near, at, past, beyond, over (παραβαίνειν, 
overstep). 


ὃ 466. 5. περί (Hom. adv. περί, very= Lat. per in per- 
magnus), radical meaning around (from above), compare 
ἀμφί. 


§ 467. PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 265 


A). with the Dative: 
round, around, near, for: Hom. περὶ Σκαιῇσι πύλῃσι, 
round the Skean gate; περὶ τοῖς φιλτάτοις KuBebav, to 
gamble for what is dearest. 
Hom. περὶ κῆρι, at heart; περὶ φόβῳ, from fear. 


B) with the Genetive: 

a) mostly in a figurative sense, about, Lat. de: τίνα 
δόξαν ἔχεις περὶ τούτων ; what opinion have you about 
this? βουλεύονται περὶ τοῦ πολέμου, they consult about the 
war. | | 

ὁ) in Hom. over, above: περὶ πάντων ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, to 
be above all others ; hence the prose phrases: περὶ πολλοῦ 
ποιεῖσθαι, to place above much, 2. e., estimate highly ; περὶ 
οὐδενὸς ποιεῖσθα, place above nothing, ὁ. ¢., estimate at 
nothing at all. | 

C) with the Accusatwe : 
almost the same as ἀμφί (ὃ 462): περὶ Αἴγυπτον (around, 
ὃ. 6., every where in Egypt), about the country of Zgypt ; 
figuratively: 7 regard to, about, concerning περὶ φιλο- 
σοφίαν σπουδάζειν, to be zealous about philosophy. 

In compounds (with adjectives = Latin per-): round, 
round about, besides, over. 


§ 467. 6. πρός (Hom. προτί, ποτί), akin to πρό, 
radical meaning af, to (toward the front), compare παρά. 
A) with the Dative : 


pee near : ὃ Κῦρος ἦν πρὸς Βαβυλῶνι, Cyrus was near 
Babylon. 


ὦ) on, to: Hom. ποτὶ δὲ σκῆπτρον βάλε γαίῃ, he threw 
the staff on the. ground ; τὸν νοῦν προςέχετε πρὸς τούτῳ, 
gue your mind to this. 

¢) besides, in addition to: πρὸς τούτοις, besides this ; 
πρὸς τοῖς ἄλλοις, besides the rest. 

B) with the Genztwe: 

a) with, in the sense of community: Hom. πρὸς yap 
Διός εἰσιν ἅπαντες ξεῖνοί τε πτωχοί τε, with (protected by) 


266 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. ὃ 468. 


Zeus are all strangers and the poor; πρός τινος εἶναι, to 
be with (on the side of) any one; πρὸς ἰατροῦ ἐστιν, tt és 
with (belongs to) a physician, medic est ; πρός τινος λέ- 


yew, to speak for (in behalf of) any one; πρὸς θεῶν, with 


(in presence of, by) the gods, per deos, form of an oath. 


ὁ) toward (versus): πρὸς psonuplacytoward the south, 
compare πρός with Acc. 

c) from, by (compare παρά with Gen.): ὄλβος πρὸς θεῶν, 
blessing from the gods; sometimes with Passive verbs: 
πρός τινος φιλεῖσθαι, to be loved by some one. 


C) with the Accusative : 

a) to: ἔρχονται πρὸς ἡμᾶς πρέσβεις, embassadors come 
to us; πρὸς τὸν δῆμον ἀγορεύειν, to speak to the people. 

ὦ) toward, against (versus, adversus, erga): πρὸς Bop- 
pav, toward the north (compare πρός with Gen.); δικάζε- 
σθαι πρός τινα, to enter an action against any one ; πιστῶς 


διακεῖσθαι πρός τινα, to be faithfully disposed toward some 


one; πρὸς βασιλέα σπονδὰς ποιεῖσθαι, to make.a treaty to- 
ward (with) the king. 


c) in regard to, according to: διαφέρειν πρὸς ἀρετήν, to 
differ in regard to virtue; πρὸς ta κάλλιστα τῶν ὑπαρ- 


χόντων δεῖ τὰ λοιπὰ πράττειν, We Ought to arrange the 
Suture according to the best of the present means ; πρὸς 
ταῦτα, according to this. . 

Phrases: πρὸς ἡδονήν, according to pleasure ; πρὸς χά- 
pw, in favor of; πρὸς βίαν, by force ; οὐδὲν πρὸς ἐμέ, 
nothing to me. 7 

In compounds: #0, in addition, near, together with. 


§ 468. 7. ὑπό (Hom. also tral, Lat. sud), 
radical meaning wnder, below. 


-A) with the Dative : ᾿ 


under: Hom. τῶν ὑπὸ ποσσὶ μέγα στεναχίζετο γαῖα; Un- 
der their. feet the earth loudly groaned 3° im ᾿Αθηναίοις 
εἶναι, to be under (subject to) the Athenians ; poet. χερσὶν 


| 
: 
4 
᾿ 


ee ee ere ea 


§ 470. : THE ΡΒΟΝΟῦΝΒ. 5 267 


ὑφ᾽ ἡμετέρῃσιν ἁλοῦσα, (Troy) conquered under Oy) our 
hands. 


B) with the Genitive : 

a) under, in space: ὑπὸ γῆς, under the earth; in the 
sense of dependency: tm αὐλητῶν χορεύειν, to dance un- 
der (the guidance of ) flute-players ; hence 

b) by, with P&ssives and verbs of Passive meaning: 
πόλις ἑάλω ὑπὸ τῶν Ἑλλήνων, the city was taken by the 
Hellenes ; πολλοὶ ἀπέθανον ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων, many were 
killed by the barbarians. 

c) from, because of : ὑπὸ γήρως ἀσθενὴς ἦν, he was weak 
Srom old age. 

C) with the Accusateve : 

a) under; Hom. ὡς εἰπὼν ὑπὸ πόντον ἐδύσετο κυμαίνοντα, 
hawing thus spoken, he dived under the billowy sea; ὑπὸ 
τὸ ὄρος ηὐλίζοντο, they spent the cg under (at the foot 
of ) the mountain. 

δ) of tume ; toward (Lat. sub): ὑπὸ νύκτα, toward night ; 
ὑπὸ τὴν νύκτα, during the night. 

In compounds: under, down under, gradually, secretly, 
often untranslatable. 


Cuap. X VIII.—TuHe PRONOUNS. 


ὃ 469. 1. The Nominative of the Personal Pronouns is 
used, as in Latin, only when the person is to be mentioned 
with special emphasis: καὶ od ὄψει αὐτόν, tu quogue eum 
videbis, ὁ. 6., οὐ μόνον ἐγώ (not merely L). 


§ 470. 2. The place of the Possessive Pronoun is fre- 
quently supplied by the article (8 373). On the article 
with the Possessive Pronoun, § 388. 

a) Instead of the Possessive Pronoun, the Greek likes to 
use the Genitive of the corresponding Personal Pronoun. 
Such a Genitive, when the substantive to which it belongs 
has the article, usually stands either before the article or 


268 THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. δ. 471. 
after the substantive: cov 6 vide or 6 vide cov, thy 081 
not 6 σοῦ υἱός. 

b) As the Possessive Pronoun approaches very near to a 
possessive Genitive (§ 408, 2), it may be qualified by a 
Genitive: τἀμὰ δυστήνου κακά, my dls, the unfortunate 
one’s [mea meseri mala}. ‘ 


§ 471. 3. The Leflexive Pronoun refers either to the 
subject of the clause in which it occurs: ὦ ἀγαθέ, μὴ ἀγνόει 
σεαυτόν, good friend, be not tgnorant of thyself; or, in de- 
pendent clauses, it refers back to the subject of the leading 
clause: εἰφιέναι ἐκέλευσεν, εἰ μέλλοις σὺν ἑαυτῷ ἐκπλεῖν, he 
bade you enter, ἐγ you were going to sail away with him 
(secum). . 

Obs. a)—~Instead of the Reflexive Pronoun, the usual Personal Pro- 
nouns also may be employed: δοκῶ μοι οὐκ ee εἶναι, IT 
think myself not to be unprepared. 

Obs. b)—The simple Pronoun of the third person, οὗ, oi, ἕ, ete., is 
commonly used reflexively by the Attic writers, but in Hom, it 
is exactly like the English, of him, to him, him, etc. (like the 
Attic αὐτοῦ, αὐτῷ, αὐτόν, etc., according to ὃ 474): λέγεται ᾿Απόλ- 
λων ἐκδεῖραι Μαρσύαν ἐρίζοντά οἱ περὶ σοφίας, dicitur Apollo Marsye 
cutem detraxisse de arte secum certanti ; Hom. αὐτόματος δὲ οἱ ἦλθε 

ο΄ -—Mevédaoe, sponte sua ad eum venit Menelaus. 

Obs. c)—The Reflexive of the third person sometimes supplies the 
place of that of the first and second: δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἀνερέσθαι ἑαυτούς, 
we must ask ourselves ; in like manner, the Posséssive ὅς some- 
times stands for the Possessive of the first two persons: Hom. 
οὐ γὰρ ἔγωγε ἧς γαίης δύναμαι γλυκερώτερον ἄλλο ἰδέσθαι, for I can 
see nothing sweeter than my own country. 


§ 472. The following are used as Possessives of the [e- 
jlecive Pronouns : : 

a) the Genitives of the Reflexive Pronouns, especially in 
the Singular: ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ. When the sub- 
stantive to which they are joined has the article, the Gen- 
itives stand between the article and the substantive: Ζεὺς 
τὴν ᾿Αθηνᾶν ἔφυσεν ἐκ τῆς ἑαυτοῦ κεφαλῆς, Zeus produced 
Athene out of his own head. 

b) the Possessives of the Personal Pronouns, especially 


ἃ 475. DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROG. PRONOUNS. 269 


in the plural: ἡμέτερος, ὑμέτερος : σφέτερος 18 | exclusively 
Reflexive. 
c) The Possessives in connection with the Genitives of 
αὐτός : ἡμέτερος αὐτῶν, etc. : 
ἃ 473. The Reflexive Pronoun im the Plural is also used 
instead of the Leciprocal Pronoun ἀλλήλων : διελεγόμεθα 
ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, we conversed with one another (among our- 
selves). 


§ 474. On αὐτός, self, and 6 αὐτός, the same, see S 389. 

αὐτός in the oblique cases, like the Lat. 2s, ea, zd, is used 
as a Personal Pronoun referdng to some person or thing 
mentioned before: ἐδέοντο αὐτοῦ παραμεῖναι, they wanted 
him to remain. 

The Genitive αὐτοῦ, ἧς, dv, like the Lat. e7ws, eorwm, is 
the Engl. his, her, their, when it does not refer to the sub- 
ject. Its position is that pointed out in § 470, ὦ “ ὁ vide 
αὐτοῦ Or αὐτοῦ ὁ υἱός, filius ejus. Still the Genitive of 
αὐτός often supplies the place of the Reflexive of the third 
person. 


§ 475. Of the Demonstratiwe ‘Prove οὗτος points 
more to what precedes and is already known; ὅδε to what 
follows and has not yet been named; so likewise are dis- 
tinguished τοιοῦτος, of such quality ; τοσοῦτος, 80 great ; 
τηλικοῦτος, 80 old—from τοιόςδε, τοσόςδε, τηλικόςδε, On 
the article with these Pronouns, ὃ 389. 

On the demonstrative uses of ὅς, ὃ 213, Obs. 


ἃ 4756. The Interrogative Pronouns mentioned in ὃ 216: 
τίς, πότερος, ποῖος, etc., are used exclusively in direct ques- 
tions. In infirect ones the compound Relatives ὅστις, ὁπό- 
τερος, ὑποῖος: etc., are employed. The former, however, 
are often used in ΠΕ ΤΑ͂ΡΗ questions, though the latter never 
in a direct one: τίς si; who are you? εἰπέ pol, ὅστις εἶ, or 
τίς si, tell me who you are. 

On the Attraction with Relatiwe Pronouns, δὲ 597-603. 


270 THE ACTIVE VOICE, — ὃ 476. 


Cuap. XIX.—THE VOICES OF THE VERB. 
§ 476. 1. The Active Voice. 


1. The Active voice not unfrequently has an intransitive 
as well as a transitive meaning. Thus ἐλαύνειν means to 
drive and to ride; ἔχειν, to have, hold, and to be in ὦ con- 
dition (καλῶς ἔχει, bene se habet); πράττειν, to do and to 
be (εὖ πράττω, 7 am doing well); δηλούμ, to make and to 
become. manifest. 


In some verbs different tenses are assigned to the different mean- 
ings. See above, §§ 329, 330. 


2. Simple verbs which are transitive often become intran- 
sitive when compounded: βάλλειν, to ἐλγοιυ---μεταβάλλειν, 
to change; ἐςβάλλειν and ἐμβάλλειν, to fall mto, essue (of 
rivers); διδόναι, to give—ivdiwdvat, to give in; ἐπιδιδόναι, 
to grow ; κόπτειν, to cut ; προκόπτειν, proficere, make prog- 
ress; φέρειν, to bear ; Siebbace, differre, to differ or be dis- 
tenguished. 

3. The Active often denotes an action which the subject 
accomplishes not ¢mmediately, but mediately, that is, causes 
or allows to be done by others: ὃ Κῦρος κατέκαυσε τὰ βα- 
σίλεια, Cyrus had the royal castle burned down. This is 
called the Causative use. 


8 477. 2. The Middle Voice. 


Its primary meaning is reflexive, ὁ. e., the action of the 
verb in the Middle refers back to the subject from which 
it issues. 

The Middle, in the first place, may be ἘΠ transitive 
or ¢ntransitive ; it is transitive when it can have an object 
in the Accusative: πράττομαι χρήματα, 7 gain jor myself 
᾿ς money ; intransitive when it is incapable of having such an 
object: ἀπέχομαι, J restrain myself. 

The Middle, farther, can vary much in its mode of refer- 
ring back to the subject. We distinguish: - 


§ 480. THE MIDDLE VOICE. 271 


§ 47 8. 1. The Direct Middle, | 
in which the subject is at the same time the direct object 
of the verb: λούομαι, 7 wash myself; τρέπομαι, J turn my- 
self ; ἐπιδείκνυμαι, 7 show myself; ἵσταμαι, 7 place myself ; 
καλύπτομαι, [ hide myself. This kind of Middle is the 
rarest. ‘The Active with the reflexive pronoun in the Ac- 
cusative is more generally used to express direct Reflexion. 


Obs.—Through the direct Middle, several middle verbs have be- 
come intransitive or passive: παύω, I cause to stop; παύομαι, I 
stop myself, cease ; φαίνω, I show ; φαίνομαι, I show myself, appear ; 
inp, 1 send ; ἵεμαι, I send myself, hurry. 


§ 479. 2. The Indirect, or Dative-like Middle (§ 431), 
in which the subject is but indirectly affected by the ac- 
tion. Here the action takes place for or in the interest 
of the subject, so that in other languages the Dative may 
generally be used to denote the reflex influence: πορίζω, 
L provide; πορίζομαι, 7 provide for myself, ὁ. φ.. χρήματα, 
money ; ἄγομαι γυναῖκα, take a wife to myself; μισθοῦ- 
μαι otpariwrac, L hire soldiers for myself (but μισθοῦν, 
hire out, μισθοῦν ἑαυτόν, to hire one’s self out); μεταπέμ- 
πομαί τινα, 1 send for some one; Hom. αὐτὸς ἐφέλκεται 
ἄνδρα σίδηρος, the iron itself draws a man to it. Hence 
the Athenian says: ὁ νομοθέτης τίθησι νόμους, the lawgiver 
gives laws, but 6 δῆμος τίθεται νόμους, the people gwes laws 
to wtself. 


Obs.—The interest of the subject sometimes consists in an object 
being removed from its reach : ἀμύνομαι κίνδυνον, I ward off dan- 
ger from me; προΐεμαί rwa, I send some one away from mé; ἀπο- 
δόσθαι ναῦν (to give away for one’s interest), to sell a ship. (Com- 
pare § 324, 7). 


§ 480. 3. The Subjective or ethical Middle. 

This denotes.that an action originates. not.only external- 
ly, but also internally from the subject, 2. ¢., from its means, - 
power, or disposition : παρέχειν, to ‘furnish, Γ᾽ παρέχεσθαι, to 
Surnish from ones own means; ποιεῖν εἰρήνην, to make 
peace; ποιείσθαι εἰρήνην, to strive to make peace; λαμ- 


272 THE MIDDLE ‘VOICE. ᾿ἃ 481. 


βάνειν τι, to take something ; ᾿ λαμβάνεσθαί τινος, to lay 
hold of something ; σκοπεῖν, CO look at; σκοπεῖσθαι, to ré- 


lect. 


Obs.—The subjective Middle is formed also from intransitive verbs ; 
it then expresses a state more intensively than the active: πολι- 
revey, to be a citizen ; πολιτεύεσθαι, to act as a citizen ; βουλεύειν, to 
give advice ; βουλεύεσθαι, to deliberate with one’s self. 


§ 481. 4. The Causative Middle. 

As the Causative Active (§ 476, 3) expresses an ac- 
tion only occasioned by the subject, so the Middle is often 
used to denote that the subject Aas an action done for 
or ow itself: 6 πατὴρ διδάσκεται τὸν υἱόν, the father has 
his son instructed; παρατίθεμαι δεῖπνον, L have a meal 
placed before me ; δικάζομαι, 7 have judgment pronounced 
Sor me; ἀποτέμνομαι τὰς χεῖρας, 1 have my hands be 
of. 

§ 4814. As examples, the following more important verbs 
may be adduced, whose meaning in “the Middle essentially 
differs in various ways from that ‘of the “Active : apyw, L 
am first, ἄρχομαι, 1 begin; ὃ ῥήτωρ γράφει νόμον, the ora- 
tor proposes (writes down) ὦ law, ὃ κατήγορος γράφεται 
τὸν ἀδικήσαντα, the accuser prosecutes (has the name writ- 


ten down) the wrong doer ; τιμωρῶ τινι, 7 help one; τιμω-᾿ 


ροῦμαί τινα, 7 avenge myself on one; αἱρῶ, 7 take, αἱροῦμαι, 
7 choose; δανείζω, I put out to interest; δανείζομαι, 1 
borrow at interest ; πείθω, 7 persuade, πείθομαι, L allow 
myself to be persuaded, I ober. 


One and the same Middle may occur in different senses: διδάσκομαι 
(4), I cause to teach, or (1) I teach myself, learn ; τρέπομαι (1), 1 
turn myself, or (2) I turn to myself; τρέπονται τὰς γνώμας, they 
change their opinion ; τρέπονται τοὺς πολεμίους, they turn away (put 
to flight) the enemy (§ 479, Obs.). 


§ 482. Obs.—The deponents are distributed among the different 
kinds of Middle verbs, and differ from the verbs mentioned only by 
having no active form. Thus ὑπισχνοῦμαι, I pledge myself, is a direct 


Middle; but δέχομαι, 1 receive; κτάομαι, I acquire, are indirect; ἀγω- ~ 


— 


USE OF THE TENSES. 273 


γίζομαι, I contend ; οἶμαι, I think, are subjective: ἀναβιώσασθαι, to revive, 
is causative. On the Passive Deponents, § 328. 


§ 483. 3. The Passive Voice 
has a freer use in Greek than in Latin, viz. : 


1. even such verbs as in the Active take a different case 
from the Accusative, form a Passive: καταφρονῶ τινος 
(ὃ 424), 7 despise one; καταφρονεῖταί τις ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ ; πιστεύ- 
ουσι τῷ βασιλεῖ, they trust the king; ὁ βασιλεὺς πιστεύεται 
ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν ; ἐπιβουλεύει τῷ πολεμίῳ, he plots against the 
enemy ; ὃ πολέμιος ἐπιβουλεύεται ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ, ὦ plot is made 
against the enemy by hum. 

2. Neuters of Passive participles may be formed even 
from intransitive verbs: τὰ στρατευόμενα, the warlike meas- 
47,68, τὰ σοὶ πεπολιτευμένα, your political course, your 


policy. 

3. The exclusively Passive forms even of Deponents are 
sometimes used in a Passive sense; βιάζομαι, L force, ἔβι- 
ἄσθην, I was forced; in like manner a Passive may be 
formed from a Middle: aipéw, 7 take, aipéouat, Pass., J am 
chosen; μετεπέμφθη, he was sent for, μεταπέμπομαι, zi send 


Sor (§ 479). 


CHAP. X X.—USE OF THE TENSES. 


§ 484. In marking the time, the Greeks distinguished: 


1. The ORDER of time. The three Orders of time being 
the Present, the Past, and the /’uture. 

2. The Kinp of time. In regard to the Kind of με: 
an action is either 

ad) going On, 6. 9.) γιγνώσκειν (gradually), to Ξε: to 
know ; or, 

b) momentary, 9: Gos γνῶναι; to percewe, know ; oxy 

M 


274 USE OF THE TENSES. § 485. 


¢) completed, ὁ. 9., ἐγνωκέναι, to have learned, to know 
(Lat. nosse). 


Obs.—The momentary action may be compared to a point, the ac- 
tion going on to a line, and the completed action to a surface. 


An action gowmg on is indicated by the forms of the 
Present-Stem. 

A momentary action is indicated by the forms of the 
Aorist-Stems. 

A completed action is indicated by the forms of the 
Perfect-Stem. 

The /uture denotes the future Order of time of an ac- 
tion going on, as well as of a momentary action: γνώσομαι, 
L shall (gradually) get to ‘know, and 7 shall perceive; the 
Third Future (futwrum exactwm) that of a completed 


action: ἐγνωκὼς ἔσομαι, 7) shall have learned (Latin no- * 


VETO). 

In the Present, Aorist, and Perfect, only the Indicative 
indicates a definite Order of time; the other Moods, the 
Infinitive and the Participle, resemble the corresponding 
Indicative only in regard to the Kind, not in regard to the 
Order of time. 3 

The following table presents a general view of these 
relations: 


Present. Past. Future. 
Going on. | Ind. Pres. Imperf. 
Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf., Part., of the Present. S 
Momentary. | : Aor. Ind. 5 
Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf., of the Aorist. 
Completed. | Perf. Ind. Pluperf. Futurum exact. 


Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf, Part., of the Perfect. 


§ 485. Obs.—As the English as well as the Latin language gener- 
ally neglects the distinction between an action going on and a Mo- 
mentary action, it is difficult to comprehend it. A similar distinc- 


᾿ ——— Nee 


, 


§ 488. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE. 275 


tion, however, may be perceived in some English verbs, as 7766 (φεύ- 
yew) and escape. (φυγεῖν) ; flicker and flash; fear (φοβεῖσθαι) and be . 
Frightened (φοβηθῆναι, δεῖσαι) ; wonder (θαυμάζειν) and to be surprised 
(θαυμάσαι) ; to be busy about (πράσσειν) and to accomplish (πρᾶξαι) ; 
γελᾶν, to be laughing, and γελάσαι, to burst out laughing. 


1. Forms oF AN ACTION IN PROGRESS. 
a) The Present Indicative. 


§ 486. The Present Indicative denotes, as in English 
and Latin, an action going on or in progress at the present 
time: ἱκετεύομέν σε πάντες, we all implore thee. Hence 
by the Present are expressed general assertions, valid for 
all times, and therefore also for the Present: ἔστι Θεός, 
there is ὦ God. ° 

Obs.—Actions whose commencement indeed belongs to the Past, 

but whose effects extend to the Present, are sometimes expressed 
by this tense: ἀκούω, I hear, also in the sense, I have heard and 

- still bear in mind; νικάω, I conquer, i. 6.. 1 am victorious ; φεύγω, 

I am banished ; ἀδικέω, I am wrong (have done wrong); θνήσκει, 


he is dead. In this sense alone are used ἥκω, I am come; οἴχομαι, 
I am gone. 


§ 487. By a lively apprehension a past action may be 
represented as present, hence the use, very frequent in 
‘Greek, of the //¢storical Present, which frequently alter- 
nates with past tenses: poet. καὶ πῶς ὁρᾶται καὶ npéOn; 
and how is she seen, and was she captured? ἐπεὶ ἡγεῖτο 
᾿Αρχίδαμος καὶ ἐπορεύετο ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀντιπάλους, ἐνταῦθα οὗτοι 
οὐκ ἐδέξαντο τοὺς περὶ τὸν ᾿Αρχίδαμον, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγκλίνουσιν, as 
_ Archidamus took the lead and marched against the enemy, 
the latter did not wart for the troops of Archidamus, but 
retreat. 

§ 488. 6) The Imperfect 


is the Preterite of an action in progress, like the Latin 
Imperfect. 

The Greek therefore uses the Imperfect where he wishes 
to describe past states or past actions in their progress, in 
their continuance along with others, or in their frequent, 


210 ᾿ THE IMPERFECT. ι ὃ 489. 


continued repetition: Hom. οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ οἶνον ἔμισγον ἐνὶ 
κρητῆρσι καὶ ὕδωρ, οἱ δ᾽ αὖτε σπόγγοισι πολυτρήτοισι τραπέζας 
νίζον καὶ προτίθεν, τοὶ δὲ κρέα πολλὰ δατεῦντο, 8072 Were 
mangling wine and water in mixing-bowls, others cleaning 
tables with porous sponges, and placing them, the rest were 
carving much meat ; τοὺς piv οὖν πελταστὰς ἐδέξαντο οἱ 
βάρβαροι καὶ ἐμάχοντο, the barbarians met the peltasts, 
and then were fighting,—Hom. ὄφρα piv ἠὼς ἦν καὶ ἀέξετο 
ἱερὸν ἦμαρ, τόφρα μάλ᾽ ἀμφοτέρων βέλε᾽ ἥπτετο, πῖπτέ τε 
λαός, as long as it was morning, and holy day increasing, 
80 long the darts of both were striking and people falling. 
—ovrore μεῖον ἀπεστρατοπεδεύοντο οἱ βάρβαροι τῶν λλή- 
νων ἑξήκοντα σταδίων, the barbarians (did not encamp) used 
never to.encamprless than sixty stadia from the Hellenes. 


§ 489. Obs. 1.—The Imperfect frequently expresses a merely at- 
tempted but not accomplished action: πρῶτος Κλέαρχος τοὺς αὑτοῦ 
στρατιώτας ἐβιάζετο ἰέναι, οἱ δὲ αὐτὸν ἔβαλλον, ὕστερον δὲ ἐπεὶ ἔγνω ὅτι οὐ 
δυνήσεται βιάσασθαι, συνήγαγεν ἐκκλησίαν, first Clearchus tried to force 
his soldiers to go, but they shot at him ; afterward, however, as he perceived 
he would not be able to force them, he summoned a meeting. So ἐδίδου 
sometimes means he offered to give, to distinguish it from ἔδωκεν, he 
gave. 


§ 490. Obs, 2.—The Imperfects of the verbs which denote should 
and must are used, just as in Latin, to denote what should be done 
in opposition to what was done: ἔδει τοὺς λέγοντας μήτε πρὸς ἔχθραν 
ποιεῖσθαι τὸν λόγον μήτε πρὸς χάριν, the speakers ought to have made their 
speeches neither from fear nor from favor (Lat. oportebat); so χρῆν, it 
ought ; εἰκὸς ἦν, it would be fair. 

On the Imperf. with ἄν, ὃ 494, Obs. 1, and § 537, etc. 


§ 491. ὁ) The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, Injinitige, 
and Participle Present 

sumply express an action in progress, whether it lie in the 

present, past, or future: μαινόμεθα πάντες, ὁπόταν ὁργιζώ- 

μεθα, we are all mad when we are angry; ἔλεγον τῷ 

Εὐθυδήμῳ, ὅτι πάντες ἕτοιμοι εἶεν μανθάνειν, they told Hu- 

thydemus that they were all ready to learn; οὕτω ποιήσω, 


a 


» 


§ 492. THE AORIST INDICATIVE. — 277 


ὅπως ἂν σὺ κελεύῃς, 7 will do as you may bid me (sie 
agam, ut tu me agere jubebis); ταῦτα λέγων θορύβου ἤκουσε, 
διὰ τῶν τάξεων ἰόντος καὶ ἤρετο, τίς ὁ. θόρυβος εἴη, saying 
this, he heard a noise pass through the ranks, and asked 
what the noise was. 


Obs.—These Pisient forms sometimes, like the Imperfect (§ 480) 
express a mere attempt: τὸ ἀποδιδράσκοντα μὴ δύνασθαι ἀποδρᾶναι 
πολλὴ μωρία, for a man not to be able to run away when he tries to 
run away is great stupidity. 


§ 492. 2. Forms or A MoMENTARY ACTION. 
a) The Aorist Indicative | 


is the Preterite of a Momentary action, and therefore de- 
notes the actual beginning of an action in the past, similar 
to the Historical Perfect of the Latins. 

The Greeks employ the Aorist Indicative when they 
wish to narrate past facts, to state past actions simply as 
having happened, or to represent them as individual facts 
without reference to other actions: μετὰ τὴν ἐν Κορωνείᾳ 
μάχην οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐξέλιπον τὴν Βοιωτίαν racavgasier the 
battle at Coronea the Athenans left all Beotia ,---Παυ- 
σανίας ἐκ Λακεδαίμονος στρατηγὸς ὑπὸ “Ἑλλήνων ἐξεπέμφθη 
μετὰ εἴκοσι νεῶν ἀπὸ Πελοποννήσου, ξυνέπλεον δὲ καὶ ᾿Αθη- 
ναῖοι τριάκοντα ναυσὶ καὶ ἐστράτευσαν ἐς Κύπρον καὶ αὐτῆς τὰ 
πολλὰ κατεστρέψαντο, Pausanias was sent out from Lace- 
daemon as general by the Hellehes, with twenty ships from 
the Peloponnese, but Athenians also accompanied hinr 
(accompanying circumstance) with thirty ships, and they 
proceeded to Cyprus and subdued the greater put of τέ; 
τοξικὴν καὶ ἰατρικὴν καὶ μαντικὴν ᾿Απόλλων ἀνεῦρεν, Apollo 
invented the arts of archery, medicine, and prophecy ;— 
Hom. τὴν δὲ πολὺ πρῶτος ἴδε Tritaayor θεοειδής, βῆ ὃ 


. ἰθὺς προθύροιο, νεμεσσήθη δ᾽ ἐνὶ θυμῷ ξεῖνον δηθὰ, θύρῃσιν 


ἐφεστάμεν, ἐγγύθι δὲ στὰς χεῖρ᾽ ἕλε δεξιτερὴν καὶ ἐδέξατο 
χάλκεον ἔγχος, but her first Telemachus of form dwine 
beheld,and he went straight to the porch, and was grieved 


278 - THE AORIST INDICATIVE. § 493. 


at heart that a stranger stood a long time at the door, and 
going near he took him by the right hand and eased him 
of his brazen spear. 


§ 493. As the Aorist Indicative simply expresses an ac- 
tion as having taken place in the past, it answers to all the 
‘different Preterites in other languages, especially often in 
subordinate sentences to the Latin and English pluperfect : 
Δαρεῖος Κῦρον μεταπέμπεται (ὃ 487) ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἧς αὐτὸν 
σατράπην ἐποίησεν, Darius has Cyrus sent for from the 
province, over which he had OE by him satrap ( Secerat). 
Thus the Aorist is used with the Conjunctions of time, 
ἐπεί, we, Ore, as, when, like the Latin Perfect with post- 
quam, ubi, ut: we ὃ Κῦρος ἤσθετο κραυγῆς; ἀνεπήδησεν 
ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον ὥσπερ difoumén, when Cyrus percewed (ut 
audit) a cry, he sprang upon his horse like one inspired. 


§ 494. The Aorist Indicative is used in statements of experience im- 
plying that a thing once happened, but admitting an application to 
all times: poet. τῷ χρόνῳ ἡ δίκη πάντως HAO’ ἀποτισαμένη, with time 
avenging justice always came (and hence always comes); καὶ βραδὺς 
εὔβουλος εἷλεν ταχὺν ἄνδρα διώκων, even ὦ slow man, when well advised, 
overtook (oWertakes) by pursuit a quick man. In English we employ 
the Present in such general assertions, and often add such adverbs 
as usually, commonly, always, etc.: τὰς τῶν φαύλων συνουσίας ὀλίγος 
χρόνος διέλυσεν, ὦ short time usually dissolves the associations of the bad. 
This Aorist is called the. gnomic Aorist, because it is often used in 
gnomes, proverbs, or maxims. In Hom. it is often also used in com- 
parisons. : 


ΕΣ 
Obs. 1.—In expressing what wsually happens, the Aorist sometimes 
has ἄν in order to express the case as one that may have occurred, 
and therefore may occur oftener: ἔλεξεν ἄν, he may have said. In 
the same way the Imperfect is used, but referring to an action 
in progress: ἀναλαμβάνων αὐτῶν τὰ ποιήματα διηρώτων ἄν, τί λέ- 
γοιεν, taingMup their poems I would ask what they meant. 


Obs. 2.—The Aorist Indicative, especially in the 1 Pers. Sing., is 
frequently used to express: actions and states beginning only. at 
the moment of speaking: ἐγέλασα, I burst out laughing; poet. 
ἐπῴνεσ᾽. ἔργον καὶ πρόνοιαν ἣν ἔθου, I praise the deed and the pru- 
dence which you have exercised. 

On the Hypothetical Aorist, § 537, etc. oe 


§ 496. THE AOR. SUBJ., OPT., IMPERAT., AND INFIN. 279 


§ 495. b) The Aorist Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, 
and Infinitwe- 


denote a Momentary action s¢mply, whether of the present, 
past, or future: of τριάκοντα προςέταξαν ἀπαγαγεῖν Λέοντα, 
iv’ ἀποθάνοι, the Thirty commanded to take Leon away to 
die; ἀπορῶ, τί πρῶτον μνησθῶ, 7 am in doubt what first 
to mention; μὴ θαυμάσητε, ἐὰν παράδοξον εἴπω τι, be not 
surprised if I say something strange; σύ μοι ἀπόκριναι, 
ὦ παῖ, give me an answer, boy ; μέγα οἶμαι ἔργον τὸ ἀρχὴν 
καταπρᾶξαι, πολὺ δ᾽ ἔτι μεῖζον τὸ λαβόντα διασώσασθαι, ἢ 
deem ἐξ a great thing to found a government, but ὦ stilt 
greater to maintain tt after acquiring tt. 


Obs.—The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive Aorist, 
therefore, differ from the corresponding forms of the Present, 
just as the Aorist Indicative differs from the Imperfect; the 
Aorist forms express a single fact, conceived as a point, the 
Present, as a state or condition, sometimes of long duration: 
χαλεπὸν τὸ ποιεῖν, τὸ δὲ κελεῦσαι ῥ(ίδιον, it is difficult to do, easy to 
command ; εἴ πῃ ἔχεις ἀντιλέγειν, ἀντίλεγε " εἰ δὲ μή, παῦσαι πολλάκις 
λέγων τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον, if you have any thing to say in reply, reply 
(even in a long speech), 7f not, cease (at once) frequently repeating 
the same statement. 


§ 496. The Aorist Participle ecail ge expresses some- 
thing which took place earlier or before the act of the prin- 
cipal verb: Κροῖσος “Αλυν διαβὰς με γάλην a ἀρχὴν καταλύσει, 
Crasus, after crossing the Halys, will overthrow ὦ great 
empire ; παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω (ὃ 494), after ἐόν, 
(by suffering) even a fool becomes-knowing. ' 


Obs.—As the Aorist generally indicates the moment at which an 
action actually begins (§ 485), so the Aorist Participle also only 
expresses that the beginning of an action took place before an- 
other action, while its progress may continue simultaneously with 
that other: γελάσας εἶπε, he began to laugh and said (laughing) 
[visu oborto diait|. Hom. ὧδε δέ τις εἴπεσκεν ἰδὼν ἐς πλησίον ἄλλον, 
thus would say many a one while looking at his neighbor ; χάρισαί 
μοι ἀποκρινάμενος, answer and oblige me, inasmuch as the χαρίσασθαι 
follows immediately after the beginning of the answer. 


280 | THE FUTURE. § 497. 


§ 497. As the Aorist Indicative may frequently be translated by the 
Pluperfect (§ 493), so also the Aorist Optative and Infinitive in asser- 
tions generally denotes something which took place before: οἱ Ἰνδοὶ 
ἔλεξαν ὅτι πέμψειε σφᾶς ὁ ᾿Ινδῶν βασιλεύς (Ind. dre ἔπεμψε), the Indians 
said that the king of the Indians had sent them ; Κύκλωπες λέγονται ἐν 

Σικελίᾳ οἰκῆσαι, the Cyclops are said to have dwelt in Sicily. 


§ 498. Many verbs whose Present-Stem expresses a state, 
denote in all the Aorist forms the entrance into this state: 
ἄρχειν, to rule, ἄρξαι, to obtain dominion; βασιλεύειν, to 
be king, βασιλεῦσαι, to become king ; ἰσχύειν, to be strong, 
ἰσχῦσαι, to become strong; σιγᾶν, to be silent, σιγῆσαι, to 
become. silent; ἔχειν, to have, σχεῖν, to obtain; φαίνεσθαι, 
to appear, φανῆναι, to, become apparent ; νοσεῖν, to be ill, 
νοσῆσαι, to become wl; πολεμεῖν, to be at war (bellum ge- 
rere), πολεμῆσαι, to begin war (bellum inferre). (Compare 
8 485.) | 


Obs.—This meaning, however, is not always attached to these forms ; 
and ἐπολέμησαν may also signify simply bellum gesserunt (δ 492). 


§ 499. 3. THe FUTURE 


expresses the futurity both ofan action in progress and of 
a Momentary action: ἄρξω, 7 shall become ruler, and I 
shall rule. 


Obs. 2.—The 2 Person Future with od nearly resembles the negative 
Imperative: οὐκ ἐπιορκήσεις, thou wilt (shalt) not swear falsely. 


§ 500. The Future Indicative in relative clauses, and in clauses 
with ὅπως, that, is worthy of notice, for there the Future denotes 
what may or should happen: οὐκ ἔχομεν ὕτου σῖτον ὠνησόμεθα, we have 
nothing with which we can buy food (non habemus, quo cibum emamus) ; 
δεῖ ἅπαντα ἄνδρα τοῦτο παρασκευάζεσθαι, ὅπως ὡς σοφώτατος ἔσται, Every 
man should take care to be (that he shall be) as wise as possible (compare 
§ 553). The Participle is similarly used: ἡ χώρα πολλὴ καὶ ἀγαθὴ ἦν 
kai ἐνῆσαν οἱ ἐργασόμενοι, the land was large and good, and there were. 
people to (who could) cultivate it; τίς ἔσται ὁ ἡγησόμενος ; who will be 
there to (who can) guide us? (compare §§ 380, 578). 


Obs.—av (Hom. κέ) is sometimes added to the Future Indicative 
to denote that a case may possibly occur: εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι. ἄσμενος ἂν 


§ 503. THE PERFECT INDICATIVE. 281. 


πρὸς ἄνδρα οἷος σὺ εἶ ἀπαλλαγήσεται, I well know that he will be glad 
to be reconciled to a man such as you are; Hom. ὁ δὲ κεν κεχολώ- 
σεται ὅν κεν ἵκωμαι, and he will doubtless be in wrath whom I come 
upon. 

§ 501. The verb μέλλω is used with the Present, Future, 
or, though more rarely, the Aorist Infinitive, to express 
an immediately approaching, or, at least, intended action : 
μέλλω ὑμᾶς ἄγειν εἰς ᾿Ασίαν, 7 am going to lead you to 
Asia (in Asiam vos ducturus sum). This is called the 
periphrastic Future. 

Obs. 1.---μέλλω may also be used in other tenses than the Present 

with an Infinitive, like esse in Latin, with the Part. Fut.: πλησίον 


ἤδη ἦν ὁ σταθμὸς ἔνθα ἔμελλον καταλύσειν, jam prope aderat statio 
ubi deversuri erant, where they wished to rest. 


Obs. 2.----πῶς or τί οὐ μέλλω, is elliptical in the sense of Why should 
I not ὃ 


4. ForMS oF A COMPLETED ACTION. 


§ 502. a) The Perfect Indicatwe 


is the Present of a completed action, ὦ. ¢., by the Perfect 
the Greeks denote an action completed for and with ref- 
erence to the Present : poet. λόγος λέλεκται πᾶς, the whole 
speech has been spoken [dixi|;. εὕρηκα, L have found, 7 
have tt ; Hom. ἤδη γὰρ τετέλεσται ἅ μοι φίλος ἤθελε θυμός, 
Jor now has been finished what my dear soul desited ; 
ἡ πόλις ἔκτισται παρὰ τῶν Κορινθίων, the city has been 
Sounded by the Corinthians (of a still existing city); ra 
χρήματα τοῖς πλουσίοις ἡ τύχη οὐ δεδώρηται ἀλλὰ δεδάνεικεν, 
Fortune has not given, but lent (at interest) their money 
to the rich. 7 

§ 503. Obs.—Several Perfects have an entirely Present meaning, 
inasmuch as they present in a completed state the action of which 
the gradual accomplishment is expressed by the present: μιμνήσκομαι, 
Lremind myself ; μέμνημαι, 1 bear in mind, remember (memini) ; καλέομαι, 
Lam named ; κέκλημαι, my name is; πείθομαι, 1 follow ; πέποιθα, I con- 
Jide in; ὄλλυμι, 1 am perishing; ὄλωλα, I am lost ; κτάομαι, I acquire ; 
κέκτημαι, I possess ; ἵσταμαι, I place myself; ἕστηκα, I stand ; Baivw, I go; 
βέβηκα, I am gone. 


282 THE FUTURE PERFECT. § 504: 


§ 504. Ὁ) The Pilsen ford 


is the Preterite of a completed action, ὦ. ¢., by the Pluper- 7 


fect the Greeks express an action scarpicted for and with 
reference to ὦ past time: Hom. δὴ τότε γ᾽ ἀτρέμας εὖδε 
λελασμένος ὅσσ᾽ ἐπεπόνθει, then truly he slept quietly, for- 
getting what he had suffered; ἐν τοῖς Δράκοντος νόμοις 
μία ἅπασιν ὥριστο τοῖς ἁμαρτάνουσι ζημία θάνατος, in Dra- 
co’s laws death had been appointed for all criminals as 
the only punishment — says an Athenian after the laws 
were abolished. (As long as they were in force: ὥῤισται.) 

Obs.—The Pluperfects of the Perfects enumerated in § 503 are to 


be translated by Imperfects. 
On the Aorist in the sense of the Latin Pluperfect, § 493. 


§ 505. c) Tur Furure Perrecr (Fururum Exacrum) 


is the /uture of a completed action, ὁ. ¢., it denotes an 
action which will be completed in the future. It is only 
in the Middle that the Greeks have a special form for this 
Third Future, which has generally a Passive meaning. In 
the Active, the circumlocution by means of the Perfect 
Participle and the Future of εἶναι must be used (ὃ 291): 
ἂν ταῦτ᾽ εἰδῶμεν, τὰ δεόντα ἐσόμεθα ἐγνωκότες, when Wwe 


knqw this, we shall (thence) have got to know our duty; 


Hom. ἐμοὶ δὲ λελείψεται ἄλγεα λυγρά, but 7, shall have 
gloomy woes left me. δες τὰ 


A 


Obs.—The Future Perfect of the Perfects mentioned 4 ‘in ὃ 503 serves 
as a common Future: μεμνήσομαι, meminero, etc. 


§ 606. αἡ The Perfect of all the Moods, of the Infinitwe, 
and of the Participle, 


expresses a completed action generally, and may refer to 
any of the three Orders of time: οὐ βουλεύεσθαι ὥρα ἀλλὰ 


βεβουλεῦσθαι, now ἐδ not the time to consult, but to have. 


consulted (to be resolved); Ξέρξης we ἐπύθετο τὸν “EAXjjo- 
ποντὸν ἐζεῦχθαι, προῆγεν ἐκ τῶν Σάρδεων, when Aerxes 


so 


ee “ων χὰ με 


§ 511. USE OF THE MOODS. 283 


learned that the Hellespont had been bridged over (and 
was still provided with a bridge, ὅτι ἔζευκτο), he marched 
forward from Sardis; ταῦτα μὲν οὖν προειρήσθω, thus 
much be said beforehand (now to something else); Hom. 
ἔσσεται ἦμαρ Or av wor ὀλώλῃ Ἴλιος iph, ὦ day will come 
when holy Ilios will be lost (has been lost); χρήσιμόν τι 


ἐσκεμμένος ἥκω, Lam come after having devised something 
useful. 


Cuap. X XI.—USsE or THE Moops. 


A) THe Moops In SIMPLE SENTENCES. 
§ 507. 1. The Indicative. 


The Indicative, in accordance with the usage of other 
languages, is employed simply to state something positively 
or negatively, or simply and directly to ask a question: 
poet. τῆς ἀρετῆς ἱδρῶτα θεοὶ προπάροιθεν ἔθηκαν, the gods 
placed sweat before virtue ; Hom. πόθεν εἷς ἀνδρῶν ; from 
what class of men are you ? ~ 

Obs.—On the Indicative in hypothetical sentences with or without 


. ἄν, § 536, etc.; in sentences expressing a wish, ὃ 515. On the 
Aorist Ind. with ἄν, to express what usually happens, see ὃ 494. 


2. The Subjunctive. 


8 508. The Subjunctive expresses what ought to take 
place; it always refers to the present, to reality." Hence 
it is used in the folowing cases: 

§ 509. Las ὦ challenge 1 in the first person : ἴωμεν, let us 
go [eamus]; φέρε δῆ, τὰς μαρτυρίας ὑμῖν ἀναγνῶ, well, come / 
let me read you the testimonies | recitem |. 

§ 510. 2. with the negative μή in prohibitions and in 
negative admonitions (compare § 518): μὴ τοῦτο ποιήσῃς, 
ne hoc feceris, you ought not to do this. 

§ 511. 3. In hesitating questions, where it is asked what 


284 THE OPTATIVE MOOD. § 512: ἢ 
should be done: τί φῶ; what am 7 to say? Hom. πῶς 
τίς τοι πρόφρων ἔπεσιν πείθηται ᾿Αχαιῶν ; how shall any of 
the Acheans willingly trust thy words? δέξεσθε ἡμᾶς ἢ 
ἀπίωμεν ; will you receive us, or are we to depart ? 


ὃ 512. 4 with μή. in sentences expressing fear or αραμβαήμοι.- 
rude 


μὴ ἀγροικότερον ἢ τὸ ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν, of it be not rather 

to say the truth. If the anxiety is to be negatively ex- 
pressed, μὴ ov is used: Hom. μή νύ τοι ov χραίσμῃ σκῆπτρον 
καὶ στέμμα θεοῖο, lest the staff and wreath of the god should 
not help thee, ὦ. ὁ., it will certainly be of little help to thee 
[Lat. vereor ne non or ut te juvet|. Compare δὲ 533, 616, 
Obs. 3, § 621, a. 


§ 513. Obs—The Homeric language employs the Subjunctive of 
future events, quite like the Fut. Ind., to express a thing that is to 
be expected (ὃ 545): οὐ γάρ πω τοίους ἴδον ἀνέρας οὐδὲ ἴδωμαι, for never 
yet did I see such men nor may (shall) I ft? them. ἄν is sometimes 
ee in Hom. to this Subjunctive: οὐκ ἄν τοι ypaiopy κίθαρις τά τε 

ὥρ᾽ ᾿Αφροδίτης, the lyre and Aphrodite's gifts would not help thee. Com- 
τωρ § 500, Obs. 


3. The Optative. 


§ 514. 1. The Optative alone (without the particle av) 
is used to express a wish that something may take place: 
poet. ὦ παῖ, γένοιο πατρὸς εὐτυχέστερος, O boy! may you 
be happier than your father | Lat. Pres. or Perf. Subj. |. 

The particles used (like Latin wtinam) to introduce a 
wish are: εἰ (Hom. ai), εἴθε (Hom. aie), εἰ γάρ, we. 


§ 515. Obs.—If it is to be intimated that a wish is not to be realized, 
it is referred to the past, and expressed by the Imperfect or Aorist 
Indicative: εἴθ᾽ ἦσθα δυνατὸς δρᾶν ὅσον πρόθυμος εἴ, would that you were 
able to do what you wish; εἴθε σοὶ τότε συνεγενόμην, would that I then 
had met you. The same kind of wish is expressed by the Aorist 
ὥφελον (properly “T owed”) and the Infinitive: ὀλέσθαι ὥφελον τῇδ᾽ 
ἡμέρᾳ, would that I had perished on that day (Lat. Imperf. and Plup. 
Subj.]. Compare ὃ 587. 


§ 516. 2. The Optative with the particle ἄν (Hom. κέ or 


85.519. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 285 


κέν) expresses possibility : τοῦτο γένοιτ᾽ ἄν, that (could) 
might be; τί γὰρ γένοιτ᾽ ἂν ἕλκος μεῖζον ἢ n φίλος κακός ; 
what greater evil could there be than a bad friend ; ποῦ 
δῆτ᾽ ἂν εἶεν οἱ ξένοι ; why! where can the strangers be? 
[Latin Pres. and Perf. Subj.|, The Optative with ἄν is 
therefore called the potential Optative. 


ὃ 517. Obs, 1.—Hence the Optative with ἄν is used in modestly ex- 
pressed assertions: οὐκ ἂν λέγοιμι, I would not say [non dixerim|; ὥρα 
ἂν συσκευάζεσθαι εἴη, it is perhaps time to break up; οὐκ ἂν δύναιο μὴ 
καμὼν εὐδαιμονεῖν, you could not, without taking trouble, be happy. 


Obs. 2.—In the poets the Optative in a potential sense is also used 
without ἄν : Hom. ῥεῖα. θεός γ᾽ ἐθέλων καὶ τηλόθεν ἄνδρα σαώσαι, a god 
who is willing can easily save a man even afar off. But.this use of the 
Optative to denote a possible and merely imaginary case is originally 
peculiar to this mood, and hence is preserved in al a ees clauses, 
δὲ 528, 529, 532, Obs., 546, 552, Obs. 


§ 518. 4. Zhe Lmperative. 

The Imperative is the mood of command, ane with eg? 
atives, of prohibition. 

A prohibition in the second person can be excell only 
in two ways, viz., ecther with μὴ and the Present Impera- 
tive ¢ μὴ πρᾶττε, of a continued action, or with μή and the 
Aorist Subjunctive: μὴ πράξῃς, of a Momentary action, 
do not do: ταῦτά μοι πρᾶξον, τέκνον, καὶ μὴ βράδυνε μηδ᾽ 
ἐπιμνησθῆς ἔτι Τροίας, do me this, child, and delay not nor 
think farther of Troy. 

In the third person also uf with the Aorist [mperative 
is admissible: μηδεὶς ὑμῶν προςδοκησάτω ἄλλως, let none 
of you expect otherwise. 

- On the Infinitive instead of the Imperative, see ὃ 577. 
On the Imperative as a substitute for a hypothetical clause, 
§ 545, Obs. 3. 


B) Tue Moops 1n CompounD SENTENCES. 


§ 519. Preliminary remarks on the connection of sen- 
tences with one another. τί 


ἊΨ 
286 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. § 519. 


1. Two simple sentences (§ 361, 2) may be combined in 
two ways, viz., either 


a) so that the one may be quite independent τ the other 
—this combination is called Co-ordination, or Parataxis 
(παράταξις). ν᾽ 

ὁ) so that they mutually are referred to each other, and 
express a complete thought only in their combination — 
this combination is called Subordination, or Hypotaxis 
(ὑπόταξις). 

2. Of two Co-ordinate sentences each i is a principal sen- 
tence, and in every respect independent of the other: κοινὴ 
ἡ τύχη Kal τὸ μέλλον ἀόρατον, Fortune v8 common, and the 
Suture imvisible; τοῦτο ἐγὼ οὔτ᾽ εἴρηκα, οὔτε λέγοιμι ἄν, 
LT have-neither said that, nor could I say tt. 

On the manner in ee § co-ordinate sentences may be 
combined, § 624, a. : 


3. By Subordination two sentences are combined in such 
a way that one expresses the principal idea, the other a 
secondary one. The former is called the leading sentence, 
the latter the secondary, dependent or Subordinate.. One 
leading” sentence often has several subordinate anes. de- 
pendent on it. The moods of subordinate sentences are 
in many ways determined by the leading sentence: Τισ- 
σαφέρνης διαβάλλει τὸν Κῦρον πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν, ὡς ἐπι- 
βουλεύοι αὐτῷ, Tissaphernes brings a calumny against Cy- 
rus before his brother, (saying) that he was plotting against 
him ; Hom. σοὶ aw ἑσπόμεθ᾽, ὄφρα σὺ xalpyc, we have fol- 
lowed thee that thou mayst reorce. 


4. The Correlative connection of sentences is a special 
kind of subordination. Of two correlative sentences, one 
always refers to the other. The one is called thé’ Prota- 
848, and the other the Apodosis. The Protasis, which re- 
quires to be completed by another sentence, is subordinate 
(3).. The Apodosis is a leading sentence, which furnishes 
the necessary completion: Hos: we ἴδεν, ὥς μιν ἔδυ χόλος, 


. 


§ 520. THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. 287 


as he saw it wrath seized him; Hom. ὁπποῖόμ κ᾽ eirnoba 
ἔπος τοῖόν κ᾽ ἐπακούσαις, the kind of word you speak, such 
you wil hear. 


Obs. 1.—This correlation is frequently expressed by two Pronouns 
or Particles referring to each other (§§ 216, 217), as in the exam- 
ples just, quoted, but not always: εἴ πῃ ἔχεις ἀντιλέγειν, ἀντίλεγε, 
if you can in any way reply, reply. 

Obs. 2.—The Apodosis often precedes the Protasis: οὗτος βέλτιστος 
ἂν εἴη boric κοσμιώτατα τὰς συμφορὰς φέρειν δύναται, he would be the 
best who can bear calamities with most dignity. 


5. From the subordination of one clause to another there 
arises a compound sentence. ν 


Obs. 1.—The same thought may often be as well expressed in two 
Co-ordinate sentences as in one Compound sentence: μηδενὶ συμ- 
φορὰν νειδίσῃς, κοινὴ γὰρ ἡ τύχη, reproach no one with a calamity, 
Sor fortune is common ; or ἐπεὶ ἡ τύχη κοινή ἐστι, μηδενὲ συμφορὰν 

Φ ὀνειδίσῃς, since fortune is common, reproach no one with a calamity. 

The Homeric language abounds in series of Co-ordinate sentences 

(the paratactic arrangement). 


Obs. 2.—Frequently a word belonging to the Dependent sentence 
is drawn into the Principal sentence, where it may appear in 
different cases. If the Principal sentence stands first, the ar- 
rangement is called prolepsis (πρόληψις, taking beforehand): καί 
μοι τὸν υἱὸν εἰπέ; εἰ μεμάθηκε τὴν τέχνην = καί poe εἰπέ, εἰ ὁ υἱὸς 
μεμάθηκε τὴν τέχνην (δ 397). . Hom. Τυδείδην δ᾽ οὐκ ἂν γνοίης, πο- 
τέροισι μετείη, you could scarce perceive on which side Tydides stood ; 
καὶ τῶν βαρβάρων ἐπεμελεῖτο, ὡς πολεμεῖν ἱκανοὶ εἴησαν, he also took 
care that the barbarians should be capable of carrying on war. On 
the other hand, a substantive may pass from the Principal to _ 
the Subordinate sentence : Hom. μετὰ δ᾽ ἔσσεται ἣν τότ᾽ ἀπηύρων 
κούρην Βρισῆος, among them also will be the daughter of Brises, whom 
I then took.away (compare § 602). 


6. Οχ the different kinds of sentences according to their 
substance, ὃ 624, ete.» Only those kinds will here be no- 


ticed which are most important in Baas to the use of the 
Moods. 


§ 520. The use of the Moods in Deperidént sentences is ἢ 
subject to the following general rules : 
τς Δ, The Indicative in Greek is very extensively used 


288 THE MOODS ΙΝ COMPOUND SENTENCES. ἃ 621, 


even in Dependent sentences, the Greeks merely annexing 
or inserting many sentences without any mark of depend- 
ence where the Latin language marks the dependence: by 
the Subjunctive or Infinitive: μή μ᾽ avépn, τίς εἰμι, ask me 
not who I am [ne me interroges, quis sim|. 


® § 521. 2. The Subjunctive in Dependent. sentences also. _. 
denotes always that: which ought to take place, and can _ 
generally be employed only when the ee sentence | 
contains a principal tense. 

Every verbal form is regarded as a Principal tense which 
connects the action with ‘the present ; hence the Present 
(except the Historical Present, § 487), the Perfect, and 
the Huture Indicative, and all tenses of the Suijwacnes 
and Lmperative. 


§ 522. 3. The Optateve (without ἄν) denotes something* 
merely conceived or supposed (ὃ 517, Obs. 2), and generally 
can be employed only when the Principal sentence contains 
an Historical tense. 

Every verbal form, however, is regarded as an Historical 
tense which connects the action with the past, hence the 
EMistorical Present (ὃ 487), the Indicative of the Aorist, 
the Lmperfect and Pluperfect. 

A. Dependent clause, moreover, frequently has the Op- 
tative when this mood occurs in the Principal sentence. 


§ 523. 4. In indirect speech (oratio obliqua) the Opta- 
tive (without av), but only after an S/zstorical tense, is 
used to denote something which is to be stated, not as the 
opinion of the speaker, but of another person: of ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
Περικλέα ἐκάκιζον, ὅτι στρατηγὸς ὧν οὐκ ἐπεξάγοι ἐπὶ τοὺς 
πολεμίους, the Athenians reproached Pervcles because, be- 
ing a general, he did not lead them out against the enemy 
[guod non duceret|; εὔξαντο σωτήρια θύσειν ἔνθα πρῶτον 
εἰς φιλίαν γῆν ἀφίκοιντο, they vowed to offer thank-offerings 
whenever they should first come to a friendly land ; εἴ τις 


πόλις ἐπὶ πόλιν στρατεύσοι, ἐπὶ ταύτην ἔφη ἰέναι, δὺ GUA Civ" 


§ ὅῶθ. MOODS IN DEPENDENT A ae 


étas contra [aliam | civitatem pugnatuPor Pressel, 
se diait tturum. 

In this case, however, the Indicative also is ΓΒΕ Ἐς 
according to § 520, but never the Subjunctive, even after a 
Principal tense, its employment being limited to the case 
mentioned in § 527. 


§ 524. 5, The Potential Optative (with av) may occur in 
Dependent, in the same sense as in Independent, sentences 
(ὃ 516), to denote something as merely possible: λέγω, ὅτι 
τοῦτο οὐκ av γένοιτο, L say that this probably could not 
happen. 

The farther use of the Moods in Dependent sentences is 
treated of specially in what follows, according to the differ- 
ent kinds of Dependent sentences. 


I. Moops IN DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS AND IN DE- 
PENDENT INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 


§ 525. Sentences containing Dependent assertions are 
those which annex the substance of a speech or opinion to 
a Principal sentence by means of the conjunctions, ὅτι, we, 
that ; Dependent or indirect Interrogative sentences are 
connected with the Principal sentence by means of εἰ, 77; 
πότερον... ἤ [utrum...an]|, whether ...or (in double ques- 
tions), or Interrogative Pronouns (§ 214) or Adverbs. 


Ὁ 526. 1. The Indicative 
is used in those sentences which, when conceived independ- 
ently, would have the Indicative, and thus, 


a) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense, the 
Indicative must be used (§ 521): εἰπέ μοι, τίνα γνώμην 
ἔχεις, tell me, what opinion you have (direct: τίνα γνώμην 
ἔχεις) [Lat. dic mihi, quam sententiam habeas] ; 

b) when the leading sentence has an /istorical tense 
the Indicative may be used (ὃ 522): εἶπον, ἥντινα γνώμην 
εἶχον, dine ilar ea iy ἡ ἧκεν ἀγγέλλων τις, 


290 MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS, ETC. § 527 


ὡς ᾿Ελάτεια κατείληπται, some one came bringing the news 
that Elatea was taken (direct: ᾿Ελάτεια κατείληπται). 

Besides the Indicative, the Optative also is in this case 
admissible, § 528, a. 


8 527. 2. The Subjunctive 
can not occur at all in Dependent assertions, and in De- 
pendent Interrogative sentences only if, when conceived as 
independent, they would necessantr have the a a 
and thus 


4) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense-the 
Subjunctive mst remain: βουλεύομαι, πῶς σε ἀποδρῶ, 
I am planning how to escape from you (direct accord- 
ing to § 511: πῶς σε wee ae quo modo te effu- 
gram | ; 

ὦ) when the leading sentence has an S/istorical tense 
the Subjunctive may ‘sometimes occur: ἐβουλευόμην, πῶς 
σε ἀποδρῶ ; but the Optative is more frequent in this case 
than the Subjunctive (ὃ 528,6). The Subjunctive 1 in De- 
pendent Interrogative sentences accordingly i is to be trans- 
lated by may or shall.” 


§ 528. 3. The Optatie (without av) 
may occur in such sentences : 


a) as a substitute for the Indicative (§ 526, 6), 1. Bs 
when there is an Historical tense in the leading sen- 
tence, in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived inde- 
pendently, ought to have the Indicative: εἶπον, ἥντινα 
γνώμην ἔχοιμι (direct : εἶχον) [Lat. dint, quam. sententiam — 
haberem| ; ἔγνωσαν ὅτι κενὸς ὁ φόβος εἴη, they knew that 
the fear was groundless (direct: ὁ φόβος κενὸς ἦν), com- 
pare ὃ 523. 


ὦ) as a substitute Yop the Subjunctive (ὃ 527, ὁ), 2. @., 
when an Historical tense occurs in the leading sentence, 
in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived independent- 
ly, ought to have the Subjunctive: ἐβουλευόμην, πῶς σε 
ἀποδραίην (direct: πῶς σε ἀποδρῶ) [ Lat. deliberabam, quo 


τ §.530. MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. . 291 


modo te efugerem],I was reflecting how 1 should escape 
you. , 

In the second case the Optative is to be translated by 
should. 


Obs.—Which of the two meanings belongs to the Optative is gen- 
erally perceived from the connection quite as easily as in the 
Latin nesciebat quid faceret, he knew not what he did or what he 
should do. 


§ 529. The Optative as a substitute for the Indicative is found also 
without a Conjunction in the continuation of a direct speech: ἔλεγον 
πολλοί, ὅτι. παντὸς ἄξια λέγει (δ 526, δ), χειμὼν γὰρ εἴη καὶ οἴκαδε ἀπο- 
πλεῖν οὐ δυνατὸν εἴη, many said that he says what is worthy of the ut- 
most regard, for that it was winter, and that it was impossible to sail 
home. 

On the Infinitive in assertions, ὃ 560. On the Participle in asser- 
tions, ὃ 593. ° 


Mixed examples: 

Πυθαγόρας ὁ Σάμιος πρῶτος ἐν τοῖς “EAAnow ἐτόλμησεν si- 
πεῖν, ὅτι τὸ μὲν δῶμα τεθνήξεται (ὃ 291), ἡ δὲ ψυχὴ ἀναπτᾶσα 
(8 316, 5) οἰχήσεται ἀθάνατος καὶ ἀγήρως, Pythagoras the 
Samian was the first among the Greeks who ventured to 
maintain that the body will be dead, but the soul, flying 
upward, will depart emmortal and ever young ; Θεμιστο- 
κλῆς νέος ἔτι ὧν ἔλεγεν, ὡς καθεύδειν αὐτὸν οὐκ ἐῴη τὸ τοῦ 
᾿ Μιλτιάδου τρόπαιον, Themistocles, when still young, used to 
say that the trophy of Miltiades would not let Rim sleep ; 
᾿Απορῶ, τοῦ (ἢ 214,0bs. 1) πρῶτον μνησθῶ, 7 am at ὦ loss 
what to mention first , οἱ ᾿Επιδάμνιοι τὸν»θεὸν ἐπήροντο, εἰ 
παραδοῖεν Κορινθίοις τὴν πόλιν, the δῥρεέααπυγίαηδ asked the 
god whether they should give up their city to the Corinth- 
tans. 


II. Moops 1n SENTENCES OF PURPOSE, OR FINAL 
SENTENCES. 

§ 530. Sentences which express an object or a purpose 
are introduced hy the Conjunction iva (Hom. ὄφρα), ὡς, 
ὅπως, in order that, that, in nea to, μή, OY ὕπως μή, ἵνα 
μή, m order that not. 


292 MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. ὃ 531. 


As such sentences express something which ἐδ ic 
to happen, they take: 


§ 531. 1. The Subjunctive 

a) necessarily when the leading sentence has a Principal 
tense: εἰς καιρὸν ἥκεις, ὅπως τῆς δίκης ἀκούσῃς, you have 
come at the right time to hear the trial [in tempore ades, 
ut causam audias |. 5 

b) more rarely when the leading sentence has an Histor- 
ical tense: εἰς καιρὸν ἧκες, ὕπως τῆς δίκης a ἀκούσῃς | aderas 
ut audires|; ἐπίτηδές σε οὐκ ἤγειρον, ἵνα we ἥδιστα διάγῃς, 
7 purposely did not wake you, that you might pass your 
tume as pleasantly as possible. 


Obs.—The Conjunctions we, ὅπως, sometimes have ἄν (Hom. κέ, κέν) 
added to them in this sense: τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ νῦν didacy’, ὕπως ἂν ἐκ- 
μάθω, explain that very thing now that I may learn it. . The pur- 
pose is thereby represented as one whose attainment depends on 
conditions (as here, if you explain it). Compare ὃ 554. 


§ 532. 2. The Optative 
as a regular substitute for the Subjunctive (δ 531, ὁ), when 
the leading sentence has an Historical tense: ἐπίτηδές σε 
οὐκ ἤγειρον, wa we ἥδιστα διάγοις ; Hom. Τυδείδῃ Διομήδεϊ 
Παλλὰς ᾿Αθήνη δῶκε μένος καὶ θάρσος ἵν᾽ ἔκδηλος μετὰ πᾶσιν 
᾿Αργείοισι γένοιτο, to Tydides Diomedes Pallas Athene 
gave strength and courage that he might be distinguished 
among allthe Argives | Diomedi Minerva animos dedit, 
ut insignis fieret_inter cunctos Argivos|. 


" 


Obs.—The distinction between the Subjunctive and Optative in 
sentences of purpose after an Historical tense consists in the 
* rarer Subjunctive expressing the sentence more as an object or 
demand that may be attained, the Optative more as the thought 
or conception of the acting person (compare §§ 521, 522). - 
On the Future Indicative with ὅπως, §§ 500,553. On the hypo- 
thetical Indicative in Sentences of Purpose, § 500. On the non- 
intended consequence (ὥστε), ὃ 565. 


§ 533. Sentences expressive of fear, introduced by μή (Lat. ne) or 
μὴ ob (Lat. wt), follow the construction of sentences of purpose (com- 
pare ὃ 512). They have the Subjunctive necessarily when dependent 


§ 536. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 293 


on a Principal tense: οὐ φοβεῖ, μὴ ἤδη πρεσβύτερος yo; do you not fear 
to be already too old |nonne times, ne etate provectior sis}? The Optative 
is commonly used after an Historical tense: ἐφοβοῦντο, μή τι πάθοι, 
they feared he might suffer somewhat (verebantur ne quid ili accideret| ; 
but not unfrequently also the Subjunctive: οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τοὺς ξυμμάχους 
ἐδεδίεσαν, μὴ ἀποστῶσιν, the Athenians were alarmed lest the allies should 
revolt (compare ὃ 519, 5, Obs. 2). 


Obs.—ph and ὅπως μή after verbs of fearing seldom have the Fu- 
ture Indicative, oftener the Perfect Indicative when the fear refers 
to a completed action: φοβούμεθα, μὴ ἀμφοτέρων ἡμαρτήκαμεν, We 
Sear we have failed in both. 


Mixed examples: : 

TOUTO οὐ προΐρημαι λέγειν, ἵ tva τισὶν ὑμῶν ayes AGsogee fe 
have not chosen to say this in order to be hateful to some 
of you; Κῦρος φίλων ero δεῖσθαι, ὡς συνεργοὺς ἔχοι, Cy- 
rus thought friends necessary that he might have helpers ; 
Δέδοικα, μὴ ἐπιλαθώμεθα τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ, [ am afraid lest 
we should forget the way home, Φίλιππος ἐν φόβῳ ἦν, 
μὴ ἐκφύγοι τὰ πράγματα αὐτόν, Philip was in fear lest the 
affairs might escape him. 


Ill. THe Moops ΙΝ ConpirIoONAL SENTENCES. 


§ 534. Conditional or hypothetical sentences belong to 
the Correlative sentences (ὃ 519, 4). The Protasis states 
a condition under which something is to occur; the Apod- 
osis states that something happens under a certain con- 
dition. Both sentences together form a Hypothetical Pe- 
riod. 

§ 535. In the Protasis, εἰ (Hom. ai), ἐάν. (2. 6. » εἰ-ἄν), 
contracted to ἤν or ἄν (Hom. cb κε-ν), ZF, are enidlowed ; in 
the Apodosis the particle av is sometimes used to show that 
it is true only under certain conditions. 

In Greek there are four principal forms of the Hypo- 
thetical Period: 


§ 536. 1. in the Protasis εἰ with the Jndicative, in the 
Apodosis the /ndicative without av, or the Imperative. 


. 


294 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL ΒΕΝΤΕΝΟΕΒ. ὃ 537. 


This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed when 
the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be 
represented as one absolutely necessary, actual, without any 
opinion being expressed by the speaker as to the probabil- 
ity or improbability of the case: εἰ θεοὶ εἰσίν, ἔστι καὶ ἔργα 
θεῶν, if there are gods, there are also works of gods ; σοὶ 
εἴ πῃ ἄλλῃ δέδοκται, λέγε καὶ δίδασκε, ef you have any dif- 
Jerent opinion, speak and explain. 


Obs.—All tenses may be used in this form, consequently also His- 
torical tenses, If these latter occur, care must be taken not to 
confound this first principal form with the second: ἐξῆν σοι 
ἀπιέναι ἐκ τῆς πόλεως; εἰ μὴ ἤρεσκόν σοι οἱ νόμοι, you were free to 
leave the city if its laws did not please you (in the present: ἔξεστι 
—ei μὴ ἀρέσκουσι) ; εἴ τι τῶν δεόντων ἐπράχθη, τὸν καιρόν, οὐκ ἐμέ 
φησιν αἴτιον. γεγενῆσθαι, if any thing right was done, he says that the 
occasion, not I, was the cause. A sure sign of the second principal 
form is the particle ἄν in the apodosis. 


ὃ 537. 2.in the Protasis, εἰ with the Indicative of an H/is- 
torical tense; in the Apodosis, ἄν with the Indicative of 
an [Historical tense. 

This form of the Hypothetical Period is applied when 
the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis 15. 10 be 
represented indeed as one. quzte necessary, but at the same 
time neither of them as real. ‘The Indicative in such con- 
ditional sentences is called the Hypothetical Indicative, 
which, therefore, always denotes the opposite to reality 
(compare § 515). 

In such Conditional Sentences, a sentence contradictory 
of the Protasis may always be supplied in thought. 

Hence the Protasis may,have the following forms: 


ὃ 538. α) The Zmperfect is used when a condition is 
stated as not existing at present : εἰ τὸν Φίλιππον τὰ δίκαια 
πράττοντα ἑώρων, σφόδρα ἂν θαυμαστὸν ἡγούμην αὐτόν, of 
I saw (were to see) Philip acting justly,I should deem 
him very admirable. Here we may oppose to the Protasis 
the thought viv δὲ οὐχ ὁρῶ τὰ δίκαια πράττοντα, but now 


ἃ 641. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 295 


7 see him not act justly. The verb of this contradiction — 
to be supplied is in the Present. 

To this form corresponds in Latin the Imperfect Sub- 
junctive: δὲ viderem, putarem. 


§ 539. b) The Aorist Indicative is used when a condi- 
tion is stated which did noé¢ take place in the past: ἀπέ- 
θανον ἄν, εἰ μὴ ἡ τῶν τριάκοντα ἀρχὴ κατελύθη, 7 should 
have died if the government. of the thirty had not been 
overthrown. 

Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought κατ 
ελύθη δέ, but it was overthrown. The verb of in contra- 
diction to be supplied is in the Aorist. 

To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub- 
junctive: pertissem, nist dominatio eversa esset. 


§ 540. 6) The Pluperfect is used when a non-completed 
condition is stated: εἰ τοῦτο ὡμολόγητο ἡμῖν; ῥᾳδίως ἂν 
διεμαχόμεθα, if in this we had been agreed, we should eas- 
ily carry the contest through. 

Here we may oppose to the Protasis the hare ἀλλ᾽ 
οὐχ ὡμολόγηται, but we have not been agreed. The verb 
of this contradiction to be supplied is in the Perfect. 

To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub- 
junctive: sz inter nos convenisset. 


§ 541. The Apodosis to a Hypothetical Protasis of this 
kind may have either the Lmperfect or the Aorist Indica- 
tive, or the Pluperfect with ἄν [Hom. κέ-ν], and that quite 
independently as to which of the three tenses occurs in 
the Protasis. In this case, also, the Imperfect corresponds 
to the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive; the Aorist and Plu- 
perfect, to the Latin Pluperfect Subjunctive: εἰ τότε ἐβο- 
_ nOhoapev, οὐκ ἂν ἠνώχλει viv ὁ Φίλιππος, if we then had 
rendered help, Philip would not now be troublesome; εἰ 
αὐτάρκη τὰ ψηφίσματα ἦν, Φίλιππος πάλαι ἂν ἐδεδώκει δίκην, 
si plebiscita per se sufficerent, Way cies dudum panam 
dedisset. 


296 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. ἃ 542. 


§ 542. Obs, 1.—The particle ἄν is'sometimes omitted in the apodo- 
sis: ἠσχυνόμην, εἰ ὑπὸ πολεμίου γε ὄντος ἐξηπατήθην, I should be ashamed 
if I had been deceived by an enemy. 


§ 548. Obs. 2.—The Imperfect sometimes refers to a past time when 
the continuance of an action is to be made particularly emphatic : 
εἰ τοῦτ᾽ ἐποίει (NOt ἐποίησεν) ἕκαστος, ἐνίκων ἄν, if each had been acting 
so, they would be victorious, On the other hand, the Aorist is sometimes 
used referring to present time, when the ‘rapid commencement of an 
action is to be indicated: εἴ τίς σε ἤρετο, ri ἂν ἀπεκρίνω (NOt ἀπεκρίνου) ; 
if any one asked you, what answer would you give ? 


§ 544. Obs, 3.—A Hypothetical Apodosis may stand alone, the Prot- 
asis being supplied in thought or deduced from the context: ἐβου- 
λόμην ἄν, I should like (ci ἐδυνάμην, if I could, dared); dv ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς 
πάλαι ἂν ἀπολώλειτε, you would long since have ater through your- 
selves (ἢ. ¢., if left to yourselves). 


§ 545. 3. in the Protasis, ἐάν (ἤν, av, Hom. εἴ δὰ with 
the Subjunctive ; in the Apodosis, the Indicative of a 
Principal tense or the Imperative. 

This form of the Hypothetical Period is used to ex- 
press or prescribe something in regard to a case that 15 
to be taken for granted and expected. It is admissible 
only in connection with present and future tume (ὃ 521), 
and is met with chiefly in maxims or proverbs: δεῖ τὰ βέλ- 
τιστα ἀντὶ τῶν ἡδέων, ἂν μὴ συναμφότερα ἐξῇ, λαμβάνειν, 
you must choose what os best rather than what ἐδ agree- 
able, when both together are not allowed ; ἂν τὰ παρεληλυ- 
θότα μνημονεύῃς, ἄμεινον περὶ τῶν μελλόντων βουλεύσει, ἐ7 
you remember the past, you will judge better about the 
Suture. 


Obs. 1.—The Aorist Subjunctive in such conditional sentences often 
comes very near to the Latin Future Perfect: νέος ἂν πονήσῳς, 
γῆρας ἕξεις εὐθαλές, st juvenis laboraveris, senectutem habebis ἧς sa 
dam. 


Obs. 2.—We find εἰ with the Subjunctive in Homer, and occasion- 
ally also in Attic writers, in the same sense as ἐάν, εἰ ἄν, @nd εἴ 
κε-ν : Soph. ἄνδρα, cei τις ἢ σοφός, τὸ μανθάνειν πόλλ᾽, αἰσχρὸν οὐ- 
δέν, for a man, even if he is wise, to learn much, is no disgrace. 


Obs. 3.—The Subjunctive in Conditional sentences is akin to the 


§ 548. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 297 


Subjunctive of Challengmg (§ 509). The speaker thereby puts 
or demands an assertion, to which, for the present, he requires 
the hearer’s assent: τοῦτο ἐὰν σκοπῆτε, εὑρήσετε, ὅτι πάντων ἄριστα 
ἔχει, f you consider this you will find that it is the best of all ; 
which is almost identical with the challenge: consider this, etc. 
[compare Lat. Naturam expellas furea, tamen usque recurret|. In 
a similar way the Imperative sometimes takes the place of a 
Hypothetical Protasis: Poet. πλούτει re γὰρ κατ᾽ οἶκον, εἰ βούλει, 
μέγα καὶ ζῆ. τύραννον σχῆμ᾽ ἔχων, ἐὰν δ᾽ ἀπῇ τούτων τὸ χαίρειν, 
τἄλλ᾽ ἐγὼ καπνοῦ σκιᾶς οὐκ ἂν πριαίμην, for be rich, if you will, at 
home, and live in the splendor of a great ruler ; but if joy be wanting 
to it, I would not givé the shadow of smoke for the rest. (Compare 
§ 549.) 


§ 546. 4. in the Protasis, εἰ with the Optative ; in the 
Apodosis, ἄν (κέ-ν) with the Optative. 

This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed in- 
tentionally to represent what is said as quite uncertain, as 
merely possible, as a merely conceived case: εἴ τις κεκτη- 
μένος εἴη πλοῦτον, χρῷτο δὲ αὐτῷ μή, ἄρ᾽ ἂν εὐδαιμονοΐ ; 
should any one possess wealth and not make use of δέ 
(suppose any one possessed), would he be happy? Com- 
" pare §§ 516, 517, Obs. 2. The Present or Perfect Sub- 
junctive in Latin corresponds to this form: δὺ possideat 
(or possederit), num beatus sit ? 

Obs.—In Homer the Protasis of such a period also sometimes has 
κέ-ν OF ἄν: εἰ τούτω κε λάβοιμεν, ἀροίμεθά Kev κλέος ἐσθλόν, if We 
should get these two, we should get glorious fame. The Attic writers 
very rarely use ἄν in the Protasis. 

ἃ 547. Since εἰ with the Optative intimates that a thing 
is merely possible, it expresses in reference to the past. 
what possibly might have been, 2. 6., a repeated case (com- 
pare § 494, Obs. 1); ; the Apodosis chan usually has the In- 
dicative: εἴ που ἐξελαύνοι ᾿Αστυάγης, ἐφ᾽ ἵππου χρυσοχαλίνου 
περιῆγε τὸν Κῦρον, tf ever Astyages rode out (might ride 
out), he took Cyrus with him on ὦ horse with a golden 
bridle. - 

§ 548. εἰ with 
the place, accord 


e Optative in the oratio obliqua takes 
to ὃ 523, of εἰ with the Ind. (1), or 
N 2 


298 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. ἃ 549, 


ἐάν with the Subjunctive (3), when a Hypothetical sen- 
tence depends. on a LZtstorical tense: ἤδει Κῦρος, ὅτι εἴ τι 
μάχης ποτὲ δεήσοι, ἐκ τῶν φίλων αὐτῷ παραστάτας ληπτέον 
εἴη, Cyrus knew that, if ever any battle should be necessary, 
he would have to take his supporters from his own friends. 
In direct language, Cyrus would say, ἤν wore δεήσῃ or εἴ 
ποτε δεήσει----᾿᾿ληπτέον ἐστί. If, in its relation to the time of 
the governing verb, the condition lies in the Future, the 
Future Optative is used. We seldom, in this case, find é ἐάν 
with the Subjunctive. : 


The following general remarks also are to be observed 
in regard to Conditional sentences. 


§ 549. 1. The two members of a Hypothetical Period are 
not so dependent on each other as that the one necessarily 
requires a special form in the other. A Protasis of one 
form may, on the contrary, be joined with the Apodosis of 
another form. It occurs very frequently that a Protasis is 
in the first or third form, and the Apodosis in the fourth, 
in order to represent the Assertion which it contains: as 
merely possible: εἰ τοῦτο λέγεις, ἁμαρτάνοις av, if you mean 
this, you would be in error, ἐὰν ἐθελήσητε πράττειν ἀξίως 
ὑμῶν αὐτῶν, ἴσως ἂν μέγα τι κτήσαισθε ἀγαθόν, tf you should 
be disposed to act in a manner worthy of yourselves, you 
would perhaps gain great good. The connection of a 
Protasis of the second form with an Apodosis of the fourth 
is rare: Hom. καί νύ κεν ἔνθ᾽ ἀπόλοιτο ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Ai- 
νείας, εἰ μὴ ἄρ᾽ ὀξὺ νόησε Διὸς θυγάτηρ ᾿Αφροδίτη, and now 
assuredly Aineas, ruler of men, would there have perished, 
if Leus's daughter Aphrodite had not kept a sharp look- 


out. 


ὃ 550, 2. A Hypothetical Period may partly or entirely be inserted 
in another sentence. The most peculiar-in this'respect are sentences 
expressing a purpose, when connected with Conditional sentences: 
εἰ γὰρ ὥφελον oioire εἶναι ot πολλοὶ τὰ μέγιστα κακὰ ἐξεργάζεσθαι, ἵνα οἵοίτε 
ἧσαν αὖ καὶ ἀγαθὰ τὰ μέγιστα, I would that t any were capable. of 
doing (to a man) the greatest evil, in order th ey might also, on the 


§ 552. MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 299 


other hand, be capable of (effecting) the greatest good (instead of: for if 
they were capable, they would also be capable). The Hypothetical 
Indicative here denotes the impracticable purpose (δὲ 515, 537). 
On the Hypothetical Participle, §§ 583,595. On the Hypothetical 
Infinitive, § 575, etc. 


Mixed examples : 

Ei ὑπὸ φίλων ἐθέλεις ἀγαπᾶσθαι, τοὺς φίλους εὐεργετητέον, 
af you wish to be loved by your Srrends, you must benefit 
your friends ; ἡ Εἰ τὸ ἔχειν οὕτως ὥσπερ τὸ λαμβάνειν ἡδὺ 
ἦν, πολὺ ἃ αν διέφερον εὐδαιμονίᾳ οἱ πλούσιοι τῶν πενήτων, 
if having were as sweet as getting, the rich would be 
greatly distinguished above the poor in blessedness ; Poet. 
Ei πᾶσι ταὐτὸ καλὸν ἔφυ σοφόν θ᾽ ἅμα, οὐκ ἦν ἂν ἀμφίλεκτος 
ἀνθρώποις ἔρις, if the same things were ἐδ all beautiful 
and wise, people would have no bitter disputes; Πλάτων 
πρός τινα τῶν παίδων, μεμαστίγωσο av, ἔφη, εἰ μὴ ὠργιζόμην, 
Plato said to one of his servants, yor would have been 
flogged if I were not angry; Ἐὰν μέν τι ὑμῖν δοκῶ ἀληθὲς 
λέγειν, ξυνομολογήσατε, 7f you think I utter any truth, 
agree with me; Ei πόλις ἀνδρῶν ἀγαθῶν γένοιτο, περιμά- 
XnTov av εἴη TO μὴ ἄρχειν, ὥςπερ νυνὶ τὸ ἄρχειν, if there 
were a state (consisting) of good men, it would be an object 

wf contention to avoid ruling (how one might not rule), 
as now to rule; Ἦν τῶν στρατιωτῶν δόγμα, εἴ τις, ὁπότε 
ἡ στρατιὰ ἐξίοι, ἰδίᾳ ληίζοιτο, δημόσια εἶναι τὰ ληφθέντα, τέ 
was a decision of the soldiers, if, when the army went out, 
any one took booty by himself, what he took was common” 
property (direct ἐὰν ληϊόηκαιτ Sauder ἔστω). 


IV. THe Moops 1n RELATIVE SENTENCES. 


§ 551. Lelative sentences are those which are connected 
with others by means of Relative pronouns (§§ 213, 214, 
216) or Relative adverbs (§ 217). 


§ 552. In Relative sentences ali moods are possible in 
the same meanings as in independent or hypothetical sen- 


ἀρὰς 
900 MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. § 553. 


tences: οὐκ ἔχω 6 τὶ πρῶτον λάβω, Lhave (know) not what 
. 7 shall take first (δ 511, compare ὃ 527); ὁρῶ σε διώκοντα 
ὧν μὴ τύχοις, 1 see you pursuing what, 1 pray, you may 
not attain (ὃ 514); ὑμεῖς ἐστε wap ὧν ἂν κάλλιστά τις 
τοῦτο μάθοι, you are they from whom any one might best 
learn this (ὃ 516); οὐκ ἤθελον λέγειν πρὸς ὑμᾶς τοιαῦτα 
οἵ ἂν ὑμῖν ἥδιστ᾽ ἦν ἀκούειν, 1 did not wish to say to you 
such things as might be pleasantest to you to hear. Com- 
pare § 544, 5 


Obs.—Sometimes, especially in the Poets, Relative sentences have 
the-Optative without ἄν in an indefinite assertion, very much 
like the potential Optative with ἄν : ὃν πόλις στήσειε, τοῦδε χρὴ 
κλύειν, whom the state may appoint, him we must listen to (compare 
§ 517, Obs. 2). 


§ 553. On the Future Indicative in Relative sentences 
expressive of purpose, see ὃ 500. ὅπως, how, that, im or- 
der that, very frequently has the Future Tadicative (yet, 
according to ὃ 531, also the Subjunctive of other tenses) 
after verbs which denote looking after, caring for, striving, 
avoiding: σκόπει, ὅπως τὰ πράγματα σωθήσεται, see that 
the affairs (the state) ‘Shall be safe; δεῖ ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου 
ἅπαντα ἄνδρα τοῦτο παρασκευάζεσθαι, ¢ ὅπως ὡς σοφώτατος - 
ἔσται; Every One ought to take care in every way to (that 
he shall) become as wise as possible. — 


Obs.—brwe is often used in challenges and warnings in such a 
manner that the governing sentence has to be supplied : ὕπως 
“παρέσει εἰς τὴν ἑσπέραν, that you shall be here for the evening (more 
completely somewhat like: σκόπει ὅπως, see that you, etc.) ; ὅπως 
περὶ τοῦ πολέμου μηδὲν ἐρεῖς, that you shall say nothing about the 
war (supply something like : φυλάττου, take care). 


8 554. The particle é av (Hom. κέ-ν) is added to the Rel- 
ative when the Relative sentence expresses something mere- 
ly conceived, so that the assertion contained in the leading 
sentence is true only when what is asserted in the Relative 
sentence really occurs. Such a Relative is ealled a Hypo- 
thetical [velative. The Hypothetical Relative with ἄν in 


§ 555. MOODS ΙΝ RELATIVE SENTENCES. 301 


general is used only where the verb in the leading sentence 
is in a principal tense, and is then accompanied by the Sub- 
junetive. Such a Relative sentence may easily be changed 
to a Hypothetical senterice of the third form (ὃ 545); πᾶν 
& τι ἂν μέλλῃς ἐρεῖν πρότερον ἐπισκόπει TH γνώμῃ, Whatever 
you may be about to say (Ξεἐάν τι ἐρεῖν μέλλῃς), examine 
at first in your mind ; in which it is left quite undecided 
whether one wishes to say any thing; ἕπεσθε ὕπῃ av τις 
ἡγῆται, follow wherever any one may lead you (Ξε ἐάν τίς 
πῃ ἡγῆται), Where you must first wait to know whether any 
one leads. 


Obs. 1.—As the Relative is generalized by the addition of dy, it 
may often in English be translated by ever (Lat. cwnque): ὃς ἂν 
τούτων τι δρᾷ τεθνάτω, quicunque horum aliquid fecerit, perito ; 
λέγε bo’ ἂν Oédrye, say whatever you wish (compare ἐάν τι θέλῃς 
λέγε). . 

Obs. 2.—In the same sense the Poets use the Subjunctive with a 
Relative without ἄν (or κέ-ν) : τῶν δὲ πημονῶν μάλιστα λυποῦσ᾽ αἱ 
φανῶσ᾽ αὐθαίρετοι, the sufferings afflict most which appear self-caused 
(compare εἰ with the Subj., ὃ 545, Obs. 2). Homer has also the 
Fut. Ind. with κέ and the Relative (δ 500, Obs.). 


§ 555. If the verb in the leading sentence is an //is- 
torical tense or an Optative, the Relative without av with 
the Optative is used, quite in the same sense, as a sub- 
stitute for the Subjunctive (δῷ 522, 523). These Relative 
sentences take the place of those mentioned in § 554, in 
the same way as the fourth kind of Conditional sentences 
takes the place of the third (δ 548): ἐκέλευσεν αὐτοῖς ἕπε- 
σθαι, ὅποι τις ἡγοῖτο, he bade them follow wherever any 
ome might lead. Thus we read in Homer: ὅν δέ κ᾽ ἐγὼν 
ἀπάνευθε μάχης ἐθέλοντα νοήσω μιμνάζειν, οὔ οἱ ἔπειτα ἄρ- 
κιον ἐσσεῖται φυγέειν κύνας ἠδ᾽ οἰωνούς, but whomsoever ἢ 
may see inclined to remain away Srom the battle, to him 
there shall be no seourity of escaping dogs and birds (ὦ. ὁ6.. 
death), but: ὅντινα μὲν βασιλῆα καὶ ἔξοχον ἄνδρα κιχείη, 

τὸν δ᾽ ἀγανοῖς ἐπέεσσιν ἐρητύσασκε, but whatever (where a) 
king or prominent man he. might meet with, him he 


902 MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES. § 556. 


soothed with gentle words. Hom. ὡς ἀπόλοιτο καὶ ἄλλος 
& τις τοιαῦτά ye ῥέζοι, so may any other perish who shalt 
᾿ do such things (but ὃς ἂν ῥέζῃ---ἀπολέσθω). 


Obs. 1.—This Optative often implies repetition: ὅντινα" κιχείη, as 
often as he might Jind one (§ 547). 


Obs. 2.—The Subjunctive and the Relative with, ἄν occur ante ex- 
ceptionally after an Historical tense, and the. Optative with the 
Relative and ἄν, in the same case (compare § 546, Obs.). 


V. Tue Moops 1n TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 


§ 556. Temporal Sentences, 7. ¢., those which indicate 
time, are properly only a particular kind of Relative sen- 
tences, and follow them almost entirely in the use of the 
Moods. The particles of time employed in such sentences 
are: ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, we (when, after, as); ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἡνίκα, 
when, as; ἕως, ἔςτε, μέχρι-ς; till; πρίν, before; in Hom. 
ὄφρα, aS tong as, till ; ἦμος, when; and besides the Rela- 
tive expressions : ἀφ᾽ ov, ἐξ οὗ, since y ἐν @, whilst; ἄχρι 
ov, εἰς 6, until. 

In these sentences the /ndicatwe is used ἘΠ any 
thing actual is stated; the Optative may supply the place 
of the Indicative in indirect speech after an Historical tense 


(§ 522). . 


§ 557. When a Temporal sentence states something mere- 
ly conceived, occurring only conditionally, the. particle of 
time, like the Relative, has ἄν («é-v) joined to it (δ 554). 
This occurs usually only when the leading sentence: has 
a principal tense, and the Subjunctive must then follow. 
By combination with ἄν are formed the Hypothetical par- 
ticles of time: ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπεάν or ἐπήν, ἐπειδάν : ἐπει- 
δὰν πάντα ἀκούσητε, κρίνατε, when 4 ye have heard all, judge; 
ἕως ἂν σώζηται τὸ σκάφος, τότε χρὴ καὶ ναύτην καὶ κυβερνή- 
την καὶ πάντ᾽ ἄνδρα προθύμους εἶναι, as long as the vessel ἐδ 
safe, the saclor, the pilot, and every one ought to be, purus: 


Obs.—Here also ἄν is sometimes wanting (ὃ 554, Obs. 2). 


§ 558. MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 303 "ἢ 


§ 558. If the leading verb is in ‘an Historical tense, the 
particle of time with the Optative without av occurs in the 
same sense: ἔλεγεν ὅτι, ἐπειδὴ πάντα ἀκούσειαν, κρίνειαν. 


Obs. 1.—Here, too, the Optative often implies repetition (compare 
§ 554, Obs., and ὃ 547), so that ore, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, with the Optative, 
may be translated by “as often as,” « whenever : :” ὁπότε οἱ “EX- 


Anvec τοῖς πολεμίοις ἐπίοιεν, ῥᾳδίως ἀπέφευγον, as often as the Hel- 
lenes went up to the enemy, the latter readily fled. Ψ 


Obs. 2.—Here, too, exceptionally, ἄν and the Subjunctive sometimes 
occur after an Historical tense (§ 555, Obs. 2). 
On πρίν with the Infinitive, ὃ 565. 


Mixed Kxamples of Relative and Temporat Sentences. 

Ὑμεϊΐς πάντα λογισάμενοι ταῦτα χειροτονεῖθ᾽, ὅ τι Gn ὑμῖν 
δοκῇ μάλιστα συμφέρειν τῇ πόλει, after having weighed alt 
this, vote for what you chink will most benefit the state ; 
Oi τῶν βαρβάρων ἱππεῖς, ᾧτινι ἐντυγχάνοιεν Ἕλληνι, πάντας 
ἔκτεινον, the cavalry of the barbarians, whatever Greek they 
met, killed them all; Μέχρις av ἐγὼ ἥκω, at σπονδαὶ μενόν- 
των, tell I come, let the treaty remain ; Poet. Mirror’ ἐπαι- 
νήσῃς, πρὶν ἂν adic ἄνδρα σαφηνῶς, ὀργὴν καὶ ῥυθμὸν καὶ 
τρόπον ὅστις ἂν ἢ, never praise a man before you clearly 
know his temper, and bearing, and character ; “Ἐπειδή τι 
ἐμφάγοιεν, ἀνίσταντο καὶ ἐπορεύοντο, after having eaten 
something, they rose and proceeded ; Ὃ “Σωκράτης τοὺς 
συνόντας ἐποίει, οὐ μόνον Ordre ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὁρῷντο, 
ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν ἀδίκων καὶ αἰσχρῶγ, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅπότε ἐν ἐρημίᾳ 
εἶεν, Socrates caused his disciples to abstain from what 
was unjust and shameful, not only when they were seen oy 
men, but also when they were in solitude. 


904 THE INFINITIVE. ~~ § 559. 


. 


Cuar. XXII.—Tue INFInitIive. 
A) The use of the Infinitive generally. 


§ 559. 1. The Infinitive is a verbal noun (§ 225, 5) which, 
as such, has certain properties in common with a verb, oth- 
ers with a noun. 


With a nown the Infinitive agrees 
@) in expressing the action of a verb in general, like the 
nomina actiones (ἢ 342): ποιεῖν, πράττειν, domg ; compare 

ποίησις, πρᾶξις. 

b) in the fact that it may have the article like nouns: τὸ 
ποιεῖν, τὸ πράττειν, the doing ; compare ἡ ποίησις, ἡ πρᾶξις. 
With the verb, on the other hand, the Infinitive agrees 

a) in its power of denoting different times: ποιεῖν, ποι- 
joa, πεποιηκέναι, and of being formed from the Active, the 
Middle, and the Passive: ποιῆσαι. ποιήσασθαι, ποιηθῆναι. 

b) in being occasionally joined with ἄν, and thereby shar- 

ing the functions of mood (8 575, etc.). | 

6) in governing the same case as the verb to which it 
belongs: ποιεῖν τὰ δέοντα, doing your duty; χρῆσθαι τοῖς 
ὅπλοις, making use of arms. 

d)in being qualified, like the finite vgrb, by adverbs, 

never by adjectives : καλῶς πράττειν, doing nobly, but καλὴ 
πρᾶξις, ὦ noble action. 
2. ΤΠ6 Infinitive is used very extensively ἴῃ Greek. 
Very often, besides the more definite mode of expression, 
by means of a Conjunction with a jindte verb, the less def- 
inite, by means of the Infinitive, is adniaaiies 


§ 560. The Infinitive serves to complete and ave dif- 
ferent sorts of verbs, viz. 


1. those which express ‘the occasion, capability, modality 
of an action: δύνανται ἀπελθεῖν, they can go away; μεῖζόν 


ὃ 562. THE INFINITIVE. 305 


τι ἔχει εἰπεῖν, he has something greater to say (can say); 
Poet. οὔτοι συνέχθειν ἀλλὰ συμφιλεῖν ἔφυν, L am born not 
to join wr hating but in loving; ἄρχομαι λέγειν, 7 begin 
to speak ; ἐπιτρέπω͵ σοι ποιεῖν ὃ τι ἂν βούλῃ, L leave you to 
do whatever you wish ; 

2. such verbs as denote appearance, perception, opinién: 
ἜΝ ἁμαρτεῖν, you scem to have erred ; 


3. such verbs as denote striving after something, impel- 
ling toward, or frightening, deterring, preventing some- 
thing : μὴ σπεῦδε πατεῖν, do not hasten to be rich ; Hom. 
icfdenl ps μυθήσασθαι, you bid me to. speak; πάντες ai- 
rovvra τοὺς θεοὺς τὰ φαῦλα ἀποτρέπειν, omnes homies 
precantur deos, ut mala avertant ; φοβοῦμαι διελέγχειν σε, 
Lam afraid of refuting you; ἔλεγόν σοι μὴ γαμεῖν, diate 
tibi, ne wxorem duceres ; τίς αὐτὸν κωλύσει δεῦρο βαδίζειν ; 
quis eum impediet, quominus huc veniat? ἀνεβάλλετό μοι 
διαλεχθῆναι, he put off conversing with me. 


§ 561. Even the purpose of an action may be expressed 
by the mere Infinitive, as in English by the Infinitive with 
to or in order to: Ξενοφῶν τὸ ἥμισυ τοῦ στρατεύματος 
κατέλιπε φυλάττειν τὸ στρατόπεδον, “Ζεπορήοη left half the 
army behind to guard the.camp ; παρέχω ἐμαυτὸν τῷ ἰατρῷ 
τέμνειν καὶ καίειν, 7 give myself up to the physician to cut 
and burn (me); πιεῖν διδόναι. τινί, to give any one (some- 
thing) to drink. 


Obs.—Not only with verbs of this kind, but also with those men- 
tioned in § 560, this Infinitive has a much wider application in 
Homer: ἀριστεύεσκε μάχεσθαι, he used to be the first in fighting ; εἰσὶ 
καὶ οἵδε τάδ᾽ εἰπέμεν, these too, then, are (able) to say this; βῆ ἰέναι, 
he started to go; ξυνέηκε μάχεσθαι, he urged (them) to fight. 


§ 562. The Infinitive serves to complete or qualify ad- 
jectives of different kinds, partly in the sense of the En- 
glish Infinitive with fo, partly corresponding to the Latin 
supine in w: χαλεπὸν εὑρεῖν, difficult to find [dificile in- 
ventu|; οἰκία ἡδίστη ἐνδιαιτᾶσθαι, ὦ house very pleasant to 


306 3 THE INFINITIVE. § 563. 


live in; ἄξιός ἐστι πληγὰς λαβεῖν, he deserves to get blows ; 
ὀξύτατοί ἐστε γνῶναι τὰ ῥηθέντα, you are very. keen in per- 
ceiving what is said; δεινὸς λέγειν, powerful in speak- 
ing; ὃ χρόνος βραχὺς ἀξίως διηγήσασθαι τὰ πραχθέντα, 
the time is short for worthily narrating what has hap- 
pened. 

0ds.—In Homer such Infinitives are particularly frequent : μέγα καὶ 

ἐσσομένοισι πυθέσθαι, great also Sor posterity to learn ; θείειν ἀνέμοι- 
σιν ὅμοιοι, like the winds in running ; so with some substantives : 
θαῦμα ἰδέσθαι, a wonder to see. 

On οἷος, oidcre, and 3 ὅσος, with the Inf., ὃ 601. 

§ 563. The Infinitive, as in English and Latin, is used 
as the Subject of a sentence to which the predicate is a 
neuter adjective, a substantive, or an intransitive verb: 
πᾶσιν ἁδεῖν χαλεπόν, to please all is difficult; κίνδυνός 
ἐστιν ἡττᾶσθαι, there 1s danger of being worsted ; σὸν ἔργον 
λέγειν, speaking ts your business. 

§ 564. The Infinitive is used in a freer way, without depending on 
a particular word, with and without the particle we, in several phrases 
almost like a free Accusative (δ 404): ὡς εἰπεῖν, 80 to speak ; ἐμοὶ do- 
κεῖν͵ a8 seems to me; ὀλίγου δεῖν, almost ; τὸ νῦν εἶναι, for the present ; 


κατὰ τοῦτο εἶναι, in this respect. 
On ἑκὼν εἶναι, § 570, Obs. 


§ 565. The Conjunctions ὥστε; so that ; πρίν, before, and 
its Homeric synonym πάρος; are joined with the Infinitive : 
Φιλομαθέστατος ἦν ὃ Κῦρος, ὥστε πάντα πόνον ἀνατλῆναι τοῦ 
ἐπαινεῖσθαι ἕνεκα, Cyrus was very fond of learning, so as to 
entlure any trouble for the sake of being praised ; πρὶν τὴν 
ἀρχὴν ὀρθῶς ὑποθέσθαι, μάταιον ἡγοῦμαι περὶ τῆς τελευτῆς 
ὁντινοῦν ποιεῖσθαι λόγον, before properly establishing the 
Joundation, I deem tt useless to make any words whatever 
about the end. 

Obs. 1.—These conjunctions may also be joined with the finite verb 
(compare ὃ 556); ὥστε with the indicative represents a sentence 
as an actual consequence more independent and by itself, and 
may nceortingly be often translated by therefore, hence: εἰς τὴν 


ὑστεραίαν οὐχ ἧκεν, ὥςθ᾽ οἱ “Ἕλληνες ἐφρόντιζον, he came not on the 
Sollowing day, therefore the Hellenes became anxious. 


§ 567. THE INFINITIVE. 307 


Obs. 2.—For πρίν we also find πρὲν ἤ, prius-quam; properly πρίν, 
when it means sooner than, is always to be regarded as an abbre- 
viation for πρὶν ἤ, πρίν originally answering entirely to the Latin 
prius. On the Infinitive after 7, than, see the following ὃ. 


On ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, on condition that, with the Infin., ὃ 601. 


n & 


§ 566. After a comparative, the Infinitive is preceded by ἢ ὥστε or 
# alone in the sense of than that: φοβοῦμαι μή τι μεῖζον ἢ ὥςτε φέρειν 
δύνασθαι κακὸν τῇ πόλει͵ συμβῇ, I fear lestetoo great an evil should befall 
the state for it to be able to bear (greater than that it should be able). 


On the Genitive of the Infinitive with the Article, which also is 
possible here, § 574, 3, Obs. 


B) Zhe case of the Sulject and Predicate with the 
Infinitive. 


§ 567. The Subject of the Infinitive is that word from 
which the action of the verb in the Infinitive proceeds. 
When the Subject is to be expressed with the Infinitive, it 
appears: . 


1. most generally, as in Latin, in the Accusative, which 
gives rise to the construction of the Accusative with the 
Infinitive: ἤγγειλαν τὸν Κῦρον νικῆσαι, nuntiabant Cy- 
rum vicisse. The use of the Accusative with the Infin- 
itive, like that of the Infinitive alone (ὃ 559, etc.), is more 
common in Greek than in Latin. Not only can the sub- 
stance of a statement or perception—which, however, may 
be also expressed in one. of the forms discussed, § 525, 
etc.—be given in this construction, but also the effect and 
consequence of an action. Hence the Accusative with 
the Infinitive also occurs after verbs of happening, and is 
admissible after verbs of commanding, demanding, forbid- 
ding : πάντες ὁμολογοῦσι τὴν ὁμόνοιαν ἡέγιστον ἀγαθὸν εἶ- 
ναι, all agree that concord is a ‘very great φοοαΐ συνέβη 
μηδένα τῶν στρατηγῶν παρεῖναι, it happened that none of 
the generals was present; ἔγραψα ἀποπλεῖν τὴν ταχίστην 
τοὺς πρέσβεις, proposur ut quam celerrime legate proficis- 
cerentur. 


308 3 THE INFINITIVE. ._ § 568. 


The Accusative with the Infinitive is properly dependent on the 
verb of the leading sentence (compare the English: I hear you 
sing, I bid you go), and is explained by the prslepti mentioned 
in ὃ 519, 5, Obs. 2. Instead of ἤγγειλαν bri ὁ Κῦρος ἐνίκησεν, we 
might have : ἤγγειλαν τὸν Κῦρον ore ἐνίκησεν ; and for ὅτι ἐνίκησεν, 
νικῆσαι, according to § 560, 2; thus we obtain ἤγγειλαν τὸν Κῦρον 
᾿γικῆσαι. If the governing verb i is intransitive or passive, the Ac- 
cusative is of a freer kind (ὃ 404): ἐλπίς ἐστι πάντα rae ἔχειν, 
there is hope that all is well. 

Obs. 1.—The impersonal verbs δεῖ and χρή, it is necessary, are ὁ joined 
with the Accusative and Infinitive like the Latin oportet: χρὴ 
τολμᾶν χαλεποῖσιν ἐν ἄλγεσι κείμενον ἄνδρα, the man that lies in 
painful sufferings ought to be courageous. 

Obs. 2.—As a continuation of an Accusative with the {iitattive, 
the same construction may be. employed in indirect speech in 
Relative sentences and after Conjunctions, denoting time and ᾿ 
circumstances: τοιαῦτ᾽ ἄττα σφᾶς ἔφη διαλεχθέντας ἰέναι" ἐπεὶ δὲ 
γενέσθαι ἐπὶ τῇ οἰκίᾳ τῇ ᾿Αγάθωνος, ἀνεῳγμένην καταλαμβάνειν τὴν 
θύραν, he said that after such conversation they went ; but that, when 
they reached Agathon’s house, they found the door open. ) 


§ 568. 2. A Predicate referring to such a Subject must 
necessarily be in the Accusative: τὸν ἄδικον καὶ πονηρὸν 
ἄνδρα φημὶ ἄθλιον εἶναι, 1 maintain that the unjust and 
bad man is miserable. 

Not unfrequently a Predicative expression requires an 
indefinite Subject (τινά) to be supplied: τὰ τοιαῦτα ἔξεστι 
(τινα) μετρήσαντα καὶ ἀριθμήσαντα εἰδέναι, one may know 
such things by measuring and counting. 


§ 569. 3. When the Subject of an Infinitive is the same 
as that of the leading sentence, it is usually not expressed 
at all: νομίζω νενικηκέναι, puto me vicisse, 7 think I have 
conquered , ἐλπίζεις τεύξεσθαι ὧν av δέῃ, YOU hope to obtain 
what you need; ὑπέσχετο παρέσεσθαι εἰς τὴν ἑσπέραν, Pro- 
misit se affuturum ad vesperam. 

Obs.—F or greater emphasis, especially when opposition to some- 
thing else is to be expressed, the subject may be added, and that 
either in the Accusative or Nominative: Herod. οἱ Αἰγύπτιοι ἐνό- 
ploy ἑωυτοὺς πρώτους γενέσθαι ἀνθρώπων, the Egyptians thought 
that they first of all men came into existence; εἰ οἴεσθε Χαλκιδέας 
ἢ Μεγαρέας τὴν "Ἑλλάδα σώσειν, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἀποδράσεσθαι τὰ πράγματα, 


δ. THE INFINITIVE. ~ 809 


οὐκ ὀρθῶς οἴεσθε, if you think the Chaleidians and Megarians will 
save Greece, but you escape from trouble, you are mistaken. 


§ 570. 4. Predicative qualifications referring to the Prin- 
cipal Subject are in the, Vominative : ὃ ᾿Αλέξανδρος ἔφα- 
σκεν εἶναι Διὸς υἱός, Alexander dicebat se esse Jovis filium ; 
ἐγὼ οὐκ ὁμολογήσω ἄκλητος ἥκειν, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὸ σοῦ κεκλημένος, 
7 will not acknowledge that I am come uninvited, but in- 
vited by you; οἱ δοκοῦντες σοφοὶ εἶναι, they who scem to be 
Wise. 


Obs.—From the Predicate, ἑκών, joining the freer Infinitive, εἶναι 
(δ 564), arises the combination ἑκὼν εἶναι : τοῦτο ἑκὼν εἶναι ob 
ποιήσω, this (if I am) to be of free will I will not. do. 


§ 571. 5. In many cases a personal instead of an @m- 
personal form of expression is used in Greek, the Subject 
of the Infinitive being made the Subject of the leading 
sentence; so, instead of the English “it was announced 
that Cyrus had conquered” (ἠγγέλθη τὸν Κῦρον νικῆσαι), 
we have, ὃ Κῦρος ἠγγέλθη νικῆσαι, Cyrus was announced 
to have conquered. This form of expression occurs not 
only—as in Latin with dicitur, videtur—with δοκεῖ, ἔοικε, 
it seems ; λέγεται [dicitur, traditur|; ἀγγέλλεται, it 78 an- 
nounced ; ὁμολογεῖται, it ts agreed, but also with συμβαί- 
vet, it happens, and with several adjectives with εἰμί, as: 
δίκαιος, Just ; ἐπιτήδειος, ἐπικαίριος, fitting ; ἐπίδοξος, prob- 
able; ἀναγκαῖος, necessary ; αὐτός μοι δοκῶ ἐνθάδε κατα- 
μενεῖν, ὁέ ppears to me that I myself shall remain here ; 
δίκαιος εἶ ἄγειν ἀνθρώπους, at is gust that you should lead 
men (you are justified 1 in leading men); ἐπίδοξοί εἰσι τὸ 
αὐτὸ πείσεσθαι, 2t ἐδ to be empected that they will suffer the 
same; Poet. πρέπων ἔφυς πρὸ τῶνδε φωνεῖν, ἠέ becomes you 
to speak in their presence. 

The personal construction is explained, like that of the 
Accusative with the Infinitive (δ 567), by prolepsis (δ 519, 
5, Obs.2). For ἠγγέλθη ὅτι ὃ Κῦρος ἐνίκησε there might 
be ἠγγέλθη ὁ Κῦρος ὅτι ἐνίκησε, and for this again ἠγγέλθη 


819 THE INFINITIVE. δ΄ 572. 


ὁ Κῦρος sp spay ; for ἐπίδοξόν ἐ ἐστιν ὅτι τὸ αὐτὸ πείσονται---- 
ἐπίδοξοί εἰσι ὕτι τὸ αὐτὸ πείσονται, and hence ἐπίδοξοί εἰσι 
τὸ αὐτὸ πείσεσθαι. 
Obs.—The Accusative construction, however, is almost every where 
applicable: λέγεται τὸν Κῦρον vuchoat, dicunt Cyrum vicisse. 


§ 572. 6. Predicative qualifications referring to a Gen- 
itive or Dative may be in these cases: ἦλθον ἐπί τινα 
τῶν δοκούντων σοφῶν εἶναι, 7 came to one of those who 
scem to be wise; ἔλεγον τοῖς δοκοῦσι σοφοῖς εἶναι, 7 said 
to those, etc.; Κύρου ἐδέοντο ὡς προθυμοτάτου γενέσθαι, 
they begged Cyrus to be as ready as possible; παντὶ ap- 
xovre προςήκει φρονίμῳ εἶναι, it becomes every ruler to be 
judicious. 

Still the Predicate is often in the Accusative #eupdéper αὐτοῖς φίλους 


εἶναι μᾶλλον ἢ πολεμίους, it is to their advantage rather to be friends 
than enenvies. 


C) The Infinitive with the Article. 


§ 573. The Substantive nature of the Infinitive is made 
more manifest by prefixing the Article. Yet the Infinitive 
with the Article must nevertheless have a noun in the case 
required by the verb-to which the Infinitive belongs: τὸ 
TAC ἡδονὰς φεύγειν, the shunning of pleasures ; ; the Infin- 
itive in this case also is qualified by adverbs : τὸ τες το ζῆν, 
ἐῤυνύηρ rightly. 

The rules given §§ 567-572 for the case of the Subject 
and Predicate are applicable also to the Infinitive with 
the Article. Thus the Accusative with the Infinitive is 
often preceded by the Article: τὸ προειδέναι τὸν θεὸν τὸ 
μέλλον καὶ τὸ προσημαίνειν ᾧ βούλεται, καὶ τοῦτο πάντες 
καὶ λέγουσι καὶ νομίζουσι, God’s foreknowing the future 
and pointing it out beforehand to whom he will, all assert 
and believe. 


§ 574. By having the Article prefixed the Infinitive be- 
comes declinable, and thus answers to the Latin Gerund. 


5.5... THE INFINITIVE. | 311 


1. Nominative : 
Poet. τὸ φρονεῖν εὐδαιμονίας πρῶτον ὑπάρχει, to be thought-. 
Sule as the first step to happiness ; τὸ ἁμαρτάνειν ἀνθρώπους 
ὄντας οὐδὲν θαυμαστόν, that those should commit errors who 
are human is nothing surprising. 


2. Accusative : 
αὐτὸ τὸ ἀποθνήσκειν οὐδεὶς φοβεῖται, dying itself no one 
dreads. Especially to be noticed is the Accusative with 
the Prepositions εἰς, κατά, in reference to; διά, on account 
of, because; πρός, ἐπί, besides: Κῦρος διὰ τὸ φιλομαθὴς 
(Nominative according to § 570) εἶναι πολλὰ τοὺς παρόντας 
ἀνηρώτα, Cyrus, through being eager for knowledge, asked 
those present about many things ; πρὸς τὸ μετρίων δεῖσθαι 
καλῶς πεπαίδευμαι, L have been well trained to require what 
as moderate. 
0bs.—This Accusative of the Infinitive with the Article has some- 
times a freer connection with a verb or adjective after the man- 
» ner of the freer Accusative (ὃ 404): ot Πελοποννήσιοι ἀνέλπιστοί 
εἰσι τὸ ἐς τὴν γῆν ἡμῶν écBadrE, the Peloponnesians have no hope in 
regard to invading our country. 
3. Genitwe: | 
ἐπιθυμία τοῦ πιεῖν, desiderium bibendi ; τὸ εὖ πράττειν παρὰ 
τὴν ἀξίαν ἀφορμὴ τοῦ κακῶς φρονεῖν τοῖς ἀνοήτοις γίγνεται, 
prosperity without merit is an occasion to fools of base 
~ sentiments ; ἐμοὶ οὐδὲν πρεσβύτερον τοῦ ὅτι βέλτιστον ἐμὲ 
γενέσθαι (ὃ 416), nothing is more important to me than 
my becoming as good as possible. Especially to be noticed 
is the Genitive with the prepositions ἐκ, from, πρό, be- 
fore; ἕνεκα, because, on account of; ὑπέρ, for, for the sake 
of, in order to; διά, by, through, ἄνευ, without; οἱ av- 
θρωποι πάντα ποιοῦσιν ὑπὲρ τοῦ μὴ δοῦναι δίκην, people do 
every thing in order not to suffer punishment. 
Obs.—Purpose is often expressed by the Genitive of the Infinitive 
even withcut a preposition: τοῦ μὴ διαφεύγειν τὸν λαγὼν ἐκ τῶν 
δικτύων σκοποὺς καθίσταμεν, we place scouts that the hare may not 


escape from the nets. (Compare the rare use of the Lat. Genitive 
of the Gerundive: arma cepit opprimunde libertatis.) 


. 


312 THE INFINITIVE. § 575. 


4. Dative. a 
The Dative is. especially frequent to express enstrumen- 
tality (§ 438); it is then, like the Latin Ablative of the 
Gerund, to be translated, by : Φίλιππος κεκράτηκε τῷ πρό- 


τερος (ὃ 570) πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους ἰέναι, Philip has gained — 


the victory by going first against the enemy |compare the 
Latin docendo discimus|, also with the prepositions ἐν, 
in; ἐπί, on, on condition that; πρός, besides, and others: 
πρὸς τῷ μηδὲν ἐκ τῆς πρεσβείας λαβεῖν τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους 
ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων ἐλυσάμην, besides gaining nothing from the 
embassy, I set free the captives at my own expense. 


D) The Infinitive with ἄν. 


§ 575. By the addition of ἄν the Infinitive acquires a 


potential or hypothetical meaning, and denotes therefore 
either that something only might happen, or that under 
certain ciroumstances something would happen or would, 
have happened. ere two cases are possible: ) 
1. the Infinitive with ἄν can be replaced by the Optative 
with av: μάλιστα οἶμαι av σοῦ πυθέσθαι (πυθοίμην av), L 


think I could learn ἐξ best from you ;. δοκεῖτέ μοι πολὺ 


βέλτιον ἃ ἂν περὶ TOU πολέμου βουλεύσασθαι (βέλτιον ἃ αν βου- 
λεύσαισθε), εἰ τὸν τόπον τῆς χώρας πρὸς ἣν τολεμεῖτε ἐν- 


θυμηθείητε, 1ξ seems to me you would much better settle - 


about the war, if you took into account the localities of 
the country against which you are making war. 


This Infinitive with dy therefore answers either to the Potential 


Optative (ὃ 516), or to the apodosis of a Hypothetical Period of | 


the fourth form (§ 546). 


ὃ 576. 2. The place of an Infinitive with ἄν can be sup- 
plied by the Hypothetical Indicative with dv: Κῦρος εἰ 


(Qr » Ἅ - ᾿ ‘ 
ἐβίωσεν, ἄριστος av δοκεῖ ἄρχων γενέσθαι (ἄριστος ἂν ἐγέ- 


veto), af Cyrus had lived, ἐξ seems he would have become 


one of the best of rulers; τοὺς ταῦτα ἀγνοοῦντας Σωκράτης 
ἀνδραποδώδεις av κεκλῆσθαι ἡγεῖτο (εἴ τινες ταῦτα ἠγνόουν, 


§ 578. THE PARTICIPLES. 318 


ἐκέκληντο ἂν ἀνδραποδώδεις), Socrates thought that, if any 
did not know this, they would be called slavish. 


This Infinitive with ἄν thus answers to the apodosis of a Hypo- 
thetical Period of the second form (§ 537, etc.). 


Obs.—The context must show into which of the two forms the 
Infinitive with ἄν is to be resolved. 


-E) The Infinitive instead of the Imperative, 

ὃ 577, belongs almost entirely to poetry; it is used for 
the second, and rarely for the third person. The Swyject 
and Predicate are-in the Vominatwe: Hom. θαρσῶν viv, 
Διόμηδες, ἐπὶ Τρώεσσι μάχεσθαι, courageously now, Dio- 
mede, fight against the Trojans; παῖδα δ᾽ ἐμοὶ λῦσαί τε 
φίλην τά τ᾽ ἄποινα δέχεσθαι, deliver up to me my dear child 
and accept the ransom. 


Cuap. X XIII.—TuHe_ PARTICcIPLEs. 


Preliminary Remark. 


A Participle, like the Infinitive (ὃ 559, 1), is a verbal- 
noun (ἃ 225,5). It has the same things 1 in common with 
the verb as the Infinitive, the same points also in common 
with the noun; but it is distinguished from the Infinitive 
inasmuch as the latter resembles a nomen actionis, whereas 
the Participle has the nature of an adjective. 


A) Their Attributive Use. 


§ 578. A Participle, corresponding to an adjective or Ὁ to 
a relative sentence, is joined to a substantive, to ascribe to 
it a permanent quality: πόλις εὐρείας ἀγυιὰς ἔχουσα, 7. é., 
Hom. εὐρυάγυια or ἣ εὐρείας ἀγυιὰς ἔχει, ὦ city having 
broad streets; ai καλούμεναι. Αἰόλου νῆσοι, the so-called 
islands of Avolus; ὃ παρὼν καιρός, the present opportu- 
nity (compare ὃ 361, 11). 


a 


8514. THE PARTICIPLES. 8 579. 


Obs.—Like an adjective, the Participle also becomes a substantive 
by having the article prefixed: οἱ παρόντες, those present (com- 
pare ὃ 379): ὁ τυχών, the first comer. Such participles may often 
be translated by substantives: ὁ δράσας, the doer; οἱ λέγοντες, the 
speakers ; τὸ συμφέρον, the advantage; τὰ δέοντα, the duty; πρὸς τὸ 
τελευταῖον (δ 361, 8) ἐκβὰν ἕκαστον τῶν πρὶν ὑπαρξάντων κρίνεται, 
every thing that happened before is judged of in accordance with tts 
Jinal result. 


On the peculiar use of the Fut. Part. with the Article, § 500. 


" B) Ther Appositive Use. 
§ 579. The Participle serves to ascribe to a substantive 
a merely transient quality or activity. In this case the 
Participle is a shorter and less definite mode of expression 
for what is otherwise expressed by subordinate clauses with 


conjunctions of the most different kinds (compare § 583, 


Obs.). 
A Participle used in this way is: 


§ 580. 1. Temporal, 

with the distinctions of time mentioned in Chap. XX. (esp. 
§ 496): προςέχετε τούτοις ἀναγιγνωσκομένοις τὸν νοῦν, Give 
attention to this while being read ; Hom. ὃς ἄρα φωνῆσας 
ἀπεβήσετο-Ξεἐπεὶ We ἐφώνησε, after having thus spoken he 
went awdy. Observe especially ἔχων and φέρων in descrip- 
tions, which may frequently be translated by the English 
with : τὰς ναῦς ἀπέστειλαν ἔχοντα ᾿Αλκίδαν, they sent away 
Alcidas with (having) the ships; χρώμενος, in a similar 
sense: πολλῇ τέχνῃ χρώμενος, with (using) much skill. 
So, also, ἀρχόμενος, at first ; τελευτῶν, at last ; διαλιπὼν 
χρόνον, after a time; εὖ ποιῶν, fortunately; καλῶς ποιῶν, 
justly. The Participle ὧν can not be omitted when being 
is to be ascribed to a substantive: ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ἔτι παῖς ὧν 
ἐθαυμάζετο, while yet a boy (Lat., merely puer) Alcibiades 
was admired (ὃ 428, Obs.). 


§ 581. 2. Causal and final, : 
where the Participle is to be resolved by since, by or by 


? 


} 


| 


§ 583. THE PARTICIPLES. ὁ 315 


the fact that, when referring to the present or past, and by 
that, in order that, when referring to the future: οὐκ ἔστιν - 
ἀδικοῦντα δύναμιν βεβαίαν κτήσασθαι, firm power vs not 
to be gained by acting unjustly ; τὸν ἀδικοῦντα παρὰ τοὺς 
δικαστὰς ἄγειν δεῖ δίκην δώσοντα, he who acts unjustly ought 
to be brought before the judges in order that he may suffer 
punishment. 


§ 582. 3. Concessive, 


a somewhat rarer use: 7d “ὕδωρ εὐωνότατον ἄριστον ὄν, water is the 
ae though it is the best’; ὑμεῖς ὑφορώμενοι τὰ πεπραγμένα καὶ 
δυσχεραίνοντες ἤγετε τὴν εἰρήνην ὅμως, though suspicious of what had 
been done, and indignant, you still maintained the peace. 


§,583. 4. Hypothetical, 

a very frequent use, where the Participle is to be resolved 
by 27, and corresponds to one of the forms of the Hypo- 
thetical Protaseis mentioned in ὃ 534, etc.: τοὺς φίλους 
εὐεργετοῦντες καὶ τοὺς ἐχθροὺς δυνήσεσθε κολάζειν, 27) you 
benefit your friends you will be able also to punish your 
enemies (ἐάν) ; also with the article: 6 μὴ δαρεὶς ἄνθρωπος 
ov παιδεύεται, ὦ person is not educated if he has not been 
beaten. Sucha Participle with μή may often be translated 
by without : οὐκ ἔστιν ἄρχειν μὴ διδόντα μισθόν, a man can 
not rule without giwing pay. 


Obs.—With the varied use of the Appositive Participles, it must 
not be overlooked that such a Participle of itself does not clear- 
ly express any of the meanings developed in §§ 580-583, but’ 
that we make use of the one or the other turn in translating 
‘only in order to express in a more precise way. what is simply 
suggested by the Participle. Hence there are many transitions — 
between these meanings, especially between the Temporal and 
Causal, but also between the Temporal and Hypothetical mean- 
ings, just as in Latin sentences introduced by quum: πάντα ταῦτα- 
συνιδόντας ἅπαντας (ὑμᾶς) δεῖ βοηθεῖν, it becomes every one of you, 
when you have considered all these things, to render help; νομίζω 
ἄμεινον᾽ ἂν ὑμᾶς περὶ ὧν νῦν ἐρῶ κρῖναι, μικρὰ. τῶν πρότερόν ποτε 
ῥηθέντων μνημονεύσαντας, I think you would better judge about what 
I am now going to say, when you remember a little what was said 
before. 


816 THE PARTICIPLES. § 584. 


C) The Participle with an Absolute Case. 


§ 584. The Participle with a noun or pronoun in the Absolute 
Genitive (§ 428) or Accusative serves to point out the circumstances 
mentioned in §§ 579-583. The noun or pronoun to which the Par- 
ticiple refers may be regarded as its subject, since from it proceeds 
the action expressed by thé Participle. ‘This construction, therefore, 
may be resolved by a separate clause, beginning with a conjunction, 
in which the word in the Genitive or Accusative must appear in the 
Nominative: τούτων ἀναγιγνωσκομένων τὸν νοῦν προςέχετε, attend while 
this is being read (compare ὃ 580). 5 

1. The Absolute Genitive (compare § 428), 
for which may be substituted clauses with temporal, causal, 
concessive, or hypothetical conjunctions: Περικλέους ἡγου- 
μένου πολλὰ καὶ καλὰ ἔργα ἀπεδείξαντο οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, as long 
as Pericles led them (Pericle duce), the Athenians pro- 
duced many and splendid works ; ναυμαχίας γενομένης 
τέτταρας τριήρεις λαμβάνει oaierne, navali pagna facta 
Gorgopas quattuor triremes capt ; ὅλης τῆς πόλεως ἐν 
Fane πολεμικοῖς κινδύνοις ἐ ἐπιτρεπομε ἔνης τῷ στρατηγῷ, μεγάλα 
τά τ᾽ ἀγαθὰ κατορθοῦντος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὰ κακὰ διαμαρτάνοντος 
εἰκὸς γενέσθαι, as the whole state in the dangers of war is 
committed to the care of the general, it is natural both that 
great good should happen when he is successful, and great 
evil when he fails. Poet. γένοιτ᾽ ἂν πᾶν θεοῦ τεχνωμένου, 
all may be done 1f a God contrives ut (εἰ τεχνῷτο). 

§ 585. The Absolute Genitive differs from the corresponding Latin 
construction of the Adlative Absolute in the following points: . 

a) The subject of the Participle is more frequently omitted in Greek 
when it is either easily understood from what precedes, or from the 
meaning of the verb, or when it remains indefinite (compare § 361, 3, 
Obs. 2): προϊόντων, as (they) went forward ; ὕοντος, when he (Zeus) rains ; 
ἐξαγγελθέντων, when it had been announced. 

6) On the necessity of the Participle of εἶναι---σοῦ παιδὸς ὄντος [Lat. 
te puero|, see δὲ 580, 482, Obs. An exception occurs in the case of the 
adjectives ἑκών and ἄκων, which very much resemble Participles: ἐμοῦ 
ἑκόντος, with my will; ἐμοῦ ἄκοντος, me invito- The Poets take other 
licenses, 


c) As the Greeks have two active Participles to express a past ac- 
tion, they use the Absolute Genitive of a Passive Participle less fre- 


‘ 


§ 587. THE PARTICIPLES. 317 


quently than the Romans do their Absolute Ablative: ὁ Κῦρος, τὸν 
Κροῖσον νικήσας, κατεστρέψατο τοὺς Λυδούς, Cyrus, Creso victo, Lydos sibi 
subjecit. 

d) The Absolute Genitive is employed even where the subject of 
the Participle is mentioned also in the leading sentence: ταῦτ᾽ εἰπόν- 
τος αὐτοῦ ἔδοξέ τι λέγειν τῷ ᾿Αστυάγει, after thus speaking he seemed to 
Astyages to say something (of importance). [Lat. ita locutus—visus est, | 


§ 586. 2. The Absolute Accusative 

is usual in the case of some impersonal verbs, especially 
δέον, it being a duty; ἐξόν, παρόν, it being allowed, fea- 
sible; προςῆκον, ἐξ being befitting; δόξαν, it having been 
decided ; οὐδεὶς ἐξὸν εἰρήνην ἄγειν πόλεμον αἱρήσεται, nO 
one, being allowed to be at peace, will choose war; πολ- 
λάκις ὑμῖν ἐξὸν πλεονεκτῆσαι οὐκ ἠθελήσατε, though tt was 
often easy for you to gain more, you were unwilling ; οἱ 
Συρακούσιοι κραυγῇ οὐκ ὀλίγῃ ἐχρῶντο, ἀδύνατον ὄν ἐν νυκτὶ 
ἄλλῳ τῳ σημῆναι, the Syracusans raised no small shout, it 
being impossible to make a signal during the ce by any 
thing else. 


D) Supplements to Participles. 


§ 587. For the sake of greater clearness, certain particles 
are added to Appositive Participles, as well as to Participles 
joined with an absolute case; they give more distinct 
prominence to the idea expressed by the Participle. Such 
Supplements to Participles are: 


ew 


1. ἅμα, at the same time, denoting contemporaneousness : οἱ Ἕλληνες 
ἐμάχοντο ἅμα πορευόμενοι, the Hellenes fought while marching. 


_ 2. μεταξύ, between, amidst, with pretty nearly the same meaning: 
ἐπέσχε pe λέγοντα μεταξύ, he checked me in the midst of my speech. 


3. αὐτίκα and εὐθύς, to express immediate succession: τῷ δεξιῷ κέρᾳ 
εὐθὺς ἀποβεβηκότι ἐπέκειντο, they pressed upon the right wing immediately 
after its landing. 

4. τότε, εἶτα (κᾷτα), ἔπειτα, οὕτως, are added to the principal verb to 
indicate that the action of the Participle was past before, and take 
up the substance of it with various accessory ideas: καταλιπὼν φρου- 
ρὰν οὕτως ἐπ᾽ οἴκου ἀνεχώρησεν, after having left a garrison, he thus went 


318 THE, PARTICIPLES. § 588. 


away home ; Poet. μὴ νῦν φυγόντες εἶθ᾽ ἁλῶμεν ὕστερον, lest though now 
escaping we should afterward be caught. | 

5. καίπερ (more rarely καί alone), with a Participle, to be translated 
_ though, renders prominent the concessive meaning: καίπερ οὕτω σοφὸς 
ὧν βελτίων ἂν γένοιο, though so wise, you might perhaps become better ; 
Homer often separates καί from wep: οἱ δὲ καὶ ἀχνύμενοί rep ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ 
ἡδὺ γέλασσαν, and though vexed they heartily laughed at him; ὕμως, in 
the same sense though or yet, is used with the principal verb: Herod. 
ὕστερον ἀπικόμενοι τῆς συμβολῆς ἱμείροντο ὅμως θεήσασθαι τοὺς Μήδους, 
though they did not come till after the engagement, yet they desired to see 
the Medes. 


6. ἅτε, with a Participle (like οἷον, οἷα δή), answers to the English 
in as far as, since, and brings into prominence its causal meaning : 
κατέδαρθε πάνυ πολὺ ἅτε μακρῶν τῶν νυκτῶν οὐσῶν, he slept a great while 
since the nights were long. [Compare Lat. guippe quum, quippe φιιΐ,] 

§ 588. 7. ὡς and ὥςπερ added to a Participle suggest 
that what is expressed in the participle is swhjective, 2. e., 
is the opinion, the conception, the view of the principal 
subject. Both particles are joined to the Appositive Par- 
ticiple as well as to a Participle connected with an abso- 
lute case, either the absolute Genitive or the absolute Ac- 
cusative. The latter case in this connection is far more 
extensively used than without those particles (ὃ 586). If 
the opinion expressed in the Participial construction is to 
be characterized at’ once as false, ὡς and ὥςπερ may be 
translated by as if; δεδίασι τὸν θάνατον we εὖ εἰδότες ὅτι 
μέγιστον τῶν κακῶν ἐστιν, they fear death as 17) they avell 
knew that it was the greatest of evils; but by én the be- 
lief that, since, in the feeling that, etc., if the correctness 
of the opinion is to be left undecided: ἡμεῖς πάντες ἐβλέπ- 
ομεν πρὸς αὐτὸν we αὐτίκα μάλα ἀκουσόμενοι θαυμασίους 
τινὰς λόγους, we all looked at him, expecting immediately 
to hear some wonderful statements; Poet. ἔξεστι φωνεῖν 
we ἐμοῦ μόνης πέλας, you may speak out since (in the con- 
viction that) 7 alone am near; λέγει we διδακτοῦ οὔσης τῆς 
ἀρετῆς, he speaks thinking that virtue ἐδ capable of being 
taught; ἀπεβλέψατε πρὸς ἀλλήλους ὡς αὐτὸς piv ἕκαστος 
οὐ ποιήσων τὸ δόξαν, τὸν δὲ πλησίον πράξοντα (absolute 


§ 590. | THE PARTICIPLES. 319 


Accusative), you looked at one another thinking that each 
one of you would not do what was decided upon, but that 
his neighbor would. 


E) The Predicatwe Participle. 


§ 589. The Participle, like the Infinitive (8 560), serves 
to complete a verb, by attributing to a word contained in 
the sentence something which is not a mere addition, but 
an essential part of the statement. The Supplementary or 
Predicative Participle may refer either 


1. to the suwlyject of the sentence (ὃ 361, 5, 7,8): παύεσθε 
ἀεὶ περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν βουλευόμενοι, cease always consulting 
about the same things; ἴσθι λυπηρὸς ὦν, know that you 
are troublesome, or 

2. to a dependent word in the sentence (compare § 361, 
10, and ὃ 403): ὃ πόλεμος ἔπαυσε τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἀεὶ περὶ ᾿ 
τῶν αὐτῶν βουλευομένους, the war caused the Athenians to 
cease from always consulting about the same things ; οἶδα 
αὐτὸν λυπηρὸν ὄντα, L know him to be troublesome. 

In English such Predicative Participles are mostly ex- 
pressed by the Infinitive with zo, or by sentences with that, 
sometimes also in other ways. In some cases, however, 
the English language also makes use of a Participle in a 
similar way: J feel myself affected by it, he found him 
armed (compare ὃ 361, 10, Obs.). 

The verbs which admit of a Supplementary Participle 
may be classified as follows: 


§ 590. 1. Verbs which express ὦ condition, 
as: Eyw,l am m ὦ condition; τυγχάνω, 7 chance to be 
(Poet. cupéw); λανθάνω, 7) escape notice; φαίνομαι, δηλόω, 
φανερός, δῆλός εἰμι, 1 am manifest ; ἔοικα, 7 seem; δια- 
τελέω, διάγω, 1 continue; ἀνέχομαι, καρτερέω, 7 hold out, 
endure; κάμνω, 7 grow weary; ἀπαγορεύω, 7] despair; as 
well as the verbs which denote the beginning, interrupt- . 
ing, or ending of a condition; ἄρχομαι, L begin; φθάνω, 


320 THE PARTICIPLES. § 591. 


LI am beforehand ; οἴχομαι, I depart,I[ am off’; ἐπι-, da- 
λείπω, 7 break off, I suspend; παύω, 7 make to cease (παύ- 
ouat, J cease). In translating we frequently change: the 
Participle into the principal verb, and render the principal 
Greek verb by an adverb. Examples: κηρύξας ἔχω (more 
emphatic than ἐκήρυξα, compare Latin nuntiatum habeo), 
L have announced; τίς ἔτυχε παραγενόμενος : who hap- 
pened to be present? διατελῶ εὔνοιαν ἔχων πᾶσιν ὑμῖν, 7 
continue cherishing a kindly feeling for you all ; μὴ καμῇς 
φίλον ἄνδρα εὐεργετῶν, don’t grow weary of benefiting a 
Sriend ; y ἄλλα μυρία ἐπιλείπω λέγων, L refrain Jrom say- 
ang innumerable other things; Hom. ᾧχετ᾽ ἀποπτάμενος, | 
he was gone flying away. 


Obs.—Even the verb εἰμί may be joined with a Participle: ἢ τοῦτο 
οὐκ ἔστι γιγνόμενον παρ᾽ ἡμῖν ; is this not happening (usual) among 

us? <A Participle is necessarily so used with εἰμί to complete 
certain verbal forms (compare §§ 287, 291), especially the Par- 
ticiple of the Perfect or Aorist with εἰμί instead of the Future 
Perfect: δεδωκὼς or δοὺς ἔσει = dederis, 


§ 591. 2. Verbs of percewing, 
as: dpaw, 7 sce (περιοράω, [ overlook, endure); ἀκούω, 7 
hear ; οἶδα, 7 know; μανθάνω, 7 learn; γιγνώσκω, 7 get to 
know ; αἰσθάνομαι, 7 perceive ; εὑρίσκω, 7 find ; μέμνημαι, 
I remember. In several of these the object is in the Gen- 
itive, according to ὃ 420. Examples: we εἶδον αὐτοὺς πε- 
λάζοντας, of λεηλατοῦντες εὐθὺς ἀφέντες τὰ χρήματα ἔφευγον, 
cum eos appropinquantes vidissent, predantes preda sta- 
tim relicta fugam capessiverunt ; ἤκουσά ποτε Σωκράτους 
περὶ φίλων διαλεγομένου, 7 once heard Socrates discoursing 
about friends | audive Socratem disputantem |; Χεῤῥόνη- 
σον κατέμαθε πόλεις Evdexa ἢ δώδεκα ἔχουσαν, he learned 
that the Chersonese had eleven or twelve cities; ἄνθρωποι 
καλοὶ κἀγαθοὶ ἐπειδὰν γνῶσιν ἀπιστούμενοι (compare ὃ 483, 
1), οὐ φιλοῦσι τοὺς ἀπιστοῦντας, when good men perceive 


that they are distrusted, they do not like ἐβόδα who distrust 
them. 


ὃ 385. THE PARTICIPLES. 321 


Obs.—With σύνοιδά μοι, I am conscious, the Participle may be con- 
nected with the Nominative of the Subject or the Dative (μοῦ : 
ἐμαυτῷ ovvydew οὐδὲν ἐπιστάμενος OY ἐπισταμένῳ, [ was conscious of 
knowing nothing. In the sense of “to be aware” it may also have 
the Accusative with the Participle. 

> 592. 3. Verbs of emotion, 

: χαίρω, ἥδομαι, τέρπομαι, T rejoice; ἀγαπάω, 7 am sat 
‘spied sy χαλεπῶς φέρω, egre fero; ἄχθομαι, [ am dissatis- 
jied ; ἀγανακτέω, 7 am vexed; αἰσχύνομαι, Lam ashamed ; 
μεταμέλομαι OY μεταμέλεϊ μοι, 7 repent. Examples: Hom. ὁ 
δὲ φρεσὶ τέρπετ᾽ ἀκούων, but he rejoiced in heart at hear- 
ing (it); μεταμέλει αὐτῷ ψευσαμένῳ, he repents having told 
aw lie. 

§ 593. 4. Verbs of pointing out and asserting, 

as: δείκνυμι, ἀποφαίνω, 7 show; ἐξελέγχω, [ prove, con- 
wit; ἀγγέλλω, 7 announce; δμολογέω, L assent. Exam- 
ples: Φίλιππος πάντα ἕνεκα ἑαυτοῦ ποιῶν ἐξελήλεγκται, it 
has been proved that Philip does every thing for his own 
sake; ἀποφαίνουσι τοὺς φεύγοντας πάλαι πονηροὺς ὄντας, 
they make manifest that the banished had long been base. 

§ 594. Obs.—The Infinitive, according to § 560, may be used as well 
as the Participle with many of the verbs enumerated in δὲ 590- 

593, but in a somewhat different sense: ἄρχομαι διδάσκων, I begin 
to be a teacher ; ἄρχομαι διδάσκειν, I begin to teach (my teaching) ; 


αἰσχύνομαι λέγων, 1 am ashamed though 1 say it; αἰσχύνομαι baie 
shame prevents me from saying. 


F) The Participle with av. 


§ 595. By the addition of the Particle ἄν the Participle, 
in every case like the Infinitive (δὲ 575 and 576), acquires 
the meaning of possibility or that of an Apodosis in a 
Hypothetical Sentence, and may therefore be resolved in 
two ways: 


1. by the Optative with av (§§ 516 and 546): 
ἐγώ εἰμι TOV ἡδέως piv av ἐλεγχθέντων, ἡδέως δ᾽ ἂν ἐλεγ- 
ἕάντων, 7 am one of those who would gladly be refuted 
(ot ἂν ἐλεγχθεῖεν), and would gladly refute (ot av, ἐλέγ- 
O 2 


922 | ‘HE PARTICIPLES. 6. 


Me Bes st ’ A , , - AXE 
Eeav); EVPLOKW TAUTYVY ἂν μόνην γενομένην των μὲ OVTWV 


κινδύνων ἀποτροπήν, J find this would be the only pre- 


vention of the coming dangers (ὅτι ἂν γένοιτο) ; ἴσμεν καὶ 
᾿ ὑμᾶς ἂν «ut ἄλλους, ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ δυνάμει ἡμῖν γενομένους, 
δρῶντας ἂν αὐτό, we know that you as well as others in 
the same position would do the same thing, ὃ. é., ὅτι εἰ 
γένοισθε δρῷτε av. 


2. By the hypothetical Indicative with ἄν (§ 536, οἴο.): 
Φίλιππος Ποτίδαιαν ἑλὼν καὶ δυνηθεὶς ἂν αὐτὸς ἔχειν, εἰ 
ἐβουλήθη, ᾿Ολυνθίοις ἀπέδωκεν, when Philip had taken Po- 
tidwa, and might have (ὅτε ἐδυνήθη av) kept vt himself, of 
he had wished, he gave it back to the Olynthians. 


G) The Verbal Adjectives. 


§ 596. Verbal Adjectives are, like Participles, verbal 
nouns of an adjective kind, but differ from participles by 
a usage much more restricted, and referring to no special 
time, which has been treated of generally in § 300: 

The Verbal Adjectives in -τέος, implying necessity, are 
worthy of notice. A double construction is here possible: 

1. The object of a necessary action becomes the swbvect, 
and the Verbal Adjective agrees with it: ὃ πατήρ σοι τιμη- 
τέος ἐστίν, pater tibi venerandus est ; ἡ πόλις τοῖς πολίταις 
ὠφελητέα, the state must be assisted by its citizens. In 
this construction the subject is emphatic. 


2. The Neutral or impersonal construction, where the 
necessity of the action is made specially prominent; the 
object of the action is in each instance in the case required 
by the verb: Swxréov τὴν ἀρετήν, we must pursue virtue ; 
εἰρήνην ἀκτέον ἐστίν, pax agenda est; ἁπτέον τοῦ πολέμου, 
you must try war ; βοηθητέον ἡμῖν ἐστι τοῖς πράγμασιν, We 
must help the state. 2 

The person who is to, or must do something, is in both 
cases in the Dative: in the second, according to the anal- 
ogy of δεῖ (δ 567, Obs. 1), sometimes in the Accusative: 


ΕΝ ee ae Tee eee 


§ 597. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 323 
οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ ἑκόντας ἀδικητέον, In NO way must you will- 
ingly do injustice. 
Obs. 1.—The Verbal Adjective sometimes has the meaning of a - 
Middle: πειστέον ἐστίν, we must obey (πείθομαι, not πείθω). 


Obs. 2.—In the Neuter construction we often find the Plural: zo- 
λεμητέα ἐστίν, we must fight- (compare ὃ 364). 


CHar. XXIV.—Some PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE 
CLAUSES. 


A) Attraction. 


§ 597.1. The Relative Pronoun in sae follows. the 
rule that it agrees in Gender and Number with its ante- 
cedent, that is, with the word to which it refersbut in Case 
with what follows ; that is, it accommodates itself to the 
sentence in which it stands: μέμνησθε τοῦ ὅρκου ὃν ὀμω- 
μόκατε, be mindful of the oath which you have sworn. 


2. An exception from this rule is the Attractzon, or the 
process by which the Relative is a¢tracted in Case also by 
the word to which it refers, so as to take its case: μέμνησθε 
τοῦ ὅρκου ov ὀμωμόκατε. . 

3. With Attraction’ another process is frequently com- 
bined, viz., shortening. This consists in the Article .or 
the Darionslainte Pronoun being left out, and the Rela- — 
tive, with the word to which it refers, being drawaytogether 
into a single clause: μέμνησθε οὗ ὀμωμόκατε ὅρκου, ᾿ 


4. If the word referred to by the Relative is a mere pro- 
noun, the Relative remains quite alone, but stands in the 
case which the Demonstrative would have had: μέμνησθε 
οὗ ὀμωμόκατε-- μέμνησθε τούτου ὃ ὀμωμόκατε, remember that 
which you have sworn; ἀμελῶ ὧν pe δεῖ πράττειν = ἀμελῶ 
τούτων ἅ με δεῖ πράττειν, 1 neglect what “ should do. 


324 PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES, § 598. 


§ 598. Attraction, however, can occur only under the 
following conditions : 


1. The Ltelative clause must be closely connected with 
the word to which it refers, must be an essential part of 
it. Attraction is inadmissible in a Relative clause, which 
only loosely adds a remark to a substantive, which might 
quite as well be wanting, or be annexed by means οἵ" καί 
and a demonstrative pronoun. 


2. The sentence must be such as would have the Rela- 
tive pronoun in the Accusative, but its antecedent in the 
Genitive or Dative : τίς ἡ ὠφέλεια τοῖς θεοῖς τυγχάνει οὖσα 
ἀπὸ τῶν δώρων ὧν παρ᾽ ὑμῶν λαμβάνουσιν, what advan- 
tage have the gods from the presents which they receive 
JSrom you? sichépsre ἀφ᾽ ὅσων ἕκαστος ἔχει, contribute 
Srom what each has (ἀπὸ τοσούτων baa); λέγεις οὐ σύμ- 
φωνα οἷς τὸ πρῶτον ἔλεγες, you do not say what harmon- 
izes with what you first said (τούτοις &)3 τῷ ἡγεμόνι πισ- 
τεύσομεν ᾧ ἂν Κῦρος δῷ, we shall trust the commander 
whom Cyrus gives (us) (τούτῳ ὅν). | 

Obs.—Attraction very seldom takes place with other cases: ὧν ἐν- 

τυγχάνω μάλιστα ἄγαμαι σέ, ἡ. €., τούτων οἷς, I admire you most of all 
I meet. 

§ 599. All clauses subordinate to a Relative Sentence, 
so far as they consist of words referring to the Relative, 
and are capable of inflexion, must likewise be modified in 
the Attraction: οἷς οὖσιν ὑμετέροις ἔχει, τούτοις πάντα τἄἀλ- 
λα ἀσφαλῷς κέκτηται, ὃ. 6.. ἃ ὄντα ὑμέτερα ἔχει; τούτοις, he 
keeps all the rest in safety by means of what he has of yours. 

§ 600. dfoc, and sometimes ὅσος and ἡλίκος, have quite a peculiar 
attraction ; viz., εἶναι is often omitted when it would stand with οἷος 
in the nominative, and the latter is put in the same case as its ante- 
cedent: οἵῳ ye ἐμοὶ παντάπασιν ἄπορον τοῦτο, 2. €., τοσούτῳ οἷος ἐγώ εἰμι, 
that is quite impossible to such a man as Iam. Sometimes the article 
is prefixed at the same time: τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν, to such as we. By the 
same ellipsis d¢ricody acquires the fixed meaning, whoever, 7. ¢., any 


whatever: οὐκ ἔστι δικαίου ἀνδρὸς βλάπτειν ὁντινοῦν ἀνθρώπων, it is not 
a just man’s nature to injure any person whatever (i. 6.) any one, who- 


8 603. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 325 


ever he may be). [Compare Lat. euicungue homini nocere.| So ὅςτις 
βούλει means the same as οὗτος ὃν βούλει, like quivis. 

§ 601. Other Relative expressions, all involving either 
Shortening or Attraction, are: 

av? ὧν, because, t. 6., ἀντὶ τούτων G, OY ἀντὶ τούτων ὅτι: 
σὺ εὖ ἐποίησας ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ἔπαθες, you did good because. you 
recewwed good (for that which you received). 

ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε (Herod. ἐπὶ τούτῳ, ἐπ᾽ wre), for the pur- 
pose of, on condition that, t. 6., ἐπὶ. τούτῳ ὥςτε, often with 
the Infinitive: of τριάκοντα ἠρέθησαν ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε συγγράψαι 
νόμους, the thirty were chosen for the purpose of drawing 
up laws. 

ἐξ ov, ἀφ᾽ ov, ex quo, since, ὁ. é., since the time that. On 
ἐν ᾧ, εἰς 6, ἄχρι ov, ὃ 556. 

οἷος, more complete τοιοῦτος οἷος, with the Infinitive, of 
the kind that, of the kind to, and otécre, with the Infinitive, 
able, possible ;-ov« ἢν ὥρα οἵα ἄρδειν τὸ πεδίον, tt Was not 
the season to water the field; οὐχ οἵοίτε ἦσαν βοηθῆσαι, 
they were not able to render help (compare ὃ 562). ὅσον, 
for τοσοῦτο ὅσον, enough to, with the Infinitive: ἔχομεν 
ὅσον ἀποζῆν, we have enough to live on. P 


§ 602. An znverted Attraction takes place when a noun 
or pronoun is put in the same case as the Relative which 
refers to it: τὴν οὐσίαν ἣν κατέλιπε τῷ υἱεῖ οὐ πλείονος ἀξία 
ἐστίν, the property which he left his son ἐ8 not worth more, 
instead of ἡ οὐσία ἣν ; Poet. τάςδε δ᾽ ἅςπερ εἰςορᾷς ἥκουσι 
πρὸς σέ, those whom you see (the girls) have come to you 
(aide ac). So οὐδείς, μηδείς, become one word, as it were, 
with ὅςτις οὐ : οὐδενὶ ὅτῳ οὐκ ἀποκρίνεται, properly οὐδείς 
ἐστιν ὅτῳ οὐκ, nobody whom he does not answer. Observe 
also such expressions as: θαυμαστὸς ὅσος, 2. 6., θαυμαστόν 
ἐστιν ὅσος, wonderfully great; θαυμαστῶς we, 2. 6., θαυ- 
μαστόν ἐστιν we, it is wonderful how. Compare ὃ 519, 5, 
Obs. 2. 


§ 603. A singular anomaly 15 presented by Relative sentences after 


» 


ἔστι, in the sense of “ there is.” ἔστι is in the Singular even when the 


326 COMBINATION OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. ὃ 604. 


relative is in the Plural: ἔστιν oi, there are those who, i. 6.. some; ἔστιν 
οἷς οὐχ οὕτως ἔδοξεν, there are some to whom it did not appear so. So 
ἔστιν bre (=éviore), sometimes ; ἔστιν οὗ, in some vlaces ; ἔστιν ἢ, in some 
ways. 

B) Complication. 

§ 604. In translating Greek Relative clauses into En- 
glish, difficulties sometimes arise through the particular re- 
lations of the sentences: 

1. When the Relative as an Accusative of the Subject 
belongs to an Infinitive: οἱ πολέμιοι, ode ᾧοντὸ ἀποφυγεῖν, 
ἐξαίφνης παρῆσαν, hostes, gquos aufugisse putabant, subito 
aderant, the enemy, whom they thought to have fled, were 
suddenly there. 

2. When the Relative depends on a participle: κατα- 
λαμβάνουσι τεῖχος ὃ τειχισάμενοί ποτε ᾿Ακαρνᾶνες κοινῷ 
δικαστηρίῳ ἐχρῶντο (Ξε ᾧ ἐχρῶντο τειχισάμενοι αὐτό), they 
take possession of the fort which the Acarnanians, after 
building it, used as a common judgment hall. 

3. When the Relative is in the Genztive dependent on a 
comparative : ἀρετή, ἧς οὐδὲν κτῆμα σεμνότερον, virtue, than 
whichmo possession ἐ8 more venerable (ὃ 416). 

4. When the Relative depends on the verb of an inserted 
clause: αἱρούμεθα αὐτομόλους, οἷς ὁπόταν τις πλείονα μισθὸν 
διδῷ, μετ᾽ ἐκείνων ἀκολουθήσουσιν (duces) eligimus trans- 
Sugas, quibus δὲ quis plus stipendii prebuerit illos se- 
quentur (2. 6., οἵ, ὁπόταν τις ---- διδῷ, ἀκολουθήσουσιν, Gut, δὲ 
718---ο»γοῶδιιογξ, sequentur), we choose deserters, who, if any 
one gives them more pay, will follow him. 

Obs.—In the cases enumerated under 2 and 4, as well as those dis- 

cussed in § 605, and others besides, the Greek language satisfies 


itself with putting only once a word which has to be supplied in 
different cases for several clauses belonging to one another. 


§ 605. C) Combination of several Relative Clauses. 
When several Relative clauses follow one another, the Relative pro- * 


noun need be expressed only once, even when, the second time, it 
would require to be in a different case: Hom. ἄνωχθι δὲ μιν γαμέεσθαι 


= 


- : * 
§ 606. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 327 


τῷ ὕτεῳ TE πατὴρ κέλεται καὶ ἁνδάνει αὐτῇ, bid her marry whomsoever her 
Sather urges and (who) pleases herself ; ᾿Αριαῖος, ὃν ἡμεῖς ἠθέλομεν βα- 
σιλέα καθιστάναι καὶ [ᾧ] ἐδώκαμεν καὶ [ἀφ᾽ οὗ] ἐλάβομεν πίστα, οὗτος ἡμᾶς 
κακῶς ποιεῖν πειρᾶται, Ariwus, whom we wished to make king, and (to 
whom we) gave and (from whom we) received pledges of fidelity, at- 
tempts to ill use us. 


Obs.—-Sometimes, instead of the repeated Relative, αὐτός is substi- 
tuted in the case required by the construction of the sentence. 
So likewise piv in Homer: οἱ πρόγονοι, οἷς οὐκ ἐχαρίζονθ᾽ οἱ λέγον- 
τες οὐδ᾽ ἐφίλουν αὐτούς, ὥςπερ ὑμᾶς οὗτοι νῦν, πέντε καὶ τετταράκοντα 
ἔτη τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἦρξαν ἑκόντων, your ancestors, whom the speakers 
did not gratify, nor did they flatter them, as these now do you, ruled 
Sorty-five years over the readily submitting Hellenes. Hom.: ἀντί- 
θεον Πολύφημον, i ὕου κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον πᾶσιν Κυκλώπεσσι, Θόωσα 
δέ μιν τέκε νύμφη, godlike Polyphemus, whose power is the greatest 
among all the Cyclops, and him (whom) the nymph Thodsa bore. 


παν. XX V.—INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 


§ 606: 1 The simple direct question may be introduced 
by the Interrogative pronouns or adverbs mentioned § 214, 
etc. In Greek several different questions may be included’ 
in one interrogative sentence: Hom. τίς πόθεν εἷς ἀνδρῶν 5 
what ean, whence are you? ἀπὸ τούτων φανερὸν γενήσεται, 
τίς τίνος ἀϊτιός ἐστιν, from this ἐξ will be dear who is 
chargeable with what (who is chargeable and with what). 


Obs. 1.—An Interrogative pronoun may be joined with a demon- 
strative: ἀγγελίαν φέρω βαρεῖαν τίνα ταύτην ; I bring heavy tid- 
ings ; what (is) that? (τίς αὕτη ἐστίν 1) 


Obs. 2.—A question may also be expressed in a subordinate clause 
and by a participle: πότε ἃ χρὴ πράξετε; ἐπειδὰν τί γένηται ; when 
will you do your duty? when what shall happen? τί ἰδὼν τὸν Κρι- 
τύβουλον ποιοῦντα ταῦτα κατέγνωκας αὐτοῦ; what have you seen 
Critobulus doing that you have charged him with this? οἱ πάλαι 
᾿Αθηναῖοι οὐ διελογίσαντο, ὑπὲρ οἷα πεποιηκότων ἀνθρώπων κινδυνεύ- 


σουσιν, the old Athenians did not caleulate how much people have 


328 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 8 607. 


done for whom they were going to incur risk. Of this kind also are 
the phrases: ri παθών; what have you passed through, that? ri 
paddy; what have you got to know, that? ri παθὼν ἀδικεῖς τὴν πα- 
rpida; what have you passed through to make you act unjustly to- 
ward your country ? 
§ 607. 2. When the question refers not to a single word, 
but to a whole sentence, it may be indicated 
a) merely by the fone of voice: οὐ φοβεῖ μὴ ἤδη πρεσ- 
βύτερος ἧς ; do you not fear that you are already too old ? 
ὁ) by Interrogative particles, which, in translating into 
English, can not always be expressed by separate words, 
but often may be rendered by the position of the words 
and the tone of pronunciation. The most important Inter- 
rogative particles are dpa and 7, both comparable to the 
Latin affix -ne. Which answer is expected is indicated by 
neither of these particles: dp’ cifit μάντις ; wm La prophet? 
i} οὗτοι πολέμιοί εἰσιν , are those enemies ? 


Obs.—If an affirmative answer is to be specially indicated οὐ is add- 
ed; if a negative, μὴ is added to dpa. Hence dpa οὐ corresponds 
to the Latin nonne, dpa μή to the English surely not. 


§ 608. Of other Interrogative expressions the following may be no- 
ticed : ἢ γάρ; isn’t it ? ἢ που; surely? ἄλλο τι ἤ, properly ἄλλο τι ἔστιν 
ἢ; does any thing else happen than? hence, also with ἤ omitted (com- 
pare ὃ 626, Obs.), like the Lat. nonne, where an affirmative answer is 
expected: ἄλλο τι ἢ ἀδικοῦμεν; are we not doing wrong? ἄλλο τι οὖν 
πάντα ταῦτα ἂν εἴη μία ἐπιστήμη ; would not this, then, be all one science ? 
οὐ put in a question also anticipates an affirmative answer, and may 
be compared with nonne and the English not. The opposite to it is 
pn, Which may often be translated by swrely, as μῶν, formed from μὴ 
οὖν, surely not, always points to a negative answer. μὴ ᾿Αχιλλέα οἴει 
φροντίσαι θανάτου. καὶ κινδύνου ; surely you do not think Achilles cared 
about death and danger ? 


§ 609. 3. The indirect question in Greek, according to 
§ 520, is by no means clearly distinguished in regard to- 
Mood from the direct. So likewise the direct Interroga- 
tives, pronouns and adverbs, are often used instead of the 
indirect ones: αἱ γυναῖκες ἠρώτων αὐτούς, τίνες εἶεν, the 


women asked them who they were (§ 476, ὁ). 


ὃ 612. THE NEGATIVES. 329 


§ 610. 4. The English indirect Interrogative ¢for whether 
is represented by εἰ (ὃ 525, etc.), more rarely by ἐάν (with 
the Subj.), sometimes by dpa, and in Homer by ἤ (7é). 
Whether or not or whether perhaps may be rendered by 
μή: σκοπεῖτε, εἰ δικαίως χρήσομαι τῷ λόγῳ, see whether I 
speak justly ; ὅρα, μὴ παίζων ἔλεγεν, see whether or not he 
spoke tn jest. 

On the subject of the Interrogative Sentence being drawn prolep- 

tically into the principal sentence, see §§ 397, 519, 5, Obs. 2. 


§ 611. The direct double question (disjunctive question) 
is most generally introduced by πότερον (πότερα)---ἤ, Lat. 
utrum—an : πότερον δέδρακεν ἢ οὐ ; πότερον ἄκων ἢ ἑκών ; 
has he done it or not? willingly or unwillingly? Tn an 
indirect double question the same Interrogatives may be 
_ used, but also εἰ---ἤ, whether—or, and εἴτε---εἴτε : ἀποροῦ- 
μεν, εἴτε ἄκων εἴτε ἑκὼν δέδρακεν, we are in doubt whether 
he did ut willingly or unwillingly. 

Obs.—The Homeric language has for the direct, but more frequent- 

ly for the indirect double question, the conjunctions ἤ (ἠέ), 7 
(ἦε) : ἢ ὕμμ᾽ ἐν νήεσσι ἸΤοσειδάων ἐδάμασσεν, ἦ που ἀνάρσιοι ἄνδρες 
ἐδηλήσαντ᾽ ἐπὶ χέρσου ; did Poseidon overpower you in your ships, or 
have hostile men injured you on land? εἰπὲ δὲ μοι μνηστῆς ἀλόδου 
βουλήν τε νόον τε, ἠὲ μένει παρὰ παιδὶ καὶ ἔμπεδα πάντα φυλάσσει, 
ἢ ἤδη μιν ἔγημεν ᾿Αχαιῶν ὅςτις ἄριστος, tell me the purpose and in- 
clination of the wooed wife, whether she remains with the son and 
guards all carefully, or whether he who is the best of the Achwans has 
already married her. ἢ (jé) is also used for ἡ (je) in the second 
member. 


Cuap, XXVI.—Tue NEGATIVES. 
A) Simple, Negatives. 


§ 612. The*Greeks have two different negatives, οὐ and 
μή. Numerous compounds and derivatives are formed 


380 | THE NEGATIVES. § 613. 


from each, as: οὔτε, μήτε, οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐδαμῶς, μηδαμῶς. 
The principal. distinction between ov and μή is that οὐ 
denies, but μή declines. Hence arise the following special 
rules: | 

§ 613. 1. οὐ is used in all direct statements, whether. 
the reality of something is denied by the Jndicative, or 
the possibility or probability of something by the Opta- 
tive with dv: Φίλιππος οὐκ ἄγει εἰρήνην, Philip does not 
maintain peace; οὐκ av ἄγοι εἰρήνην, he would not (will 


hardly) maintain peace; οὐκ av δύναιο μὴ καμὼν evda-- 
? ἐξ μ : 


poveiv, you could not be happy without laboring (δ 516). 
Obs.—ot is also used in the peculiar Subjunctive of the Homeric 
language mentioned § 513. 
2. ov is used in direct questions to which an affirmative 
answer is expected (δ 608), but μή when a negative an- 
swer is expected (§ 608). 


§ 614. 3. In independent sentences μή is adel with the 
Subjunctive (§§ 510, 512), with the Optative of wishing 
(ὃ 514), with the Zndicative of wishing (ὃ 515), and with 
the Linperative : μὴ θορυβήσητε, do not make a disturb- 
ance ; μὴ γένοιτο, may ἐέ not happen ; Hom. we μὴ ὥφελλε 
γενέσθαι, would it never happened! μήποτ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἀπρήκτοισι 
νόον ἔχε, never devote your thoughts to what is imprac- 
ticable. 

Obs.—In these cases μή generally corresponds to the Latin ne. It 


is often used in negative oaths with the Indicative, in so far a8 
_ the swearer declines something (δ 612): Hom. ἴστω νῦν τόδε Γαῖα 


~ ++. μὴ Ov ἐμὴν ἰότητα Toceddwy.... πημαίνει Τρῶας, let Gaa 
now know this... . not with my consent does Poseidon afflict the 
Trojans. , Φ 


§ 615. 4. οὐ in general is used in all those dependent 
sentences which do not express a negative purpose or 
a condition : ἤδειν, ὃ ὅτι οὐ ῥᾷδιον εἴη, 7 knew ἐξ was not 
CUSY ὁ, ἃ οὐκ ἐᾶτε τοὺς παϊδας ποιεῖν, ταῦτα αὐτοὶ ποιεῖτε, 


i: you do not allow your chaldren to do You do your- 
selves. 


§ 616. THE NEGATIVES. 331 


Obs. 1.—In indirect questions od as well as μή may be used with 
εἰ in the sense of whether: σκοπῶμεν, Ἐξ πρέπει ἢ οὐ, let us consider 
whether it is becoming or not ; πειράσομαι μαθεῖν, εἰ ἀληθὲς ἢ μή, L 
will try to learn whether it is true or not. 

Obs. 2.—In such Relative Sentences as contain quite a general idea, 
μὴ Mnay be used: ἃ μὴ οἶδα, οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι, what I do not know, 
I do not think I know. 

§ 616. 5. μή in.general is used in all those dependent — 
sentences in which a negative purpose or a condition is 
expressed; hence μή is the negative in sentences denot- 
ing intention or purpose (§ 530), in those indirect Inter- 
rogative and ‘Relative sentences where a purpose of hin- 
dering i is implied, in all the Protaseis of Hypothetecal 
Periods (ὃ 534, ete.), and lastly in Hypothetical Rela- 
tive (ὃ 554) clauses, as well as in Hypothetical Temporal 
clauses (§$§ 556, 557): ἐάν τις κάμῃ, παρακαλεῖς ἰατρόν, 
ὕπως μὴ ἀποθάνῃ, when any one is wl, you send for ὦ 
physician, that he may not die; ψηφίσασθε τοιαῦτα ἐξ ὧν 
μηδέποτε ὑμῖν μεταμελήσει, vote for such things as will 
NEVE CAUSE you to Ce ie [ea quorum numquam vos 
peniteat : Opa, ὅπως μή σοι ἀποστῆδονται, see that they - 
do not abandon you, ἐξῆν σοι ἀπιέναι ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, εἰ 
μὴ ἤρεσκόν σοι οἱ νόμοι, ἐξ was at your choice to leave the 
state, if its laws did not please you; θεάσασθε, ὡς σα- 
θρόν ἐστι πᾶν, ὅ τι ἂν μὴ δικαίως ἢ πεπραγμένον, 866, how 
rotten every thing ts, which is not justly done; μεγίστη 
γίγνεται σωτηρία, ὅταν γυνὴ πρὸς ἄνδρα μὴ διχοστατῇ, ὁ as 
the greatest safety when a wife is not at variance with 
her husband. 


Obs. 1.—In sentences of this kind, sometimes οὐ is used to negative 
a single word: πάντως οὕτως ἔχει, ἐάν τε ob φῆτε ἐάν Fe φῆτε, Ut ἐ8 
entirely so whether you deny or assert it. 

Obs. 2.—The Optative expressing repetition likewise has μή (ὃ 547). 


Obs. 3.—With verbs of fearing, μή, like the Latin ne, signifies lest or 
that: δέδοικα, μὴ ἐπιλαθώμεθα τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ, 1 fear lest we forget 
the way home (compare ὃ 583). Even without a governing verb 
the fear that something may happen is introduced by μή, which 

_-in this case is to be translated if only not, or if but not: μὴ ἐπι- 


332 : THE NEGATIVES. § 617. 


λαθώμεθα τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ, if only we do not forget the way home 
(compare §§ 620, 621, and 512). 

§ 617. 6. The Znjfinctive generally has μή, particularly 
when the Infinitive has the article: τὰς ὁμοίας χάριτας μὴ 
ἀντιδιδόναι αἰσχρόν, not to return equal thanks zs base ; 
σοὶ TO μὴ σιγῆσαι λοιπὸν ἦν, remained for you not to be 
silent. ; 

Obs. 1.—od may be put with the Infinitive after verbs of declaring 

and conceiving : ὁμολογῶ οὐ κατὰ τούτους εἶναι ῥήτωρ, I acknowledge 
I am not an orator in their sense. 

Obs. 2..—dcre, 80 that, when joined with the Infinitive generally has 

py, More rarely ov. 


Obs. 3.— After verbs of hindering, forbidding, refusing, denying, and 
others which contain the idea of declining (δ 612), μή is usually 
added to the Infinitive, and is rendered in English by from, or 
not expressed at all: κωλυόμεθα μὴ μαθεῖν, we are hindered from 
learning ; ἠρνοῦντο μὴ πεπτωκέναι, they denied having fallen. 

§ 618. 7. With Particeples μή is used when they are to 
be understood hypothetically, ὁ. ¢.,in the sense of a /ypo- 
thetical Protasis (ὃ 583): οὐκ ἂν δύναιο μὴ καμὼν εὐδαι- 
μονεῖν, 2. 6., εἰ μὴ κΚἄμοις (§ 613); so, likewise, when the 
Participle has the article, if it can be resolved into a hypo- 
thetical or a hypothetical relative clause: ὁ μὴ δαρεὶς av- 
θρωπος οὐ παιδεύεται, ὁ. 6., ἐάν τις μὴ Oaph, OY ὃς ἂν μὴ 
δαρῇ (ἢ 583). 

Obs. 1.—When μή is added as a Negative to single words, they are 

likewise to be taken hypothetically: τὸ μὴ ἀγαθόν, the not good, 
ἡ. 6.) ὃ ἂν μὴ ἀγαθὸν 7. 

Obs. 2.—With Participles as well as with other words μή often oc- 
curs as_a Negative on account of the prohibitive, declining, or 
hypothetical nature of the whole sentence: ψηφίσασθε τὸν πόλεμον 


μὴ φοβηθέντες τὸ αὐτίκα δεινόν, determine upon the war without fear- 
ing the immediate danger. 
: * 


B) Several Negatives combined. 


§ 619. 1. A Negative is not neutralized by a subsequent 
compound Negative of the same kind, but only continued. 
In translating, the Negative is employed only once in En- 


# 


* 


§ 621. THE NEGATIVES. 333 


glish, and the place of the other Negative is supplied by 
an indefinite: Poet. οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδὲν κρεῖσσον ἢ νόμοι πόλει, 
there is not any thing better for a state than laws ; οὐδεὶς 
πώποτε Σωκράτους οὐδὲν ἀσεβὲς οὐδὲ. ἀνόσιον οὔτε πράτ- 
τοντος εἶδεν, οὔτε λέγοντος ἤκουσεν, NO One ever either saw 
Socrates doing or heard him saying anything impious or 
unholy. 

Obs.—A. Negative is neutralized by a subsequent simple Negative 
of the same kind: οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων ἀδικῶν τίσιν οὐκ ἀποδώσει, NO 
one who does wrong will not (i. 6., every one will) pay the penalty. 

§ 620. 2. οὐ followed by μή with the Subjunctive or Fu- 
ture Indicative is an emphatic negative. This mode of 
speaking is to be explained by the idea of fear being sup- 
plied after ov (compare ὃ 616, Obs. 3): οὐ μὴ ποιήσω, 
abdut the same as οὐ φοβητέον μὴ ποιήσω, there rs no fear 
that I shall do it, 2. 6., 1 shall certainly not do it: οὐδεὶς 
μήποτε εὑρήσει τὸ κατ᾽ ἐμὲ οὐδὲν ἐλλειφθέν, no one will ever 
jind that any thing, as far as depends on me, is neg- 
lected ; ov μήποτε ἔξαρνος γένωμαι, L shall certainly never 
deny. 7 

§ 621. 3. μή, followed by οὐ is used in very different 
ways: . 

a) After verbs of fearing, μὴ ov corresponds to the Lat. 
ne non or ut, and is to be translated by that nosy, δέδοικα, 
μὴ ov θεμιτὸν 7, vercor, ne non justum sit, I fear that tt ts 
not just (compare ὃ 616, Obs. 3); also without a governing 
verb, μὴ ov θεμιτὸν ἢ, if it be but not not right, ὁ. ὁ., if 


it be only not wrong (compare ὃ 512, and ὃ 616, Obs. 3); . 


Hom. μή νύ τοι οὐ χραίσμῃ σκῆπτρον Kal στέμμα θεοῖο, the 
god’s staff and garland will surely not help you. 

ὁ) In indirect questions where μή would mean 7/f per- 
haps (ὃ 610), μὴ ob means 7for whether perhaps not: ἄθρει 


μὴ ov τοῦτο ἦ τὸ ἀγαθόν, look- whether perhaps this is not 


the good. 


Obs.—In the cases adduced under a and 8, ih is a Negative Con- 
junction, and οὐ the Negative to a special word, 


« 


- 
884 THE NEGATIVES. § 622. 


6) μὴ οὐ is used with the Infinitive after Wegative ex- 
pressions, in the sense of so as not, or not to: οὐδεὶς οἵόςτε 
ἄλλως λέγων μὴ οὐ καταγέλαστος εἶναι, NO One speaking 
otherwise is able not to be ridiculous. 

@) μὴ ov is farther used with the Infinitive after nega- 
live verbs, or questions containing verbs of hindering, for- 
bidding, denying, refusing (ὃ 617, Obs.3). The Infinitive 
in this case is often preceded by the Article. In English 
the negative is not expressed: οὐ κωλυόμεθα μὴ οὐ μαθεῖν, 
we are not hindered from learning ; μὴ παρῇς τὸ μὴ οὐ 
φράσαι, do not omit saying it; τίνα ola ἀπαρνήσεσθαι μὴ 
οὐχὶ ἐπίστασθαι τὰ δίκαια ; who do you think will deny 
at all understanding what rs gust ? 


Obs.—od is here only a repetition of the Negative contained in the 
principal sentence. 


- 


C) Some Negative Phrases. 


§ 622. 1. οὐδέν, μηδέν, and οὔτι, μήτι, nothing, are often 
used as free Accusatives, like the Latin nihil, meaning 
not, not at all; compare ὃ 404, Ods. 


2. οὔπω, μήπω, not yet, are to be carefully distinguished 
from οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, no longer: οὔπω. πεποίηκα; nondum 
fect; οὐκέτι ποιήσω, non amplius faciam. 


3. οὐχ ὅτι stands for οὐ λέγω ὅτι, L do not say that, not 
to mention; καὶ οὐχ ὅτι 6 Κρίτων ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ ἦν, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
οἱ φίλοι αὐτοῦ, and not to mention (i. 6., not only) Crito 
was quiet, but his friends also were. 

4. μὴ ὅτι for μὴ εἴπω ὅτι (μὴ ὅπως) means don’t suppose, 
nedum, by which the mention of something is declined 
as unnecessary, and hence may sometimes be translated in 
Negative sentences by not only not: μὴ ὅτι θεός, ἀλλὰ 
kat ἄνθρωποι οὐ φιλοῦσι τοὺς ἀπιστοῦντας, don’t suppose 
that only God, but men also do not love the faithless [non 
homines infidos amant;.nedum deus|.. In like-manner 
οὐχ ὅπως, properly not that, don’t suppose, may frequent- 


§ 624, a. THE PARTICLES: O,  _.. 588 
ἷὭς fi ; 


“ly be rendered in connection with N egatives_by not only 
not. 

5. μόνον ov, μόνον οὐχί, only not, is equivalent to al- 
most, nearly; ὅσον ov, temporal [tantum. non], nearly, 
almost : καταγελᾷ ὑπ᾽ ἀνδρῶν ode σὺ μόνον οὐ προρκυνεῖς, 
you are ridiculed by men whom you almost worship. 

6. ov μήν or οὐ μέντοι ἀλλά, however, notwithstanding, 
is to be explained by an ellipsis: 6 ἵππος μικροῦ ἐκεῖνον 
ἐξετραχήλισεν " οὐ μὴν (viz., ἐξετραχήλισεν) ἀλλὰ ἐπέμεινεν 
ὁ Κῦρος, the horse nearly threw him off, (did) not, however, 
but Cyrus kept his seat. 

On οὔτε, μήτε, οὐδέ, μηδέ, § 625. 


CHAP. XXVIL—Tuz PARTICLES, 


§ 623. Particles are also indeclinable words which serve 
partly to connect sentences, partly to give emphasis to 
particular parts of a sentence, and to enliven language. 
The Particles which serve to connect sentences are called 
Conjunctions ; those which give prominence. to particular 
parts of a sentence, or impart animation by making entire 
sentences prominent, are called emphatic particles. 

In regard to position, they are either prepositive, ὁ. ¢., 
take the first place in a sentence, or postpositive, ὦ. ¢., al- 
ways stand after at least one other word in a sentence. 

Obs.—The Conjunctions are divided into various classes according 

to their meaning. Several Conjunctions, however, belong equal- 


ly to different classes, They will be arranged according to their 
original or primitive signification. 


A) Conjunctions. 
Preliminary Remark. 
§ 624. a. The Conjunctions are here enumerated without 
regard to the formal relation of sentences to one another 
(8 519). But 


336 THE PARTICLES. § 624. 


1. Co-ordination is implied in all Copulative and Dis- 
junctive Conjunctions, the Adversative Conjunctions with 
the exception of ὅμως, which is used principally in the 
Apodosis, among the Causal Conjunctions yap, and all Ila- 
tive Conjunctions except ὥςτε; 


2. Subordination is implied in all the rest. 


Obs.—Much more rarely than in modern languages, more rarely 
also than in Latin, is one word or one sentence added to another 
in Greek without some Conjunction. The Asyndeton (ἀσύνδετον, © 
want of connection) takes place more frequently only in an Epev- 
egesis (ἐπεξήγησις), 1. 6., a subsequent explanatory addition to some- 
thing already alluded to in the previous sentence: εἰμί τις γελοῖος 
ἰατρός " ἰώμενος μεῖζον τὸ νόσημα ποιῶ, lam αν οὐδ physician ; by 
curing the disease I make it worse. Wherever the Asyndeton oc- 
curs in other cases, the speaker generally intends to Pp a 
special effect by it. 


I. Copulative Conjunctions. 


§ 624. 6.1. The two Copulative Conjunctions are καί, 
which in general corresponds to the Latin δέ, and-the post- 
positive, enclitic τέ, which in general corresponds to the 
Latin gue. The language of poetry has besides ἠδέ and 
δέ, With the meaning and [compare atque]. 


2. The Greeks, like the Romans, are fond of expressing 
the idea of addition in two connected parts of a sentence, 
either by καί---καί or τέ---καί, or ré—ré: καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ 
κατὰ θάλασσαν, both by land and by water ; Hom. ᾿Ατρεῖδαί 
τε καὶ ἄλλοι évKvhpwdec ᾿Αχαιοί, ye Atridw as well as ye 
other well-greaved Achwans; Hom. αἰεὶ γάρ τοι ἔρις τε 
φίλη πόλεμοί τε μάχαε τε, for strife is always pleasant to 
you, and wars and battles. We may farther add the Epic 
ἠμέν---ἠδέ, as well—as also. 3 

Obs.—In single instances we also find ré—dé, where the second 

member is made more prominent by contrast. 

3. καί has, moreover, the meaning also : Hom. παρ᾽ ἔμοιγε 


kat ἄλλοι, οἵ κέ με τιμήσουσι, With me are also others, who 
will honor me. 


§ 625. THE. PARTICLES. 337 


In this sense, also, καί is frequently used in both the 
connected parts of a sentence: καὶ ἡμῖν ταὐτὰ δοκεῖ ἅπερ 
καὶ βασιλεῖ, we also approve the same thing as the king 
(does also). ‘The meaning also by intensification becomes 
‘even: καὶ λίαν, even very much; and in the opposite case 
even but: καὶ βραχὺν χρόνον, even but a short time. καὶ 
δέ answers to the English and also ; δίκαιον καὶ πρέπον δὲ 
ἅμα, just and at the same time also becoming. 

After words of resemblance or likeness καί means as? 
ὁμοίως Kal, @que ac. 

4. ἄλλως τε καί properly means “ both in other respects, and also ;” 
it serves to give prominence to the subsequent word or words, and 
may be translated by especially: χαλεπόν ἐστι διαβαίνειν τὸν ποταμὸν 
ἄλλως τε Kai πολεμίων πολλῶν ἐγγὺς ὄντων, it is difficult to cross the river, 
especially as many of the enemy are near. καὶ δὴ καί is used to make 
the last part of a series emphatic: Herod. Κροίσου βασιλεύοντος ἀπι- 
κγέονται ἐς Σάρδις ἄλλοι τε οἱ πάντες ἐκ τῆς Ἑλλάδος σοφισταί, καὶ δὴ Kai 
Σόλων, during the reign of Cresus there came from Hellas both all the 
eng wise men and especially Solon [Lat. ewm—tum}. 

5. In the Epic Dialect τέ is frequently employed to indicate the 
Serena not only of separate parts of a sentence, but of whole sen- 
tences, often, too, in connection with other Particles, such as καί, μέν, 
δέ, ἀλλά, and with relatives (sere, doocre). In these cases τέ must gen- 
erally eft untranslated or rendered by an unaccented a/so: Hom. 
ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται μάλα τ᾽ ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ, whoever obeys the gods they 
greatly listen to him also. 

ὅ Obs.—The re in sere, οἵόςτε, Which occurs also in prose, is of the 
same origin. 


6. The rising climaxgpis also expressed by οὐ μόνον--- 
ἀλλὰ καί, not only—but also. On ovy ὅτι, μὴ ὅτι, οὐχ 
ὅπως, see § 622. 

§ 625. 1. The*Particles οὐδέ, μηδέ and οὔτε, μήτε, serve 
to form a negative series. Two different meanings belong 
to οὐδέ and μηδέ, viz. : 

a) nor either, and not ; in this sense they are used to 
connect a single member of a sentence with a preceding 
one negatively: Hom. βρώμης οὐχ ἅπτεαι οὐδὲ ποτῆτος, 
you touch not meat nor drink either ; πρὸς σοῦ οὐδ᾽ ἐμοῦ 
φράσω, to your advantage and not to mine 7 wilt speak. 

P 


338 THE PARTICLES. | § 626. 


ὦ) also not, not even: ἐλπίζω οὐδὲ τοὺς πολεμίους μενεῖν 
ἔστι, 7 hope that the enemy also will not longer stay; οὐδὲ 
τοῦτο ἐξῆν, not even this was allowed |ne hoc quidem lice- 
bat |. 


2. οὔτε----οὔτε, μήτε---μήτε, are used. with nits refer- 
ence to each other, and may be translated neither—nor : 
Hom. οὔτε ποτ᾽ ἐς πόλεμον πωλέσκετο, οὔτε TOT εἰς ἀγορήν, 
he neither went to war nor to the assembly. Sometimes 
a negative member of a sentence is brought into relation 
with a positive one by means of οὔτε or phre—ré | Latin 
neque — et|: ᾿ὥμοσαν. μήτε προδώσειν ἀλλήλους σύμμαχοί 
τε ἔσεσθαι, they swore not to betray one another and to be 
allies. 

Obs.—If something else be added to two members connected by 
ovre—obre, OF μήτε---μήτε, it may be done by οὐδέ, μηδέ. When, 
on the contrary, οὐδέ or μηδὲ corresponds to a preceding οὔτε or 
μήτε, it must be called an irregularity (compare ri—dé, ὃ 624, 2, 

.  Obs.), and the member thus added is emphatic: ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὔτε 
τούτων οὐδέν ἐστιν ἀληθές, οὐδὲ γ᾽ εἴ τινος ἀκηκόατε, ὡς ἐγὼ παιδεύειν 
ἐπιχειρῶ ἀνθρώπους, but neither is any of these things true, nor even 
if you have heard from.any one that I undertake to train men. 


Il. Disjunctive Conjunctions. - 

§ 626. 1. ἤ, carefully to be distinguished from ἢ (δ8 643 
607), means . 

a) or, and in this sense is often doubled: #j—i, either— 
or, for whieh ἤτοι---ἤ is used whgp greater emphasis i is to 
bé given to the first member of a sentence: ἢ ἀστός τις ἢ 
ξένος, either some citizen or & stranger. 

b) than, after comparatiyes and comparative adjectives 
like ἄλλοις alius ; ἕτερος, alter; διάφορος, different ; ἐν- 
αντίος, opposed to, etc.: τίνι ἂν μᾶλλον πιστεύσαιμι ἢ σοί ; 
whom should I trust more than you? ovS8tv ἄλλο ἐπιτη- 
Paine ἢ ἐν ORD) on think upon nothing else than 

ying 


Obs.—After πλέον (πλεῖον, contracted πλεῖν), more, aNd ἔλαττον, μεῖον, 
less, ἤ 18 sometimes omitted with numerals, just as guam is after 


§ 629. THE PARTICLES. - 389 


plus: ἔτη γεγονὼς πλεῖον ἑβδομήκοντα, more than seventy years old 
[ plus septuaginta annos natus|.. The same is the case also after 
ἄλλο τι in questions (ὃ 608). 

§ 627. 2. εἴτε---εἴτε, ἐάντε---ἐάντε, are used like the Latin 
sive—sive, when it is to be left undecided which of two 
sides is to be chosen: εἴτε ἀληθὲς εἴτε ψεῦδος, οὐ καλόν μοι 
δοκεῖ τοῦτο τοὔνομα ἔχειν, Whether true or false, ἐξ seems to 
me not fair to have this name. 


1 Adversative Conjunctions. 


§ 628. 1. 82 expresses so slight a contrast or opposition 
that, though it is generally rendered by 6ut¢, it may also, 
and especially in Hom., be translated by and. The Greeks, 
however, also like to indicate the first of two sentences 
which are contrasted to one another, and this they do by 
μέν, in truth, truly, indeed ; but it may often be left un- 
translated: Hom. ἄλλοι μέν pa θεοί τε καὶ ἀνέρες ἵππο- 
κορυσταὶ εὗδον παννύχιοι, Δία δ᾽ οὐκ ἔχε νήδυμος ὕπνος, the 
other gods, indeed, and the horse-hair crested men slept 
through the night, but sweet sleep did not hold Zeus» As 
here, μέν----δὲ express a contrast, so elsewhere they indicate 
only a difference: Δαρείου καὶ Παρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες 
δύο, πρεσβύτερος μὲν ᾿Αρταξέρξης, νεώτερος δὲ Κῦρος, Darius 
and Parysatis had two children, the elder Artaxerxes, the 
younger Cyrus; Hom. περὶ piv βουλῇ Δαναῶν περὶ δ᾽ ἔστε 
μάχεσθαι, ἴγι council on the one hand, and in battle on the 
other, you are distinguished among the Danai. ᾿ 

Obs.—In Homer an Apodosis also may be opposed to its Protasis 

by means of δέ, especially when the Protasis is introduced by a 
temporal conjunction: ἕως ὁ ταῦθ᾽ ὥρμαινε κατὰ φρένα καὶ κατὰ 
θυμόν, ἦλθε δ᾽ ᾿Αθήνη, while he pored on this in his mind and spirit 
Athene came, This is founded on a combination of co-ordination 
and subordination. Compare ὃ 519, 1 and 5, Obs. 

§ 629. 2. ἀλλά, yet, but (originally Acc. Plur. Neut. of 
ἄλλος), denotes a stronger contrast than δέ: Hom. ἔνθ᾽ 
ἄλλοι piv πάντες ἐπευφήμησαν ᾿Αχαιοί----ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ᾿Ατρείδῃ 
᾿Αγαμέμνονι ἥνδανε θυμῷ, ἀλλὰ κακῶς ἀφίει, then all the 


ὅι THE PARTICLES. ὃ 630. 


other Achwans assented, yet it did not meet the feelings 
of Atrides Agamemnon, but he harshly dismissed him. 
Obs: 1.—After a hypothetical sentence either expressed or under- 
stood, ἀλλά, sometimes with a strengthening γέ added to it, may 
frequently be rendered by but or yet at least: εἰ μὴ πάντα, ἀλλὰ 
πολλά γ᾽ ἴστε, if not all, yet you know at least much; Poet. ὦ θεοὶ 
πατρῷοι συγγένεσθέ γ᾽ ἀλλὰ νῦν, oh gods of my fathers, be with me at 
least now {if not before}. 


Obs. 2.—addd frequently serves to break off a long discussion and 
* emphatically to introduce a request: Hom. ἀλλὰ πίθεσθε καὶ bupec, 
but do you also follow me. | 


Obs. 3.—After negatives ἀλλ᾽ ἤ or ἀλλά alone means except: ἀργύριον 
μὲν οὐκ ἔχω ἀλλ᾽ ἢ μικρόν τι, 1 have no money except a little. On οὐ 
μὴν ἀλλά, § 622, 6. 
§ 630. Other Conjunctions which point out a contrast or 
a transition to something different are: 
3. av, avre, properly again, then on the other hand, yet. 
. Hom. αὐτάρ, and ἀτάρ, but, on the contrary, yet. 
. μέντοι, certainly, however, see ὃ 643, 13. 
. καίτοι, and yet, still. 
. ὅμως, nevertheless, yet, denotes a strong contrast [ Lat. 
tamen, nihilominus|. On ὅμως as a supplement to a par- 
ticiple, § 587, 5. 


On Ὁ 


J 


IV. Conjunctions of Comparison. 


§ 631. 1. we, as (Lat. wt), 
is properly the adverb of ὅς, , 6. It differs in accent from 
ὥς, so or thus(§ 99), except when in poets and the Homeric 
Dialect it is placed after the word compared (ὃ 98, @), in 
which case it is oxytone: πατὴρ ὡς ἤπιος ev, he was gen- 
tle as a father. Like the Lat. wt, it is employed in very 
different ways: 

a) In its original comparative sense ὡς means as or how, 
and is used in comparisons : we βούλει, as you wish , pa- 
Kpov we γέροντι, far for mean old man (Lat. tanquam); 

om. ὥς μοι δέχεται κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ αἰεί (how with me one 
evil always follows another, Lat. guam); with superlatives 


§ 632. THE PARTICLES. : 341 


like the Lat. quam : we τάχιστα, quam celerrime, as quick- 
ly as possible (compare ὅτι). In statements of number and 
measure it means wbout, nearly: we δέκα, about ten; we 
ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ, for the most part; with verbs of motion or 
action it indicates what is merely intended, apparent: ἀπήει 
we εἰς τοὺς πολεμίους, he went away in the direction of the 
enemy (as if he went against the enemy); hence it occurs 
with participles in the mann@t described § 588. On its 
use with the Infinitive, § 564, and on we as a preposition, 
8 450. 


ὁ) In a temporal sense ὡς means when, as soon as (com- 
pare Lat. ut): Hom. we cid’, ὥς μιν μᾶλλον ἔδυ χόλος, when — 
he saw him, anger pierced him the more; ὡς τάχιστα ἕως 
ὑπέφαινεν, ἐθύοντο, as soon as dawn appeared, they sacri- 
Jjiced | Lat. ut primum). 


c) In a causal sense we means as (Latin guum), since, 
and with subsequent statement of the reason, for: δέομαι 
σοῦ παραμεῖναι, ὡς ἐγὼ ἥδιστα ἀκούσαιμι σοῦ, 7 beg you to 
stay ἦθ76, ὧδ I should hear you with the greatest ne 
ure. 


d) After verbs of saying and declaring ὡς means that : 
ἧκεν ἀγγέλλων τις, ὡς ᾿Ελάτεια κατείληπται, some One Came 
announcing that Μἰαΐξωα has been taken. § 526, ὁ. 


6) we is rarely used in a consecutive sense, so that (ὥςτε). 


J) In a final sense we means in order that : we μὴ πάντες 
ὄλωνται, ἐγ order that all may not perish. Compare ὃ 530, 
etc. 


g) On ὡς expressing a wish (Lat. wtinam), see ὃ 514. 


§ 632. 2. ὥςπερ, as, 
is only a strengthened (compare § 641, 3), and i is used 
only in a comparative sense. 


3. ὅπως, how, that, in order that, 
is principally used as a final Conjunction, and may then 


342 THE PARTICLES. § 633. 


"be translated by ΠΣ or in order that, compare § 530, ete. 
On οὐχ ὅπως, § 622, 4 | 

4. ὥστε, as, 80 that, 
has rarely the comparative meaning as, generally the con- 
secutive so that, when it is followed either by an Infinitive 
or a finite verb. Compare § 565. 


5. Hom. jure, as, just as,tike, only in comparisons. 


δ 633. V. Declarative Conjunctions. 


1. ὅτι, that, because [Lat. guod], 
is originally nothing but the Neuter of the pronoun ὅςτις, 
ὅ τι, 0n the distinction of which from ὅτι, compare § 214, 
Obs. 2. Like the Latin guod, ὅτι has two principal mean- 
ings, the declarative that and the causal because. - 


a) ὅτι means that after verbs of saying and declaring 
(compare § 525): Ἡράκλειτος λέγει, ὅτι πάντα χωρεῖ καὶ 
οὐδὲν μένει, Heraclitus says that every thing moves, and 
nothing is stationary. Hence the phrase δῆλον ὅτι (also 
written δηλονότι), 2 ἐ8 clear that, manifestly. 


Obs.—Sometimes, also, a aired speech is introduced by ὅτι, so that 
the Conjunction is, as it were, a mere sign of quotation: ἐδήλου 
ἡ γραφή, ὅτι δι μηόδέ ἥκω ΡΟΝ σέ, the letter stated (that) I The- 
mistocles am come to you. 


ὁ) because, that | Lat. gquod]|: Hom. χωόμενος, ὅτ᾽ ἄρι- 
στον ᾿Αχαιῶν οὐδὲν ἔτισας, angry that you have not hon- 
ored the best of the Achwans. 

The use of ὅτι (or ὅ ze) with a superlative deserves at- 
tention: ὅτι τάχιστα like ὥς τάχιστα, as quickly as posst- 
ble; and ὅτι μή, except, besides: οὐκ ἦν κρήνη ὅτι μὴ μία, 
there was no fountain except 07,6. "Ὁ 


2. we, that, § 631, d. 
3. διότι, that, ὃ 636, 2. 
4. οὕνεκα, that, ὃ 636, 3. 


§ 635. THE PARTICLES. ᾿ς 848. 


VI. Temporal: Conjunctions. 

§ 634. (Respecting the Moods, see ὃ 556, etc.) 

1. ὅτε, ὁπότε, when, as | quando, cum]: ὅταν, ὁπόταν, 
when, if: iv ποτε χρόνος, ὅτε θεοὶ μὲν ἦσαν, θνητὰ δὲ γένη 
οὐκ ἦν, there once was a time when gods existed, but mor- 
tal races did not exist ; r Hom. οἱ δ᾽ ὅτε δὴ λιμένος πολυ- 
βενθέος ἐντὸς ἵκοντο, ἱστία μὲν στε cthavro, but when they got 
within the deep harbor they furled the sails. ὅτε and 
ὁπότε with the Optative, according to ὃ 558, Obs. 1, mean 
whenever, as often as: Hom. ἔνθα. πάρος Komal ὅτε μιν 
γλυκὺς ὕπνος ἱκάνοι, where formerly he used to lie down 
whenever sweet sleep came be him. Sometimes ὅτε has 
the causal meaning since. 


2. Hom. εὖτε-ΞΞ- ὅτε. 


3. ἡνίκα, ὁπηνίκα, when, at the time when (ὃ 217), ie: 
notes rather a point of time: ἡνίκα ἦν δείλη, ἐξαπίνης ἐπι- 
φαίνονται οἱ πολέμιοι, when ἐξ was OPE the enemy sud- 


denly appeared. 
4, ἦμος, poet. when : 


Hom. ἦμος δ᾽ ἠέλιος μέσον οὐρανὸν ἀμφιβεβήκει, καὶ τότε δὴ χρύσεια 
πατὴρ ἐτίταινε τάλαντα, when (at the moment) the sun had entered 
mid heaven , just then the father cos the golden scales, 


ὃ 635. 5. ἐπεί, Ofter, when, as: ἐπεάν, ἐπήν, ἐπάν, when ; 
Hom. αὐτὰρ ἐπεὶ πόσιος καὶ ἐδητύος ἐξ. ἔρον ἕντο, but when 
they had quenched the desire for Soe. and drink ; Κῦρος 
ὑπέσχετο ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ δώσειν “πέντε ἀργυρίου μνᾶς, ἐπὰν 
εἰς Βαβυλῶνα ἥκωσιν, Cyrus promised to give each man 
Jive silver mine when they should come to Babylon. ἐπεί 
frequently introduces a 7éason, and then is to be translated 
by because or for: Hom..ad\d\a πίθεσθε καὶ ὔμμες, ἐπεὶ 
πείθεσθαι ἄμεινον, but do you also obey me, for ἐξ is better 
to obey. 


6. ἐπειδή, NOW since, since : ἐπειδάν, When, is ἐπεί stréngth- 
ened by δή (ὃ 642), and points more‘strongly to the reason 


844 °— THE PARTICLES. § 636. 


assioned than ἐπεί: ἐπειδὴ ἀνεῴχθη τὸ δεσμωτήριον, εἰς- 
ἤλθομεν, now since the prison was opened we entered. 

7. ἕως, as long as, till |quamdiu, dum, donec]|: ἕως ἔτι 
ἐλπίς, as long as there ts still hope ; περιεμένομεν ἕως ἀνοι- 
χθείη τὸ δεσμωτήριον, we waited till the proson should be 
opened. 

8. ἔστε 

9. μέχρι, ἄχρι (compare ὃ 455 

10. poet. ὄφρα, as long as, till : 

Hom. ὄφρα piv ἠὼς ἦν, as long as it was morning ; Hom. ἔχει κότον, 

ὄφρα τελέσσῃ, he nurses wrath till he fulfills it. ὄφρα is very often 
a Particle of purpose or intention, and then to be translated by 
that, in order that: Hom. ὄφρα μὴ οἷος ἀγέραστος Ew, in order that 
I may not be alone unhonored. 

11. πρίν, before, sooner [ priusguam] (compare ὃ 565), 
is joined sometimes with the Infinitive, sometimes with a 
finite verb. Its original adverbial meaning, previously, 
earlier, has been preserved, especially in τὸ πρίν, formerly. 
In Hom. the Conjunction πρίν may refer back to the ad- 
verb πρίν : οὐδ᾽ dye πρὶν Δαναοῖσιν ἀεικέα λοιγὸν ἀπώσει, 
πρίν γ᾽ ἀπὸ πατρὶ φίλῳ δόμεναι ἑλικώπιδα κούρην, and he 
«οὐδέ not avert the dreadful suffering from the Danar be- 
fore they have gwen back the queck-eyed maiden to her * 
Sather. 


12. πάρος, Hom.=zpiv. " 


e 
ΞΞ ἕως. 


VII. Causal Conjunctions. 

ὃ 636. 1. ὅτι, ὃ 633, ὁ. 

2. διότι, because, properly διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, for this reason 
that, or that. 

3. οὕνεκα, because, poet., from ov ἕνεκα, for τούτου ἕνεκα 
ὅτι, for this reason that; because, also declarative that. 
So likewise ὁθούνεκα from ὅτου (οὗτινος) ἕνεκα. 

4, ἐπεί, § 635, 5. 

5; ὅτε, ἢ 694,1 

6. γάρ (alsiave postpositive), for, namely, to wit. Spe- 
cial peculiarities in the use of γάρ are: 


§ 637. THE PARTICLES. 345 


a) In animated discourse the sentence containing a rea- 
son is often put before the one for which the reason is 
given, especially after a Vocative: Hom. ᾿Ατρείδη, πολλοὶ 
yap τεθνᾶσι καρηκομόωντες ᾽Αχαιοί ---τῷ oe χρὴ πόλεμον 
παῦσαι, Atrides, for many rich-haired Achwans have died, 
. therefore you ought to put an end to the war. 


b).By namely, yap may be translated when it ΠΡ 
the substance of a speech or opinion before announced, so 
especially after τεκμήριον δέ, μαρτύριον δέ (supply ἔστι). for 
that there is a proof, a testimony. 

c) In answers yap may often be rendered by yes, cer- 
tainly, but must in reality be explained by an ellipsis: 
ἀγωνιστέον piv ἄρα ἡμῖν πρὸς τοὺς ἄνδρας ; ἀνάγκη yap, 
ἔφη, must we then contend with the men? yes, it v8 nec- 
essary, said he—the complete answer would Hers we must 
contend, for it is necessary. 


d@) In ἢ questions yap serves to give aati 
lke the Lat. n@m: τί γάρ; quidnam ? how so? % yap; 
ov yap; ts tt not so? πῶς yap ov; how could ἐξ be other- 
wise? si γάρ is the Lat. wtinam. ἀλλὰ γάρ [at enim] 
corresponds to the English but surely ; ob yap ἀλλά prop- 
erly: for tt ἐδ not so, but, hence however. 


VALI. [Inferential Conjunctions. 

§ 637. 1. dpa (Ep. dp and enclitic pa, poet. also dpa, 
postpositive), then, therefore, accordingly, always refers to 
something known or resulting from what has gone before. 
It is most frequently used in Homer to connect sentences 
slightly: ὡς ἄρ᾽ ἔφη, thus then he spoke; ᾽Ατρείδης δ᾽ apa 
νῆα θοὴν ἅλαδε προέρυσσεν, and Atrides accordingly drew 
the fleet ship to the sea (as was to be expected). οὐκ apa 
often means not forsooth, εἰ apa 77 then or 1f perhaps, and 
in indirect questions whether perhaps: 

On the Interrogative dpa, ὃ 607, ὁ. 

2. οὖν (New Ion. ὧν, postpositive), then, consequently, is 

3 P 2 


846 THE PARTICLES. § 638. 


more emphatic than ἄρα: Hom. ἤτοι νόστος ἀπώλετο πα- 
τρὸς ἐμοῖο᾽ οὔτ᾽ οὖν ἀγγελίῃ ἔτι πείθομαι, εἴ ποθεν ἔλθοι, 
οὔτε θεοπροπίης ἐμπάζομαι, surely. my father’s return is 
lost, therefore I no longer believe a message, if one comes 
Jrom any where, nor concern myself about prophecy. μὲν 
ovv (compare § 643, 12), no doubt, certainly, well then ; 
δ᾽ οὖν, certainly; ἀλλ᾽ οὖν, but certainly ;.yap οὖν, yet 
surely. When joined to relatives, οὖν has the generalizing 
meaning of the Lat. renee / dcericovyv, whoever, quicunque 
(88 218, 600). 

_ By combination with οὖν we obtain the Negative οὔκ- 
ουν, not then, to be carefully distinguished from - οὐκοῦν, 
which is properly an Interrogative, not then? but as an 
afirmative answer is expected after an interrogative with 
ov (§ 608), it has acquired the positive meaning, therefore, 
accordingly, ποῖ: οὔκουν ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ, hence 7], do not think 
so; Poet. οὐκοῦν ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι, well, then, 
7, ἜΝ cease when 7 really have no stren 


3. viv (enclitic, postpositive), a weakened νῦν, corre- 
sponds to the unaccented English now. 

4. τοίνυν, hence, therefore, surely, is a νύν pean 
by the assuring τοί (§ 643, 10). | 

δ: τοίγαρ, so then, therefore, yet ; more ΘΕ δ τοιγάρ- 
TOL, τοιγαροῦν. ὁ * 


6. ὥςτε, 80 that, ὃ 632, 4 


IX. Final Conjunctions. 
(Respecting the Moods, § 530, etc.) 


§ 638. 1. iva, that, in order that,in order to [ Lat. ut], 
as an adverb also signifies where in a relative sense and in 
indirect questions : οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ εἶ κακοῦ ; do you not 866 
an what (position of ) evil you are? tvacas a Particle of 
purpose is elliptical in ἵνα τί; where γένηται must be sup- 
plied, ὁ, ¢., that what may happen? why? 


§ 639. THE PARTICLES: 347 


On 2. ὡς and 
3. ὅπως, see §§ 631, 632, 3. 
4. ὄφρα, ὃ 635, 10. 
5. uh= Lat. ne, that not, in order that not, §§ 530, 
ete., 614; after suche of Rearing 616, Obs. 3 


X. Hypothetical Conjunctions. 
(Respecting the Moods, § 535, etc.) 

§ 639. 1. εἰ, 27 ‘ 
in indirect questions whether, § 610; in BP se twhere Be, 
εἰ γάρ are also used), 2f only, if but, § 514. Observe also 
εἰ μή in the sense of except, like the Lat. nisi: ἡμῖν οὐδέν 
ἐστιν ἀγαθὸν ἄλλο εἰ μὴ ὁπλᾶ καὶ ἀρετή, we have no other 
good except weapons and valor; εἰ μὴ si, nisi si, unless ; 
εἴπερ, siquidem, uf indeed, certainly 7f, contains an em- 
phatic assurance: Poet. ἥ καὶ γεγηθὼς ταῦτ᾽ ἀεὶ λέξειν So- 
κεῖς ; εἴπερ τί γ᾽ ἔστι τῆς ἀληθείας σθένος, do you really 
think you will always speak thus joyously ? (answer) if 
indeed (certainly 16) there ἐδ any force in truth. 

2. ἐάν, 2. 6.. εἰ GV (av, nv), 7; 
in indirect questions, whether, § 610. 

3. av, 7 suppose, perhaps (postpositive), 
always denotes that something may happen only under 
certain conditions, and hence is often untranslatable. 


On ἄν with the (potential) Optative, ὃ 516. 
« «© (hypothetical) Indicative, § 537. 


εἰ *« Indicative, denoting repetition, ὃ 494. 
9 « Future Indicative, ὃ 500, Ods. 

ye ** — Subjunctive with relatives, ὃ 554. 
ες “ “ with particles of epi 557. 


F “ς Infinitive, 88 575, 576. 
“ “ς ῬαγΠοΙρΙ68; ὃ 595. 
Obs.—ay is often used twice in the same clause: οὐκ ἂν ὀρθῶς οὐδ᾽ 
ὑγιῶς ὁ τοῦτο ποιήσας περὶ οὐδενὸς ἂν λογίσαιτο, he who did this would 
not, I suppose, judge correctly or soundly about any thing. : 


848 THE PARTICLES. ᾿ς § 640. 


4, Hom. κέ, κέν Renta and postpositive) is used almost entirely 
like ἄν. 


XI. Concessive Conjunctions. 


§ 640. 1. εἰ καί (ἐὰν καί), if even, although, 
denotes a simple concession: poet. πόλιν, εἰ καὶ μὴ βλέ- 
mec, φρονεῖς δ᾽ ὅμως, οἵᾳ νόσῳ ξύνεστιν, though you have 
not sight, yet you are aware in what misery the city ws 
envolved. 


2. καὶ εἰ (καὶ ἐάν, κἄν), even tf, even though, 
denotes an emphatic concession, like e¢zwmsz ; ἡγεῖτο av- 
δρὸς εἶναι ἀγαθοῦ ὠφελεῖν τοὺς φίλους, καὶ εἰ μηδεὶς μέλλοι 
εἴσεσθαι, he deemed it to belong to a good man to benefit 
his friends, even if no one should know it. 


Obs.—The distinction between εἰ καί and καὶ εἰ consists mainly in 
the former giving the emphasis of the καί to the Protasis, the 
latter to the Apodosis. Hence the meaning is in many cases al- 
most the same. 

3. καίπερ With the participle, ὃ 587, 5. 


In the Apodosis, the Concessive Conjunctions are ‘often followed 
by ὅμως, notwithstanding, ὃ 630, 7. 


B) Particles of Emphasis. 


§ 641. 1. γέ (enclitic and postpositive), αὐ Zeast [Latin 
quidem], gives the word before it greater weight, and is 
often represented in other languages merely by a more 
emphatic accent on the word to which ye is attached: 
Hom. εἴπερ yap “Ἕκτωρ ye κακὸν καὶ ἀνάλκιδα φήσει, ἀλλ᾽ 
οὐ πείσονται Tpwec, for 7f Hector shall call (you) base 
and effeminate, yet the Trojans will not believe (it); 
Hom. ἀλλὰ σύ, ci δύνασαί γε, περίσχεο παιδός, but do you, 
Uf you can, protect your son; τοῦτό γε οἶμαι ὑμᾶς ἅπαντας 
ἠσθῆσθαι, this at least I think you all have perceived ; 
Hom. ὅτις τοιαῦτά γε ῥέζοι, whoever should do such things. 
ye is very frequently affixed to pronouns: ἔγωγε, ego gué- 


8642. THE “PARTICLES. 349 


dem, oye (Hom. he, he specially); ὅςγε strengthened ὅς, 
que quidem. 

2. γοῦν (postpositive), at least | Lat. certe], is compound- 
ed of γέ and οὖν, and hence more emphatic than γε alone. 


3. πέρ (enclitic and postpositive), just, exactly, very, 
shortened from the adverb περί, very (δ 466), serves to give 
precision to the relative: ὅςπερ (ὃ 218), the very one who ; 
ὥςπερ, just as. In Homer it is added to participles in a 
sense similar to that of καίπερ (§ 587, 5): μηδ᾽ οὕτως aya- 
θός περ ἐὼν θεοείκελ᾽ ᾿Αχιλλεῦ κλέπτε νόῳ, be not so stealthy 
in purpose, divine Achilles, though you are so very noble 
(wronical). 


§ 642. 4. δή (certainly, to be sure, well then, therefore), 
points to what is obvious in a single idea or in a whole 
sentence. δή i8 used principally in three ways: | 

a) to emphasize single words: ποῖά ἐστιν ἃ ἡμᾶς ὠφελεῖ; 
ὑγίεια καὶ ἰσχὺς καὶ κάλλος καὶ πλοῦτος δή, what kind of 
things are those which benefit us? health, and strength, 
and beauty, and, certainly, wealth; δῆλα δή, to be sure tt 
is clear; νῦν ὁρᾶτε δή, now you surely sce; ἄγε δή, well! 
come ; τί δή ; What then? μάλιστα δή, very much so, at the 
beginning of an apodosis; καὶ τότε δή, now, just then. On 
καὶ δὴ Kal, ὃ 624, 4. 

6) to. confirm a sentence by referring to what precedes : 
τὸν piv δὴ πέμπει, him, then, he sends; Poet. ot τηλικοίδε 
καὶ διδαξόμεσθα δὴ φρονεῖν πρὸς ἀνδρὸς τηλικοῦδε ; We Even 
at such an age are, then (according to the preceding 
speeches), to be taught wisdom by a man of such an 
age? we ἕν τινι φρουρᾷ ἐσμεν οἱ ἄνθρωποι, καὶ οὐ δεῖ δὴ 
ἑαυτὸν ἐκ ταύτης λύειν, We men are, as it were, placed 
at some post, and ut is therefore not proper to aban- 
don tt. τ 


6) referring to time, very much like the particle of time, 
ἤδη, Lat. jam καὶ ποχλὰ δὴ ἄλλα λέξας cin, and after 
having already stated many other things, he said ; νῦν δή, 


350 THE PARTICLES. § 643, 


Just now. Hom. τὰ δὴ viv πάντα τελεῖται, all that is just 


now being done. 


5. δήπου, surely, I suppose, also δήπουθεν, 
is often used ironically in assertions which admit of no reply: 
τρέφεται δὲ ψυχὴ τίνι; μαθήμασι δήπου, the soul is nourished by what? 
(answer) surely by learning. τί δήπου, well, then, what do you sup- 
pose ? 
6. δῆτα, certainly, 
negative οὐ δῆτα, certainly not ; ri δῆτα, well! what then? 
7. δῆθεν, clearly, evidently. 
8. dai, 
another form of δή, but only used in questions: ri dai; well! 
what? how so? 
§ 643. 9. 4, verily, truly 
(to be distinguished from ἤ, 07, than, § 626), strengthens 
an assurance. 7 μήν (Hom. 7 shy) is the common form 
of an oath: ὥμοσαν ὅρκους ἦ μὴν μὴ μνησικακήσειν, they 
swore that they would truly not cherish revenge. On the 
Interrogative 7, δδ 607, 608. 
In Homer ἦ is appended to ἐπεί and τί, to add strength 
to them: ἐπεὶ ἦ, τί ἢ, for which also ἐπειή, τιή is written. 
10. roi (enclitic and postpositive), J assure you, let me tell you. 


οὔτοι, truly not; strengthened forms: roiyap, τοιγαροῦν, τοιγάρτο, 
(§ 637, 5). 


aA: ἤτοϊ, verily, Faith (ἢ ne oi), 
serves as a naive assurance in Epic poetry: ἤτοι ὕγ᾽ ὡς εἰπὼν κατ᾽ 
ἄρ᾽ ἕζετο, now when he had so spoken he sat down. 

On the disjunctive ἤτοι----ἤ, either, or, see ὃ 626, a. 


12. μήν Ham. μάν, μέν), verily, truly [Latin verwin, 
vero |, 
Hom. ὧδε yap ἐξερέω, καὶ μὴν rereXe ἑσμένον ἔσται, for 80 
will I speak out, and truly ἐξ will be fulfilled ; τί μήν; 
why !, what ? why not ? (compare § 404, Ods.). 

13. μέντοι, yet, however, certainly, Lat. vero, 
from μέν, the weaker form of μήν: ἐς Οἰνιάδας ἐστράτευσαν 
kal ἐπολιόβδουν, ov μέντοι εἷλόν γε, ἀλλ᾽. ἀνεχώρησαν. ἐπ᾽ 
οἴκου, they made an expedition against Giniade, and be- 


§ 643. THE PARTICLES. 351 


sieged it; yet they did not conquer it, but returned 
home. | 
14. vai, yea, in fact. 


- 
15. vn, truly, 


followed by the names of gods in the Accusative, who are 
invoked as witnesses in an oath: νὴ Δία, by Zeus. 


16. μά, truly, 
in negative oaths: ov μὰ Δία, no, by Zeus; also in positive 
ones, when vai precedes: vat μὰ Ala, truly by Zeus (ὃ 399, 
Obs. ). 


17. Hom. θήν (enclitic), truly, surely, 
similar to the Attic δήπου (ὃ 642, 5), often with an ironical mean- 
ing: ob θήν μιν πάλιν αὖτις ἀνήσει θυμὸς ἀγήνωρ νεικείειν βασιλῆας, 
his courageous heart will surely not again incite him to taunt kings. 


5 


τῶ aed 


a ae +. ae 
ὃ owt ἐμ 
a ἈΝ ΕΣ ἐὺ 


a 
td 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


(The numbers indicate the §, not the pages.) 


ABODE. 


** 4 bode,” to be supplied, 411. 

Absolute Genit., 428; 584 
Acc., 586. 

Abstracts in the Plur., 362, 
Obs.—mostly Fem., 103. 
Accent, 17, etc. — General 
rules, 79, etc. —of Nouns, 
107, etc.; 118; 123; 145— 
of Comparatives, 171 — of 
Pron., 207 —Irregularities 
in the declensions, i121; 
123; 131; 133; 142; 163; 
166; 181; 183—in Adverbs, 
201; 165—in Verbs, 229; 
331, etc.—in the Strong 
Aor., 255 —in the Perf., 

. 276; 284—in the Strong 
Pass. Stem, 293 —irreg., 
332,-etc. —in derivation, 
340, Obs. 4, etc. 

Accusative, orig. ending, 173, 
Obs. —meaning, 395—of 
the outer obj., 396, etc.—of 
the inner obj., 400, etc. — 
of double obj., 402, etc.—of 
the predicate, 403 — free 
Acc., 404, etc.—Adverbial, 
201; 203; with Prep., 441,1 
—with the Inf., 567, ete. 

*“Accustomed to,” expressed 
by Aor. and Imperf. Ind., 
with av, 494, Obs. 1. 

“Acquainted with,” or ‘ig- 
norant of,” with Genit., 
414, 3. 

Action, Suffixes for, 342. 

Active, 476—Act., Mid., Pass. 
meaning, 328. 

Acute Accent, 17; 80, ete.— 


87, 2. 

“Adapted for’ Suffix, 351. 

Adjectives, declens., 114; 126; 
154; 164, etc. — Compar., 
197—Genders, 180, etc.—of 
8 Endings, 185, etc. —of 2 
Endings, 182; 189 --- οὗ 1 
Ending, 190—Derived, 350 
—Contr., 183—Subs. fem., 
127, 4—with Art., 379—fol- 
low the Genit., 412, Obs. 

Adverbs, 201, etc. —Correla- 


ATTRIBUTE. 
223— with the Art., 879 --- 
as Adject., 382. 


so expressed by <Acc., 


406. 

Alphabet, 3. 

Anastrophe, 90. 

Aorist, weak, with transitive 
meaning, 329—with x, 310 
—strong with intransitive 
meaning, 329—of proverbs 
andgnomes, 494—Ind. 492, 
etc.—in Condit. sentences, 
543—in Condit. sentences, 

. 5389; 541—Moods, 495, etc. 
—Subj. in cond. sent., 545, 
Obs. 1— Opt. and Inf. 497 
—Part., 496. 

Apocope, 64, D. 

Apostrophe, 15; 64; 65, Ὁ. 
Apposition, 361,12; 885—Ap- 
positive Partic., 579; 583. 
Article, 106—Crasis, 65— 
without Accent, 97, 1—as 
Demonstr. Pron., 212, D.— 
for the Relative, 213, D.— 
Origin in Homer, 368; 370, 
‘Obs.—omitted, 376, etc.— 
Meaning, 369, etc.—Neut., 
with Genit., 381; 410—Po- 

sition, 383-390. 

Aspirates, 32; 52, etc.—at the 
begin. of two successive 
syll., 53; 274, 1—Redupli- 
cated by Tenues, 62. 

Aspiration dropped or re- 
moved, 32, D.—thrown 


in the strong Perf., 279. 
Assimilation, 45; 47, etc; 
50 ὃ; 51; 56. 
Asyndeton, 624 a, Obs. 
Atona, 9i—before Enclit., 93 


e; 98. 
“Attempting an action,” ex- 
pressed by the Imperf., 489. 
Attic Decl., 132—Ending, 157 
—Future, 263—Reduplic., 
275, 1; 278 
Attraction, 597, etc.—invert- 


ed, 604. 
Attribute, 361, 11— Attribu- 


tive, 217, etc.—Num. Adyv., 


back, 54— omitted, 52, D.—* 


COMPLETED. 


Attrib. compounds, 359, 2, 

_ and Obs. (Comp. 360)—At- 
tributive additions, 383- 
386 — Attrib. Partic., 578. 

Augment, 234, etc. Omitted, 
234, Ὁ. ; 2835—Double, 237 ; 
240—in Compounds, 238, 
etc. —irreg., 270, Ὁ. 


Barytones, 19. 

sé Be,” “cc become,” 6 make,” 
etc., 417; 361, 7. 

“Begin,” “interrupt,” end,” 
verbs with Part.,590—with 
Genit., 419 ὃ. 

“ Benefiting,” Verbs of, 396. 

“Ba »’ Verbs with Genit., 


ἣν Canal ἠβραρθξ ἐνῷ with 
n “9 9 . 

Cardinal Num., 220. 

Case, 100—Use of, 392, ete.— 
Endings, 100 — Acc., 142; 
1583—in Comps., 354, Obs. 

“ Cause,” in the Genit., 408, 
7 —422; 426—Dat., 439— 
Part., 581. 

Challenge or Command—in 
the Subjunc.,509—by ὅπως, 


553, Obs. 
Characteristic, 249. 
Circumjlex, 21; 80; 83, etc. ; 


81 a. 

Classes of Verbs in a, 247- 

250; 320-327; of Verbs in 

pt, 305-319. 

Collective Sing., 362. 

Common Gend., 127, 5; 140. 

“Community,” expressed by 
Dat. 436. 

Comparative, 192, etc. —de- 
clens., 170, etc.—irreg., 199 
—Adv., 203—with Genit., 
416—Adj. and Verbs with 
Genit., 416, Obs. 3; 423. 

Compensation by lengthen- 
ing, 42—for v, 49, Obs. 3; 
147, 1; 233, 2—for vr, v0, vd, 
50; 147, 1; 187—for o, 270. 

Completed Action in Verbs, 


tive Adjective Art., 384— 


484 ; 435; 502-506 


354 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


+ 


COMPOUNDS. 


Compounds, Divis. of Syll.,73 
— Accent, 85; 131; 165; 
183; 332— Adj., 182, etc. ; 
199, 8 3— Augm. in Comp. 
Verbs, 238, etc.—treated as 
simple Verbs, 402— with 
Genitive, 424— with Dat., 
437. 

Concessive Participle, 582. 

Conditional Sentences, 534, 

“ 549—negat., 616. 

Conjunctions, 623, etc. 

Connecting Vowels, 233, 1, 2, 
5; 262, etc.; 275. 

Consonants, Divis. of, 30, etc., 
44—in dividing Syll., 71, 


etc. 

Contraction, 36, etc.—in De- 
clens., 118; 122; 128; 180, 
etc.; 163, D.; 166; 168 
Double, 167—Omitted, 35, 
D. 1; 165; 166, D.; 233 
D. 4; 243, D. ; 263, D.—of 
the Pres. Stem, 243, etc.— 
of Adv., 201—Contr. Syll. 
long, 75, Obs.—Accent, $7; 
163; 331—Contr. Fut., 259 ; 
262, etc. 

Co-ordination, 519, 1 a, 2. 

Coronis, 16; 65. 

Correlation, 519, 4— Correl. 
Pron. 216; 2i8s—Adyv., 217, 


etc. 
Crasis, 16; 65— Accent in, 


Dative, Perispome, 109—Oxy- 
tone, 133, 2—in Moneuyal. 
142—in σι(ν), 68; 165, D. 
—represented by φιν, 178, 
D. — Meaning, 429, etc. — 
with Prepos., 447, 3—of ad- 
vant. and disady., 431—of 
interest, 431, etc.—ethical, 
433 — of community, 436, 
etc.—of instrument, 438, 
etc. —of measure, 440 — 
free, 441-443. 

“ὁ Declaration,” Verbs of— 
with Acc. and Inf., 567 — 
with Inf., 560, 2— with 
Part., 593 — with οὐ, 617, 
Obs. 1—Sentences of, 525. 

sa ae miata a Augment in} 


Defectives in Compar., 200. 
si ed Object, 400 c—Inf., 


Demonstrative Article, 369— 
Pron., 212; 216; 475—fol- 


lows the predicate, 367—}. 


Art. with, 389. 

Denominatives, 339. 

Dental Cons., 80—dissim. 46 
—beeome σ, 47; 67—mutes 
dropped before σ, 49; 147, 
1; 149; 260—in Perf., 281 
— Charact. in Verbs, 250, 


Obs.—Fut., 260, 3. 


GENDER. 


Deponents,482—Pass.,328, 2— 
Pass. Mean., 328, 4; 483, 8. 

Derivative Ending in Com- 
paratives, 357. 

Description expressed by the 


, 2 
237 ; 

Diminutives, 347; 104. 

Diphthongs, Pronunciation, 
8—Origin, 26; 35, 2—be- 
fore Vowels, 35, Obs.; 160; 
248, Obs.—without Augm., 
235—spurious, 27. 

Disjunctive questions. (See 

ouble question.) 

Dissimilation, 46. 

Distributives, 223. 

Dorie Fut., 204. 

Doubling of Conson., 62; 34. 

Double questions, 611 — οὐ 
and μή, 615, Obs. 1. 

Dual represented by P1., 365, 


Effect and Consequence ex- 
oe by Acc. and Inf., 


Elision, 64—Accents, 88—be- 
fore Enclit., 96, 3. 

Enclitics, 92, etc.—retaining 
the Accent, 96. 

Ending, 100 —changed in 
Comps. 355—of the Ist De- 
clens., 134—of 2d, 172. 

Enjoying, verbs of, with Gen- 
itive, 419 d. 

Epexegesis, 624 a, Obs. 

Kthical Dative, 433. 

Exclamations, 393—in Acc., 
399, Obs.—in Genit., 427. 

Extent, exp. by Acc., 405. 


Fear and Anxiety, 533 ; 512; 
616, Obs. 3. 

Feeling, verbs of, with Acc., 
399—with Dat., 489, Obs.— 
with Genitive, 422, Obs.— 
with Part., 592. 

Feminines, 103; 127; 138; 

63 


163. 

Final letters, 67, etc. —Syll. 
long—bef. vowels short, 75, 
D. 2— Contr. Accent, 87; 


183. 
Future, 499, etc., 484 — Act. 
with trans. Meaning, 329 
—periphrastic, 501— Fut. 
Perf., 505 —Ind. with κέ, 
554, Obs. 2—Particip. with 
Art., 500. 


Gender, known by general 
rules, 101, etc.; 127— by 
ending of Stem, 125; 137, 


INTERROGATIVE. 


etc.—by Declens., 105; 122 
—in A Declens., 122—in O 
Declens., 127—in Conson. 
Declens., 137, etc. 

Generic Article, 375. 

Genitive Perispome, 100; 118 
—Oxytone,133,2—Paroxy- 
tone, 181—in Monosyll., 142 
—represented by θεν and 
φιν, 178, D.; 118—Meaning, 
407—with Prepos., 447, 2— 
with Subst.,408, etc.—with 
Adj. and Advy., 414, etc. — 
with Verbs, 417, etc.—free 
Genit., 425, etc. 

Gentile Names, 349 ; 350. 

Grave accent, 19, etc. ; 86. 

Gutturals, 30—with o form ὅδ, 
48; 260—before μ, become 
y, 47— with «, become ac, 
57—Charact. of Pres., 250; 
251, D. 


Heteroclites, 174. 

Hiatus,63—apparent, 63, D.4. 

Hypothetical Sent. (See Con- 
itional Sent.). 


Imperative, 2283—1 Aor., 53— 
268, D.;518—in Cond.Sent., 
545, Obs. 3—exp. by 2 Pers. 
Fut. with ov, 499, Obs. — 
supplied by Inf., ὅτ. - 

Imperfect, 488, etc.—in Cond. 
Sent., 5483—in Prot. and 
Apod., 588 ; 541. 

Inclination, 91, ete. 

Incomplete Action, 484, etc. . 

Indefinite Subject, 361,3, Obs. 
2—in Neut., 364. 

Indefinite Pronouns, 214, etc. ; 
216—Adv., 92, 4. 

Indicative, 507 —in Depend. 
Sent.,520; 523—in depend., 
declar.,and interrog.Sent., 
526—in Condit. Sent., 536, 
etc., 545—in temp. Sent., 
556—hypoth. Ind. in Cond. 
Sent., 537—in Sent. of pur- 
pose, 550. 

Indirect Object, 430 a. ; 

Individualizing Article, 371, 


etc. 
Infinitive Act., in μεναι, μεν, 
9 1)», ὃ: 7 4), ----Ἴἢ vae 
Aor. and Perf. Accent, 333, 
1-5; 268, Obs. 1— Use, 559 
—with Art., 379—as Sub- 
ject, 563; 574, 1—Acc., 2— 
Gen., 3—Dat., 4—with μή, 
and ov, 617—with μὴ οὐ, 
621 c, d—for Imper., 577. 
“ὁ Injure,” Verbs—with Acc., 
396. 


Instrument, suffix, 344—Da- 
tive of, 488; 574, 4. 

Interest or Advantage, Dat. 
of, 481, etc.—Middle of, 479. 

Interrogative Pron., 214; 216 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Ὑ 


355 


IRREGULAR, 


—direct and indirect, 475 b; 
609—in depend. Sent., 525 
—joined with Demonstr., 
606, Obs. 1. 

Irregular Nouns, 177—Verbs, 
320, Obs. 

Iterative form, 334, D., etc.— 
in Imperf. and Aor., 335, Ὁ. 


Judicial Proceedings, Verbs 
of—with Genit., 422. 


Kinds of Verbs, 225, 2. 


Labials, 30—before pu, 47 — 
before o, 48; 260—verbal 
stem, 249, 

Lengthening, 40, etc. ; 147; 
155; 165; 173, Obs. — in 
Pres., 248S—in the Fut., 260, 
2; 261—in Redupl., 275 
(Comp., 273, D. ; 278)—of 
Vowels, 243, D. 3; 263, D. 

ey τὰ το 33—in divis. of Syll., 


Locative, 179. 
Long by Nature, 75. 


Manner, exp. by Dat., 441. 

Masculines,102; 137—disting. 
from Fem., 113; 122; 134 
—for Fem., 362, Obs. 2. 

Material, suffix, 352, 3, 4 — 
Genit., 408, 3; 414,2; 418. 

Measure, in Dat., 440. 

Medic, 32. 

Metaplasm, 175. 

Metathesis, 59; with strong 
Aor. Act. and Mid., 257; 
D., 282, 285; with strong 
Aor. Pass., 295, D. 

Middle, 477, etc. — direct, 478 
— indirect, 479 — Subject- 

- ive, 480—Causative, 481 — 
Aor. with Mid. meaning, 
255,2; 271—Fut. with Act. 
Meaning, 264; 266; 328, 1 
—with Pass. meaning, 266. 

Modesty of Assertion, exp. in 
Opt., with ἄν, 517, Obs. 1. 

Momentary Action, 484 ; 492- 
498. 

pets ee Stems, length- 
ened; 142 b—in A, v, p, Perf., 

. 282—AccentofMon. words, 
142—-with Enclit., 94. 

Moods, 225, 4. 

Multiplicatives, 223. 

* Must” and ‘“ Should,” Verbs 
of, in Imperf., 490. 

Mutes,31,etc.—Assimilation, 
49, D. ; 52—before Liquids 
and Nasals, 78—Stems of 
Verbs, 248. 


Name in Genit.,; 408, 9 — of 
Animals, Gender, 140. 

“Name,” “Select,” etc., Verbs 
of, 361, 7,10; 392; 403. 


PASSIVE, 


Narrative in Aor. Ind., 492. 
Nasals, 33—in divis. of Syll., 
(S ; 


ΚΣ : 

Necessity, expressed by Ver- 
bal Adj., 300. 

Negatives, 619,.and Obs, 

Negative Pron. and Adv., 219. 

Neuters, 104; 139 — Dental 
Stems, 147 ὃ; —Liquid 
Stems, 151—Sigma Stems, 
165—Marks of, 105,3; 125; 
136— Accent, 340, Obs. 4— 
as Adv., 201; 203; 401— 
Plu. with Sing. Verbs, 363 
—Adj. as Predic., 366. 

Nominal Predicate, 361, 4, 
ete. 

Nominative Dual oxytone, 
131, 1—for Voc., 129 ; 393— 
meaning, 392. 

se from Verbal Stems, 


Numbers, 100, 1; 225, 1— 
‘*two” in the PI., 365. 

Numerals, 220, Obs. — with 
Art., 374, 


Objective Inf., 561 — Genit., 
574, 3, Obs.—Part., 581; 361, 


Objective Comys., 359, 3, and 
Obs.—Genit., 408, 5 b; 413. 

“Opinion to be of,” Verb, 
with Inf., 560, 2; 567. 

Optative, 298 —Pres., 2 Pers. 
Sing. in ofa, 233, D. 1 — 
Perf. Mid., 289-514— po- 
tential with av, 51T, Obs. 2; 
552, Obs.—in dep. sent., 524 
—Opt.in dep. Sent. ,522,etc. 
—in indir. Speech, 523—in 
depend., declar., and inter. 
Sent., 528—in Sent. of pur- 
pose, 532—in Sent. of fear, 
533—in Condit. Sent., 546, 
ete.—in Relat. Sent., 555— 
in tempor. Sent., 556 ; 558 
—exp. interest, 430. 

Ordinal Numbers, 220 —in 
Acc., 405, Obs. 1. 

Oxytones, 17—before Enclit., 
93 a. 


Paroxytones, 17 —in Crasis, 
89—before Enclit., 93 6, 

Participles, Declens., 187 — 
Voc. Sing., 148—Perf. Act., 
276, D. em., 188; 277, 
D.—Pres., Aor., and Perf. 
Mid., 333, 6-10—with Art., 
379, etc. ; 578, Obs. —in 
Dat., 435, Obs. — hypoth. 
with μή, 583, 618. 

Particles, 92,5; 623, ete. 

Partitive Genitive, 408, 4; 
412; 419. 

Passive, 483— with Dative, 
434—Aor. in Active verbs 


Present Ind 


- PRESENT. 

Patronymices, 348. 

Peculiar Charact. Suffix, 351 
—Genit., 408, 8. 

ἐς Perceive,” Verbs of, with . 
Genit., 420; 417, Obs. — 
with Infin., 560, 2— with 
Part., 591. 

Perfect, weak, 277, D. ; 280, 

etc.—strong, 277, etc.—in- 

trans. meaning, 330—trans. 

and intrans. meaning, 329 

—use of the Ind., 502— 

Moods, Inf., Part., 506 — 

Perfects with Pres. mean- 

ing, 508." 

Period, hypoth., 534—inter- 

posed, 550—Negative, 616. 

Perispomes, 21—before En- 

clit., 93 ὃ. 

Personal Endings, 226—Pro- 
noun,, 250, etc.; 92, 2— 
Meaning,469—Genit.,470 @ 
—for reflec. pron., 471, Obs. 
a, b—Personal Constr., 571. 

Place, Suffix of, 345—Genit. 
of, 412; 415; 425—Dative, 
442—Adyv. with Genit., 415 
—Desig. of, 82,2; 179; 412. 

Plenty and Want, Adject. of, 
414, 2—Verbs, 418. 

Plural, 3 Pers. Pl. Mid. in 
-atat, -ato, 226, D.; 233, D. 
6—1 Mid. in μεσθα, 233, Ὁ. 
5; 362, ete. 

Position, 71, etc. ; 193. 

Possessive Article, 373 — 
Pron., 208—with Art., 388; 
470—of the reflective, 472 
b, c—Poss. exp. by Genit., 
408, 2; 414, 1—by Dat., 422. 

Possibiligy,exp.by Verb Adj., 
300—by Opt. with ἄν, 516, 
etc. ; 546—by Part. with 

ἄν, 595. 

Predicate, 361, 3, etc. — de- 
pendent, 361, 10; 589, 2— 
without Art., 378, 387. 

Predicative Acc.,408—Genit., 
417— Acc. with Inf., 570— 
Gen. or Acc., 572 — Part.; 
589 5 


Prepositions, lose their Ac- 
cent, 8S—Elision in dissyl., 
64; 90; 238—Anastrophe, 
90—Augm. aft. Prep., 238, 
etc.—Use, 444—Adverbial, 
446— with Acc., 449 f— 
Genit., 451, etc.—Dat., 456, 
ete.—Genit. and Acc. ,458— 
with three cases, 462, etc.— 
spurious, 445. 

4 486, etc. — 

Moods, Inf. Part., 491 — 

hist., 487 — exp. by Ind. 

Aor., 494, Obs. 2—enlarge- 

ment of, 246—Stem, 231— 

like the Verb Stem, 247— 

with lengthened Stem 


with Mid. meaning, 328, 3. 


Vowel, 248—from Verb 


356 


ENGLISH INDEX, 


PRIMITIVE. 


Stem with τ, 249— with :, 
250, etc. 

Primitive words, 339. 

Principal Conjugations, 230 
—first, 231, etc. ; 320, etc. — 
second, 302-319— Declen- 
sions, 111—first, 112-134— 
second, 135. 

Proclitics (see Atona). 

Prohibition,” 518; 510; 499 
—Prohibit, Hinder, Deny, 
etc.—have the Infin. with 
μή, an Obs. 3—with μὴ od, 


Prolepsis, 519, 5, Observ. 2 
(Comp., 567 ; al Ἂ 

Pronunciation, 4, etc. 

Proparoxytones, "17 — before 
Encl., 93 d 

Properispomes, 21—before 
Encl., 93 d. 

Proper Names in -a,115, D. 2 
—ns, 114--- κλῆς, 167—with 
Art., 371, Obs. ; 375, Obs. ; 
387, ‘Obs. 

“ Property, ” Suffix of, 346; 
343, Obs. 


Quantity, in Crasis, 65—in 
Monosyll., 142 — doubtful, 
75, D. , L—teversing quant., 
81, D., 1, Obs. 

Quantitative rere and Ady. * 
rape SF 2 914. κ᾿ 

seers ubious in the 
Subj., 511. 


Reciprocal Pron., 211. 

Reduplication, 53, 10 a@—in 
the Perf., 273, etc.—in the 
2 Aor., 257 d—in Verbs in 
μι, 808. i 

Reflective Pron., 210—Mean- 
ing, 471—3d for 1st and 2d 
Pers., Obs. c—to denote 
possession, 472—for Re- 
ciprocal, 473. 

Relative Adj., 414, 

Relative Pron., 213; 216 — 
Crasis ,65—Compound, 214, 
Obs. 2--Hypoth. 554—fol- 
lows the Predic. Subst., 367 
—used once only; 605. 

RelativeSentences,551—with 
Future Ind., 500—with μή, 
615, Obs. 2—complication, 
604—Connection, 605. 

anaes to,” exp. by the 
Acc., 404. 

Rejeotion. of letters, 61—of.a 
Vowel at begin., see Syn- 
cope—of a vowel at end, 
see Elision. 

Repetition, exp. by the Opt., 
547 (Negative, 616, Obs. 2) 
555, Obs. 1; 558, Obs. 1. 


SUBJUNOTIVE. 


Result of an Act, 348—in the 
Acc., 400 ἃ, 
Root, 245. 


“Scare,” **Obstruct,” a ἃ 
other Verbs, with the Inf., 


560, 3. 

Semivowels, 31. 

Sentences, Compound, 519, 3, 
5—Principal, Subordinate, 
519, 4—Moods of, 525, etc. 
—Condit., 534 ; 549, οἰς.-- 
Negat., 616—of Experience 
in ‘Aor. Ind., 494—Interr., 
525—of Purpose, 530-533 — 
Negat., 616. 

Shortening, at the beginn., 
74, D.—of the final syll., 
"5, D. 2—in the Perf., 285, 
D.—in the Subj., 228, D.; 
233, ἊΣ 2—in Rel. Sent., 


59 7,3 
“ Should, ” exp. in depend. 
Sent. by the Subj., 527 b, 


Opt., 528 ὃ. 
se Show,” Verbs of with Part., 
593 ; 580. 

Sigma, future, 259; 260, etc. 

—Aor., 269. 

Singular, 3 Pers. in e (v), 68, 
4— Accent on Imp. Mid., 
268, 2— Accent on 2 Aor. 
Teh Act. and Mid., 333, 
11, 12, 362. 

“Space, » exp. by the Accus., 


Spiritus, position, 12; -22— 

with p and pp, 13 — Spir. 

Asper, 60 b—in Augment, 

235, Obs.—Spir. Lenis, 11. 

Stem, 100—St. Vowel length- 
ened, 147,2; 248; 253, Obs 
261, 270, changed to ε, 15. 

“ Strive, » & Aim at,” Verbs 
Tot Gee Genitive, 419 c—with 
n 

Subject, 36h. “3_Omitted, Obs. 
2—with Genit. Abs., [δῦ a 
—of a Subordinate Sent. 
as Object of the Principal 
Sent., 397; 519, 5—Obs. 2— 
Subj. ᾿δῇ Prin. ‘Sent. in the 
Subord. Sent., 602; 519, 5, 
Obs. 2. 

Subjective Genit., 408, 5 a. 

be es 298. Shortened, 
233, D.2; 255, D. 1; 302, D. 
—of the’ Perf , 239 — 
of verbs in με, a cent, 80.--- 
Meaning, 508, etc.—similar 
to Fut., 513—in dep. sent., 
521—in’ depend. assert. and 
interrog., 527—in sent. of 
purpose, 531, 532, Obs.— 
exp. fear, 533—in condit. 


sent., 545, 554, 555, Obs. 2 


WORTH. 
—in tempor. sexrt., 557, 558, 
Obs. 2. 


Subordination, 519, 3. 

Substantive, degrees of, 199, 
D.—joined to the Dat., , 430, 
Obs., 432, Obs. 

S , 840; 


178. 
Superlatives, Ady., 203—with 


Genit., 416, Obs. ὁ with ἃ ὡς, 
631 a—with é ὅτι, 633, 1 ὃ. 

Supplements to the Part., 
361, 


8. 
Supplementary Aorist, 270, 


syllabic Augm., 234— with 
—. vowel, 237 —omit- 


ted, 2 
syllabics of both quantities, 
75, D., 1; 
;| Synizesis, 39; 66; 243, D., 3. 
Syncope, 61 ἐ; Obi, D. 


“Taking part in,” with Gen- 
itive, 414,5; 419 a. 

Temporal Adj., ye ie Obs.— 
Augm., 234 ὃ; 

Tenses, οὐδ. 3 prin “Tenses, 
521— Subord., 522— Tense 
Stems, 227. 

dee 32—for Aspirates,32, 


Time, in Acc., 399 ὃ; 405 — 
in Genit., 426—in Dat., 443 
Adv. of with Genit., 415— 
kinds, degrees of, 484, 1, 2. 

Transitive and Intransitive 
ac ae 329, etc.; 476— 

477. 

ΣῪ ” and other Verbs 

with Genitive, 419 ὃ. 


;| Uncontracted Syll., 35, D., 1." 


Verba Contracta among Iter- 
φανόν, 886 d—V. pura, im- 


pura, 247. 

Verbal Pred., 361, 4—Nouns, 
225, 5—Stem, 245, etc. — 
Pres. Stem, 246; 260, 3. 

Vocal Stems, 1 Perf. 280. 

Vowels, 24, etc.—in divis. of 
Syll., 470 — before others, 
74—long without Augm., 
235—Changes, 40, etc.—in 
2 Perf., 278—in derivation, 
340, Obs. 3. 


Weakening of Conson., 60. 
eae expressed by Dat., 


5: Whither, ” expressed by Ac- 
cusative, 406. 

“Wish,” cximemes in . the 
Opt., 514, e 

Worth ‘and Price, in the Gen- 
itive, 408, 6; 


GREEK INDEX. 


a. 

ἃ for n, 24, D. 23; 41, D.; 115, 
D.1; 121, D.2; 235 D.; 270, 
Obs. . 

ἃ for n, 277, D. 

a bec. w, 268; 278—bec. 0,268. 
a bec. n, 40; 115, 1, c; 116, ἃ; 
935; 270; 268; 278; 303. 
a = ε, 87, D.2; 169 D.; 248, 

3 


a bec. az, 24, D. 8. 

a from ao, aw, see ao. 

a after e, ε, p, 41; 115, 1, a; 
a c; 121; 180; 261; 270 : 


a caine vowels, 235. 

a, connecting vowel, 276; 
336, D.; 338, D.—in ‘the 3 
Plar., 302, 3. 

a, characteristic of the First 
or Weak Aorist, 268. 

a, privative, 360—in Adj. with 
the Genit. 414, Obs. 5. 

-a, ending of the Accus., 141; 
156 ; 173, Obs.; 181; 276. 

κα, quantity of 117; 121; 161; 

-a, Plur. ending of Neuters, 

23 186: 141; 173 

-a, Adverbs in, 202. 

-a, Nom. of Substant. in, 172. 

-a, from ao in the Genit., 
122, Obs. 

ἀγαθὸς, Comparison, 199, 1, 

ἄγαμαι (ἀγάομαι), 312, 8-- 
Pass. Depon., 328, 2. 

ἀγανακτέω, with the Particip. Fe 


592. 
ἀγαπῶ, With the Dative, 439, 
Obs.—with the Partic., 592. 
ἀγγέλλομαι, construed per- 
ΒΟΠΔΙΙΥ, 511. ἀγγέλλω, with 
a Partic., 593. 
ἄγε δή, 642, 4 a 
ἀγείρω, 2 Aor., 257, D.—Perf., 


ἀγινέω, 323, D. 39. 

ἄγνυμι, 810, 13—Perf., 275, 2 
—Si 330, 1. 

ἄγχε, omparison of, 203, D. 
—with the Genit., 415. 
ayo, 2 ΒΝ, 961. -Τπῖρον. of 1 
Aor., 2 

Sve pes 2129. 


ἀκούω. 
ἀδικέω, With the Accus., 396 
—Signif., 486, Obs. 
ae (an) into a, 38; into n, 248, 
D. 2—into aa, 336, D. 
aec into ᾳ, 38—into a, 248, 
Obs.—into πὴ 38, Obs. 


deca, 307, D. it. 
ee Verbs in, 353, 6—Fuat. 


᾿ ἀέξω, 822, D. 1 


ἀηδών, Gen. Sing., 163. 

ἄημε, 313, D. 3. 

ἀήρ, Masc., 140. 

at, in the Compar. for o or w, 
195—into ῃ, 235. 

-at, Elided, 64, D. ‘—Short in 
regard to the Accent, 83, 
Obs.2; 108; 229; 268, Obs.1 

al, aide, see εἰ, εἴθε. 

αἰδέομαι, αἴδομαι, 801, 1 : τὸς 
10—Pass. Depon., ’328, 2— 
with the Accus., 399. 

*Aidns, 177, , 192-2», εἰς, 
“Acdov, 41 i. 

αἰδώς, 163. 

-acy, in the Dual, 173, 4. 

ταινα, Fem. . ending, 115, 1. 

αἰνέω, 301, 

αἴνυμαι, 39, Ts 27. 

-αίνω, Verbs i in, 353, 7. 

αἴξ, of both genders, 140. 

aipéw, 327, 1—Perf., 275, Ὁ. 1 
—Distinct. between Act. 
and Mid., 481 b—Passive 
meaning, 483, 3. 

αἴρω, Aor., 270, ‘Obs. 

-αις, Subst. in, 172. 

-a:s, in the Dat. Pl., 119. 

αἰσθάνομαι, 322, 11—-with the 
Gen.,420—with the Partic., 

αἰσχρός, Comparison of, 198, 

αἰσχύνομαι, With Acc., 899... 
with Dat., 489, Obs.—with 
Partic., 592—with the 86, 
ὅ94:---αἰσχύνω, Perf., 286 
aitéw, With double a 402, 

ἀκαχίζω, 319, D. 30. 


Ἰἀκέομαι, 3 301, Ὁ 


ἀκήκοα, 275, 1; 280, Ob 

ἀκηχέδατο, 281, 

ἀκούω, Perf. Act., 275, 1—Id 
Perf. Mid., 988—-with the 


D.|aya, yer 


ἄμεναι. . 


Gen., 420, and Obs.—with 
Partic., 51. 
daxparos,Com arison of,196D. 
ἀκροάομαι, Fut., th 
Gen., 420. 
ἄκων, Gen. Abs., 585 ὃ. 
ἄλαλκον, 820, 1). 11. 
ἀλάλημαι, 275, Ὁ. 
ἀλάομαι, Pass. Depon., 328, 2 
—Perf, oy 210, De 1, 
i Comparative of,” 


4 . 
ἀλδήσκω, 824, D. 80. 
ἀλέασθαι, 269, D. 
ἄλειφαρ, 110. 
ἀλείφω, Perf., 275, 1. 
mabe pe of both genders, 


ἄλεν, eee: 325, Ὁ, ἃ. 

ἀλέξω, 820,11. 

ἀλέω, 801, 1. 
ἄληθες, 165. 

ἄλθομαι, 326, D. 89, 

ἅλες, With Gen., 414, 2, 

ἁλέσκομαι, 327, 17—Perf., 275, 
2—Aor., 316, 12—with the 
Genit., 422, 

ἀλιταίνω, 323, Ὁ. 37. 

ἀλκή, Dat. Sing., 175, D. 

ἀλλά, 6029---ἀλλὰ γάρ, 636, 6, 
d; ἀλλ᾽ ἡ, 629, Obs. B—GAN 
οὖν, 637, 2 

ἀλλάσσω, 1 Aor. Pass., 294, 


8. 
ἀλλήλοιν, etc., 211. 
ἅλλομαι, 1 Aor., 270, Obs.— 
2 Aor., 316, D. "32, 
Ey 911. ἄλλο τι ἢ; ἄλλο 
; 608. 
ἄλλως τε Kai, 624, 4, 
ἅλς, 150. 
ἀλύσκω, 324, 27, Obs. 
ἀλφάνω, 323, D. 38. 


ἁλῶναι, 324, 1. 
ἀλώπηξ irr" si Nom. Sing.,145. 
“op 436 c—with 
Part. -, 58 


ἁμαρτάνω, 03, 12—with Gen., 
419 ὁ. 


ἀμβλίσκω, 324, 18. 
᾿Ιἀμεέβομαι, with Acc., 398. 
ἀμείνων, Signif., 109, 1, Obs. 
ἀμελέω, with Genit., 420, 


Nom., 392, Obs.—withic 


ἱάμεναι, 312, D. 13. 


358 


GREEK INDEX. 


= 


ἁμιλλάομαι. 
ἁμιλλάομαι, Depon. Pass., 
328, 2. 


ἀμνήμων, with Genit., 414, 8. 
ἄμοιρος, with Genit., 414, Ὁ. 
ἁμός, ἀμός, 
ἀμπέχω, 53, d. 
ἀμπισχνοῦμαι, 323, 36. 
ἀμπλακίσκω, 324, 23. 
ἀμπνύνθη, 298, Ὠ.---ἄμπνυτο, 
10,1). 29. 

ἀμφί, 462 -- without Ana- 
strophe, 90. 

ἀμφιέννυμι, 319, 5— Augm., 
,240—with double Acc. 5402. 

ἄμφω, ἀμφότεροι, ἀμφότερον, 
221 — ἀμφοτέῤωθεν, with 
Genit., 415. 

-av-, affixed to form the Pres-|< 
ent Stem, 322. 

ἀν-, privative, 360. 

‘ay, 866 ἐάν. 

"dv, 639, 3—with particles of 
time, ’557—in the Apodosis|a 
of Conditional Sentences, 
585; 537; 541; Comp. 542; 
546—with Aor., 494, Obs. il 
— with Subj., 513. — with 
Fut. Ind., 500, Obs.—with 
Imperf., 494, Obs. 1—with 
Ind., 536, etc. —with Inf., 
575, ‘ete.—with Opt., 516: 
546—with Part., 595—with 
Relatives, 554; δδδ, Obs. 

τὸ Sy Nom. Mase. and Nout. 


, Ὁ. 


-ἂν for awv, Gen. Plur. of 
a-Decl., 118, D. 

ἄνα, 866 ΤΟΤΕ, 

ἀνά, 461—Apocope, 64, D.— 
without Anastro he, 90. 

ἀναβάλλομαι,ν ἢ Inf.,560, 3. 

ἀναβιώσκομαι, 324, 11. 

ἀναγκαῖός εἶμι, construed per- 
sonally, 571. 

ἀναλίσκω, ἀναλώσω, 324, 19. 

pered ag) with double}< 
Acc., 4 

ἄναξ, She Sing, , 148, Ὁ. 

ἀνάξιος, with Genit., 414, 4. 

ἁνδάνω, 322, 23—Augm., 237, 

bvdpdeodpy: Dat. Pl., 175, Ὁ. 

ἀνέγνων, ἀνέγνωσα, Diff. of 
Signif., 329, 1). ° 

ἄνευ, 445: 455, ὅ. 

ἀνέχομαι, double Augm., 240 
—with Part., 590. 

avéwya, avéwxa, 319, 19—Dis-|” 
tinction, 279. 

ἀνήνοθεν, 25, D. 


avrp, aS 177; 1—Genit., 51, 
Obs. 


ἁνήρ, Ἢ “Obs. iB 
ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, 601. 
ἀνοίγω, Augm., 237 — Perf., 


275, 2; 279. 
ἀνορθόω, double Augm., 240. 
ἄντα, ἄντην, ἀντικρύ, see 
ἀντί. 


ἀντέχομαι, With Genit., 419 ὃ. 


ἀρχήν. 
451 --- without Ana- 


204 — τυ ἅ 
ἄνωγα, 511, D. 11—Pluperf., 
258, Ὁ 


ay ὁ 

ἄξιος, with Genit., 414, 4--- 
with Inf., 562. 

ἀξιόχρεως, 184, 

ao into a, 81, Ὁ. 3; 122, Ὁ. 2 
—into ὦ, 87; 122, Ὁ..8 6-- 
into ew, 37, D. 2: "129, D.3 
ὃ; 182: a 8 5 3. 

-ao, Genit. Sing. -» 122, Obs., 
etc., D. 3 0. 

aot, into ῳ, 37. 

aou, Into ew, 243, D. 3 b. 

ἀπαγορεύω, with Part., 590. 

ἀπαντάω, Fut. Mid. with Act. 
meaning, 266. 

ἀπαφίσκω, 824, D. 88. 

ἀπείπων, 827, 12. 

ἄπειρος, with Genit., 419 ὁ. 

ἀπεχθάνομαι, 322, 16. 

:ἰἀπέχομαι, with Genit. 4 414, 3. 

ἀπό, 452—Apocope, 64, 
Compar., 204, 

ἀποδίδομαι, With Genit., 421. 

ἀποδιδράσκω, With Acc., 898. 

ἀπόερσα, 270, 

ἀπολαύω, Fut. Mid. with Act. 

ee eee one Genit., 


᾿ ‘ 
AvVTt, 


D.; 


ΔῊΝ Obs. Acc., 171; 

48 

ἀποστερέω, With Doub. Acc., 
402, 


Voc. 


umorwyxd veo, with Genitive, 
419 6 


ἀπούρας, 316, D. 18. 

ἀποφαίνω, with Part., 593. 

ἀπόχρ n, 312, 6. 

ἅπτομαι, μαῖα Genit., 419 ὃ. 

ταρ, Subst. in, 172 

ἄρα and dpa, Distinction, 99. 

‘Per (ἄρ᾽, Apocope, 64, D.; 
1. 


dpa, oh questions, 607 b—in- 
direct, 610; dp’ οὐ, ἄρα μή, 
607, Obs. 

dpaploxe; 324, D. 34—Perf., 
275, D.1 


ἀρείων, ἄριστος, 199, 1, and 
Obs. 


ἀρέσκω, 324, 10. 
apnpws, 280, D. 


‘Apns, 177, 2, 

-apcov; Neuters i in, 347, Obs.1. 
ἀρκέω, Aor., 301, ri 

ἁρμόττω, 250, Obs. — Fut., 


260, 3. 
ἀρνέομαι, Depon. Pass., 528,2, 
apvos, etc., 117, 3. 
ἄρνυμαι, Aor., 319, D. 29. 
5, 301, 1—Perf. Pass., 275, 
1. 


ἄῤῥην, 189,.. 
ἀρύω, 801, ‘4, 


ἀρχήν, 408, Obs. 2. 


βασιλεύς. 

ἄρχομαι and ἄρχω, Distine- 
tion, 481 ὃ. 

ἄρχομαι, With Genit., 419’ ὃ 
—with Inf., 560, 1—with 
Part., 590—with "Inf. and 
Part., 594 

apxw, with Genit., 423—Diff. 

_ of Pres. and Aor., 498. 

ae Ending of the "Acc. Pls 


-as, Fem. in, 138. 

-as, Neut. in, 139. 

τας, Subst. in, 172. 

ἄσμενος, 319, D. — Compar., 
196 ὃ. 


ἄσσον, ἀσσοτέρω, τῶν, Ὁ. 

ἀστήρ, Dat. Pl., 

ἄστυ, i58—Gend., ΕἸ 

mer -ato,3 Pl. Mid., 226, D.; 

33, Ὁ. 6; 287, and Ὄ. 

hans αὐτάρ, 680, 4. 

ἅτε, with Part. DST, 6. 

ἄτερ, 455, 5. 

ἅττα, ἄττα, 214. 

αὖ, αὖτε, 630, 8. 

αὐξάνω, αὔξω, 322, 13. 

~aus, Fem. in 172. 

αὐτίκα, with Part. 2 87, 3. 

αὐτός, 200—position with the 
Art., 389—with Dat., 441, 
Obs.—in the Genit. with 
Possess. ,474—for the Rel., 
605, Obs. — ὁ αὐτός, with 
Dat., 480 Ὁ. 

ἀφαιρέομαι, With doub. Acc., 


ἀφάσσω, 250, Ὁ. 
ἀφίημι, 313, 1—Augm. 240, 
ἀ 556 ;- 601. 


ἄχαρις, compar. 193, Ὁ. 
ἄχθομαι, 826, 12 — Depon. 
Pass., 328, 2—with Part., 


592. 
ἄχνυμαι, 819, D. 30—Plup. 
287, D. 


Νάχρεζο; 69, Obs. 3; 445; 455 
ὃ; without Elision, 64, ‘Obs. 
ΠΑΡ ΣῈ οὗ, 

-aw, Verbs in, 358, 2, and 
Obs. 2—lengthening, 243, 

9 


D. 3. 
-aw, Fut. in, 268, D. 


A, inserted between pu and p, 
a A τῇ 2,and D.; @ for μ, 


βαδίζω, “Fat. Mid. with Act. 
meaning, 266. 

Baive, 321, 1, and D—Perf., 
317, 1—2 "Aor., 316, ccd 
‘Aor. Mid., 268 ’D.—mean- 
ing, 329, ὦ οὐ the Perf 
503. 


Ὁ. 19=— 


AAo, Avor., 316 
Pe “signif., 476, 2. 


Perf., 282—Si 
paphoros, 198; 
βασίλεια and ασιλεία, 111. 
βασιλεύς, 161, 


GREEK INDEX. 


359 


βασιλεύω. 


βασιλεύω, With Genit., 423— 
Diff. of Pres. and Aor., 498. 

βεβρώθω, 324, D. 13. 

βείομαι, βέομαι, 265, D. 

βείω, Any, etc., 316, D. 1. 

βελτίων, pédner08, 199, 1. 

βιάζομαι, Pass. meaning, 
483 


9 9. 

fc Bas, 312, Ὁ. 14. 

βίβλος, Fem., 127, 5. 

ϑΈρηνκυ; 324, 13-—Aor., 316, 
: 3—Perf, Part., 817, D. 
6. 


βιόω, Aor., 316, 13. 

BX, Redup., 274, Ex. 

βλάβεται, Hom. Pres., 249, D. 

a og Na Pass. ,299—with 
Acc., 

giao 322, 14. 

βλῆσθαι, etc., 316, 19. 

βλέσττω, 250, Obs. 

βλώσκω, 324, 12; 51, D. 

Boaw, Fut. "Mid. wets Act. 
meaning, 236. 

βόλεται, 366, Ὁ. 14. ‘ 

Boppas, Genit. Sing., 122, 


Booka, 326, 13. 

βότρυς, Masc., 140. 

βούλομαι, 326, 14— Anem., 
234, Obs. so Sing. Pres. 
Mid., 233, 3—Depon. Pass., 
328, 2, 

βοῦς, 159; 160; 35, Obs.—of 
two Genders, 140, 

βράσσω, 250, Obs. 

βράσσων, 198, D. 

βραχύς, with Inf, 562. 

βροτός, 51, 

tebe 39.” 

βώσας, 35 ,D. i 


y, Pronunt., 4—Character of 
Verbs, 251, Obs. — their 
Fut., 260, 3_-Perf., 219. 16 

γαμέω, 895, a 

γάνυμαι, 319, D.3 31, 

γάρ, 636, ὁ. “γὰρ "οἷν, 637, 2. 

γαστήρ, Ἶ58-- 40. 

1,0 ar. of Verbal Stems, 

pe 


bs. 
γέ, 641, 1—Afiix, ibid. 
γέγονα, 327, 14. 
γεγωνέω, 325, 1), a 
γείνομαι, Signif., “329, 8. 
vera, 301, 1—Aor. Pass., 298 
— Fut. Mid. with ‘Act. 
meaning, 266. 
γέλως, 169, Ὁ. 
γέμω, With Genit., 418. 
wer a evhabpie. etc., 327, 


γέντο; 316, D. 33. 

γεραιός, Compar., 194. 

γεύω, With Genit., 419, Ὁ. 
γηθέω, 825, 2. 

γηράσκω, 324, 1—Aor., 316, 2. 
γι into ζ, 58; ,251. 

γίγνομαι, 807, 14—Perf., 317, 


Ἰδαένυμε, 319, 
318, Ὁ. 


δεύτερος. 
2—with Genit., 417—with 
Dat. +, 432, 
γιγνώσκω, 324, 14—Aor., 316, 
14—with Part., 591. 
ee yv, Redupl. with, 274, 


γοάω, 325, Ὁ. n. 

γόνυ, LTT, 4, 

your, 641, 2. 

γραῦς, 159, 

γράφομαι, with Genit., 422. 
bash and ἡράφω; Diff., 


Bre ‘i, 5. 


6 inserted betw. v and 
Obs. 2; 287, D.; 612— har- 
acter, 251. See Dentals., 

dai, 642, 8. 

δαίμων; of two Genders, 140. 

D. 32— Opt., 


δαίω, meaning, 330, D. 9. 
8. 


δάκνω, 521, 


δάμαρ, 147, 1, Ex. 

δάμνημι, 312, Ὄ. a—Aor. Subj. 
Pass. , 293, 

δανείζω, Diff. of Act. and 
Mid., 481 ὃ. 

SapOdver, 322, 15. 

Be ere of Genit. Pl. and 
Dual, 142, 3. 

ee ἃ 325, D. b—1 Aor. 
Inf., 269, D. 

-de, Bice, 94; 212; 216— 
rege 92, 5—Local Suf- 

8 


fix 
δέ, 628. δ᾽ οὖν, 637, 2. 
δέῥατο, 269, D. 
δέγμαι, 312, D. 14, b. 
δέδαον, 324, D. 28; 326, D. 40. 
δέδεγμαι, δέξω, etc., 318, Ὁ. 
δέδια, δέδοικα, 317, 5, and D. 
det (See δέω), With Acc. and 
567, Obs. 1—édex, 490. 
δείδω, forms Position, W7,D.— 
doubling of the 4, 584 D. 
δείκνυμε, 318—with Partic., 
593. 


δεῖνα, Indef. Pronoun, 215. 

decvos, With Inf., 562. 

deipn, 115. 

δένδρον, 175. 

δέομαι, Depon. Pass., 328, 
See δέω. 

δέον, 586. 

δέπας, Dat. Pl., 169, Ὁ. 

δέρκομαι, Depon. Pass., 328, 2 
—2 Aor., 257, D.; 59, D.— 
. with Acc., 400 6. 

δεσμός, Nom. and Acc. ῬΠ,; 


δεσπότης, vee Sing.121—Acc. 
Sing. 1 

δεύομαι, Ὡς D. 15. 

δεύτα τοι; 199; Ὁ. (Defectives). 


δεύτερος, With Genitive, 416, 
Obs. 3. 


2. | 


ὁρατύς. 
δέχομαι, Perf., 213, -- Aor., 
utes a, s4—Aor. Pass. Sig: 


δέω mere bint, 301, 2—Contrac- 
tion, 244, 1. 

δέω, δέομαι (Lam in want of), 
820, 15—with ory tel 418, 

δή, 642, 4— Affix, 2 

63,0ev, 642, Ts 

dijAov ὅτι, "633, la. . 

δηλόω, Meaning, 476, 1--δη- 
λόω and δῆλός εἰμι, with 
Part., 590. 

Δημήτηρ, 168. 

δήν, makes aera 77, D. 

1, δήποτε, Affix, 21 

δήπου, δήπ υθεν, 629, 5. 

-dns, Mas@ in, 348. 

δῆσα, 326, Ὁ. 15. 

δῆτα, 642, 6. 

es into ζ, ὅ8: 251. 

διά, 448; 458—without Ana- 
strophe, 90—with Inf. and 
Article, 574, 2, 3. 

dia, 181, D. 

δεάγω,᾽ διαλείπω, 
with — 590. 

diacta, 115, 


δεαιτάω, with double Au 
ἊΣ gm., 


διατελέω, 


Poona with doub. Augm., 


suadeyo μαι, Depon: Pass. ,328, 
Dae edupl., 274, Ex.—with 
a 


avatar seni. 127, 5. 

pee robes 436 a. 

διαφέρω, 428 ; 440, 

διάφορος, 436 Ὁ. : 

διδάσκω, 324, 28, Obs.—Aor., 
326, D. 40— with double 
Ace, 402.-.--διδάσκομαι, 481. 

δίδημι, 818, 2. 

δέδωμε, Compounds — Mean- 
ing, 476, 2—with Inf., 561. 

didpacke, 894, 2—Aor., 316, 3. 

δίεσαν, etc., 313, D. 4. 

'δίζημαι, Bikes: 313, D. δ. 

δικάζομαι, Meaning, 481. 

δίκαιός εἰμι, COnStrued per- 
sonally, 571. 


- ἰδέκην, free Acc., 404, Obs. 


6.076, ) Le 

διπλάσιος, δισσός, etc., 223— 
with Genit., 416, Obs. 3. 
ixa, 445. 

διψάω, Contr., 244, 2. 

διώκω, With Genit., 422. 

duws,Gen. Pl, and Dual, 142, 3. 

doiw, etc., 220, D. 

δοκέω, 32, 3—with Inf., 560, 2 
—constr. personally, 571. 

δοκός, Fem., 127, 5. 

'δόξαν, Acc. Abs., 586. 

Sépu, 177, 6. 

δουπέω, 325, D. ¢ 

δραμεῖν, ἐκ ἢ etc., 327, 
Ὥς 


ὁρατός, 300, D. 


360 


GREEK INDEX. 


dpa. 
dpaw, Aor. Ae ata 
ὁρόσος, Fem., 127, 5. 
δύναμαι, 312, "9—Augm., 234 
Obs.—Subj., Opt., Accent, 


? 


309—Depon. Pass., 328, 9." 


Ιέδομαι, Fut 


with Inf., 560, 1. 

dvs, Com ounds with, 360, 

Ob bs.—Augm., 241. 

δύω, δύνω, 891, T: 301, 4—1 Aor. 
Mid., 68, D.—2 ‘Aor, 316, 
16—Meaning, 329, 4. 


ε for a, 268, D. ae a, 257; 
282; 285; 295; 298 

e bec. n, 40; 147, 2; 151; 161, 
D.; 233, 4; 3 

ε bec. ex, 24, D. 33 . 42s Ay 1: 
236; 243, D a = #2 "970: 2 

e bec. 0, 165; O78 ; 340, Oba 3 
—bec. a, 278, 

e for digamma, 34, D. 4; 

*:237, D: 

e inserted, 264; 269, D. 

€ rejected, 153; 243, D. B.; 
257, D.—in Synizesis, 59, D. 

ε contr. with preceding vow- 
el, 166, D. 

ε affixed to the Stem, 822, 
Obs. ; 324, Obs.; 325, etc.— 
considered as Stem-vowel, 


e in the Augm., 236; 275. 
See Syllabic Augm. 

5 ee aa ,275—as Redupl., 

2.3} 

€ connecting vowel, 233, 1, 
and Ὁ. 3, 6; 262; 336, D.: 
338, D. 

«εἴη Nom. Acc. and Vocative 
Dual, 141. 

ea bec. a, 130—bec. n, 88. 

-ea for era, 185, D. —for vy in 
Acc. Sing., 185—in « and 

ἣν Stems, 157—in Diphth. 
Stems, 161—bec. n and a, 
ibid.—bec. n in the Acc. 
Pl., ibid.—bec. a or ἡ in 
Fem. of Adj., eae 
of the Plup., 288, Ὁ. 

ἔαγα, 275, 2: 819, 18. 

εαι Pa ῃ; 38—bec. ex, tbid., 


éav, 639, 2—in Condit. Sent., 
535; 545: 548—“‘ whether, % 
610—_Comp. εἰ. 

ἐάντε-ἐάντε, 621. 

ξαξα, 319, 18. 

-εας bec. -εἰς in Acc. Pl., 157 
—from nas, 161, Obs. 

Eatac, etc., 315, D. 9 

ἑαυτοῦ, 210—used as ἃ pos- 
‘Sessive, 472 a. 

ξάω, Augm., 236. 

ἐγγύς, Compar., 204 — with 
Genit., 415, 

ἐγδούπησα, 325, Ὁ. 6. 

ἐγείρω, 2 Aor., OTB, D.—Perf., 

δῷ er 317, D. 12—Mean- 

ing, 330, 2. 


εἶπον. 
ἐγρήγορα, 275. 
ἔγχελυς, 158. 
ἐγώ, Synizesis, 66 --- ἔγωγε, 
641,1. 


δαβάναι: 315, D.3; 327, D. 4. 

9 265. See éc bia. | 

ee bec. ex, ἐν ως ἐπέ, ει and n; 

, D. B.— bec. n in the 

Dual. See -n. 

éépxarto, 287, D. 

-ees bec. εἰς in Nom. Pl., 157 
—bec. εἰς and ns, 161 d. 

~en for -era, 185, D.” 

éns, 213, 

ἐθίζω, Augm., 236. 

ec for e, 24, D. 3—for pict 
etc. —from €, ¢, 566 ε, 

εἰ, Redupl., 274, etc. Sin the 
Plup., 28 

-εἰ in the Dat. Sing., 157; 
161 b—connecting vowel, 
238, 1—3 Sing. Ind. Act., 
233, = Sing. Ind. Mid., 


233, 3 
εἰ, 639, ‘4—Atonon, 97, 3~—in 
Cond. Sent., 535 — with é 
Ind., 536—with Opt., 546, 
ete.—for éav, 545, Obs. 2. 
εἰ, εἴθε, εἰ yap, in a wish, 514 
—‘* whether” in Depend. 
Interr. Sent., 525; 610. 


εἰ-ή, 61 .--- εἴ kev, See éav— 


4 ἄρα, 637, 1—ei yap, 637, 
ὁ d—ei καί, 640, 1---εἰ μή, 


639, 1. 
ἘΠῚ Fem. i n, 185—Quantity, 
; 841, “Obs. : 842, Obs. 
Ria "315, D. 2. 
etdov, 327, 8. 


-en, Fem. in, 115, D. 2. 
εἶκε, ξϊκτον, 317, D. 
εἴκοσε(ν), 68, 3; 290. 
εἴκω, with Genit., 419 6. 


εἰκών, Genit., 163. 


εἰλέω, 625, D.d. 

εἰλήλουθα, 40, D.; 317, D. 18. 

εἴληφα, δον 274, Ex. 

eiAoxa, 274, Ex.; 

εἷλον, etc., 32 27,1 

εἴλω, 258, D. δε hess 270, D. 

εἷμαι, 319, D.5 

εἵμαρται, O74, “he. 

εἰμέ, 315, 1—Enclit., 92, 3; 
315, Obs. 2—with ’Partic., 
987; 289; 291; 505; 590, 
Obs. — with Genit., 417 — 
with Dat., 432— Accent of 
compounds of ei, 315, 
Obs. 3—éyv, 428, Obs. 
585 ὃ----τῷ ὄντι, 441. 

εἶμι, 814, — Meaning, 314, 
Obs. 


εἵνεκα, 868 ἕνεκα. 

εἴνυον, 819, D. 5. 

εἴξασι, 811,1. 

-εἰόν, Neuters i in, 345, 2. 
εἴπερ, 639, 1 

εἶπον, 897, 18- ΑΟΥ. δὼ ὦ 


Accent, 888, 12. 


ἔμπειρος. 
τειρ, Subs. in, 172. 
εἵργνυμε, 319, ‘1D. 
εἴργω, Perf. and Plup. , 287, Ὁ. 
—with Genit., 419 e. 
εἴρηκα, 274, Ex.; 227, 13. 
εἴρομαι, 896, D. 10. 
εἴρω, 1 Aor., 270, D.—Perf. 
_and Plup., 275, D.2 
εἷς, 2 Sing. of εἰμέ, 3, D. 
eis, ἐς, 448; 449-——Atonon, 97, 
2—with ‘Inf. and Art. , BTA, 
2—eis 6, 556, 
-εἰς, Nom. Pl., 157; 161 d. 
-εἰς, Mase. and Fem. i in, 172. 
-es, 2 Sing. Ind. Act., 233, 2. 
PE Adj. in, 352, ὅ: 


149. 
εἷσα, def. Aor., 269, Ὁ. 
ἐΐσκω, 824, D. 85. 
εἴσομαι, etc., 314, D. 1. 
εἴσω, with Genit., 415. 
sche with Part., BST, 4, 
εἴτε, θά εἴτετεἴτο, 11: 627. 
εἴωθα, 275, 2 8. 
ἐκ, ἐξ, 69, Obs. 2; 448; 453— 
with Au gm., 238—Atonon, 
97, 2—with Inf. and Art., 
δά, 3—unaltered, 45, Obs.; 
47, Ex.—2é οὗ, 556; 601. 
ἑκάς, Compar., 203, D. 
ἐκεῖνος, Ὡ12. 
ἐκέκλετο, 257, D.; 61, D. 
ἐκεχειρία, 53, 10 d. 
ἐκκλησιάζω, ‘Augm., 239. 
ἐκλείπω, With Ace., 398. 
ἐκληθάνω, 322, D. 26. 
rising τον with Acc., 399. 
ἑκτός, 827, 6 
ἐκτός, with Genit., 415. 
ἑκών, Genit. Abs., 585 b— 
ἑκὼν εἶναι, 570, Obs 
ἐλάσσων, Exiuever, 199, 4 
me without 7, 626, 


trative, 321, 2—Fut., 263 — 
Perf., 275, 1 Plup., 287, D. 
—Meaning, 476, 1 

ἐλέγχω, Perf. Mid., 275, 1; 
286, Obs. 

eNeie, 521,1. 

ἐλευθερόώ, with Genit., 419 6. 

ἐλθεῖν, ἐλεύσομαι, 327, ὦ. 

ἐληλάδατο, 251, Ὁ. 

ἑλίσσω, 236. 

ἑλκύω, ἕλκω, 301, 1—Augm., 


#rnevs, 60, Obs. 2. 


580: ἐλπίζω, with Inf., 569. 


ἔλπω, oo ee Ὁ. 2—Mean- 
ing, 8 

ἔλσα, 210, ὍΣ 7398, Dea." 

ἐμαυτοῦ, 210 Poss. 472 a. 

ἐμέμηκον, 283, 

ἐμέω, 301, 1. 

ἔμμεναι, 315, ΤῊΝ. 

ἔμμορα, 214, 

ἐμνήμυκα, O76, D.1 


ἔμπειρος, with Genit., 414, 3.° 


GREEK INDEX. 


ἔμπλεως. 

ἔμπλεως, With Genit., 414, 2. 

ἔμπροσθεν, with Genit., 415. 

ἐν (vc), 456—unaltered 
in Conipownde; 49, Obs. 1— 
bef. p, 51, Obs. 2—-Atonon, 
97, 2—with Inf. and Art., 
574, 4—év ᾧ, 556, 

-e(v), 3 Sing., 68, 4. 

-ev, Nom. of Neuters, 272. 

-εν, 3 Pl. Aor. Pass., 293, D. 

τέναι, Τηΐ,, 276. 

ἐναίρω, Augm. ., 299, 

ἐναντιόομαι, Depon. 
828, 2—Augm., 299. 

ραν ε δος with Dat., 436 b. 

ἔνασσα, Meaning, $29, D. 

ἐνδεής, with Genit., 414, 2 

ἐνδύω, With double Acc., 402 
—Meaning, 329, 4. 

ἐνείκαι (ἐνείκοι), 327, Ὁ. 12. 

ἕνεκα, 445 ; 448: 445, S—with 
Inf. and Art., 574, 3. 

ἐνέπω, ἔννεπε, δ οὐ ζο κω; etc. 

, D. 15. 

ἐνέρτεροι, 199, Ὁ. (Defect.). 

ἐνήνοθεν, 275, D. 2. 

ἐνήνοχα, 821, Ἴ2. 


Pass., 


Ev, 90, 
ἐνίπτω, 2 Aor., 257, Ὁ. 
ἐνίσσω, ΣΝ 


ἕννυμι, 319, 5. 

ἐνοχλέω, double Sa ee 240, 

ἐντός, with Genit., 

ἐντρέπομαι, with denit., 420. 

ἐξελέγχω, with Part., 593. 

ἐξικνοῦμαι, with Genit., 419 6. 

ἐξόν, 586. 

ἔξω, Comparative, 204—with 
Genit., 415. 

eo bec. ov, 37—bec. ev, 37, D. 
1; 165, D.; 233, D. 4; ἢ 
D. _B., 

ἕο, εὖ, ΜΕΝ δίο.; 205, D. 

€or bec. oz, 37. 

ἔοικα, 317, 7; 275, 2—con- 
strued personally, 571 — 
with Part., 590. 

ἔολπα, 275, D. 2. 

€opya, 327, D. 3. 

ἑορτάζω, Augm., 987, 

ἑὸς, 208, 

-εος, Genit. i in, 161, D. 

-eos, Adj. in, 352, 4; 183—for 
-ews, 184, 

εου bec. ov, 37—bee. ev, 37, D. 
1: 243, D. B. 

ἐπαυρίσκομαι, 824, 24. 

ἐπεί, ἐπεάν, ἐπήν, ἐπάν, 
557; 635, 5—in Synizesis, 
66—with Aor. Ind., 493— 
Ἰρ γερο ta 558, Obs. 1. 

ἐπειδή, 556 

ἔπειτα, with Part., 587, 4. 

ἐπί, 448 ; 463—with Inf. and 
Art., 574, 2, 4. 

ἐπίδόξος, ἀτικαίδεοξ εἶμι, CON- 
strued personally, 571. 

ἐπιέσασθαι, 319, 5. 


ἐτάθην. 

ἐπιλαμβάνομαι, ἐπιλανθάνο- 
pac, With Genit., 419 b; 420. 

ἐπιλείπω, with Part, 590. 

ἐπιμέλομαι, Depon. Pass. ,328, 
2—with Genit., 420. 

ériotauacr, 312,10—Accent. of 
Subj. andOpt. y309—Depon. 
Pass., 328, 2. 

iecorhey, with Genit., 414, 3. 

ἐπιτήδειός τ construed per-| 
sonally, 57 

ἐπιτρέπω, sth Inf., 560, 1. 

ἔπλητο, 312, D. 

ore 32%, 5—Augm. , 236. 

ἔραζε, 17 8, D. 

ἔραμαι, 312, 11. 

épaw, Aor. Mid. 2.501, D.—with 
Genit., 420. 

ἐργάζομαι, Augm., 236, 


ἔργαθον, 319, 


ἔρδω, 327, 3. 

épécow,250,Ob8.—F ut. , 260, 3. 

ἐρεύγομαε, 322, . 40. 

ἐρηρέδαται, 281, Ὁ. 

ἐρίζω, with Dat., 436 a. 

épinpos, Nom, Pi., 175, D. 

ἕρπω, ἑρπύζω, Augm. a ‘936. 

ἐῤῥάδαται, 287, 

ἔῤῥω, 326, 17. ν 

ἔῤῥωγα, 98: 319, 24. 

ὀῤῥωμένος, Compar., 196 ὃ. 

ἔρση, 

ἔρσην, 189, D. 

ἐρυγγάνω, ’328, D. 40. 

ἐρύκω, 2 Aor., BT, D. 

ae ae ; ete., 314, D. 

ἐρύ Aor., 301, D. 

ἔρχαταιε, etc., 319, D. 15. 

ἔρχομαι, 397, 2. 

ἐρῶ, 821, 18, and Obs. 

ἔρως, It, D. 20. 

ἐρωτάω, with doub. Acc., 402. 

-es, Nom. of Neuters 172. 

a ar 42) of Nom. Pl., 1 141; 

73, 8 

Loins, 315, D.3 (ἔσθων : 327, 4 
—with Genit., 419 ἃ. 

ἔσκον, 337, Ὁ. 

ἔσπεισμαι, 286, 1, Obs. 

ἑσπόμην, ete.; 397, 5. 

ἔσπον, 327, D. 13. 

τεσσα, Fem. of Adj., 187. 

ἕσσαι, etc., 269, Ὁ. 

-egou(y), Dat. Pi. 141, D.; 153, 


“ἢ ? “3 Mees τ 

ἀμ 274, D. 

ἕσσων, 199, D. 2. 

ἔστε, ‘until, ” BBG. 

-ETTEPOS, ade ge Compar. 
Ending, 19 

ἑστήξω, 911, ποῖ. 

ἐστί, Accented, 96 ; 315, Obs. 
2. ἔστιν οἵ, ov, etc., 603. 

ἑστιάω, Augm., 236 — with 
Acc., 400 c—with Genit., 
419 d. 

ἔσχατος, 200; 391. 


ἔσω, Compar., 204. See εἴσω. 


ἐπιθυμέω, With Genit., 420. 


eriOny, 298. 


Q 


ζώννυμι. 
ἐτάφην, See θάπτω. 
ἕτερος, with Genit.,416,0bs,3, 
ἐτησίαι. Genit: Pl., 123. 
étopov, 326, D. 44 
ev bec. eF, 35D. 2; 248, Obs, 
_—from εο, εου, S€€ €0, εου. 
ev, 202 — Augm. in Com- 
pounds, 241—ei ποιέω, With 
Acc., 396. 
εὔαδον, 322; D. 23. 
εὔδιος, Compar., 195. 
εὐεργετέω, With "Ace., 396. 
εὐθύ, with Genit. ,A15—cidis, 
with Part. , DST, 3 ; 
ἐὐκτέμενος, 316, D. 25. 
ἐνλαβέομαι Depon, Pass.,328, 
2—with Acc., 3 
pe eee {eb date. 
c. 


εὑρίσκω, 324, 25—with Part., 
591, 


evpus, Acc. Sing., 157, Ὁ), 

-evs, Genit. in, 161, D.; 165, D. 

-evs, Nom. Sing. εν 841, 15 849, 
a 181: ὅτι 

εἶτε, see ὅτ 

εὐφαίνω, Meaning of the Aor, 
Pass., 328, 3. 

τ-ευω, λέν βοῦς in, 353, 4. 

ἔφαγον, 32 ἈΝΕ 

ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ va - 

deans 269. ᾧ 

ἐχθρός, Compar., 198, 

ἔχω, 327, 6 — Augm., 236 — 
Meaning, 476, 1 — Diff. of 
Pres. and Aor., 498—with 
Inf, 560, 1—with Part., 590 
— ἔχων, 630. τσ ον εν with 
Genit., 419 ὃ. 

ἕψω, 326, 19. 

ew for ao, see ao—in the At- 
tic Declens. ., 132, etc.—in 
Contracted Verbs, 248, D., 
Herod.—as one Syll., 121, 
D.3 0; 158,1: 157. 

εω, Genit. Sing. 121, D. Ae b; 
177, 11— erbs in, 248; 
253, 3— Fut., 260, 2; 264; 
263, 


ἔωθα, 275, D. 2. 
ἔωμεν, ete., 312, Ὁ. 13. 
-EWV, Genit. of a-Declens., 


118, D. 

ἕως Ctl”, 556; 635, 7. 

ἕως, Decl., 163. 

-ews, Genit., 161, Obs. 

¢, Pronunt., 5—Pres. Stems 
in, 251, Obs. 

Caw, Contract., 244, 2. 

-ζε, Local Suffix, 178. 

ζεύγνυμε, 319, 16. 

Ζεύς, 111, 7. 

Céw, 301, 1. 

einen, with Acc., 398. 

-Cw, Char. of Verbs, 251, Obs. 
and D.—Fut.,260,3. Comp. 


263. 
ζώννυμε, 319, 9. 


GREEK INDEX. 


or 
362 
n. 
n for a, 24, D. 1; 115, D. 2; 
180, D.; 244, 2; 161, D.?)5 
970, Obs. See ε. 


n after o, 180, Ex.—bec. w, 43. 

n, Syll. Augm., 234, Obs. 

-y, Voc. Sing., 12i—in Ace. 
P}.,157—in the Dual, 158 ; 
166—in the Acc. Sing. a 161, 
D.; 166—Conn. Vowel, 938, 
‘1_Ending of 1and 8 Plur. 
Plup., 28 

-1,2Sing. nd. andSubj.Mid., 
“233, 8,4 


n and ὴ, Synizesis, 66—Diff., 
9 


9; 643, 9 
ἤ (né)- -ἡ (ie), 611, Obs. 
ἥ, in indir. questions, 610— 
n and ἢ ἤτῆ, 626 a, and Obs. 
ὩΣ and ἢ ὥστε, With Inf., 


ἥ, Weiser. 607 RS gen 


n 

ἡ, “he awe ” 312, 1. 

1a, ἥειν, 914, 

ἡβάσκω, 824, 8, 

ΤΥ, 257. 

ἦδέ, 624 b, 1. 

ἥδομαι, Depon. Pass., 328, 2— 
with Dat., 439, Obs. —with 
‘Part., 592. 

ἡδύς, Fem., 185, Ὁ. 

netpa, 270, 

ἧκα, 313. 

ἥκιστα, 199,2. 

ἥκω, Meaning, 486, Obs. 

ἡλίκος, Attr. in, 600. 

Actov, 323, D. 81. 

λυθον, 397, 2. 

μαι, 315, 2. 

ἀβρόξον: 829, D. 12. 

ἠμέν-ἠδέ, 024 d, 2. 

ἡμέ, ἦν, ἦ, 312, 1. 

ἦμος, 556 ; 634, 4. 

ἤμπισχον, 323, 86. 

ἤμπλακον, 324, 23. 

ἠμφίεσα, 319, 5. 

τὴν, Nom., 172. 

nv, see ἐάν. 

ἤνεγκον, ἤνεικα, 327, 12, 

ἡνίκα, ὅδ ; 634, 3. 

ἠνίπαπον, O57, Ὁ. 

ἤνυτο, 319, D. "98. 

no bec. ω, 37 —-nos, na, nas, 

, 161, Obs.—nov bec. w, 37. 


ws Bey Ss: 


ἤραρον, 324, D. 34, 

ἤριπον, Meaning, 329, D. 
ἠρόμην, 326, 16. 

ens, Nom. Pl, 161 ἃ. 

-ns, Nom. Sing. - 112; 174, Ὁ. 
-ns, Prop. Names in, 174. 
-ns, rite in, 355—Comp., 197. 
mee), Dat. Plur. of a- -Decl., 


θαυμάζω, with Genit., 
Ob Ss. 


{- 


ἥσσων, 199, 2. 
ἥσυχος, Compar., 195. 


ἤτοι, 3 643, 11 --- ἤτοι- 7, 
626 a. 
ἦτορ, Gender, 139. 


ἡττάομαι, with Genit., 428, 
ἥττων, 199, 2. 

ἠὔτε , 082, 5. 

ἠφίει, 240 ; 313, 1. 

ἦχα 

ἦχι, 217, Ὁ. 

ἠώς, 163, Ὁ. 


θ, Ῥτοπαῃηί., 7—in the Perf., 
286, 4—in the Weak Pass. 
Stem, 298—Nom. Sing. of 
Stems in, 147, Obs. 2—Af- 
fixed to Pres. and 2 Aor. 
Stems, 338, D.—bec. a, 307. 
See also Dentals. 

θανεῖν, 324, 4. 

: θάπτω, 54c; 298, 

᾿᾿Ιθαῤῥέω, with Acc., 399. 

θᾶσσον, See ταχύς. 

θάτερον, 65, Obs. 1. ; 
417, 
Ba: 4 2, 

θαυμαστὸς ὅσος, etc., 602, 

θεάν. 115, D. 2; 

i ἐθέλω, 826, 20. 

θέμις, 177, D. 2 

-He(v), Sufix, τ 2; 68, D.— 

for the Genitive, 205, D;$ 


178, D. 
θεός, Voc. Sing., 129, Ὁ), 
θέρειος, 
θέρομαι, Fut., 262, D. 
ἕω, 248—Fut. , 260, 2. 
θῆλυς, as Fem., 185, Obs. 
θήν, Encilit., 92, 5; 643, 1T. 
Onpaa, with Accus., 398. 
θι bec. oa, 57. 
-θι, Loe. Suff., 178, 1—Ending|i 
of 2 P. Imper., 298; 302, 55): 
0 


801. 
θιγγάνω, 822, 24. 


θλάω, 801 


? 


᾿θνήσκω, 324, "4—Perf., 317, 3— 


Perf. Part., 276, D. “3 Fat., 
201—Signit., 486, canbe 
θοϊμάτιον, 65, O 
enees 324, D. i 
θρίξ, 54 45. 
θρύπτω, be 


\Opwoke, 59 ; 894, 15. 


θυγάτηρ, 158. 

év- mpo- θυμέομαι, Depon. 
Pass., 32 

Oipaat(v), 179. 

Os his 2—Aor. Pass., 53, 
0 


6ws,Genit., Pl. and Du.,142, 3. 


“ Pronunt.,4—Long by Nat., 
3, Obs. 4 -- Lengthened, 
253, Obs.—z bec. 7, εἰ, οἱ, 
40; 278—x of the Stem bec. 
€, 157—Changes, 55; 108: 
250, etc. 


_ ἴσος. 

-., Locative Ending, 179 — 
Lia as 212—Nenut. in, 

τὸ, Nom. Ending in the Pl., 
134, 9— Dat. Sing., 141; 
173, 2. 

ἐν Sign of the Opt., 228—Re- 
dupl., 308 ; 327, Τ᾽ 17—Con- 
nect. Vowel, 848: 351—Af- 
fixed to the Stem in the 
Dat. Pl., 119; 134, 8. 

t, Subscribed, 8; 12; 27; 65, 
Obs. 2—Dat. Sing., 134, 8: 
169; 173, 2. 

t, Verbs in the Pres. with, 
250, etc. ; 322, Obs. —their 


Fut., 260, 3; 262. 
ca for το, 348, 
~a, Fem. in, 346, 8: 185, 


etc. 

ἴα, ins, ἰῇ, tw, 220, D. 1. 

ἰάομαι, Meaning of the Aor. 
Pass., 328, 4. 

iavw, 327, Ὁ. 17. 

-caa,Verbs i in, 353, Obs. 2. 

ἰδὲ (Conj. ), 624 ὃ, Les Imper. 

oy See ae (Imper.), 

-cdcov, Neut. n, 847, 1, Obs. 

idcos, with Genit, 414, 1—with 
Dat., 436 b. 

ἴδρις, 158; 189, 8, 

idpiw, Aor, Pass., 298, D. 

idpws, 16 

ἱερός, with G Genit., 414, 1. 

Cave, 822, 17. 

ἵζομαι, 326, 21, 

“he, Verbs in, 353, 5—Fut., 


ms Char. of the Opt 293; 

, 4. 

ine, 818,1, 

ἰθύς, Superl., 193, D. 

ἴκμενος, 810, De; "393, D.33. 

ἱκνέομαι, ἱκνοῦμαι, 825, 33— 
1 Aor., 268, Ὁ. 


τικός, Adj. in, 851— with 
Genit., 414, 6. 

ἱλάσκομαι, 324, 5 — Imper., 
312, ‘ 

irews, 184, 

ἱμάσσω, 


-ἰν, Subs. in, 172 — -W, Dual 
Ending i in Genit. and Dat., 
134, 6; 173, 4. 

ngs 633, tin Sentences of 


Speers 

-cvos, Adj. in, 352, 8, 4, Obs. 
-co, Genit. Ending, 128, Dd. 
-cov, Neut. in, 841,1. ᾿ 

τος, Adj. in, 350. 

ἵξον, 823, Ὁ. 33, ὁ 

ipos, 35, D.1. 

τἰς, Nom. of Fem. in, 138; 172 
—Barytones in Acc. Sing., 


156. 
toxe, 324, D. 36. 
-toKos, -cakn, Subs, in, 347, 2. 


toos,Compar.,185—withDat., 
436 b. 


a 
od 


GREEK INDEX. 


363 


-ἰστερος. 
τίστεροι, τίστατος, Compar., 


97. 
ἵστημε, Perf., 317, 4—Mean-| 
ing, 329, 1—“of the Perf, 503. 
ἰσχύω, Diff. of Pres. and ‘Aor., 


ἐχούς, Dat. Sing. , 158, D.— 
Acc. Pl., 158— fasc., 140. 

ἰχώρ, ere Sing., 175, D. 

-:wv, Nom. of ‘Mase. in, 348, 
Obs. 

πίων, -ίστος, Compar., 198, 


«x, in οὐκ, 69, Obs. 1— New- 
Ion. for z, "216, D—Asp. in 
the Perfect, 279. See also 
Gutturals. 

-xa, 1 Aor. in, 310. 

καθεδοῦμαϊι, 826, 21. 

καθεύδω, 326, 18—Augm., 240. 

κάθημαι, 315, 2—Augm., 240. 

καθίζω, Fut., etc., 326, 21— 
Augm., 240, 

καί, 624 b—Crasis, 65—with 
Numbers, 222—with Part., 
587, 5—xai ὅς, καὶ τόν, 369, 
et 6é, 624, 3—xal-Kai, 
624, 2, 3—xai δὴ καέ, 624, 4 
—kat εἰ, 640, 2—kai τότε δὴ; 
642, 4a. 

καίνυμαι, 319, D. 33. 

καίπερ, hte Part., 587, 5. 

καίτοι, 630, 6 

. καίω, 35, Obs. ; 253, Obs. 
Future, 260, ‘9-1 Aorist, 
269, D. 

κακὸν ayo κακῶς ποιέω, With 
Acc., 40 

κακός, foe ree 199, 2. 

καλέω, 301, 3. 

καλός, Compar., 199, 6 


κάμνω, 321, τ Perfect, 282— 
with Acc., 400 b— with 
Part., 590. 

κάνεον, κανοῦν, 131, 3. 

«dpa, 177, D. 22. 


καρτερέω, with Part., 590. 

κατά, 448; 459— Apocope, 64, 
D. — with Inf. and Att., 
574, 2. 

κατὰπλήττομαί, with Acc., 
399. 

κατηγορέω, Augm., 239. 

κάτω, Compar., 204, 

κεῖαι, etc., 269, Ὁ. 

κεῖμαι, 314, 2. 

κεῖνος, 5866 ἐκεῖνος. 

κείρω, Fut., 262, D. 

κέκασμαι, 320, D. 33. 

κέκλημαι, Meaning, 503. 

κέκτημαι, 274, Ex. _ Moods, 
289—Meaning, 503. 

κελαδέω, 325, Ὁ. 6. 

κελεύω, Perf, 288. 

κέλλω, Fut., 266, Ex. 

κέλομαι, Aor. .) 257, Ὁ. 

xe(v), 68, D. 2 Rnelit, 92, 5. 
See ἄν. - 

κεντέω, 325, D.f. 


᾽ 


κυνέω. 

κεράννιμε, 819, 1—Sub. Mid., 

312, D. 16. 
κερδαίνω, Aor., 270, Obs.— 

Perf., 322, Obs. 
κέσκετο, 337, D. 
κῆαι, etc., 269, D. 
κήδω, 326, D. 41. 
κηρυξ, 83, Obs. 1; 145. 
κικλήσκω, 324, D: 81, 
κίνυμαι, 319, D. 
κίρνημε, 812, D. ὃ. 
κιχάνω, 321, 18. 
κίχημι, B18, Ὁ 6; 322,18. 
κίχρημι, 
κιών, etc., 319 D. 84. 
κλάζω, ΦΡΊ, Obs. — Meaning 
of the Perf. Act., 276, Ὁ. 
κλαίω, 253, Obs.; ” 396, 22 — 
Fut:,; 260, 2. 
kAdw, 301, ‘I. 
κλείς, Acc., 156. 
κλείω, κλήω, Perf. Mid., 258, 
κλέπτης, Compar., 197. 
κλέπτω, Perfect, 279— Aorist 
Pass., 295. 
-κλῆς, Proper Names in, 167; 


4, 
κλίνω, Perf., 282. 
κλύω, Aor., 316, D. 27. 
κνάω, Contr., 24, 2. 
κνίσση, 115, D, 2 
κοινός, κοινωνέω, “with Genit., 
414, 419 a—with Dat., 
436 a i. 
κοῖος, εὐ δθο, etc., 216, Ὁ. 
κολακεύω, with Ace., 890. 
κόπτω ἃ πα compounds, Mean- 
ing, 476, 2. 
κορέννυμε, "819, 6. 
κορέω, Aor., 301, Ὁ. 


κόρη, κόῤ sn, 115. 

κορόνα 200 , D— Perfect, 
ε 

-κός, Adj. in, 851. 

kotéw, Aor., 301, D.— Perf. 

Part., 277, 

κράζω, 351—Perf,, 317, 8. 

κρατέω, with Genit., 423, 

κρᾶτός, etC., See ἜΤΟΣ 


κρατύς, Positive, 199, D:1. 
κρείσσων, κράτιστος, 199, 1, 
Obs. 


κρεμάννυμι, κρέμαμαι, 319, 2; 
312, 12—Acc. of Sub. and 
Opt., 809. 


ἰκρεμόω, 819, D. 2. 


κρέσσων, 190, D. 1. 

κρήμναμαι, 812, D. ¢ 

κρίνω, 253, Obs.—Perf., 282: 
286, Obs. 

κρούω, Perf. Mid., 

kporra, with double a Ace.,402. 
κτείνω, ’Aor., 316, 4. 
κτίννυμει, 319, 11. 
κτυπέω, 825, D. σ. 
κυίσκω, 324, 21. 
κυκεών, Ace. Sin 
κυλίω, Perf. Mid. 
ἱκυνέω, 323, 84. 


ΠῚ D. 
» 288. 


μακράν. 
κύντερος, 199, Ὁ. 
kupéw, κύρω, 325, 4—Future, 
262, Ex.—with Part., 590. 
κύσαι, κύσσα, 323, D. 84. 
κύων, LTT, 


8. 
κωλύω, with Inf., 560, 3. 


A doubled after the Syll. 
Augm., , D.— Charac- 
ter, 252. 

Ay μ, Vy Py a 59.— 
’Posit tion, 77, 7. an — 
Redupl.,. 974, 2— aut, of 
‘Stems. in, 262—Aor., 270— 
Perf., 280 

r ,v,p,Monos. Stems in, Perf., 
"989 Aor. Pass., 298. 

λαγχάνω, 322, 27—with Genit. 
and Acc. “419, Obs. 

Aayws, 174. 

λάθρα, with Genit., 415. 

λάλος, Compar., 197. 

λαμβάνω; 322, 2—Perf,, 274, 
Ex.—with ’Genit., 419 b— 
Meaning, 480, 

iW omar, 322, Ὁ, 25. 
νθάνω, 322, o6—with Acc, 
- 398—with Part., 590. 

das, 177, 9. 

λάσκω, 324, 29, and Obs. 

AéPonat, construed person- 


ally, 571. 
Spee collect), Perf., 279—2 
Aor. M., 316, Ὁ. 85. 
λείπομαι, with Genit., 423. 
λέκτο, λέγμενος, 6ἴο.; 316, D. 


2 


3 99 


NO allies. Ἢ, ΕΝ 

λέλογχ 

λεύω, Perf. Mid., 
λήθω, 8 322, 26. 

Ankéw, 304, D. 29. 

λήξομαι, 392, 21. 

λήψομαι, 828, 35. 

Ae bec. AA, 56; 252. 

Aocopat, 250, Ὁ: 

AA, Pres. Morne in, 252. 

hée, 244, D. 4 

λόεσσα, 269, D. 

τὸ λοιπόν, 405, Obs. 2. 

λοῖσθος, λοίσθιος, 190, D. 

-λος, Adj. in, 352, Obs. 

Aove, Constr., 244, 4—1 Aor., 
269, D. 

Aiobuar, with Dat., 439,Obs. 

Avw, 301, 2—Perf. Opt. Mid., 

289, D. —Aor., 316, D. 28." 

with Genit., 419 ὁ. 


Awiwv, λῷστος, 7199, 


p bef. p61, Obs. 2—bef. A bec. 
D. —Change of ty 


ee daa Cons., 47; 286, 1 
doubled after the Syll. 
Augm., 234, D. 


μά, 643, 16. 
-μα, Nom. of Neuters, 343, 1; 
139. 


μακράν, 405, Obs. 2. 


364 


GREEK INDEX. 


μάλα. 
μάλα, μᾶλλον, μάλιστα, 202— 
μάλιστα δή, 642 a. 


μάν, 866 μήν. * 
μανθάνω, 329, 28—with Part., 


ἜΣ of both Genders, 140. 
μάρναμαι, Imper., 312, Ὁ, d. 
μαρτυρέω, 825, 

μάρτυς, 177, 10. 

μάσσων, θηκέστον 198, D. 
part ω, 251, Obs.—Future, 


260, 3. 

μάστιξ, 177, D. 23. 

μάχομαι, μαχέομαι, 326, 23, 
and D,—with Dat., 436 α. 

μέγας, 191 — Compar., 198 — 
μέγα, 401. 

μέδομαι, 326, D. 42. 

μεθύσκω, 894, 22. 

μείρομαι, Perf., 274, D. 

eis, 177, D. 2 24. 

μείων, See μιεκ 
out ἤ, πὰς 

μέλας, 186 

μῶν» 326, 24—with Genit., 
4 


μέλλω, 826, 25—Angm., ὅθ 
Obs. —as Fut. 2 001--;τσἀῶς, τί 
οὐ μέλλω, 501, ‘Obs. 2 2. 

μέματον, etc., 317, D.9. 

μέμβλεται, etc., 326, 1). 24. 

μέμβλωκα, 51, D.; 282, D.; 
324, D.12 


és—pecov With- 
bs. 


μεμετιμένος, 313, Dt. 

ΡΥ ἐμβετη 274, Ex.—Sub. Opt., 

D.— Meaning, 503 — 

with Part -, 91. 

μέν, Comp. μην Magee 628— 
μὲν οὖν, 081. 2 

-μεν,Ἱ — Dual and Plural 
Act., 22 

πμεναι, gio Inf. Act., 233, 
D. 3; 255, D.—Aor. Pass., 
293, D.—in Verbs in μι, 
302, D. 

μέντοι, 630, 5. 

μένω, 326, 26. 

μεσημβρία, 51, Obs. 2. 

μέσος, Compar., 195—Mean- 
ing, 30 

μεστός, with Genit., 414, 2. 

μετά, 448 ; 464—Adverb, 446. 

μεταδίέδωμι, petahap βάνω, 
with Genit., 419 a. 

μεταμέλομαι, Dep. ges 828, 
2—with Part., 

μεταξύ, 445; 448: δ 7—with 
Part., 587, 2. 

μεταπέμπομαι, Pass. mean. 
483, 8—Indir. Mid., 479. 

μετέχω, μέτοχος, with te 
419 a, and Obs. ; 414. 

μέχρι(ς), 69, Observ. 8; 445: 
448; 455, 6; 556—without 
Elision, 64, Obs. 1. 

μή, Synizesis, 66—Neg., 612, 
etc.—in sentences of pur- 
pose, 530—with Verbs of 


νέατος. 


Verbs of fearing, 512; 588: 
616, Obs. 3—with Future 
and Perf. Ind., 533, Obs.— 
with Hypoth. Part., 583— 
in questions, 608—‘ ‘wheth-| 
er perchance,” 610--μὴ οὐ, 
621; 512; ὅ88 --- μὴ ὅτι, 
622, 4 

μηδείς, μήπω, etc., Β66 οὐδείς, 
οὕπω, ctc. 

μηκάομαι, 325, 2. ο. 

μήν, 643, 12 

μήτηρ, 150, 153. 

-μι, 1 Pers. Sing. Act., 226; 
302, 1 — Subj., 233, D. ye 
256, Ὁ. 


μίγνυμε, 319, 18. 

μικρός, Compar., 199, 3. 

μιμέομαι, Meaning, 328, 4— 
with Acc., 398. 

μιμνήσκω, 914, Ex.; 324, 6— 
ye galaapeae with Genit., 


iv, 205. Ὁ. 
Mivws, Acc. Sing., 163, D.; 
174, 


μίσγω, 397, 7—Aor. Mid., 316, 
D. 37. 


av, in divis. of Syll., 72,1. 

ava, Genit. Sing., 116 δ. 

μνήμων, With: Genit., 414, 3. 

μολοῦμαι; 824, 12, 

μόνον οὐ, οὐχὶ, ᾽ρ29, 5. 

μονοφάγος, comp., 197. 

-μος, Masc. in, 342, 2—Adj. 
in, 352, Obs. 

pote, 326, 27. 

μυκάομαι, 325, D. p. 

μῦς, Masc., 140. 


i o (and ¢) dropped, 
141,1: 149; 187—bef. 
ΓΕ Conson., 51—bec. % 
51; 283—Present Stemsin, 
253 — dropped in Perfect 
Stems, 282; 286, 1, Obs.— 
inserted in 1 Aor. Pass., 
298, D.—affixed to Verb.- 
Stem, 321—doubled after 
the Syll. Augm., 234, D.— 
doubled in the Pres. Stem, 
318, 3—movable, 68. 
τν, in the Acc. Sing., 134, 4; 
141; .155, etc. ; 173, 3—in 
Neuters, 125—1 Pers. Sing. 
in Hist. Tenses Act., 226— 
3 Pl. in Hist. Tenses, 226; 


302, D. 
,|-va, affixed to Verb.-Stems, 


ye 
-vat, Inf., 302, 6; 333, 1. 
vai, 648, 14, 
vacetaw, Contr., 243, D. 1. 
ναῦς, 177, 
vd, vO, vt, dropped before oc, 
—147, 1; 149. 


-ve, affixed to Verb.-Stems, 
529, 


prohibiting,518; 510—with 


véaros, 200; 


οἴκαδε. 

νέμω, 326, 28. 

νέω, 248—Fut., 260, 2. 

vy, 6438, 15. 

vito, 251, Obs. 

ikaw "hina: 400 c—Mean- 
ing, 486, Obs. 

viv, 205, D. 

ἀπο-, dta-, 
Dep. Pass., 3 28, 2. 

νομέζω, with’ Genitive, 417— 
with Inf., 569. 

τνος, Adj. in, 352, Obs. 

vocéw, Diff. of Pres, and Aor., 
4 


ybeross Fem., 127, 5. 

-v7., 3 Plur. of Princ. Tenses 
Act., 226. 

ἰνῶν; 8 Pl. Imper. Act., 228. 

-vy affixed to Verb.- -Stems, 
304, 23 318, 1. 

vipa, Voc. Sing., 117, D3. 

vi(v), 68, D.—Enclit., 92, 5— 
Diff. of νύν and νῦν, 99; "637, 
8---υῦν δή, 642, 4 6. 

vwitepos, 208, D. 


&,34; 48; 260, 

-£, Mase. and Fem. i in, 172. 
ξέω, 301, 1. 

ξυρέω, 325, 6. 

ftw, Perf. Mid., 288. 


o, bec. ov, 24, D.3; 42; 147,1; 
bec. ox, 24, Ὁ. 3—bee. ω, 40: 
147, 2; 151; 193; 233, 4— 
bec. ε, "248, D. e— drop ed 
after ac, 194—for a, 268, 
854—Conn. Vowel,178; "933, 


ς 854. 

i oer 122, Obs. ; 

ὅ, for é ὅς, 213, D.—Neut. for 
ὅτι, 688, 1—Crasis, 65. 

ὁ μέν----ὁ δὲ 369, 1--τὸν καὶ τόν, 
809,2. See τὸ. 

oa bec. w, 37—bec. a, 183. 

ὅδε, 212; 475. See also De- 
monst. Pron. 


év-, ἐν νοέομαι, 


ὀδύρεσθαι, With Acc., 400 c. 


dada, 275, D. 1. 

oe bec. ov, 87. 

oe bec. οἐ or ov, 375 948, Obs. 

τοειδης, Adj. in, 359, 2, Obs. - 

ὄζω, 326, 29—Perf. 975, Ὁ. 1. 

on bec. ὠ, 37. 

ὅθι, πόθι, 76015 217, D. 

ὁθούνεκα, 636, 3. 

ot from ε, 40—bec. w, 235. 

τοι, ,ἀτορροᾶ, , 64, D.—Short in 
regard to ‘AcC., 83, Obs. 2; 
108—Voc. ending, 163, 

οἴγνυμε, 819, 19. 

οἶδα, 817, 6—with Part., 591. 


joldave, οἰδέω, 322, 19. 


Οἱδέπους, 174, D. 
-oin, ending for -ora, 115, D.2, 
JOO Genit. and Dat. Dual, 

128, D.; 141, D 


δέδαδες 94; 178. 


GREEK INDEX. 


365 


οἰκεῖος. 

οἰκεῖος, With Genit., 414, 1— 
with Dat., 436 ὃ. 

οἴκοι, 179. 

οἰκτρός, Compar., 198. 

οἶμαι, 

οἱμώζω, 251,Obs.—Fut., 200,3. 
—Mean. of Fut. Mid., 266. 

τοῖν, ending of Genitive and|: 
Dative Dual, 141; 173, 4. 

owoxoew, AugM. 1 237, D. 

-oco,.in the Genit., 128, Ὁ 
2 Pers. Sing. Opt. ‘Mid., 
, 233, 5. 

οἷο, 213, D. 

οἴομαι, ὀΐομαι, 326,30—2 Pers. 
Sing. Pres., 233, 3— Dep. 
,Pass., 328, 2 

οἷος, Attr. and Article, 600— 
witl nf., 1 ---οἰόστε, 94 
wre οἷα δή, With Part., 


4 

οἷς, 160. 

oice, 268, D.—otcer, 327, 12. 

-οισε(ν), Dat. ῬῚ., 128, Ὁ. 

οἴσω, ete., 327, 12. 

οἴχομαι, οἰχνέω, 326, 31, and|é 
D.—Meaning, 436, ‘Obs. -- 
with Part., 90. 

ὀλέκω, 319, D. 20. 

ὀλίγος, Compar., 199, 4, 

ὀλεγωρέω, With Genit., 420. 

ὀλισθάνω, 322, 20. 

ὄλλυμε, 319, 20-—Meaning of |é 
Perf., 329 9; 503 — Itera- 
tive, 337, δ. 

ὅλος, Position, 390. 

᾿Ολύμπια, 400 6. 

ὁμιλέω, with Dat., 4806 α. 

ὄμνυμι, 819, 21— with the 
ACC., 399. 

ὅμοιος, ὁμοιόομαι, ὁμολογέω, 
ὁμοῦ, etc., With Dat., 480 a, 


Saokoycouas, constr. person- 
ally, 571. 

ὀμόργνυμε, 319, 22. 

ὁμώνυμος, with Dat., 436 ὃ. 

a {—after Participle, 


τον, pe στ. of Neuters, 172. 
ὄνειρος, 175. 
ὀνίνημι, 812, 2—Acc. of Aor. 
Sub. and Opt. Mid., 309— 
with Sieg 396. 
ὄνομαι, 314, 
ὀξύνω, Perf, Mid., 286, Obs. 
oo bec. ov, 36 ; 30. 
τοος, Adj. in, 183. 
dou, 2 f 
ὁπηνίκα, 634, 3 
ὄπισθεν, with Genit., 415. 
ὁπότε, ὁπόταν, 
“ἐδ85 οΟἴζθη ‘as,” B58, Obs. 1. 
ὄπωπα, 275, a 
ὅπως, 632, 3—in sentences of 
urpose, 530—with ἄν, 531 
bec Obs. —with Future Ind., 
500; 553 —in Challenges 
and Warnings, 553, Obs.— 


ove. 
ὅπως μή, With Verbs of 
Fearing, 533, Obs. 
ὁράω, 327, 8—Double Augm., 
237—Perf.,, 327, 8; 275, “D.1 
—with Part., 591. 
ὀργαίνω, Aor. , 270, Obs. 
ὀρέγνυμε, 819, D. 80. 
ὀρέγομαι, ‘with Genit., 419 ¢. 
ὀρέοντο, 920, 
ὄρνις, 177, 12—Ace. Sing., 156. 
ὄρνυμε, 319, D. 37—2 Aorist 
Mid., 316, D. δ 
ὄρονται, 807, D.8 
ὁρόω, 243 43, Ὁ. 8α. 
ὄρσεο, 268, D. 
ὀρύσσω, Perf., oT, 1 
ὄρωρα, 320, D. 37. 
-os, Neuters in, 243, 2, and 
Obs. ; 139; 172—Ending of 
Genit., 141; 157, D.; 173, 


te & 
ὅς, Relative, 213—Demonst., 
212, D.; 213, Obs., and D.— 
for the Possess. of 1 and 2 
Pers., 471, Obs. δ; 208, Ὁ. 
ὅσος, Attr., "600—Soov, 601—! 
ὅσον οὐ, 622, 5. 
ὁσσάτιος, 216, D. 
ὄσσε, 177, D. 25, 
ὅστις, 94-214, Obs. 2---ὅστις 
and oarsovv, Mean., 600. 
ὀσφραίνομαι, 322, 21, and Obs. 
ὅτε, ὅταν, ᾿ 634, 1—with 
Aor. Ind., 493—“as often 
as,” 558, Obs. 
ὅτι and 6 τι, 214, Obs. 2. 
ge 633 1—without Elision, 
Obs. 1—in Dependent 
Declarative Sentences, 525 
-ὅτιε μή, 633, 1 ὃ. 
ὁτίη, 218. 
ὅτις, 214, D. . 
ov from o. See o. 
-ov, Genitive ending, 122, 2; 
128; 134, 2—Conn. Vowel, 
233, 1-2 Pers. Sing. Imper. 
«πὰ Imperf. Mid., 233, 5 
ov, οὐκ, οὐχ, 69, Obs. 1 52, D. 
—Atonous, 97 4; 612, etc. 
—with Prohibitives, 499, 
Obs.—in questions, 608—o0 
γάρ, οὐ γὰρ ἀλλά, 636, 6 d. 
—ov δῆτα, 642, 6—ovK ὁ ἄρα, 
637, 1---οὐ μή, 620---οὐ μήν 
(μέντοῦ ἀλλά, 622, 6 --- οὐ 
»μόνον-ἀλλὰ καί, 624, 6. 
ov, οἷ, &, etc., Meaning, 471, 
Obs. ὃ. 


οὐδέ, 62 ὅ, 1 
οὐδείς, 991. Αἰ. γθθ2---οὐδέν, 
622,1. 


otnéri. 622, 2. 
οὐκοῦν and οὔκουν, Diff. 99; 


οὐλόμενος, 319, D. 20. 
οὖν, 051, 2—Affixed, ‘218. 
-οῦν, Acc. Sing., 163, Mss 


oi τ 636, 3. 


πάσχω. 
οὔπω, 622, 2 
olpéw, Augment, 237. 
; 352, 4— 
» 172. 


“ἴω, 177, 18; 142, 3—Neut., 
οὐτάω, Aor., 316, 20, Ὁ. 


οὔτε, 94— οὔτε οὔτε; 0816-0804, 


625, 2, and Obs. 


οὔτι, 623, 1. 
οὔτοι, 643, 10. 
ates 219; 475 ;—in address- 
308 - οὐτοσὶ 212. 
οὕτω "ἢ 09, Obs.3—with Part. os 
5ST, 4, 
οὐχί, 97, Obs. : 


οὐχ ὅτι, οὐχ ὅπως, 622, 3, 4. 
pease and ὀφέλλω, Diff, 253, 
S. 


ὀφείλω, 326, 32. 

ὀφέλλω,1 Aor., 270, D. 

ὀφλισκάνω, 822, "92. 

ὄφρα, 556; 635, 10.—See ἵ ἵνα. 

ὀφρύς, Ace. P]., 158. 

ὄχος, 4114, D 

ὄχωκα, 807, D. 6. 

ὄψιος, Comp., 195. 

ὄψομαι, 327, 8. 

bWogayos, Compar., 197. 

-ow, Length. in Contr. Verb, 
243, D. A. 3—Attic Fut., 
263, D.—Verbs in, 353, 1, 
and Obs. 1. 


x, doubled, aa D. (62, D.)— 
Aspir. i in δὴ 

παῖς, Genit., Pie. and Dual, 
142, 3—Voe. Sing., 148—of 
two Genders, 140. 

παίω, Perf. Mid., 288. 

παλαιός, Compar., 194, 

marty, τα nae us before σ, 

Ss. . 

edhe, Aor. 257, D.—2 Aor. 
Mid., 316, 

mav, 142, b—in Compos. be- 
fore a, 49, Obs. 1. 

παντάπασι(ν), 68 

Tapa, Tapat, dap. 448, III. ; 
465—Apoc., 64, Ὁ. 

mapa, 90. 

παρανομέω, irreg. .Augm., ,239. 

παραπλήσιος, ve at., 480 

—Compar., 1 

παρατίθεμαι, iB. 

mapaxwpéw,WithGenit.,419 6. 

παρέχω and παρέχομαι, 480. 

παρέχω, with Inf., 561. 

παροινέω, double Aug. +, 240. 

παρόν, 586. 

πάρος, 56D ; 635, 12. 

παῤῥησιάζομαι, "Augm., 239. 

mas,Genit. and Dat. Accent. 
142 , 2—meaning with and 

; without Art., 390, and Obs. 

πάσσω, er » Obs. —Fat. 260, 3. 


πάσσων,Ἱ 


οὗξ, 65. 


8, D. 
Pay Ae δ, δ Pert, 317, Ὁ. 


366 GREEK INDEX. 
πατέομαι. Be eps σ. 
έομαι, 325, T. πιπράσκω, 824,1. πράττομαι, With double 
piel Σ πίπτω, 327, 15 — Pert. Part.,| Acc., 402. : 
παύομαι, Aorist, 298 — with , D. 17. πρέσβυς, 177, 15. 
Genit., 419 e——with Part. πίσυρες, 220, D. 4. πρήθω, 312, 4. 


mean., 590. 

πείθω, Aorist, 257, D.—Perf., 

«ἴδ θαι, and Aor. 

Part., 326, D. 43 — Mean- 
ing, 330, 8: 503. 

πεινάω, Contr., 244, 2. 

πείσομαι, 327, 9. 

πελάζω, 1 Aor. Imper., 268, D. 

πέλεκυς, Masc., 140; 157. 

πέμπω, Perf., 279, 

πένης, a 192 — with 
Genit., 414, 2 

πέποιθα, 5811, D. 15. 

πέπονθα, 817, D..14. 

ai Sa and πέπραχα, Diff., 


πέπρωται, 285, D. 
πέπταμαι, 274, Ex. 
πέπτωκα, 274, Ἐχ.; : 821, 15. 
πέπωκα, 8 
πέπων, Compar., 190 α. 
πέρ, 641, 8 —Enclit., 92, 5— 
Affix 


; 218. 

πέρα, With Genit., 4145—Com- 
par., 200. 

mépd@, 326, 33. 

πέρθω, 2 Aor. 257, D.; 59, D. 
—Aor, Inf. “Mid., 316, D.41. 

περί, 448, IIT. ; 466—without 

tision, 64, Obs. 1—Anastr., 

446—Adverb, ibid. — with 
Augm., 238. 

meptBadropat, with double 
Acc. “9. 402. 

περεγίγνομαι, περίειμι, With 
Genit., 429, 

πέρνημι, Part. , 312, D. 6. 

πέρυσι(ν), 68, 3. 

πεσεῖν, 521, 75. 

πέσσω, 250, ve 

πετάννυμι, 319, 8 

Πετεώς, Genit. Sing. Sg 58 Ἐν 

πέτομαι, 820, 84--- Aor., 61 cs 
257, D.; 8] 1 De 

πεύθομαι, 822, 29. 

πέφνον, 251, D. 

πεφυζότες, O77, D. 

ay, Enclit., 92, 4, 

πήγνυμι, 819, "939 Aorist 
330, 4, 5816, D. 39—Meaning, 


πηνίκα, with Genit., 415, 

πῆχυς, Masc., 140; 154. 

ee σιέζω, 325, Ὁ. ἢ. 

πῖθι, 31 

sts Aor., 312, Ὁ. f. 

sever 312, ’3_-with Gen- 
itive, 41 

πίμπρημι, 312, 

mivw, 321, 4; ea 10—F uture, 
265—Aor., 321, 4; 316, 15— 
Meaning, 329, 7—with Gen- 
itive, 419 d, and Obs. 

πίομαι, 265; 827, 10, 

πιπίσκω, 324, 20. 


᾿Ἰπειτνέω, 829, 35. 

πίτνημι, 312, ,D. 9. 

πιφαύσκω, 324, 1). 32. 

πίων, Compar., 196 a. 

πλάζω, 251, Obs. 

πλάσσω, 250, Obs.— Future, 
260, 3. 

πλείων, πλεῖστος, 199, 
πλέον, Without ἤ, 626, Obs. 
-πλεῦν, 199, Ὁ. 


πλέως, 184 — with seat 
4, 
πλήθω, 812, 3—with Genit., 


πλήν, 445 ; 455, 9 

πλήρης, πληρόω, δ with Genit., 

2 

πλησίον, Compar., 195—with 
Genit., 415. 

πλήσσω, > Aorist and Future 
Pass., 295. ° 

πλῆτο, 316, Ὁ. 22. 

-πλοῦς, in Multiplicat., 228, 

πλούσιος, With Geunit., 414, 2. 

πλύνω, Perf., 282. 

πλώω, Aor., 316, Ὁ. 24. 


πνέω, 945. Fut., 260, 2; 264 
FP Res 285, D. ‘with Ace., 
hers 171, 14, 


ποδός, 866 πούς. 

ποθέν, Encl., 92, 4. 

ποθέω, 801, 4. 

ποθί, see πού. 

moi, Encl., 92, 4. 

ποϊέω and ποιέομαι, 480 — 
with Genit., 417. 

πόλις, 157, D. ~ Gender, 188 ὃ 
—Compos., 189, 3. 

πολιτεύω and wokrredopal 
480, Obs. 

πόλλάκιζε), 69, Obs. 8: 294. 

πολύς, 191 — Compar., 199, 5 
--πολύ, 404, Obs.—oAXG, 
with Comp. -, 440, 

πονέω, 301, 4 

πόῤῥω, with Genit., 415. 

Ποσειδῶν, ACC. Sing. 9 171 — 
Voe., 148, Obs. » 

ποτέ, Encl., 92, 4. 

πότερον ἤ, 611 —in- ‘Depend. 
Interr. Sentences, 525. 

mori, see mpos. 

mov, with Genitive, 415. 

πού (ποθ), Encl., 92, 4, 

πουλύς, Fem., 188, D. 

πούς, 142 by 147, 1, Ex; — 
Dat. Plur., ; 49, D.; 141, D.; 
149, D. Nay Compos., 160. 
Mase. bo ass 

πρᾷος, 191 


= 


πράττω; Meaning, 476, 1 — 


πρίαμαι, 2 Aorist, 316, 8 — 
a of Aor. Sub. "Opt. δὲ 


ἃ Obs. 1, 2. 

. Mid., 

πρό, ; 454 — Crasis, 65 
—wit Augm.,in Compos., 
238 — with Inf. and ὲ 
574, ie seit ads TL: 

πρός (moti, mpoti), 
467—Adyv., 446—with Inf. 
and Art., 574, 2, 4. 

πρόσθεν, πρόσω, ΠΗ Genit. ΤΆ 
415. 

mpos7kov, 586. 

mposwrov, Nem. Acc. *Plar., 
1%, 

πρότερος, πρῶτος, 200. 

προὔργου, Compar., 195. 

mpwos, Compar., 195% 

πτήσσω, 810, : 

eng 250, Obs. — Future, 

3 . . 

MTV, | 301, 1. 

πτωχός, Compar., 197. 

πυθέσθαι, 322, 

Πυκνός, 177, 14. 

πύματος, 190, D. eer ee Οδ 


πυνθάνομαι, , 29 — wi 
Genit., 420. 
ΤΟΣ 151: 175; Nent., 


πώ, aw(s), Encl. 7 92, 4. 
πῶς, with Se ap 415 — πῶς 
yap ov, 636, 6 


p, doubled, 62 — after the 
Augm. ,234—after Redupl., 
274, 4—Metathesis, 59—in 
2 Aor., 257, gine ῥῥ, 18; 

ῥά, Encl., 92, 5.—See ἄρα. 

ῥάβδος, Fem., 127, 5. 

ῥᾷδιος, Compar., ἐπ 7. 

anes bf Be 

ῥέζω, 32 

δερυκαβένον: ae D. 

péw, 248 ; 326, 35—F ut., 260, 2.° 

ῥήγνυμι, 819, 24; 278—Mean- 
ing, 330, 5. 

ῥηθήσομαι, etc., 327, 13. 

peyéw, 325, 1), ὁ, 
ῥίγιον, Ἴ99, D. 

ῥιγόω, Contr., 244, 3. 

ῥιπτέω, ῥίπτω, 325, 8, 

ῥῦσθαι, etc., 314, D. 

pwvvupe, 319, 10. 


«,2; 88 c—effect on sitiheds 
ing Vowel and Cons., 46, 
-etc.; 260, etc. ; 286—Com- 
bin., 48—Assim. to p, 50 ὃ 
—to A, μιν, p, 270, D.—bec. 
Spir. Asp., 60 ὃ; 808; 821, 


5 Obs.—from 7, ‘see τι 


GREEK INDEX. 


867. 


σ. 


σ, dropped, 61 a, b—in Sigma 
* Stems, 166—in Pres. So. 
233, 3, 4, 5—in the Future, 
262, ’ Obs., etc. —in the 1 
Aor., 268 ; 269, D.; 270— 
in the 9 Aor. Mid., ’307—in 
the ΤῸ and Plup. Mid., 


284, 

σ, inserted in the Perf., 288 
—in the Weak Pass. Siem, 
298—in the Verb. Adj., 300 
—in Deriv., ous Obs, 2—in 
Conipos., 358, 2 

σ, doubled in the Dat. Plar. ye 
158, D.—in the Fut., 261, 
D.—in the 1 Aor., 269, Do 
after Syl. Augm., 234, D. 

s, dropped, 69, Observ. ’3—in 

' Compar., 204. 

s, ending of Nom. Sing., 173, 
13 113; 122,1; 134,15; 141; 
145; 1 41, Ἰ: 155 : 160 — 
wanting, 122, D.1; 147, 2; 

5 


s, ending of Dat. Plur., 119; 
134, s—of Acc. Pl. , 134, 10; 
118, 7—of 2 Person Sing. 
in Hist. Tenses Act., 226 

‘ —Nom. of Fem., 348; 349, 
Obs. 

-ca, Fem. ending, 187. 

σαλπίζω, 251, Obs. 

-cav, 3 Pl. in ’Preter., 302, a 

Σαρπηδών, 174, D. 

nee 319, 7-2 Aor., 316, 

318, 5—Meaning, 329, δ. 

-σε, eet Suffix, 178. 

σεαυτοῦ, 210—Poss., 472 a. 

σέβομαι, Dep. Pass., 328, > 

-ceiw, Verbs in, 353, Obs. 2 

ceiw, Perf. Mid. 288, 

σεύω, 248, D.—1 "Aor., 269, D. 
“—Perf, Mid., 274, D., 535, 
D.—2 Aor., 316, D. 30. 

σήπω, Mean. of Perf, 330, 6. 

ons, Gen., Pl. and Du., 149, 3. 

of, after Cons., 61a; 286, 4, 

-σθα, 1 in the 2Pers. Sing. Sub. 
and Opt., 233, D. 1: 255, 
D. 1—Ind., 302, D.—in the 
1 Person Plur. Pres. Mid., 
233, D. 5. 

-σθε, 2 Pers, Plural, Imper. 
Mid., 228. 

-σθον,1 Pers. Du. Pres, Mid., 
233, D. 5—3 Person Dual 
Imperf., 233, D. fe Pers. 
Du. Imper. Mid., 

-σθω, -σθων, yr a τ Pers. 
one Du. Pl. Imper. Mid., 


-ot, 2 Pers. Sing. of Princ. 
Tenses Act.; 226; 302, 2. 

-or(v), per. Plur., 68, oe 119; 
134, 8; 141; 160 sa 
3 Pers. Sing. Pres. Subj. 
933, D. 1; 255, Ὁ. 1—Local 
en ling, 179; 68, 2—3 Pers. 
Plur. and Sing. 68, 5. 


ope. 

-σια, -σις, Fem. in, 342, 1. 

ovyaw, Diff. of Pres. and 
Aor., soo Meee of Fut. 
Mid., 

τσιμος, rete in, 352, Obs. 

σιωπάω, Meaning of Fut. 
Mid., 266. 

ox, in forming Inchoatives, 
324—Iteratives, 334, D.,etc. 

okedavvupe, 319, 4. 

σκέλλω, AOr., 316, 10—Mean- 
ing, 329, 6 

σκίδνημε, 315, D.h; 319, 4. 

σκοπέω and έομαι, ᾽480. 

σκότος, 

Σκύλλη, 115, Ὁ. 2. 

σκώρ, 176. 

σμάω, Contr., 244, 2. 

-co, 2 ἢ Person Sing. Imper. 
Mid., 2 

σπάω, 301 Py Perk Mid., 288. 

σπώνδω, Hat, 260, 1— Perf. 


6, Obs. 

Sire tee 

σπέσθαι, etC., 807, 5. 

σπεύδω, with Inf, 560, 3. 

σπουδάζω, Meaning of Fut. 
Mid., 266 

oo, 57; 250 

-σσω, Verbs in, 250—Future, 
260, 3. 

-στα, 307. 

στάζω, 251, ΟΣ ΜΉΝ, 260, 3. 
στάχυς, Mase. AER 

otei fa, 326, 36. 

στέλλω, Perf., 
Pass., 295. 

στενάζω, 251, Obs.—Future, 
260, 

Greveadtt, Masc., 127, 2. 

στέργω, with Dat., 459, Obs. 

στερίσκω, 324, 26— with Gen- 
itive, 419 6. 

στίζω, 251, Obs.—Fut., 260, 3. 

aroa, 115 (Ex X.). 

στορέννυμι, 819, 8. 

στόρνυμι, 319, 

στοχαζάμαι, with Genitive, 
4 


282 — Aorist 


ores Perf., sae δον 
of Aor. Pass., 328,3. 

στρώννυμι, 919, Ἴ1. 

στυγέω, 825, D. 

wae oa, Constr. personal- 
7; 

σύμῥώνεα, συνάδω, With Dat., 


Biss ‘i, in Compos. bef. σ 
and ¢, 49, Obs. 1—in Dis- 
tributives, 223, 

-συνη, Fem., 346, 2. 

— μοι, with Part., 591, 


συνώνυμος, with Dat., 436 ὃ. 
avs, ΟΣ b—of two Genders, 


Me with Gen., 419, e. 
σφέ, 2057 D.—opétepos, 472 ὃ 


--σ pos, 20 yp Ae 


Tt. 


σφηξ, Masc., 140. 
σχεθέειν, 338, Ὁ. 
σχές, etc., 316, 11; 897, 6. 
σχολαῖος, “Compar., 194, 
owt, 1 Aor. Pass., "298, 
Σωκράτης, 114. 

σῶς, 184, 


swrtip, VOC Sing., 152. 


τ, Pronunt., 4— bec. 0, 54— 
becomes a, 60 a; 67; 187— 
dropped, 147, 2’: 169 — in 
the Perfect, 281—changes 
before, 286, "3 — affixed to 
Verb. Stem, 249—movable, 


169, 
τάν, Defect., 177, 16. 
τάνυμαι, 319, Ὁ. 
τάχα, 212— τὴν ταχίστην, 405, 
Obs. 2. 
sig σὰ Compar. θάσσων, 54 ὃ; 
9 Ν 


-τε, 2 Pers. Plur. Act., 226— 
2 Plur. Imper. Act., 228. 
-τέ, 624 b — Enclit., 92, 5 — 

Affix, 94; 624, B — renal, 
τέ-δέ, 624, 2, and Obs, 
τεθνήξω, 29 
τεΐν, 205, ἫΝ 
τείνω, Per fect, 282—1 Aorist 
Pass., 298. 
-τειρα; Fem., 341, 2. 
τεκμήριον δέ, "636, 6d. 
aaah oh A Pert Mid., 288. 
τέμει, 3 D. 10. E 
τέμνω, | a. 10. 
τέο, τεῦ, τέω, CLC., 214, Ὁ. 
τεὸς, 208, D. 
“TEOS, Verb. rt i 300; βῶδς 
with Dat., 43 
-TEPOS, Spears 192 ; 208, 
bs. 3 
ser eer oh οὶ 59, D. ; 257, 
“ore ; 295, D. —with Partic., 
592. ° 
τεταγών, 257, Ὁ. 


τέτακα, 282. 

τέτληκα, 811, Ὁ. 10. 
τέτμον, 257, 

τετραίνω, Aor., 270, Obs. 
τέτρηχα, 277, 1). 


τετυκεῖν, 322, D.3 


30. 
τεύχω, 322, 30 — Perf. Mid., 
285, D.* 


THK, "Meaning, 330, T. 
τηλικοῦτος, τηλικόςδε, 212; 
-την, Ending of the 8 Person 
Dual of the Hist. Tenses, 
Act., 226—of the 2 Person 
Dual, 233, D. 7. 
-TNP, Mase. i in, 341, 2; 137. 
-rnprov, Neut. in, 345, 1. 
“THE, Nom. of Mase. in, 34 
; 349, 2—Voc. Sing, ia 
τοι, of Fem. in, 346,1; 


τε bec. oo, 57— inserted in 


Derivation, 351, 


868 


GREEK INDEX. 


“τι. 


«τι, 8 Pers. Sing. Act. in the 
eee Tenses, 226. 


; why? 404, Obs.—ri γάρ ἢ 


“636, Yee δή; 642, 4 
-- τί δήπου; 642, 5 — τί 
Onta; 642, θ---τέ μαθών ; τί 
eA 606, Obs. 2---τὸ μήν; 
643, 12. 

τίη, 218. 

τίθημι; Aor. Pass., 53 ὃ. 

τίκτω, 9, 

τιμάω, with Genit., 421. 

τιμωρέομαι and -έω, 481 b— 
-έομαι, With “eed 396. 

“ civupe, 319, D. 

τίνω, 321, 5. 

τίπτε, 61, D. 

Tipuvs, 50 b, Obs. 2. 

-τις, Nom. Fem., 341, 2; 842,1, 

τίς, τί, 214—for ὅςτις, 609. 

τὶς, Th, "214Encl., 92, 1—7wWa, 
to be sepplied, "568. 

τιτράω, 327, 

TITPWOKY, ob, 16. 

τιτύσκομαι, 322, D. 30; 324, 
D. 37. 


τλῆναι, etc., 316, 6. 

τμήγω, 821, Ὁ. 10. 

τό, 379, Obs. ; ; 104; 559 b—r6 
μέν, τὸ δέ, 369; Obs. — τὸ 
πρίν, 635, 11. 

τόθι, heal. τώς, 217, D. 

τοὶ, 643, 10—Encl., 92, 5. 

τοίγαρ, τοιγαροῦν, τοιγάρτοι, 

»  -- τοινυν, 


ἘΣ 


. 
? ? 


637, 

τοῖο, ete., 212, D. 

τοιοῦτος, ὑπότόξδς; 212; 475. 

τοῖςδεσι, 212, 

τόλμα,11ὅ (Bx. ). 

-τον. 2 and 3 Pers. Du. Act., 
226—3 Pers. Dual Imperf., 
233, D. T—2 Pers. Du. Im- 
perf., 228. 

-τός, Verbal Adj. in, 300. 

τοσοῦτος, τοσύςδε, 912: 475. 

τότε, with Part., 587, 4, 

τοῦ, τῷ, 214, Obs. 1 1. 

ne? for -τερ in the Dat.Plur., 


“Tpa, Fem. in, 344, Obs, 

τρέπω, 2 Aorist ‘act., 257— 
2 Aorist Pass., 204—Perf., 
279; 285. 

τρέφω, 54c—Perf., 219 ; 285— 
Aor. Pass., 295-—Aor. Act. 
Meaning, 329, Ώ. 

τρέχω, D4 δ; 807, 11. 

τρήσω, 


6. 
Ἴστρια, Fem. in, 341, 2—Quan- # 


tity, 117. 
τριήρης, Genit. Pl., 166. 
ετρις, Fem. in, 341, 2. 
τριχός, 866 θρίξ, 
~tpov, Neut. in, 344, 
τρώγω, 2 Aor. Act., 257. 
Tpws, Gen. Pl. and Du., 142, 3. 
τρώω, 324, D.16. 


TT, -TTW, SCC Go, -σσω. 


φείδομαι. 
τυγχάνω, 322, 80, etc. — with 
‘the Genitive, 419 e— with 
Part., 590. 
τύνη; 205, Ὁ. 
τύπτω, 326, 81. 
τύφω, ὅ4 Cc. 
τυχεῖν, 322, 80. 
“TW, -των, 8 Pers. Sing. and 
Du. Imper. Act., 228, 
-τωρ, Nom. Mase. in, 341,°2; 
137. 


-τωσαν, 3 Pers. Plur. Imper. 
Act., 228. 


u bec. F, 35, D. 2; 160; 248, 
Obs. ~ bee. ὅ, 40 — bec. ev, 
40; 278 — “bec. ov, 40, D.— 
of the Stem. bec. ε, ᾽151-- 
Long by nature, 88, ‘Obs. 1 
—lengthened, 253, ‘Obs.— 
dropped, 253 — not drop- 
ped, 64. 

τυ, Neut. in, 139; 172. 

ὑβρίέζω, with Acc., 396. 

ὑβριστής, Compar., 197. 

-vdp.ov, Neut. in, 347, Obs. 1. 

ὕδωρ, 176—Neut., 140. 

ve bec. ov, 158. 

νι, Diphth., 28. 

-ua, Fem. of Perf. Partic., 


188. 
υἱός, 177, ‘Lis 
ἔριν ὕμιν, etc., 207 — ὑμός, 


“vv, ie of Masc. and Nent. 
in, 172. 

-vvw, Verbs in, 353, 8. 

imai, see ὑπό. 

ὕπατος, 200. 

ὑπέρ (ὑπειρὺ, 448, 11..Ἄ. : 460 
—with Inf. and Att., 574, 3, 

ὑπισχνοῦμαι, 323, 36 — with 


nf., 569. 
ὑπό, τὰ III.; 468—Apoc., 
64, 
ivow-cete, Augm., 239. 


-us, Nom. Masc. and Fem., 
172 — nde in Acc. 


Sing., 1 
ὑσμένη, Dat. Sing., 175, D. 
ὕστερος, ὕστατος, ὑστάτιος, 
υ: ν᾽ 


οὕστερος, ὑστερέω, With Gen., 


416, Obs.33 42. | 
¢, Pronunt., 6. 


᾿Ιφαάνθην, 321, D. 
|paccvos, Superl., 193, D. 


aive, φαείνω; 321, D.—Perf., 
989--Meaning, 330, 8—Aor. 
Pass., 298, D. — Meaning, 
828, 3 — Diff. of Pres. and 
Aor., 498. 


ΣΝ φανερός εἰμι, With 


Part., 590. 

packw, 324, 8. 

φείδομαι, 326, D.45—Aor. and 
Fut. , 257, Ὁ D.—with Genit., 


419 ὁ, 


χρίω. 
φέρτε, 315, 1). 4. ᾿ 
φέρτερος, φέρτατος, φέριστος, 


$épe, 327, 12—Im rat. of 1 
Aor τ Act 2 268, D.—Mean- 
ing, 2—épwv, 580. 

φεύγω, 892, 4 oe ut. Mid., 264 
—Perf. d., 285, D. —with 
Acc., = Genit., 422 
—Meanin , 486, Obs. 

ὅπ gt, δ s. Ind. Encl., 


φθάνω,. 321, 3—2 Aor., 316, 7 
— with (Aces 398 — with 
Part., 5: 

φθείρω, Pert , 262—Meaning, 
330, Ὁ. 


φθίνω, 821, 6—Aor. Mid., 316, 


φιλέω, 325, Ὁ). 1. 

φίλος, Compar., 195. 

φιλοτιμέομαι, ‘Dep. 
328, 2. 


-φι(ν), 118, Ὁ. 
φοβοῦμαι, "Meaning of Aor., 
28, 3—with Inf., 560, 3. 

φοῖνιξ, 88, Obs. 1; 145, 
φορῆναι, 866 φέρω. 

φράγνυμι, φάργνυμει, 319, 26, 
φράζω, Aor., 257, 


Pass., 


ἰφρέαρ, 176. 


φρήν, Fem., 140. 
φύγαδε, 118, D. 
φυγγάνω, 322, 31, and Obs. 
τφυής, Adj. in, Ace. Sing.,166. 
φυλάττομαι, with Acc., 399. 
pipe, Fut., 262, D. 
we τῴ; 316, 17—Meaning, 


φώς, ‘pes, enit. Plur. and 
Dual, 142 8 


Xaipw, 326; 38—with Dat. 439, 
Obs. swith Part., 592. 

χαλάω, 301, 1 

χαλεπαίνω, withDat.,439, Obs. 

χαλεπός, with Inf., 56 

χαλεπῶς φέρω awititPart.,609, 

xavdave, 323, v8 


| χανοῦμαι, 894 ΜᾺ 


χάριν, 404, Obs. 
χάρις, Compar.of compounds 
with, 197. 
χάσκω, 824, 9, 
χείρ, 177, 18s—Fem., My 
χείρων, χείριστος,Ἱ 
χείσομαι, 928, 
χέρης, ete., 199, D. 2. 
χέω, 348 — Fut., 265 — Perf., 
a Aor., 269 —2 Aor. ἣν 
316, D. 81. 
χραισμέω, 325, D.m. 
χράομαι, xpaw, Contr., 244, 2 
—Future, 261—with Dat.,; 


438, Obs. 
xpi, 312, ἥν, 490—with 
"Kee. and Inf., 567, Obs. t ὁ 


᾿Ιχρήστης, Genit. PL, 128. 


xpiw, Perf. Mid., 288. 


GREEK INDEX. 


369 


χρόα. 
χρόα, 115 (Ex.). 
χρώννυμι, 319, 12. 
χρώς, 109, 1). 
χωρίζω, with Genit., 419 6. 
χωρίς, 


ψ,84: ; 260. 

-Ψ, sabe in, 172. 

ψαύω, Perf. *Mid., 288S—with 
Genit., 419 ὃ. 

ψάω, Contr., 244, 2. 

ψεύδομαι, With Genit., 419 e, 


w, for o, 276, D.—See Att. 

- ’Declens.—from o, see o— 
from ἡ, See n 

-w, Fem. in, 138—Nom., 172 
__ Ady. in, 204— Proper 
Namesin Acc. Sing. ,163,D. 
—in the Genit., 122, D. Be 
—Conn. Vowel, 238, 1—1 
Pers. Sing. Ind. Act., 239,2. 

ὦγμαι, 327, D.6 

-wdns, Adj. in, 359, 2 Obs. 


ὡς. 
“—— 325, 9—Syll. Augm.,|a 


ὧλλοι, 65, Ὁ. 

ὥμμαι; 827, 8. 

-wv, Nom. of Mase. and Fem., 
172; 345, 3— = 118 ; 
134, τ: 141; 173, 5. 

ὠνάμην, 'etc., 3° 4, > 

ὦναξ, θῦ, . 

ὠνέομαι, Syll. Au 4 23T— 
Lina ., 275, 2—with Genit., 


Pints ται, 286, 1, Obs, 

-wp, Subs. in, 172. 

ὥρασι(ν), 179. 

-ws, Nom. 172— Adj., 184 ---ἰὦ 
Perf. Part.,276; 188—_Fem., 
138—Adv., 201; 203—End- 
ing of Genit. Sing. in, 161 
—with ε- and v- Stems, 157 
—in τευ yh, 161 a. 

ὥς and ὦ ws, 2 


ὥφελον. 


ὡς, Atonon, 97, 3; 98—with 
Com ar., 631 a—with Inf., 
ws etwreiy: ὡς τὸ νῦν εἶναι, 
etc. ,564—“‘as chough,’ "etc., 
with Part., 588—‘ when bi 
vase 556—with Aor. Ind. 
493—*‘ that,” in Dependent 
Declarative Sentences, 525 
—‘‘in order that,” in Sen- 
tences of Purpose, 530 — 
with ἄν, 631 ὃ, Obs. —in 
expressing a wish, 514, 
ὡς, PR Res ὡς 445 ; 448, Aus 


ts) 632—with Part., 588. 

ὥςτε, 94; 5663; 632, 4—with 
Inf., δδ6- joined with py, 
617, "Obs. 

ὠτός, ‘see οὖς, 

wv, Diphth., 26, D. 

ωὑτός, etc., 309, 

ὠφελέω, with Acc., 396. 

ὥφελον, 326, 32—in express- 


ὡς Pow τοῖς ὥς, Diff, 99; 217, D.; 


Q 2 


THE END. 


ing a wish, 515. 


ΓΑ 


Foe 
Ἂς 


UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA—BE aE τι KELEY τς A 
RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 
This book is due on the last date pee. ig below, or on the 


date to whi 
Renewed books rembjetimedie rea | ; ? ᾿ 
4 1 ΔΝ δ᾽ 
ὲ ‘ RES : 
9 ὃ 1954 
οὐ e8 50489 SOSEP '60AR 
12 91954LU 
550019518 
get2 3195518, REC'D LD 
ΟΣ 
1S 
«ΟΣ idles 2 
ier 
DEC 1 8 YeyRECD LD JUN 8 '73-9AM92 


LD 21-100m-1, ἐυμωνονο ὀρ caus 


326195 298) | 
as | 


THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 


ων 
yl 
his 


19 


ΤΩΝ 
Ἐφ id 


yoit (88 BL ῊῚ 
vet 
ξ 


ἘΜΉΝ 
1 


thet 
ue 


His hed 


Hy! me Lata 
Kabah, 


a 


ἌΡΗ 
δ 


3 


ἤν at 
st 


ot . ἘΣ 
pestska  ἢ 


ate , " ἢ 
᾿ τ γ)ὰ ᾿ Ἵ ὧν 
iit ἀπ Phan Fea eS meas 7 was vik fea 
ἀρ μέρ ΜΙΝ ; pd : fe Wine 
sunt δᾶ ᾿ 
γῶν pass Ht Ἀγ Ὁ}} 
ν ᾿ ἀδηνεζχ diet 
ay} dead ΟΝ ee Γ i ᾿ ; κεν 
Ural ait ἐν ἀφ ey! gob ων rt : rene) 
Ἐν ΜΝ 
ἀν δ 
bined 
ΚΡ 


4) 
/ 


᾿ ΠῚ 

ani "ἢ ἐμ ΤῊ TF 

anh OP Nh Meal τ j thet WA aR 1 Ὅν 

ΜΝ boca ak Bick ἘΆΣΩ He mt) pil Cit ne! 
τὸ ἘΠ TE pat mee pe : RUA 


vi 


ἀν 
Ay heQauy αν 


wre 


νὰ ¥ 
ay Hebel’ 
ΦΕΜη εν. 
Ἢ fy 
Hae ne 
beeiee aS ‘ee 
heh i May ra! 7 Mk 
mae? 


any 


I ΜΗ γα bath 

yh ads, 

rogers τ} 
ΩΣ 


ἐφ 
eed ν 
RN petty sy 
obese hides hans 
Roms laut 

Nid αὐ Cael ae 
bs Μῷ, 


apt) 


dy 3 ke Dips ΕΝ δὶ 

; refed τὴ 

4 Bess Τὴν 
ing 


nee ai 
he 


Up ys bi 
HN 
sia 


1% 


hi ef i bi a 

PERS 

ty RGA eek 
iit 


awa 


